Handbook, 1978

THE UNIVERSITY OF MELBOURNE

FACULTY 0F ARTS HANDBOOK, 1978

PUBLISHED BY THE UNIVERSITY ADDENDUM (This paragraph to be read together with page 71.)

STUDENT WORK LOAD Students will note that the Handbook specifies hours for prescribed lectures and classes. In all departments, essays and reading guides impose extra load on student time. Supervision and correction of essays and guidance in reading are the responsibility of staff and occasion many hours of individual consultation between students and staff. Students should be aware that a minimum of 8 hours per week per subject will need to be spent in these required activities, in addition to the formal contact hours specified in the details for each subject.

In exceptional circumstances the Council is empowered to suspend subjects and to vary the syllabus of a subject. Details of any such alteration will be available from the appropriate Faculty or Board of Studies and will be announced on departmental notice-boards.

SCIENCE SUBJECTS — ENROLMENT PROCEDURE Students enrolling for any subjects in Computer Science, Mathematics, Statistics or any other subject listed under the heading 'Science Subjects' In section 'Details of Subjects' should consult the Faculty of Science Handbook for correct subject and unit numbers; and should also consult the Assistant to the Dean of Science. TABLE OF CONTENTS Officers of the Faculty of Arts 6 Directory 7 Senior Teaching Staff 9

General Information 15 Student Information Booklet 1978 15 Dates in 1978 15 Enrolment 15 Location of Lectures and Tutorials 16 Part-time Students 16 Evening Lectures 16 Leave of Absence 16 University General Principles of Selection for First-Year Courses 17 Selection Into Arts 19 Application Procedures for New Students (including Graduates) 19 Transfers from other faculties 19 Students wishing to resume an Arts Course 19 Special Principles of Selection in Faculty of Arts 19 Undergraduate Quota 19 Sub-quotas 20 Subject Quotas 21 Reservations of Places in B.A. Quota 21 Prerequisites 21 Diploma in Criminology 22 Examinations 23 Special Consideration 24 Special Examinations 24 Last Subject of a Degree Course 25 Study Progress 25 Melbourne University Arts Faculty Association 26

Description of Courses Available 27 Half Subjects 28 Classical Social Theory 28, 510 Interdepartmental Programmes 28, 503 Beginners' Courses in Languages 28 Linguistics 29, 175 Criminology 29, 104 Ordinary Degree 29 Honours Degree 30 Examples of Social Science Studies in Bachelor of Arts/Bachelor of Commerce Courses 31 Information for Combined Course Students 33 Combined Course for Degree of Bachelor of Arts and Diploma in Criminology 33 Combined Course for Degrees of Bachelor of Arts and Bachelor of Laws 33 Information for Students Intending to proceed to Bachelor of Social Work Degree 35 Students currently enrolled for Bachelor of Arts/Diploma of Social Studies 35

3 Students who have graduated in another faculty 35 Students who have completed the Diploma of Social Studies 36 Students transferring from other universities, interstate, overseas, or within Victoria 37 Planning a Course 37 Subjects 38 Experimental First Year 49 Special Studies 1A and 1B 50 Graduate Studies 51 Postgraduate Diploma in Criminology 51, 104 Postgraduate Diploma in French Studies 51, 210 Postgraduate Diploma in Geography 51, 225 Postgraduate Diploma in Public Policy 51, 448 Master of Arts Preliminary 51 Master of Arts 51 Master of Arts Examination 52 Doctor of Philosophy 52 Doctor of Letters 53 Postgraduate Supervision 53

Regulations 55 Bachelor of Arts (Reg. 3.5) 55 Ordinary Degree 56 Degree with Honours 57 Master of Arts (Reg. 3.6) 59 Doctor of Letters (Reg. 3.7) 61 Diploma in Journalism (Reg. 3.8—temp. reg.) 62 Diploma in Criminology (Reg. 3.10) 62 Doctor of Philosophy (Reg. 3.60) 63 Postgraduate Diploma in French Studies (Reg. 3.85) 68 Postgraduate Diploma in Geography (Reg. 3.85А) 69 Postgraduate Diploma in Public Policy (Reg. 3.85В ) 69 Details of Subjects 71 Ancient Greek 74 Arabic 381 Behavioural Studies 457 Bengali 309 Chinese 113 Classical Studies 83 Computer Science 93 Criminology 104 Dutch 234 East Asian Studies 130 Economic History 145 Economics 133 English 159 English for Foreign Students (Norwood Language Centre) 73 Fine Arts 180 Foreign Language Reading Courses for Honours Arts Students 72 French 190 French Reading Course (Harwood Language Centre) 72

4 Geography 213 German 229 German Reading Course (Norwood Language Centre) 73 Government and Society 442 Hebrew 378 History 245 History and Philosophy of Science 288 Indian Studies 301 Indonesian and Malayan Studies 312 International Relations 440 Italian 328 Japanese 126 Latin 76 Linguistics 175 Mathematics 340 Middle Eastern Studies 368 Modern Greek 79 Music 395 Philosophy 404 Political Science 432 Political Sociology 441 Politics 433 Psychology 451 Public Administration 441 Regional and Urban ;Economic Studies 141 Rhetoric 163 Russian 466 Russian Literature and Society 468 Science Subjects 492 The Biology of Man 492 Biology 492 Chemistry 493 Geology 495 Physics 497 Social Studies 498 Social Biology 499 Statistics 477 Swedish 237 Syriac 377 Interdisciplinary Studies and Continuing Education 503 Interdisciplinary Studies 503 Eighteenth Century Studies 503 Religious Studies 505 Recent Social Theory 507 Drama 508 Problems of Peace and Conflict 509 Classical Social Theory 510 European Romanticism 515 Continuing Education 517 Combined Honours Courses 519 Table of Contents 519 Courses 521 Financial Assistance 560 Enrolment—Arts Subjects and Codes 568

5 Faculty of Arts

OFFICERS OF THE FACULTY OF ARTS (as at 20 September 1977)

0119ce of the Dean

Dean, MR E. A. HOCK Sub-Dean, MR D. J. O'HEARN Assistant Sub-Dean, DR J. GARDINER Assistants to the Sub-Dean, MISS L. BROUGHTON, MS H. O'SHEA, MISS H. R. REILLY, MISS 'C. ENGLISH Secretary to the Dean, MISS J. TURNER Receptionist, MRS G. LUCAS Senior Secretary, MS M. BATTEN

Faculty SeØtariat

Assistant Registrar (Arts), MR P. G. MORGAN Administrative Officer, MR J. GORNY Administrative Assistant, MR P. FULSTON Office Secretary, MRS D. OLLE

All correspondence should be addressed to the Registrar.

в Faculty of Arts

DIRECTORY

THE HORWOOD LANGUAGE CENTRE John Medley Building 1st floor West Tower CLASSICAL STUDIES John Medley Building 6th floor East Tower COMPUTER SCIENCE Richard Berry Вuiiding CRIMINOLOGY 33 Royal Parade EAST ASIAN STUDIES John Medley Building CHINESE 5th floor West Tower JAPANESE 5th floor West Tower ECONOMICS (FACULTY OF ECONOMICS AND New Commerce Building COMMERCE) ENGLISH John Medley Bui!ding 2nd Floor West Tower FINE ARTS John Medley Building 5th floor East Tower FRENCH Babel 6th floor GEOGRAPHY Redmond Barry Building 9th floor GERMANIC STUDIES Babel GERMAN 4th floor DUTCH 3rd floor SWEDISH 3rd floor HISTORY John Medley Building 3rd floor West Tower HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE Old Arts Building ground floor INDIAN STUDIES Old Arts Building 1st floor INDONESIAN AND MALAYAN STUDIES John Medley Building 6th floor West Tower ITALIAN Babel 2nd floor Richard Berry Building MATHEMATICS ground floor MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES Old Arts Building 1st floor MUSIC (FACULTY OF MUSIC) Royal Parade Entrance PHILOSOPHY Old Arts Building ground floor POLITICAL SCIENCE John Medley Building 4th floor West Tower PSYCHOLOGY Redmond Barry Building 12th floor and Old Commerce Building RUSSIAN Babel ground floor STATISTICS Richard Berry Building ground floor ARTS FACULTY OFFICE John Medley Building 1st floor East Tower LAW FACULTY OFFICE Law Quadrangle SCIENCE FACULTY OFFICE Old Geology Building 7 Faculty of Arts

SOCIAL STUDIES OFFICE 23 Royal Parade Parkville CONTINUING EDUCATION Appointments Board Building ground floor STUDENT SERVICES LIAISON OFFICER Old Commerce Building 2nd floor STUDENT COUNSELLING 278 Faraday Street Carlton STUDENT FINANCIAL AID OFFICER 272 Faraday Street Carlton STUDENT HEALTH 249 Grattan Street Carlton STUDENT HOUSING 786 Swanston Street Carlton APPOINTMENTS BOARD Appointments Board Building 3rd floor CONTACT OFFICE Union STUDENTS REPRESENTATIVE COUNCIL Union SPORTS UNION Union

8 Faculty of Arts

SENIOR TEACHING STAFF (as at 10 November 1977) THE HORWOOD LANGUAGE CENTRE Director and Reader, Terence John Quinn, Ph.D. (Ohio State), M.A. (Monash), B.A. Senior Lecturers, Victor Austin, B.A., L: ès-L. (Paris) Werner Haarburger, B.A., B.Ed. Lecturer, Peter Kelly, B.A., Dip.Ed. Senior Technical Officer, L. Burr

CLASSICAL STUDIES Chairman of Department and Professor, Graeme Wilber Clarke, B.A. (Oxon.), M.A. (N.Z. & lelb.), Litt.D., F.A.H.A. Professor, George. Henry Gellie, M.A., B.Ed. F.A.H.A.t Readers, Kenneth, John McKay, D.Litt. (Utrecht), M.A. Albert Dennis Pryor, M.A. (Cantab.) Senior Lecturers, Peter James Connor, M.A. (Cantab.), B.A. John Robert Charles Martyrs, M.A. (Cantab. & lelb.) Roger David Scott, M.A. (Cantab.), B.A. Lecturer, Kenneth Robin Jackson, M.A. (Princeton), B.A. (Oxon.) Lecturers in Modern Greek, Efstathios Gauntlett, B.A. (Oxon.) John Bernard Burke, M.A. Tutor, Jeffrey Neville Keddie, B.A.

CRIMINOLOGY Chairman of Department and Reader, Stanley William Johnston, B.A., LL.B., M.A.C.E., Barrister-at-Law. Senior Lecturer, Kerry Leon Milte, LL.B., Dip.Crim., Barrister-at-Law. Lecturers, Dennis Owen Challinger, В.Sc. (Monash), М .A. Lynette Ethel Foreman, LL.B., Dip.Crim. •Deidre Ngaio Greig, B.A., Dip.Ed., Dip.Soc.Stud. Lecturer, Stanley Austin Lovegrove, M.A., Ph.D., М.A.Ps.S. Tutor, Maxwell Charles Hart, B.A., Dip.Crim.

EAST ASIAN STUDIES Chairman of Department and Professor of Oriental Studies, Harry Felix Simon, B.A. (Lend.) M.A. Senior Lecturers in Chinese, Tsai-Hsien Chang, B.A. (Fu Jen & Coi.), M.A. (Mich. & lelb.) Robert Cheng-I-King, B.A. (Peking) Senior Lecturer in Japanese, William Braithwaite Eggington, B.A. (Lind. & Melb.) Lecturer in Chinese, Christine McEachran Liao, M.A. Lecturer in Japanese, Leslie Russell Oates, M.A. Senior Tutor in East Asian Studies, Joan Alison Anderson, B.A. Tutor in Japanese, Chizu Patricia Sherriff

• Part-time t Personal Chair In the Department of Classical Studies. 9 Faculty of Arts

ENGLISH Chairman of Department and Senior Lecturer, Timothy John Kelly, M.A. (Cantab.) Professor of English Language and Literature, George Harrison Russell, M.A. (N.Z.), Ph.D. (Cantab.) Robert Wallace Professor, Howard Felperin, BA. (Columbia), M.A., Ph.D. (Harvard) Professor, Vincent Thomas Buckley, MA.! Readers, Thomas Pye Dobson, M.A. (Cantab.) B.A. Hume Dow, A.B. (Harv.), M.A. Thomas Brian Tomlinson, B.A. (Cantab. & W. Aust.), LL.B. (W. Aust.) Christopher Wallace-Crabbe, M.A. Senior Lecturers, Robin Marshall Grove, M.A. Evan Lloyd Jones, A.M. (Stan.), M.A. Mary Teresa Tomlinson, B.A. (Cantab. & Мelb.) Lecturers, Terence Collits, B.A. (N'cle [N.S.W.] & Syd.), M.A. (Syd.), Dip.Ed. (Syd.) James Mark Quentin Davies, M.A. (Oxon.), Ph.D. (Iowa) Richard Douglas Jordan, M.A., Ph.D. (Michigan) Peter Steele, M.A., Ph.D. Professor Emeritus, •Ian Ramsay Maxwell, Chevalier of the Order of the Icelandic Falcon, B. Litt (Oxon), B.A. LL.B.

Linguistics Section Reader, Richard Janusz Zatorski, M.A. Lecturer, Geoffrey McLaren Millar, B.A. (Tas.)

FINE ARTS Chairman of Department and Senior Lecturer, Margaret Plant, M.A. Professor, Joseph Terence Antony Burke, C.B.E., M.A. (Lind., Yale Мelb.), Hon.D.Litt. (Monash), F.A.H.A. Senior Lecturers, Laurence John Course, B.A. Margaret Manion, Ph.D. (Bryn Mawr), M.A., B.Ed. Lecturers, Ann Galbally, Ph.D. Basil Gilbert, M.A., B.Ed. (La T.) Senior Tutor, Biruta Ruth Zubans, B.A. Tutor, David Leigh Astbury, B.A.

FRENCH Chairman of Department and Senior Lecturer, Allan Keith Holland, B.A. (Syd.), Dip d'Etudes (Bordeaux), D.U.P. Professor, Colin Duckworth, M.A. (Birm.), D.Phil. (Cantab.) Senior Lecturers, Thomas Raymond Casey, M.A., Dip.Ed. Patricia Ann Clancy, M.A., Ph.D. Micheline Giroux, L.-ès-L., Dip. d'Et.Sup., C.A.P.E.S. Stanley John Scott, M.A., Ph.D. Colin Bernard Thornton-Smith, M.A., B.Ed., Ph.D. Graeme Douglas Watson, B.A. (Adel.), D.U.P. Lecturers, Sophie Bibrowska, Dip. de l'Ecole des Langues Orientales, D. de 3e cycle (Paris), M.A. (Monash) (temporary)

t Personal Chair In the Department of English. 10 Faculty of Arts

Diana Katrine Keuneman, D.U.P., LL.B., M.A., Barrister and Solicitor Leo Las Gourgues, D.U.P., Dip. d'Et.Théâtrales (Paris), М.A. Winifred Ann Trindade, Dip.Theol. (Oxon.), M.A. (Oxon. & Monash) Principal Tutor, Margaret Denat, B.A. (Adel.), M.A. (Oxon.), B.Ed. (Old.) Senior Tutor, Sylvia Ann Gutierrez, М .-ès-L. (Aix-en-Provence), B.A., Dip.Ed.

GEOGRAPHY Chairman of Department and Professor, Harold C. Brookfield, B.A., Ph.D. (Lind.) Readers, Eric Charles Frederick Bird, М.Sc. (bond.), Ph.D. (A.N.U.), M.Sc. Thomas Melville Perry, B.A., Dip.Ed. (Syd.), Ph.D. (A.N.U.), М.А. John Robert Victor Prescott, В.Sc., M.A., Dip.Ed. (Dunelm), Ph.D. (Lind.), М.А. Arthur Alan Wilcock, В.Sc., B.Ed. Senior Lecturer, Geoffrey James Missen, B.A., Dip.Ed. (Syd.), M.S. (Wis.) Lecturers, John Sirles Massey, M.A. (N.Y.), Ph.D. David Alastair Wadley, B.A. (Syd.), Ph.D. (A.N.U.) Senior Tutor, Neville John Rosengren, B.Com., T.S.T.C. Tutors, Michael John Ballock, B.A. Michele Mary Barson, B.A.

GERMANIC STUDIES Chairman of Department and Reader in German, Hector MacLean, Ph.D., Dip.Ed. Professor, Gerhard Schulz, Dr.Phil. (Leip.), F.A.H.A. Senior Lecturer in German, Marion Louise Adams, A.M. (Harv.), Ph.D. Senior Lecturer in Swedish and Icelandic, John Stanley Martin, B.Ed., M.A., Ph.D. Lecturers in German, Christian Grawe, Dr.Phil. (Berlin) Heinrich Alfred Hesse, Staatsexamen (Bonn), Dip.Ed. (Cologne) Hans Joachim Pott, М.A. Eva Ruff, MA. Lecturer in Dutch and Germanic Philology, Bruce Christopher Donaldson, B.A. (W.A.), Litt Drs (Utrecht) Lecturer in Dutch, Christopher Hendrik Gaucheron Zwalf, B.A. (Lend.), M.A. (Cantab.) Senior Tutor in German, Alma Johnson, В.A. Tutor in Swedish, Lennart Pallstedt, Fil.mag. (Lund.)

HISTORY Chairman of Department and Senior Lecturer, Alison Mary Houston Pat- rick, B.A., Ph.D. Max Crawford Professor, Gregory Moore Dining, Ph.D. (Haro.), M.A. Ernest Scott Professor, Geoffrey Norman Blalney, M.A. Readers, Weston Arthur Bate, M.A. William Culican, М.A. (Edin.) Lawrence Roy Gardiner, B.A. (Brist.), M.A. John Bradley Hirst, B.A., Ph.D. (Adel.) Donald Edward Kennedy, Ph.D. (Cantab.), M.A.

11 Faculty of Arts

Sow Theng Leong, B.A. (Brandeis), M.A., Ph.D. (Harv.) Noel David McLachlan, Ph.D. (Lend.), M.A. (on leave) Senior Lecturers, Graeme Davison, B.A. (Oxon. & Melb.), Ph.D. (A.N.U.), Dip.Ed. Donald Farquhar Mackay, D.Phil. (Oxon.), M.A. Donna Merwick, B.A. (Mundelein Coll.), M.A. (De Paul), Ph.D. (Wis.) Joy Parnaby, M.A., Ph.D. Ronald Thomas Ridley, M.A. (Syd.) Ian Gordon Robertson, BPhil. (Oxon.), M.A. Lloyd Robson, M.A. (Tas.), Ph.D. (A.N.U.) Lecturers, John Harvey Foster, Ph.D. (Wales), M.A. Allan John Johnston, M.A. (Duke), B.A., Dip.Ed. David Philips, B.A. (Rand. & Oxon.), D.Phil. (Oxon.) Charles Orvis Sowerwine, M.A., Ph.D. (Wis.) Charles Francis Zika, M.A. Principal Tutor, Jacqueline Templeton, M.A. Senior Tutor, Susie Ehrmann, B.A., Dip.Ed. University of Melbourne Research Fellow, Robert Develin, M.A. (Cantab. & Mich.), Ph.D. (Mich.) Associates, Barbara Falk, M.A., Dip.Ed. (Oxon.) Danny Spooner

HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE Chairman of Department and Professor, Roderick Weir Home, Ph.D. (Indiana), В.Sc. Readers, Frederick John Clendinnen, B.A., Ph.D. Diana Joan Dyason, М .Sc. Senior Lecturer, John Clifton Pottage, B.A., Ph.D. Lecturers, Lesley James Jones, В.Sc., Dip.Mech.&EIec.Eng. (Q'Id.), B.A.t Henry Paul Krips, В.Sc., Ph.D. (Adel.) Homer Eugene Le Grand, A.B. (Nth. Carolina), Ph.D. (Wis.) Monica Mackintosh MacCallum, B.A.

INDIAN STUDIES Chairman of Department and Reader, Sibnarayan Ray, М.А. (Calc. & lelb.), F.I.H.S. (Calc.) Senior Lecturer, Atindra Mojumder, M.A., В.T. (Cale.) Lecturer, John Martin Dunham, B.A., Dip.Ed. (Syd.) Tutor, Teluratte Rahula, Ph.D. (Delhi), M.A. (Benaras)

INDONESIAN AND MALAYAN STUDIES Chairman of Department and Senior Lecturer, Muhammed Slamet, dос- torandus rer. soc. (Ley.) Senior Lecturer, Jan Pieter Sarumpaet, Bak. Sasim (Gadjah lada), M.A. (Exe.) Lecturer, Charles Antony Coppel, Ph.D. (Monash), LL.B. ITALIAN Chairman of Department and Professor, Colin Angus McCormick, Cava- liere dell'Ordine al Merito della Repubblica Italiana, В.А. (Cantab.) Senior Lecturer, Cordelia Gundolf, Dott.Lett. (Rome) Lecturer, Myra Callo', B.A. Principal Tutor, Anna Maria Sabbione, MA.

# Full-time officer with pert-time duties In the department. 12 Faculty of Arts

MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES Chairman of Department and Senior Lecturer, Arthur Dudley Hallam, M.A. (Leeds), B.A. Professor, John Bowman, M.A., B.D. (Glas.). D.Phil. (Oxon.), M.A. F.A.H.A. Reader, Aimo Edward Murtonen, Ph.D., Th.D. (Helsinki) Abdul Khaliq Kazl, B.A., Ph.D. (Land.), Maulvi.Fazil. (Pani.). Ulamiya (AI-Azhar Cairo) Nasseh Mirza, B.A. (Beirut & Lind.), Ph.D. (Dunelm) John Arthur Thompson, B.A., B.Ed., M.Sc. (l'id.), Ph.D. (Cantab), M.A. Lecturer, James Garfield Fraser, M.A., Ph.D.

PHILOSOPHY Chairman of Department and Reader, Joseph Eric DArcy, D.Phil. (Oxon.), Ph.D. (Greg.), M.A. Boyce Gibson Professor, Leonard Goddard, BPhil. (Oxon.), M.A. (St. And.) Readers, Graeme Donald Marshall, M.A. (N.Z.), Ph.D. Jen Tadeusz Jerzy Srzednicki, M.A., Ph.D. Senior Lecturers, Cecil Anthony John Coady, BA. (Syd.), B.Phil. (Oxon.), M.A. (Cantab. & Melb.) Donald Lawrence Gunner, MLitt. (Cantab.), M.A. Mary Agnes McCloskey, M.A., Ph.D. Lecturers, Brenda Judge, B.A. (A.N.U.) Bruce Langtry, B.A., Ph.D. (Syd.) Leonard John O'Neill, Ph.D. (Cantab.), M.A. William Kevin Presa, M.A. Vernon Irving Rice, M.A., Ph.D. Brian Francis Scarlett, Ph.D. (Tor.), M.A., Dip.Ed. Barry Marshall Taylor, Ph.D. (Oxon.), M.A. Senior Tutors, Lynda Claire Burns, B.Phil. (Oxon.), B.A. Ann Elizabeth Jackson, M.A. Tutor, Denis John Robinson, B.Phil. (Oxon.), B.A.

POLITICAL SCIENCE Chairman of Department and Professor, John Marcus Power, Ph.D. (Hare.), B.A. Professor, Alan Fraser Davies, M.A. Readers, Kenneth Gregory Armstrong, M.A. (Oxon.), B.A. Lloyd Gordon Churchward, M.A., Dip.Ed. Edwin Arthur Huck, M.A. Leon George Peres, B.Eс. (Syd.), M.P.A. (Hare.) Senior Lecturers, Phillip George Cavell Darby, LL.B., M.A., D.Phil. (Oxon.) Marjorie Jean Holmes, B.Eс. (Syd.), M.A., Dip.Ed. Alan Hugo Hughes, Ph.D. (A.N.U.), B.A. David Alistair Kemp, Ph.D., M.Phil. (Yale), B.A., LL.B. Frank Graham Little, Ph.D. (A.N.U.), B.Com., BEd. Donald Francis Miller, M.A. Lecturers, Bruce Wyndham Headey, B.A. (Oxon.), Ph.D. (Strathclyde) Jonathan King, М .Sc.Econ. (L.S.E.), B.A., Dip.Journ. David Francis Burke Tucker, B.A. (Rhodes), B.PhiI. (Oxon.) Research Asst., Elsie Holmstrom, PhiI.C. (Sweden) Senior Associate, Sir William Kllpatrick, K.B.E., F.A.I.M.

13 Faculty of Arts

PSYCHOLOGY

Chairman of Department and Professor, Alexander James Wearing, M.A (Adel.), Ph.D. (III.), М .B.Ps.S., M.A.Ps.S. Professors, Samuel Battle Hammond, B.A. (W.A.), Ph.D., F.A.Ps.S.t Gordon Veitch Stanley, B.A., Ph.D. (W.A.), A.В.Ps.S., F.A.Ps.S. Readers, Frank Knopfelmacher, B.A. (Brist.), Ph.D. (Land.) Roger Julyan Wales, В .Sc. (Land.), Ph.D. (Reading), M.Ling.Assoc. Brit. Senior Lecturers, Warren Keith Bartlett, B.A., В .Sc., B.D., Ph.D., М .A.Ps.S., F.S.S. Loren Ross Borland, B.S., D.D.S. (Iowa), Ph.D. (Calif.), М .A.Ps.S. Godfrey Gardner, B.A., Ph.D. (Lind.), M.A., М .A.Ps.S. Norma Grieve, M.A., Ph.D., Dip.Ed., M.A.Ps.S. Tamara Kotler, M.A., Ph.D., М .A.Ps.S. Charles William Langley, Ph.D. (Han'.), B.A., A.В .Ps.S., M.A.Ps.S. Keith Francis Taylor, B.A. (Manc.), M.A. (Land.), Dip.Soc.Stud. (Leic.), Ph.D., A.В.Ps.S., M.A.Ps.S. Kevin William Walsh, BA., M.B., B.S., M.Sc., A.В .Ps.S. Lecturers, Patricia Lesley Brotherton, B.A., Dip.Soc.Sгuд ., Ph.D., M.Å.Ps.S. Terrence Michael Caelli, B.A., Ph.D. (Newcastle) Ian Matthew Campbell, M.A. (Cant.), M.N.Z.Ps.S., М .A.Ps.S. Antoinette Gabrielle Cross, B.A. Gordon Richard Gates, B.A. (McMaster), M.Sc., Ph.D. (Monash), M.A.Ps.S. Virginia Margaret Holmes, B.A. (Syd.), Ph.D., M.A.Ps.S. Nancy Ellen McMurray, M.S., Ph.D. (Wis.) Jeffery Joseph Summers, M.Sc., M.A., Ph.D. (Oregon) Senior Tutors, Maria Christina Lawson, В .A. Christine Margaret Martin, B.A., Dip.Ed., М.A.Ps.S. Theodorus Gerardus Werner Nienhuys, В .Sc. (Adel.), M.A.Ps.S. Robin Anne Penman, B.Com. (N.S.W.), M.A.Ps.S. Senior Associate in Medical Psychology, Victor Raymond Leonard, Ph.D. (Qu.), B.A., Dip.Psych., M.A.Ps.S. RUSSIAN Chairman of Department and Senior Lecturer, Paul Vincent Cubberley. M.A. (Glas.) Professor, Ronald Denis Sussex, MA (Cant.), Ph.D. (Land.) Senior Lecturer, Igor Meshakov-Korjakin, М .А. Lecturers, Judith Mary Armstrong, MA., Ph.D. •Rae Doran Slonek, B.A. Senior Tutor, Natalia Grishin, Grad.Ped.lnst. (Moscow)

t Pomona! Chair In the Department of Psychology.

14 GENERAL INFORMATION STUDENT INFORMATION BOOKLET 1978 Students are reminded that information on matters of general concern, e.g., Fees, Enrolment, Financial Assistance, Colleges and Halls of Resl- dence, University facilities, etc., is to be found in the Student Informa- tion Booklet, 1978.

DATES IN 1978 Last day of enrolment for all students previously enrolled in Arts, 18 January, 1978. Last day of application for post-graduate studies (excluding post-graduate diplomas)-20 January, 1978. Last day of application for post-graduate diplomas-31 January, 1978. Last day of enrolment for post-graduate students-14 February, 1978. Last day of application to transfer from other Faculties within University of Melbourne-9 December, 1977. Last day for application from former students to resume studies-12 December, 1977. Enrolment periods for new students-14 December to 20 December 1977, and 5 January to 18 January, 1978. Orientation Week commences-27 February, 1978. Term dates— Lecture Terms: 1st—From 6 March to 13 May (10 weeks) 2nd—From 6 June to 12 August (10 weeks) 3rd—From 4 September to 21 October (7 weeks) Annual Examinations— Annual Examinations begin 30 October. Last day of Entry for Final Examinations-1 August. Final Dates for application to have degree conferred-13 January, 16 June, 3 November.

ENROLMENT New Students: Once selected, each student will be required to plan his or her course with a member of the Sub-Dean's staff. Students should note that any subsequent change in their enrolment must be approved by the Sub-Dean. Previously enrolled Students: All re-enrolling Arts students must have their course approved by and obtain an "authority to enrol" from the Sub-Dean of the Faculty of Arts before they can lodge their enrolment at Students' Records. Change of Enrolment: Changes in subject enrolment may be made freely (except where quota subjects are concerned) up to the end of

15 Faculty of Arts

the fourth week of first term. All subject changes must first be approved by the Sub-Dean. Cancellation of Enrolment: Students may cancel their enrolment in individual subjects up to three weeks before the annual examination in the subject concerned without being recorded aß "absent" or "failed'. Such cancellations must be made on the prescribed form (available from Students' Records and the Faculty Office) and must be approved by the Sub-Dean.

LOCATION OF LECTURES AND TUTORIALS Location of lectures and directions to various rooms will be found on a board near the entrance of the Old Arts Building, the New Arts Building and the John Medley Building in the first week of term and on the relevant departmental notice-boards. Information about times and location of tutorials is available on the relevant departmental notice-boards.

PART-TIME STUDENTS The course for the ordinary degree may be taken by part-time study. However students should note the following provisions: (i) Except in special circumstances part-time students may not enrol in more than two subjects In any year. Students undertaking non- university courses concurrently (e.g. Diploma of Higher Secondary Education) may be limited to one subject. (ii) Since their studies are likely to extend over a number of years, part-time students should take particular care to note any changes in regulations and to consult the Sub-Dean before changing their courses. The course for the honours degree 1s not normally available to part-time students. In some schools the first two years, but not the whole course, may be taken part-time by students provided they are able to attend the honours classes. Part-time students should also read the section on study progress.

EVENING LECTURES Evening lectures are available in a number of subjects. For individual subjects see time-table.

LEAVE OF ABSENCE All students seeking leave of absence must request permission in writing from the Sub-Dean of the Arts Faculty stating the period of the proposed absence and briefly giving reasons. The maximum period of leave of absence allowed by the Faculty in the first instance is two years. In special circumstances this can be extended for a further two years. A candidate interrupting a course without having sought leave of absence, may be suspended from the course by the Professorial Board on the recommendation of the Faculty. All students who have received official leave of absence will be requested

16 General Information

to inform the Sub-Dean of their intentions with regard to their course by writing to him before 12 December of the year prior to the expiration of their leave. All students resuming their course after leave of absence have to obtain approval for their course from the Sub-Dean in January of the year in which studies are recommenced before proceeding to enrol at Students' Records.

SELECTION UNIVERSITY GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF SELECTION FOR FIRST-YEAR COURSES Selection Committee The selection committee for each course shall consist of the Dean of the Faculty or the Chairman of the Board of Studies concerned and such other members as may be approved by the Professorial Board on the reсот- mendation of that Faculty or Board of Studies. If any member of a selection committee Is unable to act, the Chairman of the Professorial Board may approve the appointment of a substitute, on the recommendation of the Dean of the Faculty or the Chairman of the Board of Studies concerned. Each selection committee shall have power to reach decisions on a majority vote and shall report its decisions to the Professorial Board as soon as possible. Such report shall include a list of those applicants who were selected and enrolled. Applications Applicants for selection in a quota must submit applications on the prescribed form by the date set down in the list of Principal Dates (the Friday nearest 1 November). No application for selection lodged after the due date shall be considered unless the selection committee concerned is satisfied that special circumstances exist justifying the late application. Persons of aboriginal extraction seeking admission to the University will, if they so wish, be considered by the Professorial Board under Regulation 1.1.2. Persons wishing to be considered under this regulation should apply to the Registrar. Selection 1. Each selection committee shall be responsible for selecting, up to the number fixed by Council, those applicants who are considered most likely to pursue successfully the course concerned. 2. (a) Selection shall be based primarily on academic merit as judged by reference to results in the Victorian Higher School Certificate Examination. Provided that the qualifications of the applicants who have not attempted the Victorian HSC Examination shall be equated as far as possible with the HSC Examination. (b) Selection committees may also take into account: (i) The results of any subsequent examinations attempted. (ii) The age of applicants when attempting the examination under consideration. (iii) Any illness, war or military service, or other serious cause, as a result of which the studies or performance of an applicant have, in the opinion of the committee, been hampered.

17 Faculty of Arts

(iv) Physical handicaps or defects. (v) The number of years spent preparing for the Victorian Higher School Certificate Examination. This is to be considered only where the original scoring puts a candidate who did not sit in his first year of preparation for the HSC in a marginal position in the order-of-merit list. (vi) information revealed by such interviews as the selection committee may conduct. (vii) Any other factors approved by the Professorial Board and the Council on the recommendation of the Faculty or Board of Studies concerned. (c) Headmasters reports shall not be taken into consideration, except in cases of illness or where an applicant has applied for a place in the succeeding year's quota. (d) No weight shall be given to the order of an applicant's course preferences, i.e., a first preference of one applicant is not to rate above a lower preference of another candidate with a higher selection score. З. In assessing academic merit as judged by reference to results in the Victorian Higher School Certificate Examination, the formula adopted by the Victorian Universities Admissions Committee shall be used. Provided that: (i) Prerequisites approved by the Professorial Board and the Council may be included in the 'best four subjects'. (ii) Where prerequisite subjects must be iпсlидед in the basic quota score, an applicant who has had more than one sitting at the Higher School Certificate Examination shall be credited with the best of his prerequisites from any sitting, with the proviso that, in order to be credited with the marks of a prerequisite taken at any sitting, a candidate must have passed in three subjects other than English at that sitting. (iii) Special debits and bonuses may be applied if stated in special principles of selection recommended by a Faculty or Board of Studies and approved by the Professorial Board and the Council. (iv) A selection committee shall have the right to consider an applicant's record as a whole in deciding between candidates near the borderline. 4. Under-age applicants in the selectiоп range must be interviewed by or on behalf of the selection committee concerned before being selected. 5. In the absence of special reasons, applicants for admission to a quota who have not yet attempted a university course shall be preferred to graduates. 6. The percentage of overseas applicants admitted to any course should not normally exceed by more than 10 per cent the annual average percentage of such students admitted to that course over the past three years. No 'overseas' applicant shall be selected in preference to an Austra- lian applicant of equal or superior merit. ('Overseas' means a student whose home is overseas and who either has presented for the Victorian Higher School Certificate Examination or has been admitted ad eundem statum. ) 7. If an applicant is not selected for the course of his first choice, his application must be considered for the course of his second end, if feces-

18 General Information

sari, subsequent choice and he must be selected in preference to any other applicant of inferior academic merit. 8. An order of merit list shall be prepared according to the above principles, and places up to the number fixed by the Council shall be filled in order from this list. Reservation of places In quotas Places in the succeeding year's quota may be reserved for such applicants and in such numbers as may be decided by the Faculty or Board of Studies in accordance with its principles of selection, on request for applicants in the top 80 per cent of those whose marks are above the cut-off point for admission to the quota concerned and, if there are special reasons, for applicants in the lower 20 per cent. Students accepted for fixed courses Once a student is accepted for a fixed course (that is, one for which there are no alternative subjects) and if he Is not later prevented by failure from continuing in the course, the University must provide facilities for the student to complete the course as planned, should he so request.

SELECTION INTO ARTS The Faculty receives more applications for places than it can accept. There is therefore selection Into a quota.

APPLICATION PROCEDURES FOR NEW STUDENTS (INCLUDING GRADUATES) All applications must be made on the requisite application form available from the Victorian Universities Admissions Committee, 11 Queens Road, Melbourne, 3004, by 31st October of the year preceding that In which they wish to commence an Arts course.

TRANSFERS FROM OTHER FACULTIES Applicants within the University of Melbourne must apply on the application form available from the Faculty Office by 9 December of the year preceding that in which they wish to commence an Arts course.

STUDENTS WISHING TO RESUME AN ARTS COURSE Students wishing to resume an Arts course after interrupting their studies without formal leave of absence from the course or for a period of time exceeding four (4) years must apply on the "resume course" form available from the Faculty Office, by 12 December, 1977.

SPECIAL PRINCIPLES OF SELECTION IN THE FACULTY OF ARTS For admission to Arts, applicants must, in addition to satisfying university requirements, also have satisfied the special course requirements for Arts: Grade "D" standard or above in either a language other than English or a branch of Mathematics at the Victorian Higher School Certificate examination or equivalent, See "Prerequisites" on pp. 21,22.

THE UNDERGRADUATE QUOTA 1. Scores arrived at by the Victorian Universities Admissions Commit- tee formula will be debited for failure in the prerequisite by the number of marks by which the subject is failed. 19 Faculty of Arts

Applicants who have done exceptionally well at the Higher School Certificate Examination (e.g. obtained four "A" passes) but who have not satisfied either of the prerequisites shall be considered for selection. 2 No specific debits will be applied to applicants whose selection scores depend on native language or subjects such as Music Practical, except that marks obtained in the subject "Home Eco- nomics: Human Development and Society" will be used only as bonus marks over and above the best four subject score. З. Applicants who have taken a Part 1 or Part 1A language or a first-year Mathematics subject at e university to satisfy the prerequisite may not repeat the same subject for credit towards an Arts degree. 4. Interstate or overseas applicants will be considered in the light of their academic record. In some cases they may be required to take preliminary studies, sit for examinations and perform at a standard prescribed by the Faculty. Intending applicants should consult the Office of the Sub-Dean. 5. Persons who qualified to matriculate under the old regulations, and who lack adequate additional qualifications may also be required to take extra preliminary studies as described in 4. 6. Persons who qualified to matriculate more than ten years ago may not be admitted to the quota unless their results were outstanding; or unless they have recently completed some course of tertiary education; or unless they have completed preliminary studies as described in 4. 7. Persons who have previously enrolled in Arts but who have formally discontinued the course or who have interrupted without formal leave of absence for at least two years or who have passed no subjects for the last five or more years shall be required to re-apply for selection. The Arts Students' Progress Committee shall recommend whether all or some of these persons shall be subject to selection. 8. Persons transferring from other Victorian Universities will not normally be selected unless their academic record is of sufficient merit, and the reasons for changing are considered satisfactory by the Selection Committee. 9. Undergraduate applicants wishing to transfer from courses in other Faculties in this University will be considered on the basis of their academic record and their reasons for wishing to transfer. 10. Faculty may give special consideration to applicants whose studies have been handicapped by adverse social, educational or physical circumstances.

THE SUB-QUOTAS There are two Sub-quotas: 1. The Graduate Sub-quota For graduates of other faculties from this University and other approved institutions and diplomates in Journalism and Social Studies who wish to pursue an undergraduate Arts course.

20 General Information

The Selection Committee shall take into account: (i) Results obtained in previous examinations. Preference will normally be given to those who have completed their previous courses in minimum time and/or obtained honours results in some subjects. Account will also be taken of improvement during the course and of results in particular subjects. (ii) The content of the Arts course which the applicant proposes to take. Preference will normally be given to those who propose to take an honours course or to study in depth in a pass course. Preference may also be given to those who intend to proceed as full-time students. Applicants who wish mainly to take subjects taught by other faculties will not normally be selected in preference to those who wish mainly to take subjects taught by Arts departments. (iii) An applicant's reasons for desiring to take an Arts degree course.

2. The Special Sub-quota The Faculty may select a certain number of applicants whose quota scores are marginally below the level necessary to gain entry into the ordinary undergraduate quota provided that: (i) the applicants concerned show evidence of special capacity and interest in certain specified subjects; and (ii) the applicants concerned agree to include in their course a major in that subject.

SUBJECT QUOTAS It is likely that in 1978 special quotas will be imposed in a number of subjects. Details of these will be available prior to the commencement of the academic year.

RESERVATIONS OF PLACES IN B.A. QUOTA Places in the succeeding year's quota may be reserved. Students wishing to apply must do so on the prescribed form available at the Faculty Office. Only students proceeding direct from school will normally be granted a reserved place. it is not possible to reserve places in the graduate sub-quota.

PREREQUISITES In addition to satisfying university entrance requirements, candidates must also have satisfied the special course requirements. For the Arts course the prerequisite is a pass at Grade "D" or higher level either in a language other than English or a branch of Mathematics at the Higher School Certificate examination, or its equivalent. All students at school are strongly advised to include a language and/or branch of Mathematics in their studies, even if at that stage they have no intention of entering the Arts course at this University. In the great majority of cases the Faculty has no alternative to ruling ineligible those who have not completed the prerequisite. The following groups are automatically exempt from the prerequisite: (i) Graduates of another Faculty and holders of the Diploma of Social Studies and the Diploma of Physical Education. 21 Faculty of Arts

(ii) Candidates who attempt the Higher School Certificate examination under the special provision for adults (over the age of 25 years). (iii) Candidates who fail matriculation in the prerequisite (language or mathematics) but obtain marks in the compensatory range. Eligi- bility in such cases is determined by the automatic application of a mathematical formula when applications for selection are being considered. (iv) A student who has successfully completed at least one year of a course in another Faculty, or at another University, or has completed some other post-secondary qualification. (v) Applicants who have performed exceptionally well at the Higher School Certificate, even though they have not attempted either of the prerequisites. Excellence Is defined each year by the Selec- tion Committee. An average of Grade "A" is normally required. No additional application is necessary. Exemptions from the prerequisite will also be considered by Faculty in the following cases on application. (Such application should be made on the form available from the Arts Faculty Office.) (i) A candidate who satisfies the Faculty that English is not his native language and that he has passed another language at an examination of reasonable standard or has received his secondary schooling in another language may be permitted to substitute English for a Language other than English at matriculation. (ii) Applicants who can show some other similar evidence which the Selection Committee considers is clear evidence of change of intention. (iii) Where the conditions of the applicant's schooling were such that study of the prerequisites would have been virtually impossible or would have constituted a case of serious hardship. (iv) Where the greater part of the applicant's schooling was in another country; Faculty will require evidence of the length of time such students have lived in Australia, their previous schooling, their present schooling, etc. Students in doubt about eligibility for admission to the Faculty are advised to consult the Sub-Dean.

DIPLOMA IN CRIMINOLOGY Special Course Requirements In addition to satisfying the university entrance requirements, candidates must also have passed the prerequiste subjects (if any) prescribed for their course. Apart from the requirement that candidates ordinarily must have qualified for a degree before the Dip.Crim. will be awarded, no formal prerequisites are described for the Dip.Crim. Candidates are reminded that, if they wish to make the Bachelor of Arts their preliminary degree, they must have passed in a language other than English or in а mathematics subject at the Higher School Certificate examination. In special cases candidates may be given special treatment as regards prerequisites: inquiries in such cases should be made of the Sub-Dean of the Faculty of Arts. 22 General Information

Special Principles of Selection for Criminology Diploma Course 1. Eligibility The selection priority for admission to the diploma course shall be: (i) graduates seeking admission under Regulation 3.10.1 (a) and students seeking admission under Regulation 3.10.10 ; (ii) persons of adequate training and ability seeking admission under Regulation 3.10.1(с) and undergraduates seeking permission to combine courses under Regulation 3.10.1(d). 2. Selection shall be based: (i) primarily on academic merit as judged by reference to the qualifications held and to academic performance within the course of study completed or as part of the course being undertaken; (ii) on the results of any examinations attempted subsequent to the course of study qualifying the applicant for admission; (iii) on the age of applicants when attempting the examinations under consideration; (iv) on an applicant's reasons for wishing to take the Criminology diploma course and in particular his past or present work in the field of law enforcement; and (v) on such other information as the Committee may consider relevant.

EXAMINATIONS Annual Examinations: See the Student Information Booklet 1978. The attention of all students is drawn to University Regulation 4.4: Con- duct of Examinations, in the University Calendar. Written Work: Written work required as an integral part of a course as set out in the details of subjects or published on departmental noticeboards must be completed by the dates specified, since the time available for such work is an essential component of the requirements itself. Information on the weighting given to examinations, written work, etc., in the assessment for each subject will be posted on departmental notice-boards at the beginning of the academic year. Students who, without the formal permission of the chairman of the department, fail to complete such written work by the specified dates, may have their written work refused by the department, or subjected to such deductions as have been published on the departmental noticeboard. Students who fail to submit their written work or whose written work submitted after the specified dates is not accepted by the department may be refused credit for the subject. Such students have the right to appeal to Faculty through the Sub Dean before final publication of their results, and Faculty will decide whether or not or under what conditions credit for the subject may be granted. Final Examination in Arts (degree with honours), etc: Entries for the final examination in Arts (degree with honours) must be lodged not later than 1 August. Final honours theses or essay work: The B.A. thesis or essay work for final year honours, in so far as it constitutes an examinable part of the final examination, must be completed by the date specified. Such work submitted after the due date without formal permission from the

23 Faculty of Arts

chairman of the department will be substantially penalized in the final honours examination, and no such thesis or essay work will be received for examination after the last day of November in the year in which the final honours examination is taken, without formal permission from the chairman of the department. Except with the permission of the Faculty no extension of time can be granted beyond the last day of the first term of the year following that in which the final honours examination Is taken.

SPECIAL CONSIDERATION Students whose studies during the year have been impaired by ill-health or any other serious cause may apply for special consideration in their examinations. Students who are physically capable of sitting for the examination are expected to do so even though their studies have been Interrupted. In the event of a failure, students' papers are re-assessed in the light of their request for special consideration. An additional test. oral or written, may be given at the discretion of the board of examiners. Because of the great variation from one case to another no automatic formula can be applied; students therefore do not automatically gain a pass because of their requests for special consideration; if performance is substantially below a pass standard, a pass cannot be granted. An attempt is made to consider each request as humanely as possible. Procedure: A student should make application for special considoration either before the date of the examination(s) in question, or not later than three days after the date of the examination(s). If this is impossible applications should be made as soon as possible after the date of the examination(s). No application will be considered after the publication of results. It is in the best interest of students to consult an appropriate member of staff, e.g. Tutor, Lecturer, Sub-Dean, Student Counsellor, Chaplain, etc, before submitting an application. Application forms are available at the Faculty Office, the Student Counsellors Offices and Departmental Offices. Only one form should be completed. If more than one department is involved the form will be copied and distributed accordingly. Supporting documents such as medical certificates, letters from Student Counsellors, etc, should be returned with the form. The summary of extenuating circumstances and supporting documents should be as specific as possible about the ways and length of time for which study has been impaired. Dates should be given. Where this is not possible or relevant the period of the year during which disturbance occurred should be stated. Applications should be sent to the Sub-Dean, Faculty of Arts. ALL APPLICATIONS ARE TREATED AS CONFIDENTIAL.

SPECIAL EXAMINATIONS Special Examinations may be granted under the following circumstances: 1. Where students are physically unable to sit for an examination or a substantial part of that examination. Satisfactory medical or other evidence is required. Applications must be made before or as soon as practicable after the date of the examination. 2. If the candidate is ill during the examination he should then report to the supervisor at the examination centre and make an application supported by medical or other evidence within three (3) days of the examination. 24 General Information

3. In cases where a student's studies have been so gravely impaired by illness or other serious cause that they are precluded from doing themselves justice at the normal examination time, the Faculty may grant them special examinations in February. Such students should make it clear in their application for special consideration that they are applying for special examinations. Strong supporting evidence is necessary. in such cases the application must be made before the commencing date of the annual examination. Special examinations are rare and may be granted only for the above reasons. They are granted by Faculty through the chairman of the department and his board of examiners. Special examinations are usually held in February. Students who have been granted a special examination will be notified by the appearance of their examination number in a special section under the published results. Applications together with supporting documents, should be submitted to the Sub-Dean who will forward them to the chairman of the department concerned.

LAST SUBJECT OF DEGREE COURSE Students who fail the last subject of the course for an ordinary B.A. Degree course will be automatically considered for supplementary examination In that subject. The supplementary examinations may be granted provided that: (i) The examination performance Is not too far below the pass mark; and (ii) There Is evidence that the student has made a serious attempt at the subject throughout the year.

STUDY PROGRESS Arts students whose academic performance falls below the level of at least 50 per cent success in any one year are normally asked to appear before the Arts Students' Progress Committee. The Faculty regards absence from an examination or cancellation of enrolment In third term without approval by the Sub-Dean as the equivalent of a failure In the subject concerned. Non-enrolment in any year is treated in a similar way unless leave of absence from the course has been granted. "Appearance" before the Arts Students' Progress Committee involves a discussion with two (2) of Its members about the student's academic work and possible causes of failure. The legal powers of the Committee are as set out in the Calendar of the University of Melbourne Regulation 2.5 which provides that the Faculty may, after investigating the circumstances and giving the student an opportunity to be heard, either (i) specify the subject(s) for which he may enrol in any subsequent year, or (il) recommend to the Professorial Board that he be suspended from the course. The attitude of the Committee is constructive and every effort Is made to help a student cope better with his studies. Any student suspended from the course may apply for re-admission In any subsequent year. If the Professorial Board Is satisfied that the condition or circumstances of the student have so changed that there is a reasonable probability that he will make satisfactory progress in

25 Faculty of Arts

the course, it may authorize re-admission of that student and impose such conditions as it may determine. Students suspended from the course may consult the Sub-Dean for advice concerning re-admission (preferably before November of the year preceding that in which the student wishes to resume the Arts course). MELBOURNE UNIVERSITY ARTS FACULTY ASSOCIATION The Arts Faculty Association is the student society to which all Arts students automatically belong. There is no subscription fee, and many of the functions are free. The Association organizes a variety of activities. A Freshers' Conference is held the week before Orientation Week, to which all first year Arts students are invited. A.F.A. arranges functions during Orientation Week to acquaint Arts students with their course, their lecturers and tutors. One of its main purposes is to represent the views and protect the interests of Arts students in the areas of welfare and education in particular. This is achieved through the S.R.C., through the ten student members of Arts Faculty and the three students elected to the Education Committee of the faculty; these students are all ex officio members of the A.F.A. committee. It also plays an active role in co-ordinating and assist- ing the various departmental staff-student committees. Other activities which A.F.A. organize include a ball, forums and seminars, a May camp and a typing course. Of particular importance is the Student Lounge which it organizes. It is located on the ground floor of the East Tower, John Medley Building, and the committee requests Arts students to make maximum use of the room whether they wish to work, drink coffee, or just to mix with other Arts students. A.F.A. Is organized by a ' committee of twenty-three, which is elected every August. The committee includes three first year representatives who will be elected by all Arts students in the fourth week of first term. The committee encourages all Arts students to take part in its activities. It welcomes ideas and offers of assistance. The committee members may be contacted via the A.F.A. letter box in the Union basement or in the Student Lounge, John Medley Building, where much of its activity is centred.

26 DESCRIPTION OF COURSES AVAILABLE The Faculty of Arts provides courses leading to: (i) the ordinary degree of Bachelor of Arts; and (ii) the degree of Bachelor of Arts with Honours. Selection of students into the honours courses is not made until the completion of the first year. First Year: All students must pass four Grade 1 subjects to complete the first academic year. (In the case of part-time students this must be spread over at least two calendar years.) The subjects must be chosen so that at least three Grade 2 subjects are possible in the second year, and, normally, so that no more than two subjects taught by the one department are Included. Assistance in the choice of subjects will be given by the staff of the Sub-Dean's section of the Faculty Office before enrolment. Students are also advised to consult appropriate academic staff if they require advice about particular subjects. The choice of subjects must be approved by the Sub-Dean. First year assessments will be graded under the following headings: Honours, First Class H1 Honours, Second Class, Division A 12А Honours, Second Class, Division В H2 В Pass P Fail N Absent Abs Withdrew WD First year students who Intend to enter honours schools at the beginning of their second year must pass the annual first year examinations in the appropriate subject (or subjects) with at least an honours 2В grading. They must also pass in such other subjects as Faculty may require. All such students are automatically eligible to enrol In the appropriate honours school or schools, provided that no student may enrol In more than two honours schools. Optional Additional Work In First Year: In addition to the work for Grade 1 subjects as set out in the details of subjects, certain departments will provide optional additional work in first year. The nature of this work will vary from department to department but in general will consist of extra lectures, or tutorials based on the additional work set. The object of the additional work is to amplify and deepen the student's course of study. It will be of general use and interest to all students and will also provide practice in the use of intellectual and other skills which will be particularly useful In the honours work of second and later years. Optional work is freely available to all students and may be taken in any subject in which it Is offered. However, students who intend to enter the honours school at the beginning of their second year are strongly advised to take the additional work in first year in the relevant department. 27 Faculty of Arts

This work is not a prerequisite to admission into the honours schools in second year. The work will not form a separate part of the annual examinations although departments may if they wish test it throughout the year or by means of optional questions on the annual examination papers. HALF-SUBJECTS Faculty has approved a certain number of half-subjects which may be taken for credit towards the B.A. degree. Such half-subjects must be taken in combinations approved by Faculty to constitute an approved full subject at grade 1, 2 or 3 level. In very special circumstances and only with permission of Faculty through the Sub-Dean, students may enrol for only one half-subject in one year and combine it with another half-subject in the succeeding year to form an approved full subject for credit. Normally, however, students must enrol in the two approved half-subjects (which form an approved full subject) in the one year. Where a student has taken an approved full subject made up of two half-subjects in the one year and has passed one half-subject but failed the other, credit for the half-subject passed may be retained provided that the student undertakes and completes the remaining half-subject in the succeeding year. Some examples of approved full subjects which consist of two half- subjects: Chinese 1A and half of East Asian Studies 1 = Chinese Studies 1 Soviet Writers and Society and Politics unit Soviet Politics and Society = Soviet Studies 2. In all cases students should consult the Sub-Dеап. CLASSICAL SOCIAL THEORY A course in Classical Social Theory has been made available by the Faculty of Arts. Details of the course are listed on p. 510. Students will be able to choose a course from a number of half-subjects offered. Two such half-subjects together will constitute a grade 2 subject; three such half-subjects a grade 3 subject. The subject, both as grade 2 and grade 3, will be offered on a pass as well as an honours level. As well as this, students Interested In this area of study may, under certain conditions, and by fulfilling certain prerequisite requirements, be able to study other subjects either concurrently with Classical Social Theory or subsequent to it in their third year, thereby allowing for the possibility of the new subject's integration in approved mixed major, enriched major, super major and integrated course patterns. The course may, with Faculty approval, constitute part of an honours programme.

INTERDEPARTMENTAL PROGRAMMES Faculty has offered for three years a number of interdisciplinary and interdepartmental programmes for third and fourth year honours students and for some third year pass students. Students should note carefully the details of enrolment procedures on p. 503.

BEGINNERS' COURSES IN LANGUAGES Since 1977 every language taught within the Faculty has been available to students who have had no previous acquaintance with that language. In most cases students are able to commence the beginners' course and go on to take a full major in the language although the manner of 28 Description of Courses Available

taking the major may vary between departments. Beginners' courses are now available in: Ancient Greek: 'I Provided the student successfully completes the Dutch: } Summer School and has the department's permission Swedish: JJJ to proceed Latin: Provided the student successfully completes the work prescribed by the department after he/she has passed Latin 1A Arabic: Beginners' course Bengali: Beginners' course (available only to sub-major level) Chinese 1: Beginners' course French 1A: Beginners' course German 1A: Beginners' course Hebrew 1: Open to beginners but normally requires H.S.C. Hebrew Indonesian and Malayan Studies 1: Beginners' course Italian 1A: Beginners' course Japanese 1A: Beginners' course Modern Greek 1A Beginners' course Russian 1A: Beginners' course Syriac 1: Beginners' course (a terminal subject)

LINGUISTICS A mixed major or combined honours course Is available in Linguistics and students completing this course can proceed to post-graduate work. The course commences In 2nd year and students interested In Linguistics are advised to look at the details of subjects on pp. 175-180. CRIMINOLOGY In 1976 the Criminology department joined the Faculty of Arts and since 1977 Criminology 2 has been available as a grade 2 Arts subject. The Diploma of Criminology consists of Criminology A, B, C and D and Is a post-graduate Diploma. Students interested in completing the B.A./ Diploma of Criminology course are advised that several combinations of subjects forming тiхед majors with Criminology 2 would provide an excellent background for the Diploma course. e.g. Philosophy and Law (Philosophy Behavioural Studies 1 1B) Criminology 2 Criminology 2 Classical Social Theory 3 Government and Society 3• (•prerequisite Politics 2) A combined LLB/Diploma of Criminology course is also available. Students interested in such courses should consult the Sub-Dean. THE ORDINARY DEGREE Grades: A Grade 1 subject Is a first year subject; A Grade 2 subject is a second year subject; A Grade З subject is a third year subject. Major: A major is a subject studied for three consecutive years, e.g. Chinese 1, 2 and 3; Indian Studies 1A, 28 and 3C; or 1A, 2C and 36. 29 Faculty of Arts

The ordinary degree requires three years of full-time study. Normally the panem of course will be: First year: Four Grade 1 subjects. Second year: Three Grade 2 subjects. Third year: Two Grade 3 subjects. The subjects can be chosen to include either two majors, e.g.: First year: Latin 1 Fine Arts 1A History 1E French 1 Second year: Latin 2 Fine Arts 2E History 2Q Third year: Latin 3 Fine Arts 3F or at leest one specialized major in which two third-year subjects are taken from the same department, e.g.: Politics/History/Fine Arts and many other departments. (See details of subjects.) Modification of these samples may be possible. The Sub-Dean should be consulted about such courses. It can be seen that the course. starting with a fairly broad range in first year, narrows down to one or two main fields of interest in third year. There is opportunity for a student to change plans in the light of experience in first year and second year. In the example above, fo, instance, the second year subjects could have been Latin, History, and French, and the third year subjects History and French, if the student's interests had developed in that way. Provision is made in some disciplines for one of the majors to be enriched in second year by including two subjects from the one discipline. For instance, in the example above the student very interested in History could, for either Latin or Fine Arts, have substituted another grade 2 History subject. The enrichment of a major at second or third year is of course only possible in disciplines that provide more than one subject in second or third year. These can be identified by looking at the table of subjects set out on pp. 38-44. Subjects must be chosen to conform with any prerequisites that are laid down. See pp. 44-45.

THE HONOURS DEGREE Courses for the degree of Bachelor of Arts with Honours are more specialized and require s higher standard of performance than those for the ordinary degree. The honours degree requires four years of full-time study. Entry into Honours Schools: At the beginning of his second year any student who has gained at least an honours 28 in the appropriate subject (or subjects) and who has passed such other subjects as the relevant department and Faculty may require is eligible to enrol in a pure or combined honours course. Such enrolments must be approved by the Faculty through the Sub-Dean. The prescribed details of honours courses, pure and combined, are set out in the Handbook. Students are asked to take careful note of those subjects which are strongly recommended by indi- vldual departments as useful supporting subjects, or, as in some cases (e.g. English, see p. 168) required. Admission to third and fourth years of the honours course must be approved by the chairman or chairmen of departments concerned and by the Faculty through the Sub-Dean. Normally such approval will be given only to students who have gained first or second class honours in their 30

Description of Courses Available

honours subjects and who have successfully passed all the prescribed supporting subjects. The third and fourth years of honours courses are normally limited to full-time students. Any variation of these reauirements may only be given by Faculty or by the Sub-Dean acting on behalf of Faculty. Honours courses may be taken in either one school (pure honours courses) or two schools (combined honours courses). Students should be aware that in many cases approved by Faculty they may, if they have completed the work of the first three years of a combined honours course, choose to specialize in their fourth year in one or other of the disciplines involved. Their degree would then be titled e.g. B.A. Ions. Latin with Philosophy or B.A. Ions. English with History, where Latin or English was completed as a full fourth year. Details of honours courses available are set out in the "Details of Subjects" Section, after the description of the pass subjects In each department. Combined honours courses are listed separately on pp. 519 ff.

EXAMPLES OF SOCIAL SCIENCE STUDIES IN THE BACHELOR OF ARTS/BACHELOR OF COMMERCE COURSES

Students are aдviвед that certain study programmes in Arts or Commerce and Economics can be taken by those interested in the Social Sciences. In Arts the following is a sample list of courses with emphasis in certain areas of the Social Sciences:

1. (Including majors in Economics and Political Science emphasizing aspects of 'Social Welfare'):

First year Economics A (Arts) Politics 1 and two (2) other grade 1 subjects (e.g. Philo- sophy 1, Geography 1— or Psychology 1, Вe- havioural Studies 1). Second year and one (1) other grade Economics В International Relations 2 2 subject (e.g. Political Philosophy — Philoso- phy 2D or Classical Social Theory 2). Third year Economics C— Government & Units 2, 4 and 6 Society 3

2. (Including majors in Economics and Indonesian and Malayan StudIes/Indian Studies, emphasizing aspects of the lesser developed nations):

OPTION 'A' First year Economics A (Arts) Economic Politics 1 History 1 D Geography 31 Faculty of Arts

Second year Economics 28 Regional Politics 2A Development in Asia Third year Economics C— International 3 Units Relations 3

OPTION В. First year Economics A Indonesian & Politics 1 History 1 D (Arts) Malayan Studies 1 Second year Indonesian & Politics 2A History 2J Malayan Studies 2 Third year Any two of— Indonesian & International History 3Т Malayan Relations 3 Studies 3

OPTION 'C' First year Economics A ' Indian Studies Politics 1 History 1 D (Arts) 1 or History lE Sесопд year Indian Studies Politics 2A History 2J 2 or Economics B Indian Studies History 3Т 3

З. (Including majors in Psychology and/or History, Politics, Philosophy emphasizing the 'Individual in Society'): First year Psychology 1 Politics 1 History 1D Philosophy 1A or History 1 E or Philosophy 1B Second year Psychology 2 Politics 2 History 2M or Philosophy 2E or Classi- cal Social Theory 2 Third year Psychology 3 Government & or History 3Т or Philosophy Society 3 2D

Similar course samples for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce can be found in the Handbook of the Faculty of Economics and Commerce. 32 Description of Courses Available

INFORMATION FOR COMBINED COURSE STUDENTS Students should note that it Is possible to combine an Arts degree course with most other degree courses in this University. Such combined courses can be approved either at first year or in later years of the course. Students should note that the following combined courses have frequently been approved by both Faculties: B.A./LL.В. B.A./ B.Com. B.A./ В.Sc. B.A./B.Mus. Students on Government Assistance should check carefully to see that such courses have been approved by the Department of Education. Students who wish to study these courses are advised that the Arts requirements are at least six subjects consisting of two majors. These subjects must be chosen so that they are not credited to both degrees at once. No more than three subjects common to both degree courses may be taken. Students who wish to enrol in any combined course must be selected in both the Faculty of Arts and the other Faculty, and should consult the student adviser of the other Faculty as well as the Sub-Dean of Arts.

COMBINED COURSE FOR THE DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF ARTS AND DIPLOMA IN CRIMINOLOGY

This course normally extends over four full-time years and admission Is not generally considered until completion of at least first year Arts. The student would normally complete all subjects of the Arts course (including Criminology 2) during the first three years and in the fourth year Criminology A, В, C, D. Enquiries should be made of the Sub-Dean, Faculty of Arts.

COMBINED COURSE FOR THE DEGREES OF BACHELOR OF ARTS AND BACHELOR OF LAWS B.A./LL.B.: In the first year students are required to study two Law subjects and two Arts subjects. The Law subjects are fixed: Legal Process, and Criminal Law. The Arts subjects may be chosen from any of the subjects offered. Since these Arts subjects are usually taken on to major and sub-major level, it is wise, in first year, to choose subjects which can be continued in later years. Students who wish to transfer to a pure Bachelor of Arts or Bachelor of Arts with Honours degree can be given credit in their Arts degree for Criminal Law and Legal Process as first year subjects. A student who is admitted to a combined course for the degree of Bachelor of Arts (ordinary) and LL.B. will receive credit in the Bachelor of Arts course for three subjects in respect of the LL.B. degree. Credit will not become effective before the completion of certain subjects in the third year of the LL.B. course (see below). A minimum of six Arts subjects must be completed. The six subjects are to be arranged to include at least one Arts major and one sequence of two parts of a major. 33 в Faculty of Arts

Note: B.A./LL.B. students will qualify for a Bachelor of Arts (ordinary) degree when they have completed (but not before) the six Arts subjects as specified, together with all Law subjects of the first two years of the LL.B. course, and any three of Jurisprudence, Constitutional Law or Advanced Constitutional Law, Administrative Law or Advanced Adminis- trative Law, Comparative Law, International Law, and Equity or Trusts. The course should normally be taken in the following order: First year Second year Criminal Law Constitutional and Administrative Law Legal Process Second part of major Second part of sequence Torts or Contract First part of major in Arts First part of sequence in Arts Third year Fourth year Third part of major Third year Law Remaining subject of Arts course Contract or Torts Property Fifth year Fourth year Law.

B.A. (lions.)/LL.B. Courses: These courses are possible, but cannot be completed under six years of full-time study. Since the pattern of such courses is not generally affected by first year choices It is best not to plan in detail until after the first year results are published. Some pure Honours courses require particular subjects in the first year (e.g. English Honours requires a language other than English). Students who Intend to enter an Honours course in the second year should consult the details of the Honours course, as set out in the Details of Subjects. Enquiries should be made to the Sub-Dean.

LL.B./B.A. (lions.) in Philosophy: 1. Bachelor of Laws together with a Pure Honours Degree in Philosophy: The combined course is six years in duration and involves relatively heavy workloads in the second, third and fourth years of the course. Students admitted to the course, which requires approval each year from the Law Faculty office, the Philosophy department, and the Arts Faculty office, may omit the equivalent of one non-compulsory Philosophy subject from the normal third year of the Pure Honours degree in philosophy. ted to take Students who take advantage of this concession are expeć Jurisprudence (Honours) as one of their law electives. 2. Bachelor of Laws together with an Arts Honours Degree in Philosophy and another school. These combined courses are also six years In duration and involve relatively heavy workloads In the second, third and fourth years of the course. Students admitted to the course, which requires phY depart- approval each year from the Law Faculty office, the Philosо ment, the other Arts department in which honours work is being taken, and the Arts Faculty office, may omit the equivalent of one no п-c оmpul- sory Philosophy subject in either the second or the third year of the Arts

З4 Description of Courses Available

course. Students who take advantage of this concession are very strongly recommended to take Jurisprudence (Honours) as one of their law electives.

INFORMATION FOR STUDENTS INTENDING TO PROCEED TO THE BACHELOR OF SOCIAL WORK DEGREE The Bachelor of Social Work degree commenced in 1975 and replaced the former Diploma of Social Studies. It will not be available to students commencing university studies. Normal entry to the degree will be efter completion of a university degree (or its equivalent) which includes one year of a course in Psychological Studies et Melbourne University (or its equivalent from en approved institution) and one other subject from the Social or Behavioural Sciences at Melbourne (or its equivalent from an approved institution). Those who envisage applying for the Bachelor of Social Work course after completion of the first degree should include in the Bachelor of Arts course one of either Psychology 1 or Behavioural Studies 1, and one of either Psychology 2, Behavioural Studies 2, or another approved Social Science subject such as Criminology, Economics, History, Politics or approved Geography subjects. It may be desirable for first year Arts students to choose Psychology 1 or Behavioural Studies 1 plus at least one Social Science subject. Enquiries should be addressed to The Assistant Registrar (Social Studies), Board of Social Studies, University of Melbourne.

STUDENTS CURRENTLY ENROLLED FOR B.A./DIPLOMA OF SOCIAL STUDIES 1. Students who have successfully completed year two of a combined course including Psychology parts 1 and 2 can either (a) enter the Bachelor of Social Work year one in 1978; or (b) complete their Bachelor's Pass degree in 1978 or Honours degree in 1979 and be granted a deferred place in the Bachelor of Social Work quota in 1979 or 1980 respectively; or (c) complete years three and four of the combined course. 2. Students who have completed year three of the combined course have no option but to complete the final year of the combined course. 3. Students who have entered the Bachelor of Social Work degree course after completion of years 1 and 2 In Arts (i.e. have 4 grade 1 and з grade 2 subjects), are required to complete the two remaining grade 3 subjects in Arts before being eligible to graduate B.А. (ord.) If they desire to do so.

STUDENTS WHO HAVE GRADUATED IN ANOTHER FACULTY This information is applicable only to graduates of other faculties in this or other Australian universities, who wish to study for the degree of Bachelor of Arts. All such students are required to complete a total of six (6) Arts subjects. Normally these subjects should form two majors but some flexibility is possible. At least one major from a distinctly Arts discipline is essential. The other major can often be 'mixed', i.e. a graduate who 35 Faculty of Arts

has completed Mathematics 1A and 2A in his original degree may well wish to study Mathematics ЭА in his Arts degree; this is acceptable but the study of another grade 1 or grade 2 subject would be necessary to complete this 'mixed major. So a course might be: First major Second major or Fine Arts 1A English 1 French 1 German 1 Fine Arts 2E English 2 French 2 Economics B Fine Arts 3F Mathematics French 3 Economics C 3A

All graduates of Australian universities, irrespective of their primary degree and the subjects studied therein, are given the same block credit of three (3) subjects. Graduates may not undertake a double major In Economics. Most graduates engage in part-time studies, and Faculty expects part-time students to enrol in either one or two subjects in any one year. In the first year of the course it seems wiser to undertake only one subject so that the demands of University and employment can be sorted out. Graduates are often forced to cancel their enrolments during the year as their employment demands increase. It is essential, if you find yourself caught in this situation, to let the Faculty office know what you are doing. Graduate entrance into quota subjects, especially Psychology, may be limited. This is because first preference must be given to incoming undergraduates. Single Subjects: Some graduates may have studied Single Subjects or Special Courses (i.e. subjects which do not count towards a degree) either during or after their primary degree. It is sometimes possible to credit such subjects (if they are Arts subjects), towards the Arts degree thus cutting down the number of subjects required. For instance, a Bache- lor of Science graduate may, after completing a Science degree, have studied English 1 and English 2 as single subjects, and subsequently become interested in the Arts course and applied for selection. Upon being selected, the candidate could apply to have the two single subjects credited to the Arts degree, and thus would have to complete only four extra subjects, including one major.

Example First Major Mixed Major Politics 1 English 1 Subjects Politics 2A English 2 credited towards Politics 3A Mathematics 3А degree (Mathematics 1A and 2A completed in B.Sc. degree)

STUDENTS WHO HAVE COMPLETED THE DIPLOMA OF SOCIAL STUDIES Students who have completed the Diploma of Social Studies will be required to complete a further four (4) subjects in one of the following patterns: 36 Description of Courses Available

(a) a completely new major together with any other subject; or (b) completion of a major with Australian History 3G; completion of a new sub-major and any other first year subject; or (c) completion of a major with Government & Society 3; completion of a new sub-major and any other first year subject; or (d) completion of a major with Psychology ЗA; completion of a new sub-major and any other first-year subject. Sub-major: Students who wish to do so may enrol in a grade 1 subject and Criminology 2 to fulfil the requirements. Time: Some students have attempted the four subjects In a full-time year. Most have found four subjects too difficult to cope with and have been forced to drop one. Part-time students, especially those beginning employment as social workers, have usually found that two subjects are too difficult a task.

STUDENTS TRANSFERRING FROM OTHER UNIVERSITIES INTERSTATE, OVERSEAS, OR WITHIN VICTORIA Students who wish to transfer from another University to Melbourne must make application for selection on the prescribed form available from: The Secretary, Victorian Universities Admissions Committee, 11 Queen's Road, MELBOURNE, 3004. Credit for work done at another University may be granted up to a maximum of four subjects in the case of the Ordinary Degree, and up to a maximum of the first two years of the course in the case of the Honours Degree. Transferring students should make an appointment to see the Sub-Dean or one of the Sub-Dean's assistants as soon as possible to discuss the arrangements for credit. Students who have nearly completed their courses elsewhere may be better served by seeking approval from the original university to study subjects at Melbourne for credit towards a degree from the original university. Such students would be complementary course students. The closing date for applications for 1978 is 27 October, 1977. Late applications will be received until 31 December, 1977, on payment of the prescribed late fee.

PLANNING A COURSE Where to find individual subjects: When planning your course many combinations of subjects are possible and you should read carefully the detailed syllabus of the subjects available listed throughout the handbook under the various departments, e.g. the syllabus for International Relations is listed under the department headed Political Science, the syllabus for Dutch 1 under Germanic Studies, and so on. A table of subjects divided into grade 1, grade 2 and grade 3 subjects is on pp. 38-44 of the Handbook. 37 Faculty of Arts

Prerequisites: Some subjects cannot be taken until others have been passed. You should look at the list of prerequisite subjects on pp. 44-45 of the Handbook to ensure that if, for example, in later years you wish to proceed to a certain major, you have the necessary prerequisite. For instance, if you wish to take a major in Statistics, Computer Science, or Mathematics В you must pass Mathematics 1A in your first year. Terminal subjects: Certain subjects are terminal, that is they do not form part of any major and are considered simply as first year subjects only. Particularly, these are Rhetoric and General Mathematics. Students who have studied certain languages at Higher School Certifi- cate are exempted from that first year language here. Higher School Certificate Chinese exempts from Chinese 1, Higher School Certificate Indonesian exempts from Indonesian 1, Higher School Certificate Japanese exempts from Japanese 1. These students may proceed to Chinese 2 or Indonesian 2 or Japanese 2 in their first year but they must nevertheless study a total of nine subjects. For students of Chinese, East Asian Studies or Chinese Studies 1 is a necessity and Indonesian students will find Dutch 1 a help. First year Science subjects are available to limited numbers of Arts students. Students should lodge an enrolment at the Science Faculty Office, after selection to the quota subject concerned, and should report to the individual departments to arrange practical classes before term commences. Special conditions: Similarly, particular rules apply to some subjects. For instance, if you intend to study Chinese at grade 2 level or above, you must also undertake East Asian Studies or Chinese Studies 1 as well as Chinese 1 in your first year; similarly, credit cannot be given for Geography 1 and Economic Geography. Such restrictions are set out in the details of subjects, and should be noted carefully when courses are being planned.

Quotas: Quotas exist on certain subjects and you will need to fill out a quota application form for these subjects and leave it at the Faculty office. Selection into quotas is made according to academic merit. You will be notified by the Faculty office as soon as possible about whether or not you have been selected into the quota. You should be prepared to choose another subject in case your application for a quota subject is not successful.

SUBJECTS When reading the subject table remember that the order in which subjects must be taken is established by reading across the Page from left to right. Faculty makes a clear distinction between Grade 1, Grade 2 and Grade 3 subjects. These subjects must be taken in separate years. The numbers 1, 2, 3 or 4 indicate the grade of the subject. The letters A. В, C, etc., Indicate the nature of the subject, fir instance, History 2G is Australian History at grade 2 level, History 3G is Austra- lian History at grade 3 level. Students must specify the grade at which 38 Description of Courses Available they wish to pursue a subject. Credit will not be given for subjects with the same alphabetical letter, in some cases the same title, taken in different years. e.g. credit will not be given for History 2G and History 3G, or Inter- national Relations 2 and International Relations 3, or Philosophy 2G and Philosophy 3G.

FIRST YEAR SECOND YEAR THIRD YEAR (Grade 1) (Grade 2) (Grade 3)

EXPERIMENTAL FIRST YEAR Languages ANCIENT GREEK 1 ANCIENT GREEK 2 ANCIENT GREEK 3 ARABIC 1 ARABIC 2 ARABIC 3 BENGALI 1 BENGALI 2 CHINESE 1 CHINESE 2 CHINESE 3 CHINESE 1A CHINESE 2A• CHINESE 3А ' CHINESE STUDIES 1X• CHINESE STUDIES 2X• CHINESE STUDIES 3X• CHINESE STUDIES 1Y• CHINESE STUDIES 2Y• CHINESE STUDIES 3Y• CHINESE STUDIES 2Z• DUTCH I DUTCH 2 DUTCH з FRENCH 1A FRENCH 2A FRENCH 1 FRENCH 2 FRENCH 3 MEDIEVAL FRENCH tRENAISSANCE LANG. & LIT. 2 FRENCH LANG. & LIT. 3 or #AD VAN CED MEDIEVAL FRENCH LANG. & LIT. GERMAN IA GERMAN 2A GERMAN 1 GERMAN 2 GERMAN 3 GERMANIC STUDIES GERMANIC STUDIES 28• 3B• HEBREW 1 HEBREW 2 HEBREW 3 INDONESIAN & INDONESIAN & INDONESIAN & MALAYAN MALAYAN MALAYAN STUDIES 1 STUDIES 2 STUDIES 3 ITALIAN 1 ITALIAN 2 ITALIAN 3 ITALIAN 1A ITALIAN 2A ITALIAN 2Z JAPANESE 1 JAPANESE 2 JAPANESE 3 JAPANESE 1A• JAPANESE 2A• JAPANESE 3А• JAPANESE JAPANESE STUDIES 1X• STUDIES 2X• JAPANESE STUDIES 1Y• LATIN 1A LATIN 2A

•Half-sub;ects or special subjects. Carefully read details of subjects. $Offered in alternate years (see details of subjects). 39 Faculty of Arts

LATIN 1 LATIN 2 LATIN 3 MODERN GREEK 1 MODERN GREEK 2 MODERN GREEK 3 MODERN GREEK 1A RUSSIAN 1A RUSSIAN 2A RUSSIAN ЭА RUSSIAN 1 RUSSIAN 2 RUSSIAN 3 RUSSIAN 2В RUSSIAN 3B SWEDISH 1 SWEDISH 2 SWEDISH 3 SYRIAC 1

Linguistics LINGUISTICS 2 LINGUISTICS 3 Criminology CRIMINOLOGY 2

Economics Majors in Arts ECONOMICS A (Arts) ECONOMICS B ECONOMICS c (1-10•) ECONOMIC HISTORY A ECONOMIC HIST. 2В ECONOMIC HIST. 3B ECONOMIC HIST. 2C ECONOMIC HIST. 3C ECONOMIC HIST, 2D ECONOMIC HIST. 3D ECONOMIC HIST. 2E ECONOMIC HIST. 3E HISTORY OF ECO- NOMIC THOUGHT REGIONAL AND REGIONAL DEVELOP- URBAN ECONOMIC URBAN MENT' or STUDIESt DEVELOPMENT REGIONAL DEVELOP- (introduction) ft MENT IN ASIA# STATISTICAL METHOD

History HISTORY 1A HISTORY 2G HISTORY 3G (British) (Australian) (Australian) HISTORY 1B HISTORY 2H HISTORY 3H (Age of Revolutions) (American) (American) HISTORY 1C HISTORY 2J HISTORY 3J (East Asian) (East Asian) HISTORY 1Dtt HISTORY 2K HISTORY 3K (Culture Contact in (French) ( French) the Pacific)

HISTORY lEtt HISTORY 2L HISTORY 3L (Urban History) (Modern British) (Modern British)

HISTORY 1F HISTORY 2M HISTORY 3M (Prehistoric (Pre-Classical (Pre-Classical Archaeology) Antiquity) Antiquity) HISTORY 2N (German) •Three units constitute one subject In 9-subject Arts degree. tNo student may enrol for Regional and Urban Development (Introduction) unless he Is also enrolled In Economics A. ttOffered In alternate years (see details of subjects). History subjects which have the same letter end are offered at Grade 2 or Grade з level may be taken either as a Grade 2 or a Grade 3 subject in a History major but NOT at both levels. 40

Description of Courses Available

HISTORY 2Q HISTORY 3Q (Roman) (Roman) HISTORY 2R HISTORY 31 (Renaissance Italy) (Renaissance Italy) HISTORY 2Т HISTORY 3Т (Social & Reflective) (Social & Reflective) HISTORY 2V HISTORY 3V (Reformation Europe) (Reformation Europe)

Political Science POLITICS 1A POLITICS 2A POLITICS 3A POLITICS 1 B POLITICS 26 POLITICS 36 POLITICS 1 C INTERNATIONAL INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS 2 RELATIONS 3 PUBLIC GOVERNMENT & ADMINISTRATION 2 SOCIETY 3 POLITICAL SOCIOLOGY 3 PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION 3 Note: No student may enrol for International Relations or Public Administration at both Grade 2 and Grade 3 level in a major in Political Science.

Social Studies SOCIAL BIOLOGY (ARTS COURSE) History & Philosophy of Science HISTORY & HISTORY & HISTORY & PHILOSOPHY OF PHILOSOPHY OF PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE 1 SCIENCE 2A SCIENCE 3C HISTORY & HISTORY & PHILOSOPHY OF PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE 2B SCIENCE 3F Mathematical Sciences Mathematics Sequence 1: MАТНЕМАТI СS 1A MATHEMATICS 2A MATHEMATICS 3A Sequence 2: MATHEMATICS 1 B MATHEMATICS 28 MATHEMATICS 36

Note: Sequence 2 is available only for students who are also taking sequence 1; a mixed major sequence is also available for Mathe- matics B. (Carefully study details of subjects.)

MATHEMATICAL MATHEMATICAL MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES 1 E SCIENCES 2E SCIENCES 3E MATHEMATICAL MATHEMATICAL MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES 1G SCIENCES 2G SCIENCES 3G 41 Faculty of Arts

Computer Science COMPUTER COMPUTER COMPUTER SCIENCE 1 SCIENCE 2A SCIENCE 3 COMPUTER SCIENCE 26 Statistics

STATISTICS 1A STATISTICS 2A STATISTICS ЭA STATISTICS 1T•

Philosophy PHILOSOPHY 1A PHILOSOPHY 2C PHILOSOPHY 3C (Contemp. European) (Contemp. European) PHILOSOPHY 18 PHILOSOPHY 2D PHILOSOPHY 3D (Philosophy & Law) (Political Philosophy) (Political Philosophy) PHILOSOPHY 1 C PHILOSOPHY 2E PHILOSOPHY 3E (Philosophy & (Ethics) (Ethics) Politics) PHILOSOPHY 2F PHILOSOPHY 3F (Formal Logic) (Formal Logic) PHILOSOPHY 2Gt PHILOSOPHY 3Gt (Greek Philosophy) (Greek Philosophy) PHILOSOPHY 2H PHILOSOPHY 3H (Philosophy of (Philosophy of Psychology) Psychology) PHILOSOPHY 2J PHILOSOPHY 3J (Philosophy of (Philosophy of Religion) Religion) PHILOSOPHY 2 Кt PHILOSOPHY 3К1 (Aesthetics) (Aesthetics) PHILOSOPHY 2L PHILOSOPHY 3L (Epistemology, Logic (Epistemology, Logic & Methodology) & Methodology) PHILOSOPHY 2M PHILOSOPHY 3M (Modern Philosophy) (Modern Philosophy) PHILOSOPHY 2N PHILOSOPHY 3N (Recent Philosophy) (Recent Philosophy) PHILOSOPHY 20f PHILOSOPHY 301 (Medieval ( Medieval Philosophy) Philosophy) PHILOSOPHY 2Rt PHILOSOPHY 3Rt ( Rationalist (Rationalist Metaphysics) Metaphysics)

Note: Philosophy subjects offered both at Grade 2 and Grade 3 level may NOT be taken at both levels in a major In Philosophy. (Read details of subjects carefully.) Geography GEOGRAPHY 1 GEOGRAPHY 2 GEOGRAPHY 3 GEOGRAPHY 3A Psychology PSYCHOLOGY 1 PSYCHOLOGY 2A PSYCHOLOGY 3A BEHAVIOURAL BEHAVIOURAL STUDIES 1 STUDIES 2 •Statistics 1T is normally a terminal course. tittered In alternate years (see details of subjects). а2

Description of Courses Available

Science Subjects: ASPECTS OF CONTEMPORARY BIOLOGY BIOLOGY CHEMISTRY GEOLOGY PHYSICS Area Studies: EAST ASIAN STUDIES 1 EAST ASIAN STUDIES (CHINESE) • • EAST ASIAN STUDIES (JAPANESE)••

INDIAN STUDIES 1A INDIAN STUDIES 2 В INDIAN STUDIES 38 INDIAN STUDIES 2C INDIAN STUDIES Э C INDONESIAN & INDONESIAN & INDONESIAN & MALAYAN MALAYAN MALAYAN STUDIES 1 STUDIES 2 STUDIES 3 (See also under INDONESIAN INDONESIAN Languages) HISTORY & HISTORY & POLITICS 2t POLITICS 3t INDONESIAN INDONESIAN ANTHROPOLOGY ANTHROPOLOGY & SOCIOLOGY 2t & SOCIOLOGY 3t MIDDLE EASTERN MIDDLE EASTERN MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES 1 STUDIES 2A STUDIES 3A MIDDLE EASTERN MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES 2 В STUDIES 38 RUSSIAN LITERATURE SOVIET STUDIES 2f & SOCIETY Interdepartmental Course DRAMA Classics CLASSICAL STUDIES CLASSICAL CLASSICAL 1A STUDIES 2 В • STUDIES 3 В • CLASSICAL CLASSICAL STUDIES 2C• STUDIES 3C• English ENGLISH 1At ENGLISH 2 ENGLISH 3 ENGLISH 18f ENGLISH 1 C# RHETORIC•• Fine Arts FINE ARTS 3F FINE ARTS 1A FINE ARTS 2E (Early Christian & (Medieval & Renaissance) Byzantine) FINE ARTS 3K (European Art History: 19th & 20th Centuries)

•Available In alternate years. tSpecial subject consisting of two half-subjects. #Students may study only one of English 1A, 1B or 1C. ••Half-subjects. 43 Faculty of Arts

Music MUSIC 1A MUSIC 2В MUSIC Э C MUSIC PERFORMANCE" Classical Social Theory CLASSICAL CLASSICAL SOCIAL THEORY 2 SOCIAL THEORY 3

No student may receive credit for both—

Classical Studies 1A and History IC French 1 and French 1A (passed before 1974) Russian 1 and Russian 1A (passed before 1974) and/or Russian Reading Course (passed before 1974) Regional & and Geography 1 Urban Development Regional Development and Regional Development in Asia Later British History and Social History Mathematics 1A and General Mathematics Statistics 100 and Statistics 200 French 1 and French 1A German 1 and German 1A Russian 1 and Russian 1A Latin 1 and Latin 1A English 1A and either English 1 B or English 1 C Politics 1 C and Philosophy 1 B or Politics 1 B Politics 1A and Politics 1 B Philosophy 1A and Philosophy 1C

Prerequisites: Except with the special permission of the Faculty no student may proceed to any of the subjects set out In the following table without completing the appropriate prerequisites. Students should note that unless specified to the contrary no Grade 2 subject may be taken unless the corresponding Grade 1 subject has been passed; simi- Iar1y with Grade 2 and 3 subjects.

East Asian Studies 1 or Chinese Studies 1 Chinese 2 in addition to Chinese 1 Indonesian History & Politics 2 A Grade 1 Arts subject Indonesian Anthropology & Sociology 2 Classical Social Theory Any two university subjects Criminology 2 Any two university subjects Economic History B Any one Arts or Commerce subject Statistical Method Economics 1A History 2.1 A Grade 1 History subject or East Asian Studies 1

”Тегтlпаl subject. 44 Description of Courses Available

Any other Grade 2 or 3 A Grade 1 or Grade 2 History subject History subject respectively International Relations 2 Politics 1 or any History subject Politics 2A Politics 1 or any Grade 1 History subject or Economic History 1A Politics 2A East Asian Studies or Indian Studies 1A (Approved units) or Russian Literature & Society Government & Society 3 Any Grade 2 or 3 Political Science subject or Psychology 1 and Psychology 2A Political Sociology 3 A Grade 1 and a Grade 2 Politics subject or Psychology 1 and Psychology 2A or Behavioural Studies 1 and 2 Social Biology. (Consult Sub-Dean) (may not be available in 1978)

History & Philosophy of History & Philosophy of Science 1 or one Science 2A Science or Mathematics subject History & Philosophy of History & Philosophy of Science 2A or 2B Science 3C or 3F or a Grade 1 and 2 Mathematics subject or Social Biology or History & Philo- sophy of Science 1 and Philosophy 2L Philosophy 2D One Philosophy subject or two Political Science subjects or a Diploma of Social Studies Philosophy 2F) One Philosophy subject or any two univer- Philosophy 2L sity subjects Philosophy 2H One Philosophy subject and Psychology 1 or Behavioural Studies 1 All other Grade 2 One Philosophy subject or Politics 1C Philosophy subjects A Grade 3 Philosophy Any two Philosophy subjects subject Statistics 200 Mathematics 1A Statistics 300 Mathematics 2A Behavioural Studies 2 Behavioural Studies 1 or Psychology 1

MIXED MAJORS The following combinations of subjects have been approved. No other combinations are acceptable as majors without the special permission of the Faculty through the Sub-Dean. Students should note carefully that some of the later year subjects listed here cannot be taken without specific prerequisites.

Mathematics 1A Statistics 200 Philosophy 3L

Statistics 1A or Mathematics 2В Mathematics 3В Computer Science 1 Note: This sequence is available only for students who are also taking Mathematics A.

Statistics 1A or Mathematical Mathematical Computer Science 1 Sciences 2G Sciences 3G 45 Faculty of Arts

History & Philosophy of Science 1 Statistics 200 Philosophy 3L (Logic & Methodology) Mathematics 1A Computer Science 200 Computer Science 300 History & Philosophy History & Philosophy Philosophy 3L of Science 1 of Science 2A (Logic & Methodology) A first year Science History & Philosophy Philosophy 3L subject of Science 2A (Logic & Methodology) History & Philosophy Philosophy 2L History & Philosophy of of Science 1 or any (Logic & Science 3C two first year Science Methodology) subjects Mathematics 1A Mathematics 2A History & Philosophy of Science 3C Mathematics 1A Statistics 200 Statistics 300 History & Philosophy Statistics 200 Statistics 300 of Science 1 History & Philosophy Social Biology History & Philosophy of of Science 1 Science 3C Philosophy 1B Criminology 2 Classical Social Theory 3

COMBINATIONS OF POLITICAL SCIENCE WITH ECONOMIC HISTORY, HISTORY, INDIAN STUDIES, INDONESIAN & MALAYAN STUDIES, EAST ASIAN STUDIES, PSYCHOLOGY, CRIMINOLOGY, AND CLASSICAL SOCIAL THEORY

History 1A (British) International History 3J• (East Asian) or Relations 2 or or History 1 B (Age of Politics 2A (approved History 31• (American) Revolutions) units) Behavioural Studies 1 Behavioural Studies 2 Government & Society З or Psychology 1 or Psychology 2A or Political Sociology 3 or Criminology 2 or Classical Social Theory 2 Economic History 1A International Relations Economic History зС Politics 1 Any Grade 2 Political Economic History 3C or Science subject or 3D Economic History 2B Politics 1 History 2G (Australian) Any Grade 3 Political Science or History subject (approved Politics 1 History 2K (French) Politics зА or History 2H units) (American) or History 2J (East Asian) or History 2L (British)

•Prerequisite: A History Grade 1 and a History Grade 2 subject. 46 Description of Courses Available

East Asian Studies Politics 2A (approved Any Grade 3 Political units) Science subject or History 2J (East Asian) Russian Literature & Politics 2A (approved Any Grade 3 Political Society units) Science subject Philosophy 1B Philosophy 2C or 20 Politics 3A Indian Studies 1A Politics 2A (approved Indian Studies ЗВ or any units) Grade 3 Political Science subject Indian Studies lA Indian Studies 2В Politics 3A (approved units) Indonesian & Malayan Indonesian & Malayan History 3J• (East Asian) Studies 1 Studies 2 or International Relations 3 or Politics 3A (approved units) Politics 1 Classical Social Politics 3A Theory 2

JOINT COURSES IN ECONOMICS AND MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES The major in Mathematical Sciences E as set out below has been approved and can be taken in the ordinary (Pass) degree course for the Bachelor of Arts in the following manner:

First Year Second Year Third Year Economics A Economics B Economics C Mathematics 1A Mathematics 2A Math. Sci. 3E Math. Sci. 1 E Math. Sci. 2E One other subject Courses in Mathematical Sciences E comprise the following units:

Subject Component Units: Computer Science 101 (or 111) Mathematical Sciences 1 E Statistics 113 (or 123) { Computer Science 103 Computer Science 202 Mathematical Sciences 2E Statistics 201 {Statistics 202 Mathematical Sciences 3E Units totalling between 18 and 20 points, including Mathematics 361 (5) Statistics 301 (5) Statistics 311 (5) and a selection from Computer Science 321 (4) Computer Science 322 (4) Computer Science 323 (4)

•Prerequisite: A History Grade 1 and a History Grade 2 subject. 47 Faculty of Arts

Mathematics 373 (5) Mathematics 351 (3) Statistics 313 (5) Statistics 321 (4) Statistics 316 (4)

48 Description of Courses Available

EXPERIMENTAL FIRST YEAR

A variant on the normal first year will be available for a limited number of students in 1978. This has been designed to facilitate experimentation in methods of teaching and in the content of first year study. The experimental part of the year will replace two normal subjects. Students who apply and are selected for this experiment will enrol in two subjects —Special Studies 1A and Special Studies 18. This is to simplify the work of record keeping and does NOT indicate that the experimental part of the year is divided into two sections. On the contrary it will be a single project. The core of this special project will be study in small discussion groups, supported by additional classes. There will be a number of discussion groups; each will be led by a teacher who will specify, in general terms, the theme for study by that group. The details of the issues studied will be the responsibility of the group as a whole. At enrolment stage students will be able to specify the particular group Into which they seek selection, or they may specify two or more of the groups, stating their preferences. Work in the discussion groups is intended to emphasise an active approach to study. Students will be encouraged to express their interpretation of material and its relevance to specific issues and will have to learn to confront competing interpretations from other members of the group. This form of interchange between students has been shown to be effective in student learning and is perhaps as important as the interchange between student and teacher. In particular it promotes the habit, essential to scholarship, of critically approaching unconsidered or prejudiced attitudes. There are other important features of the groups. The participants will collectively take the responsibility for deciding precisely how the course of study is to progress. In this way the rationale of the course of study will be more apparent. The flexibility of these groups will facilitate the study of topics, In many cases cutting across the boundaries of specific disciplines, which would be difficult to deal with in a more traditional mode of teaching. The supporting classes will Introduce students to other members of the academic staff. The programme of set classes is intended to demonstrate the operation of various disciplines and methodologies, to examine or provide information on some of the issues relating to the themes of one or more groups and, primarily, to provide new stimulus to the groups in the exploration of their themes. It is hoped that single lectures or short series by a number of distinguished academics in the faculty will be included in the programme. In addition special classes, often of an In- formal nature, will be arranged by the leaders of the groups so that special knowledge of other academics which bears on problems under discussion by the group, can be made available. Any student in the experimental first year will be taking two normal first year subjects and will be able to proceed in the usual way to majors or honours courses based on those subjects. However, in addition to this, a number of departments will accept Special Studies 1A and 1 B in place of their own first year subject in a major or honours course. Information about the departments concerned and other details of the project will be available by the beginning of 1978 from the Faculty office. The formal details of subjects of Special Studies 1A and 1B follow.

For further details see booklet available at Arts Faculty office. 49 Faculty of Arts

100-468 SPECIAL STUDIES 1A 100-469 SPECIAL STUDIES 1 B These two subjects must be taken together and study for them will be one single programme; hence enrolments in one of these subjects Is conditional on enrolment in the other. A limited number of places in this com- posite subject will be available in 1978. The core of this subject will consist in study in a small discussion group. The group will meet for a total of З hours each week, but this period may be divided into two separate sessions. in addition a programme of lectures and/or seminars will be arranged to complement and develop work in the groups. These supporting classes will take up to two hours per week. Each discussion group will be led throughout the year by а member of staff who will have the responsibility of specifying, in general terms, the theme to be dealt with by the group in question. This will be done by giving: (a) A general specification of the theme around which the work of the study group would centre. (b) A list of the core literature relevant to this, together with a list of books which the student should possess. (c) A statement of the problems and reading which will serve as the starting point for study and discussion. (d) A reasonably full description of some of the issues which he considers will probably be dealt with by the study group. The group as a whole will discuss further details of the problems and material to be studied. The supporting classes will normally be of two kinds (i) A programme of classes set in advance and involving a number of different lecturers and (ii) Special classes arranged to meet the needs of a particular group. Both kinds of classes will normally be given by people other than the leader of the group. Written work, not to exceed 15,000 words, on topics arising from the work of the group will be required throughout the year. Assessment. A class list will not be issued but the teacher leading e group will advise students as to their capabilities for honours work. and will provide a written assessment for those students who do seek entry to an honours school. Assessment will be based on written work but participation In class Work is seen as an essential element of the year's work. Which items of written work will be assessed and their weighting will be settled early in the year after consultation with the group. A formal examination will be set for any student who wishes such an examination to be taken into account for assessment purposes. An examination board will be responsible for the setting of any examinations and will consider the case of any student who is not considered to have reached pass standard. in any case where the examining board determines that a student has failed, but not failed badly, they may credit the student with the equivalent of a pass in one first year subject. Further details, Including a list of discussion group leaders, the themes and reading for each group, the programme of set supporting classes,

50 Description of Courses Available

instructions 0,1 how to apply for selection for the subject and a list of the major and honours schools into which a student may proceed on the basis of having completed this subject will be available from the Faculty office by the end of December 1977.

GRADUATE STUDIES

POSTGRADUATE DIPLOMA IN CRIMINOLOGY For details, see Details of subjects in Criminology (p. 104 ff.). POSTGRADUATE DIPLOMA IN FRENCH STUDIES For information on this postgraduate diploma course, designed for pass graduates, see pp. 210-212. POSTGRADUATE DIPLOMA IN GEOGRAPHY For details, see Details of subjects in Geography (p. 225 ff.). POSTGRADUATE DIPLOMA IN PUBLIC POLICY For details, see Details of subjects in Political Science (p. 448 ff.).

М.А. PRELIMINARY Graduates with the degree of B.A. (ord.) may be permitted to study for M.A., after completing studies as prescribed, and passing a preliminary examination. The length of time for the M.A. ргеliтiпаrу course varies according to the qualifications of the student in the appropriate school. In general, departments require that candidates have reached the standard of the B.A. (honours) work in that school. Graduates of other faculties may in certain circumstances be admitted to M.A. preliminary courses without completing a B.A. All intending candidates should consult the appropriate department and also refer to enrolment procedures as indicated on p. 59 ff.

MASTER OF ARTS Candidature must be approved by the department and by the Faculty. Candidates for this degree must either have completed the course for the degree of Bachelor of Arts with honours or, after completing the course for the ordinary degree, have pursued further studies for two years (unless this period be reduced by permission of the Faculty in special circumstances) and have then passed a preliminary examination of the standard of the final examination for the degree with honours. The examination for the degree is usually in the form of a thesis. Intending M.A. ргеliтiпаrу and M.A. students should consult the chairmen of the department concerned, from whom the application form should be obtained. Candidature must be approved by the department and by the Faculty before enrolment will be accepted. Candidates are required to enrol and pay fees in each year over which their course extends. Candidates are not entitled to supervision or any other facilities unless they are enrolled. The time over which these courses may extend is ordinarily limited to two years for full-time and four years for part-time students.

51 Faculty of Arts

In addition to the schools in which the examination may be taken as listed in the regulation, the Faculty of Arts has approved for advanced studies Criminology, Economic History, Social Studies, Indonesian Studies, Indian Studies and Music. No candidate can be admitted to the degree of Master of Arts unless he is a graduate of at least one year's standing. The thesis should normally be submitted for examination within two years from the commencement of candidature for M.A. by full-time candidates, and within four years by part-time candidates. Except in special circumstances and with the permission of the Faculty no thesis or course work will be examined unless the candidate presents for examination within four years from the commencement of his candidature or, in the event of his having been granted leave of absence for the maximum period of one year, within five years from the commencement of his candidature. The regulation is on pp. 59-61.

M.A. EXAMINATION In most departments examination is done by thesis, three (3) copies of which must be submitted to the Arts Faculty office. Format of theses: (i) Generally should be on International Standard Size A4 paper, measuring 297mm x 210mm, typewritten, double-spaced but where this is not suitable, on foolscap size paper measuring 13in. x 8in. Students are advised to consult the department concerned as to which size paper is preferred. (ii) Sheets should be numbered consecutively and clearly; interpolated sheets should be marked distinctly — e.g. 69(a), or as the case may require. (iii) Folding diagrams or charts should be arranged so as to open out to the top and right. (iv) There should be a margin on the left hand side of at least 1t/41n. uniform on all sheets. (v) At least one copy, for deposit in the library, must be bound in such a manner that it will stand on the shelf as a book. All copies must have the pages firmly fastened within a cover. Spring-back folders must not be used. (vi) A title page must show the title of the thesis, the degree for which it is submitted, and the full name of the author as well as a statement that the thesis is the candidate's own work and that he has quoted all source material used. (vii) The name of the author must be on the spine and it is desirable to show there also the title, abbreviated if necessary.

DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY This in general is a degree for full-time research workers. A candidate must be a graduate of this or some other university recognized for the purpose, must be of such standing as may be required by the professorial Board for graduates in this Faculty, and must be accepted as such by the Professorial Board on the recommendation of the chairman if the department concerned. He must pursue for at least two years a course of 52 Description of Courses Available advanced study and research under a supervisor or supervisors appointed by the board, and on its completion must present a satisfactory thesis embodying the results of his research. The prerequisite for the Ph.D. degree is an M.A. with first or second class (division A) honours or B.A. with first or second class (division A) honours together with one year's experience in approved post-graduate work. In the latter case graduates with 1st or 2A honours would enter for the M.A. degree but, if recommended and approved by the Faculty, could apply for admission to Ph.D. candidature at the end of their first year of graduate study without having to submit a master's thesis or be tested by publication or further examination. The chairman of the department and the Dean of the Faculty are responsible for recommending acceptance by the Ph.D. Standing Committee and the matter is reported to Faculty as soon as possible afterwards.

DOCTOR OF LETTERS

This degree is gained by original work only. The candidate must be a bachelor of Arts of at least seven years' standing or a graduate in some other faculty who has had adequate training in letters, and must submit a published work on an approved subject, together with any other published or unpublished work he thinks appropriate. The degree will not be awarded unless the examiners are satisfied that the work submitted is effectively presented, and makes a substantial, sustained and original contribution to learning. Three (3) copies of the work submitted must be lodged for examination. (See Regulations 3.7 and 4.6.)

POSTGRADUATE SUPERVISION

At its meeting on 11 May 1977, the Faculty of Arts approved the following guidelines for departments and postgraduate students, concerning supervision:

For Departments and Chairmen (1) Before recommending candidature to Faculty, chairmen and supervisors should take into account the motivation applicants for higher degree study exhibit, and assess the extent to which the candidate concerned is likely to submit a thesis within a reasonable period. (2) Supervisors should be available at times mutually agreed as convenient botween the supervisor and the candidate for consultation and advice to candidates; it should be recognized that the fre- quency of consultation may vary during the various stages of the preparation of a thesis, but should be not less than once per term. (3) Departments should endeavour to give candidates as much assistance as they require within the resources of the department. (4) Departments should ensure that when supervisors are absent on sabbatical or other leave, suitable alternative arrangements for supervison are made. (5) In allocating candidates to supervisors, chairmen should bear in mind the number and present state of progress of candidates whose supervision is the responsibility of the staff member concerned. (6) In allocating candidates to supervisors, chairmen should try to ensure that the candidate and supervisor are acceptable to each other.

53 Faculty of Arts

For Students (1) Postgraduate students should enrol and re-enrol in accordance with the Regulations of the University. (2) Candidates should keep their supervisors informed of their progress. (3) Candidates should discuss progress with their supervisors at least once per term. (4) Candidates should report any difficulty concerning supervision to the chairman of the department concerned, or, in cases of particular difficulty, to the chairman of the R.A.G.S. Committee. (5) The M.A. entry for examination form, which is completed when the thesis is lodged for examination, must be signed by the supervisor to provide evidence that the supervisor is aware that the thesis has been lodged; candidates are responsible for taking the initiative to obtain the supervisor's signature or a proxy signature where the supervisor is on leave.

REGULATIONS

Regulation 3.5 — Degree of Bachelor of Arts 1. The degree of bachelor of Arts may be obtained either as an ordinary degree or as a degree with honours. 2. (1) A candidate for the degree of bachelor of Arts shall, after matriculating, pursue his studies for at least three years. and pass examinations In accordance with the conditions prescribed. (2) A candidate shall be deemed to be in the first year of his course until he has received credit for four subjects of his course and thereafter to be in the second year until he has received credit for seven subjects of his course. Save that in special cases the faculty may declare that a candidate has completed (i) his first year upon receiving credit for three subjects of his course; and (ii) has completed his second year upon receiving credit for six subjects of his course. (3) No candidate may pursue a course of study or receive credit for examinations passed unless his proposed selection of subjects and the years of his course in which they are taken have been approved by the faculty. Any subsequent alterations in the proposed course must be approved by the faculty. 2A. A candidate who passes three out of four subjects in his First Year may in accordance with the principles determined by the Faculty from time to time and approved by the Professorial Board be credited by the Faculty with having completed four subjects in his First Year having regard to his performance in the subjects taken by him in that First Year provided that the subject failed shall be recorded as a failure and the credit so granted by the faculty shall not entitle the candidate to proceed with other subjects of the course for which a pass in that subject may be a pre-requisite. 3. (1 ) No candidate may receive credit for any subject for the purposes of the degree of bachelor of Arts unless he has at least six months before presenting himself for examination in such subject, obtained grade D or higher in a language other than English or a mathematics subject at the Higher School Cer- tificate Examination; Provided that the faculty may waive these requirements if a candidate satisfies the faculty— (i) that he has achieved a sufficient standard in English and such other subjects as the faculty shall consider suitable to enable him to pursue the course successfully; and (ii) that he would suffer severe hardship if the foregoing provisions were rigidly applied (2) Notwithstanding the provisions of the preceding sub-section any candidate who has reached the age of 25 years by 31st December of the year preceding that in which he enters upon the course or has completed the course for a degree or for the 55

Faculty of Arts

diploma in Social Studies in the University shall not be required to obtain Grade D or higher In a language other than English or a mathematics subject at the Higher School Certificate Examination. 4. During each year a candidate shall attend such classes, submit written work and perform practical, laboratory, field or clinical work in accordance with the requirements prescribed by the Professorial Board on the recommendation of the faculty and published with the details of subjects unless he satisfies the faculty that he has had appropriate training elsewhere.

THE ORDINARY DEGREE 5. A candidate shall pass the annual examination in at least nine subjects in such manner as to comply with the following conditions, viz. he shall — (a) (i) pass in two majors; or (ii) pass in a combination approved by the faculty consisting of one major and an additional subject at third year level in the department in which the major is studied and two subjects of another major; and (b) pass in such other subjects as the faculty has approved pursuant to section 2 hereof. 6. A major consists of three subjects, approved by the faculty as affording a continuous and progressive course of study. Save in exceptional circumstances, the three subjects of a major must be passed in three separate years. 7. No candidate may receive credit for more than four subjects passed at any one examination. 8. The subjects of the course for the degree and the conditions on which such subjects may be taken shall be as prescribed from time to time by the substantive resolution of the Professorial Board on the recommendation of the faculty and published with the details of subjects. 8A. The faculty may allow a candidate to substitute for a subject of the course a subject of another course which subject is, in Its opinion, of at least equal standard and relevant to the candidates course of study. 9. Except by special permission of the faculty a candidate must pass the nine subjects of the course within a period of nine years from the beginning of the academic year in which he passes in the first of such subjects. 10. Where an honour examination is provided in any subject of the course for the ordinary degree, a candidate may enter for and be classed at that examination. A candidate so entering may compete for the exhibition in a subject in accordance with the conditions prescribed therefor; Provided that no candidate may be awarded an exhibition at an examination when at that examination he Is completing or might complete the course for his degree. 11. In any subject of the course for the ordinary degree which is not a subject of the course for the degree with honours the faculty may if it thinks fit prescribe that the examination shall be both for pass and for honours. 12. (a) A candidate who is taking or has taken the course for another degree In the University may also be admitted to the degree

56 Regulations

of bachelor of Arts if he has passed in at least six subjects of the Arts course approved for the purpose by the faculty in addition to the subjects required for such other degree. Pro- vided that no candidate may be so admitted unless he has passed or received credit for at least ten subjects. (b) A candidate who is taking or who has takert a course for the diploma of Social Studies and who wishes to take the course for the degree of bachelor of Arts shall submit for approval a course extending over at least four years and comprising at least thirteen subjects. (c) A candidate who is taking or has taken a course for the diploma in Journalism and who wishes to take the course for the degree of bachelor of Arts shall submit for approval a course comprising at least fourteen subjects. 13. Repealed.

DEGREE WITH HONOURS 14. An applicant for candidature for the degree of bachelor of Arts (degree with honours) shall — (а ) have completed at least one year's study and save in circumstances considered by the faculty to be special passed in three subjects of an approved course for the degree of bachelor of Arts or an approved combined course; (b) be recommended for candidature by the head of the appropriate department; (c) obtain the approval of the faculty for his candidature. 14А. (a) A candidate for the degree with honours must pursue the studies and pass the examinations prescribed In the details of subjects either in an honour school or In a combined honour course approved by the faculty as equivalent to an honour school. (b) There shall be the following honour schools — A. Classical Studies В. History C. Philosophy D. Mathematics E. English Language and Literature F. French Language and Literature G. Germanic Studies H. Economics I. Political Science J. Middle Eastern Studies K. Psychology L. Mathematical Statistics M. Russian Language and Literature N. Fine Arts O. History and Philosophy of Science P. Geography Q. Chinese R. Italian Language and Literature S. Indian Studies T. Computer Science 15. The subjects of the course must be passed In accordance with section 8 hereof so far as It is applicable and in accordance with such conditions as may be prescribed by the faculty in the details of subjects.

57 Faculty of Arts

16. (a) The faculty shall either in the details of subjects or by individual determination in special cases prescribe the conditions under which a candidate will be admitted to the work of the Second Year of an honour school or combined honour course. (b) A candidata shall— (i) at the beginning of Second Year be approved by the faculty as a candidate in a specified honour school or combined honour course; (ii) pursue to the satisfaction of the faculty the course of study prescribed for the Second, Third and Fourth Years of that school or course;1 (iii) at such annual examinations and in such subjects as may be prescribed, be placed in the class lists; and (iv) be placed in the class lists at the final examination. (c) Notwithstanding the provisions of sub-section (b) (ii) a candidate who has completed the Third Year of a combined honour course to the satisfaction of the faculty may, with the consent of the faculty, transfer from the combined honour course to one of the specified honour schools in which the candidate has satisfactorily completed part of the Third Year of the course of study for the combined honour course and may on completing the course of study prescribed for the Fourth Year of that school be admitted to the final examination as a candidate in that honour school. 17. The faculty may direct for any subject or part of a subject that the final examination shall be held at the same time as the annual examination. 18. In addition to the class lists for the final examination in each honour school there shall be a separate class list for the final examination in each combined honour course approved by the faculty. 19. No candidate may be placed in the class list at the final examination more than twice in the same school or combined honour course. 20. A candidate who has failed to obtain a place in the class list of any examination may — (a) if of sufficient merit be given credit for particular subjects in the course for the ordinary degree and in the final examination may be allowed the ordinary degree either immediately or on the completion of such further works as the faculty may determine; (b) present himself and be classed at a subsequent examination. 21. Where a candidate desires to abandon the course for the degree with honours and to proceed with the course for the ordinary degree the faculty may prescribe what further work must be completed by the candidate to qualify him for admission to the ordinary degree. 22. Repealed. 23. A person who has obtained the ordinary degree may with approval of the faculty be admitted as a candidate for the degree with honours. The faculty shall (notwithstanding section 16 hereof) prescribe what further work must be completed by the candidate before he shall be admitted to the final examination. 24. A candidate who has been placed in the class list at the final examination in any school or combined honour course may subsequently with the approval of the faculty which shall prescribe what further work 1 Тhe faculty will allow changes to be made at the end of the Second Year only In special cases in which ell the work required for the school or combined course to which the change Is made has been covered In the preceding sections of the course. 58 Regulations

(if any) must first be completed by him present himself and be classed at the final examination in any other school or combined honour course. 25. For the purposes of Regulation 6.1 prizes, exhibitions and scholarships In the subjects of the course shall be awarded on such conditions as may from time to time be prescribed by the faculty and published with the details of subjects.

[TEMPORARY REGULATION 1. A candidate who has obtained credit for any subject or subjects of the course before 31st March, 1969, may complete the course under the regulations in force on 31st December, 1968, as if those regulations had remained In force. 2. This temporary regulation shall expire on 31st March, 1978.]

Regulation 3.6 — Degree of Master of Arts 1. (1) A person may be a candidate for the degree of Master of Arts who— (a) has completed the course for the degree of bachelor of Arts with honours, or (b) after completing the course for the degree of bachelor of Arts (ordinary degree) and obtaining the recommendation of the chairman (or chairmen) of the school (or schools) within which the person proposes to pursue studies for the degree of master of Arts— (i) pursues further studies for two years or such shorter period as the faculty of Arts approves, and (ii) satisfies the faculty at a preliminary examination that the person has the ability to pursue the advanced studies required for the degree of master of Arts, or (c) having completed the course for the degree of bachelor of Arts (ordinary degree) and having qualified for a degree of master or doctor in some other faculty, satisfies the faculty of Arts of the ability of the person to pursue the advanced studies required for the degree of master of Arts, or (d) being an honours graduate In some other faculty in the discipline in which admission to master of Arts candidature is sought, or in e closely related discipline, satisfies the faculty of Arts of the ability of the person to pursue the advanced studies required for the degree of master of Arts, or (e) being a graduate in some other faculty satisfies the faculty of Arts at such preliminary examination as may be prescribed by the faculty of the ability of the person to pursue the advanced studies required for the degree of master of Arts. (2) Notwithstanding the provisions of sub-section (1) no person shall be admitted to candidature for the degree unless the faculty Is satisfied that the chairman of the department or school in which the person proposes to pursue studies for the degree has recommended the person for candidature. 2. A person recommended for candidature must, before commencing the course, obtain the approval of the faculty to that candidature and to the course proposed to be undertaken and must also obtain the approval of the faculty for any subsequent change in that course. 3. The preliminary examination for a candidate who has completed the course for the degree of bachelor of Arts (ordinary degree) or Is a

59 Faculty of Arts

graduate in some other faculty shall be prescribed by the chairman (or chairmen) of the appropriate school (ог schools) in the light of a candidate's proposed advanced studies, and may consist of selected papers at the final examination for the degree of bachelor of Arts with honours or of special papers of equivalent standard. A candidate who is admitted on grounds of having qualified for a degree of bachelor of Arts with honours in another University may be required to complete such additional work as the chairman (ог chairmen) of the appropriate school (or schools) shall prescribe before submitting for examination.

4. A person commencing further study for the preliminary examination or a candidate commencing the advanced studies for the degree shall enrol with the Registrar not later than the end of the third week of the first term of the year in which such study or studies are commenced and shall re-enrol in each year over which the course of study or studies may be extended.

5. A candidate shall pursue advanced studies and enter for examination in one, or, with the approval of the faculty, in two of the following schools —

A. Classical Studies В. History C. Philosophy D. Mathematics E. English Language and Literature F. French Language and Literature G. Germanic Studies H. Economics I. Political Science J. Middle Eastern Studies K. Psychology L. Mathematical Statistics M. Russian Language and Literature N. Fine Arts O. History and Philosophy of Science P. Geography Q. Oriental Studies R. Italian Language and Literature or in such fields of study as the faculty may approve .1

6. A candidate shall ordinarily pursue advanced studies through not less than one academic year, but if any candidate be engaged in employment other than university study the candidate may be required by the faculty to spend not less than two academic years in advanced studies.

7. (i) The examination in each school shall be prescribed by the Professorial Board in the details of subjects, and may be either wholly or in part by thesis and shall be held at a time or times to be fixed by the faculty. (ii) The candidate shall submit the subject of a thesis to the chairman (or chairmen) of the appropriate school (or schools) for

1 The faculty has approved, for the purpose of this regulation, Social Studies. Criminology, Music, Indonesian Studies, Indian Studies and Economic History.

60 Regulations

approval not later than the end of the first term of the year in which the candidate begins the advanced studies. (Ili) The thesis shall be submitted at such time as may be prescribed in the details of subjects: Provided that no candidate who Is a bachelor of Arts ordinary degree only or who is a bachelor only In some other faculty who graduated as such without honours shall In either event present for examination until three years after the date when the candidate qualifies so to graduate unless faculty on the recommendation of the appropriate chairman of department and being satified that the case is one of exceptional merit approves a reduction in this period. 7A. Repealed.

8. (I) A candidate who satisfies the examiners shall be classified as having been awarded first or second class honours. (ii) The second class shall be divided into an upper and lower division to be called Division A and Division В respectively. 9. A candidate who has fulfilled the conditions prescribed and is a bachelor of Arts or a graduate in some other faculty of not less than one year's standing may be admitted to the degree of master of Arts. 10. Notwithstanding any statute or regulation to the contrary, candidates who at or before the examination held in the fourth term 1935 obtained first or second class honours at the final examination for the degree of bachelor of Arts with honours, and who are bachelors of Arts of not less than two years standing, may be admitted to the degree of master of Arts without further examination.

Regulation 3.7 — Degree of Doctor of Letters 1. A bachelor of Arts may at any time after seven years from the completion of his course for that degree become a candidate for the degree of doctor of Letters. 2. If the faculty is satisfied that a graduate in some other faculty has had an adequate training In letters the faculty may at any time after seven years from the completion of his course for a bachelor's degree admit him as a candidate for the degree of doctor of Letters.

3. Every candidate must submit for examination an original work ,1 the subject, scope and character of which have been approved by the faculty, together with any other published or unpublished work which the candidate thinks appropriate. The examiners shall not certify that a candidate has passed the examination unless they are satisfied that the work submitted is effectively presented and makes a substantial sustained and original contribution to learning. 4. A candidate shall not submit for examination work in respect of which a degree has been awarded In any university, or, without permission of the faculty, work which has previously been presented for any such degree.

5. If the principal work submitted by a successful candidate has not I Three copies of work submitted must be lodged for examination. 61 Faculty of Arts

been published the degree shall not be conferred until it has been published in whole or in part in a form satisfactory to the faculty, unless for special reason exemption is granted by the Council on the recommendation of the faculty. 6. Candidates who have fulfilled the prescribed conditions may be admitted to the degree of doctor of Letters.

Regulation 3.8 — Diploma in Journalism

[TEMPORARY REGULATION 1. A candidate for the diploma in Journalism who under any regulation or regulations in force on the 30th day of September 1976 has passed in any of the subjects of the course for the diploma may complete the requirements for that diploma on such terms as the Professorial Board may determine and may be granted the diploma in Journalism. 2. This temporary regulation shall expire on 31st December 1980.]

Regulation 3.10 — Diploma in Criminology

1. (1) A person may be a candidate for the diploma in Criminology if he hдs- (a) qualified whether within the University or elsewhere for a degree approved for this purpose by the Professorial Board on the recommendation of the faculty of Arts; or (b) obtained a professional qualification at the tertiary level and extensive relevant experience which together are accepted by the Pro- fessorial Board on the recommendation of the faculty as a suitable alternative for the purposes of the diploma to the qualification stipulated in paragraph (a); or (c) produced evidence satisfactory to the faculty that he has had adequate training and has the ability to pursue the course and has obtained the approval of the Professorial Board to his admission; or (d) has obtained approval from the Professorial Board on the reсот- mendation of the faculty to combine the course for the diploma in Criminology with a course for a degree. (2) The approval of the Professorial Board to be obtained by a person applying for candidature pursuant to paragraph (d) of sub-section (1) shall be given only to a person who proposes to undertake not less than one year's work in addition to the period of work required for completing the course for the degree. 2. (1) A candidate shall pass in such subjects on such conditions as may be prescribed from time to time by the Professorial Board on the recommendation of the faculty and published together with the details of subjects. (2) A candidate who has obtained credit in the course for his degree for one or more of the subjects prescribed for the course for the diploma may be required to pass in lieu thereof in such other subject or subjects as may be approved by the faculty for the purpose. 3. (1) The examinations in the several subjects shall be for pass and honours, and shall include written work and fieldwork as prescribed by the faculty. (2) The subjects of the course shall be taken in such order as the faculty approves.

62 Regulations

(3) The faculty may exempt a candidate from attending the classes and passing examinations in any subject of the course on the ground of his having passed that subject at some time before he became a candidate for this diploma, or on the ground of his having passed a university or other examination of equivalent scope and standard to that subject. (4) A candidate who has fulfilled the requirements of this regulation and complied with the conditions prescribed may be granted the diploma in Criminology if he has any one of the following qualifications— (а ) he is a graduate; or (b) he has a professional qualification which has been accepted under section 1(b) of this regulation; or (c) he has qualified for a degree forming part of a combined course approved under section 1 (c) of this regulation and he has completed not less than one year's work approved by the faculty additional to that required for obtaining such qualification. 4. A candidate who has obtained credit for any subject of the course for the diploma in Criminology before the 31st day of December, 1970, may complete the course upon such terms as the faculty may determine.

Regulation 3.60 — Degree of Doctor of Philosophy 1. (1) A person who— (a) is a graduate of or qualified to graduate in— (i) the University; or (ii) some other university or institution recognized for the purpose of this regulation by the Professorial Board; and (b) is of such standing as the Professorial Board prescribes may apply to be a probationary candidate for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy by submitting— (c) a proposed course of advanced study and research to be undertaken by the applicant under the direction of a department of the University; and (d) such other information as the Professorial Board prescribes. (2) A person who is not eligible to apply under sub-section (1) may apply to be a probationary candidate for the degree of doctor of Philo- sophy by— (a) submitting a proposed course of advanced study and research to be undertaken by the applicant under the direction of a department of the University; (b) submitting such other information as the Professorial Board prescribes; and (c) satisfying the Professorial Board that the applicant had such training and has such ability that the applicant's qualification to pursue the course proposed is substantially equivalent to that of a person who is eligible to apply under sub-section (1). 2. An applicant for probationary candidature may be admitted to probationary candidature if— (a) the applicant is accepted by the Professorial Board on the recommendation of the chairman of the appropriate department and the dean of the appropriate faculty; and (b) not being a graduate of the University, the applicant becomes a matriculated student of the University. 3. (1 ) Subject to section 6 the whole of a probationary candidate's time shall be devoted to a course of advanced study and research for twelve months from a commencing date fixed by the Professorial Board-

63 Faculty of Arts

(a) under the direction of such department of the University, and under such supervision as the Professorial Board designates; and (b) subject to the prescriptions of the Professorial Board made either generally or specially in the candidate's case. (2) On the expiration of nine months after the commencing date— (а ) a probationary candidate who desires confirmation of candidature shall apply therefor in writing to the Professorial Board; and (b) the supervisor and the chairman of the designated department or the deputy-chairman if the chairman is the supervisor shall jointly report in writing to the Professorial Board on the probationary candidate's progress. (3) When a probationary candidate applies for confirmation of candidature the Professorial Board— (а ) shall consider— (i) the written application made by the probationary candidate; (ii) the report of the supervisor and the chairman of the designated department; and (iii) any other written submissions made by the candidate in support of the application; and (b) may confirm the candidature. (4) Notwithstanding Regulation 2.5А but subject to section 15 of this regulation, if no application for confirmation of candidature is made in due time, or, if application is made and the Professorial Board does not confirm the candidature, the probationary candidature shall lapse at the expiration of twelve months after the commencing date. (5) If the Professorial Board confirms the candidature the candidate shall, subject to sub-section 3(8), further pursue the course of advanced study and research in accordance with sub-section 3(1) for a further period designated by the Professorial Board being not less than twenty- four months from the anniversary of the commencing date. (6) When applying for confirmation, or at a later date, a candidate— who, prior to the commencing date, has had experience in research relevant to the course of advanced study and research for a continuous period of not less than three months after successfully completing a course for a degree requiring full-time study for not less than four academic years—may apply to the Professorial Board to fix a period of confirmed candidature of less than twenty-four months. (7) If the supervisor and the chairman of the designated department or the deputy chairman if the chairman is the supervisor jointly— (a) report that the candidate's progress has been satisfactory; and (b) recommend as a period of confirmed candidature a number of months less than twenty-four and not less than twelve the Professorial Board shall consider the application. (8) If the candidate's previous experience in research is acceptabIe to the Professorial Board, the Professorial Board may fix a reduced period of confirmed candidature of less than twenty-four months but the reduction shall not exceed twelve months or the number of whole months in what the Professorial Board considers to be the longest continuous period of previous experience in research, whichever Is the shorter. 4. (1) On the application of the candidate and after considering a joint report on the candidate's progress by the supervisor and the chairman of the designated department, the Professorial Board may from time to time extend the period of confirmed candidature but not so that the aggregate of probationary candidature and confirmed candidature shall exceed-

64 Regulations

(a) where the period of candidature has not been reduced, sixty months; and (b) where the period of candidature has been reduced under sub-section 3(8), the number of months derived by subtracting from sixty the number of months by which the candidature was reduced. (2) Notwithstanding sub-section (1), if the supervisor and the chairman of the designated department certify that exceptional circumstances have impeded the candidate in the course and that it would be unjust to the candidate, having regard to the efforts made by the candidate to pursue the course, to limit the confirmed candidature to the maximum period referred to in sub-section (1) the Professorial Board may, on the recommendation of not less than ten of its members, extend the period of confirmed candidature beyond any maximum period referred to in sub-section (1). (3) The Professorial Board may exercise the power conferred by this section before or after the expiration of any period of confirmed candidature. 5. (1) During the combined period of probationary and confirmed candidature a candidate shall devote at least twelve consecutive months of candidature to the course of advanced study and research in the University. (2) In exceptional circumstances the Professorial Board may approve for the purposes of sub-section (1) non-consecutive periods which in the aggregate amount to at least twelve months, and a candidate who devotes that aggregate period to the course of advanced study and research in the University shall be deemed to have complied with sub-section (1). 6. (1 ) A person including a full-time candidate may be accepted by the Professorial Board as a part-time candidate if the Professorial Board is satisfied that any occupation in which that person is engaged leaves that person substantially free to pursue the course under the direction of a department of the University. (2) A part-time candidate shall pursue the course for such periods of probationary candidature and confirmed candidature as the Professorial Board shall determine. (3) In the application of section 3 in relation to a part-time candidate— (a) in sub-sections 3(1 ) and 3(4) the expression "twenty-four months" shall be substituted for the expression "twelve months"; (b) in sub-section 3(2) the expression "twenty-one months" shall be substituted for the expression "nine months"; (c) in sub-sections 3(5) and 3(6). the expression "forty-eight months" shall be substituted for the expression "twenty-four months"; and (d) in sub-sections 3(7) and 3(8) the expression "forty-eight months" shall be substituted for the expression "twenty-four months" and the expression "twenty-four months" shall be substituted for the expression "twelve months". (4) In the application of sub-section 4(1 ) in relation to a part-time candidate the expression "one-hundred and twenty" shall be substituted for the expression "sixty" wherever it occurs. (5) in the application of section 5 in relation to a part-time candidate the expression "twenty-four" shall be substituted for the expression "twelve". (6) A part-time candidate may apply to the Professorial Board to become a full-time candidate and the Professorial Board may permit the candidate so to do on such terms and conditions as it sees fit consistent with

65 с Faculty of Arts

the purposes of the provisions of this regulation relating to full-time candidates. 7. (1) Regulation 4.6 shall apply in relation to a candidate subject to the following provisions. (2) A candidate may present a thesis for the degree of doctor of Philosophy— (а ) not earlier than one month before the expiration of the period of the confirmed candidature; and (b) not later than the expiration of the period of the confirmed candidature including any period for which it was extended. (3) A candidate shall present in the form prescribed by the Professorial Board such summaries of the thesis as the Professorial Board prescribes. (4) A candidate shall state generally in a preface to the thesis and specifically in notes— (a) the sources from which the candidate's information is derived; and (b) the extent to which the candidate has used the work of others and in general terms the portions of the work which the candidate claims as original. (5) A candidate who presents a thesis based on work carried out in collaboration with another person shall indicate the candidate's own share of the work. (6) A candidate may not present as the candidate's thesis any work for which a degree, diploma or licence or similar distinction has been conferred on or granted to the candidate in this or another University or institution but the candidate will not be precluded from incorporating such work in whole or in part in the thesis if— (a) the candidate has been granted, on the recommendation of the chairman of the designated department, permission by the Professorial Board so to do; and (b) the candidate indicates in the thesis the part of the previous work which has been so incorporated. (7) There shall be a panel of two examiners who are or have been, within the five years previous to their appointment, actively associated with— (a) a university; (b) an institution of Higher learning; or (c), a research institution approved for the purpose of this section by the Professorial Board, at least one of which examiners shall be external to the University. (8) The chairman of the designated department, not being an examiner, shall act as chairman of the panel. (9) The supervisor of the candidate shall not be appointed as an examiner. (10) If the chairman of the designated department is an examiner, the Council, after consultation with the Professorial Board, shall appoint a member of the full-time teaching or research staff of the University to act as chairman of the panel. (11) The chairman of the panel shall not have a vote. (12) A third examiner appointed pursuant to Regulation 4.6.3(3) shall be external to the University. (13) If a second and final examination of a candidate's thesis is required, the examiners appointed for this purpose shall be the persons who previously served as examiners for the first examination, unless the Professorial Board determines otherwise. 66 Regulations

8. A candidate whose thesis has been judged to be satisfactory by the examiners and who has fulfilled the prescribed conditions may be admitted to the degree of doctor of Philosophy. 9. (1) Where a thesis has been judged unsatisfactory by the examiners but the examiners have recommended that the candidate (whether full- time or part-time) be given an opportunity to re-submit the thesis for re-examination, the Professorial Board may, notwithstanding section 4 sub-section (1), upon application to the Professorial Board extend the candidate's confirmed candidature for a period immediately ensuing and not exceeding twelve months and thereupon the candidate shall be required to re-submit the thesis for a second examination within the period for which the confirmed candidature is so extended. (2) Notwithstanding sub-section (1), if the chairman of the designated department certifies that exceptional circumstances— (a) are likely to delay the candidate in preparing the thesis for re- submission; or (b) have prevented the candidate from so preparing the thesis and that it would be unjust to the candidate, having regard to the efforts made by the candidate to prepare the thesis, to limit the confirmed candidature to the period referred to in sub-section (1) the Professorial Board may, on the recommendation of not less than ten of its members, further extend the period of confirmed candidature beyond the period referred to in sub-section (1). (3) The Professorial Board may exercise the power conferred by sub- section (2) before or after the expiration of the period referred to in sub-section (1). 10. in the computation of periods of candidature under this regulation, the only period which shall not be counted shall be any period for which a candidate was granted leave of absence from his course. 11. The Professorial Board may on the recommendation of the chairman of the designated department— (a) require a candidate as part of the course to attend such lectures and practical work as the Professorial Board determines; or (b) subject to section 5 grant permission for the candidate to be absent from the University for such periods not exceeding twelve months in any one instance as the Professorial Board determines if the chairman of the designated department recommends that it is essential for the candidate's advanced study and research and the Professorial Board is satisfied that supervision of the candidate's work satisfactory to it can be maintained; or (c) in special circumstances grant to a candidate leave of absence from the course in periods of whole months. 12. In this regulation— (a) "department of the University" means any department within the meaning of Statute 2.25 and any other institution which the Council may determine to be a department for the purposes of this regulation; and (b) "chairman" in relation to a department which is not within Statute 2.25 means the person designated by the Council as the chairman of that department for the purposes of this regulation. 13. Regulation 2.5А shall not apply when the Professorial Board exercises any discretion conferred by sub-sections 3(3) and 3(8) and sections 4 and 8.

Faculty of Arts

14. Nothing in this regulation precludes the appointment of a chairman of a department as supervisor. 15. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this regulation where a late application for probationary candidature, confirmed candidature or an extension of confirmed candidature is received by the Registrar, the Professorial Board may ante-date the commencing date of probationary candidature, of confirmed candidature or of an extension of a confirmed candidature (as the case may be) so that the applicant is not adversely affected by the delay but the ante-dating shall not exceed two months prior to the date of the receipt by the Registrar of the application unless the Professorial Board is satisfied that the delay was not caused by any omission of the candidate. 16. The Professorial Board shall prescribe the time within which— (a) application for confirmation of canidature may be made by— (i) full-time probationary candidates; and (ii) part-time probationary candidates; (b) such application shall be considered by the Professorial Board; and (C) application may be made under section 9 for an extension of confirmed candidature in order to re-submit a thesis. 17. A candidate for the degree of doctor of Philosophy who was enrolled as such before the coming into operation of this regulation and who qualifies in accordance with the regulations in force on the 31st day of December 1976 may be admitted to the degree of doctor of Philosophy.

Regulation 3.85 — Post-graduate Diploma in French Studies 1. A person may be a candidate for the post-graduate diploma In French studies if— (a) (1) he is a graduate in Arts of the University of Melbourne; or (ii) he has an equivalent degree recognized by the Professorial Board on the recommendation of the faculty of Arts for the purposes of the diploma; and (b) (i) he has completed a course in French as a major subject for his degree; or (ii) he has completed other studies in French approved by the faculty as being the equivalent thereto; and (c) he has obtained the consent of the faculty to his candidature. 2. (1) The candidate shall— (a) pursue a course of advanced studies for at least one academic year as a full-time student or two асадетiс years as a part-time student and shall attend lectures and classes as may be prescribed by the Professorial Board on the recommendation of the faculty and published in the details of subjects; and (b) pass examinations prescribed by the faculty. 3. The courses of study available, the duration of each course and the syllabus of each subject of the examination shall be prescribed annually by the Professorial Board on the recommendation of the faculty and published with the details of subjects. 4. (1) On the completion of one year of part-time studies to the satisfaction of the faculty candidates may be awarded a certificate.

68 Regulations

(2) Candidates who have fulfilled the conditions prescribed may be granted the diploma in French Studies.

Regulation 3.85А — Post-graduate Diploma in Geography 1. A person may be a candidate for the post-graduate diploma in Geo- graphy who—. (a) (1) is a graduate in Arts, Science, or Economics and Commerce of the University; or (ii) has an equivalent degree recognized by the Professorial Board on the recommendation of the faculty of Arts for the purposes of the diploma; or (iii) has completed a course approved by the Professorial Board on the recommendation of the faculty for the purposes of the diploma; and (b) (i) has completed a major as defined In Regulation 3.5.6. in Geo- graphy; or (ii) has completed a course in a related discipline approved by the faculty. 2. A candidate shall— (a) pursue a course of advanced studies for at least one academic year as a full-time student or two academic years as a part-time student, and shall attend such lectures and classes, and perform such laboratory or field work as may be prescribed by the Professorial Board on the recommendation of the faculty and published in the details of subjects; and (b) (i) pass the examinations prescribed by the Professorial Board on the recommendation of the faculty, or (ii) be assessed to the satisfaction of the faculty in the work of the course as a whole. 3. The courses of study available. the duration of each course, the syllabus for each subject, and the examination or assessment requirements for each subject shall be prescribed annually by the Professorial Board on the recommendation of the faculty and publIshed with the details of subjects. 4. (1) On the completion of one year of part-time studies to the satisfaction of the faculty a candidate may be awarded a certificate. (2) A candidate who has fulfilled the conditions prescribed may be granted the diploma In Geography.

[TEMPORARY REGULATION 1. A candidate who, before 1st January 1977, has successfully completed at least one year of a preliminary course for the degree of master of Arts, may, with faculty's permission, qualify for the award of the diploma in Geography by undertaking and completing before 31st December 1979 one year of part-time studies in Geography approved by the faculty. 2. This temporary regulation shall expire on the 31st December 1979.]

Regulation 3.856 — Post-graduate Diploma in Public Policy 1. A person may be a candidate for the post-graduate diploma in Public Policy who-

69 Faculty of Arts

(a) (i) is a graduate in Arts of the University of Melbourne; or (ii) has an equivalent degree recognized by the Professorial Board on the recommendation of the faculty of Arts for the purposes of the diploma; and (b) (i) has completed a major in Politics as defined in Regulation 3.5.6. or a course deemed by the faculty to be its equivalent; or (ii) has qualifications which demonstrate a special interest in public policy; or (iii) has worked for not less than two years in a relevant occupation; and (c) has obtained the consent of the faculty to candidature. 2. (1) A candidate shall— (a) pursue a course of advanced studies for at least one academic year as a full-time student or for two academic years as a part-time student; (b) attend lectures and classes as may be prescribed by the Professorial Board on the recommendation of the faculty and published in the details of subjects; and (c) pass the examinations prescribed. 3. The courses of study available, the duration of each course and the syllabus of each subject of examination shall be prescribed annually by the Professorial Board on the recommendation of the faculty and published with the details of subjects. 4. (1) On the completion of one year of part-time studies to the satisfaction of the faculty a candidate may be awarded a certificate. (2) A candidate who has fulfilled the conditions prescribed may be granted the diploma in Public Policy.

70 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS NOTE: Due to budgetary uncertainties at the time of going to press, all students should note the possibility of certain changes occurring to these details of subjects. Students will be notified of necessary changes by announcements placed on department and official notice- boards prior to the commencement of first term. STUDENT WORK-LOAD. See p. 2. EXAMINATIONS Subject to dispensation by the Faculty in special cases, no candidate shall be admitted to examination in any subject of the course or to the final examination for the degree with honours unless the candidate either: (a) has attended such classes, submitted such written work and performed such practical, laboratory, field or clinical work as may be prescribed by the chairman of the department concerned; or (b) the Faculty is satisfied that the candidate has had appropriate training elsewhere. Students will note that many departments have instituted or wish to institute changes from the traditional pattern of one or more three-hour examinations held at the end of third-term. The examinations as stated in the Details of Subjects will represent the maximum number and the most formal type of examinations demanded by any department. Any variation from the requirements as stated in the Handbook will thus operate in favour of students, i.e., will lessen the amount and provide a more varied flexible type of assessment than that formally stated. All cases of variation, will be published and prominently displayed on departmental notice- boards no later than 31 March in any year. Written work required as an integral part of a course as set out in the details of subjects or published on departmental noticeboards must be completed by the dates specified, since the time available for such work is an essential component of the requirements themselves. Students who, without the formal permission of the chairman of the department, fail to complete such written work by the specified dates, may have their written work refused by the department, or subjected to such deductions as have been published on the departmental notice- board. Students who fail to submit their written work or whose written work submitted after the specified dates is not accepted by the department may be refused credit for the subject. Such students have the right to appeal to Faculty through the Sub Dean before final publication of their results, and Faculty will decide whether or not or under what conditions credit for the subject may be granted. Details of subjects are arranged in alphabetical order of departments. The requirements for honours and MA candidates will be found immediately after the pass requirements in each section. Books marked with an asterisk are essential and students should buy them. Students are advised to consult their tutors or lecturers before buying books not so marked. Faculty wishes to distinguish clearly between grade 1, grade 2 and grade 3 subjects. As a result all subjects have been differentiated by the use of a numerical and alphabetical code. The number 1, 2, 3 or 4, indicates the grade of subject. The letter A. B, etc. indicates the nature of the subject. e.g. History 2G is Australian History as a grade 2 subject. History 3G is Australian History as a grade 3 subject. 71 Faculty of Arts

Students then will not be able to retain credit for any two or more subjects differentiated by the same alphabetical letter or in some cases by the same title, except where different units are chosen in different years. e.g. International Relations 2, and International Relations 3 In 1977, the Faculty agreed to a proposal to grade results in subjects in the pass degree, A, В. C and D, in descending order of excellence. Faculty has not, at the time of printing finalised details of this proposal, but hopes that it may be implemented for the 1978 annual examinations. Further details will be advertised on Faculty and departmental notice boards during the course of 1978.

THE HORWOOD LANGUAGE CENTRE Director: Dr T. J. Quinn, M.A. (Monash), Ph.D. (Ohio State), B.A. The Norwood Language Centre provides the language laboratory facilities for a wide range of courses offered by various Arts departments. In addition, the Centre provides special purpose foreign language courses taken by honours and post-graduate students in different faculties, and offers a special programme in English for Foreign Students. Facilities for self tuition in a variety of languages are offered, and the Centre collaborates in the conduct of vacation courses in a number of languages. COURSES OFFERED 102-301 French Reading Course 102-302 German Reading Course • 102-201 Science French • 102-202 Science German •102-203 Science Russian English for Foreign Students

'These courses are normally taken only by students iп technical faculties. For details, refer to the Faculty of Science Handbook.

FOREIGN LANGUAGE READING COURSES FOR HONOURS ARTS STUDENTS 102-301 FRENCH READING COURSE This subject may not be offered if the enrolment is less than five. A course of two classes per week throughout the year, plus tutorial assistance and language laboratory practice as required. SYLLABUS The aim of the course is to enable honours students and research workers to read and translate source material in their field of study. To this end the course will provide intensive instruction in the sound, word and sentence structure of French, practice in translation into English of extracts from a wide range of relevant publications, such as articles, textbooks, commentaries etc. selected in collaboration with the departments concerned. The course presumes no previous knowledge of the language. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: •Brichant C French Grammar: The Key to Reading, Prentice-Hall Inc 1968 or later ed. 72 The Norwood Language Centre

Brichant C French for the Humanities, Prentice-Hall Inc 1968 or later ed. Further notes and texts will be provided by the Language Centre. ' Нагrаp ś New ShОГt Вr French and English Dictionary Part I French- English, Harrap 1967 or later ed. Recommended for reference: Brereton G The Concise French Verb Book, ULP 1965 or later ed. EXAMINATION Regular written assignments and a final test will be given during the course, and performance in these will be taken into account in determining examination results. In addition, an examination of not more than one 3-hour paper may be set.

102-302 GERMAN READING COURSE This subject may not be offered if the enrolment is less than five. A course of two classes per week throughout the year plus tutorial assistance and language laboratory practice as required.

SYLLABUS The aim of the course is to enable honours students and research workers to read and translate source material In their field of study. To this end the course will provide intensive Instruction in the sound, word and sentence structure of German, practice In translation Into English of extracts from a wide range of relevant pub ications, such as articles, textbooks, commentaries etc. selected in collaboration with the depart- rents concerned. The course presumes no previous knowledge of the language. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: 'Lengenscheidi"s Concise Dictionary German-English, Hodder & Stough- ton 1967 or later edition. Further notes and texts will be provided by the Language Centre. EXAMINATION Regular written assignments and a final test will be given during the course, and performance in these will be taken into account in determining examination results. In addition, an examination of not more than one 3-hour paper may be set.

ENGLISH FOR FOREIGN STUDENTS This programme takes the form of a number of small group classes and is intended to help overseas and migrant students who have difficulties with English. A reading and composition course, "Proficiency in English", should be of particular interest to Arts Students. Help with essays and assignments is also available and programmed language laboratory courses are available to help students with listening and speaking difficulties. Further details are available from the lorwood Language Centre. 73 Faculty of Arts

DEPARTMENT OF CLASSICAL STUDIES Chairman of Department: Professor G. W. CLARKE, B.A. (Oxon.), M.A. (N.2. and lelb.), Litt.D., F.A.H.A. Professor: Professor G. H. GELLTE, M.A., BEd., F.A.H.A.

ORDINARY DEGREE (Details for the degree with honours are set out at the end of this section.) SUBJECTS OFFERED Ancient Greek parts 1, 2 and 3. Latin parts 1A and 2A. Latin parts 1, 2 and 3. Modem Greek 1A. Modern Greek 1. Modern Greek 26, 38. Modern Greek 2C, 3C (not offered in 1978). Classical Studies 1A. Classical Studies 2В, 38. Classical Studies 2C, ЭC (not offered in 1978). GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Students are required to submit such writtеп work as is prescribed during the year. SYLLABUS The syllabus for each part of Ancient and Modern Greek and Latin includes: (i) Prescribed authors; (ii) Unprepared translations; (iii) Historical and literary studies. In addition, parts 1A, 2A, 1 and 2 have regular language classes. Each examination on prescribed authors may Include questions on section (iii) of the syllabus.

104-101 ANCIENT GREEK PART 1 N.B. Students intending to take this course must either have passed Ancient Greek at Higher School Certificate (or reached an equivalent standard) or have attended the Ancient Greek summer school held during February of each year. Students intending to take the summer school must approach the department before the end of January. Students who have passed the Higher School Certificate should consult the department about their programme early in February. SYLLABUS A course of basic training in the Greek language along with the study of selected texts designed to provide an introduction to Greek tragedy.

BOOKS Prescribed textbooks for 1978: •North & Hillard Greek Prose Composition, Rivingtons •Nairn & Nairn Greek through reading, Macmillan 74 Classical Studies

•Euripides Medea, ed Elliott, Oxford Paperback Greek Tragedies, Vol 1 ed Grene and Lattimore, Phoenix 'Plato Martyrdom of Socrates, ed Doherty, OUP Harvey P Oxford Companion to Classical Literature, OUP 'Liddell & Scott Greek-English Lexicon, Abridged version, OUP or preferably (for those intending to do honours work), the unabridged version.

OPTIONAL ADDITIONAL WORK (see p. 27).

Prescribed textbook: Herodotus Croesus of Lydia, ed McKay K L, ANU EXAMINATION Not more than two 3-hour papers: written work done during the year and class-tests will be considered in determining the result.

104-201 ANCIENT GREEK PART 2 (PASS) Three classes per week. A study will be made of Herodotuś Histories, the later plays of Sophocles, and Aristophanes as literary critic.

BOOKS Prescribed textbooks for 1978: •Herodotus Book VIII, ed J Enoch Powell, CUP •Herodotus The Histories, tr de Selincourt, Penguin •Sophocles Electra, ed Kells, CUP •Aristophanes Frogs, ed Stanford, Macmillan •Aristophanes The Frogs and other plays, tr Barrett, Penguin Littlefield D J Twentieth Century Interpretations of the Frogs, Spectrum

WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit two essays of up to 3,000 words each during the course of the year. EXAMINATION Up to two 3-hour papers. Written work done during the year will be considered in determining the result.

104-301 ANCIENT GREEK PART 3 (PASS) Four classes per week. A study will be made of Herodotus' Histories, the later plays of Sophocles, and Aristophanes as literary critic. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks for 1978: As for Ancient Greek Part 2 (Pass), together with material to be supplied by the department. WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit two essays of up to 3,000 words each during the course of the year.

75 Faculty of Arts

EXAMINATION Up to two 3-hour papers. Written work done during the year will be considered in determining the result.

104-112 LATIN PART 1A Four classes per week, including sessions in the language laboratory. Facilities for private study in the language laboratory will also be available. The course will be adapted to the needs of those who have little or no acquaintance with Latin. It will qualify students to enter Latin 2A. Individual counselling and recommended reading will be given to such students to assist in the transition from Latin 1 Á to Latin 2A. SYLLABUS (a) The accidence and syntax of Classical Latin. (b) Readings In the literature of Classical and Mediaeval Latin. (c) An introduction to the study of Latin manuscripts and the transmission of texts.

BOOKS (a) For preliminary reading: Grant M The World of Rome, Mentor (b) Prescribed textbooks for 1978: •Sweet, Craig & Seligson Latin: A Structural Approach, University of Michigan Press •Morris S & Furber E 0 Heredites, Harrap London •Reynolds and Wilson Scribes and Scholars, 2nd ed OUP paperback 1974 •Langenscheidt's Shower Latin Dictionary, ed Handford & Herberg, Hodder and Stoughton (c) Recommended for reference: Maunde Thompson E An Introduction to Greek and Latin Palaeography, OUP Highet Gilbert The Classical Tradition, Galaxy Bolgar R R The Classical Heritage, Harper Torchbooks Weiss R The Renaissance Discovery of Classical Antiquity, Blackwell Additional reading material will be supplied by the department. WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit one essay (up to 2,500 words) or equivalent assessment during the course of the year. EXAMINATION Not more than two 3-hour papers. Written work and class tests done during the year will be considered in determining the result.

104-102 LATIN PART 1 N.B. Students intending to take this course must have passed Latin at Higher School Certificate, or reached an equivalent standard. Four classes per week. 76 Classical Studies

A study will be made of the social, political and literary life in Rome at the period of the collapse of the Roman Republic. This will take the form of a study of three major texts and a series of classes on Roman social history. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks for 1978: 'Virgil Aeneid VI as in Virgil Aeneid I-VI, ed Williams R D, Macmillan Virgil Acneid, tr Copley, Library of Liberal Arts, Bobbs Merrill or Virgil Aenoid, tr Jackson Knight, Penguin 'Cicero Pro Caelio, ed Austin, 3rd ed OUP Selected Political Speeches of Cicero, tr Grant, Penguin •Cate!lus, ed Quinn, Macmillan The poems of Catullus, tr Whigham, Penguin Boak A E R and Sinnigen W G A history of Rome to AD 565, Macmillan, New York 'Mountford J F Bradley's Arnold Latin Prose Composition, Longmans Harvey P Oxford Companion to Classical Literature, OUP •Langenscheidt's Shorter Latin Dictionary, ed Handford & Herberg, Hodder & Stoughton or (for those intending to pursue an honours course) 'Lewis & Short Latin Dictionary, OUP Source material for Roman social history will be supplied by the department. OPTIONAL ADDITIONAL WORK (see p. 27). A course of seminars on the techniques of Latin poetry. Material will be supplied by the department. EXAMINATION Up to two 3-hour papers. Written work done during the year and class- tests will be considered in determining the result.

104-222 LATIN PART 2A

Prerequisite: 104-112 Latin Part 1A. Four classes per week. SYLLABUS As for 104-102. BOOKS As for 104-102. OPTIONAL ADDITIONAL WORK (as for 104-102) A course of seminars on the techniques of Latin poetry. Students are strongly recommended to participate in these seminars. EXAMINATION As for 104-102. N.B. Upon satisfactory completion of Latin 2A, students who wish to proceed further with Latin will be eligible to enrol for 104-302, Latin Part 3 (i.e. the normal sequence for such students is Latin 1A, 2A, 3). 77 FacuIty of Arts

Individual counseling and recommended reading will be given to such students to assist in the transitions from Latin 1A to Latin 2A, and Latin 2Ato Latin 3.

104-202 LATIN PART 2 (PASS) Three classes per week. SYLLABUS Studies will be concerned with the literature of the republic and early principate. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks for 1978: •Plautus Miles Gloriosus, ed Hammond, Harvard UP 1970 •Plautus The Rope and other plays, tr Watling, Penguin •Plautus The Pot of Gold and other plays, tr Watling, Penguin •Horace Opera, ed Wickham and Garrod, Oxford Classical Texts •Cicero Philippics l-ll, ed Denniston, OUP WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit two essays of up to 3,000 words each during the course of the year. EXAMINATION Up to three 3-hour papers. Written work done during the year and class tests will be considered in determining the result.

104-302 LATIN PART 3 (PASS) Four classes per week. SYLLABUS Studies will be concerned with the literature of the republic and early principate. BOOKS (a) Prescribed textbooks for 1978: As for Latin 2 (Pass) (b) Books for extensive reading: •Virgil Georgics, ed Page, Macmillan •Propertius Carmina, ed Barber, Oxford Classical Texts •Tibullus Elegies, ed & pub'. Guy Lee, St Johns College Cambridge (c) Special study: Material will be supplied by the department. WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit two essays of up to 3,000 words each during the course of the year. EXAMINATION Up to three 3-hour papers. Written work done during the year aid class- tests will be considered in determining the result. 78 Classical Studies

104-111 MODERN GREEK PART 1 Four classes per week, two of which will be lectures on the prescribed literature. An additional oral language class may be available. The course presupposes a level of linguistic competence and literacy equivalent to a pass at H.S.C., and students seeking admission to the course must either have passed H.S.C. Modern Greek or have displayed a high degree of competence in the department's Advanced Summer School and the ensuing examination. Details of Summer School will be available on request from the department from December. SYLLABUS A. Language—Oral, aural and written work. В. Literature— (i) Intensive textual analysis of selected 20th century works (one novel. two collections of poetry and one modern play). (ii) Broader historical examination (based on selected texts) of trends In 19th/early 20th century literature. BOOKS (I) Prescribed texts for intensive critical study: a) Novel •Tachtsis K To trito stelani, Ermis b) Poetry • Kavafis K P Piimata (1898-1933), Ikaros •Sikelianos A Antidoto, Galaxia c) Drama •Skourtis Y O Karagiozis para ligo veiiris, Kedros (ii) Texts representative of trends in 19th/early 20th century literature for historical study: a) Poetry—selections from •Christopoulos A Lirke, Ermis •Solomos D Aponta, Ermis •Kaivos A Odes, Viper •Palamas K Antholyia, ed Katsimbalis & Karandonis, Estias b) Prose—developments to be studied around the following texts (students are expected to read all of the texts, but for examination purposes may choose three for intensive study) •Makriyiannis I А ротпігпоnеv гл ata •Roidis E I Papissa banna •Vikelas D Loukis Laras •Kondilakis I O Patouchвs •Karkavitsas A Loyia tis pions, Estias or Viper •Papadiamantis A I finisse •Theotokis K Katadikos, Keimena or Viper all published (unless otherwise indicated) by Galaxie and "Viper" (Papyros-Larousse)—either edition acceptable. (iii) Reference books: in addition to the above prescribed texts, students will find it useful to equip themselves with the following reference books:

79 Faculty of Arts

Pring J T The Oxford Dictionary of Modern Greek, OUP Penguin-Hallenews Anglo-ellinikon lexicon, Hellenews Triandafil lid is Mikri neoelliniki grammatiks, Thessaloniki Vostantzoglou Th Analiiikon orthografikon lexikon Monoyiou D N et al Sintaktiko dimotikis, Athens College Browning R Medieval and Modern Greek, Hutchinson Politis L !storla tis Nees Ellinikis Logotechnias, Thessaloniki or Politis L. A History of Modern Greek Literature, OUP Campbell J & Sherrard P Modern Greece, Ernest Benn Svoronos N Episkopisi tis neoellinikis istorias, Themelio

WRITTEN WORK Regular language assignments which will count towards language assessment. A minimum of two literature essays (2,000-2,500 words) which will count towards the final literature mark.

ASSESSMENT Term language tests and an oral test at the end of the year. Up to two 3-hour literature examinations. Students written work throughout the year will also count towards their final mark. Language and literature are assessed separately and students must pass in both in order to attain an overall pass.

104-121 MODERN GREEK 1A

Six classes per week including two language laboratory sessions. This course aims to develop practical skills in understanding. speaking, reading and writing Modern Greek in students with little or no knowledge of the language, and to serve as a basic introduction to Modern Greek history and culture. The course is not available to students with H.S.C. Modern Greek or its equivalent. Permission to enrol is subject to interview with the lecturer in charge during the enrolment period. The course may serve as an introduction to Modern Greek 2A (syllabus as for 104-111 with separate language class).

SYLLABUS Oral, aural and written language work. One of the language classes each week will be devoted to reading (from suitably simplified texts) and discussion of selected aspects of Modern Greek history, literature and traditional culture.

BOOKS Bien P Demotic Greek, New England (audiovisual material provided by department and Language Centre) Syllogos Didaskalisson Ta Nea Ellinika yia xenous, University of Thes- saloniki Farmakidis A Graded Modern Greek Readers, McGill University Pring J T The Oxford Dictionary of Modern Greek, OUP Other course-material will be provided by the department. 80 Classical Studies

WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit regular written work as specified by the lecturer. ASSESSMENT Written language work submitted throughout the year will count towards final assessment, along with written and aural/oral term-tests, and one 3-hour examination testing both language and background studies.

104-211 MODERN GREEK 26 (PASS)

104-311 MODERN GREEK 38 (PASS) (This course will be offered in 1978.) For second year students four classes per week, two of which will be lectures on the prescribed literature. An additional oral language class may be available. A pass in Modern Greek 1 is the prerequisite for this course. For third year students four classes per week, two of which will be lectures on the prescribed literature, plus a fortnightly seminar on the history of the language question. An additional oral language class may be available. A pass in Modern Greek 2C is the prerequisite for this course.

SYLLABUS

A. Language—Oral, aural and written work. B. Literature—(1) Cretan Renaissance Poetry. (2) Poetry and Prose of the Generation of 1920: Kariotakis, Varnalis, Kazantzakis. (3) The post-war short story.

BOOKS (1) Cretan Renaissance Poetry a. Theatrical poetry •Chortatsis G Erofili, Galaxies •Chortatsis G Katzourbos, Eteria kritikoi lstorlkon Meleton •Kornaros V 1 Thisia tou Avraam, Ermis b. Verse romance Kornaros V Erotokritos, Book 11, Galaxias (2) Poetry and Prose of the Generation of 1920: Kariotakis, Varnalis, Kazantzakis a. Poetry 'Kariotakis K (selections from) Pilmete & peza, Ermis •Varnalis K (selections from) Piitika, kedros •Kazantzakis N (selections from) Odissia b. Prose •The novels of Kazantzakis with special reference to Kapetan Michalis

81 Faculty of Arts

(3) The Post-War Short Story Students are expected to read all of the following collections, but for assessment purposes will be allowed to choose three for intensive study.

'Chatzis D To tolos tis mikris mas polis, Diogenis •Vasilikos V To fillo, to pigadi, to angeliasma, Eleftheroudakis 'Samarakis A To diavatirio, Eleftheroudakis 'loannou G I sarkofagos, Ermis •Valtines Th To sinaxari tou Andrea Kordopati, Kedros 'Chakkas M O tifekioforos tou echthrou, Kedros (4) For the third year seminar on the history of the language question students will be required to research a given topic and present a paper on it to the class. All students will be required to read: •Solomos D O Dielogos tou piiri, Zacharopoulos •Psicharis Y To taxidi mou, Ermis

WRITTEN WORK For second year students: Regular language assignments which will count towards language assessment. A minimum of two literature essays (2,500-3,000 words) which will count towards the final literature mark. For third year students: As above plus a seminar paper on the history of the language question which will count towards assessment of this part of the course.

ASSESSMENT For second year students: Term language tests and an oral test at the end of the year. Up to two 3-hour literature examinations. Students written work throughout the year will also count towards their final mark. Language and literature are assessed separately and students must pass in both in order to attain an overall pass. For third year students: As above plus a test on the history of the language question at the end of the year, which along with the seminar paper will form the assessment of this section of the course. Third year students must pass in all three separate sections of the course in order to attain art overall pass.

104-212 MODERN GREEK 2C (PASS)

104-312 MODERN GREEK ЭC (PASS) (This course will not be offered in 1978, but will be offered in 1979.) For second year students four classes per week, two of which will be lectures on the prescribed literature. An additional oral language class may be available. A pass in Modern Greek I is the prerequisite for this course. For third year students four classes per week, two of which will be lectures on the prescribed literature, plus a fortnightly seminar on the history of the language question. An additional oral language class may be available. A pass in Modern Greek 28 is the prerequisite for this course. 82 Classical Studies

sYLLABUs A. Language — Oral, aural and written work. B. Literature — (1) Poetry and prose of the Generation of 1930. (2) Modern Greek folksong. (3) Nineteenth century drama. BOOKS (1) Poetry and prose of the Generation of 1930: a) Poetry •Seferis G Piimata, Ikaros (selections from) • Elitis 0 lutos o protos, Ikaros Embirikos A Endochora, Plias (selections from) •Ritsos Y Epitafios, tredros b) Prose—Students are expected to read all of the following, but for examination purposes will be allowed to choose three for more intensive study. •Mirlvilis S O Vasilis o Arvanitis, Ermis •Venezis 1 To noumero 31328, Estias Eroica, Karavias Poiltis К ' Theotokas Y Evripidis Pendozalis, Estias •Karagatsis M To megalo sinaxarl, Estias •Terzakls A 1 menexedenia poh tia, Estias 'Prevelakis P Ti chroniko mias politias, Ga'axis •Beratis Y To platl potami, Ermis (2) Modern Greek folksong: •Peranthis M Ellinika dimotika tragoudia, Plias (3) 19th century drama with special reference to: 'Matesis A O Vasilikos, Ermis •Vizantios D l Vavilonia, Ermis (4) Third year seminar on the history of the language question as for 38. WRITTEN WORK . As for 26/36. ASSESSMENT As for 28/38.

104-100 CLASSICAL STUDIES 1A The attention of students is drawn to the Handbook p. 250 where another Ancient World course (History 1 C) is listed. As these two courses have some lectures in common, students may not take both Classical Studies 1A and History 1C. Students who wish to proceed to Classical Studies 28 or 2C and/or any grade 2 History subject may take either Classical Studies 1A or History 1C as the first year subject of their sequence. (In other words either Classical Studies 1A or History 1C may lead to work at grade 2 level in both History and Classical Studies and serve as the first part of e major in either.) A course of three classes per week.

83 Faculty of Arts

SYLLABUS The course will be concerned with three main areas of Greek civilization, viz. Greek history, Greek literature and Greek art, and will be concentrated largely, but not exclusively, on Athens of the sixth and fifth centuries B.C. Within these areas the emphasis of the study of Greek history will be on the growth of the Athenian democracy. In Greek literature the emphasis will be on select tragedies of Euripides, the comedies of Aristophanes and the rise of Greek philosophy. The theme of Greek art will be the strength of an artistic tradition and its assimilative response to outside influences.

BOOKS (a) Preliminary reading Andrewes A Greek Society, Pelican or Finley M I The Ancient Greeks, Pelican (b) Athenian history: •Ehrenberg V From Solon to Socrates, Methuen paperback •Thucydides The Peloponnesian Wer, Penguin •Herodotus The Histories, Penguin • Plutarch The Rise and Fall of Athens, Penguin •Von Fritz K & Kapp E Aristotle's Constitution of Athens and Related Texts, Hafner The Athenian Empire, London Association of Classical Teachers: Original Records, 2nd ed LACTOR no. 1 •Athenian Politics, London Association of Classical Teachers: Original Records, LACTOR no. 5 (c) Greek Art: Carpenter Rhys The Aesthetic Basis of Greek Art, Midland •Richter G M A A Handbook of Greek Art, 6th ed Phaidon or •Boardman J Greek Art, 2nd ed Thames & Hudson • Pollitt J J The Art of Greece, Prentice-Hall Schroder R V Ancient Greece from the air, Thames and Hudson 1974 (d) Greek Literature and History of Ideas: •Euripides The Bacchae and other Plays, Penguin • Euripides The Alcestis and other plays, Penguin • Euripides Medea and other plays, Penguin •Aristophanes The Frogs end other Plays, Penguin •Aristophanes The Acharnians, The Clouds, Lysistrata, Penguin 'Plato The Last Days of Socrates, tr Tredennick, Penguin Further reading material will be supplied by the department.

WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit two essays (of between 1.600 and 2,500 words) during the course.

EXAMINATION Not more than two 3-hour papers. The final assessment will be made on both examination results and marks given for essays. 84 104-203 CLASSICAL STUDIES 2В 104-303 CLASSICAL STUDIES 3В (This course will be offered in 1978.) For second-year students (Classical Studies 26) a course of two lectures and one tutorial throughout the year. Third-year students (Classical Studies 36) will have, in addition, one seminar per week for the first two terms, or the equivalent. Students who are taking Greek or Latin to third year may enrol for either of these courses without having taken Classical Studies 1A. SYLLABUS For second-year students two of the following sections, for third-year students any three of the following sections: (a) Greek and Roman theatre. (b) Hellenistic and Roman Art. (c) Literature and Society in the later Roman empire. Particular emphasis will be placed on the following topics: (i) The Roman empire and the early Christians. (ii) Early church literature. (iii) The conflict between Christianity and pagan culture. (iv) Social, religious and literary life in the western provinces (especially in Gaul and Africa). (d) An agreed segment of the course in Greek philosophy offered by the Philosophy department (i.e. an approved portion of Philosophy 2G). In 1978 second year students (Classical Studies 2B) will normally take (a) and (b), but second year students may be admitted to (c) or (d) under special circumstances on application to the chairman of the department. WRITTEN WORK One essay of up to 2,500 words will be required of each section. BOOKS (a) The Greek and Roman Theatre: 'Aeschylus The Oresteian trilogy, a translation for theatre, tr Rush Rehm, Hawthorn Press Melbourne •Sophocles Three Tragedies, tr Kitto, Oxford paperback •Euripides The Medea and Other Plays, Penguin 'Euripides The Вaссhae and Other Plays, Penguin 'Aristophanes Lysistrate and Other Plays, Penguin lenander The Plays and Fragments, Penguin 'Plautus The Pot of Gold and other plays, Penguin •Plautus The Rope and Other Plays, Penguin 'Seneca Four Tragedies and Octavia, Penguin (b) Hellenistic and Roman Art: • Wheeler M Roman Art and Architecture, Thames & Hudson 1964 (c) Literature and Society in the later Roman empire: 'Eusebius A History of the Church, tr Williamson G. W., Penguin •Stevenson J A New Eusebius, SPCK paperback •Augustine Confessions, Penguin •Nock A D Conversion, Oxford paperback

85 Faculty of Arts

•Cochrane C N Christianity and Classical Culture, Galaxy paperback Either •Chadwick H The Early Church, Pelican History of the Church or Frond W H C The Early Church, Hodder and Stoughton paperback EXAMINATION Up to two 3-hour papers for students in Classical Studies 2В, up to three 3-hour papers for students in Classical Studies 3В. Written work done during the year will be considered in determining the result.

104-204 CLASSICAL STUDIES 2C 104-304 CLASSICAL STUDIES 3C (This course will not be offered in 1978, but will be offered in 1979.) For second-year students (Classical Studies 2C) a course of two lectures and one tutorial throughout the year. Third-year students (Classical Studies ЭC) will have, in addition, one seminar per week for the first two terms, or the equivalent. Students who are taking Greek or Latin to third year may enrol for either of these courses without having taken Classical Studies 1A.

SYLLABUS For students in Classical Studies 2C two of the following sections, for students in Classical Studies 3C three of the following sections: (a) Literature and Society in the early Roman empire. (b) Greek and Roman epic. (c) Greek and Roman historiography. (d) Hellenistic period. (e) Byzantium in the sixth century (both the art and history of the period will be studied). (f) An agreed segment of the course in Greek philosophy offered by the Philosophy department (i.e. an approved portion of Philosophy 2G).

WRITTEN WORK One essay of up to 2,500 words will be required for each section. BOOKS (a) Literature and Society in the early Roman empire: Salsdon J P V D Life and leisure in Ancient Rome, Godley lead Bowen J A history of western education, vol. 1 The Ancient World, Methuen paperback Grant M The World of Rome, Mentor •Petronius Satyricon, tr Sullivan J, Penguin •Apuleius The Golden Ass, tr Graves R, Penguin •Juvenal Satires, tr Green P, Penguin •Pliny Letters, tr Radice B, Penguin •Suetonius The Twelve Caesars, tr Graves R, Penguin •Tacitus The Annals of Imperial Rome, tr Grant M. Penguin ' Tacitus The Agricola and the Germania, tr Mattingly I, Penguin 86 •Ovid Amores, tr Lee G, John Murray •Catullus tr Whigham P. Penguin Glob P V The Bog People, Paladin •Lucretius The Nature of the Universe, tr Latham, Penguin •Virgil Georgics, tr Lewis C. Day, Oxford paperback 'Seneca Four Tragedies and Octavia, tr Watling E F, Penguin (b) Greek and Roman Epic: •Homer Iliad, tr Lattimore R, Phoenix 'Homer Odyssey, tr Fitzgerald, Panther •Apollonlus of Rhodes The Voyage of the Argo, tr Riau E V, Penguin •Catullus tr Whigham P, Penguin 'Virgil Aeneid, tr Lewis C. Day, Oxford paperback 'Ovid Metamorphoses, tr lines, Penguin 'Lucan Pharsalia, tr Graves R, Penguin (c) Greek and Roman historiography: •Herodotus, Penguin •Thucydides, Penguin •Polybius The Histories, tr Chambers M, Washington Square Press •Sallust, Penguin or Four Square •Livy The War with Hannibal, Penguin 'Tacitus Agricola end Germania, Penguin 'Tacitus Annals, tr Dudley, Penguin •Suetonius, Penguin (d) Hellenistic Period: Grant F C Hellenistic Religions: the Age of Syncretism, New York Liberal Arts Press Tarn-Griffiths Hellenistic Civilization, 3rd ed Arnold Cary M A History of the Greek World 323-146 B.C., Methuen Peters F E The Harvest of Hellenism. Simon and Schuster (e) Byzantium in the sixth century: •Bury J B History of the Later Roman Empire vol. 2, Dover reprint •Barker J W Justinian and the later Roman Empire, University of Wisconsin Press or •Browning R Justinian and Theodora, Weidenfeld and Nicolson Beckwith J The art of Constantinople, 2nd ed Phaidon paperback Procopius History of the Wars, tr Averil Cameron, Twayne Procopius Secret History, tr Atwater, Ann Arbor EXAMINATION Up to two 3-hour papers for students in Classical Studies 2C, up to three 3-hour papers for students in Classical Studies 3C. Written work done during the year will be considered in determining the result.

HONOURS DEGREE A. SCHOOL OF CLASSICAL STUDIES 1. The course for the degree with honours in the school of Classical Studies comprises the following subjects: Ancient Greek part 1 (ordinary degree) and, st honours level, parts 2, 3 and 4.

87 Faculty of Arts

Latin part 1 (ordinary degree) and, at honours level, parts 2, 3 and 4. A candidate in this school must take these subjects and three additional subjects normally including a sequence of two subjects. Prospective honours candidates should feel free to consult the chairman of department on their choice of subjects. Except with the permission of the faculty, no candidate for honours in the school of Classical Studies or combined courses may sit for examination without completing the essay work and exercises, and attending tutorial classes in the subjects of the school. 2. In their first year, prospective honours candidates will take Ancient Greek part 1 (pass), Latin part 1 (pass) and two additional subjects. They will find of particular value the optional additional work provided in Ancient Greek part 1 (pass) and Latin part 1 (pass). Admission to the higher years of the course is conditional upon satisfactory performance in this first year, and students must be approved by the faculty of Arts as candidates for the degree with honours before entering the second year of the honours school. In their second year, candidates will take the honours courses in Ancient Greek part 2 and Latin part 2, and the remaining additional subject, normally at grade 2 level, and in their third year, the honours courses in Ancient Greek part 3 and Latin part 3; and in their fourth year the honours courses in Ancient Greek part 4 and Latin part 4. Candidates for honours in the school of Classical Studies are required, unless exempted by the chairman of department, to submit one essay or to perform some other approved work by the beginning of first term in each of their second and third years. 3. Candidates will be examined in the subjects of Ancient Greek part 2 and Latin part 2 at the annual examination at the end of the second year. 4. At the end of the third year candidates will be examined in translation from Ancient Greek and Latin. They will also be examined in special studies prescribed for the third year. They will also take part I of the final examination. 5. The final examination in the school of Classical Studies will be held in two parts, part I at the end of the third year, part Il at the end of the fourth year. Part I 1. Prescribed Ancient Greek authors. 2. Historical and literary studies connected with prescribed Ancient Greek authors. з. Prescribed Latin authors. 4. Historical and literary studies connected with prescribed Latin authors. 5. Comparative philology (according to the year in which lectures are given). Part II 1. Extensive reading in Ancient Greek. 2. Extensive reading in Latin. з. Ancient Greek unseen translation. 4. Latin unseen translation. 5. Latin literature. 88 Classical Studies

6. Ancient Greek literature. 7. Ancient Greek special studies. 8. Latin special studies. 9. Comparative philology (according to the year in which lectures are given). As part of part II of the final examination each student must also complete and hand in, on the first day of the third term, an essay of not more than 9,000 words on an approved subject.

COMBINED HONOURS For possible combined honours courses with Latin and with Ancient Greek see p. 519 ff. Candidates in such combined honours courses will take either Latin part 1 (ordinary degree) and, at honours level, Latin parts 2, 3 and 4 or Ancient Greek part 1 (ordinary degree) and, at honours level, Ancient Greek parts 2, 3 and 4.

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS SYLLABUS The syllabus for each part of Ancient Greek 1 (ordinary degree) and, at honours level, 2, 3 and 4 and of Latin 1 (ordinary degree) and, at honours level, 2, 3 and 4 includes: (i) Prescribed authors; (ii) Unprepared translation; (iii) Historical and literary studies. In addition, parts 1 and 2 have regular language classes. Each examination on prescribed authors may Include questions on section (iii) of the syllabus. In addition to the sections of the syllabus listed above, honours students are required to do the special studies listed below under the several subjects.

104-261 ANCIENT GREEK PART 2 (HONS) Four classes per week. A study will be made of Herodotus' Histories, the later plays of Sophocles, end Aristophanes as literary critic. BOOKS (a) Prescribed textbooks for 1978: •Herodotus Book VIII, ed J Enoch Powell, CUP •Herodotus The Histories, tr de Selincourt, Penguin •Sophocles Electra, ed Kells, CUP •Aristophanes Frogs, ed Stanford, Macmillan tr Barrett, Penguin •Aristophanes The Frogs aпд other plays, Littlefield D J Twentieth Century Interpretations of the Frogs, Spectrum (b) Additional reading for 1978: Selections from: •Homer Odyssey in Homerus Ilias, Odyssee, ed Bruijn and Spoelder, Tjeenk Willink Homer Odyssey, tr Fitzgerald, Panther 89 Faculty of Arts

LANGUAGE WORK In terms 1 and 2 classes on language exercises will alternate with classes concerned with the practical criticism of Ancient Greek literary texts. WRITTEN WORK In addition to the prescribed vacation work, students will be required to submit two essays of up to 3,000 words each during the course of the year. EXAMINATION Up to three 3-hour papers. Language exercises, written work done during the year and class-tests will be considered in determining the result.

104-361 ANCIENT GREEK PART 3 (HONS) Six classes per week. SYLLABUS (i) Prescribed textbooks for 1978: As for Ancient Greek Part 2 (hofs) (ii) Two special studies. (iii) History of Greek literature and thought. (iv) Additional reading for 1978. As for Ancient Greek Part 2 (hofs) WRITTEN WORK In addition to the prescribed vacation work, students will be required to submit two essays of up to 3,000 words each during the course of the year.

EXAMINATION (a) Class tests: 1. Additional reading. 2. History of Greek literature and thought. 3. Special studies. (b) Annual examination: 1. Translation from Ancient Greek: one 3-hour paper. (c) For part I of the final examination: 1. Prescribed Ancient Greek reading: one 3-hour paper or equivalent assessment. 2. Historical and literary studies connected with the prescribed reading: one 3-hour paper or equivalent assessment.

104-461 ANCIENT GREEK PART 4 (HONS)

A course of three seminars and one lecture per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS (i) History of Greek literature and thought. (ii) Two special studies as for Ancient Greek part 3 (hofs) sec. (ii). 90 Classical Studies

(iii) Extensive reading. (iv) An essay of not more than 9,000 words on an approved subject. Each student must present this essay by the first day of third term. EXAMINATION Relevant papers of part If of the final examination.

104-262 LATIN PART 2 (HONS) Four classes per week. SYLLABUS Studies will be concerned with the literature of the republic and early principate. (i) Prescribed textbooks fortt1978: •Plautus Miles Gloriosus, ed Hammond, Hary UP 1970 •Plautus The Rope and other plays, tr Watling, Penguin •Plautus The Pot of Gold and other plays, tr Watling, Penguin 'Horace Opera, ed Wickham & Garrod, Oxford Classical Texts •Cicero Philippics l-ll, ed Denniston, OUP (ii) Language work. (iii) Additional reading: •Virgil Aeneid VII-Xll, ed Fairclough, Loeb vol 2, Heinemann (iv) Practical Criticism. WRITTEN WORK In addition to the prescribed vacation work, students will be required to submit two essays of up to 3,000 words each during the course of the year.

EXAMINATION Up to three 3-hour papers. Language exercises, written work done during the year, and class-tests will be considered In determining the result.

104-362 LATIN PART 3 (HONS) Six classes per week. SYLLABUS Studies will be concerned with the literature of the republic and early principate. (i) Prescribed textbooks for 1978: As for Latin Part 2 (hofs) (ii) Two special studies. (iii) History of Roman literature and thought. (iv) Practical criticism. (v) Additional reading: As for Latin part 2 (hols) WRITTEN WORK In addition to the prescribed vacation work, students will be required to

91 Faculty of Arts

submit two essays of up to 3,000 words each during the course of the year.

EXAMINATION (a) Class tests: 1. Additional reading. 2. History of Roman literature and thought. 3. Special studies. (b) Annual examinations: 1. Translation from Latin: one 3-hour paper. (c) For part I of the final examination: 1. Prescribed Latin reading: one 3-hour paper, or equivalent assessment. 2. Historical and literary studies connected with the prescribed reading: one 3-hour paper, or equivalent assessment.

104-462 LATIN PART 4 (HONS) A course of three seminars and one lecture per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS (i) History of Roman literature and thought. (ii) Two special studies as for Latin part 3 (hens) sec. (ii). (iii) Extensive reading. (iv) An essay of not more than 9,000 words on an approved subject. Each student must present this essay by the first day of third term.

EXAMINATION Relevant papers of part Il of the final examination.

MASTER OF ARTS 104-601 SCHOOL OF CLASSICAL STUDIES Candidates for the degree may proceed in one of two ways: 1. By thesis only. 2. By a shorter research essay and by course-work. The research essay will normally be about half the length of the thesis submitted by a candidate proceeding to the degree of MA by thesis only. The course-work will normally be based on a selection of seminar- courses available for fourth-year honours candidates, provided that no student may repeat a course taken as part of the BA or MA Preliminary course. The course-work may also be based, in part or in whole, on background studies to the research essay or such other courses as may be arranged. There will be special examinations arranged for the course-work. An entry form for examination for higher degrees must be submitted to the Registrar. Theses must be submitted not later than 18 March, 1979. 92 Computer Science

Three copies of each thesis (A4, typewritten, double spaced) should be submitted, one of which will be deposited in the University Library. The thesis should normally be submitted for examination within two years from the commencement of candidature for MA by full-time candidates and within four years by part-time candidates. Except in special circumstances and with the permission of the faculty no thesis or course work will be examined unless the candidate presents for examination within four years from the commencement of his candidature or, in the event of his having been granted leave of absence for the maximum period of one year, within five years from the commencement of his candidature. DEPARTMENT OF COMPUTER SCIENCE

Chairman of Department: Professor P. C. Poole, В.Sc., B.Ed. (Q'Id), Ph.D. (Syd.), F.B.C.S., M.A.C.S. Students taking Computer Science units will be required to spend time on practical assignments in addition to lectures, practice classes and tutorials. However, the total time involved for each unit should be approximately the same as that for any other science unit of similar leveland point score. NOTE: In view of extensive syllabus changes, students should ascertain the required prerequisites from the department.

ORDINARY DEGREE (Details of Honours degree are set out at the end of this section.)

100 LEVEL: The department of Computer Science offers three units at the 1st year level,

622-100 COMPUTER SCIENCE 1 SYLLABUS Credit at the grade 1 level can be offered to students who have successfully completed the units 622-101 (or 111), 622-102 and 622-103 which are detailed below. EXAMINATION Unit examinations are held at various times during the year.

622-101 COMPUTER PROGRAMMING FUNDAMENTALS 24 lectures; 8 one-hour practice classes; approximately 48 hours project; 1st term; 4 points. SYLLABUS Algorithms, programs and computers; basic programming and program structure; debugging and testing of programs; documentation; introduction to software engineering; programming in FORTRAN. BOOKS Prescribed text: Bellamy C J & Whitehouse L C introduction to Computer Programming 93 Faculty of Arts

in FORTRAN (Monecs FORTRAN), Monash University Computer Centre, 1975 EXAMINATION One 2-hour terminal examination. Practical work must be completed before the end of term and will be assessed as part of the examination.

622-111 COMPUTER PROGRAMMING FUNDAMENTALS Three weeks full-time during the summer vacation. This unit is substantially similar to 622-101, but the lectures, practical work and examination are done in a 3-week period before 1st term commences. The textbook is the same as that prescribed for 622-101.

622-102 DATA STRUCTURES 24 lectures; 8 one-hour practice classes; approximately 24 hours project; 2nd term; 3 points. Prerequisites: Knowledge of 622-101 or equivalent. SYLLABUS Data structures; concepts and algorithms used in the solution of non- numerical problems. Applications to data management systems; file organization; information retrieval; list processing; programming languages; introduction to languages for data management. BOOKS Prescribed text: Bellamy C J & Whitehouse L C An Introduction to Computer Pro- gramming in COBOL (Monecs COBOL), Monash University Computer Centre, 1975 EXAMINATION One 2-hour terminal examination. Practical work must be completed before the end of term and will be assessed as part of the examination.

622-103 PROGRAMMING APPLICATIONS 24 lectures; 8 one-hour practice classes; approximately 24 hours project; 3rd term; 3 points. Prerequisites: Knowledge of 622-101 or equivalent. SYLLABUS Applications of computer programming to the solution of problems, both numeric and non-numeric; role of computers in modern society.

BOOKS Prescribed text: As for 622-101. EXAMINATION One 2-hour terminal examination. Practical work must be completed before the end of term and will be assessed as part of the examination.

200 LEVEL Seven units are offered by the department at the 200 level. 622-211 in the first term is a special unit which enables a student who has not taken

94 Computer Science

any of the 1st year Computer Science subjects to enter the 2nd year sequence after obtaining a pass in the summer vacation course 622-111. 622-203 in the 2nd term is a prerequisite for most 3rd year units.

622-200 COMPUTER SCIENCE 2A (PASS) SYLLABUS Credit at the grade 2 level can be offered to students who have successfully completed 622-201, 622-203 or 212 and 622-253 or 213 or 202, which are detailed below. EXAMINATION Unit examinations are held at various times during the year.

622-210 COMPUTER SCIENCE 2В (PASS) SYLLABUS Credit at the grade 2 level can be offered to students who have successfully completed 622-111, 622-211 and 622-212, which are detailed below. The course has no prerequisites and is terminal in the sense that it does not lead on to any 3rd year subjects In Computer Science.

822-201 COMPUTER PROGRAMMING AND ORGANIZATION 24 lectures; 8 one hour practice classes; approximately 32 hours project; l st term; 5 points. Prerequisites: 622-101 or equivalent. SYLLABUS Computer organization; memory, registers, CPU. I/O devices; representation of information; programming in assembly language; bit manipulation; implementing if, while, repeat, for control structures; arrays, stacks, lists; searching, sorting, lexical scanning; good programming practices. BOOKS Prescribed texts: Donovan J J Systems Programming, McGraw-Hill Kogakusha, 1972 Jensen & Wirth N PASCAL—User's Manual and Report, Springer- Verlag, 1975 EXAMINATION One 2-hour terminal examination. Practical work must be completed before the end of term and will be assessed as part of the examination.

822-202 NUMERICAL METHODS 24 lectures; 8 one-hour practice classes; approximately 32 hours project; 3rd term; 5 paints. Prerequisites: 622-101 and 618-171 or equivalent. Students must provide themselves with a suitable electronic pocket calculator. SYLLABUS Error analysis; finite differences; polynomial approximation; solution of linear equations; solution of non-linear equations; numerical integration.

95 Faculty of Arts

BOOKS Prescribed text: MсCrae B & Robinson I Numerical Methods EXAMINATION One 2-hour terminal examination. Practical work must be completed before the end of term and will be assessed as part of the examination. 622-203 PROGRAMMING SYSTEMS 24 lectures; 8 one-hour practice classes; approximately 32 hours project; 2nd term; 5 points. Prerequisites: 622-102 or 622-211, knowledge of 622-201. SYLLABUS High level languages; syntax and semantics; PASCAL; systems programming and assembly language; assemblers; macro processors; loaders; interpreters; simulators; user's view of operating systems.

BOOKS Prescribed texts: As for 622-201. EXAMINATION One 2-hour terminal examination. Practical work must be completed before the end of term and will be assessed as part of the examination.

622-211 INFORMATION SYSTEMS 24 lectures; 8 one-hour practice classes; approximately 32 hours project; 1st term; 5 points. This course is part of the Diploma in Computing Studies. It may be taken by other students who have not taken 1st year Computer Science units but who have passed 111 or its equivalent. Its syllabus ia substantially similar to that of 622-102 and sections of 622-103, and the unit may not be taken by students who have passed these units. Prerequisites: 622-101 or equivalent.

SYLLABUS Data structures; introduction to data management systems; file organization, information retrieval; introduction to languages for data management; numerical and non-numerical programming; role of computers in modern society.

EXAMINATION One 2-hour terminal examination. Practical work must be completed before the end of term and will be assessed as part of the examination.

622-212 DATA MANAGEMENT 24 lectures; 8 one-hour practice classes; approximately 32 hours project; 2nd term; 5 points. Prerequisites: 622-102 or 622-211, knowledge of 622-201. SYLLABUS Storage and retrieval of data; sorting and searching; organization of files;

96 Computer Science

filing systems; systems analysis and design; generalized data management systems; programming in COBOL. BOOKS Prescribed text: Bellamy C J & Whitehouse L C An Introduction to Computer Pro- gramming in COBOL (lilacs COBOL), Monash University Computer Centre, 1975 EXAMINATION One 2-hour terminal examination. Practical work must be completed before the end of term and will be assessed as part of the examination.

622-213 COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE 24 lectures; 8 one-hour practice classes; approximately 32 hours project; 3rd term; 5 points. Prerequisite: 622-201. SYLLABU81 Gates; registers; functional units; buses; memory access control; interrupts; microprogramming; multiprocessors; I/O control.

EXAMINATION One 2-hour terminal examination. Practical work must be completed before the end of term and will be assessed as part of the examination.

622-253 OPERATING SYSTEMS FUNDAMENTALS 24 lectures; 8 one-hour practice classes; approximately 32 hours project; 3rd term; 5 points. Prerequisite: 622-203. SYLLABUS Functions of operating systems; input/output; interrupts; batch systems; memory management; filing systems; classes of operating systems; job control language. Books Prescribed text: Donovan J J Systems Programming, McGraw-Hill, Kogakusha 1972

EXAMINATION One 2-hour terminal examination. Practical work must be completed before the end of term and will be assessed as part of the examination.

300 LEVEL: The department offers fifteen units at this level. 622-300 COMPUTER SCIENCE 3 (PASS) A minimum of 64 hours lectures; a minimum of 32 hours practice classes; a minimum of 172 hours project work. SYLLABUS Students are free to take any combination of the units listed below,

97 п Faculty of Arts

subject to the stated prerequisites. However at least 19 points are required in order to gain credit at the grade 3 pass level. EXAMINATION Unit examinations are held at various times throughout the year.

622-301 THEORY OF COMPUTATION 16 lectures; 8 one-hour practice classes; approximately 24 hours project; 1st term; 4 points. SYLLABUS Propositional logic; graph theory; Lambda calculus, predicate calculus; computability and recursive functions; algebraic coding theory; algebra of strings and Markov algorithms; formal languages. EXAMINATION One 2-hour terminal examination. Practical work must be completed before the end of the term and will be assessed as part of the examination.

622-302 FORMAL LANGUAGES AND AUTOMATA 16 lectures; 8 one-hour practice classes; approximately 24 hours project; 2nd term; 4 points. Prerequisite: Knowledge of 622-301. SYLLABUS Definition and representation of finite automata and sequential machines; equivalence of states and machines; decision problems of finite automata; generalized and incomplete machines; regular expressions; probabilistic automata. EXAMINATION One 2-hour terminal examination. Practical work must be completed before the end of term and will be assessed as part of the examination.

622-303 HEURISTIC PROGRAMMING 16 lectures; 8 one-hour practice classes; approximately 24 hours project; 3rd term; 4 points. SYLLABUS The design of programs for complex information processing; heuristic search; computational logic; programming languages for artificial intelligence; examples from representative application areas. EXAMINATION One 2-hour terminal examination. Practical work must be completed before the end of term and will be assessed as part of the examination.

622-311 COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE 16 lectures; 8 one-hour practice classes; approximately 24 hours project; 1st term; 4 points. Prerequisite: Knowledge of 622-201. SYLLABUS Gates; registers; functional units; buses; memory access control; interrupts; microprogramming; multiprocessors; I/O control. 98 EXAMINATION One 2-hour terminal examination. Practical work must be completed before the end of the term and will be assessed as part of the examination.

622-312 ADVANCED DATA STRUCTURES 16 lectures; 8 one-hour practice classes; approximately 24 hours project; 2nd term; 4 points. Prerequisite: 622-102 or 622-211. SYLLABUS String manipulation; SNOBOL; implementation of processors for non- numeric problems; linear lists; sequential and linked storage allocation; list processing; recursive programming; trees; traversal algorithms; representation end mathematical properties of trees; dynamic storage allocation and garbage collection; inverted files; hashing algorithms. EXAMINATION One 2-hour terminal examination. Practical work must be completed before the end of term and will be assessed as part of the examination. 622-313 COMPUTER DESIGN 16 lectures; 8 one-hour practice classes; approximately 24 hours programming project; 2nd term; 4 points. Prerequisite: Knowledge of 622-311. SYLLABUS Hardware description languages; component technology; design methodologies; comparative study of computer designs; peripherals and their interfacing; communications. EXAMINATION One 2-hour terminal examination. Practical work must be completed before the end of term and will be assessed as part of the examination.

622-321 APPROXIMATION OF FUNCTIONS 16 lectures; 8 one-hour practice classes; approximately 24 hours programming projects; 1st term; 4 paints. Prerequisites: 622-202 and three 200 level Mathematics units. Students must provide themselves with a suitable electronic pocket calculator. SYLLABUS Interpolation; application to numerical differentiation and integration; approximation of functions. EXAMINATION One 2-hour terminal examination. Practical work must be completed before the end of term and will be assessed as part of the examination.

622-322 NUMERICAL INTEGRATION 16 lectures; 8 one-hour practice classes; approximately 24 hours project; 3rd term; 4 points.

99 Faculty of Arts

Prerequisites: 622-202 and three 200 level Mathematics including 618-294. Knowledge of 622-321. Students must provide themselves with a suitable electronic pocket calculator. SYLLABUS Numerical integration; solution of ordinary differential equations. EXAMINATION One 2-hour terminal examination. Practical work must be completed before the end of term and will be assessed as part of the examination. 622-323 NUMERICAL LINEAR ALGEBRA 16 lectures; 8 one-hour practice classes; approximately 24 hours project; 2nd term; 4 points. Prerequisites: 622-202 and three 200 level Mathematics units including 618-273. Students must provide themselves with a suitable electronic pocket calculator. SYLLABUS Solution of linear equations, matrix inversion; determination of eigenvalues and eigenvectors. EXAMINATION One 2-hour terminal examination. Practical work must be completed before the end of term and will be assessed as part of the examination.

622-332 OPERATING SYSTEMS 1 6 lectures; 8 one-hour practice classes; approximately 24 hours project; 1 st term; 4 points. Prerequisite: Knowledge of 622-203. SYLLABUS Analysis of a real-time operating system; system modification and enhancement; system monitoring; system generation. EXAMINATION One 2-hour terminal examination. Practical work must be completed before the end of term and will be assessed as part of the examination.

622-333 REAL-TIME SYSTEMS 16 lectures; 8 one-hour practice classes; approximately 24 hours project; 2nd term; 4 points. Prerequisite: Knowledge of 622-332. SYLLABUS Principles of real-time hardware and software; survey of applications; on-line systems architecture; real-time operating systems and information structures; data communication hardware and software; terminals and peripherals; computer-computer links; networks. EXAMINATION One 2-hour terminal examination. Practical work must be completed before the end of term and will be assessed as part of the examination. 100 Computer Science

622-341 SOFTWARE ENGINEERING 16 lectures; 1st term; approximately 108 hours of project work and progress meetings during 1st, 2nd and 3rd terms; 9 points. Prerequisite: 622-203.

SYLLABUS Study of the problems connected with the development of large scale programs. Topics include design strategies, systems specification, project estimating, costing and planning, progress monitoring and project control; development team structure; programming and documentation; testing and debugging; validation and certification; evaluation and measurement; maintenance and modification.

EXAMINATION One 2-hour examination will be held at the end of 3rd term; each student will be required to prepare a written and oral report on his project for presentation at the end of 3rd term. A grade in the unit will be assessed with a 1 /3rd weighting for the examination and 2/3rds for the project.

622-342 PROGRAMMING LANGUAGES 16 lectures; 8 one-hour practice classes; approximately 24 hours project; 3rd term; 4 points. Prerequisite: 622-203.

SYLLABUS Formal definition of programming languages including specification of syntax and semantics; grammars; compiler organization; code generation; translator writing systems.

EXAMINATION One 2-hour terminal examination. Practical work must be completed before the end of term and will be assessed as part of the examination.

622-345 PROGRAMMING METHODOLOGY 16 lectures; 8 one-hour practice classes; approximately 24 hours project; 3rd term; 4 points. Prerequisites: Knowledge of 622-341 and 622-312.

SYLLABUS Design of algorithms; iterative, recursive designs; decomposition; control structures; the power of if, while and concatenation; Boehm-Jacopini theorem; formal elimination of go tos; pros and cons of go tos; proving programs; specification, proving correctness and clean termination, in- ductive assertion method of verification; loop invariants, backward substitution; automatic program verifiers.

EXAMINATION Assignments and programming exercises will be given during the course, and an examination may be given at the end of the course.

101 Faculty of Arts

622-351 DATA BASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS 16 lectures; 8 one-hour practice classes; approximately 24 hours project; 3rd term; 4 points. Prerequisite: 622-212. SYLLABUS Management of information; organization and representation of data; data base system architecture; CODASYL proposals; security and privacy; management information systems. EXAMINATION One 2-hour terminal examination. Practical work must be completed before the end of term and will be assessed as part of the examination.

HONOURS DEGREE The course for the degree with honours in the school of Computer Science contains the following subjects: 622-100 Computer Science 1 622-260 Computer Science 2A (Hons) 622-360 Computer Science 3 (Ions) 622-460 Computer Science 4 (Ions) together with such other subjects which meet the approval of the chairman of the department and of Faculty through the Sub-Dean. Combined Honours courses with Computer Science may be offered with other departments in 1978. Students interested in such possibilities should check with the Sub-Dean.

622-260 COMPUTER SCIENCE 2A (HONS) A minimum of 96 hours lectures, a minimum of 32 hours practice classes, and approximately 128 hours of project work.

SYLLABUS Credit at grade 2 honours level can be offered to students who have successfully completed 622-201, 622-203 and any two of the remaining units 622-212, 622-253, 622-213 and 622-202. EXAMINATION Unit examinations will be held at various times throughout the year.

622-360 COMPUTER SCIENCE 3 (HONS) A minimum of 80 hours lectures; a minimum of 40 hours practice classes; approximately 196 hours project work. SYLLABUS Students are free to take any combination of the units listed under 622-300, subject to the stated prerequisites. However, at least 23 points are required to obtain an honours pass at this level and the course must include 622-341. Further, for students wishing to proceed to a 4th year in Computer Science, passes in at least nine of the 3rd year units are needed in partial fulfilment of the requirements for the honours degree. 3rd year units not completed during the 3rd year may be taken during the honours year along with 4th year units. in planning a 3rd year course, students should consult with the department to ensure that the correct

102 Computer Science

prerequisites are taken during the 3rd year to enable continuation to the final honours year. EXAMINATION Unit examinations are held at various times during the year.

622-460 COMPUTER SCIENCE 4 (HONS) Approximately 144 lectures drawn from 3rd and 4th year units; thesis on a selected Computer Science topic.

SYLLAВUS Depending on student interests and availability of staff, the department will offer courses at the 4th year level drawn from the following areas. (i) Numerical Solution of Differential Equations (ii) Artificial Intelligence (iii) Computability (iv) Operating Systems Principles (v) Translation of Programming Languages (vi) Theory of Automata. Candidates must pass at least nine of the 3rd year Computer Science units as partial fulfilment of the requirements of the 4th year. EXAMINATION Candidates must sit for examinations as required by the department. Results will be assessed on the marks obtained in all segments of the course, the weighting being unit examinations 50 per cent, project 50 per cent.

MASTER OF ARTS 622-602 SCHOOL OF COMPUTER SCIENCE Candidates will prepare a thesis incorporating their reading and research on some approved topic in Computer Science. Students are also expected to attend seminars and colloquia. An entry form for examination for higher degrees must be submitted to the Registrar. Three copies of the thesis (typewritten), on A4 paper and double-spaced, should be submitted; one will be deposited in the Univer- sity Library if approved. Candidates may also be examined orally on the subject of the thesis. The thesis should normally be submitted for examination within two years from the commencement of candidature for M.A. by full-time candidates and within four years by part-time candidates. Except in special circumstances and with the permission of the Faculty no thesis or course work will be examined unless the candidate presents for examination within four years from the commencement of his candidature or, in the event of his having been granted leave of absence for the maximum period of one year, within five years from the commencement of his candidature.

GRADUATE DIPLOMA Refer to the Faculty of Science Handbook.

103 DEPARTMENT OF CRIMINOLOGY Chairman of Department: Mr S. W. JOHNSTON, B.A., LL.8., M.A.C.E. Barrister-at-Law

ORDINARY DEGREE Criminology is the study of crime (whether seen as moral criticism or as the management of social conflict), and in particular today the defining of the authority and criminal policy of the nation state and of the United Nations. Criminology 2 is an introductory Criminology subject which may be taken as a grade 2 level subject of an Arts degree, and also as an elective in a Law course. In particular, students intending subsequently to undertake the Social Work degree course may find Criminology 2 of benefit to their later studies. This subject is also one of a number of subjects which satisfies the behavioural science/social science prerequisite requirement for the Social Work course. Students intending taking Criminology 2 as part of an Arts course must first pass in any two university subjects. A quota has been established in this subject for 1978. Students wishing to take Criminology 2 as part of their degree course must apply on the application form available from the Faculty office. No enrolments in this subject will be permitted before written approval is received. Students who have previously enrolled in the subject and who wish to take the subject in 1978 must also make application. The diploma in Criminology is normally taken after but it may be taken in combination with an Arts course. Enquiries should be made of the Sub- Dean, Faculty of Arts.

191-201 CRIMINOLOGY 2 A course of two lectures and one tutorial a week throughout the year, with a maximum of four visits to courts and correctional agencies. Stu- dents are required to submit not more than four written exercises, which may take the form of prescribed essays.

SYLLABUS An introduction to the study of crime, deviance and the criminal justice system in contemporary society. 1. Principles of Criminology. The definition and nature of crime. The measurement and content of criminal behaviour. Crime and morals. Crime in totalitarian societies, and in Aboriginal and ethnic communities. The concepts of justice and deviance. Empirical research in criminology. Psychological and sociological views of criminal behaviour and deviance. Predicting delinquent and criminal behaviour. 2. Administration of Criminal Justice. The structure and function of the police and the courts. Sentencing. Corrections and the treatment of offenders. Juvenile justice. Penal clauses and industrial arbitration. Road traffic control. З. Civil Liberties and Human Rights. Fundamental human rights in law and ethics. State authority and democratic order; the nature of authority and the meaning of power. Police power and individual freedom; prisoners' rights. Guarantees of rights; constitutional guarantees; the role of the United Nations; human rights in the European Community. 104 Criminology

BOOKS Suggested preliminary reading: Chappell D & Wilson P R eds The Australian Criminal Justice System, 2nd ed Butterworths Sydney 1977 Nettier G Explaining Crime, McGraw-Hill NY 1974 Street H Freedom, the Individual and the Law, Penguin 1975 Detailed reading guides are supplied during the year.

EXAMINATION. One 3-hour paper for pass and honours, with written work during the year as an additional, and in some cases an alternative requirement.

POST GRADUATE DIPLOMA IN CRIMINOLOGY SUMMARY OF SUBJECTS Criminology Subjects: Criminology A 191-801 Criminology B 191-802 Criminology C 191-803 Criminology D 191-804 The Diploma course which consists of the four subjects Criminology A, B, C and D is open to quota application by graduates in any approved field, and by undergraduates In combination with any approved degree. Under approved circumstances, candidates who have a professional qualification at the tertiary level together with extensive relevant experience may be admitted to the course, and application should be made to the Sub-Dean, Faculty of Arts. The diploma course is closely related to courses in Law, Psychiatry, Psychology, Social Work and Education. But it is of interest to candidates in many fields—whether simply as an exercise in a modern discipline, or as a preparation for a professional career in the field of crime control; for instance, magistrates, probation and parole officers, police staff, teachers, psychiatrists and psychologists, lawyers, chaplains and senior administrators in law enforcement in a position to influence policy. A candidate who plans a combined course, from the beginning may, if selected, be able to complete the diploma with one additional year's full- time study; but the majority of candidates devote two or more additional years to it part-time. Students wishing to make application for admission to the Criminology course must do so on the form available from the Sub-Dean, Faculty of Arts. The closing date for applications in 1978 is Monday, 30 January. Students who have previously passed one or more of the Criminology Diploma subjects as part of their degree course must undertake one or more approved substitute subjects to complete the diploma course requirements. Students previously admitted to the diploma course who did not pass or attempt a subject of their course in their last year of enrolment must receive special approval before being allowed to re-enrol. Students are expected to use the vacations for reading and for carrying out their writing assignments. Guidance in reading may be obained from the teaching staff, and students are encouraged to seek frequent individual tutorials. Where it is said in these details that written work is required in a subject, satisfactory performance of that work is a condition precedent to obtaining a pass or honours in the subject.

105 Faculty of Arts

The syllabus and examination for honours will be the same as those for a pass, honours being awarded upon demonstration of superior work and learning throughout the year. The books hereunder marked with an asterisk aře essential books which students should possess.

191-801 CRIMINOLOGY A

A course of lectures and seminars throughout the year, or equivalent with some visits to correctional agencies on Wednesday afternoon or in the vacations. Students will be required to submit not more than four written exercises during the year, which may take the form of prescribed essays, a free choice project, tutorial paper, or report of an institutional visit. SYLLABUS 1. Principles of Criminology. The definition of crime and the scope and meaning of criminology. The incidence of crime and interpretation of criminal statistics. 2. Sociological and Psychological Determinants of Crime and Deviance. Societal interaction with the offender; meaning of deviance, the labelling process and its consequences. The relationship of crime and social order; significance of the techniques of behaviour control. Psychoanalytic and behaviourist approaches to personality development and the significance of mental abnormality for legal intervention, tests of insanity and the meaning of criminal responsibility. Etiology of the young offender and the neglected child; family antecedents, the role of the family, acting out behaviour, multi-problem families, social class pressures, demographic factors. The development of an integrated theory and means of experimentation.

3. Prevention and Management of Child Neglect aпд Juvenile Offend_ ing. Legal definitions of young offenders and children in need of care and protection; children's court structure and organization, children's rights, the utility of prediction scales. Prevention; definition and criteria for evaluation, Australian projects, role of statutory and voluntary agencies, typological approaches. BOOKS Preliminary reading: Fox V Introduction to Criminology, Prentice-Hai 1976 Chappell D & Wilson P R eds The Australian Criminal Justice System, 2nd ed Butterworths 1977 Morris N R & Hawkins G The Honest Politician's Guide to Crime Control, University of Chicago Press 1970 Morris N R & Hawkins G Letter to the President on Crime Control, University of Chicago Press 1977 Wilson P R Delinquency in Australia, University of Queensland Press 1977 Detailed reading guides will be supplied during the year. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work as previously stated to be submitted by specified dates. A 3-hour paper may be substituted for part of this work. 106 Criminology

191-802 CRIMINOLOGY В A course of one lecture and one seminar a week throughout the year. Students will be required to submit not more than four written exercises during the year. Participation in seminars is an integral part of the course and candidates are required to attend at least 80 per cent of seminars. The Examination Board in Criminology B may, upon application in exceptional circumstances, waive this requirement either wholly or in part, and in lieu thereof substitute additional written work.

SYLLABUS Unit B1 Police Administration This unit is an examination of the functions, administrative structure and organization of the contemporary Australian Police department with a critical evaluation of the role of the police in a democratic society. Police end Government Police authority and the democratic order; parliamentary, ministerial and public service supervision of the police. Politics and the police; political control of the police; the "police state", civil disobedience, the police and political security. Accountability of the police to the law; police and the courts, the police prosecutor. The federal police power; constitutional limits on federal agencies; national policing and co-operative federalism; national information and intelligence systems. Police Power Common law and statutory powers of police; arrest, search, seizure and interrogation, compulsory fingerprinting, breath tests and medical examinations, identification parades, compulsory photographing, recapitu- lation of crimes on sound and film. Defining police powers; proper limits to police authority in accomplishing the objectives of the police. Police discretion; use of discretion in laying charges; decisions by police not to prosecute in particular cases. The Police and the Community The relationship between the police and the public; complaints investigation; civilian review boards, police and welfare agencies. Police reactions to perceived hostility from the community, psychological adjustment; police attitudes towards "victimless" crimes. Organization and Management Evaluation of traditional practices concerning the structure and organization of police departments and the hierarchical chain of command. Police leadership. Techniques of management; planning and research; information systems. Manpower planning; selection, training, assessment and promotion procedures. The use of civilian personnel. Discipline; internal investigation and regulation; standing orders; civilian review of police practices. Police professionalization, minimum standards; police ethics. Operations Evaluation of the techniques and methods used in crime prevention, criminal investigation, traffic enforcement and public safety. The course on criminal investigation will include an examination of police activity in the field of organized crime, particularly the illicit traffic in narcotics, illegal gambling and organized vice. Private "police" and other regulatory agencies Private investigators, industrial security, their relations with official police. Regulatory agencies; customs; taxation investigators; railways police; traffic officers.

107 Faculty of Arts

Unit В2 Judicial Administration This unit concerns the structure, functions, procedure and jurisdiction of courts exercising criminal jurisdiction. Courts and Government Separation of powers; relationship of the courts with the government; politics and the courts; the independence of courts, interference with the judicial process. Judicial review of government decisions. Jurisdiction and Organization of Courts The hierarchy and jurisdictions of the various courts; adequacy of the present structure. Specialist criminal courts. Officers of the Courts Judges of the Supreme and County Courts, magistrates, justices of the peace, clerks of courts; their functions and appointment, qualifications. Continuing judicial education. Administration of Courts Procedural rules. Treatment of jurors and witnesses. Management techniques and the courts; case monitoring, jury lists. Pre-trial Procedures Summons, bail, remand, federal and state legal aid schemes. Determination of Guilt Magistrates' courts; the preliminary hearing, with or without witnesses, coronial inquest in criminal cases, summary trials, procedure and practice, appeals. Higher courts; the jury trial, function of judge, counsel and jury, qualification of jurors. Appeals. The concept of the fair trial; prejudicial publicity and freedom of the Press, community prejudice against particular offenders, judicial impartiality. The Sentencing Discretion Role of judge and counsel, expert evidence, pleas in mitigation, plea bargaining.

BOOKS (a) General—recommended for reference: Chappell D & Wilson P R eds The Australian Criminal Justice System, 2nd ed Butterworths Sydney 1977 Davis K C Discretionary Justice, Louisiana State University Press Baton Rouge 1969 Quinney R The Social Reality of Crime, Little Brown & Co Boston 1970

(b) Unit 81—recommended for reference: Banton M The Policeman in the Community, Tavistock Lend 1964 Bordua D J The Police, Wiley NY 1967 Cain M E Society and the Policeman's Role, Routledge & Kegan Paul Lend 1973 Chapman B Police State, Pall Mall Lend 1971 Chappell D & Wilson P R The Police and the Public in Australia and New Zealand, QUP 1969 Cressey D R Criminal Organization: Its Elementary Forms, Heinemann Educational Books Lend 1972 Cressey D R Theft of the Nation, Harper NY 1969 Hingley R The Russian Secret Police 1565-1970, Hutchinson Lend 1970 Milte K L & Weber T H Police in Australia: Development, Functions, Procedures, Butterworths Sydney 1977 108 Criminology

Neiderhoffer A & Blumberg A S The Ambivalent Force: Perspectives on the Police, Reinhart Press San Francisco 1973 National Advisory Commission on Criminal Justice Standards and Goals Police, US Govt Printing Office Washington DC 1973 Royal Commission on the Police 1962 Final Report, Cmd 1728 HMSO Lind 1962 Skolnick J H Justice Without Trial, Wiley NY 1966 Sowie C R ed Police Power and Individual Freedom: The Quest for Balance, Aldine Chicago 1962 Sutherland E H White Collar Crime, Holt NY 1949 The President's Commission on Law Enforcement and Administration of Justice: Task Force Report The Police, US Govt Printing Office Washington DC 1967 Wilson O & McLaren R C Police Administration, 3rd ed, McGraw-Hill NY 1972 Wilson P R & Western J S The Policeman's Position Today and Tomorrow, QUP St. Lucia 1970 (c) Unit B2—recommended for reference: Cornish W R The Jury, Allen Lane The Penguin Press 1968 Devlin P Trial by Jury, Stevens Lond 1956 Jackson R M The Machinery of Justice in England, 6th ed, Cambridge University Press 1972 Justice (Society) Standing Committee on Civil Justice The Judiciary, Stevens Lond 1972 Karlen D Judicial Administration: The American Experience, Butter- worths Lind 1970 National Advisory Commission on Criminal Justice Standards and Goals Courts, US Govt Printing Office Washington DC 1973 Smith B Abel In Search of Justice: Society and the Legal System, Allen Lane The Penguin Press 1966 Smith B Abel Lawyers and the Courts, Heinemann Lind 1967 The President's Commission on Law Enforcement and Administration of Justice: Task Force Report The Courts, US Govt Printing Office Washington DC 1967 Williams G L The Proof of Guilt, 3rd ed, Stevens Lind 1963 EXAMINATION Assessment of prescribed written work which must be submitted by dates to be specified. 191-803 CRIMINOLOGY C A course of one lecture and one seminar a week throughout the year. Students will be required to submit up to four essays during the year. SYLLABUS The course will raise philosophical issues underlying the administration of criminal justice. Emphasis will be given to basic concepts such as authority, criminal intent, free will, guilt, justice, law, liberty, responsibility, rule of law, sentence and sovereignty. 1. Defence of Political Order Emergency defence through natural disaster and political or industrial strife. The relationship between social defence and military defence. The enforcement of world criminal law. The draft statute for a World Criminal Court. United Nations procedures for the protection of human

109 Faculty of Arts

rights from violation by national governments: The Human Rights Com- mittee. The extent and effectiveness of United Nations' sovereignty and sanctions. Sentencing political offenders; sentencing for contempt and for breach of privilege. Amnesty International. The power and authority of sentencers. 2. Sentencing Law and Administration Sentencing theory. The Integration of sentencing policy and administration. The objective of sentencing. The rationalization of legislative sentencing. Australian and Victorian sentencing legislation. Judicial sentencing. Pre-sentence reports. Compensating the victim. Principles underlying decisions as to fine, probation and detention. Criteria for terminating probation and parole. Comparison of parole release and good-time remissions. Deportation and supervision of offenders. Sanctions against corporations and trades unions. Sentencing and treating the insane offender; ethical bases, nature and term of detention, rights of review, custodial management. State discipline of children. Detention of alcoholics and drug addicts, the infectiously diseased, the mentally ill. Administrative orders. Police warning. Accountability under health and aliens' laws. Discipline in the military, the police, prisons and the public service generally. Definition and legal status of criminality and pre-delinquency, Loss of civil rights. Disqualifications and re-employment. The licensing of drivers.

BOOKS Recommended for reference: (a) General: American Law Institute The Model Penal Code Crimes Act, Australia Crimes Act, Victoria Johnston N Savitz L & Wolfgang M E The Sociology of Punishment and Correction, 2nd ed, Wiley NY 1970 Johnston S W & Fox R G Correction Handbook of Victoria, Criminology Department Univ of leIb 1965 Mannheim H Comparative Criminology, Routledge & Kegan Paul Lind 1965 Rubin S The Law of Criminal Correction, West Tappan P W Crime, Justice and Correction, McGraw-Hill NY 1960 Thomas D A Principles of Sentencing, Heinemann Lind 1970 United States Presidential Commission on Criminal Justice The Chal- lenge of Crime in a Free Society, US Govt Printing Office Washing- ton 1967 Winslow R W Crime in a Free Society, Dickenson 1968 (b) Defence of Political Order: Allen C K The Queen's Peace, Stevens London 1953 Bassiouni M C & Nanda V P A Treatise on International Criminal Law, Charles C Thomas 1973 Mendlovitz S H Legal and Political Problems of World Older, World Peace through World Law Boston 1962 Mueller G O W & Wise E M International Criminal Law, Sweet & Maxwell Lond 1965 Stone J & Woetzel R K Toward a Feasible International Criminal Court, World Peace through Law Centre Geneva 1970 110 Criminology

(c) Sentencing: Acton H B The Philosophy of Punishment, Macmillan Lind 1969 Devlin K Sentencing Offenders in Magistrates Courts, Sweet & Maxwell Land 1970 The Mitchell Report on Sentencing and Corrections, 1973 Thomas D A Principles of Sentencing, Heinemann, Lind 1970 EXAMINATION Assessment of prescribed written work, which must be submitted by dates to be specified.

191-804 CRIMINOLOGY D A course of one lecture and one seminar a week throughout the year. Some visits to correctional establishments may be arranged. During the year students will be required to submit no more than four written assignments and complete a statistics test. SYLLABUS 1. Empirical Criminology and Research Research Practice. The scope and present trends of empirical criminological research. Co-ordination and co-operation in research. Procedures and problems in particular contemporary research undertakings. The criminologist's use of the computer. Basic statistics. A course explaining basic statistical concepts used in criminological research. The use of descriptive statistical techniques in the presentation of criminological data. The concept of hypothesis testing through statistical methods. Research project. A task force approach to a particular criminological topic, utilizing the various skills of the class as a whole. The topic will be selected by discussion in the first seminars of the year. The project is aimed at producing material which will be of value to agencies operating in the criminal justice system. 2. Penology Correctional law and administration; laws governing detention and other restrictions of liberty; confidentiality and professional privilege. Standard Minimum Rules for the Treatment of Prisoners. A comparison of the Victorian correctional system with those of other Australian states and of some selected overseas countries. Institutional Management. Institutions for adult and young offenders; purposes, programmes, administration, staffing and design. The application of standard management principles to the management of prisoners: Management by Objectives. Inmate roles and adjustment. Staff and inmate morale. Institutional security and discipline. Reception and classification. Prison labour, education and training. Staff selection and training. Roles of the chaplain, psychiatrist, education officer, psychologist and custodian. Ethics of behaviour control. Correctional procedures involving part-time detention; attendance centres, work release, week-end imprisonment. Community-based corrections. Criteria for probation and parole; prediction of recidivism, techniques for supervision and the place for confidentiality in the treatment relationship. The selection and training of volunteers for probation, parole and institutional work. BOOKS Recommended for reference:

111 Faculty of Arts

1. Krausz E & Miller S H Social Research Design, Longman 1974 SiIvey J Deciphering Data, Longman 1975 2. American Correctional Association Manual of Correctional Stan- dards, 5th ed, 1965 Blom-Cooper, L Progress in Penal Reform, Clarendon Press 1974 Conrad J P Crime and Its Correction, Tavistock 1965 Cressey D R The Prison, Holt Rinehart & Winston 1961 Giallombardo R Society of Women, Wiley 1966 Halleck, S L Psychiatry and the Dilemmas of Crime, Harper & Row, 1967 Hawkins G The Prison: Policy end Practice, University of Chicago Press 1976 The Jenkinson Report on Prison Discipline, 1973 Morris N The Future of Imprisonment, University of Chicago Press 1974 Social Welfare Act and Regulations, Victoria Sykes G M The Society of Captives, Atheneum 1965 Tappan P W Contemporary Correction, McGraw-Hill 1951 Thomas J E The English Prison Officer Since 1850, Routledge & Kegan Paul 1972 Wolff, M Prison, Eyre & Spottiswoode 1967 Other books will be suggested as the course progresses. EXAMINATION Written work as prescribed above, satisfactory completion of a section of the group research project, a pass in the statistical test.

MASTER OF ARTS 191-601 DEPARTMENT OF CRIMINOLOGY Candidates prepare a thesis on a subject approved by the chairman of the department, and are advised as to suitable reading and fieldwork. They work under the supervision of a member of the department, to whom they should report regularly upon the progress of their work. Candidates will normally be required to participate in a course of thirteen 2-hour seminars, playing a major role in the preparation and presentation of materials for class discussion. This coursework will be assessed according to class participation and two written papers, the first being the product of a class discussion and the second being a research paper submitted at the conclusion of the coursework. The thesis should normally be submitted for examination within two years from the commencement of candidature for MA by full-time candidates and within four years by part-time candidates. Except in special circumstances and with the permission of the faculty no thesis or course work will be examined unless the candidate presents for examination within four years from the commencement of his candidature or, in the event of his having been granted leave of absence for the maximum period of one year, within five years from the commencement of his candidature.

DEPARTMENT OF EAST ASIAN STUDIES Chairman of Department: Professor H. F. SIMON, B.A. (Lind.), M.A. The department of East Asian Studies was established in 1961 thanks to a generous grant from the Myer Foundation. The department of East Asian

112

East Asian Studies

Studies offers courses in Chinese language and literature (a three year pass course and a four year honours course, either pure or combined), in Japanese language and literature (a three year pass course) and in East Asian Studies 1 (a first year course in the history and politics of China and Japan, leading to majors or two year sequences in history or political science). It should be noted that no preliminary study of any kind is required for any of these courses. Faculty has approved exemption from first year Chinese or Japanese for students who have some knowledge of any of these languages attested by having passed the Н.Ѕ.C. examination or in some other way. Members of staff of the department will gladly discuss their courses with intending students in December or January or at any other time of the year. It is advisable to make an appoinment for interview with the secretary. Course details for Chinese are to be found on pp. 113-126, for Japanese on pp. 126-130 and for East Asian Studies 1 on pp. 130-132. There are some quite useful introductory remarks and a full list of subjects under each heading. In summary the subjects offered are as follows: Chinese 1, 2, 3 Chinese 1A, 2A, ЭА (half-subjects) Chinese Studies 1, 2, 3 (A combination of Chinese 1A, 2A and 3A with other half-courses or units.) Chinese Honours 2, 3, 4 Early Modern Chinese 2, 3, 4 Japanese 1, 2,3 Japanese 1A, 2A, ЗА Japanese Studies 1 & 2 East Asian Studies 1 . East Asian Studies (Chinese) (half-subject) East Asian Studies (Japanese) (half-subject)

COURSES iN CHINESE N.B. Courses marked with an asterisk are components of Chinese Studies 1,2or3. 156-101 Chinese 1 156-102 Chinese Studies IX [Chinese IA ± t%z of East Asian Studies 1] 156-103 Chinese Studies ly [Chinese 2A -+- % East Asian Studies 1 or Chinese 1A -i- Chinese 2А ] •156-111 •Chinese 1A (half-subject) •156-112 East Asian Studies (Chinese) (half-subject) 156-201 Chinese 2 156-202 Chinese Studies 2X [Chinese 2A + Politics unit] 156-203 Chinese Studies 2Y [Chinese 2A + Chinese ЗA] 156-204 Chinese Studies 2Z•• [Chinese 2A + Early Modern Chinese 2] •156-211 •Chinese 2A (half-subject) 156-261 Chinese 2 (Ions) [Chinese 2 + Chinese 2A] 156-262 • • •Early Modern Chinese 2 (Ions) 156-301 Chinese 3 156-302 Chinese Studies 3X [Chinese 3A + Politics unit] 156-303 Chinese Studies ЗY•• [Chinese ЭА + Early Modern Chinese 3] •156-311 Chinese 3A (half-subject) 156-361 Chinese 3 (Ions) [Chinese 3 + Chinese ЗA] 113 Faculty of Arts

156-362 •••Early Modern Chinese 3 (Ions) 156-363 Chinese 3B (Ions) 156-461 Chinese 4 (Ions) 156-462 Early Modern Chinese 4 (Ions) •• available only with the agreement of the chairman of the department • • • with the agreement of the chairman of the department this may be taken as a half-subject in the pass degree

The Chinese Language

The Chinese are proud of a civilization which is second to none. One of the most remarkable features of this civilization is that it has been carried in the one language by the one people over a period of some 4,000 years. We have a wealth of literature in many fields. There are written texts which cover the last two and a half millennia of this period as well as inscriptions on bronzes and oracle bones which go back much further. A knowledge of written Chinese will put within one's reach what is probably the largest corpus of literature known to us in any one language. But it is necessary to distinguish three main forms of written Chinese: classical, early modern and modern. Classical Chinese has a structure and vocabulary broadly based on the written language of the 5th century B.C. Early modern and modern Chinese, on the other hand, are based on the spoken language current at the time at which the texts were written. There are, therefore, fundamental and strongly marked differences of structure, style and vocabulary between the three forms. Modern Chinese may be dated from the beginning of this century, whilst early modern Chinese may be said to have its early beginnings in the middle Chinese of the 6th century A.D. and to have produced its first major creative works, the plays of the Yйan period, in the 13th century. Classical Chinese continued to be written throughout these periods and is still being written today. As a spoken language, standard Chinese, or, as it is often called, Man- darin, or Киоуй or Putungha, is now spoken and understood throughout China and in most of the overseas Chinese communities in the various countries of South-East Asia. It is, therefore, a satisfactory medium of communication with the majority of the 750,000,000 of Australia's Chinese neighbours, rather more than one-fifth of the world's total population. Standard Chinese is based on the Peking dialect and the pronunciation taught will be that of Peking. In the first year the main emphasis of the course is on spoken and simple written Chinese. From the second year the texts studied are virtually all from Chinese written for Chinese rather than from specially composed text books, although most of the second year texts have been edited and simplified to eliminate the most difficult structures and uncommon words. An hour a week of classical Chinese is also introduced at this stage since some knowledge of classical Chinese is necessary even for studies which are entirely based on modern Chinese. Early modern Chinese with readings from the Shui-hu Churn (The Water Margin), the Hung-lou Meng (The Dream of the Red Chamber) and, in fourth year, from Ylan drama is taken by pure honours students as from the second year. But the main emphasis of the course is on modern standard Chinese and on modern literature from the nineteen-twenties to the present day. The rapid emergence in the latter half of this century of China as a great world power has added considerable urgency to Western studies of 114 East Asian Studies

Chinese and of Chinese civilization. From their early beginnings as a peripheral and esoteric pastime, these studies have now developed into an increasingly normal and central pursuit at most of the major universities in the West. Australia's geographical position makes such a development particularly desirable and important. Opportunities now exist for careers in secondary schools and universities as well as in government and business for graduates in this field. A knowledge of Chinese either of major or sub-major standard coupled with suitable qualifications in such fields as History, Political Science or Economics should be particularly useful for posts in government or commerce. The new course structure of full and half-subjects After a recent study of work-loads, each of the three pass subjects in Chinese, with an average of six contact hours per week, was sub-divided into one-and-a-half subjects. The full subjects now consist of four hours per week (five in the case of Chinese 3), the half-subjects of two hours per week. Whilst it is therefore possible now to enrol for a major consisting only of Chinese 1, 2 and 3, students are strongly advised to attempt Chinese 1 and Chinese 1A in their first year. Chinese 2 and Chinese 2A in their second year and Chinese 3 and Chinese 3A in their third year, i.e. the programmes that used to comprise the former Chinese 1, 2 and 3. The list of subjects at the head of this section shows the combinations of the Chinese half-subjects with each other and with other half-subjects to give Chinese Studies 1, 2 and 3. The new course for first year students with no previous knowledge of Chinese First year students with no previous knowledge of Chinese should enrol for Chinese 1 and are advised to enrol also for Chinese Studies 1X. Chinese Studies IX consists of the first half of East Asian Studies 1 and Chinese 1A. Should they wish to continue East Asian Studies 1, they can change their enrolment in the following manner: they continue with Chinese Studies 1X, cancelling unit 156-112 but keeping on with Chinese 1A unit 156-111, and they add to their enrolment the full subject East Asian Studies 156-121. Should they fail one of their other first year subjects or wish to withdraw from it, they can add Chinese 2A to Chinese 1A in their second year by enrolling in Chinese Studies 1Y, and be given credit for that first year subject, upon completion of the Chinese 2A half-subject.

The new course for first year students exempted from Chinese 1 First year students who have passed H.S.C. in Chinese, or are native speakers, or have acquired elementary Chinese in some other way, are exempted from Chinese 1 and should therefore take Chinese 2A and combine it with the first half of East Asian Studies 1. With the special permission of the chairman of the department and subject to the availability of a second year language laboratory they may also take a second year version of Chinese 1A. Alternatively they may count East Asian Studies 1 as the first part of an approved major in Chinese and enrol in Chinese 2 and 2A in their second year.

Chinese Studies 2 Chinese Studies 2 consists of a combination of Chinese 2A with the Chinese Politics unit (166-005) or with Chinese 3A (to be taken in the

115 Faculty of Arts

following year) or with Early Modern Chinese 2 (subject to the agreement of the chairman of the department). The addition of Chinese Studies 2 to Chinese Studies 1 produces an enriched major in Chinese. Only one other second year subject is required. Chinese Studies 3 The pattern of the third year is similar to the second year. Chinese Studies З consists of a combination of Chinese ЗА with the Chinese Politics unit (166-005) taken at the third year level (provided it has not been taken in second year) or with Early Modern Chinese 3 (subject to the agreement of the chairman of the department). A combination of Chinese 3 and Chinese Studies 3 is regarded as a full third year course. Enrolment procedures: To avoid confusion and to ensure that students academic records are accurate, students should note carefully the following enrolment procedures:— I) Students must enrol in full subjects in any one year. ii) If students have been given permission to enrol in only one half of a full subject in any one year, they should formally enrol in the approved full subject and one of the component half-subjects. iii) Where students are permitted to carry over credit for a half-subject from one year to the next, they must enrol in the full subject in the following year. iv) There are various combinations of half-subjects which make approved full subjects. Students must enrol in the specific approved full subject which indicates the combination of their choice and they must enrol in the two subsidiary half-subjects, eg. 1) A student choosing the combination Chinese 2A and Politics unit in 2nd year would enrol as follows: 156-202 Chinese Studies 2X AND 156-211 Chinese 2A AND 166-005 Chinese Politics. 2) A student choosing the combination Chinese 1A and t/2 of East Asian Studies (Chinese) would enrol as follows: 156-102 Chinese Studies 1X AND 156-111 Chinese 1A AND 156-112 East Asian Studies (Chinese)

3) A student who with special approval of the department and of Faculty through the Sub-Dean is permitted to enrol in any one half- subject in any one year must enrol as follows: 1978 156-102 Chinese Studies 1X AND 156-111 Chinese 1A. In the following year the student must enrol as follows: 1979 156-102 Chinese Studies 1X AND 156-211 Chinese 2A. The student will retain credit for the half-subject passed in 1977 only in the sense that they are exempted from repeating that half- subject but they will be credited with the full subject Chinese Studies 1X only upon completing the second half-subject in 1978. Students should note that any full approved subjects are credited to the В.А. or B.A. Honours degree. Students who, for whatever reason, fail to complete a full approved subject consisting of two half-subjects in two successive years of study will be shown on their academic record as failing a full subject. Students who do 116 East Asian Studies

not wish to proceed with the full subject will be able to withdraw on the completion of the first component.

ORDINARY DEGREE (Details for the honours degree are set out at the end of this section.)

156-101 CHINESE 1 A course of four hours per week consisting of two lectures, one language class and one tutorial. No previous knowledge of Chinese is necessary for this course and its main emphasis will be linguistic. Students will receive a thorough grounding in Standard Chinese in its spoken and written form. The two lectures each week will be based on the First Reader in Stan- dard Chinese. This offers a study of everyday Chinese as spoken in Peking. It consists of dialogues and of some continuous pieces. Students will find that the simplicity of Chinese enables them to make fairly rapid progress in speaking and understanding at this stage. The grammatical structure of the language is challengingly different from that of English and other European languages and will offer some insights Into the structure of our own language as well as of Chinese. Phonetically Chinese introduces one or two unusual sounds, but the main point of interest lies in the study of the four tones. Just as we distinguish between 'bit and 'but' and 'bit' and 'beat', so the Chinese distinguish between 'ta' spoken with even, high-rising, low-rising or falling pitch. At once the most interesting and the most difficult part of the course is the study of 'characters' or 'sуllаЫе graphs'. Most syllables in Chinese can be shown to have some meaning, and syllables with different meanings (not necessarily with different sounds) are each written with a different character or 'syllable graph'. Students tend to master about five hundred of these in their first year. Each lesson in the Reader introduces thirty new characters. Tuition in writing with a brush is provided, and some students become quite expert at handling a brush, although most Chinese nowadays are content to write with a pen. The five hundred characters occur in compounds and give one а total vocabulary of up to 1,000 words. These are supplemented by words learnt only In their romanized form. The tutorial provides conversation and dictation and some simple structural exercises. The language class consists of exercises, translations and dictations based on the Reader in Standard Chinese. BOOKS (a) Prescribed texts: Simon H F & King R C I A First Reader in Standard Chinese (supplied in mimeographed form by the department) (b) Prescribed dictionary: Simon W Beginners' Chinese Dictionary, Lund Humphries or Dictionary of Spoken Chinese, The Institute of Far Eastern Languages, Yale University, Yale University Press 1965 (c) Recommended for reference: Wang Fang-Yu The Lady in the Painting, Far Eastern Publications, Yale University 1957

117 Faculty of Arts

Lee Pao-Ch'en Reed About China, The Institute of Far Eastern Lan- guages, Yale University, 1957 Simon W Structure Drill in Chinese, Lund Humphries De Francis ed Pali Language Texts: Chinese, University Press at Hawaii Honolulu The department will issue a supplementary reading list as well as additional teaching material in the form of mimeographed sheets. WRITTEN ASSIGNMENTS A short written exercise will be set each week. A test will be set in the first week of second and third term. One of the objects of the tests is to prepare students for the annual examination and to show them where they stand in relation to the previous term's work. Corrected test papers will be returned to students after the test. The results of the tests and of periodic short oral tests and of the written exercises will be taken into account in the final examination. EXAMINATION One 8-hour paper of translation from and into Chinese (unseen). An oral examination. The results of the term tests and of the written assignments will be taken into account.

156-111 CHINESE 1A (half subject) A course of one lecture and one language laboratory per week. The lecture will offer a survey of the syntactical structure of Standard Chinese together with an introduction to structural grammar. This course should be taken in conjunction with Chinese 1 (156-101). EXAMINATION AND WRITTEN ASSIGNMENTS There will be no formal examination paper at the end of the year. The examination will be based on short tests to be set in the first week of second and third terms and in the last week of third term as well as on other short assignments and tests set periodically throughout the year.

156-201 CHINESE 2 (PASS) A course of four hours per week consisting of two lectures, one language class and one tutorial. Students are strongly advised to spend at least one hour each week in the language laboratory or to work on the cassette tapes which are available on loan. Cassette players may also be had on loan. It will be seen from the introduction to Chinese courses that this course is only a part (about two-thirds) of the former second year course in Chinese which it replaces. Students would, therefore, be well advised to enrol also for the half course Chinese 2A (156-211). This is particu- lагlу important, since that course also offers an introduction to classical Chinese and a survey of Chinese literature In addition to the study of two further modern texts. One of the two lectures in Chinese 2 is on the prescribed texts, which were written in the first half of this century; the other is on translation from Chinese and on Chinese grammar and/or poetry. The language class deals with translation into Chinese, the tutorial comprises conversation and other oral exercises such as dictation. Before being allowed to proceed to Chinese 2, students must have obtained a pass in Chinese 1 (or exemption from it) and in East Asian 118 East Asian Studies

Studies 1 or the first half of it. Under certain circumstances, permission may be granted by the chairman of the department to proceed to Chinese 2 and East Asian Studies simultaneously. Students may also offer History 2J or 3J or an approved part of Politics 2 or 3 (166-005) instead of East Asian Studies 1. Students who are exempt from Chinese 1 must satisfy the chairman of the department that they have a satisfactory command of Standard Chinese. Whilst the study of Chinese In the first year is based on texts specially written for foreign students, the texts studied in Chinese 2 were written for Chinese readers. The transition from 'textbook Chinese is not easy, and the department offers a special vacation course in December and February to bridge the gap.

BOOKS (a) Prescribed texts: 'Selected stories and essays from the works of Pa Chin and Hu Shih. (Copies of these texts may be obtained from the department.) (b) Prescribed dictionaries: 'Hornby A S & Wu H C The Advanced Learner's Dictionary, Oxford University Press Hong Kong or •Tsung-he Ving-hue lue-ying Ta Tz'u-tien, any ed •Liang Shih-ch'iu A New Practical Chinese-English Dictionary, The Far East Book Co Taipei or •Lin Yutang's Chinese-English Dictionary of Modern Usage, The Chinese University of Hong Kong, Hong Kong 1972 or •Mathews R H Chinese-English Dictionary, any ed (c) Recommended for reference: Shih Nai-an (Buck Pearl tr) All Men are Brothers, Grove Press NY Dream of the Red Chamber, Ts'ао Hsйeh-ch'in (Wang Chi-chef tr) Twayne Publications NY or Penguin 1973 Тs'ао Hsйeh-ch'in (Hawkes D tr) The Story of the Stone, Luo Kuan-chung (Brewitt-Taylor C H tr) Romance of the Three King- doms, Tuttle Rutland 1959 Liu T'ieh-yün (Shadick H tr) The Travels of Lao Ts'an, Cornell UP 1952 WRITTEN ASSIGNMENTS One translation from Chinese and one translation into Chinese will be set each week. Two short essays in Chinese on a topic of the student's choice will be required, one in second term and one in third term. Each essay should be approximately 750 characters in length. A test will be set in the first week of second and third terms. One of the objects of the tests is to prepare students for the annual examination and to show them where they stand in relation to the previous term's work. Corrected test papers will be returned to the students after the test. Written assignments and periodic short oral tests will be taken into consideration in the examination. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper on translation from and into Chinese (unseen), and on questions on the prescribed texts. An essay in Chinese to be set as

119 Faculty of Arts

part of the paper in Early Modern Chinese 2. An oral examination. The results of the weekly assignments, the two essays and the two term tests will be taken into consideration.

156-211 CHINESE 2A (half subject) A course of two lectures per week throughout the year. In one of the lectures students will study two essays or stories from the works of Ping Hsin and Lu Hsйn, the other will offer an introduction to Chinese literature in first term and an introduction to classical Chinese in the remainder of the year. BOOKS (a) Prescribed texts: •Selected stories and essays from the works of Ping 'sin and Lu Hsйn (copies of these texts may be obtained from the department). Liu Y C Fifty Chinese Stories, Lund Humphries Lind Shih Nai-an (Buck Pearl tr) All Men are Brothers, Grove Press NY Ts'ао Hsieh.ch'in (Wang Chi-chef tr) Dream of the Red Chamber, Twayne Publications NY or Ts'ao Hsйeh-ch'iп (Hawkes D tr) The Story of the Stone, Penguin 1973 •Liu Wu-chi Introduction to Chinese Literature, Indiana UP 1966 (b) Prescribed dictionaries: As for Chinese 2 (156-201) (c) Recommended for reference: Hsia C T The Classical Chinese Novel, Columbia UP 1968 Lo Kuan-Chung Romance of the Three Kingdoms (Brewitt-Taylor C H tr), Tuttle Rutland 1959 Liu Т'ieh-Yйn The Travels of Leo Ts en (Shadick H tr), Cornell UP 1952 WRITTEN ASSIGNMENTS There will be a test in the first week of second and third term. The results will be taken into account in the examination. EXAMINATION One 2- or 8-hour paper on the prescribed texts and on classical Chinese together with a question on a general topic in Chinese literature.

156-301 CHINESE 3 (PASS) A course of five hours per week consisting of three lectures, one language class and one tutorial. Students are strongly advised to spend at least one hour each week in the language laboratory or to work on the cassette tapes that are available on loan. It will be seen from the Introduction to Courses in Chinese that this course is only a part (five-sevenths) of the former third year subject Chinese 3. Students are therefore advised to enrol also for Chinese 3A which will supplement the reading from modem texts and also provide a weekly lecture on classical Chinese and on Chinese bibliography. Chinese 3A may be combined with a half course in History (3J) or Political Science (Chinese Politics and Society [166-005]) or Modern and Medieval Chinese 3B (156-362) to provide a full third year Arts course in the form of a 'super-major' in Chinese.

120 East Asian Studies

Of the three lectures, one is on prescribed texts from modern Chinese (Mao Tse-tung's speech to the Art and Literature Forum in Yenan in 1942, together with a short story by Lu Hsйn), one is on newspaper Chinese, and the third Is on translation from Chinese and on Chinese poetry (the tz'u of the Sung dynasty). The language class deals with translation into Chinese and on essay writing, the tutorial consists of conversation and other forms of advanced oral practice. BOOKS (a) Prescribed texts: • Mao Tse-tung Tsai Yen-an Wen-yl Tso-t'an-huei-shang-te Chiang-hua •Lu Hsйn, one of his short stories (copies of these texts may be obtained from the department) (b) Prescribed dictionaries: •Hornby A S & Wu H C The Advanced Learner's Dictionary, Oxford University Press Hong Kong or • Tsung-he Ying-hua Hua-ying Te Tz'u-tien, any ed or •Liang Shlh-ch'iu A New Practical English-Chinese Dictionary, The Far East Book Co Ltd Taipei 1963 •Liang Shih-ch'iu A New Practical Chinese-English Dictionary, The Far East Book Company Taipei or •Lin Yutang's Chinese-English Dictionary of Modern Usage, The Chinese University of Hong Kong Hong Kong 1972 or Mathews R H Chinese-English Dictionary, any ed (c) Recommended for reference: Teng S Y & Biggerstaff K An Annotated Bibliography of Selected Chi- nese Reference Works, Harvard 1950 Tz'u-hai, Chung-hua Book Company

WRITTEN ASSIGNMENTS One translation from Chinese and one translation into Chinese will be set each week. Two short essays in Chinese on a topic of the student's choice will be required, one at the beginning of second tarm and one at the beginning of third term. Each essay should be approximately 1,000 characters in length. A test will be set in the first week of second and third terms. One of the objects of the tests is to prepare students for the annual examination and to show them where they stand In relation to the previous term's work. Corrected test papers will be returned to the students after the test. The results of the tests and of the written assignments and the periodic short oral tests will be taken into consideration in the examination. EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers. The first will consist of translation from and into modern Chinese (unseen), the second of translation from newspaper Chinese (unseen), a short essay in Chinese and questions on the prescribed texts. There will also be an oral examination. The results of the weekly assignments, the two term tests, and the two essays will be taken into consideration.

121 Faculty of Arts

156-311 CHINESE ЭА (half subject) A course of two lectures per week throughout the year. In one of the lectures students will study two or three essays or short stories from the works of Chu Tzu-ch'ing and Mao Tun. In the other they will study passages selected from classical texts and will also be given an introductory survey of Chinese bibliography. BOOKS (a) Prescribed texts: 'Selected stories and essays by Mao Tun and Chu Tzu-ch'ing or Wu Han 'Selections from classical texts (b) Prescribed dictionaries: As for Chinese 3 (156-301) (c) Recommended for reference: As for Chinese 3 (156-301) WRITTEN ASSIGNMENTS There will be two tests in the first week of second and third terms. The results will be taken into account in the annual examination. EXAMINATION One 2-hour paper with questions on the prescribed texts in modern and classical Chinese.

HONOURS DEGREE SCHOOL OF CHINESE 1. The course for the honours school in Chinese comprises the following subjects: Chinese 1, 2 (hens), 3 (hofs), 3В (hofs), 4 (hens). Early Modern Chinese 2, 3, 4 (hens). East Asian Studies 1. Students are required to pass in three additional subjects selected from the course for the ordinary degree. One of these should be approved by the chairman of the department and should normally be at second year level. 2. Admission to the honours school is conditional upon a satisfactory performance in first year and must be approved by the faculty through the Sub-Dean. Admission will normally be granted to candidates who have obtained at least an honours 26 in Chinese 1. Other candidates should interview the chairman of the department who will be guided in his recommendation to faculty by the merits of the case. 3. Intending honours students are strongly advised to take Chinese 1A In their first year. 4. Admission to the honours school is also possible in the third year on the recommendation of the chairman of the department for candidates who have obtained a good result in Chinese 2. Such candidates will take Early Modern Chinese 2 and Early Modern Chinese 3 in their third year as well as the lecture on Classical Chinese in Chinese 2A if they have not taken it previously. 5. Candidates in their second year will normally take Chinese 2 (hens), Early Modern Chinese 2 and an additional second year subject. The additional subject should be approved by the chairman of the depart- 122 East Asian Studies

ment. Candidates who did not take East Asian Studies in their first year may. on the recommendation of the chairman of the department, be granted special permission to offer it as their additional subject in second year, or to take History 2J or an approved course in Politics 2 instead. 6. In their third year candidates will take Chinese 3 (hens), Early Modern Chinese 3 and Chinese 36 (hons). 7. In the fourth year candidates will take Chinese 4 together with Early Modern Chinese 4. 8. Majors or two-year sequences in the following subjects are thought to be particularly useful for students in the honours school of Chinese: History, Political Science, Economics, Japanese, English, Geography. 9. Students who take Chinese in a combined honours course will be exempted from Early Modern Chinese 2 - 4 and Chinese 38 (hens). The fourth year thesis may, with the approval of the chairmen of the two departments, take the form of a joint thesis. Alternatively the thesis may be done in either one of the two departments. If the thesis is done in another department a short translation project will be set in Chinese. By special permission students may offer two smaller theses, one in each of the two departments.

156-261 CHINESE 2 (HONS) A course of four lectures, one language class and one tutorial per week. SYLLABUS As for Chinese 2 and Chinese 2A of the ordinary degree. BOOKS As for the ordinary degree together with the following recommended text: Hightower J R Topics in Chinese Literature, Harvard 1953 Candidates for honours will be given additional references to Chinese and Western texts. WRITTEN ASSIGNMENTS As for the ordinary degree. Honours candidates will be given additional assignments which will not exceed the equivalent of one short essay each term. EXAMINATION As for Chinese 2 and Chinese 2A of the ordinary degree.

156-262 EARLY MODERN CHINESE 2 A course of two lectures per week. SYLLABUS A study of selected chapters from the Shui-hu Chuan. Special oral work together with a study of selected passages from traditional novels. BOOKS Prescribed texts: •Shui-hu Chuan, 70 chapter ed chaps 20 and 21 Irwin R G The Evolution of a Chinese Novel, Harvard 1953 (Photocopies of the prescribed texts may be obtained from the department.)

123 Faculty of Arts

Recommended additional texts: As for Chinese 2 as well as: Edgerton Clement tr The Golden Lotus WRITTEN ASSIGNMENTS Not more than one substantial translation from the prescribed text and one essay in English on the Shui-hu Chuan or the Hung-lou Meng or the Ju-lin Wai-shih. EXAMINATION One 2- or 3-hour paper on the prescribed text.

156-361 CHINESE 3 (HONS) A course of five lectures, one language class and one tutorial per week. SYLLABUS As for Chinese 3 and Chinese 3A of the ordinary degree. BOOKS As for the ordinary degree. WRITTEN ASSIGNMENTS As for the ordinary degree. Honours candidates will be given additional assignments which will not exceed the equivalent of one short essay each term.

156-362 EARLY MODERN CHINESE 3 A course of two lectures per week. SYLLABUS A study of selected chapters from the Shui-hu Chuan and the Hung-lou Meng. BOOKS Prescribed texts: •Shih Nai-an Shui-hu Chuan, 70 chapter ed chaps 22 and 23 •Ts'ao Hsйeh-ch'in Hung-lou Meng, 120 chapter ed chaps 9 and 19 (Photocopies of the prescribed texts may be obtained from the department.) The department will also issue a supplementary reading list. WRITTEN ASSIGNMENTS A substantial translation from each of the two prescribed texts together with an essay in English on the Hung-lou Meng. EXAMINATION One 2- or 3-hour paper on the prescribed texts.

156-363 CHINESE 3В (HONS) This course is for pure honours students only. It will consist of either: (i) an unsupervised translation of a modern short story or essay or article to be completed by the beginning of third term, or (ii) a half-year course of Chinese History 3J (131-363), or (iii) a half-year course of Chinese Politics (166-005). 124 East Asian Studies

156-461 CHINESE 4 A course of three lectures and one tutorial per week. SYLLABUS Advanced translation from and into Chinese. Chinese essays. Classical Chinese. Chinese Poetry. Advanced Oral Work. A thesis involving a substantial translation project. BOOKS Prescribed texts: Szu-ma Ch'ien Shih-chi, Book 7 A photocopy of this chapter of the Shih-chi may be obtained from the department. The department will also supply copies of other recommended texts and of translation passages and recorded tapes. WRITTEN ASSIGNMENTS One translation from Chinese and one translation into Chinese will be set each week. In addition there will be not more than two essays in Chinese of approximately 1,200 characters each on topics of the student's choice. There will be a test in the middle of second term consisting of translation from and into Chinese and an essay in Chinese. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper of translation from Modern and Classical Chinese (unseen). One 3-hour paper of translation into Chinese (unseen) and an essay in Chinese. An oral examination. Candidates taking Chinese 4 in a combined school will have a 90-minute paper on the prescribed text in Classical Chinese and on Chinese poetry. Candidates in the pure school will take this as part of the examination for Early Modern Chinese 3 and 4. The results of the weekly assignments and of the tests and essays will be taken into consideration. Students will be expected to submit a thesis before the third week of third term. The thesis will incorporate a substantial piece of translation from Modern Chinese. The topic should be chosen before the end of third term in the preceding year.

156-462 EARLY MODERN CHINESE 4 A course of two lectures per week. SYLLABUS A study of a Yuan dynasty play and of selected chapters from the Hung-lou Meng. BOOKS Prescribed texts: •Ts'ao Hsйeh-ch'in Hung-lou Meng, 120 chapter ed chaps 32 and 33 •Ma Chih-yйan Han-kung Ch'iu, any ed (The prescribed texts together with supplementary teaching material and reading lists may be obtained from the department.)

125 Faculty of Arts

WRITTEN ASSIGNMENTS Not more than a substantial translation from each of the two prescribed texts together with an essay in English on Yuan drama with special reference to the play under study. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper on the prescribed texts together with questions on Chinese poetry and the classical text prescribed for Chinese 4.

COURSES IN JAPANESE NB: The four asterisked courses are components of Japanese Studies 1 and Japanese Studies 2. 156-113 East Asian Studies (Japanese) (half-subject)• 156-121 Japanese 1(" 156-122 Japanese Studies 1X (Japanese 1A and a half course in East Asian Studies) 156-123 Japanese Studies 1Y (Japanese 2A and a half course in East Asian Studies) 156-131 Japanese 1A1 ß• 156-221 Japanese 2 156-222 Japanese Studies 2X (Japanese 2A and Japanese ЗA) 156-231 Japanese 2A• 156-321 Japanese 3 156-331 Japanese 3A• As indicated below, exemption may be granted from Japanese 1 and 1A in certain circumstances.

Modern Japan Japan's emergence as a modern State over the last hundred years is one of the most striking features of recent history. Today Japan stands as one of the most important nations on the world scene, and an understanding of Japan and its people is of the greatest importance. Australia's geographical position in particular makes it inevitable that contacts with Japan must steadily grow. A very large part of Australia's trade is with Japan, and the proportion will probably increase. It is most desirable that knowledge of Japanese culture and civilization should increase at the same time. A knowledge of Japanese also provides access to a highly stimulating and varied field of study. Before the modern era, Japan had already evolved a complex civilization by supplementing its own distinctive cultural foundations with extensive adaptations of a wide range of Chinese, In- dian and other elements. In addition to the intrinsic value of the resulting variety of literary expression and historical records, this wide background makes a knowledge of modern Japanese scholarship especially useful In the study of other Asian civilizations. Again, Japan's extraordinary success in the task of modernization, both cultural and economic, has resulted in the growth of a vigorous modern literature in close touch with all contemporary problems, as well as a steady stream of valuable publications on scientific and other specialized research. Japanese studies are therefore important both for the intrinsic interest of the national culture, ancient and modern, as well as for the many special contributions the Japanese have made on Asian and general problems of our time. 126 East Asian Studies

Japanese course content: The course in Japanese is a balanced programme aiming at combining oral communication with literacy in Japanese.

The new major and the new half subjects: The major in Japanese consists of Japanese 1, Japanese 2 and Japanese 3. Each of these subjects has four contact hours per week, as compared with the former course, where each subject had six contact hours per week. These three core subjects provide a knowledge of the essentials of the Japanese language. To gain a more complete knowledge of the language and culture of Japan, students are strongly recommended to take the additional three half subjects, Japanese 1A, 2A and ЗA, and also one half of East Asian Studies, which may be combined with Japanese 1A or 2A to form Japanese Studies 1, thus enriching their course. Note: East Asian Studies Is no longer required as a prerequisite to Japanese 24 but it is highly desirable that students should take at least one half of this subject. Suggested courses are as follows: (i) For students with no previous knowledge of Japanese First year: Japanese 1 (whole subject) and Japanese Studies 1X (i.e. Japanese lA (half subject). East Asian Studies 1 (half course) ). Second year: Japanese 2 (whole subject) and Japanese 2A (half subject) forming the first half of Japanese Studies 2. Third year: (half subject) Japanese З (whole subject) and Japanese ЭА forming the second half of Japanese Studies 2. This course amounts to five subjects, comprising the Japanese major, an additional first year subject and an additional second year subject consisting of Japanese 2A and ЗA. or (ii) For students who are exempt from Japanese I and Japanese 1A First year: Japanese Studies 1Y (i.e. Japanese 2A (half subject), East Asian Studies 1 (half course)) or another approved subject, e.g. East Asian Studies, Chinese 1. Second year: Japanese 2 Third year: Japanese 3. Students may take Japanese ЭА in either second or third year. If they take the full subject East Asian Studies 1, they may combine Japanese 2A and Japanese ЭА to form the second year subject Japanese Studies 2.

ORDINARY DEGREE 156-121 JAPANESE 1 (full subject) N.B. Students enrolling for Japanese 1 are strongly advised to enrol for Japanese 1A or Japanese Studies 1X as well. A course of four hours per week consisting of two lectures, one tutorial and one language class. . No previous knowledge of Japanese is necessary for this course, and the emphasis is on the language.

127 Faculty of Arts

Students who have attained a level of Japanese deemed equivalent to Japanese 1 may be granted exemption from Japanese 1 at the discretion of the chairman of department. The two lectures deal with the structure and script of Japanese. The tutorial comprises conversation, oral practice, etc., and the class provides exercises and additional practice on the structure and script. BOOKS Prescribed text: Eggington W B & Sherriff Chizuru Introduction to Japanese (issued by the department) WRITTEN ASSIGNMENTS One written exercise each week. Two tests, one each at the beginning of second and third term. The tests are intended to give a measure of the student's progress and the corrected papers will be returned to the students after the test. Results of the tests and the weekly assignments will be taken into account in the examination. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper of translation, comprehension and questions on Japanese grammar, and an oral examination. The results of the weekly assignments and of the term tests will be taken into account in determining the result of the examination.

156-131 JAPANESE 1A (half subject) Students who have been exempted from Japanese 1 are also exempted from Japanese 1A. A course of two hours per week consisting of one lecture and one language laboratory class. The lecture will deal with readings in elementary Japanese. WRITTEN ASSIGNMENTS Weekly exercises to be done in the language laboratory. EXAMINATION One short paper of not more than one and a half hours based on the content of the lectures. A language laboratory test. The weekly exercises will be taken into account in determining the result of the examination.

156-221 JAPANESE 2 (full subject) N.B. Students enrolling for Japanese 2 are strongly advised to enrol for Japanese 2A or Japanese Studies 2 as well. A course of two lectures and two tutorials. Before proceeding to Japanese 2 students must have passed or been granted exemption from Japanese 1. East Asian Studies is no longer a prerequisite. In the first half of the year the lectures will deal with more advanced structures, while in the second half of the year they will deal with selected texts and extracts from modern Japanese. One tutorial will comprise conversation and advanced oral practice. etc.. while the other will deal with translation from and into Japanese. In addition, students are strongly advised to spend at least one hour per week in the language laboratory. VACATION COURSE A vacation course is held in the last two weeks before the beginning of first term for students proceeding to Japanese 2. Students who have 128 East Asian Studies

passed or are exempted from Japanese 1 are required to attend this course. Further information will be available from the department. BOOkS Prescribed text: Intermediate Japanese for Foreign Students, Waseda U

ASSIGNMENTS One to two weekly translation exercises. One test at the beginning of second term and one at the beginning of third term. The tests are intended to give some measure of the student's progress and the corrected papers will be returned. Results of the tests and of the weekly exercises will be taken into account in the annual examination.

EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. An oral examination. The results of the weekly exercises and of the term tests will be taken into account in determining the result of the examination.

156-231 JAPANESE 2A (half subject) A course of two lectures per week. One lecture will deal with advanced readings in modern Japanese, and the other will deal with essay writing and free composition in Japanese and oral practice. Books Prescribed texts: As for Japanese 2

ASSIGNMENTS A short weekly composition. Two term tests. EXAMINATION One paper of not more than 2 hours. The result of the weekly assignments and the term tests will be taken into account in determining the result of the examination.

156-321 JAPANESE З (full subject) N.B. Students enrolling for Japanese 3 are strongly advised to enrol for Japanese ЭА as well. A course of four hours per week, comprising two lectures and two tutorials. One lecture will consist of readings from selected modern texts, and the other will deal with translation from Japanese into Eng- lish. This will include translation and readings from the Japanese press (daily and periodical). One tutorial will consist of translation into modern Japanese and the other of conversation and advanced oral practice. BOOks Prescribed text: Modern Japanese for University Students Part III, Japanese Department International Christian University

WRITTEN ASSIGNMENTS One weekly translation into Japanese. One weekly translation from Japanese into English. There will be two term tests, one at the beginning

E 129 Faculty of Arts

of second term and one at the beginning of third term. The results of the tests and translations will be taken into account in determining the result of the examination. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. An oral examination. The results of the weekly assignments and term tests will be taken into account in determining the result of the examination.

156-331 JAPANESE ЗА (half subject) A course of two lectures per week. One lecture will deal with readings from modern short stories and novels and the other with essay writing and advanced oral practice. BOOKS Prescribed texts: Akutagawa Ryunosuke Rashomon, ed Shincho Bunko Natsume Soseki Botchan, ed Iwanami Bunko Mishima Yukio Kinkakuji, ed Shincho Bunko WRITTEN ASSIGNMENTS Short fortnightly compositions and two term tests. The results of the fortnightly compositions and term tests will be taken into account in determining the result of the examination. EXAMINATION Not more than one 3-hour paper. The results of the written assignments and the term tests will be taken into account in determining the result of the examination.

CENTRE OF EAST ASIAN STUDIES Course Committee: Professor H. F. SIMON (East Asian Studies) Mr L. R. OATES (East Asian Studies) Mr W. B. EGGINGTON (East Asian Studies) Dr S. T. LEONG (History) Mr C FISHER (History) Mrs J. A. ANDERSON (East Asian Studies) The Centre of East Asian Studies is an interdepartmental organization which offers courses on East Asia. At present the centre offers a one-year course entitled East Asian Studies 1, which can be the first part of a two-year sequence or of a three-year mixed major (see below).

156-140 EAST ASIAN STUDIES PART 1 This is open to students of all faculties. It may be taken as the first part of a two-year sequence or of a mixed major consisting of East Asian Studies 1, History 2J (East Asian History) and any third-year history subject. It can also be combined with Politics 2A (approved units) and any third-year politics subject. A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year. Lectures are given by members of the departments of History, Political Science and East Asian Studies and by scholars and experts from other universities in Australia and occasionally from overseas. This course introduces students to the rich and unfamiliar cultures of China and Japan in a primarily historical framework. In the Chinese part of the course, four themes will be selected for emphasis: (a) Development of the traditional Chinese State, (b) Chinese Thought, (c) Chinese Cultural 130 East Asian Studies

Achievements, and (d) the Process of Revolutionaly Change in the past century. The Japanese component consists of a study of the related but ultimately independent growth of a complex and highly original civilization within the same cultural area. Students with a special interest in Japan may take a five-week course on Japanese society and culture as an alternative to the lectures given in (d) of the Chinese component. This will be given by staff of the Japanese section of the department. The written work for the course and the examination are based on the view that within the larger framework of the year's studies students will wish to specialize. The East Asian Studies course as a component of Chinese Studies 1 The first half of the course may be taken ase component of Chinese Studies 1 in combination with either Chinese 1A or Chinese 2A. Students wishing ta enrol for it should enrol in the half-subject East Asian Studies (Chinese) 156-112 as well as for Chinese Studies 1X (156-102). Any student enrolled for the first half of the course may at any time change his enrolment to the full course by enrolling in 156-140. The East Asian Studies course as a component of Japanese Studies 1 Either the first or the second half of the course may be taken as a component of Japanese Studies 1 in combination with Japanese 1A or 2A. Students wishing to enrol for the second half should enrol for 156-113 East Asian Studies (Japanese) as well as for Japanese Studies 1X (156-122). They should, preferably, but not necessarily, take the Japanese society and culture option. Students wishing to enrol for the first half of the course should enrol for 156-112. BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: •Fairbank J K The United States and China, Harvard paperback 1971 •Bodde D China's Cultural Tradition, Source Problems in World Civili- zation Series Rinehart 1961 Milston G A Short History of China, Cassell Aust paperback 1977 (b) Prescribed textbooks: •De Gary W T Sources ot Chinese Tradition, Columbia UP 1960 •Fairbank J K Reisshauer E O & Craig A M East Asia: Tradition and Transformation, Allen & Unwin 1973 or Rucker C 0 China's Imperial Past, Duckworth paperback 1975 (c) Additional texts: Ch'en J ed Mao, Prentice-Hall 1969 Creel H G Chinese Thought, U. of Chicago 1971 Geriet J Daily Life In China on the Eve of the Mongol Invasion 1250-1276, Allen & Unwin 1962 Hall J W Japan from Prehistory to Modern Times, Weidenfeld & Nicol- son 1970 Rucker C 0 The Traditional Chinese State In Ming Times (1368-1644), U of Arizona 1961 Lau D C ed & tr Lao Tzu: Tao Te Ching, Penguin 1963 Lau D C Mencius, Penguin 1977 Levenson J R & Schurmann F China: An Interpretive History: From the Beginnings to the Fall of Hen, U of California Press 1971 LI Dun J The Essence of Chinese Civilization, Van Nostrand 1967 Liu James T C & Tu W-m Traditional China, Spectrum paperback 1970

131 Faculty of Arts

Loewe M Everyday Life in Imperial China, Carousel paperback 1973 Mason R H P & Caiger J G A History of Japan, Cassell 1972 Meskill J T An Introduction to Chinese Civilization, Heath & Co 1973 Mote F W /ntellectual Foundations of China, Alfred A Knopf 1971 Schram S Mao Tse-tung, PeIican 1966 Tiedemann A Modern Japan, Anvil 1962 Tiedemann A ed Introduction to Japanese Civilization, Heath & Co 1974 Ts'ао Hsiieh-ch'in (Hawkes D tr) The Story of the Stone, Penguin 1973 Tsunoda R Sources of Japanese Tradition, Columbia UP 1958 Waley Arthur The Anatests of Confucius, Vintage Books or Allen & Unwin The Centre will supply supplementary reading lists.

WRITTEN ASSIGNMENTS Students are required to submit a first term essay of approximately 1,500 words, a second term essay of approximately 3,000 words and a short paper for discussion in second or third term.

EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. Class work and essays will be taken into consideration in the grading of examination results. The final result will be based on both the examination paper and the written work done during the year. MASTER OF ARTS 156-601 SCHOOL OF ORIENTAL STUDIES Candidates will, under the supervision of a member of the department, prepare a thesis on a subject to be approved by the chairman of the department. They may be directed to take any subject or attend any lectures bearing on their work and will be required to write regular reports on the progress of their research. Prospective candidates for the MA in the school of Oriental Studies should in all cases consult the department of East Asian Studies before beginning work for the purpose. An entry form for examination for higher degrees must be submitted to the Registrar. Three copies of each thesis (A4, typewritten, double-spaced) should be submitted, one of which will be deposited in the University Library. The attention of candidates is drawn to the recommendations of the Pro- fessorial Board on the format of theses (regulation 4:6 in the University Calendar).

DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY See Regulation 3.60 on pp. 63-68, and also pp. 52-53.

FACULTY OF ECONOMICS AND COMMERCE Chairman of Department of Economics: Dr J. P. NIEUWENHUYSEN, M.A. (Natal), Ph.D. (London) Chairman of Department of Economic History: Dr A. G. THOMPSON, M.Com., Ph.D., Dip.Ed. Chairmen of Department of Regional and Urban Economic Studies: Mr C. S. WOODS, B.Com., Dip.Ed. 132 Economics

The subjects of this group may also be taken for the degree of Bachelor of Commerce. Students who wish to qualify for both degrees should note the instructions concerning combined courses in the regulation in the Faculty of Economics and Commerce Handbook. The requirement concerning prerequisites should be carefully noted. Particular attention is drawn to the regulation which states that Economic Geography, Regional Development, and Regional Development in Asia may not be taken in any course which does not include a major in Economics. Entries for external study will not be accepted for any subject of this group. Students will be required to submit essays and exercises, as set by the lecturers. These will be taken into account at the annual examination, and failure to submit written work may involve exclusion from the annual examination.

ORDINARY DEGREE (Details of the honours degree are set out at the end of this section.) SUBJECTS OFFERED Economics IA (Arts) Regional Development in Asia Economics B Urban Economic Studies Economics C (1-10)• Economic History A Statistical Method Economic History 2 , 2C, 20 & 2E В Regional and Urban Economic History 36, C, 3D & 3E З Development: Introduction History of Economic Thought 3 Regional Development 'Any three units

DEPARTMENT OF ECONOMICS 316-151 ECONOMICS 1A (ARTS) A course of two lectures, with one tutorial per week.

SYLLABUS Micro economics: an introductory course to acquaint students with economic theory and its use in analysing economic problems, with special emphasis on how markets work or fail to work. Macro economics: national income; unemploymeгтt and inflation; money; international economics. The course will have special reference to Aus- tralia.

B O 0КЅ (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Downing R I ed The Australian Economy, Weidenfeld & Nicolson Hellbroner R L The Worldly Philosophers, revised edition, Simon and Schuster paperback Stewart M Keynes and After, Pelican (b) Prescribed textbooks: Davidson F G & Stewardson B R Economics and Australian Industry, latest ed Longman Heyne P T The Economic Way of Thinking, 1st ed SRA

133 Faculty of Arts

Lipsey R G Introduction to Positive Economies, Weidenfeld & Nicolson 4th ed Samuelson P A Hancock K & Wallace R Economics, 2nd Australian ed McGraw-Hill Other publications as referred to in lectures.

EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. Credit may be given for projects, essays and tests completed during the year.

316-201 ECONOMICS В Economics 1A (Arts) must be passed before this subject is taken. A course of two lectures and one tutorial class per week. SYLLABUS Economic theory and policy with special reference to Australia. Theory of income, employment, wages and prices. Production and consumption theory. Imperfect market structures. Factor markets. International monetary arrangements. Trade and protection.

BOOKS Arndt H W & Stammer D W The Australian Trading Banks, Cheshire Cole C L Microeconomics: A Contemporary Approach, Harcourt Brace Jovanovich paperback Davidson F G & Stewardson B R Economics and Australian Industry, Longman Ferguson C E & Maurice S C Economic Analysis, rev ed Irwin Glahe F R Macroeconomic Theory and Policy, Harcourt Bruce Jova- novitch Kennedy P Macroeconomics, Allyn & Bacon Lipsey R G An Introduction to Positive Economics, Weidenfeld & Nicolson Nieuwenhuysen J P & Drake P J eds Australian Economic Policy, MUP 1977 Perkins J 0 N Macroeconomic Policy in Australia, MUP Perkins J 0 N & Sullivan J E The Banks and the Capital Market, MUP Shapiro E Macroeconomic Analysis, Harcourt Other publications as referred to in lectures. Students who wish to pursue a mathematical approach to the subject will find the following books useful: Archibald G C & Lipsey R G Introduction to a Mathematical Treatment of Economics, Weidenfeld & NicoIson Allen R G D Macro-Economic Theory—A Mathematical Treatment, Mac- milIan & St Martin's Press EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. Credit will be given for a mid-year test.

316-301 ECONOMICS Cl INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS Economics B must be passed before this subject is taken. A course of one lecture per week and one tutorial every two weeks. SYLLABUS Basic theory of international trade. The balance of payments under conditions of equilibrium and of growth. Aims and methods of state inter-

134 Economics

vention with special reference to Australian conditions. Current problems of the world economy. BOOKS •Kindleberger C P International Economics, latest ed Irwin or •Sodersten B International Economics, Macmillan Student Edition •Perkins J O N Australia in the World Economy, 2nd ed Sun Books Bhagwatl J ed International Trade, Penguin Modern Economics Readings Dunning J H ed International Investment, Penguin Modern Economics Readings Heller H R International Monetary Economics, Prentice-Hall Other publications as referred to in lectures. EXAMINATION One 2-hour paper plus class assignments as required.

316-302 ECONOMICS C2 ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT Economics B must be passed before this subject is taken. A course of one lecture per week and one tutorial every two weeks. SYLLABUS Theories of economic development for developed and developing countries; population; capital formation; foreign trade; historical patterns; strategy for development; development finance; problems in particular developing countries. BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Bhagwatl J The Economics of Underdeveloped Countries, World Uni- versity Library (b) Prescribed textbooks: •Lewis W A The Theory of Economic Growth, Allen & Unwin paperback •Higgins B Economic Development, 2nd ed Constable •Myint H The Economics of the Developing Countries, 4th ed Hutchin- son University Library paperback Agarwala A N & Singh S P The Economics of Underdevelopment, Ox- ford paperback Boehm E A Twentieth Century Economic Development in Australia, Longman paperback Dasgupta A K Economic Theory and the Developing Countries, Mac- milan paperback Hagen E E The Economics of Development, rev ed Irwin Johnson W A & Hardesty J eds Economic Growth vs. the Environment, Wadsworth paperback Other puЫications as referred to in lectures. EXAMINATION One 2-hour paper plus class assignments as required.

316-303 ECONOMICS C3 ECONOMICS OF THE FIRM Economics B must be passed before this subject is taken. A course of one lecture per week and one tutorial every two weeks.

135 Faculty of Arts

SYLLAB US Theory of the firm and industrial economics. Growth of the firm. Industry structure. Government policy towards industry, including restrictive practices. research and development, tariff and prices policies. The course will be particularly related to Australia. BOOKS •Devine P J An Introduction to Industrial Economics, 2nd ed Allen & Unwin 1977 or •Scherer F M Industrial Market Structure and Economic Performance, Rand McNally 1970 (Students who cannot afford this book will find some, but not all, of the useful chapters reproduced in Scherer's very much cheaper book Industrial Pricing, Rand McNally 1973) •Levenson A M & Solon B S Essentiel Price Theory, Holt, Rinehart & Winston 1971 Cohen K J & Cyert R M The Theory of the Firm: Resource Allocation in a Market Economy, Prentice-Hall 1965 Caves R American Industry: Structure, Conduct, Performance, 3rd ed Prentice-Hall Curwen P J The Theory of the Firm, Macmillan 1976 Nieuwenhuysen J P & Drake P J eds Australian Economic Policy, MUP 1977 Nieuwenhuysen J P & Norman N R Australian Competition and Prices Policy, Croom Helm Lend 1976 Nieuwenhuysen J P ed Australian Trade Practices: Readings, 2nd ed Croom Helm 1976 Other publications as referred to in lectures. EXAMINATION One 2-hour paper plus class assignments as required.

316-304 ECONOMICS C4 SOCIAL ECONOMICS Economics B must be passed before this subject is taken. A course of one lecture per week and one tutorial every two weeks. SYLLABUS The distribution of income and wealth in the community; taxation, social security and government provision of goods and services as redistributive instruments. Special reference will be made to current policy issues. BOOKS •Atkinson A B ed Wealth, Income and Inequality, Penguin 1973 Atkinson A B The Economics of Inequality, Clarendon Press 1975 Atkinson A B Unequal Shares, rev ed Penguin 1974 Commission into Inquiry into Poverty Poverty in Australia: First Main Report, Aust Govt Pub Service 1975 Henderson R F Harcourt A & Harper R J A People In Poverty: A Mel- bourne Survey, Cheshire 1975 Miller S M & Roby P A The Future of Inequality, Basic Books 1970 Pen J Income Distribution, Penguin 1974 Titmuss R M Income Distribution and Social Change, Allen and Unwin 1962 Other publications as referred to in lectures. 136 Economics

EXAMINATION One 2-hour paper plus class assignments as required.

316-305 ECONOMICS C5 PUBLIC FINANCE Economics B must be passed before this subject is taken. A course of one lecture per week and one tutorial every two weeks. SYLLABUS Public finance and government policy; public finance in relation to income distribution, stability, resource allocation and growth; government revenue and the theory of taxation; taxation reform; the national debt; government expenditure; problems of federal finance. BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Eckstein 0 Public Finance, 3rd ed Foundations of Modern Economics Series, Prentice-Hall 1976 or Haveman R H The Economics of the Public Sector, 2nd ed Wiley 1976 (b) Prescribed textbooks: Due J F & Friedlaender A F Government Finance: Economics of the Public Sector, 6th ed Irwin 1977 or Musgrave R A & Musgrave P B Public Finance in Theory and Practice, 2nd ed International Student Edition McGraw-Hill 1976 Houghton R W ed Public Finance: Selected Readings, 2nd ed Penguin 1973 Robinson A J & Cutt J Public Finance in Canada; Selected Readings, 2nd ed Methuen 1973 Taxation Review Committee Full Report, AGPS 1975 Payments to or for the States and Local Government Authorities, Aust Govt Publishing Service, latest year The Budget Speech, Aust Govt Pubi Service Canberra latest year Other publications as referred to in lectures. EXAMINATION One 2-hour paper plus class assignments as required.

316-306 ECONOMICS C6 BANKING AND FINANCE Economics B must be passed before this subject is taken. A course of one lecture per week and one tutorial every two weeks. SYLLABUS Nature and role of finance; financial institutions and instruments; financial structure and development; international monetary arrangements and Institutions; monetary theory and policy; the Australian financial structure. BOOKS Hirst R R & Wallace R H eds The Australian Capital Market, Cheshire paperback Bain A D The Control of the Money Supply, Penguin

137 Faculty of Arts

Laidler D The Demand for Money, International Textbook Company Shapiro E Understanding Money, Harcourt Brace Jovanovich Paper- back Other publications referred to in lectures. A number of excellent books of readings in monetary economics are available, and it is recommended that students purchase one of these. Attention is drawn to the following available in paperback: Mittra S Money end Banking — Theory, Analysis and Policy, Random House Prager Jonas Monetary Economics — Controversies in Theory end Policy, Random House Williams H R & Wondenberg H W Money, Banking and Monetary Policy — Readings in Domestic and International Policy, Harper & Row EXAMINATION One 2-hour paper plus class assignments as required. 316-307 ECONOMICS C7 LABOUR ECONOMICS Economics B must be passed before this subject is taken. A course of one lecture per week and one tutorial every two weeks. SYLLABUS Theories of wages; wages and the price system; the supply of labour; collective bargaining; conventional forces determining rates of pay; the wage-price issue; incomes policies; general problems of wage determination; principles of wage determination in Australia; problems of manpower planning. BOOKS Brittan S & Lilley P The Delusion of Incomes Policy, Temple Smith 1977 Burton J F & Benham L IC Readings in Labour Market Analysis, Holt Rinehart Jackson J M Wages and Labour Economics, McGraw-Hill Jones A The New Inflation, Penguin McCormack P J & Smith E 0 Labour Market, Penguin 'Niland J R & Isaac J E eds Australian Labour Economics: Readings, Macmillan Turner M A Wilkinson F & Jackson D Do Trade Unions Cause Infla- tion?, Cambridge UP Whitehead D M Stagflation and Wages Policy in Australia, Longman Other publications as referred to In lectures. EXAMINATION One 2-hour paper plus class assignments as required. 316-308 ECONOMICS C8 INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS A course of one lecture per week and one tutorial class every two weeks throughout the year. The course has special reference to Australia but international comparisons are made, wherever appropriate. SYLLABUS Industrial conflict. Trade unions and employers' associations. Collective bargaining. The settlement of industrial disputes. Legal provisions and industrial relations. Worker participation in management. 138 Economics

BOOKS Chamberlain N W The Labor Sector, McGraw-Hill 'Hyman R Strikes, Fontana paperback •Isaac J E & Ford G W eds Australian Labour Relations: Readings, 2nd ed Sun Books Martin R Trade Unions in Australia, Pelican Sutcliffe J T A History of Trade Unionism in Australia, Macmillan paperback Sykes E I & Glasbeek H J Labour Law in Australia, Butterworth Walker K F Australian Industrial Relations Systems, Oxford paperback Other publications as referred to in lectures. EXAMINATION One 2-hour paper plus class assignments as required.

316-309 ECONOMICS C9

AGRICULTURAL ECONOMICS A course of 30 lectures in Terms 2 and 3, with one tutorial per week in Terms 2 and 3. SYLLABUS The farm as a firm and agriculture as an industry. Inter-relations between agriculture and other sectors. Price, demand and supply in agriculture. Pricing of agricultural factor Inputs. Seasonal price patterns, price cycles. Forecasting agricultural prices. Government intervention in agriculture. Objectives and methods of agricultural policy. Consideration of Australian agricultural policy from the viewpoints of 'efficiency' and 'equity'. The 'farm problem' and agricultural adjustment; 'orderly marketing, two-price schemes, stabilisation schemes, subsidies and tariffs; agricultural роliсу overseas. Industry surveys — price policy and marketing in selected primary Industries. International commodity agreements. Agricultural marketing: functions, methods, costs. Organization of marketing. Marketing boards. Co-operative marketing. Futures markets. Technical change In agriculture; capital formation in agriculture; rural credit. Economics of rural research, promotion of rural products. World food problem and role of agriculture in economic development. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: 'Throsby C D ed Agricultural Policy, in Readings in Australian Eco- nomic Policy Series, Pelican 1972 •Campbell K 0 Agricultural Marketing and Prices, Cheshire 1973 Mauldon R G & Shapper H P Australian Farmers under Stress in Prosperity and Recession, U of WA Press 1974 Rural Policy in Australia, Australian Government Publishing Service 1974 Recommended for reference: Tomek W G & Robinson K L Agricultural Product Prices, Cornell Uni- versity Press 1972 Hardaker J B Lewis J N & McFarlane G C An Introduction to Farm Management and Agricultural Economics, Angus and Robertson 1970 139 Faculty of Arts

James P G Agricultural Policy in Wealthy Countries, Angus & Rob- ertson 1971 Kohls R L Marketing of Agricultural Products, Macmillan 1961 Williams D B ed Agriculture in the Australian Economy, Sydney UP 1967 EXAMINATION There will be a two-hour examination in fourth term. A substantial proportion of marks will be given for assignments. The timetable and the weighting given to each part of the examination will be published at the beginning of second term.

316-310 ECONOMICS C10 COMPARATIVE ECONOMIC SYSTEMS Economics B must be passed before this subject is taken. A course of one lecture per week and one tutorial every two weeks. SYLLABUS Market mechanism of paternalistic government; theories of free market capitalism, the Marxian system, democratic socialism, and authoritarian socialism; case studies, including planning in the West, the Soviet Union, and Yugoslavia. BOOKS Bastiat F The Law, The Foundation of Economic Education, NY Bornstein M ed Comparative Economic Systems: Models and Cases, rev ed Irwin 1969 Bornstein M & Fusfeld D R The Soviet Economy: A Book of Readings, 3rd ed Irwin paperback 1970 Diriam J B & Plummer J L An Introduction to the Yugoslav Economy, Merrill paperback Elliott J M Comparative Economic System, Prentice-Hall Friedman M Capitalism and Freedom, Phoenix paperback Hayek F A The Road to Serfdom, U of Chicago Press Mises L von Socialism, Jonathan Cape Lend Nove A The Soviet Economy — An Introduction, Praeger paperback Other texts and publications as referred to in lectures. EXAMINATION One 2-hour paper plus class assignments as required.

316-321 ECONOMICS C11 MARXIAN ECONOMICS Economics B must be passed before this subject is taken. A course of one lecture per week and one tutorial every two weeks throughout the year. SYLLABUS A critical introduction to Marxian economics. Broadly speaking, the course will consider 1. Marx's economics as a critique of the theory and practice of industrial capitalism. 2. A critical assessment of the validity of Marx's analysis and critique. 140 Regional and Urban Economic Studies

3. An examination of some of the main tenets of Marx's economics as a basis for his ideal future society. BOOКS No books are prescribed, rather the following are suggested as readings. Bõhm-Bawerk E von Karl Marx and the Close of His System, Sweezy P M ed Augustus M Kelly 1949 Fine B Marx's Capital, Macmillan Studies in Economics 1975 Freedman R Marx on Economics, Penguin 1971 Marx K Capital: A Critique of Political Economy, any ed Marx K Theories of Surplus Value, any ed Marx k & Engels F Manifesto of the Communist Party, any ed Other publications as referred to in lectures. EXAMINATION One 2-hour paper, plus assignments as required,

316-202 STATISTICAL METHOD Economics 1A must be passed before this subject is taken. A course of two lectures and one tutorial class per week, plus weekly exercises. SYLLABUS Statistics as a method of studying economic problems; methods of collecting data; design of samples; measures of central tendency, dis- persion and skewness; probability; distributions of sample statistics (means and proportions); significance tests and estimation; linear regression; analysis of time series; Index numbers; special studies of Australian statistics of prices and national accounts. BOOkS • Australian National Accounts, Latest issue Aust Govt Publishing Service 'Labour Report, Latest issue Australian Bureau of Statistics •Karmel P H & Polasek M Applied Statistics for Economists, latest ed Pitman or Hamburg M Statistical Analysis for Decision Making, 2nd ed Har- court Brace & World (International Edition) • Moser C A & K01ton G Survey Methods in Social Investigation, Heine- mann Other texts and puЫications as referred to in lectures. EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers.

DEPARTMENT OF REGIONAL AND URBAN ECONOMIC STUDIES 321-101 REGIONAL AND URBAN DEVELOPMENT: INTRODUCTION A course of two one-hour carrel sessions and one tutorial class per week throughout the year.t This course is appropriate as a terminaI subject or as a foundation for a sequence in the department.

t A carrel session Is an Individual study programme using audio-visual materials and equipment. One session ia taken in the first half of the week, the other In the second. Individual times are available throughout the day and an Tueaday and Thursday evenings.

141 Faculty of Arts

SYLLABUS A broad survey of the field of economic geography. Manufacturing—Principles of industrial location illustrated by Australian and overseas case studies. Natural resource, ecological and regional considerations in industrial development. Agriculture—Spatial and resource-use studies of subsistence and commercial agricultural systems using ecological and economic approaches. The von Thunen model and its application to Australian farming. Aus- tralia's population/resources balance. The farm problem In a regional, national and global setting. Urban and Regional Studies—Central place theory at the regional and city level. Urbanization trends in Australia, decentralization and growth centre policies. The •Internal structure of the Western city. Development, Environment, Energy—The development concept, patterns and processes. Inequalities in living standards and the concept of "limits to growth" In the light of trends in population, food and other resources. The energy crisis. 800 KS (a) Prescribed textbook: •Lloyd P E & Dicken P Location in Space: A Theoretical Approach to Economic Geography, 2nd ed Harper & Row paperback 1977 (b) Recommended for reference: Berry В J L Conkling E C & Ray D M The Geography of Economic Systems, Prentice-Hall 1976 Hurst M E A Geography of Economic Behaviour, Prentice-Hall Inter- national Edition 1974 Other publications will be referred to during the course. EXAMINATION One 2-hour paper. Credit is given for short essays and an objective test during the year. 321-201 REGIONAL DEVELOPMENT Regional and Urban Development: Introduction must be passed before this subject is taken, and Economics В must have been completed or be taken concurrently. A course of two one-hour carrel sessionst and one tutorial class per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS Regionalization—The concept of a region. The history and methods of regionalization with Australian examples. Processes of regional development—Forces influencing regional development with case studies. Non-random resources: climate, vegetation, energy, technology, capital, administrative centres, staples, external markets. Comparative advantage, regional specialization. Friction of distance and transport improvement. Economies of scale and of urbanization and other influences on industrial location. Migration patterns and urbanization. Models in regional development: central place, staple theory, regional growth-decline models, deterministic-probabilistic migration models, city systems primacy and rank-size. Innovation and diffusion in city systems. t see footnote to p. 143. 142 Regional and Urban Economic Studies

Analytical techniques—Measurement and techniques in regional development: city size question, town function, regional accounts, input-output, economic base, inter-regional multipliers, shift and share, the convergence, equilibrating, divergence question in regional disparities. Policy and case studies—Case studies in regional development drawn from the highly developed economies of Western Europe, North America and Australia and New Zealand. Depressed, congested, underdeveloped problem regions. Planning strategies debate; market approach versus systems approach. The development of regional planning in Australia. Regional development strategies, including decentralization and changing policies in Australia; new towns, growth poles, growth centres. The administration of regional strategies. Function and finance in a four-level (Federal, State, regional, local government) system. Conflict of objectives. The question of regionalism. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: 'Logan M I Maher C A McKay J Humphreys S Urban and Regional Australia: Analysis and Policy Issues, Sonett 1975 'Stilwell, F J B Australian Urban and Regional Development, ANZ Book Co 1974 'Blunden J et al Regional Analaysis and Development, Harper & Row 1973 'Richardson H W Regional Economics, Weidenfeld & Nicolson 1972 'Glasson J An Introduction to Regional Planning, Hutchinson 1974 EXAMINATION One three-hour paper. Credit is given for an assignment and two short-answer tests during the year.

321-202 REGIONAL DEVELOPMENT IN ASIA (This course will not be available in 1978.) Regional and Urban Development: Introduction (or equivalent) must be passed before this subject is taken. A course of two one-hour carrel sessions and one tutorial class per week throughout the year.t SYLLABUS A comparative study of regional development in Asian countries, currently Japan, China, Indonesia, India and Malaysia. Forces in regional development. Non-random resources, comparative advantage, friction of distance, economies of agglomeration. Models of regional development In Asia: spread and backwash, cumulative causation, centre, periphery, primacy, rank-size, dualism. The population explosion in Asia. The role of family planning. Strategies for rural change. The Green Revolution in Asian agriculture. The Chinese commune, and the industrialization of the countryside. Theories of population and agricultural change, including the obstacle, the Involutionary and the stimulus approaches. Natural resource patterns and industrial location and development. Pollution and industrial re-location in Japan. The Asian city, its role and socio-economic setting. Problems of urbanization and policies of decentralization and deurbaniza- tion. Regional inequalities and regional planning policies.

t A carrel session Is an Individual study programme using audio-visual materials and equipment. One session Is taken in the first half of the week, the other In the second. Individual times are available throughout the day and on Tuesday and Thursday evenings.

143 Faculty of Arts

BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: Hodder B W Economic Development in the Tropics, 2nd ed Methuen paperback 1973.

EXAMINATION One three-hour paper. Credit is given for an assignment, a short essay and a short-answer test during the year.

321-301 URBAN ECONOMIC STUDIES

Economics B and Regional and Urban Development: Introduction (or equivalents) must be passed before this subject is taken. A course of two lectures and one tutorial class per week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS Urban Economic Studies—Nature and development of the subject. Eco- nomic concepts used in urban studies. The role of the price mechanism. Externalities and public goods. Urban welfare criteria. The methodological debate. Partial and general equilibrium. Systems theory: Static approaches versus dynamic approaches. Definition and delimitation of urban areas. Urban Transport — Interrelation between transport arid land use. Demand for urban transport, trip generation, trip distribution, modal choice. Optimal pricing of private and риЫ iс transport. Investment criteria inc. cost-benefit analysis. Evaluation of the Melbourne Traf- sport Plan. Urban Land Use—Rationale for governmental intervention in the urban land market; the nature of land use controls. Forward land use planning for the growth of Melbourne. The process of peripheral rural-urban land conversion. The price of land for urban development. Proposals for social appropriation of land value increments. Freehold and leasehold land tenure. Urban Housing—The housing market. The concept of filtering. Factors affecting property values. Factors underlying neighbourhood degradation. Urban blight and policies of urban renewal. Urban Poverty—The nature of urban poverty. Causes and policies. The interrelationships between poverty and other dimensions of urban structure. Urban Public Finance — Dimensions of urban public sector concerns; distribution of functions in a multi-level government. Revenue sources; property taxes v. user charges. Urban Environmental Disruption—The causes and social costs of poilu- tion. Proposed methods of pollution control (direct regulation, subsidiza- tion, incentive pricing). City Size—The decentralization argument. The question of "optimal" city size. The "productivity" of the city. The system of cities.

BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: 'Gordon D M Problems in Political Economy: An Urban Perspective, D C Heath & Co 1971 'Thompson W R A Preface to Urban Economics, RFF 1965 'Research and Development Division leib & Metrop Bd of Works Report on General Concept Objections, 1974 144 Economic History

EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. Credit will be given for a mid-year test and class assignment.

321-361 THIRD YEAR FINAL HONOURS URBAN ECONOMIC STUDIES A series of weekly seminars primarily intended for third year honours students. See honours degree (p. 152) for details.

321-461 FOURTH YEAR FINAL HONOURS ADVANCED URBAN ECONOMIC STUDIES A series of weekly seminars primarily intended for fourth year honours students. See honours degree (p. 154) for details.

DEPARTMENT OF ECONOMIC HiSTORY 326-111 ECONOMIC HISTORY A Students must attend two lectures and one tutorial weekly. SYLLABUS International economic history, 1800-1977. A comparison of the successful patterns of economic development of the major European countries and the United States and of their roles in the international economy emphasizing the following themes: industrialization and economic growth in Britain, France, Germany, and the U.S.; the widening web of world commerce, migration, and capital movements; imperialism and decoloni- zation; the causes and economic effects of the two world wars; economic disintegration in the 1930s and the growth of cooperation since 1945; and the economic and ideological significance of the movements towards greater national and international regulation of economic activity. BOOKS (a) Preliminary reading: Carr E H What is History? Penguin Middlesex 1964 (b) Prescribed textbooks: Cipolla Carlo M ed The Fontana Economic History of Europe: The Emergence of Industrial Societies, Vol 4 Part 1 Collins/Fontana paperback 1973 Kenwood A G & Lougheed A L The Growth of the International Economy 1820-1960, Allen & Unwin paperback 1971 Landes David The Unbound Prometheus: Technological Change and Industrial Development in Western Europe from 1750 to the Present, Cambridge University Press paperback 1969 The Penguin Dictionary of Economics, Penguin Middlesex 1972 EXAMINATION: One 3-hour paper and prescribed written work throughout the year,

326-211 ECONOMIC HISTORY 26 (PASS) (Economic History ЗВ may not be taken in addition to 2В) One Commerce or Arts subject must be passed before this subject is 145 Faculty of Arts

taken. A course of two lectures and one tutorial weekly throughout the year. SYLLABUS The economic history of Australia to 1975 with particular attention to new themes. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Blainey G N Triumph of the Nomads, Macmillan 1975 Blainey G N Tyranny of Distance, Sun 1974 Boehm E A Twentieth Century Economic Development in Australia, Longman 1971 Goodwin C D W The Image of Australia, Duke University Press 1974 Hall A R The Stock Exchange of Melbourne and the Victorian Economy 1852-1900, ANU 1968 Schedvin C B & McCarty J W eds Urbanisation in Australian History, Sydney University Press 1974 Sinclair W A The Process of Economic Development in Australia, Cheshire 1976 Wheelwright E L & Buckley K eds Essays in the Political Economy of Australian Capitalism, ANZ Book Co 1975 ASSESSMENT One research essay not exceeding 8000 words and not more than two shorter assignments, each of about 1500 words. A final examination of two hours will be held for borderline students.

326-212 ECONOMIC HISTORY 2C (PASS) (Economic History ЭC may not be taken in addition to 2C) Normally Economics 1A (Arts) must be passed before this subject is taken. A course of two lectures and one tutorial weekly throughout the year; some lectures may be replaced by seminars. This subject can be taken in the second year of the course. SYLLABUS A study of the social, cultural, and institutional influences on economic development: the human problem in economic development. The course will be based on comparative historical studies of successful industrialization (mainly Japan) and of less successful or incomplete industrialization (mainly China, India, Indonesia and Malaysia). Topics may include: the problem of improving traditionally peasant agriculture; social constraints upon business activity; social influences upon businessmen's prestige and aspirations; the relationship between financial institutions and capital formation; the effects on business of political events and legal systems; the relationship between technology and education; population growth and the economy; class and caste systems and the economy; and the question of whether colonialism retarded or aided economic growth. BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Bernstein H ed Underdevelopment and Development: The Third World Today, Penguin books Harmondsworth 1973 146 Economic History

Livingston J Moore J & Oldfather F eds The Japan Reader 1 Imperial Japan: 1800-1945, Pelican Harmondsworth 1976 (b► Prescribed textbooks: No books are prescribed, reading lists will be issued during the year. ASSESSMENT Not more than one 3-hour paper; class work and written work done during the year will constitute at least half the assessment.

326-213 ECONOMIC HISTORY 2D (PASS) (Economic History 3D may not be taken in addition to 2D) A course of two lectures and one tutorial or seminar class weekly throughout the year. SYLLABUS The economic growth of the U.S.A, Emphasis will be given to the changing role of government within the economy and the development of modern economic and social policies. Within this framework students may study intensively a small range of topics in which they ere particularly interested. Examples of such topics include the problems of federalism, black economic development, urbanization, labor relations, big business, American involvement in the world economy. BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Allen H C A Concise History of the U.S.A., Ernest Benn London 1970 ed North D C Growth and Welfare in the American Past: A New Economic History, Prentice-Hall New Jersey 1974 (b) Prescribed text: Brownlee W Elliot The Dynamics of Ascent, Alfred A Knopf New York 1974 Detailed reading guides will be issued during the year. ASSESSMENT Students will be required to submit written work at specific times throughout the year. Total assessment will consist of three critical reviews of 1,500 words each, one 3,000 word essay and the choice between one 3-hour examination paper and a 4,000 word essay.

326-214 ECONOMIC HISTORY 2E (PASS) (Economic History 3E may not be taken in addition to 2E) This subject may be taken at second or third year. A course of two lectures and one tutorial class throughout the year. SYLLABUS The historical background to problems of development and under-development in Latin America. The course will concentrate on the past 150 years but, where appropriate, earlier periods will be included. Particular attention will be given to the following topics: the legacy of the colonial economy and society and the emergence of modern economic society in the

147 Faculty of Arts

nineteenth century, the influence of domestic political and social conditions on economic performance, the economic background to and consequences of revolutions of national liberation, the significance of external economic dependency and current obstacles to economic development, problems of agrarian reform. Students will have considerable freedom to pursue their own interests.

BOOKS Preliminary reading: Pendle George A History of Latin America, Penguin 1969 Prescribed textbooks: Furtado Celso Economic Development of Latin America: A Survey from Colonial Times to the Cuba Revolution, CUP 1970 Further reading will be indicated throughout the year.

ASSESSMENT Students will be required to submit written work at specific times during the year. This written work will constitute 50 per cent of the final assessment. In addition there will be a 3-hour examination at the end of the year.

326-311 ECONOMIC HISTORY 3В (PASS) (Economic History 2 В may not be taken in addition to 3В ) One Commerce or Arts subject must be passed before this subject is taken. A course of two lectures and one tutorial weekly throughout the year.

SYLLABUS For details of this subject see Economic History 2В. Additional research work will be required.

BOOKS Recommended for reference: Blainey G N Triumph of the Nomads, Macmillan 1975 Blainey G N Tyranny of Distance, Sun 1974 Boehm E A Twentieth Century Economic Development in Australia, Longman 1971 Goodwin C D W The Image of Australia, Duke University Press 1974 Hall A R The Stock Exchange of Melbourne and the Victorian Economy 1852-1900, ANU 1968 Schedvin C В and McCarthy J W eds Urbanisation in Australian History Sydney University Press 1974 Sinclair W A The Process of Economic Development in Australia, Cheshire 1976 Wheelwright E L & Buckley K eds Essays in the Political Economy of Australian Capitalism, ANZ Book Co 1975

ASSESSMENT One research essay not exceeding 8,000 words and not more than two shorter assignments, each of about 1,500 words. A final 2-hour examination will be held for borderline students. 148 Economic History

326-312 ECONOMIC HISTORY ЭC (PASS) (Economic History 3C may not be taken in addition to 2C) Normally Economics 1A (Arts) must be passed before this subject is taken. A course of two lectures and one tutorial weekly throughout the year; some lectures may be replaced by seminars. SYLLABUS AND BOOKS For details of this subject see Economic History 2C, but additional research work will be required. ASSESSMENT Not more than one 3-hour paper; class work and written work done during the year will constitute at least half the assessment.

326-313 ECONOMIC HISTORY 3D (PASS) (Economic History 3D may not be taken in addition to 2D) A course of two lectures and one tutorial or seminar class weekly throughout the year. SYLLABUS AND BOOKS For details of this subject see Economic History 2D, but additional research work will be required. ASSESSMENT Students will be required to submit written work at specific times throughout the year. Total assessment will consist of three critical reviews of 1,500 words each and one 3,000 word essay and the choice between one 3-hour examination paper and a 4,000 word essay. Students will be advised of the weighting of these components in the first week of the academic year.

326-314 ECONOMIC HISTORY 3E (PASS) (Economic History 2E may not be taken in addition to 3E) This subject may be taken at third year. A course of two lectures and one tutorial class throughout the year. SYLLABUS AND BOOKS For details of this subject see Economic History 2E, but additional research work will be required. ASSESSMENT Students will be required to submit written work at specific times during the year. This written work will constitute 50 per cent of the final assessment. In addition there will be a 3-hour examination at the end of the year.

326-315 HISTORY OF ECONOMIC THOUGHT 3 (PASS) This subject may be taken in the third year. Economics В is normally required before this subject is taken. A course of two lectures and one tutorial weekly. 149 Faculty of Arts

sYLLAВUS The aim of the course is to examine and explain the major changes in economic thinking from the eighteenth century to present times. Empha- sis will be given to links between economic thought and political and social thought, to the degree of responsiveness of economic theory to current problems and to the interaction of orthodox and heterodox theories. Areas of study will include: the origins of classical liberalism (Smith, Say); the rise and fall of the classical pessimists (Malthus, Ricardo); the marginal revolution and spread of marginalism; pre-Marxian socialists. Marx and post-Marxian economics, business cycle theory, crises and the Keynesian revolution; and conservative and liberal and radical critics of contemporary theory (Friedman, Galbraith, Myrdal, Political Economy).

BOOKS Preliminary reading: Barber W A History of Economic Thought, Penguin 1968 Routh G The Origin of Economic Ideas Macmillan 1975 Prescribed textbooks: No books are prescribed but the following are useful: Blaug M Economic Theory in Retrospect, rev ed Irwin 1968 Hunt E K Property and Prophets, 2nd ed Harper & Row 1975 Hutchinson T W Review of Economic Doctrines 1870-1929, Oxford University Press 1953 Landreth H History of Economic Theory, Houghton Mifflin 1976 Spiegel H W The Growth of Economic Thought, Prentice-Hall New Jersey 1971

ASSESSMENT One research essay not exceeding 8,000 words, and one three-hour paper or four short essays (each of about 1,500 words) to be written and submitted about the end of third term.

326-361 METHODOLOGY OF ECONOMIC HISTORY A series of weekly seminars primarily intended for third year honours students. See details for honours degree in the school of Economics (p. 157).

HONOURS DEGREE H. SCHOOL OF ECONOMICS (For possible combinations with this school see pp. 519 ff.) 1. The course for the degree with honours in the school of Economics comprises the following subjects: Economics 1A (Arts), Economics 2, 3 and 4. Statistical Method History of Economic Thought or Mathematical Economics or Advanced Urban Economic Studies or a grade 3 Economics History Ions or an approved alternative subject An approved grade 1 subject together with one of the following sequences of subjects: (1) History 1A or History 18, Economic History B or History 2G, Economic History C or History 2H; 150 Economics

(2) Mathematics 1A, Mathematics 24 and Statistics 2A; (3) Philosophy part 1, Philosophy 2C and either Philosophy 2M or Philo- sophy 2D; (4) Politics 1, Politics 2B and either Politics ЭC or Philosophy 3D; (5) Three parts of Psychology; (6) Economic Geography, Regional Development, Urban Economic Studies; (7) Some other sequence of subjects approved by the chairman of the department of Economics, in accordance with the details set out below, and for the ordinary degree. 2. In his first year, a candidate should take the courses in Economic History A, Economics 1A, the first of the additional sequence of subjects and the approved grade 1 subject. The first year is regarded as a preliminary year of study, and admission to the higher years of the course is conditional on satisfactory performance in this year. Students must be approved by the faculty of Arts as candidates for the degree with honours before entering the second year of the honours school. The chairman of the department normally recommends approval for candidates who have gained at least second class honours in two first year subjects including Economics 1A. Other candidates who wish to enter the honours school should consult the chairman of the department of Economics, who will be guided in his recommendations by the merits of the case. 3. The faculty will not admit to the honours school a candidate who has previously graduated bachelor of Commerce (honours degree) or bachelor of Commerce (ordinary degree). 4. In their second year, candidates should take Economics 2, Statistical Method and the second part of the additional sequence of subjects. They must be classed in Economics 2 and must give evidence of ability to complete the work of the third and fourth years satisfactorily before being permitted to proceed. 5. In their third year, candidates should take Economics 3 and the third part of the additional sequence of subjects. The examination in Economics З consists of five papers and is the first part of the final examination. Before the end of their third year, candidates must select a subject for the essay, required as part of the final examination. The subject selected must be approved by the chairman of the department of Economics. The major part of the work for the essay should be undertaken during the long vacation between the third and fourth years and the essay should be submitted at the beginning of the third term of the year of the final examination. 6. in their fourth year candidates should take Economics 4 and either History of Economic Thought or Mathematical Economics or Advanced Urban Economic Studies. 7. The final examination in the school of Economics consists of three papers, the essay In accordance with section 5 above and one paper on either History of Economic Theory or Mathematical Economics or the approved alternative subject.

316-271 ECONOMICS 2 (HONS) A course of four lectures and one tutorial class per week. SYLLABUS A more advanced treatment of the topics prescribed for Economics B in

151 Faculty of Arts

the course for the ordinary degree together with a survey of the nature and method of economic theory. BOOKS As prescribed for Economics B together with reading lists provided by the department. EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers.

316-371 ECONOMICS 3 (HONS) A course of five lectures per week throughout the year. Students are also required to attend a weekly research essay class. SYLLABUS (i) Micro-economics; macro-economics; international economics. (ii) Special topics in Economics. (Selected from regional economics; capital and distribution theory; econometric theory; industrial relations; not all of which latter subjects will necessarily be offered in any one year.) BOOKS Reading lists will be provided by the department. EXAMINATION Five 3-hour papers.

321-361 THIRD YEAR FINAL HONOURS URBAN ECONOMIC STUDIES A series of weekly seminars primarily intended for third year honours students. SYLLABUS Urban Economic Studies — nature and development. Economic Concepts: price, externalities, welfare, partial and general equilibrium, systems, static vs. dynamic approach. Urban transport and land use, demand, choice, pricing, investment, cost-benefit and Melbourne Transport Plan. Urban land use, market, controls, Melbourne planning, conversion, price, social appropriation, tenures. Urban housing market, filtering, values, blight, renewal. Urban poverty, causes, nature, policies, interrelationships. Urban public finance, nature functions, levels, sources. Urban environmental disruption, causes, costs, control. City systems, size question, productivity, decentralization and other policies. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: Gordon D M Problems in Political Economy: An Urban Perspective, D C Heath & Co 1971 Thompson W R A Preface to Urban Economics, REF 1965 Research and Development Division, Melbourne and Metropolitan Board of Works, Report on the General Concept Objections, 1974 EXAMINATION A maximum of two final papers and written work as prescribed at the beginning of the year. 152 Economics

316-471 ECONOMICS 4 (HONS) A course of at least three lectures per week throughout the year. Students are also required to attend a weekly research essay class.

SYLLАВUS Economic policy and planning; public economics and welfare; and one from development economics; Marxian economics; labour studies; advanced econometrics; monetary economics (not all of which latter subjects will necessarily be offered in any one year).

BOOKS Reading lists will be provided by the department. EXAMINATION Three 3-hour papers together with research essay.

316-311 MATHEMATICAL ECONOMICS Economics B and Mathematics 1A, or General Mathematics must be passed before this subject is taken. A course of two lectures per week throughout the year. Lectures in this subject will be given only if there are sufficient students offering. Intending candidates should consult the sub-dean of the faculty of Economics and Commerce. SYLLABUS Selected aspects of economic theory treated in a mathematical way. BOOKS References as given in lectures. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper.

316-312 ECONOMETRICS Statistical Method must be passed before this subject is taken. A course of two lectures, one tutorial class and one practice class per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS The course covers the basic methodology of econometrics and Its application to economic problems. It aims to present in an integrated manner the four components of econometric investigation: model formulation, estimation, interpretation of results and forecasting ability. Econometric theory topics will include multiple regression analysis, the treatment of serial correlation In error terms, distributed lags, and an introduction to the theory of simultaneous-equation estimation. Repre- sentative empirical work will be discussed, with emphasis on Australian research findings. An empirical investigation undertaken by the student will form an integral part of the subject. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: 'Johnston J Econometric Methods, 2nd ed McGraw-Hill 1972 or 'Kmenta J Elements of Econometrics, Collier-Macmillan 1971

153 Faculty of Arts

EXAMINATION One 2-hour paper, an empirical exercise and an assignment.

321-461 FOURTH YEAR FINAL HONOURS ADVANCED URBAN ECONOMIC STUDIES A series of weekly seminars primarily intended for fourth year honours students (also Master of Commerce).

SYLLABUS Socio-economic approaches to urban/regional planning and the role of prevailing economic paradigms in applying these approaches. Techniques for analysing urban structure. The nature and implications of economic structural changes currently affecting Western urban areas. The Post-Industrial Society. Deindustriali- zation. Interrelationships between urban development, national economic development and economic growth. The implications of urban size and form for economic development and urban socio-economic performance. Processes of adaption and diffusion of technological innovation. Patterns of industrial migration and associated employment change. Dynamic systems models of urban areas. Interaction of the urban economic system with environmental and social sub-systems. The interrelationship between energy consumption and urban form and its implications for urban planning. Policy implications.

BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: Artie R The Structure of the Stockholm Economy, Cornell University Press 1965 Forrester J W Urban Dynamics, MIT 1969 McLoughlin J B Urban and Regional Planning: A Systems Approach, Faber & Faber 1969 Richardson H W The Economics of Urban Size, Saxon House 1973 Richardson H W Regional Growth Theory, Macmillan 1972 Stanback T M & knight R V The Metropolitan Economy, Columbia University Press 1970

EXAMINATION A maximum of one 3-hour paper and written work as prescribed at the beginning of the year. ECONOMIC HISTORY IN COMBINED HONOURS COURSES Students may take a major sequence in Economic History in an honours degree within the school of Economics. In addition combined honours courses are available in Economic History and History; Economic History and HPS; and Economic History and Political Science. Students should consult the chairmen of these departments for details, and should also consult the sub-dean. In general the Economic History component of the combined honours degree consists of: First year: One grade 1 or grade 2 Economic History subject Second year: One grade 2 Economic History subject at honours level. Third year: Methodology of Economic History; and one approved 154 Economic History

grade 3 Economic History subject at honours level. Fourth year: Economic History 4: normally an approved grade 3 Economic History subject at honours level, plus Special topics in Economic History. Also required: a fourth year thesis on a topic agreed upon by the chairmen of both departments of the combined course.

326-271 ECONOMIC HISTORY 2В (HONS) One Commerce or Arts subject must be passed before this subject is taken. A course of two lectures and one tutorial weekly throughout the year.

SYLLABUS A study of Australian economic history along the lines set down for the pass subject, Economic History 2В. In addition students will undertake a detailed study of selected topics within the general field.

BOOKS Recommended for reference: Blainey G N Triumph of the Nomads, Macmillan 1975 Blainey G N Tyranny of Distance, Sun 1974 Boehm E A Twentieth Century Economic Development in Australia, Longman 1971 Goodwin C D W The Image of Australia, Duke University Press 1974 Hall A R The Stock Exchange of Melbourne and the Victorian Economy 1852-1900, ANU 1968 Schedvin C B & McCarty J W eds Urbanisation in Australian History, Sydney University Press 1974 Sinclair W A The Process of Economic Development in Australia, Cheshire 1976 Wheelwright E L & Buckley K eds Essays in the Political Economy of Australian Capitalism, ANZ Book Co 1975

ASSESSMENT One research essay not exceeding 8,000 words and not more than two shorter assignments, each of about 1,500 words.

326-371 ECONOMIC HISTORY 3C (HONS) A course of two lectures and one seminar class of 90 minutes weekly throughout the year.

SYLLABUS A general study of the social, cultural and institutional influences on Asian economic development along the lines set down in Economic History 3C (Pass). In addition, students will undertake a detailed study of selected topics within the general field.

BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Bernstein H ed Underdevelopment and Development: The Third World Today, Penguin Harmondsworth 1973 Livingston J Moore J & Oldfather F eds The Japan Reader l Imperial Japan: 1800-1945, Pelican Harmondsworth 1976

155 Faculty of Arts

(b) Prescribed textbooks: No books are prescribed, reading lists will be issued during the year. ASSESSMENT Not more than one 3-hour paper; class work and written work done during the year will constitute at least half the assessment.

326-372 ECONOMIC HISTORY 3D (HONS) A course of two lectures and one seminar weekly throughout the year.

SYLLABUS A survey of the economic growth of the U.S.A. along the lines set down for the pass subject Economic History 3D. In addition, students will undertake a detailed study, including documentary work, of selected periods or topics within the general field.

BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Allen H C A Concise History of the USA, Ernest Benn Lend 1970 Hacker L M The Course of American Economic Growth and Develop- ment, Wiley New York 1970 (b) Prescribed text: Brownlee W Elliot The Dynamics of Ascent, Alfred A Knopf New York 1974 Detailed reading lists will be issued during the year. WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit at times specified two essays of 3,000 words and one critical study of 1,500 words. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. Written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination.

326-373 ECONOMIC HISTORY 3E (HONS) A course of two lectures and one seminar weekly throughout the year, SYLLABUS A study of the historical background to problems of development and under-development in Latin America, along the lines set dawn in Economic History 3E (Pass). In addition students will undertake a detailed study of selected topics within the general field.

BOOKS Preliminary reading: Pendle George A History of Latin America, Penguin 1969 Prescribed textbooks: Furtado Celso Economic Development of Latin America: A survey from Colonial Times to the Cuba Revolution, CUP 1970 156 Economics

326-375 HISTORY OF ECONOMIC THOUGHT 3 (HONS) This subject is a grade 3 honours subject. Economics B is normally required before this subject is taken. A course of two lectures and one tutorial weekly. SYLLABUS: The aim of the course is to examine and explain the major changes in economic thinking from the eighteenth century to present times. Empha- sis will be given to links between economic thought and political and social thought, to the degree of responsiveness of economic theory to current problems and to the interaction of orthodox and heterodox theories. Areas of study will include: the origins of classical liberalism (Smith, Say); the rise and fall of the classical pessimists (Malthus, Ricardo); the marginal revolution and spread of marginalism; pre-Marxian socialists, Marx and post-Marxian economics; business cycle theory, crises and the Keynesian revolution; and conservative and liberal and radical critics of contemporary theory (Friedman, Galbraith, Myrdal, Political Economy).

BOOKS Preliminary reading: Barber W A History of Economic Thought, Penguin 1968 Routh G The Origin of Economic Ideas, Macmillan 1975 Prescribed textbooks: No books are prescribed but the following are useful: Blaug M Economic Theory in Retrospect, rev ed Irwin 1968 Hunt E K Property end Prophets, 2nd ed Harper & Row 1975 Hutchinson T W Review of Economic Doctrines 1870-1929, OUP 1953 Landreth H History of Economic Theory, Houghton Mifflin 1976 Spiegel H W The Growth of Economic Thought, Prentice-Hall New Jersey 1971 ASSESSMENT One research essay, and one 3-hour paper or four short essays to be written and submitted about the end of third term.

326-361 METHODOLOGY OF ECONOMIC HISTORY A series of weekly seminars primarily Intended for third year honours students. SYLLABUS The main aim of the course is to increase students' abilities to think, analyse, and argue within the wide area covered by economic history, economics and history. Particular problems to be discussed include the hidden assumptions of economists and historians, the "new" economic history, the scientific nature of the social sciences, and research techniques and pitfalls.

157 Faculty of Arts

BOO КS Preliminary reading: Mehta V Fly and the Fly Bottle, Pelican 1962 Prescribed textbooks: Stratton W The Political Sciences, Routledge & kegan Paul London 1969 Further reading will be prescribed during the year. EXAMINATION A maximum of two 3-hour papers and written work as prescribed.

326-401 ECONOMIC HISTORY 4 (HONS) 1) An approved grade 3 Economic History subject at honours level together with special topics in Economic History. 2) A fourth year thesis on a topic agreed upon by chairmen of both departments of the combined honours course.

MASTER OF ARTS 316-602 H. SCHOOL OF ECONOMICS A MA by Thesis 1. Candidates who have passed the preliminary examination, and also, if they so elect, those who have qualified for the degree of BA with honours in Economics, may proceed to the MA degree by pursuing original research on an approved topic for at least one academic year. Candidates should, if possible, submit their research topic to the chairman of the department for approval at the beginning of the year in which they commence their research. Each candidate will be assigned to a supervisor with whom there must be regular consultation. 2. Candidates are required to present the results of their research in the form of a thesis of about 50,000 words or, on the recommendation of the chairman of the department, a series of papers. Three copies (А4, typewritten, double-spaced! of the thesis must be submitted and, if passed by the examiners, one will be deposited in the University Library. An entry form for examination for higher degrees must be submitted to the Registrar. The thesis should normally be submitted for examination within two years from the commencement of candidature for MA by full-time candidates and within four years by part-time candidates. Except in special circumstances and with the permission of the faculty no thesis or course work will be examined unless the candidate presents for examination within four years from the commencement of his candidature or, in the event of his having been granted leave of absence for the maximum period of one year, within five years from the commencement of his candidature. B MA by Course of Advanced Studies 1. Candidates who have been awarded first or upper second class honours in the final examination for the degree of BA or BCom with honours in the school of Economics, or who have been admitted with an equivalent qualification, may, with the approval of the chairman of the department, proceed to the degree of MA by pursuing a course of 158 English

advanced studies extending over at least one year for full-time students or, in special cases, two years for part-time students. Candidates should seek approval for their proposed course of study by the last Friday in January of the year in which they commence their course. After approval candidates must enrol at the Students Records Office, and re-enrol for each subsequent year of their approved course. An entry form for examinations must be lodged at the appropriate time. 2. The course of advanced studies will Include: (i) two weekly postgraduate classes extending over one academic year and requiring the submission of two satisfactory seminar or examination papers. (The topics to be covered in the class will include two of the following: Advanced Econometrics, the Economics of Inflation, Industrial Economics, Industrial Relations, Social Eco- nomics, Economic Development and International Economics. Further particulars may be obtained from the department); (ii) either two additional weekly postgraduate classes covering two more of the topics listed under (I), or one of the following subjects not already taken as part of the candidate's undergraduate course: Econometrics; Mathematical Economics, Statistics 300, History of Economic Thought or another subject approved by the chairman of the department; and (iii) an article for publication or a research report, which may incorporate further development of the candidate's BA or BCom honours essay, or may relate to one of the topics chosen for postgraduate study. 3. Examination (1) Two seminar papers and, if judged necessary by the examiners, two 3-hour examination papers; (ii) as for (i) above, or as prescribed in the details of the relevant subjects; and (iii) a research report or publishable article.

DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH (Including Linguistics—see page 175) Chairman of Department: Mr T. J. KELLY, M.A. (Cantab.) Professor of English Language and Literature: Professor G. H. RUSSELL, Ph.D. (Cantab.), l.A. (N.Z.) Robert Wallace Professor of English: Professor H. FELPERIN, B.A. (Col.), M.A., Ph.D. (Harvard) Personal Chair In English: Professor V. T. BUCKLEY, M.A. Subjects offered by the department:

First year English Part 1 (day and evening) (English Part 1 may be taken in three alternative courses, English 1A (106-101), 1 B (106-111), or 1 C (106-121); throughout the following pages the term "English part 1" or "English 1" refers to any of these three courses.) 106-102 Rhetoric (the one time is for day and evening)

159 Faculty of Arts

Second year Ordinary degree 106-201 English Part 2 (day and evening) Honours degree 106-261 English Literature Part 2 (day only) 106-262 English Language Part 2 (day only)

Third year Ordinary degree 106-301 English Part 3 (the one time is for both day and evening) Honours degree 106-361 English Literature Part 3 (day only) 106-362 English Language Part 3 (day only)

Fourth year Honours degree 106-461 English Language & Literature Part 4 (day only) (Combined Honours students take either the Literature [106-462] or the Language [106-463] component.)

ORDINARY DEGREE (Details for the honours degree are set out at the end of this section.) The major in English is English 1, 2, 3. Rhetoric may not be taken as a part of the major, but may be taken in addition to other English subjects.

NOTE ON PRESCRIBED TEXTS All prescribed texts are essential books which students should possess. The order in which texts will be discussed will be posted on the notice- boards at the beginning of the year.

ENGLISH 1A, 1B, 1C No student may take more than one of these three subjects. In 1978 only English 1 B will be available to evening students.

106-101 ENGLISH 1A A course of one lecture and one tutorial per week, and one 1 t/Z hour class per fortnight. SYLLABUS An introduction to the critical study of literature in three major forms. A number of texts in poetry, fiction and drama are prescribed for study. In conjunction with close attention to individual works, students will be encouraged to compare and contrast the set texts and to pursue critical issues arising in the course of their work. The Norton Anthology of Poetry (Poems to be selected in class) Pope Poems, Either Everyman or Twickenham ed. Keats Poems (Selection in Norton Anthology will be adequate) Eliot Collected Poems 160 English

Austen Emma Conrad Victory Dickens Great Expectations Hawthorne Scarlet Letter and Selected Tales Tolstoy Anna Karenin Hardy Tess of the d'Urbervilles Faulkner Light in August Кеnеа llу Bring Larks and Heroes Sophocles Oedipus Rex Wakefield Second Shepherds' Play, in Everyman and Medieval Miracle Plays, ed Cawley Everyman Jonson Volpone Shakespeare A Midsummer Night's Dream Measure for Measure King Leer Beckett Endgame Brecht Caucasian Chalk Circle Chekhov Uncle Van ye ASSESSMENT Students are required to submit two essays and up to two exercises, details of which will be supplied during the year. Regular tutorial attendance is expected, and students who, without the formal permission of the lecturer-in-charge, fail to submit the required exercises and essays by the due dates may not be given credit for the course. Essays and tutorial work will be taken into account along with the examination. The examination will consist of not more than two 3-hour papers.

106-111 ENGLISH 1 B A course of one lecture and one tutorial per week, and one 1% hour class per fortnight. SYLLABUS A study of selected poetry, novels and plays. The course aims to combine a close study of a number of important works (marked •) with range and freedom to follow up particular interests. Students will be encouraged, as the year goes on, to compare and contrast the works they read and study. For this purpose, there will be a good deal of cross-reference between lectures and discussion classes, and there will be room to expand the course by including other works as students and tutors think appropriate. The Norton Anthology of Poetry • Donne Poems • Pope Poems, Either Twickenham or Everyman ed Byron Poems, Oxford Standard Authors, or any reasonably complete edition Hardy Selected Shorter Poems, ed Wain Macmillan Eliot Collected Poems, Faber Lowell Robert Lowell's Poems, ed Raban, Faber Fielding Tom Jones Austen Emma Dostoievsky Crime and Punishment Hardy The Mayor of Casterbridge •Tolstoy Anna Karenin Faculty of Arts

• Conrad Victory Lawrence Three Novellas, Penguin Faulkner As I Lay Dying Camus The Outsider Aeschylus Agamemnon, translation to be announced Shakespeare As You Like It • Hamlet Measure for Measure Jonson Volpone Chekhov Uncle Venyi Beckett Waiting for Godot

106-121 ENGLISH 1 C A course of one lecture and one tutorial per week, and one 1% hour class per fortnight. SYLLABUS An introduction to the study of literature in its three main forms: poetry, fiction and drama. This will take the form of an intensive and selective study of two periods of English literature: the early seventeenth and the twentieth centuries. Students will be encouraged to learn to read the works closely and carefully, and to make, for themselves and within their tutorial groups, relevant comparisons and contrasts, not only between individual works but between the two periods. Texts for study are: The Norton Anthology of Poetry Shakespeare Sonnets Twelfth Night Henry IV, parts 1 & il Hamlet The Tempest Donne Poems Jonson The Alchemist Tourneur The Revenger's Tragedy Yeats Selected Poems or Collected Poems Eliot Collected Poems, Faber Auden Collected Shorter Poems r Collected Poems Joyce Dubliners (in The Essential James Joyce, ed Levin, Penguin) Conrad Victory Lawrence Three Novellas, Penguin White The Aunt's Story Beckett Happy Days and Endgame Brecht Mother Courage Faulkner The Sound and the Fury Stoppard Rosencrantz & Guildenstern are Dead

162 English

ASSESSMENT Students are required to submit two essays and up to two exercises, details of which will be supplied during the year. Regular tutorial attendance is expected, and students who, without the formal permission of the lecturer-in-charge, fail to submit the required exercises and essays by the due dates may not be given credit for the course. Essays and tutorial work will be taken into account along with the examination. The examination will consist of not more than two 3-hour papers. REFERENCE BOOKS The following general references are recommended for all students intending to pursue studies in English: Brewer's Dictionary of Phrase and Fable; Harvey ed The Oxford Com- panion to English Literature 4th ed 1967; and either The Shorter Oxford English Dictionary or The Concise Oxford Dictionary. OPTIONAL ADDITIONAL WORK in English 1A, 16 & 1C (see also p. 27) A short course of lectures and/or tutorials normally for one hour a week, centring on Chaucer The Canterbury Tales. The course will extend over the first part of the year. At the end of the course there will be an informal class test, which will be of special value to students interested in the possibility of taking an honours course in Pure English.

1 06-1 ог RHETORIC Mr H. Dow A course of two lectures a week, with tutorial classes. SYLLABUS A study of the technique and style of English prose, linked with a study of the practical problems of English expression. BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Gowers E The Complete Plain Words, Penguin Potter S Our Language, Penguin Vallins G H Good English, How to Write It, Pan Books Vallins G H Better English, Pan Books (b) Prescribed texts: Defoe, Swift, Johnson, Hazlitt, Macaulay, Dickens, R L Stevenson and others: Selections In cyclostyled booklets, from English Dept. Huxley T H Selections from the Essays, ed Castel A, Crofts Classics Shaw Bernard Preface to Saint Joen, Penguin Russell Bertrand In Praise of Idleness, Unwin Books Hemingway E A Moveable Feast, Penguin The School of Barbiana Letter to a Teacher, Penguin (c) Recommended for reference: The Concise Oxford Dictionary, 5th ed or The Shorter Oxford English Dictionary Fowler H W & F G The King's English, OUP

163 Faculty of Arts

Fowler H W Modern English Usage, OUP or 2nd rev ed Gowers E, OUP Partridge E Usage and Abusage, Hamilton Carey G V Mind the Stop, Penguin WRITTEN WORK Students are required to submit written work periodically throughout the year. Written and tutorial work will be taken into account at the examination. Students who, without the formal permission of the lecturer-in- charge, fail to submit the required written work by the due dates may not be given credit for the subject. ASSESSMENT Assessment will be based on the examination and on written and tutorial work during the year. The number of examination papers will not exceed two of 3 hours each.

106-201 ENGLISH PART 2 English 1 is normally required before this subject is taken.

A course of two lectures and one tutorial class a week. SYLLABUS A study of nineteenth and twentieth century poetry, fiction and drama. (a) Prescribed texts: (i) Poetry in the late Eighteenth and Nineteenth Centuries: The Norton Anthology of Poetry, ed Eastman, rev ed 1975 Blake Oxford Standard Authors or Viking Portable ed Coleridge Modern Library ed Wordsworth Modern Library ed Note: Since these three poets are major poets in the course, you will need to supplement the Norton selection of Blake, Coleridge and Wordsworth with the recommended special texts. Attention will also be given to some later Romantic and some Victorian poets. For these, the Norton anthology selections will form the basis of discussion. (ii) Poetry in the Twentieth Century: Yeats W B Selected Poetry, St Martin's Library [Honours students are advised to buy. instead. the Collected Poems, Macmillan] Pound E Selected Poems, New Directions (the Faber selection is not suitable) Eliot T S Four Quartets The Norton Anthology of Poetry (iii) The Nineteenth and Twentieth Century Novel: Austen Mansfield Park Bronte Wuthering Heights Dickens Little Dorrit Melville Moby Dick Eliot George Middlemarch James The Portrait of a Lady Conrad The Shadow Line 164 English

Joyce A Portrait of the Artist es a Young Man ( Also in The Essential James Joyce, Penguin) Lawrence The Rainbow (iv) A selection of drama from the period: Chekhov The Cherry Orchard Beckett Samuel All that fell Ibsen A Doll's House Wilde The Importance of Being Earnest Note: Authors and works to be studied in the anthology will be specified in class. Critical writings will be recommended in class. ASSESSMENT Students will be required to submit three pieces of written work. These and contributions to tutorials will formally be taken into account along with examinations at the end of the year. Students who, without the formal permission of the lecturer-in-charge, fail to submit the required written work by the due dates may not be given credit for the course. The number of examination papers to be sat will not exceed two.

106-301 ENGLISH PART 3 English 2 is normally required before this subject is taken. A course of two lectures and one tutorial class a week, running throughout the year. SYLLABUS A study of English poetry, prose and drama from the Mediaeval period to the Eighteenth-century. Texts for study are: Everyman and Medieval Miracle Plays, ed Cawley Everyman Chaucer The Canterbury Tales, ed Cawley Everyman Later sixteenth and early seventeenth-century poets in The Norton Anthology of Poetry, ed Eastman, and The Schools of Donne and Jonson, ed Kenner. (Particular attention will be paid to Wyatt, Shakespeare, Jonson, Herbert and Marvell.) Donna Poetry and Prose, ed Warnke Shakespeare A Midsummer Night's Dream, Measure for Measure, King Lear, Antony and Cleopatra, The Tempest Jonson Volpone Tourneur The Revenger's Tragedy Middleton The Changeling (The plays by Middleton and Tourneur are both printed in Three Jacobean Tragedies, ed Salgado Penguin.) Milton Paradise Lost, Rinehart ed Bunyan The Pilgrim's Progress Dryden Selected Poems, Heinemann Poetry Bookshelf ed Pope Collected Poems, The one-volume Twickenham ed or the Every- man ed Swift The Writings of Jonathan Swift, ed Greenberg, Norton Defoe Robinson Crusoe Richardson Clarissa, Everyman ed vol. 1

165 Faculty of Arts

Johnson Samuel Johnson: Rasselas, Poems and Selected Prose, ed Bronson Rinehart A brief study of 'Late Augustanism'—Gray, Goldsmith, Crabbe, etc.— based on The Norton Anthology of Poetry

Voluntary Option For those students interested, there will be a course of lectures, one per week throughout the year, on Australian literature. There will be no separate examination in this option, although students may choose to write an essay in this area in place of one of the essays required in the main course above. Students will also have the opportunity to write one answer in this area in the third-year examination. It is hoped that enough students will be interested to form discussion groups in this area each fortnight. The lecture syllabus will include: Clarke For the Term of His Natural Life Lawson Selected Stories, ed Matthews Rigby Collins Such is Life Herbert Capricornia Stead The Man Who Loved Children White Riders in the Chariot Keneally The Chant of Jimmy Blacksmith Alexander Craig ed Twelve Poets Heseltine H ed The Penguin Book of Australian Verse Slessor Poems Hope Selected Poems Hibberd Three Popular Plays, Outback Press

GENERAL REFERENCE BOO КS A list of general references useful for preliminary reading will be posted on the English department notice-board at the beginning of the year. ASSESSMENT Students are required to submit four essays and at least one class paper, details of which will be supplied during the year. Regular tutorial attendance is expected, and essays and tutorial work will be taken into account at the examination. Students who, without the formal permission of the lecturer-in-charge, fail to submit the required essays by the due dates may not be given credit for the course. The assessment will be either: (A) An examination, the nature of which will be announced at the beginning of the academic year. The number of papers to be sat will not exceed two. or (B) Upon the recommendation of the tutor, and with the approval of the chairman of the department, a student, who has demonstrated a high standard of written work and tutorial performance, may be exempted from sitting for the examination.

HONOURS DEGREE E. SCHOOL OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE. (For possible combinations with this school see pp. 519 1f.) 166 English

GENERAL The first year is regarded as a preliminary year of exploratory study. Before entering on their second year as candidates for the degree with honours, students will require the permission of the faculty of Arts to do so. Normally this will be given only to those who have gained a first or a second class honour in English 1. Any student who, not having been awarded a first or second class honour in English 1, wishes to enter the honours school, must apply through the Sub-Dean to the faculty for permission to do so. Any student who wishes to transfer from a combined honours school to the school of Pure English must apply, through the Sub-Dean, for permission of the chairman of the department of English. Any student who wishes to repeat any course in the honours school in English must apply, through the Sub-Dean, for permission of the chairman of the department of English. All students who have completed any year in the honours school of English, must apply, through the Sub-Dean, for permission of the chairman of the department of English to proceed into their next year. Normally this will be given only to students who have gained first or second class honours in their English course (or courses) and who have progressed satisfactorily in their additional subjects. The course in Practice of Criticism for English Literature 2 will be examined at the end of, and together with, the course in Practice of Criti- cism in English Literature 3. The examination will normally take place at the end of third term, before the beginning of the examination term. Regular attendance at classes is expected, and class work will be taken into account at the examination. All students taking part Il of the final examination are required to submit a thesis by the end of the first week of second term of the year in which they are taking part Il of the final examination, or at such other times as are set down in the details of the combined honours courses. This thesis forms part of the final examination. The subject of the thesis must be approved by the chairman of the department by the end of the first week of the third term of the student's third year. Work on the thesis should begin in the long vacation. The thesis itself should be between 8,000 and 10,000 words in length; any thesis significantly longer or shorter will not be accepted. It should be typewritten, double-spaced, on A4 paper. Two copies must be submitted. Students' attention is drawn to the faculty regulation affecting the thesis. N.B.—(i) any thesis submitted after the due date without the formal permission of the chairman of department will be substantially penalized; (il) no thesis will be examined if it is submitted after 30 November without formal permission of the chairman of department.

PURE ENGLISH SCHOOL The course for the degree with honours comprises the following subjects: English 1A or 16 or 1C English Literature 2 and 3 English Language 2 and 3 English Language and Literature 4 in accordance with the details set out below. Students must take these six subjects and at least four approved additional subjects chosen so as to comply with the requirements for the ordinary degree.

167 Faculty of Arts

For the degree with honours in the school of Pure English these additional subjects must include at least part 1 of a language (other than English) approved by the chairman of the department. (Normally this will be one of the following: Dutch, French, German, Greek, Italian, Latin, Russian or Swedish.)

1. First year: (a) The normal requirements for first year are: (i) The achievement of a suitable standard in English 1, usually first or second class honours; and (ii) Passes In three other part 1 subjects chosen in accordance with the requirements for the ordinary degree. (b) However, In view of the requirements above for part 1 of a language other than English, and the nature of English Language 2, students who may wish to pursue the honours course in the school of Pure English are strongly recommended to include the required part 1 of a language other than English in their first-year studies, es well, of course, as the optional Additional Work in English 1, which is of special value to students interested in the possibility of an honours course in Pure English. (A student whose first year does not include a language other than English may, in special circumstances, be given permission to enter on the second year of the Pure English course and take part 1 of a language other than English in his second year instead of an additional part 2 subject. Such permission must be sought through the Sub-Dean.)

2. Second year: The normal requirements for second year are: (i) The achievement of a suitable standard, usually first or second class honours, in English Literature 2; (ii) The achievement of a suitable standard, usually first or second class honours, in English Language 2; (iii) A pass in a grade 2 subject chosen in accordance with the require. rents for the ordinary degree. 3. Third year: Final Honours, Part 1: Students will take English Literature 3 and English Language 3 (in which they must achieve a suitable standard—usually first or second class honours), the examination for these consisting of papers in: (1) Literature of the 17th and 18th centuries. (2) Studies in the Novel or Australian and American Literature or Studies in Drama or Modem Poetry, as available. (Numbers in any of these classes may have to be limited.) (3) Practice of criticism (dating). (4) Middle English. (5) Elementary Old Norse or Early English lyric poetry. 4. Fourth Year: Final Honours, Part 11: Students will take English Language and Literature 4, the examination for which consists of five papers, which shall include: (1) A thesis of 8,000-10,000 words on an approved subject; '(2) Medieval literature; and three of: 168 English

(3) American literature; (4) Aspects of poetry from 1500; (5) Literature and thought, c. 1830-1880, or Literature and thought, C. 1850-1925, or Literature and thought, 1920 to the present; (6) Shakespeare; • (7) Old English poetry; • (8) Old Norse poetry and prose; • (9) Middle English poetry. N.B. Some of the above papers may not be available and others may be added in any particular year. Those that are to be available. together with suggested reading for each seminar course, will be listed on the departmental notice-board before the end of the preceding year. Numbers may have to be limited in any of these seminars. The papers marked with an asterisk are available only to students who have taken English Lan- guage З. unless special permission for entry is granted by the chairman of department.

ENGLISH IN COMBINED HONOURS COURSES English In combined honours courses will consist of EITHER (A) English 1t, and English Literature 2, 3, and 4; OR (B) English 1t, and English Language 2, 3, and 4; in accordance with the details set out below, and such additional subjects as comply with (a) the requirements of the ordinary degree and (b) the particular combined honours course concerned. Normally, these additional subjects will comprise the relevant honours work in the combining school together with two grade 1 and one grade 2 pass subjects. (A) In their first year, students will take English 1, in which they must achieve a suitable standard—usually first or second class honours. They are also strongly recommended to include part 1 of a language other than English among their first year subjects, as well, of course, as the optional Additional Work in English 1. In their second year, students will take English Literature 2, in which they must achieve a suitable standard—usually first or second class honours (together with the required work for the combining honours school and a grade 2 subject in accordance with the requirements for the ordinary degree). In their third year, they will take papers (1), (2), and (3) of part I of the final examination in the school of Pure English (together with the required work for the combining honours school) in which they must achieve a suitable standard—usually first or second class honours. In their fourth year, they will present a thesis in accordance with the requirements of the particular combined honours course concerned, and two of papers (3), (4), (5) and (6) offered in part 11 of the final examination in the school of Pure English (together with the required work for the combining honours school). (B) Students may take English Language as part of a combined honours course, provided they give evidence of their ability to do so and pass in part 1 of a language other than English in accordance with the requirements of the school of Pure English as set out above. Thus: t English 1: English 1A or 18 or 1C.

169 Faculty of Arts

In their first year, students will take English 1, in which they must achieve a suitable standard—usually first or second class honours. (N.B. Stu- dents who may wish to study English Language 2, 3, and 4, are reminded that the optional additional work in English 1 is partly designed to give them some introduction to this study.) In addition they should take the required part 1 of a language other than English (which should normally be one of those listed above under the course for Pure English), and two other subjects. In their second year, they will take English Language 2, in which they must achieve a suitable standard—usually first or second class honours (together with the required work for the combining honours school and a grade 2 subject in accordance with the requirements for the ordinary degree). In their third year, they will take papers (4) and (5) of part I of the final examination in the school of Pure English (together with the required work for the combining honours school), in which they must achieve a suitable standard—usually first or second class honours. In their fourth year, they will present a thesis in accordance with the requirements of the particular combined honours course concerned, and two of papers (2), (7), (8) and (9) offered in part 11 of the final examination in the school of Pure English (together with the required work for the combining honours school).

106-261 ENGLISH LITERATURE PART 2 A course of three lectures a week, with 1-2 tutorials per week, and an additional weekly 2-hour class in the practice of criticism. Regular attendance at all classes is expected, and essays and tutorial work will be taken into account at the examination.

SYLLABUS (i) The course In literature prescribed for English part 2 (ordinary degree). (ii) Older forms of narrative: Homer The Iliad, tr Richmond Lattimore, Phoenix Books Beowulf, verse tr Alexander Penguin The Song of Roland, Penguin translation The Norse Saga, with special reference to: The Story of Burnt N¡Ø1, tr Dasent G W, Everyman Laxdaela Saga, tr Magnusson & Palsson Penguin Medieval Romance, with special reference to: Aucassin and Nicolette, Penguin Chrétien de Troyes Arthurian Romances, Everyman Malory Morte d'Arthur Dante The Divine Comedy, Tempie Classics translation Chaucer Troilus and Criseyde, ed Mills Everyman The following works are recommended for reference:

Kеr W P Epic and Romance, Macmillan. This is the most important reference book. Phillpotts B Edda and Saga, HUL Lewis C S The Allegory of Love. OUP 170 English

ASSESSMENT On Section (i) of the syllabus: three pieces of written work are required. These and contribution to tutorials will formally be taken into account along with examinations at the end of the year. Students who, without the formal permission of the chairman of department, fail to submit the required written work by the due dates may not be given credit for the subject. For sections (i) and (ii) of the syllabus: the number of examination papers to be sat will not exceed three.

106-262 ENGLISH LANGUAGE PART 2 A course of three lectures a week with a weekly tutorial. Regular class attendance is expected, and essay and class work will be taken into account at the examination. SYLLABUS A study of Old and Middle English with prescribed and unprescribed translation, together with a short course of lectures on the history of the English language, and some study of the Anglo-Saxon background. Students taking English Language part 2 as part of a combined honours coursa must attend lectures and sit for the examination in section (ii) of English Literature part 2. BOOKS (a) Prescribed texts: Sweet H Anglo-Saxon Reader, ed Whitelock, OUP Mitchell R B A Guide to Old English, Blackwell Sisam K ed Fourteenth Century Verse and Prose, OUP Baugh A C A History of the English Language, Routledge (b) Recommended for reference: Zesmer D Guide to English Literature, Barnes & Noble Whitelock D The Beginnings of English Society, Pelican Blair P H An Introduction to Anglo-Saxon England, CUP ASSESSMENT An essay of about 2,500 words will be required on some part of the syllabus. Class work will include regular assignments in grammar and translation. Students who, without the formal permission of the chairman of department, fail to submit the required written work by the due dates may not be given credit for the subject. The number of examination papers to be sat will not exceed one, In addition to class tests.

106-361 ENGLISH LITERATURE PART 3 A course of (i) two lectures and one tutorial per week: (ii) a 2-hour seminar per week together with weekly tutorials as required; and (iii) a seminar of 1 %-2 hours per week. Regular attendance at all classes is expected, and essays and class work will be taken into account at the examination. 171 Faculty of Arts

SYLLABUS (i): The course prescribed for English part 3 (ordinary degree), excluding the Australian option. As well as the texts prescribed for English part 3, honours students are advised to possess a good edition of Wyatt's poems (e.g. Muses Library) and of Marvell's poems (e.g. Modern Library or Muses' Library or Penguin). They should also obtain The Pelican Book of English Prose, 2 vols, which will be necessary for section (e) of the syllabus as well. (ii) Two of the following: (a) Australian and American literature. Works from the two literatures will be studied concurrently throughout the year. Details of this course will be posted on the departmental notice-board at the beginning of the year. Required preliminary reading will be listed on the departmental notice-board late in the preceding year. (b) Studies in the Novel, mainly 19th and 20th century. Details of this course will be posted on the departmental notice-board at the beginning of the year. Required preliminary reading will be listed on the departmental notice-board Iate in the preceding year. (c) Studies in drama, chiefly Greek, 17th century, and modern. Details of this course will be posted on the departmental notice-board at the beginning of the year. Required preliminary reading will be listed on the departmental notice-board Iate in the preceding year. (d) Modern poetry. A study of certain developments and traditions in the poetry of the past hundred years, including certain attempts to adapt these traditions to the needs of prose fiction and drama. N.B. Some of the above papers may not be available and others may be added in any particular year. Those that are to be available, together with suggested reading for each, will be listed on the departmental notice-board before the end of the preceding year, when students will be asked for their preferences. Numbers may have to be limited in any of these seminars. (e) Seminars in the practice of criticism (dating). WRITTEN WORK Students are required to do three essays on section (i) of the syllabus, and to present at least one seminar paper on section (ii, a or b or c or d). Students who, without the formal permission of the chairman of department, fail to submit the required written work by the due dates may not be given credit for the subject. EXAMINATION The number of papers to be sat will not exceed three.

106-362 ENGLISH LANGUAGE PART 3 A course of lectures amounting to about four hours a week. Regular class attendance is expected, and class work, which will include regular assignments in translation, will be taken into account at the examination. 172 English

SYLLABUS (1) A study of Middle English. Bennett & Smithers Early Middle English Verse and Prose, OUP Langland Piers Plowman, ed Bennett J A W, OUP Chaucer Early poems as selected in class, Robinson ed preferred, OUP Sir Gawain and the Green Knight, ed Tolkien J R R & Gordon E V, 2nd rev ed Davis N, OUP Henryson Poems, ed Elliott C, OUP Ford B ed The Age of Chaucer, Pelican Guide to English Literature Vol 1 Together with one of the following two subjects: (ii) A study of Early English lyric poetry. Sweet H Anglo-Saxon Reader, ed Whitelock, OUP Davies R T ed Mediaeval English Lyrics, Faber paperback Bolton W F An Old English Anthology, Arnold (iii) Elementary Old Norse. Gordon E V Introduction to Old Norse, rev Taylor, OUP Snorri Sturluson Hdkonar Saga G6aa, English Dept Other papers may be substituted for (ii) or (iii) in any particular year. Those that are to be available, together with suggested reading for each, will be listed on the departmental notice-board before the end of the preceding year. ESSAY WORK A class paper will be required on section (1) of the syllabus. EXAMINATION The number of papers to be set will not exceed two.

106-461 ENGLISH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE PART 4 (PURE ENGLISH SCHOOL) A course chiefly of seminar work throughout the year. Seminars are generally 2 hours per week, together with weekly tutorials es required. Regular attendance at classes Is expected, and class work will be taken into account at the examination. SYLLABUS Five papers, which shall include: (1) Thesis of 8,000-10,000 words on an approved subject. •(2) Medieval literature; and three of: (3) American literature. (4) Aspects of poetry from 1500. (5) Literature and thought, c. 1830-1880, or Literature and thought, c. 1850-1925, or Literature and thought, 1920 to the present. (6) Shakespeare. •(7) A study of Old English, chiefly poetry, with special reference to: Beowulf, ed KIaeber. Heath Bolton W F An Old English Anthology, Arnold Sweet H Anglo-Saxon Reader, ed Whitelock, OUP (8) Old Norse poetry and prose. Zoëga, G A Concise Dictionary of Old Icelandic, OUP 173 Faculty of Arts

Gordon E V Introduction to Old Norse, rev Taylor, OUP Typescript texts (English department). • (9) Middle English Poetry. N.B. Some of the above papers may not be available and others may be added In any particular year. Those that are to be available. together with suggested reading for each, will be listed on the departmental notice- board before the end of the preceding year. Numbers may have to be limited in any of these seminars. The papers marked with an asterisk are available only to students who have taken English Language З, unless special permission for entry is granted by the chairman of department. EXAMINATION The total number of papers will not exceed five.

106-462 ENGLISH LITERATURE PART 4 (COMBINED COURSES) A course chiefly of seminar work throughout the year: See details of Eng- lish Language and Literature 4. SYLLABUS Three papers, which must include (1 ) in accordance with the requirements of the combined honours course concerned, and in addition two other papers from (3), (4), (5) and (6), as set out in the details for part 4 of English Language and Literature above. EXAMINATION The total number of papers will not exceed three.

106-463 ENGLISH LANGUAGE PART 4 (COMBINED COURSES) A course of about four hours a week: See details of English Language and Literature 4. SYLLABUS Three papers which must include (1) in accordance with the requirements of the combined honours course concerned, and in addition two other papers from (2), (7), (8) and (9), as set out in the details for part 4 of English Language and Literature below. EXAMINATION The total number of papers to be sat will not exceed three.

MASTER OF ARTS 106-601 E. SCHOOL OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE 1. Enrolment. Candidates must complete two formal applications—one for the sub-dean of the faculty and the other for the department of English—seeking permission to enrol, whether for the degree of MA or for the preliminary course qualifying pass-degree students to enter upon the MA. 174 English

If permission is granted, candidates must enrol at the Students' Records Office, re-enrol for each subsequent year of their approved course and, when appropriate, lodge an entry form for examination for higher degrees. 2. Preliminary Course (for candidates with pass degrees). Students should apply, both to the sub-dean and the department of Eng- lish, on the appropriate forms not later than the end of January in the year in which they propose to begin. Students should consult the department about details of their course, but generally they will be required to take only one paper from those set for part 1 of the final honours examination and two papers from those available for part II, together with a thesis on an approved subject as required for part II. However, all proposed courses must be approved by the chairman of the department. 3. MA Course. Candidates may choose, with the approval of the chairman of the department, to full the requirements for the degree of MA in one of the following two ways: (i) Prepare a thesis of about 50,000 words on a subject approved by the chairman of the department. Students will work under a supervisor nominated by the department, to whom they are required to report regularly on their work. Three copies of the thesis (A4, typewritten, double-spaced) should be submitted. A candidate may also be examined on the subject of the thesis. (ii) (a) Sit for a special examination of two papers in any one of the courses available for part 2 of the final honours examination or such other courses as may be offered from time to time, provided that no student may repeat a course he has taken as part of his BA or his MA Preliminary course. (b) In addition, prepare a thesis of about 25,000 words on a subject approved by the chairman of the department. Other requirements for this thesis are those set out above under (i) concerning the longer thesis. Course work must normally be undertaken before, or concurrently with, the writing of the thesis. The thesis should normally be submitted for examination within two years from the commencement of candidature for MA by full-time candidates and within four years by part-time candidates. Except in special circumstances and with the permission of the faculty no thesis or course work will be examined unless the candidate presents for examination within four years from the commencement of his candidature or, in the event of his having been granted leave of absence for the maximum period of one year, within five years from the commencement of his candidature.

LINGUISTICS SECTION (ENGLISH DEPARTMENT) Lecturer in charge: Mr R. J. Zatorski, M.A. INTRODUCTION Linguistics is a discipline devoted to the study of the most important and distinctive of human capacities—that of using language in thought, expression and communication.

175 Faculty of Arts

All humans acquire a remarkable level of competence in a language during infant life; what linguists are interested in is how those levels of skill are actually attained, what are the characteristic elements, units and structures of speech, what are the processes involved in constructing grammatical sentences, how are sentences related to the meaning they convey, how are languages related to one another, and so on. Learning linguistics at the university level essentially involves the study and the practical implementation of methods by which answers to these and to innumerable other valid questions about language can be obtained. Since 1957, when Noam Chomsky published his revolutionary theory of language, linguistics has been the pioneering force among the social disciplines, sparking off vigorous developments in some old-established areas such as psychology of language, semantic theory in philosophy, etc., and leading to the emergence of completely new areas such as programming language grammars, information retrieval and processing, and modelling of human intelligence. Students wishing to proceed to a major in Linguistics will be admitted to Linguistics 2 on gaining passes in any two 1st year Arts subjects. However, a pass in at least one of the following subjects is strongly recommended as providing a suitable academic background: English A foreign language Philosophy I Psychology I Students will complete the requirements for a major in Linguistics by passing, in addition, Linguistics 2 and Linguistics 3. Subjects offered: Second year Ordinary degree 106-205 Linguistics 2 (Pass) Honours degree 106-265 Linguistics 2 (Ions) Third year Ordinary degree 106-305 Linguistics 3 (Pass) Honours degree 106-365 Linguistics 3 (Ions) Fourth year Honours degree 106-465 Linguistics 4 (Ions) ORDINARY DEGREE (Details for the honours degree are set out at the end of this section.)

106-205 LINGUISTICS 2 (PASS) Mr R. J. Zatorski, M.A., Mr G. M. Millar, B.A. INTRODUCTION Linguistics is a rigorous study of the structure and function of natural languages, distinguishing three major subject areas of investigation: the study of human speech sounds—phonology; the study of word- arrangement in phrases and sentences—syntax; and the study of meaning—semantics. Theories of language constitute formal integrated models which specify the role of phonology, syntax and semantics

176 English

respectively in the processes of sentence-generation by speakers and meaning-derivation by hearers. Linguistics 2 provides an intensive coverage of each of these areas, concentrating on contemporary theories and supplementing them with practical work in related topics.

SYLLABUS Term 1 Transformational Grammar. Term 2 Transformational Grammar. Introduction to Psycholinguistics. Term 3 Phonetics and Phonology.

COURSE DETAILS A course of two lectures and one two-hour practical session per week throughout the year. Course work will include periodic assignments, group work and a project in linguistic description.

В OO КS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading and reference: Fromkin V & Rodman R An Introduction to Language, Holt Rinehart & Winston 1974 Lyons J Chomsky, Fontana 1970 (b) Prescribed textbooks: Each E Syntactic Theory, Holt Rinehart & Winston 1974 Ladefoged P A Course in Phonetics, Harcourt Brace Jovanovich 1975 Akmajian A & Heny F An Introduction to the Principles of Transforma- tional Syntax, MIT Press 1975 Stockwell R Foundations of Syntactic Theory, Prentice-Hall 1977 Clark H H & Clark E V Psychology and Language, Harcourt Brace Jovanovich 1977

ASSESSMENT Students' performance will be assessed as follows: (a) By homework. Tutorial exercises, problem sheets and project work will be set at regular intervals and work returned at prescribed times will be allotted point scores contributing to the fina' assessment. (b) By a class test. There will be one class test in term 2 which will evaluate the students' familiarity with the course material; and (c) By a final examination consisting of one 3-hour paper on the entire content of the course. Students with a consistent and satisfactory record of homework and term test will be eligible for exemption from the final examination. Details of point scores, etc., will be displayed early in the course.

106-305 LINGUISTICS 3 (PASS) Mr R. J. Zatorski, М.А., Мг G. M. Millar, B.А. Enrolment in this subject is restricted to students who have gained a pass in Linguistics 2. Senior honours and post-graduate students may be admitted into individual units by special arrangement.

177 Faculty of Arts

COURSE DETAILS The subject is made up of a combination of units listed below: 106-322 CURRENT ISSUES IN GENERATIVE GRAMMAR (a compact unit, first half of the year); 106-321 LANGUAGE IN SOCIETY (a compact unit, second half of the year); and 106-323 LINGUISTIC ANALYSIS (an extended unit, full year's work) The Pass course consists of any two of the above three units; the honours course consists of all three units. Students must enrol for the subject 106-305 end for both the units they have selected, viz: 106-321 and 106-322, or 106-321 and 106-323, or 106-322 and 106-323. Units 106-321 and 106-322 will consist of 26 hours of lectures and 26, hours of seminars and/or practical classes. Unit 106-323 will consist of 52 hours of fieldwork and practical classes. No student may enrol for single units or claim credit towards a B.A. degree for passing single units. ASSESSMENT Assessment will be based on tests and prescribed written work and/or an examination of not more than two 3-hour papers at the end of the year. Details of point scores, etc., will be displayed early in the course. SYLLABUS 106-322 CURRENT ISSUES IN GENERATIVE GRAMMAR The course will deal with two major topics. The first will involve the study and evaluation of some of the current models of grammar: Chom- sky's (1965) "extended standard theory", the "generative semantics" model, case grammar and relational grammar. The second half of the unit will deal with the alternative accounts of individual syntactic/semantic problems in the various models. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: Reibel D A & Schans S A Modern Studies in English, Prentice-Hall Inc. 1969 Steinberg D D & Jacobovits L A Semantics, CUP 1971 Chomsky N Aspects of the Theory of Syntax, MIT Press Cambridge 1965 Fillmore C & Langendoen D Studies in Linguistic Semantics, loft Rine- hart & Winston New York 1971 Chomsky N Studies on Semantics in Generative Grammar, Mouton The Hague 1972 Bach E & Harms R Universals in Linguistic Theory, Holt Rinehart & Winston New York 1968 Jackendoff R Semantic Interpretation in Generative Grammar, MIT Press 1972. Seuren P ed Semantic Syntax, OUP 1974 Parisi D & Antinucci F Essentials of Grammar, Academic Press 1977 Lyons J Semantics 2, CUP 1977 106-321 LANGUAGE IN SOCIETY The interaction of language with social factors is examined with respect to the parameters of space, time, and situation. Language variation will 178 Linguistics

be considered against the background of differing social groups In a speech community. This will lead to the examination of the problem of variation in the internalized grammars of individual speakers in so far as it depends on social factors. BOOKS (a) For preliminary reading and reference: Burling R Man's Many Voices, Holt Rinehart & Winston New York 1970 Trudgill P Sociolinguistics, Pelican 1974 Haugen E & Bloomfield M (eds) Language as a Human Problem, Norton 1974 Wolfram W & Fasold R The Study of Social Dialects in American Eng- lish, Prentice-Hall 1974 Hyman L M Phonology: Theory and Analysis, Holt Rinehart & Winston 1975 (b) Prescribed textbooks: Giglioli P P (ed) Language and Social Context, Penguin 1973 Labov W Sociolinguistic Patterns, University of Pennsylvania Press Philadelphia 1972 Pride J B & Holmes J eds Sociolinguistics, Penguin 1972 Platt J & Platt H The Social Significance of Speech, North Holland 1975 106-323 LINGUISTIC ANALYSIS This course will consist of weekly sessions with native speakers of unusual languages who will supply data for analysis. Students will receive instruction In fieldwork methods and engage in projects aiming at phonetic, lexical, syntactic and semantic description of selected aspects of the Informants' language.

BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: Samагin W J Field Linguistics, Holt Rinehart & Winston 1967 Ladefoged P A Course in Phonetics, Harcourt Brace Jovanovich 1975 Langacker R W Fundamentals of Linguistic Analysis, Harcourt Braci Jovanovich 1972

HONOURS DEGREE Linguistics may at present be taken only in combined honours schools. Students wishing to proceed to a combined honours course should seek approval from the relevant chairmen of departments and from faculty through the Sub-Dean. Approval to take Linguistics 2 (Hofs) will normally be given to students who have obtained first or second class honours in at least one first-year subject.

106-265 LINGUISTICS 2 (HONS) The same course-content as the corresponding pass-level subject, with an additional weekly 1-hour tutorial. Honours candidates will be expected to show a broader and more detailed knowledge than pass candidates in all aspects of the course.

ASSESSMENT As for Linguistics 2 (pass). Additional assignments will constitute part of the assessment in this subject.

179 Faculty of Arts

106-365 LINGUISTICS 3 (HONs) A course consisting of all three units 106-321, 106-322 and 106-323. ASSESSMENT As for units 106-321, 106-322 and 106-323.

106-465 LINGUISTICS 4 (HONS) One seminar per week throughout the year together with written work in the form of (a) seminar papers and/or essays, and (b) a minor thesis. SYLLABUS The seminar series will centre on problems of formal grammatical description in syntax/semantics of natural languages with reference to current research publications and will include seminars on topics underlying the minor theses of individual students. MINOR THESIS In view of the strongly interdisciplinary nature of Linguistics, students will be encouraged to select thesis topics in areas combining both subjects of their honours course. However, an alternative of two shorter theses will also be available. The following requirements must be fulfilled: (a) The thesis must be handed in no later than the first day of September in the student's fourth year; (b) In the case of a combined topic, each student must submit a thesis of not more than 10,000 words; (c) Where a student is writing a major thesis in another department, a Linguistics thesis of not more than 5,000 words will be required; (d) Written approval of the chairman of both departments involved must be obtained for a combined topic; (e) Approval of the chairman of Linguistics must be obtained for the topic of the shorter thesis. ASSESSMENT Not more than two 3-hour papers. Written work set during the year will constitute part of the final examination.

DEPARTMENT OF FINE ARTS Chairman of Department: Ms M. M. PLANT, M.A. The Herald Professor of Fine Arts: J. T. BURKE, C.B.E., M.A. (Lend. Yale and leib.), Hon. D. Litt. (Monash) The Fine Arts department provides courses in the history and theory of the visual arts. No courses in practical art are offered. At present the department's programme concentrates on the development of Western Art. Courses range from Greek to Contemporary Art.

ORDINARY DEGREE (Details for the honours degree are set out at the end of this section.) 1. The department offers: Grade One: Fine Arts 1A. (Introduction to Western Art and Archi- tecture.) 180 Fine Arts

Grade Two: Fine Arts 2E. (Medieval and Renaissance Art History.) Grade Three: (a) Fine Arts 3F. (Early Christian and Medieval Art History.) (b) Fine Arts 3k. (European Art History; 19th and 20th Centuries.) 2. A major in Fine Arts consists of Fine Arts 1A, Fine Arts 2E, and in third year Fine Arts 3F or 3k. 3. Normally Fine Arts 1A is a prerequisite for Fine Arts 2E, and Fine Arts 1A and 2E are prerequisites for either of the Grade Three subjects Fine Arts 3F or 3K. Students who wish for good reasons to be dispensed from a prerequisite must apply to the department. 4. No external tuition is available in these subjects.

111-101 FINE ARTS 1A A course of two lectures per week, with one 1 .hour tutorial class nr an occasional 2-hour seminar, throughout the year. No external enrolments are accepted in the subject. SYLLABUS The course provides an introduction to the history of Western Art and Architecture from classical antiquity to the present day. It will focus on three aspects: 1. A study of selected monuments from the 5th Century B.C. to the 19th century. 2. A study of the modern movement. 3. A study of Australian art. The aims of the course are: a. to develop an acute visual awareness of works of art b. to provide an opportunity for students to build up a basic vocabulary for personal criticism and expression c, to introduce students to the study of art in its context. As the course places considerable emphasis on obtaining a good range of visual knowledge it is essential that illustrative material is studied throughout the year. The collections of the National Gallery of Victoria play a significant role in gaining such knowledge. Students should therefore acquaint themselves thoroughly with the collections before and during the course. 8O0kS Essential preliminary reading: Gombrich E H The Story of Art, Phaidon paperback 1968 and Richter G M A A Handbook of Greek Art, 7th ed Phaidon paperback 1974 . Clark IC The Nude, any ed Prescribed textbooks: Boardman J The Art and Architecture of Ancient Greece, Thames & Hudson paperback 1967 (an alternative to Richter Handbook of Greek Art) Bowness A Modern European Art, Thames & Hudson paperback 1972 Chipp H B ed Theories of Modern Art, University of California Press paperback 1968

181 Faculty of Arts

Clark K The Nude, any ed Hoff Ursula European Painting and Sculpture before 1800, National Gallery of Victoria 1973 Kozloff M Renderings, Studio Vista paperback 1970 Murray Peter and Linda A Dictionary of Art and Artists, Penguin 1964 Pevsner N An Outline of European Architecture, Pelican 1963 Richter G M A A Handbook of Greek Art, 7th ed Phaidon paperback 1974 (an alternative to Boardman, The Art and Architecture of Ancient Greece) Smith B ed Documents on Art and Taste in Australia: The Colonial Period, 1770-1914, OUP 1975 Smith B Australian Painting, 2nd ed OUP 1971 WRITTEN WORK AND ASSESSMENT Class work, written work and visual tests during the year will constitute the assessment. The percentage allotted to class and written work and dates of submission of work will be available at the beginning of the Academic Year.

111-201 FINE ARTS 2E (PASS) (MEDIEVAL AND RENAISSANCE ART НISтоRY) A course of two lectures per week, with one tutorial class, throughout the year. No external enrolments are accepted in this subject. Students who wish for good reasons to take this subject without having previously taken Fine Arts 1A must obtain permission of the lecturers in charge of the subject and must undertake a course of preliminary reading prescribed by the department.

SYLLABUS A study of late Medieval and Renaissance Art, with special emphasis on Italy. Tutorial work will include the study of documentary sources and Renaissance art theory as well as stylistic and iconographic problems. Some tutorials will be conducted in the National Gallery of Victoria.

BOOKS Detailed reading guides will be issued throughout the year. (a) Prescribed preliminary reading: Lamer J Culture and Society In Italy 1290-1420, Batsford 1971 Huizinga J The Waning of the Middle Ages, Pelican 1965 'Panofsky E Renaissance and Renescences in Western Art, Paladin paperback 1970 Burke P Culture and Society in Italy 1420-1540, Batsford 1972 Wõlfflin H Classic Art, Phaidon paperback 1968 (b) Prescribed Primary Sources: Alberti L B On Painting, ed J. R. Spencer 2nd ed Yale UP paperback 1966 or Alberti L B On Painting and on Sculpture, c. Grayson Phaidon 1972 'Holt E G A Documentary History of Art, Vols I and II, Doubleday- Anchor paperback 1958

182 Fine Arts

'Klein R & Zerner H Italian Art 1500-1600, Sources and Documents In the History of Art, Prentice-Hall paperback 1966 Leonardo Treatise on Painting, tr A. P. McMahon, Princeton 1957 Complete Poems and Selected Letters of Michelangelo, tr with foreword and notes by C Gilbert, Modern Library New York 1965 Vasari G Lives of the Most Eminent Painters, Sculptors and Architects, Everyman Library 1962 WRITTEN WORK, ASSESSMENT AND EXAMINATION Students are required to submit one essay (of approximately 3,000 words) and two class papers during the year. There will also be two visual tests. Class work, written work and tests done during the year will constitute the examination for this subject. Details of the percentage allotted to each piece of work will be available from the Fine Arts department at the beginning of the Academic Year.

111-301 FINE ARTS 3F (PASS) (EARLY CHRISTIAN AND MEDIEVAL ART HISTORY) A course of seminars each week throughout the year, together with a series of audio-visual programmes and occasional lectures. SYLLABUS A study of aspects of Early Christian and Medieval Art. The course will cover the following areas: (i) Selected monuments from the 3rd to the 6th centuries. (ii) The development of Byzantine Art. (iii) Selected monuments of Medieval Art with special reference to the relationship between east and west. BOOKS Suggested for preliminary reading: Brown P The World of Late Antiquity, Thames & Hudson paperback London 1971 Van der Meer F (ed) Atlas of the Early Christian World, London 1958 Grabar A The Beginnings of Christian Art, London 1967 Prescribed textbooks: Grabar A Christian Iconography, A Study of Its Origin, New York University 1968 Beckwith J Early Christian and Byzantine Art, Pelican Harmondsworth 1971 Beckwith J The Art of Constantinople, Phaidon 1968 Demus 0 Byzantine Art and the West, London 1970 Focillon H The Art of the West, Parts I & Il Phaidon 1969 Mâlе E The Gothic Image, Collins London 1961 Robb D The Art of the Illuminated Manuscript, A S Barnes 1973 Detailed bibliographies will be issued at the beginning of the year. WRITTEN WORK, ASSESSMENT AND EXAMINATION Written work will consist of no more than two essays of 3,500 words and two class papers of 2,000 words. These will constitute part of the examination. There will also be two visual tests as part of the examina-

183 Faculty of Arts

till. Final details of assessment and examination will be decided after consultation with the students at the beginning of the year.

111-302 FINE ARTS 3K (PASS) (EUROPEAN ART HISTORY NINETEENTH AND EARLY TWENTIETH CENTURIES) A course of two lectures per week, with one tutorial class, throughout the year. This subject is not available for external tuition. Fine Arts 3K will be given every year. SYLLABUS A study of the origins of the Modern Movement from Romanticism to Surrealism. BOOKS (a) Prescribed preliminary reading: Huyghe R Modern Art, London 1965 Novotny Fritz Painting and Sculpture in Europe 1780 to 1880, Pelican History of Art 1960 Hamilton G H Painting and Sculpture in Europe 1880 to 1940, Pelican History of Art 1967 Arnason H H History of Modern Art, Prentice-Hall 1969 Hitchcock H R Architecture, Nineteenth and Twentieth Centuries, Pelt- can History of Art 1958 (b) Prescribed textbooks: Eitner L Neoclassicism and Romanticism 1750 to 1850, VoI ii. In Sources and Documents in the History of Art Series, Prentice-Hall 1970 Holt E G From the Classicists to the Impressionists, Doubleday 1966 Baudelaire: Selected Writings on Art and Artists, Penguin classics 1972 Nochlin Linda Realism and Tradition in Art, 1848 to 1900. In Sources and Documents in the History of Art Series, Prentice-Hall 1966 Nochlin Linda Impressionism and Post-Impressionism, 1874 to 1904. In Sources and Documents in the History of Art Series, Prentice- Hall 1967 Venturi L Les Archives de L'Impressionisme, 2 vols Paris 1939 Chipp H B Theories of Modern Art, University of California Press 1968 WRITTEN WORK AND ASSESSMENT Students are required to submit an essay of 4,000-5,000 words and complete two or three exercises during the year. In addition a special visual exercise may be given. Class work, written work and visual tests during the year will constitute the assessment. The percentage allotted to class and written work and dates of submission of work will be available at the beginning of the Academic Year. A paper will be issued in the 'last week of third term to be completed within a specified period. HONOURS DEGREE N. SCHOOL OF FINE ARTS (For possible combinations with this school see pp. 519 ff.) 1. The course for the degree with honours in the School of Fine Arts 184 Fine Arts

comprises a first preliminary year and three years in the honours school as set out below. Students should plan their courses In consultation with a member of the academic staff of the department of Fine Arts, and should make appointments for this purpose at the departmental office as well as with the sub-dean. 2. First (preliminary) year (a) The normal requirements for admission in the second year to the honours school of Fine Arts are: (i) A suitable standard (usually the equivalent of first or second class honours) in Fine Arts 1A; (11) Passes in three other first-year subjects. (b) The latter subjects must be chosen to comply with the requirements of the ordinary degree, but it is strongly recommended that students intending to pursue honours In Fine Arts Include in their first year studies: (i) A subject in Нistory, English or Classics; (ii) Part I of a language other than English. (Note: reading ability in the relevant Modern European languages and, in specific cases, of Latin and Greek is important for advanced study in Art History); (11i) A subject which can form the first part of a major (or at least a two-subject sequence) supporting or complementing an honours course in Art History;

Second year (1) Fine Arts 2E Honours (Medieval and Renaissance) and one of: History 2R Honours (Late Medieval European History) • or a Grade 2 Honours subject in a related discipline approved by the department. (ii) A Grade 2 subject in a discipline other than Fine Arts forming a two-subject sequence with a subject taken in the first year. In certain cases students who have not undertaken a language study in first year may be given permission to take Part 1 of a language instead of a Grade 2 subject.

Third year (i) Fino Arts 3K Honours (European Art, 19th and 20th centuries) and: Fine Arts 3F Honours (Early Christian and Medieval). (ii) In addition students may take an additional pass subject or approved course of study. Students may take this opportunity to complete a pass major or undertake a course which will increase proficiency In reading foreign languages. (iii) Students should select the topic for their thesis at the end of third term, in consultation with a member of the academic staff of the department of Fine Arts. It is expected that students will have progressed sufficiently by the end of third year to be able to do substantial work on the thesis during the long vacation. Fourth year: Final Honours (a) The final year in the school of Art History consists of:

• By arrangement with the department of History the prerequisite for this subject for a student In the Fine Arts Honours school will be a suitable standard In a first Year History and Fine Arts 1A. 185 Faculty of Arts

(i) Fine Arts 4R Honours (Theory and Method of Art History); (ii) Fine Arts 4S Honours (Special Studies in Art History); (iii) Completion of the final honours thesis of 8,000-10,000 words due to be submitted on the last day of second term. Final Examination Examinations in third and final years will be regarded as comprising fina' examinations in the school of Art History, and will normally consist of: (1) The papers in each of the honours Fine Arts subjects taken in third year. (These papers will be written in the third year); (ii) Assessment of the final honours thesis, and (iii) In the final year the examinations in 4R and 4S; (iv) Written work done during the year will constitute part of both examinations. Fine Arts in Combined Honours Courses Normally Fine Arts in combined honours courses consists of half the Fine Arts subjects required or recommended in the pure honours school: i.e. Fine Arts 1A in the first year; Fine Arts 2E Honours (Medieval and Renaissance) in the second year; either Fine Arts 3F Honours (Early Christian and Medieval) or Fine Arts 3k Honours (European Art, 19th and 20th centuries) in the third year; and Fine Arts 4R Honours (Theory and Method of Art History and Criticism) or Fine Arts 4S Honours (Special Studies in Art History) in the fourth year. For some of the possible combined honours courses with Fine Arts see pp. 519 N.

111-261 FINE ARTS 2E HONOURS (MEDIEVAL AND RENAISSANCE ART HISTORY) A course of 2-hour seminars each week throughout the year. Students will also attend the two lectures each week in Fine Arts 2E.

SYLLABUS A study of Iate Medieval and Renaissance art with special emphasis on Italy. В OOКS (a) Prescribed preliminary reading: Lamer J Culture and Society in Italy, 1290-1420, Batsford 1971 Burke P Culture end Society In Italy, 1420-1540, Batsford 1972 Huizinga J The Waning of the Middle Ages, Pelican 1965 ' Panofsky E Renaissance and Renascences in Western Art, Paladin paperback 1970 Wblfflin H Classic Art, Phaidon paperback 1968 (b) Prescribed Primary Sources: ' Alberti L B On Painting, ed J R Spencer 2nd ed Yale UP paperback 1966 or Alberti L B On Painting and on Sculpture, ed C Grayson Phaidon 1972 'Holt E G A Documentary History of Art, vols. I and II, Doubleday- Anchor paperback 1958

186 Fine Arts

•Klein R & Zerner H Italian Art 1500-1600, In Sources and Documents In the History of Art, Prentice-Hall paperback 1966 Leonardo Treatise on Painting, tr A P McMahon, Princeton 1957 Complete Poems end Selected Letters of Michelangelo, tr with foreword and notes by C Gilbert, Modern Library New York 1965 Vasari G Lives of the Most Eminent Painters, Sculptors and Architects, Everyman Library 1962 WRITTEN WORK, ASSESSMENT AND EXAMINATION Students are required to submit one essay (of approximately 4,000 words) and two class papers during the year. There will also be two visual tests. Class work, written work and tests done during the year will constitute part of the examination for this subject. There will also be a final seen examination paper to be completed within a specified time. Details of the percentage allotted to each section of written work, tests, etc., will be available from the Fine Arts department at the beginning of the Academic Year.

111-361 FINE ARTS 3F HONOURS (EARLY CHRISTIAN AND MEDIEVAL ART HISTORY) A course of seminars each week throughout the year together with a series of audio-visual programmes and occasional lectures, as for 3F Pass. In addition, honours students will have a 1- to 2-hour weekly class for part of the year on selected documents and primary sources. Some of this work will be in conjunction with the Classics department. SYLLABUS The course will cover the following areas: (i) Selected monuments from the 3rd to 6th centuries. (ii) The development of Byzantine Art. (iii) Selected monuments of medieval art with special reference to the relationship between east and west. (iv) Selected documents and primary sources relevant to the period. BOOKS As for Fine Arts 3F Pass. A list of prescribed texts for Section IV will be available from the department at beginning of the year. WRITTEN WORK, ASSESSMENT AND EXAMINATION Written work will consist of no more than two essays of 4,000-5,000 words and two class papers of 3,000 words. These will constitute part of the examination. There will also be two visual tests, and a written paper or examination on documents and sources. Final details of assessment and examination will be decided after consultation with the students at the beginning of the year.

111-362 FINE ARTS 3K HONOURS (EUROPEAN ART HISTORY NINETEENTH AND EARLY TWENTIETH CENTURIES) A fortnightly seminar of two hours throughout the year and occasional additional seminars. Students will also attend the two lectures and one tutorial each week in Fine Arts 3K.

187 Faculty of Arts

SYLLABUS A study of the origins of the Modern Movement from Romanticism to Surrealism. BOOKS (a) Prescribed preliminary reading: Novotny Fritz Painting and Sculpture in Europe 1780 to 1880, Pelican History of Art 1960 Hamilton G H Painting and Sculpture in Europe 1880 to 1940, Pelican History of Art 1967 Arnason H H History of Modern Art, Prentice-Hall 1969 Hitchcock H R Architecture, Nineteenth and Twentieth Centuries, Peli- can History of Art 1958 (b) Prescribed textbooks: Eitner L Neoclassicism and Romanticism 1750 to 1850, Vol. 1i. In Sources and Documents in the History of Art Series, Prentice-Hall 1970 Holt E G From the Classicists to the Impressionists, Doubleday 1966 Baudelaire C P Art in Paris, 1845 to 1862, tr ed Mayne J, Phaidon 1965 Baudelaire C P The Painter of Modern Life and Other Essays, ty ed Mayne J, Phaidon 1965 or Baudelaire Selected Writings on Art and Artists, Penguin Classics 1972 Hewison R John Ruskin: The Argument of the Eye, Thames & Hudson 1976 Nochlin Linda Realism and Tradition in Art 1848 to 1900. In Sources and Documents in the History of Art Series, Prentice-Hall 1966 Nochlin Linda Impressionism and Post-Impressionism, 1874 to 1904. In Sоurces and Documents in the History of Art Series, Prentice-Hall 1967 Venturi L Les Archives de L'impressionisme, 2 vols Paris 1939 Chipp H B Theories of Modern Art, University of California Press 1968 WRITTEN WORK AND ASSESSMENT One 4,000-5,000 word essay and at least one class paper per term. In addition a special visual exercise may be given. Class work, written work and visual tests during the year will constitute the assessment. The percentage allotted to class and written work and dates of submission of work will be available at the beginning of the Academic Year. A paper will be issued in the last week of third term to be completed within a specified period.

111-461 FINE ARTS 4R HONOURS (THEORY AND METHOD OF ART HISTORY AND ART CRITICISM) SYLLABUS A weekly seminar of two hours per week in the fourth year in the theory and method of Art History and Art Criticism. BOOKS Bid iographical guidance will be given by the lecturer in charge 188 Fine Arts

WRITTEN WORK AND ASSESSMENT One 6,000 word essay and at least one class paper per term. Class work, written work, and any visual tests done during the year will constitute part of the examination. An examination paper may be issued in the last week of term III to be completed within a specified period. The percentage allotted to class and written work and the details and dates of submission of work will be available from the Fine Arts department at the beginning of the Academic Year.

111-462 FINE ARTS 4S HONOURS (SPECIAL STUDY IN ART HISTORY) SYLLABUS Students will be asked to choose towards the end of their third year two subjects announced for Special Study in the following year. These will normally be drawn from the principal fields taught in the department, i.e. Classical Art, Medieval Art, Renaissance Art, 18th and 19th Century French Art, Aspects of Contemporary Art, European, American and Aus- tralian, Film Studies. The courses will involve advanced study of a specialized nature and for each subject weekly 2-hour seminars on a half-yearly basis will be conducted by members of staff specializing in the particular field. In some cases reading ability in specified foreign languages may be a condition of admission. WRITTEN WORK, ASSESSMENT AND EXAMINATION Precise details of written work, assessment and examination will be determined after consultation with the students at the beginning of the year. Students will be required to submit class papers, and no more than one a term and no more than two essays of 5,000 words each. A visual test in each course may also be given. These papers and tests will constitute part of the final examination. The percentage allotted to class and written work and the details and nature of examination papers (which will not exceed two 3-hour papers, should students elect to replace part of the written work by the latter) will be decided in consultation with the students at the beginning of the year.

MASTER OF ARTS 111-601 N. SCHOOL OF FINE ARTS Admission to candidature for the degree of Master of Arts requires either BA degree with honours, or BA ordinary degree and subsequent completion of MA preliminary work as prescribed by the faculty of Arts. MA preliminary work in Fine Arts consists of at least two years of part-time work in honours subjects, including the completion of a thesis. The examination for the degree of Master of Arts is by thesis. Can- didates are required to prepare a thesis on an approved subject (which should not exceed 50,000 words in length, excluding footnotes, bibliography and catalogue raisonné). They will work under the supervision of a member of the Fine Arts department, to whom they must report regularly on the progress of their work. They may also be required to attend seminars or lectures bearing on their subject.

189 Faculty of Arts

An entry form for examination for higher degrees must be submitted to the Registrar. Three copies of each thesis (A4, typewritten, double-spaced) should be submitted, one of which will be deposited in the University Library. The attention of candidates is drawn to the recommendations of the Pro- fessorial Board on the format of theses (regulation 4.6, in the University Calendar). The thesis should normally be submitted for examination within two years from the commencement of candidature for MA by full-time candidates and within four years by part-time candidates. Except in special circumstances and with the permission of the faculty no thesis or course work will be examined unless the candidate presents for examination within four years from the commencement of his candidature or, in the event of his having been granted leave of absence for the maximum period of one year, within five years from the commencement of his candidature.

DEPARTMENT OF FRENCH Chairman of Department: Dr A. K. HOLLAND, B.A. (Syd.), Dip. d'Etudes (Bordeaux), D.U. (Paris) Professor of French Language and Literature: Professor C. DUCKWORTH, M.A. (Birm.), D.Phil. (Cantab.) 1. SUBJECTS OFFERED Set out below are the subjects offered in the department of French, with an indication of the class hours available for each subject (day hours are grouped between 9 a.m. and 4.15 p.m., evening hours are those from 5.15 p.m. on): Subject Times of lectures, etc. First year 116-101 French part 1 Day or Evening 116-102 French part 1A Day or Evening Second year Ordinary degree 116-201 French part 2 (pass) Day or Evening 116-202 Medieval French Language and Literature (pass) • Day 116-203 French part 2A Day Honours degree 116-281 French part 2 (hofs) Day (with some alternative evening hours available where clashes with subjects in other departments may occur) 116-262 Medieval French Language and Day Literature (hens) Third year Ordinary degree This subject may only be studied concurrently with. or after the completion of. either French part 2 (pass) or French Dart 3 (pass). 190 French 116-301 French part 3 (pass) Evening, except for one lecture and one tutorial available day or evening 116-302 Medieval French Language and Literature (pass) • Day 116-303 Renaissance French Language and Literature (pass) (in 1978 and thereafter in alternate years)•• Day 116-304 Comparative Studies in lid French Language and Literature (pass) (in 1979 and thereafter in alternate Day years)•• Honours degree 116-361 French part 3 (hofs) Day and Evening 116-363 Renaissance French Language and Literature (hofs) (in 1978 and thereafter in alternate years) Day 116-364 Comparative Studies in Old French Language and Literature (huns) (in 1979 and thereafter in alternate years) Day Fourth year 116-461 French part 4 Day 116-463 Renaissance French Language and Literature (in 1978 and thereafter in alternate years) Day 116-464 Comparative Studies in lid French Language and Literature (in 1979 and thereafter in alternate years) Day

2. MAJORS and POSSIBLE VARIATIONS A major in French consists of<

(a) (i) French part 1 (ii) French part 2 (pass) (iii) French part 3 (pass) or

(b) (i) French part 1A (ii) French part 24 (iii) French part 3 However, students doing a major in French as under (a) above may extend their study of French, within the framework of the 9-subject degree course, by taking an additional French subject in second year and/or an additional French subject in third year—see pp. 204, 206, 209.

3. PREREQUISITES For admission to French part 1 students should normally have passed in French at the Higher School Certificate examination or an equivalent examination. Admission to grade 2 and 3 subjects requires a pass in French in the preceding grade.

'See footnote to p. 190. • •This subject may only be studied concurrently with, or after the completion of, French part 3 (pass).

191 Faculty of Arts

Admission to French part 1A will be limited to students who have little or no knowledge of French. Admission to parts 2A and 3 will require a pass in the preceding grade and will be subject to the approval of the chairman.

4. WRITTEN WORK Students who without thе formal permission of the lecturer-in- charge fail to submit the required exercises, essays and seminar papers by the due dates may be reported to faculty for unsatisfactory progress and/or may not be given credit for the course.

5. ATTENDANCE AT LECTURES AND TUTORIALS Regular attendance at the lectures and tutorials which comprise the course is required.

6. BOOKS OF REFERENCE The following books are recommended for reference throughout the course: Dictionaries Mansion J E ed Harrap's Standard French and English Dictionary, 2 vols, Harrap Mansion J E ed Harrap's New Standard French and English Dictionary, part 1, 2 vols, Наггар Mansion J E ed Harrap's Shorter French and English Dictionary, Наггар Robert P Dictionnaire alphabétique et analogique de la langue française, 6 vols, Paris PUF Littré E Dictionnaire de la langue française, Paris Hachette Grand Larousse encyclopédique, Paris Hachette Dictionnaire usuel, Paris Quillet-Flammarion Dubois J et al Dictionnaire du français contemporain, Paris Larousse

Grammars Ferrar H A French Reference Grammar, 2nd ed OUP 1970 Mansion J E A Grammar of Present-Day French, Наггар Heath's New Practical French Grammar, Наггар Grevisse M Le Bon Usage, Paris Ratier Chevalier J-CI ed et al Grammaire Larousse du français contemporain, Paris Larousse Hanse Joseph Dictionnaire des difficultés grammaticales et lexicolo- gigues, Brussels Baude Le Bidois B et R Sупtaхе du français moderne, 2 vols Paris Picard Martinon P Comment on parle en français, Paris Larousse

Phonetics Dutton K Spoken French, Sydney Ian Novak

All students should possess Harrap's •Shorter French and English Dic- tionary (one-volume edition, completely revised and enlarged, 1967) and Ferrer's •A French Reference Grammar. Honours students will need to have Maurice Grevisse's •Le Bon Usage.

ORDINARY DEGREE (Details for the honours courses are set out at the end of this section.)

192 French

116-101 FRENCH PART 1

Co-ordinator: Mrs M. Denat A course of four lectures, one tutorial class, and one language laboratory session per week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS (i) Aspects of twentieth century French literature: an introduction to existentialism and surréalisme. (ii) Translation from and into French; composition in French; grammar and syntax. (iii) Conversation and dictation. (iv) Practical oral-aural work in the language laboratory. Section (i) of this course is designed to introduce students to modern French fiction, drama and poetry by the close literary-linguistic analysis of a small number of major works and In so doing to develop students' knowledge of French and their capacity for responsive reading. In sections (ii) - (iv) the accent is placed on the consolidation of written and oral language skills through a co-ordinated programme of lectures, tutorials and language-laboratory classes.

OPTIONAL ADDITIONAL WORK (see p. 27) Lectures and/or seminars on (a) aspects of the French language and (b) aspects of the literature syllabus.

WRITTEN WORK Students are required to submit a weekly language exercise (translation or free composition) and two essays or explications In English on a literary topic.

BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading and reference: Brogan D W The French Nation, Hamish Hamilton Charlton D G France. A Companion to French Studies, Methuen Roe F C Modern France. An Introduction to French Civilization, Long- mans Cobban A A History of Modern France, Vols 1 and 2, Pelican Books (b) Prescribed textbooks: For the twentieth century course— Breton A Nadja, Coll 'Folio' Gallimard •Eluard P Capitale de la douleux, suivi de L'Amour la poésie, Coll 'Poésie' Gallimard •Prévert J Paroles, Coll 'Folio' Gallimard •Ionesco E Three Plays, Heinemann •Camus A La Peste, Coll 'Folio' Gallimard •Sагtгe J-P Huis clos, suivi de Les Mouches, Coll 'Folio' Gallimard Malraux A La Voie royale, Coll 'Livre de Poche' The sections prescribed for translation in these books will be indicated on the departmental notice-board.

193 в Faculty of Arts

For part (ii) of the syllabus: 'Clancy P A Writing in French: from phrases to free composition, Jacaranda Press ' Farrar H A French Reference Grammar, 2nd ed OUP 1970 For part (iii) of the syllabus: ' Thornton-Smith C B Graded French Vocabulary Topics, Melbourne OUP For part (iv) of the syllabus: 'Hagiwara M P & Politzer R L Continuons å parler: A Workbook, Wal- tham Mass Blaisdell Pub Co EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers (the first on unseen translation Into English and free composition; the second on part (i) of the syllabus); terminal tests In translation into French, dictation and phonetics; and in third term an oral test in reading and conversation. Written work will be included in the determining of examination results.

116-102 FRENCH PART 1 A

Co-ordinator: Mrs S. Gutierrez Four classes of written and oral work, one language laboratory session and one film session per week. (This course is designed for students who have little or no knowledge of French.) The number of students admitted to the subject will be limited, and permission to enrol will be subject to approval by the chairman of the department or his deputy. Successful completion of French 1A will be a prerequisite for French 2A. Students who have completed French 1A will be eligible for enrolment in French 2A subject to the chairman's approval. SYLLABUS The course will consist of an introduction to the basic spoken and written skills of present-day French. The aim is progressively to build up the students' knowledge of basic grammatical structures, as well as their fluency, comprehension and written expression. Apart from the essential language study, some literary material is included—readings from a variety of French authors. There is also an introduction to French civilization, which will be supplemented by slides and films. BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading and reference: Ardagh J The New France, Pelican Books Thornton-Smith C B Graded French Vocabulary Topics, Melbourne OUP Mansion J E Harrap's Shorter French and English Dictionary, Harrap (b) Prescribed textbooks: 'De Petra-Dedini La Clef, Introduction au français élémentaire, Holt Rinehart & Winston (a textbook and a work-book) Ferrer A French Reference Grammar, 2nd edition OUP 1970

194 French

WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit regular exercises in written French.

EXAMINATION Assessment will be by periodic written and oral-aural tests throughout the year, supplemented by a 3-hour paper at the end of the year.

116-201 FRENCH PART 2 (PASS)

Co-ordinator: Dr C. В. Thornton-Smith A course of lectures and tutorials as detailed below. Students are also advised to spend some time each week in individual study in the language laboratory.

SYLLABUS

Unit 1: Prose, unseen, composition, grammar (1 hour per week) Unit 2: Spoken French (1 hour per week) Unit 3: Seventeenth century theatre (2 hours per week in the first half of the year) Unit 4: Eighteenth century phUosophes (2 hours per week in the second half of the year) Unit 5: Civilization of the seventeenth and (1 hour per week for eighteenth centuries the equivalent of 1 term) Unit 6: One of the following: (a) Phonetics and spoken French (1 hour per week) (A course of integrated lectures, language laboratory sessions and seminars, designed to give instruction in the theory of French phonetics and to offer advanced practical training in fluent pronunciation. This unit will be of special interest to future teachers.) (b) Man, morals and society in seventeenth century literature (1 hour per week) (c) The novel before the Revolution (1 hour per week) (d) Religion and Literature in the Ancien Régime (1 hour per week) (e) An introduction to Old French with some study of Old French texts (1 hour per week)

N.B. The department reserves the right not to offer all of the units numbered 6(a), 6(b). 6(c) and 6(d) above. Students must submit their choice of units for approval by the chairman of the department not later than 10th February, 1978.

WRITTEN WORK Students are required to submit a weekly language exercise for unit 1 and an explication (in English or French) and an essay (in English or French) on unit 3.

195 Faculty of Arts

В OOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading and reference (numbers refer to relevant units): Charlton D G ed France. A Companion to French Studies, Methuen 1972 (3, 4, 5, 6(b), 6(c), 6(d)) Lough J An Introduction to Seventeenth-Century France, Longmans (3, 5, 6(b), 6(d)) Cruickshank J ed French Literature and its Background. 11; Seventeenth Century, OUP 1969 (3, 5, 6(b), 6(d)) Roger J XVlle Siècle français, Le Grand Siècle, Seghers (3, 5, 6(b)) Lough J An Introduction to Eighteenth-Century France, Longmans (4, 5, 6(c)) Cruickshank J ed French Literature and Its Background. Ill; Eighteenth Century, OUP 1970 (4, 5, 6(c)) Duby G et Mandrou R Histoire de la civilisation française, tome 2, Coll 'U', Armand Colin (5) Forestier L XVllle Siècle français, Le Siècle des Lumières, Paris Se- ghers (4, 6, 6(c)) Méthivier H L'Ancien Régime, Coll 'Que sais-je?' PUF (5) Méthivier H Le Siècle de Louis XIII, Coll 'Que sais-je?' PUF (5) Méthivier H Le Siècle de Louis XIV, Coll 'Que sais-je?' PUF (5) Méthivier H Le Siècle de Louis XV, Coll 'Que sais-je?' PUF (5) Adam A Les Libertins du XVIIe siècle, Buchet Chastel 1964 (6(d)) Morales du Grand Siècle, Gallimard Вénichou P (6(d)) Bussin H La Religion des classiques 1660-1685, PUF (6(d)) Cognet L Le Jansénisme, PUF (6(d)) Preclin E & Jarry E Les luttes politiques et doctrinales aux XVlle et XVIIIe siècles, Bloud et Gay (6((d)) Decahors E Histoire de la littérature française. Tome 1: Le Moyen Age, Paris Les Editions de l'Ecole (6(e)) (b) Prescribed textbooks: For unit 3— Corneille P Le Cid, Bordas •Corneille P Horace, Bordas •Molière Le Misanthrope, Bordas •Racine Phèdre, Bordas In addition, duplicated material will be provided. For unit 4— Montesquieu Lettres persanes, Coll 'Livre de poche' •Voltaire Candide, OUP •Rousseau La Nouvelle Hélo7se, Classiques Gamier •Diderot Le Rave de d'Alembert, Editions Sociales For unit 5- •Вénichou P Morales du Grand Siècle, Paris Gallimard Students will also be given duplicated notes extracted from primary sources and from modern studies on the period. For unit б (a)- Dutton K Spoken French, Jan Novak Callamand M L'Intonation expressive. Exercices systématiques de perfectionnement, Coll 'Le Français dans le Monde' BELC, Hachette- Larousse •Maimberg Bertil La Phonétique, Coll 'Que sais-je? PUF

196 French

For unit 6(b)-- "La Fontaine Fables, Classiques Gamier •La Вruуèге Les Caractères, Classiques Gamier "Saint-Simon Mdmoires, Bordas 'La Rochefoucauld Maximes, Classiques Gamier For unit 6(c)— •Madame de La Fayette La Princesse de Ctèves, ed Nurse H P Harrap •Prěvost Histoire du chevalier des Grieux et de Menon Lescaut, Coll 'Folio' Galiimard `Diderot Le Religieuse, Coll 'Folio' Gallimard •Laclos Les Liaisons dangereuses, Classiques Garnier For unit 6(d)— `Pascal Provinciales, Gamier-Flammarion 'Corneille Po(yeucte, Bordas •Molière Tartuffe, Bordas •Racine Athalie, Bordas •Voltaire Lettres philosophiques, Garnier For unit 6(e))— Fox J & Wood R A Concise History of the French Language, Biackwell •Parts G et Langlois E Chrestomathie du Moyen Age, Hachette EXAMINATION Three 3-hour papers (the first comprising an unseen and a composition in French on topics relating to unit 5; the second on unit 6; the third on unit 4); terminal tests in unseen translation Into French; and, in third term, a dictation test and an oral test, with a further short oral test for students taking unit 6(a). Work in unit 3 will be examined by the mid-year essay and explication (see WRITTEN WORK above) sup- plemnented by such oral and written tests as may be considered necessary. The weekly language exercises will also be taken into account in determining examination results.

116-202 MEDIEVAL FRENCH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE For details of this subject, which is available as a second year PASS course, see p. 204.

116-203 FRENCH PART 2A Co-ordinator: Mrs S. Gutierrez Three classes of written and oral work, together with one tutorial, one language laboratory session and one literature lecture per week. (This course 1s designed for students who have completed French 1A, and is not available to students with a pass in H.S.C. French or its equivalent; these should enrol for French Part 1. Students who successfully complete French Part 2A may proceed to enrol in French Part 3, subject to the approval of the chairman). SYLLABUS (i) Study of four texts of twentieth century French Literature. (ii) Translation from and into French; composition in French; grammar and syntax. . (iii) Conversation and dictation. (iv) Practical and oral-aural work in the language laboratory.

197 Faculty of Arts

Students will take their literature lecture, dictation class, one written language class, and language laboratory session in common with French Part 1. In addition they will have a tutorial and second written language class as a distinct group.

WRITTEN WORK Students are required to submit weekly language exercises, and two essays or explications in English on literary texts.

BOOKS (a) Re':ommended for preliminary reading and reference: Brogan D W The French Nation, Hamish Hamilton Charlton D G France, A Companion to French Studies, Methuen Roe F C Modern France. An introduction to French Civilization, Longmans Cobban A A History of Modern France, Vols. 1 and 2, Pelican Books (b) Prescribed textbooks: For the twentieth century course- •Préveгt .1 Paroles, Coil 'Folio' Gallimard •Breton A Nadja, Coll 'Folio' Gallimard •Ionesco E Three Plays, Heinemann •Sartre J-P Huis clos suivi de Les Mouches, Coli 'Folio' Gallimard The sections prescribed for translation in these books will be indicated on the departmental notice-board. For part (II) of the syllabus Ferrer H A French Reference Grammar, 2nd ed OUP 1970 •Clancy P A Writing in French: from phrases to free composition, Jacaranda Press For part (Ill) of the syllabus •Thornton-Smith C B Graded French Vocabulary Topics, Melbourne OUP For part (IV) of the syllabus •Hagiwara M-P & Politzer R-L Continuons à parler: A Workbook, Waltham Mass Blaisdell Pub Co For second written language class. •loran & Wheeler A New French Course, Part 5. Sydney Science Press

EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers (the first on unseen translation into English and free composition; the second on part (I) of the syllabus); terminal tests in written French, phonetics and dictation; and in third term an oral test in reading and conversation. Written work will also be included in the determining of examination results.

116-301 FRENCH PART 3 (PASS) Co-ordinator: Dr L. Las Gourgues A course of lectures and tutorials as detailed below. Students are also advised to spend some time each week in individual study in the language laboratory. SYLLABUS Unit 1: Prose, unseen, composition, grammar (1 hour per week) Unit 2: Spoken French (1 hour per week) 198 French

Unit 3: Nineteenth century fiction (1 hour per week) Unit 4: Twentieth century fiction and drama (1 hour per week) Unit 5: Civilization of the nineteenth and twentieth centuries (1 hour per week) Unit 6: One of the following: (a) French poetry from Hugo to Apollinaire (1 hour per week) (b) Some creative thinkers of twentieth century France (a course based on the study of a selection of books which have been of seminal importance in modern French thought) (1 hour per week) (c) Aspects of contemporary French (1 hour per week) N.B. The department reserves the right not to offer all of the units numbered 6(a), 6(b) and 6(c) above. Students must submit their choice of units for approval by the chairman of the department not later than 10th February, 1978. WRITTEN WORK Students are required to submit a weekly language exercise and, in addition, an explication in English or French and an essay in French on unit 4. BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading and reference (numbers refer to relevant units): Charlton D G ed France: A Companion to French Studies, Methuen 1972 (3, 4, 5, 6(a), 6(b)) Cruickshank J ed French Literature and its Background, vols 4 & 5, OUP 1969 (3, 5, 6(a)) Robichez J Panorama illustré du XIXe siècle français, Seghers (3, 5, 6(a)) Cobban A A History of Мodern France, vol 2, Penguin Books 1961 (5) Cruickshank J ed French Literature and its Background, vol 6, OUP 1970 (4, 5, 6(a), 6(b)) Brogan D W The French Nation, Hamish Hamilton (5) Thoraval J Les Grandes étapes de la civilisation française, Bordas (5) Ardagh J The New France—De Gaulle and after, Pelican Books (5) Sauvageot Français écrit, français parlé, Larousse 1962 (6(c)) Sauvageot A Portrait du vocabulaire français, Larousse 1964 (6(c) ) Martinet A Eléments de linguistique générale, Colin 1967 ((6(c) ) Rigault A ed Le Grammaire du français parlé, Hachette 1971 (6(c)) Sauvageot A Analyse du français parlé, Hachette 1972 (6(c)) Dubois et al Dictionnaire du français contemporain, Larousse (6(c)) von Wartburg W Précis de syntaxe du français contemporain, Berne eds A Francke S.A. 1958 (8(c)) Vlnay J P et Darbelnet J Stylistique comparée du français et de l'anglais, Didier (6(c)) (b) Prescribed textbooks: For unit 3— • Balzac H de Le Реre Gerlof, Coli 'Folio' Galiimard • SteПdhдl Le Rouge et / е Noir, Classiques Gamier 199 Faculty of Arts

•Flaubert G Madame Bovery, Classiques Gamier •Zola E L'Assommoir, Coll 'Livre de Poche' For unit 4— Malraux A La Condition humaine, Coll 'Folio' Gallimard Mauriac Le Noeud de vipères, Coll 'Livre de Poche' •Jarry A Ubu Rol, in Tout Ubu, Coll 'Livre de Poche' • Beckett En attendant Godot, Harrap •Ionesco Rhinocéros, Collie Manteau d'Arlequin' Gallimard •Arrabal L'Architecte et l'empereur d'Assyrie, '10/18', Union Générale d'Editions For unit 5— Duplicated notes and a reading-list will be provided. For unit б(а )- Grammont M Petit traité de versification française, Coll "U" Armand Colin Hugo V Choix de poèmes, Manchester UP •Nerval G de Les Chimères, ed Rinsler N. Athlone Press •Verlaine P Selected Poems, OUP •Apollinaire G Alcools, Nouveaux Classiques Larousse For unit 6(b)— Bergson H Le Rire, PUF •Artaud A Le Théâtre et son double, Coil 'ldées' Gallimard •Sartre J-P Réflexions sur la question juive, Coll 'Idées' Gallimard •Barthes R Mythologies, Coli 'Points' Editions du Seuil For unit 6(c)— Duplicated material will be provided. EXAMINATION Three 3-hour papers (the first comprising an unseen and a composition in French on topics relating to unit 5; the second on unit 6; the third on unit 3); terminal tests in unseen translation into French; and in third term, a dictation test and an oral test. Work in unit 4 will be examined by the mid-year essay and explication (see WRITTEN WORK above) and a written test. The weekly language exercises will also be taken into account in determining examination results.

116-302 MEDIEVAL FRENCH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE 116-303 RENAISSANCE FRENCH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE 116-304 COMPARATIVE STUDIES IN OLD FRENCH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE For details of these subjects, which are available as third year PASS courses, see pp. 204, 206, 209 respectively.

HONOURS DEGREE F. SCHOOL OF FRENCH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE 1. The course for the degree with honours In the school of French Language and Literature comprises the following subjects: 200 French

French part 1, French part 2 (hofs), French part 3 thons), French part 4, and Medieval French Language and Literature, Renaissance French Lan- guage and Literature, Comparative Studies in Old French Language and Literature, and four additional subjects in accordance with the details set out below and as set out for the ordinary degree. Students' attention is drawn to the fact that certain Philosophy and History subjects (e.g. Philosophy 2C, History 1B, 2K, 3K) provide particularly suitable supporting studies for the French honours course. 2. In their first year students will take four subjects in accordance with the requirements for the ordinary degree. Admission to the honours school of French in the second year must be approved by the faculty through the sub-dean and is conditional upon satisfactory performance in French in the first year. The chairman of the department will recommend such admission for candidates who have gained at least second-class honours in French part 1. Other candidates who wish to enter the honours school must apply, through the sub-dean, for permission from the chairman of the department. For the philological and linguistic sections of the honours course it is desirable that students have or acquire a working knowledge of Latin, but prior study of Latin is not a prerequisite for admission to the honours school. 3. In their second year, candidates will take French part 2 (hone), Medieval French Language and Literature, and a grade 2 subject in a discipline other than French. In order to proceed to the third year, they will require to be 'recommended to proceed' at the end of the second year.

4. In their third year, candidates will take French part З (hone), and either Renaissance French Language and Literature or Comparative Studies in Old French Language and Literature, according to the year in which the lectures in these subjects are delivered. In their fourth year, candidates will take French part 4, and either Renaissance French Language and Literature or Comparative Studies in Old French Language and Literature, whichever subject is given in that year. The third and fourth years have been planned as a continuous course of study, but candidates will sit for a preliminary final examination, both written and oral, at the end of the third year. Students should utilize the long vacation at the end of the third year to cover a major part of their fourth year reading, including their reading for the thesis, the subject of which should have been defined in at least a preliminary way in consultation with members of the academic staff of the department of French by the end of third term. 5. The final examination will be held in two parts, part I in the third year and part Il in the fourth year, and will comprise the following: (a) In the third year: A. Formal examination papers: (1) A 3-hour paper on unit 7 (first paper of French part 3 honours). (2) A 3-hour paper on unit 6 (second paper of French part 3 honours). (3) A 3-hour paper on Renaissance French literature or Comparative Studies in Old French literature. (4) A 3-hour paper on Renaissance French language and texts or studies in Romance linguistics. 8. Tests, essays, seminar papers, etc.: (1) Terminal tests in unseen translation from English into French.

201 Faculty of Arts

(2) Test in unseen translation from French into English. (З ) Test on unit 5. (4) Irai test. (5) Mid-year essays and explication on unit 3. (6) Seminar papers, with participation in seminar discussions, as bases for assessment of unit 4. (7) An oral test on both parts of the Renaissance syllabus or the Comparative Studies In Old French syllabus. (ь) In the fourth year: A. Formal examination papers: (1) A 3-hour paper on 20th century fiction (first paper of French part 4). (2) A 3-hour paper an 20th century drama (second paper of French part 4). (3) A 3-hour paper on Renaissance French literature or Comparative Studies in Old French literature. (4) A 3-hour paper on Renaissance French language and texts or studies in Romance linguistics.

В. Tests, essays, seminar papers, etc.: (1) Three compositons in French for unit 1. (2) Mid-year work, for instance terminal tests, on unit 4. ( З ) Oral test on unit 3. (4) An oral test on both parts of the Renaissance syllabus or the Comparative Studies in Old French syllabus. C. A thesis in French of approximately 10,000 words on an approved topic (not necessarily 20th century). to be prepared under the guidance of a supervisor and submitted early in third term.

FRENCH IN COMBINED COURSES For candidates taking French in a combined honours course the required French subjects are normally French part 1, French part 2 (hens), French part 3 (hens) and French part 4. However, students who have attained an adequate standard in French part 1 may, on the recommendation of the chairman of department, be allowed to replace the three honours subjects by Medieval French Language and Literature, Renaissance French Language and Literature, and Comparative Studies in Old French Language and Literature. Even for students taking the normal sequence of honours subjects Medieval French Language and Literature may be a suitable additional subject to take in second year. Those interested in including it should seek the advice and approval of the departments concerned. In the fourth year of the course (see pp. 519 ff.) honours students who have chosen the normal sequence of French honours subjects in combination with honours courses in certain other foreign languages or in English may be permitted to specialize in French, in which case they will take, in addition to French 4, either Renaissance French Language and Literature or Comparative Studies in Old French Language and Literature, according to the year in which the lectures in these subjects are given. Where students combining French with another honours course have to submit two theses in their fourth year, a thesis of 5,000-6,000 words only is required by the department of French. 202 French

116-261 FRENCH PART 2 (HONS)

Co-ordinator: Dr C. B. Thornton-Smith A course of lectures and tutorials as detailed below. Students are also advised to spend some time each week in individual study in the language laboratory.

SYLLABUS

Unit 1: Prose, unseen, composition, grammar (1 hour per week) Unit 2: Spoken French (1 hour per week) Unit 3: Seventeenth century theatre (2 hours per week in the first half of the year) Unit 4: Eighteenth century philosophes (2 hours per week in the second half of the year) Unit 5: Civilization of the seventeenth and (1 hour per week for eighteenth centuries the equivalent of 1 term) Unit 6: Two of the following: (a) Phonetics and spoken French (1 hour per week) (A course of integrated lectures, language laboratory sessions and seminars, designed to give Instruction in the theory of French phonetics and to offer advanced practical training In fluent pronunciation. This unit will be of special Interest to future teachers.) (b) Man, morals and society in seventeenth century literature (1 hour per week) (c) The novel before the Revolution (1 hour per week) (d) Religion and literature in the Ancien Régime (1 hour por week) (e) An introduction to Old French with some study of Old French texts (1 hour per week)

Units 1 to 6 will be as for French 2 Pass, except that special honours classes will be held for units 1 and 2, and that for units 3 and 4 study and written work at honours level will be expected. Students taking Medieval French Language and Literature may not choose 6(e) as one of their options. Students in combined courses who are not taking Medieval French Language and Literature must choose 6(e) as one of their options.

N.B. The department reserves the right not to offer all of the units numbered 6(a), 6(b), 6(c) and 6(d) above. Students must submit their choice of units for approval by the chairman of the department not later than 10th February, 1978.

WRITTEN WORK Students are required to submit a weekly language exercise, and an explication (in English or French) and an essay (in French) on unit 3.

203 Faculty of Arts

BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading and reference: As for French Part 2 (ordinary degree). (b) Prescribed textbooks: As for French Part 2 (ordinary degree). EXAMINATION Three 3-hour papers (one on each option chosen in unit 6 and the third on unit 4); terminal tests in unseen translation into French; in second term a test in unseen translation from French; and, in third term, a written test on unit 5 and an oral test (reading and conversation on general topics), with a further short test for students taking unit 6(a). Work in unit 3 will be examined by the mid-year explication and essay (see WRITTEN WORK above), supplemented by such oral and written tests as may be considered necessary. The weekly written work will also be taken into account in the determining of examination results.

116-262 MEDIEVAL FRENCH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE (HONS) Pass students in this course should use as code number either 116-202 (second year) or 116-302 (third year)

Co-ordinator: Dr S. J. Scott A course of four lectures per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS (i) Studies in Old French Literature with special reference to the epic cycles and the lyric poetry. Studies in the cultural background of the literature. The topic to be studied in the background course, which will vary from year to year, will usually be chosen from the following: Folk-lore in medieval literature, Allegory and symbolism, Ancient and medieval Paris, Medieval handwriting, Toponymics, Studies in Old Provençal language and literature, etc. (ii) Outline history of the French language. Principles of historical linguistics. Study of Old French texts. WRITTEN WORK Candidates will be required to submit two essays in French during the year. Books (a) Recommended for preliminary reading and reference: Fox J & Wood R A Concise History of the French Language, Blackwell 1968. Voretzsch K Introduction to the Study of Old French Literature, Stichert Southern R The Making of the Middle Ages, Arrow Books (b) Prescribed textbooks: •Dufournet J ed Aucassin et Nicolette, Garnier-Flammarion (or Roques M ed Aucassin et Nicolette, Champion) Henry A Chrestomathie de la littérature en ancien français, A Francke 204 French

EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers, the first on part (i) of the syllabus, the other on part (ii); in third term, an oral test on both parts of the course.

116-361 FRENCH PART 3 (HoNS) Co-ordinator: Dr L. Las Gourgues A course of lectures, tutorials and seminars as detailed below. Students are also advised to spend some time each week in individual study in the language laboratory. SYLLABUS Unit 1: Prose, unseen, composition, grammar (1 hour per week) Unit 2: Spoken French (1 hour per week) Unit 3: Nineteenth century fiction (1 hour per week) Unit 4: Twentieth century fiction and drama (1 hour per week) Unit 5: Civilization of the nineteenth and twentieth centuries (1 hour per week) Unit 6: One of the following: (1 hour per week) (a) French poetry from Hugo to Apollinaire (b) Some creative thinkers of twentieth century France (1 hour per week) (c) Aspects of contemporary French (1 hour per week) Unit 7: Rimbaud, Mallагmé, Valéry (1 hour per week) Units 1, 2, 3, 5 and 6 will be as for French part 3 (pass), except that special honours classes will be held for units 1 and 2. For unit 4 a special honours seminar will be held and a special and more extensive reading list will be prescribed. Unit 7 is the additional honours unit. N.B. The department reserves the right not to offer all of the units numbered 6(a), 6(b) and 6(c) above. Students must submit their choice of units for approval by the chairman of the department not later than 10th February, 1978. WRITTEN WORK Students are required to submit a weekly language exercise and, in addition, two essays in French and an explication in English or French on unit 3. BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading and reference: As for French part 3 (ordinary degree) and, in addition, the following: For unit 7— Bonnefoy Y Rimbaud par lui-mémo, Coll 'Ecrivains de toujours' Edi- tions du Seuil Chadwick C Symbo/ism, 'The Critical Idiom', Methuen Michaud G Mallarmé, l'homme et l'oeuvre, Ratier-Boivin Scarfe F The Art of Paul Valéry, Heinemann (b) Prescribed textbooks: As for French part 3 (ordinary degree), except that for the unit 4 seminar a special reading-list will be posted up at the beginning of the year

205 Faculty of Arts

and that the following books are prescribed for the special honours unit 7: 'Rimbaud A Oeuvres. Classiques Gamier • Маllагтě S Poésies, Coll 'Poésies Gallimard •Valéry P Charmes, Classiques Larousse

EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers (the first on unit 7; the second on unit 6); terminal tests in unseen translation into French; in second term a test in unseen translation from French; and, in third term, a written test on unit 5 and an oral test (reading and conversation on general topics). Work in unit 3 will be examined by the mid-year essays and explication (see WRIT- TEN WORK above). Work in unit 4 will be assessed on the basis of seminar papers and participation in seminar discussions. The weekly written work will also be taken into account in the determining of examination results.

11 6-363 RENAISSANCE FRENCH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE (HONS) Code number 116-463 should be used by fourth year honours students in this course (116-303 by third year pass students) Co-ordinator: Dr S. J. Scott A course of three or more lectures per week throughout the year. Lec- tures will be given in 1978 and thereafter in alternate years.

SYLLABUS (i) Studies in 16th-century French literature with special reference to Rabelais. Scève, du Bellay, Ronsard and Montaigne. Studies in the cultural background of the literature. (ii) Studies in the French language of the sixteenth century. Introduc- tion to descriptive linguistics. Study of Renaissance texts.

WRITTEN WORK Candidates will be required to submit two essays in French during the year.

В OO КS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading and reference: Guiraud P Le Moyen fraпçаis, Presses Universitaires de France 1963 Hay D ed The Age of the Renaissance, Thames & Hudson 1967 Burke P ed The Renaissance, Longmans 1964 (b) Prescribed textbooks: •Rabelais F Oeuvres, 2 vols, Garnier Montaigne M Selected Essays, eds Tilley and Boase, Manchester UP •Ronsard P de Poèmes, Blackwell's French Texts EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers, one on part (i) of the syllabus and the other on part (ii); in third term, an oral test on both parts of the course. 206 French

116-364 COMPARATIVE STUDIES IN OLD FRENCH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE (HONS) For details of this subject, which will be available for third year honours students in 1979, see p. 209.

116-461 FRENCH PART 4 Co-ord;nator: Dr G. D. Watson A course of lectures, tutorials and seminars as detailed below.

SYLLABUS Unit 1: Applied stylistics (creative written (1 hour per week) language) Unit 2: Spoken French (1 hour per week) Unit 3: Twentieth century fiction and drama (2 hours per week) Unit 4: One of the following: (a) Surréalisme and after (1 hour per week) (b) French literary criticism since Bachelard (1 hour per week) (c) 1 One of the part 3 honours (d) f units (6) not already studied (1 hour per week) N.B. The department reserves the right not to offer all of the units numbered 4(a), 4(b), 4(c) and 4(d) above. Students must submit their choice of units for approval by the chairman of the department not later than 10th February, 1978. PRELIMINARY WORK The relevant sections of chapters 4, 6, 9 and 12 in D. G. Charlton's France (see below) are particularly recommended. Students are also strongly urged to read the set texts of Proust during the long vacation preceding their final-honours year. WRITTEN WORK Students are required to complete a weekly applied stylistics exercise for unit 1.

THESIS Each candidate is required to prepare under the guidance of a supervisor and submit early in third term a thesis in French on an approved topic of his choice (not necessarily a 20th century topic). BOOkS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading and reference on French literature of the twentieth century and its background: Albérès R-M L'Aventure intellectuelle au XXe siècle, 1900-1950, La Nouvelle Edition Bersani J et al La Littérature en France depuis 1945, Bordas Вгёе G and Guiton M An Age of Fiction, Chatto & Windus Brombert V The Intellectual Hero, New York Lippincott Charlton D G ed France. A Companion to French Studies, Methuen 1972 Cobban A A History of Modern France, Vol 2, Penguin Books Cruickshank J ed French Literature and its Background, Vol VI, OUP 1970

207 Faculty of Arts

Guicharnaud J Modern French Theatre from Giraudoux to Beckett, PUF 1961 and for unit 1 — Cressot M Le style et ses techniques, précis d'analyse stylistique, PUF Guiraud P & Kuentz J-CI La stylistique, lectures, Coll "Initiation ił la linguistique" Klincksieck Guiraud P La stylistique, PUF Sumpf J Introduction è la stylistique du français, Coll "Sciences humaines et sociales" Larousse (b) Prescribed textbooks: For unit 1- •Vinay J P et Darbelnet J Stylistique cотрaгéе du français et de l'anglais, Didier •Vinay J P et Darbelnet J Cahier d'exercices no f Work Book, Lib- rairie Beauchemin, Montréal • Legrand E Méthode de stylistique française, Gigord For unit 3— Proust M Du C6té de chez Swann, Coll 'Folio' Gallimard Le Temps retrouvé, Coll 'Folio' Gallimard 'Gide A Paludes, Coll 'Folio' Gallimard La Symphonie pastorale, Coll 'Folio' Gallimard Les Caves du Vatican, Coll 'Folio' Gallimard • Camus A L'Etranger, Coll 'Folio' Gallimard La Peste, Coll 'Folio' Gallimard La Chute, Coll 'Folio' Gallimard •Bernanos G Sous le soleil de Satan, Coll Livre de Poche' Journal d'un curé de campagne, Coll 'Livre de Poche' • Jarry A Ubu Roi in Tout Uhu, Coll 'Livre de Poche' • Beckett S En attendant Godot, Harrap Ionesco E Macbett, Coll 'Le Manteau d'Arlequin' Gallimard • Adamov A Paolo Peolol Gallimard L'Arche • Vian B Les Вátisseurs d'empire, •Sartre J-P Huis clos suivi de Les Mouches, Coll 'Folio' Gallimard Les Mains sales, Coll 'Folio' Gallimard Les Séquestrés d'Altona, Coli 'Folio' Gallimard •Genet Les Nègres, Editions de l'Arbalète

For unit 4(а )— Breton A Manifestes du surréalisme, Coll 'Idées' Gallimard •Aragon L Le Paysan de Paris, Coll 'Folio' Gallimard •Eluard P Capitale de la douleur; suivi de l'Amour la poésie, Coll 'Poésie' Gallimard •Char R Fureur et mystère, Coll 'Poésie' Gallimard •Prёvert J Paroles, Coll 'Folio' Gallimard For unit 4(b)— Bachelard G L'Eau et les rěves, Corti •Richard J P Stendhal et Flaubert, Coll 'Points' Editions du Seuil • Goldmann L Pour une sociologie du roman, Coll 'Idées' Gallimard •Todorov T Littérature et signification, Coll 'Langue et language' Larousse • Genette G Figures I, 1l, Editions du Seuil For units 4(c) and 4(d)— As for French part 3 (ordinary degree). 208 French

EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers on unit 3, the first on the novel and the second on the drama; the thesis (mentioned above); for unit 1, 3 mid-year compositions in French; an oral examination of one half-hour on the year's work in unit 3. The work in unit 4 will probably, after consultation with students involved, be assessed by terminal tests.

116-463 RENAISSANCE FRENCH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE (HONS)

For details of this subject, which is also available as a third year subject, see p. 206.

116-464 COMPARATIVE STUDIES IN OLD FRENCH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE (HONS)

This course will be available in 1979 and thereafter in alternate years; it will also be offered to third year pass students (who will use code number 116- 304), as well as to third year honours students (using code number 116-364). Co-ordinator: Dr S. J. Scott A course of three or more lectures per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS (i) Studies in the development of Arthurian Romance. Celtic origins and influences. The problem of transmission. The figure of Arthur, the Tristan and Grail legends. Studies in the cultural background of the literature. (The topic to be studied in the background course, which will vary from year to year, will usually be chosen from the following: Folklore in medieval literature, Allegory and symbolism, Ancient and medieval Paris, Medieval handwriting, Toponymics, Studies in Old Provençal language and literature, etc.) (ii) Introduction to Romance linguistics with special reference to Spanish, French, Italian and Romanian. Principles of comparative linguistics. Study of Romance texts. WRITTEN WORK Candidates will be required to submit two essays in French during the year.

BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading and reference: Lord R Comparative Linguistics, EUP Elcock W D The Romance Languages, Faber & Faber Loomis R S and others Arthurian Literature In the Middle Ages, OUP (b) Prescribed textbooks: •Chrétien de Troyes Le Roman de Perceval ou le Conte du Graal, ed W Roach, TLF (Irez) •Béroul The Romance of Tristan, ed A. Ewen 2 vols, Blackwell EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers, one on part (i) of the syllabus and the other on part (ii); in third term, an oral test on both parts of the course.

209 Faculty of Arts

POSTGRADUATE DIPLOMA IN FRENCH STUDIES Co-ordinator: Dr D. K. Keuneman

This course, of four lectures/seminars/ tutorials per week throughout the year, will be offered subject to availability of staff. Classes are held in the evening, on two days each week. The prerequisite for admission to the diploma course is a pass B.A. degree with major in French or the equivalent. The course Is intended for graduates who do not wish to proceed to a research degree but desire to extend and deepen their knowledge of contemporary French language, literature and civilization. Some provision is also made for those who want to make a study of medieval French. The course normally involves two years of part-time study, but in special cases adequately qualified graduates may be allowed to complete it in one year of full-time study. In special cases successful completion of the first year of the course may be accepted as the equivalent of one year's study for the M.A. Prelimin- ary course, and transfer from the Postgraduate Diploma to the M.A. Pre- liminary course at the end of the first year may be approved by faculty on recommendation by the chairman of the department. Intending students should note the regulations governing this course as set out on p. 68 of the Handbook.

116-811 POSTGRADUATE DIPLOMA IN FRENCH STUDIES 1 (First Year)

SYLLABUS Unit 1: Contemporary French (a descriptive study — phonological, morphological, syntactical, lexical — of the present-day language, with reading and analysis of articles from Le Monde and other exercises. The course will introduce some basic notions of modern linguistic description — one hour per week for three terms). Unit 2: Spoken French (discussions on topics related to units 3 and 5 below, conducted in French by a native speaker — one tutorial per week during the first 17 weeks).

Unit 3: French Literature since 1945 (a course of lecture/seminars -- one hour per week for three terms).

Unit 4: Study of the French Film since 1945 (a course of lecture/ seminars—a double period per week, in the last 9 weeks only, with some lengthier sessions to be arranged). Students will view representative films and study their dia- logue in spoken and written form.

Unit 5: Twentieth Century France (a course of lecture/seminars—one hour per week during the first 17 weeks). The course will be an historical study of the nature of French society from the Dreyfus Affair to May 1968.

BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading and reference (numbers refer to relevant units): 210 French

Sauvageot A Français écrit, français parlé, Larousse (1) Sauvageot A Portrait du vocabulaire français, Larousse (1) Sauvageot A Analyse du français parlé, Hachette (1) Dubois J et al Dictionnaire du français contemporain, Larousse (1) von Wartburg W Précis de syntaxe du français contemporain, Berne eds A Francke SA (1) Aitchison, Jean General Linguistics, EUP 'Teach Yourself Books', Lon- don 1972 (1) Bersani J et ai La littérature en France depuis 1945, Bordas (3) Sadoul G Le Cinéma français, Flammarion (4) Armes R French Cinema since 1946, vols 1 and II, Zwemmer 1966 (4) Bazin A Qu'est-ce que ie cinéma?, vols 1 and II University of California Press (4) Perkins V F Film as Film, Pelican 1972 (4) Graham P ed The New Wave, Seeker and Warburg 1969 (4) (Students will also be required to obtain French scenarios for some films.) (b) Prescribed textbooks (students will need to have personal copies of the texts asterisked): For unit 3— Bazin H Le Matrimoine, Coll 'Livre de Poche' •Butor M La Modification, Editions de Minuit • Perec G Les Choses, J'ai lu •Beckett S Fin de partie, Methuen •Ionesco E Macbett, Coll 'Le Manteau d'Arlequin' Gallimard •Genet J Les Négres, Editions de l'Arbalète Bedouin J-L ed La Poésie surréaliste, Seghers •Barthes R Le Degré zéro de l'écriture, Seuil For unit 5- •Guiral P La Société française 1815-1914 vue per les romanciers, 2 vols., Coll. U2 Armand Colin • Cobban A A History of Modern France, Penguin Ardagh J The New France, Penguin Brombert V The Intellectual Hero, Lippincott

EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers (the first on unit 1, the second on unit 3); for units 2 and 4, a viva voce test of a half-hour's duration on the full scope of the course and additionally for unit 4 a written assignment and participation in the seminars; for unit 5, a one-hour class test at the end of the lecture series.

116-821 POSTGRADUATE DIPLOMA IN FRENCH STUDIES 2 (Second Year) In the second year students will take two of the special subjects listed below (of which at least one must be a subject offered by the department of French) and explore them under the direction of a supervisor, normally in the first and second halves of the academic year respectively. Students' selection of special subjects should be submitted to the chairman for approval in the light of their relevant qualifications and experience before 17 December, 1977. Short papers will be submitted regularly for correction and discussion, and an essay of 5,000 words on each special subject or equivalent tests or exercises will be required. An

211 Faculty of Arts

optional tutorial in spoken French may be offered during the year. Seminars on the special subjects chosen will be held from time to time where the number of students who have chosen a given topic warrants it; and attendance at other lectures or seminars may also be required. Requirements for the second year are flexible so that if a candidate wishes to spend the year in France, for instance, as an "assistant" or on a French Government scholarship, he may be allowed to do so, on condition that adequate written assignments and the major essays are sent to the supervisor in Melbourne. This flexibility is also such as to permit the inclusion of any interdisciplinary courses provided by the faculty and approved by the department as relevant and of suitable standard. In special cases, the department may approve a topic of study or investigation suggested by a candidate. Special Subjects: Twentieth century French music (in conjunction with the faculty of Music) Nineteenth and twentieth century French art (in conjunction with the Fine Arts department) French architecture (in conjunction with the faculty of Architecture) Contemporary French philosophy (in conjunction with the Philosophy department) Existentialism and French literature Aspects of French thought since 1945 Surréalisme and after Studies in the history of the French language

N.B. The department reserves the right not to offer all of the special subjects listed.

EXAMINATION Assessment will be based on the prescribed written work and, where necessary, on written or viva voce examinations. Account will also be taken of papers submitted and of any other relevant work done.

MASTER OF ARTS

116-601 F. SCHOOL OF FRENCH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE Prospective candidates, who should normally possess a satisfactory Honours degree (or equivalent) in French, must, after consulting the department of French, lodge an application on the prescribed form at the Arts faculty office, seeking permission to enrol. If permission is granted, candidates must enrol at the Students' Records Office and subsequently re-enrol for each remaining year of their approved course. Candidates will, under supervision, prepare a thesis in French of about 50,000 words on an approved subject, and will be required to report to their supervisor regularly during the year. They will be advised as to a suitable course of reading, and may be required to attend relevant lectures or seminars. An entry form for examination for higher degrees must be lodged with the Registrar when the thesis is submitted. Three bound copies of each thesis (A4, typewritten, double-spaced) should be submitted, one of which will be deposited in the University Library, and one in the French seminar library collection. The attention 212 Geography

of candidates is drawn to the recommendations on the presentation of theses and other matters set out in the department's Guide for MA Candidates in French. In certain cases candidates may also be required to pass a written and/or oral examination on the subject of their research or on other subjects approved by the chairman of the department. Prospective candidates who do not possess a satisfactory Honours degree in French (or equivalent) will be required to complete an MA Preliminary course before being permitted to enter upon the MA. This course normally requires two years of part-time study, but exceptionally may be completed in one year's full-time study. The first (part-time) year of the course covers approximately the same ground as units (1) and (3) of French Part 4 (see above, p. 207); in special cases and by arrangement with the chairman, successful completion of Part 1 of the Postgraduate Diploma in French Studies may be accepted as the equivalent of one year's study for the MA Preliminary course, and transfer from the Post- graduate Diploma to the MA Preliminary course at the end of the first year may be approved. The second (part-time) year of the course involves a programme of study at Final Honours level adapted in each individual case to meet the eventual background requirements of the chosen MA thesis topic. Enrolment procedure for the MA Preliminary course is similar to that prescribed for enrolment In the MA course. The thesis should normally be submitted for examination within two years from the commencement of candidature for MA by full-time candidates and within four years by part-time candidates. Except in special circumstances and with the permission of the faculty no thesis or course work will be examined unless the candidate presents for examination within four years from the commencement of his candidature or, in the event of his having been granted leave of absence for the maximum period of one year, within five years from the commencement of his candidature.

DEPARTMENT OF GEOGRAPHY Chairman of Department: Dr T. M. PERRY, B.A., Dip.Ed. (Syd.), Ph.D. (A.N.U.), M.A. Professor: Professor H. C. Brookfield, B.A., Ph.D. (Lend.) The department offers course work and research programmes in both physical and human geography at all levels from first-year to doctorate. There are no entry qualifications to first year admission: it is not necessary to have studied geography before. A student who intends to major in social sciences might consider work in human geography alongside economics, history, politics or psychology. Those wanting to specialize in physical geography should contemplate including in their degree units from mathematics, statistics, information science, geology or botany. In either strand, a maior or honours qualification will allow entry to postgraduate work in the department.

ORDINARY DEGREE The major in Geography for the ordinary degree consists of Geography 1, 2 and 3. Geography 1 Is designed as an introductory course indicating the breadth of geographic interests while focusing mainly on broad questions of man's use of the earth and the various physical and human

213 Faculty of Arts

influences affecting patterns of land use. In Geography 2 and 3 the courses offer a wide range of studies in the various specialist fields of geography and while a choice of specialisms is offered in some terms to permit students to bias their course to their own field of interest, the course aims to provide a grounding in the whole field of geography. Geography 3A is available, subject to the approval of the chairman of the department, to students wishing to take an additional third-year subject in Geography. Geography 3A is offered in addition to, not as an alternative to, Geography 3. (Details of the honours degree are set out at the end of this section.) Admission to the examinations in geography is conditional upon satisfactory performance of the prescribed written, practical, and field work which will be taken into consideration in the determination of examination results. Students in Geography parts 1, 2 and 3 should consult the departmental notice-board for the manner of paying excursion accommodation charges.

121-101 GEOGRAPHY PART i

A course of two lectures and one 3-hour practical class per week and one tutorial per week throughout the year with three days field work.

SYLLABUS The course will consist of three one-term units in Economic Geography, Physical Geography and Human Geography.

INTRODUCTION TO ECONOMIC GEOGRAPHY: Physical and other factors influencing the distribution of economic activities. The application of geographical location theories. Australian studies within the major productive sectors of the economy.

INTRODUCTION TO PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY: An introduction to the study of climate and landforms, with a more detailed treatment of the geomorphology of Victoria and its coastline.

MAN'S ROLE IN CHANGING THE FACE OF THE EARTH: Evolution of present patterns of human activity on a world scale, as a product of the interaction of available resources, population growth and the development of technology. The practical work will consist principally of the study of maps and aerial photographs as instruments of geographic investigation.

BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: Haggett P Geography: a modern synthesis, 2nd ed Harper 1975 'Twidale C R Geomorphology, Nelson's Australasian Paperbooks For reference: Strahler A N Introduction to Physical Geography, 2nd ed Wiley One of the following atlases (latest edition): Goode's World Atlas, Rand McNally The Oxford Atlas, Oxford University Press The University Atlas, George Philip & Son Man's Domain, a Thematic Atlas of the World, McGraw-Hill 214 Geography

EXAMINATION One 1 r/2-hour examination paper at the end of each term. The examination papers will contain questions relating to lectures, tutorials and practical classes. To pass the year students will be required to have been awarded at least 50 per cent of the aggregate marks given for practical work and field reports, and to pass each of the term examinations. Students failing one of the term examinations may be admitted to a special examination at the end of the year if their written work for the year is satisfactory.

121-201 GEOGRAPHY PART 2 (PASS) Students will take three of the following courses: First Term: Terrain Analysis Second Term: Political Geography or Rural Land Use Analysis Third Term: Population Geography or Quantitative Methods in Geography (Historical Geography not offered in 1978) Students should consult the departmental notice-board for the manner of paying excursion accommodation charges which will be fixed as early as possible in first term.

First Term 121-241 TERRAIN ANALYSIS A course of two lectures and three hours' practical work per week throughout the term; three or four days' field work in the May vacation. SYLLABUS Methods of classifying and mapping landforms, soils and vegetation. Land systems. Land research methods in Australia and elsewhere. Land evaluation.

BOOKS Isachenko A G Principles of Landscape Science and Physical-Geographic Regionalization, ed J S Massey MOP 1973 van Riper J Man's Physical World, McGraw Hill 1973 Additional reading lists will be given in class.

Second Term 121-244 POLITICAL GEOGRAPHY A course of two lectures and one 3-hour practical class per week throughout the term.

SYLLABUS The scope and methods of political geography. The geographical characteristics of states. Frontiers and boundaries, including maritime boundaries and the international division of the continental shelf. Electoral geography. Geography and national policies.

215 Faculty of Arts

BOOK East W G & Prescott J R V Our Fragmented World, Macmillan 1975 Or

121-245 RURAL LAND USE ANALYSIS A course of two 'lectures and one 3-hour practical class per week throughout the term. SYLLABUS The first half of the course deals with selected agricultural and grazing land uses in Victoria. The distributions of these land uses are described and the factors which control the distributions are discussed. Methods of land use analysis are considered in the second half: land use survey in the field and through remote sensing; information systems for land use planning and land use modelling; land use capability classification. While mainly based on Australian and especially Victorian examples, the course will also range more widely. BOOKS Recommended reading: Leeper G W The Australian Environment, 4th ed MUP 1970 Peel L J Rural Industry in the Port Phillip Region 1835-1880, MUP 1974 Wadham S Wilson R K & Wood J Land Utilization in Australia 4th ed MUP 1964

Third Term 121-243 QUANTITATIVE METHODS IN GEOGRAPHY A course of two lectures and one 3-hour practical class per week throughout the term. SYLLABUS A survey of the changing place of mathematical methods in geography. While the emphasis will be geographical rather than mathematical, the aim of the lecture and practical courses will be to examine the use of particular mathematical techniques to problems in physical and social geography. BOOKS Reading lists will be given in class, and will include references to appropriate papers in current journals and sections of recently published books. Or

HISTORICAL GEOGRAPHY (Not offered in 1978) Or

121-242 POPULATION GEOGRAPHY A course of two lectures and three hours' practical work per week in third term; one short essay (about 1,000 words). 216 Geography

SYLLABUS The study of population patterns and dynamics and the relationships between population change and socio-economic change. Measurements in demographic analysis; population and socio-economic relationships in selected cases (primitive and peasant cases of the past, pre-industrial and industrializing Europe and Japan, capitalist, communist and Third World cases of the present in the context of development); concepts and theories suited to an examination of selected problems; population policies.

BOOKS Pollard A H Farhat Yusuf & Pollard G N Demographic Techniges, Pergamon 1974 Wrong D H Population and Society, 3rd ed Random House 1968 The Human Population, A Scientific American Book 1974 United Nations Determinants and Consequences of Population Trends, vol 1 United Nations 1973

Other preliminary reading: Barrie W D The Growth and Control of World Population, 1970 Davis W H ed Readings in Human Population Ecology, 1971 Mahmood Mamdani The Myth of Population Control: family caste and class in an Indian village, 1972 Pitchford J D The Economics of Population: an introduction, 1974 Sauvy A Fertility and Survival: population problems from Malthus to Mao Tse-Tung, 1961

EXAMINATION One 1%-hour examination at the end of each term. To pass the year students will be required to have scored at least 50 per cent of the aggregate marks given for practical work, excursion reports and essays, and to pass each of thе end-of-term examination papers. Students who fail one of the end-of-term examinations may be admitted to a special examination at the end of the year if their written work for the year is satisfactory.

121-301 GEOGRAPHY PART 3 (PASS) Geography Part 3 is the third part of the normal Geography major. Students will take three of the following courses: First Term: Geography and Development or The Coastal Environment Second Term: Urban Geography Third Term: Problems of Conservation or Man-biosphere Relations: Theory and Applications Students who elect to take Geography Part 3A in addition to Geography 3 will take Urban Geography, Geography and Development, and Problems of Conservation as Geography 3. Students in Geography 3 should consult the departmental notice board for the manner of paying excursion accommodation charges.

217 Faculty of Arts

First Term 121-346 THE COASTAL ENVIRONMENT A course of three lectures and six hours practical work per week throughout the term; the practical work may be in the form of field trips. Two days' additional field work will be required. SYLLABUS Coastal features and the physiographic and ecological processes at work on them. The utilization and management of coastal environments with particular reference to recreation and conservation. Coastal processes and the evolution of coastal landforms. BOOKS Bird E C F Coasts, ANU Press OR

121-341 GEOGRAPHY AND DEVELOPMENT A course of three lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the term; one essay of 2,000 words. SYLLABUS The processes of economic growth, development and underdevelopment, and the evolution of regional inequalities in resource use and welfare; international and intra-national space economies; planning for national and regional change. Examples from both capitalist and centrally-planned systems will be studied in depth. BOOKS Amin S Accumulation on the World Scale, Monthly Review Press 1975 Brookfield H C Interdependent Development, Methuen 1975 Brookfield H C Colonialism, Development and Independence: the case of the Melanesian Islands, CUP 1972 Beckford G L Persistent Poverty, OUP 1972 Mende T From Aid to Recolonization, Harrap 1973 Missen G J Viewpoint on Indonesia: a geographical study, NAP 1972 Additional readings will be given in class.

Second Term 121-349 URBAN GEOGRAPHY A course of three lectures aid up to three hours' tutorial or practical work per week throughout the term. Two or three days' field work. One essay (2,000 words). SYLLABUS This course aims to blend theoretical and "problem-oriented" studies in a unified fashion, covering: The crisis of world urbanization. Theoretical constructs towards understanding city structure and function in the developed world. Planning as a possible solution to urban problems. International experience and Aus- tralian examples. Prognosis for future Australian growth. BOOKS Birch C Confronting the Future: Australia and the World in the Next Hundred Years, Penguin Harmondsworth 1975

218 Geography

Northam R M Urban Geography, Wiley New York 1974 Stilwell F J B Australian Urban and Regional Development, Australia and New Zealand Book Co, Sydney 1974 Third Term

121.347 PROBLEMS OF CONSERVATION A course of three lectures and six hours' practical work per week throughout the term. Part of the practical work may be in the form of field trips. SYLLABUS Assessing man's impact on the environment. Environmental inventories. The management of land and water resources for conservation. Selection and management of reserves, notably National Parks and Wildlife Re- serves. Investigation of topical problems in conservation, particularly In Victoria.

B O O КЅ Dasmann R F Environmental Conservation, Wiley Simmons 1 G Ecology of Natural Resources, Arnold OR

121-342 MAN-BIOSPHERE RELATIONS: THEORY AND APPLICATIONS A course of three lectures and one two-hour seminar per week throughout the term. One essay or seminar paper (2,000 words). SYLLABUS The theory of man-biosphere relations from primitive ideas through the ferment of the last two centuries, and its role in geography. Concepts of "preservation", "conservation", "adaptation" and "manipulation" of natural environment. The so-called "ecological movement" of the 1960s and 1970s, and the growing role of international agencies, with particular reference to the Man-and-the-Biosphere Programme of UNESCO. The course will also include examination of the ecosystem concept and its utility in the study of man-biosphere relationships. Questions of environmental perception and awareness will be discussed, and the growing importance of environmental considerations in planning will be reviewed. The scope of this course is world-wide, and examples from both developed and underdeveloped countries will be examined in depth.

B O O КЅ Required reading: Passmore J A Man's Responsibility for Nature, Duckworth 1974 Simmons I G The Ecology of Natural Resources, Arnold 1974 For reference: Dasmann R F Milton J P & Freeman P H Ecological Principles for Economic Development, Wiley 1973 UNESCO Expert Panel on the role of systems analysis and modelling approaches in the Programme on Man and the Biosphere, ( МАВ Report Series 2) UNESCO 1971 UNESCO Expert Panel on Project 13: Perception of Environmental Quality, ( МАВ Report Series 9) UNESCO 1973 UNESCO Task Force on the Contribution of the Social Sciences to the МАВ Programme, ( МАВ Report Series 17) UNESCO 1974

219 Faculty of Arts

Australian UNESCO Committee for Man and the Biosphere Report of Symposium on Ecological Effects of increasing Human Activities on Tropical and Subtropical Forest Ecosystems, AGPS 1976 Glacken C J Traces orr the Rhodien Shore, University of California Press 1967 Other references will be given in class. EXAMINATION One 1 %-hour examination paper at the end of each term. To pass the year students will be required to have scored at least 50 per cent of the aggregate marks given for practical work, field reports and essays, and to pass each of the end-of-term examination papers. Students who fail one of the end-of-term examinations may be admitted to a special examination at the end of the year if their written work for the year is satisfactory.

121-302 GEOGRAPHY PART ЗА (PASS) Students wishing to take a super-major in Geography, may, with the permission of the chairman of the department, take Geography ЗА in addition to Geography 3. Geography 3A may not be taken as an alternative to Geography З. The course will consist of: First Term: The Coastal Environment Second Term: Rural Land Use Analysis (in 1978 only) Third Term: Man-Biosphere Relations: theory and applications The syllabus for these units is the same as given above. EXAMINATION One 1 %-hour examination paper at the end of each term. To pass the year students will be required to have been awarded at least 50 per cent of the aggregate marks given for practical work, field reports, and essays, and to pass each of the three end-of-term examinations. Students failing one of the end-of-term examinations may be admitted to a special examination at the end of the year if their written work for the year is satisfactory.

HONOURS DEGREE P. SCHOOL OF GEOGRAPHY (For possible combinations with this school see pp. 519 ff.) 1. The course for the degree with honours in the school of Geography comprises the following subjects:

First year: Geography 1 (as for the ordinary degree) and three other first-year subjects selected from the subjects of the degree of Bachelor of Arts (ordinary degree), preferably including at least one of the first year subjects in Mathematics, Statistics, History, Economics, Govern- ment or Geology. Candidates for admission to the honours school at the beginning of their second year will be selected on their performance In the examinations in Geography 1, on the quality of their practical and 220 Geography

written work in Geography 1, and on their examination results in their other first-year subjects. Students who have failed a first-year subject will not normally be admitted to the honours school.

Second year: Geography 2 (honours), Geography 2A (honours), and one other subject being the second part of a sequence.

Third year: Geography 3 (honours) and Geography 3 В (honours). Fourth year: Geography 4A. No subject other than Geography 4 may be taken in the fourth year. Admission to the fourth year of the honours school Is dependent on candidates being awarded honours in the examinations for Geography 2 (hens) and 2A (hofs), and Geography 3 (hofs) and 3 В (hens), and having completed all the subjects of the first three years of the honours course listed above. 2. Admission to the honours school must be approved by the faculty through the sub-dean, and by the chairman of the department of Geo- graphy. 3. The order in which the above subjects are taken must be approved by the chairman of the department of Geography if the subjects are not to be taken in the order listed above. Students in Geography part 1, part 2 (hofs), and part 3 (hols), should consult the departmental notice-board for the manner of paying excursion accommodation charges.

GEOGRAPHY IN COMBINED COURSES The subjects required by the Geography department as part of combined honours courses are as follows: First year: Prescribed Geography part 1 It is strongly recommended that intending honours students take, where possible, at least one subject from the following—History, Economics, Government, Statistics, Mathematics or Geology. Second year: Geography 2В (hofs) Third year: Geography ЭC (hols) Fourth year: Geography 4В A thesis of not more than 9,000 words approved by the chairman of each department in which the student is taking his combined course.

121-261 GEOGRAPHY PART 2 (HONS) Syllabus and examination as for Geography 2 (Pass). Candidates for the honours degree must achieve examination results of honours standard, i.e. a minimum of 65 per cent of the aggregate marks for the three end-of-term examinations and 65 per cent of the marks awarded for practical work, field reports and essays.

121-262 GEOGRAPHY PART 2A (HONS) A course of lectures, seminars or practical classes equivalent to approximately three hours per week throughout the year, involving advanced 221 Faculty of Arts

study of Location Theory, Geographic Data Handing and Political Geo- graphy. Students will prepare one essay of 1,500 to 2,000 words per term.

121-246 LOCATION THEORY

The concept and problem of "location". Principles and models of spatial analysis in various sectors of the economy seen from both classical and contemporary viewpoints. BOOKS Reference book: Smith D M Industrial Location: An Economic Geographical Analysis, Wiley NY 1971

121-247 GEOGRAPHIC DATA HANDLING

Methods of data collection oriented to computer analysis. Introduction to the use of multivariate data analytic techniques and computer graphics including computer mapping. Application of techniques to problems in physical geography and rural land use is stressed. BOOKS For reference: Abler R Adams J S & Gould P Spatial Organization, Prentice-Hall '1971 Berry B J L & Marble D F Spatial Analysis, Prentice-Hall 1968 Haggett P Locational Analysis, Edward Arnold in press Harvey D Explanation in Geography, Edward Arnold 1969 King L J Statistical Analysis in Geography, Prentice-Hall 1969

121-248 ADVANCED POLITICAL GEOGRAPHY

The history of political geography. Detailed analysis of the evolution of international and internal boundaries and disputes associated with them. The political geography of the oceans. Regional political geography. BOOKS Preliminary reading: Prescott J R V Political Geography, Methuen 1972 EXAMINATION One 1 r/2-hour examination paper at the end of each term. Final assessment for the year will be based on the results of the examinations and written work presented during the year. To obtain honours students must score at least 65 per cent of the total marks for the examinations and 65 per cent of the aggregate marks for written work.

121-263 GEOGRAPHY PART 2В (IONS) This course is for combined honours students. Syllabus as fir Geography 2 (Ions) and selected parts of Geography 2A (Hans) under the direction of the chairman. 222 Geography

121-361 GEOGRAPHY PART 3 (IONS) Students shall take three of the units as prescribed for Geography 3 (Pass) or Geography 3A (Pass): First Term: Geography and Development The Coastal Environment Second Term: Urban Geography Third Term: Problems of Conservation Man-biosphere Relations: theory and applications The syllabus and examinations as for Geography 3 (Pass). Candidates for the honours degree must achieve results of honours standard, i.e. a minimum of 65 per cent of the aggregate marks for the three end-of- term examinations and 65 per cent of the marks awarded for practical work, field reports, and essays.

121-362 GEOGRAPHY PART 3В (IONS) A course of lectures and seminars, equivalent to approximately three hours per week throughout the year, involving advanced study in at least three of Population, Historical Geography, Human Geography, Develop- ment in Asia or Man-biosphere Relations, with written work of the order of one essay of about 1,500-2,000 words per term. Students will be expected to read widely on the subjects included in this course, (Ad- vanced Historical Geography will not be offered in 1978.)

First Term 121-343 ADVANCED POPULATION GEOGRAPHY A course of lectures and seminars, equivalent to approximately three hours per week throughout the term; one essay. SYLLABUS In 1978, this will be a more detailed course of that outlined under 121-242, Population Geography.

BOOKS The reading guide listed under 121-242, Population Geography applies here, with the following two additions to the preliminary reading list: Demko G J Rose H M& Schnell G A Population Geography: a reader, 1970 Sauvy A General Theory of Population, Methuen paperback ed 1974 ADVANCED HISTORICAL GEOGRAPHY (Not offered in 1978)

Second Term 121-344 PROBLEMS IN HUMAN GEOGRAPHY A course of lectures and seminars, equivalent to approximately three hours per week, throughout the term; one essay.

SYLLABUS Background to the development of human geography. Research design and methodology in the discipline including bibliographical and reference sources, problem fields, problem identification and dissection, scientific method, hypothesis formation, test design, etc.

223 Faculty of Arts

REFERENCES Students will be expected to read widely in current periodicals as recommended in class.

Third Term 121-345 DEVELOPMENT IN ASIA A course of seminars and lectures, equivalent to three hours per week in third term; one essay. SYLLABUS This is an advanced course in Geography and Development. Students will be required to pursue at a more detailed and critical level some of the conceptual issues raised in the pass course. They will also be expected to begin to develop a sound multi-disciplinary knowledge of one of the following countries: Malaysia, Indonesia, Singapore, China and, only in approved cases, India. BOOKS (also see 121-341, Geography and Development) Chenery H B et al. Patterns of Development 1950-1970, 1975 Kiernan G Marx ano' Imperialism, 1974 Barrett Brown M The Economics of Imperialism, 1975 Lim D Economic Growth end Development in West Malaysia 1947- 1970, 1971 Puthucheary J J Ownership and Control in the Malayan Economy, 1960 Swift M G Malay Peasant Society in Jelebu, 1965 Buchanan I Singapore in Southeast Asia, 1972 Furnivall J S Colonial Policy and Practice, 1948 Geertz C Agricultural Involution, 1963 Mortimer R ed Showcase State, 1973 Buchanan K The Transformation of the Chinese Earth, 1970 Schram S ed Authority, Participation and Cultural Change in China, 1973 Schram S ed Mao Tse-Tung Unrehearsed, 1974 Wheelwright E L & Macfarlane B The Chinese Road to Socialism 1972 OR

121-348 PROBLEM AREAS IN MAN-BIOSPHERE RELATIONS A course of lectures and seminars equivalent to approximately three hours per week throughout the term; one essay. SYLLABUS A close study of one or more specific topics such as: Natural hazards and human response; Urbanization and the environment; Problems of arid and semi-arid regions; Transformation of man-biosphere relations under "development" in selected Third World countries; "Northern development" in Australia. In 1978 the topic will be the study of Natural Hazards and Human Response, and the course will concentrate on the study of extreme geophysical events, including earthquake, vulcanism, hurricanes, tsunamis, exceptional snowfall, flood, drought and wind- driven fire. The nature of the events will be studied, together with methods of risk assessment, human perception of the hazard and response to this perception, and the organization of disaster relief. Particular examples will be examined in detail. 224 Geography

REFERENCES Students will be expected to read widely in the periodical literature, and will gain experience in the use of first-hand accounts to establish the nature of an event and the damage caused. EXAMINATION One 1 1/q-hour examination paper at the end of each term. Final assessment for the year will be based on the results of the examinations and written work presented during the year. To obtain honours students must score a minimum of 65 per cent of the total marks for the examinations, and 65 per cent of the aggregate marks for written work.

121-363 GEOGRAPHY PART 3C (IONS) This course is the third year course for combined honours students. Syllabus as for Geography 3 (Ions) and selected parts of Geography 38 (Ions) under the direction of the chairman.

121-461 GEOGRAPHY PART 4A This course will involve the preparation of a thesis of 12 000 words on an approved topic, based upon individual research work. Seminars will be held on the speciaiisms involved, and on geograph;c methodology and research techniques. During second term, a series of seminars reviewing student research progress will be held over a two-week period to be notified. BOOKS Reading lists will be provided for the seminars. EXAMINATION One 2-hour paper and a thesis.

121-462 GEOGRAPHY PART 4В This course is for combined honours students. Syllabus is selected parts of Geography 4A under the direction of the chairman. N.B. Pure honours students enrol in Geography 4A. Combined honours students enrol in Geography 48. 121-801 POSTGRADUATE DIPLOMA IN GEOGRAPHY The course for the postgraduate Diploma in Geography will require two years' part-time study involving four hours of class work per week in each of the three teaching terms. The class work will consist of a combination of lectures, seminars and practical work as appropriate to each of the units in the course. For some units fieId work at weekends or during vacations may be required. Classes will be held in the late afternoon or early evening. To complete the course students will be required to pass four half-year units. Attendance at a minimum of 80 per cent of the class hours will be required, and assessment will be based on the marks given for essays and seminar papers or for practical and/or field reports. The course is intended for graduates who desire to deepen and widen their knowledge of Geography but who do not necessarily wish to proceed to a research degree. The Diploma course will not normally

225 н Faculty of Arts

substitute for the M.A. Preliminary course for students with pass degrees wishing to proceed to the M.A., though students who have successfully completed the Diploma course may, under certain circumstances, and with the express permission of Faculty, be admitted to M.A. candidature.

PREREQUISITE The entrance requirement for the course will be a bachelor's degree with a major in geography or related discipline. With the permission of the faculty acting on the recommendation of the chairman of the department, holders of tertiary qualifications from approved institutions may be admitted to the course.

TEMPORARY REGULATION Students who before 1st January 1977 had successfully completed at least one year of M.A. Preliminary study in the University of Melbourne, may. with faculty's permission, qualify for the Diploma with one year's study before 31st December, 1979.

SYLLABUS

121-811 Postgraduate Diploma in Geography 1 (First Year) Two units chosen from the following list.

121-812 Postgraduate Diploma in Geography 2 (Second Year) A further two units chosen from the following list. Note: Not all the units listed below will be available In any one year. The units to be offered by the department in any year will be announced before 1 December of the preceding year.

PROBLEMS IN MODERN GEOGRAPHY A course of lectures and seminars dealing with current philosophical and methodological problems in Geography, recent trends in the development of particular branches of Geography, and current problems in some of these branches. The course will require wide reading in recent geographical publications For assessment students will be required to submit one essay of about 4,000 words and at least one seminar paper.

AUSTRALIAN DEVELOPMENT 1788-2000 A course of lectures and seminars dealing with rural, industrial and urban development in Australia. Past patterns, current trends, and future prospects for the development of particular resources and regions will be examined. For assessment students will be required to submit one essay of about 4,000 words and at least one seminar paper.

Preliminary reading: Heathcote R L Australia, Longmans 1975

URBANIZATION AND TRADE A course of lectures and seminars dealing with the development of trading cities and towns. The local and extra-local role of European cities in shaping the economic, social, intellectual and political life of 226 Geography

Europe before the Industrial Revolution. The development of European and extra-European port- and trading-cities; their industrial functions and interrelationships. For assessment students will be required to submit one essay of about 4,000 words and at least one seminar paper.

THE GEOGRAPHY OF ENERGY IN THE NON-COMMUNIST WORLD A study of past and present resources (their origins, exchanges and rates of discovery and use) within the contexts of technological change and international capitalist structures, together with implications for the future. For assessment students will be required to submit one essay or project paper of about 4,000 words and at least one seminar paper.

CITY GROWTH IN THE NINETEENTH AND TWENTIETH CENTURIES A course of lectures and seminars dealing with the processes and problems of city growth in the industrial age. The processes of central and suburban growth in European, North American, and Australian cities will be examined and compared. The impact of past planning policies and the parameters of future planning strategies will be discussed. For assessment students will be required to submit cue essay of about 4,000 words and at least one seminar paper. Preliminary reading: Briggs Asa Victorian Cities Stretton H Ideas for Australian Cities

RURAL INDUSTRY IN VICTORIA A course consisting of two lectures and two hours' practical work or seminar per week giving a multidisciplinary, temporal/spatial survey of rural Victoria since 1880. Developments in agricultural, mining, forest, recreation, and rural-residential land use will be analysed. For assessment students will present a report based on their practical work.

Preliminary reading: Peel L Rural Industry in the Port Phillip Region, MUP 1974

SPATIAL DATA ANALYSIS A course of one lecture and three hours' practical work per week dealing with current computer-oriented techniques of spatial data collection, manipulation and display. It will involve students in the preparation of data for several kinds of computer analysis as well as the use of the University's CYBER 72 computing system. Students will examine case studies in which these techniques will be applied and evaluated in the light of their own teaching, research or occupation interests.

TOWNS AND CITIES OF THE THIRD WORLD A course of lectures and seminars focussing attention on the urban places of the Third World in relation to their inter- and intra-national trade structures and capitalistic formations, comparing their growth and socio- economic structures with those of western cities, and discussing their specific problems.

227 Faculty of Arts

For assessment students will be required to submit an essay of about 4,000 words and at least one seminar paper.

COASTAL MANAGEMENT A course of seminars, practical work, field work and supervised project work during first term and the first half of second term. Syllabus: Coastal systems, with special reference to active changes, both natural and man-induced, in the coastal landscape. Aims and methods in coastal management, illustrated by case studies. Criteria used in developing and implementing a coastal management programme. For assessment students will be required to submit a project report. Reading: Bird E C F Coasts, 2nd ed, ANU Press 1976 Cullen P W Bird E C F & Sorenson J Coastal Zone Management: an Aus- tralian perspective (in preparation)

POLITICAL BOUNDARIES A course of lectures and seminars dealing with the evolution of international, federal, and local boundaries; the border landscapes in which they are located and the disputes which sometimes attend their development. One section of the course will deal with the maritime boundaries marking national claims to territorial waters, fishing zones and continental shelves. For assessment students will be required to submit one essay of about 4,000 words and at least one seminar paper. Reading: Prescott J R V The Geography of Frontiers and Boundaries, Hutchinson 1967 Prescott J R V The Map of Mainland Asia by Treaty, MUP 1975

SPECIAL STUDY This unit may be taken only as the final unit for the Diploma. A supervised reading course in one of the fields of geography leading to the preparation of an essay of about 6,000 words on a subject of the student's choice.

MASTER OF ARTS

121-601 P. SCHOOL OF GEOGRAPHY Candidates are required to prepare a thesis on a subject approved by the chairman of the department. They will work under the supervision of a member of the department, to whom they should report regularly upon the progress of their work. An entry form for examination for higher degrees must be submitted to the Registrar. Three copies of each thesis (A4, typewritten, double-spaced) should be submitted, one of which will be deposited in the University Library. Candidates may also be examined orally on the subject of the thesis. The thesis should normally be submitted for examination within two years from the commencement of candidature for M.A. by full-time candidates and within four years by part-time candidates. 228 Germanic Studies

Except in special circumstances and with the permission of the faculty no thesis or course work will be examined unless the candidate presents for examination within four years from the commencement of his candidature or, in the event of his having been granted leave of absence for the maximum period of one year, within five years from the commencement of his candidature.

DEPARTMENT OF GERMANIC STUDIES Chairman of Department and Reader: Dr H. MACLEAN, Ph.D., Dip.Ed. Professor: Professor G. SCHULZ, Dr.phil. (Leipzig) ORDINARY DEGREE (Details for the Honours Course are set out at the end of this section.) The department of Germanic Studios offers courses in German, Dutch and Swedish. For German language and literature there is a three-year pass course and a four-year honours course, both pure and combined; a pass in H.S.C. German or the equivalent is assumed. However, there is also a German course which requires no previous knowledge of the Ian- guage, and which merges with the ordinary course in third year. Dutch language and literature may be taken as a three-year pass course or as a four-year combined honours course, and Swedish as a three-year pass course. For Dutch and Swedish, no prior knowledge of the language Is assumed. Dutch 1 and/or Swedish 1 can, of course, be usefully combined with German 1, especially in a major German course sequence at honours level. Pass students of German, Dutch and Swedish may enrich their courses by an additional subject in second and/or third year. A number of scholarships are available to the best students for further study in Europe. SUBJECTS OFFERED: German parts 1, 2, 3 and 1A, 2A Dutch parts 1, 2, 3 Swedish parts 1, 2, 3 Germanic Studies parts 2B, 3B BOOKS OF REFERENCE: GERMAN The following reference works will be used throughout the course: (a) Dictionaries Ridenberg W & Messinger H Langenscheidt's Concise Dictionary, English-German German-English 2 vols latest ed or Klatt E and G Langenscheidt's Pocket Dictionary of the English and German Languages, 2 pts in 1 vol latest ed Wehrle-Eggers Deutscher Wortschatz, 2 vols Fischer Bйcherei 953/954 Farrell R B A Dictionary of German Synonyms, CUP paperback latest ed Sprachbrvckhaus, F A Brockhaus Wiesbaden latest ed Grundwortschatz Deutsch, bearbeitet von Heinz Oehler, Ernst Klett Verlag Stuttgart latest ed Grundwortschatz Deutsch, Ubungen and Tests, zusammengestellt von Franz Eppert, Ernst Klett Verlag Stuttgart latest ed Griesbach H Deutsche Grammatik im Überblick, Max Hueber Verlag München 1970

229 Faculty of Arts

(b) Grammars and Books with Exercises Borgert U H G & Nyhan C A A German Reference Grammar, Sydney UP 1976 (c) History of Literature Frenzel H A and E Daten deutscher Dichtung, 2 vols dtv München latest ed Ritchie J M Periods in German Literature, Wolff 1966 (d) Background Adams Marion ed The German Tradition, John Wiley 1971 All students should possess: Griesbach H Deutsche Grammatik Im Überblick Borgert U H G & Nyhan C A A German Reference Grammar, Sydney UP 1976 Any one of the English-German, German-English dictionaries.

126-101 GERMAN PART i The course assumes that students have reached pass standard In German at the Higher School Certificate examination. A course of four lectures/seminars per week throughout the year, together with one hour in the language laboratory.

SYUлвus The course is divided into the study of language and the study of literature. The study of language will aim at improving linguistic skills in the spoken and written idiom by treating and discussing topics relating to present-day society in German-speaking countries. These topics will be introduced orally and aurally in the language laboratory and developed in class-work. The course in literature will consist of an introduction to the study of literature, illustrated by selected texts from the 18th to the 20th centuries, and an intensive study of selected texts by 20th century authors. Various kinds and methods of response to and understanding of literary texts, problems of critical assessment of literary values, and questions of literature as seen in the social and historical context of Germany and the German-speaking countries will be discussed.

BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: Hammond R T Heutzutage, OUP Wiese B v Deutschland erzählt. Von Schnitzler bis Johnson, Fischer 500 Plenzdorf U Die neuen Leiden des jungen W, Suhrkamp Dirrenmatt F Der Besuch der alten Dame, Methuen Schulz G German Verse, Macmillan Thomson P J An Introduction to Modern German Poetry, John Wiley Adams M & Kirchhoff 1 Zeitgeschehen, Harrap Heine H Deutschland. Ein Wintermärchen, Reclam 230 Germanic Studies

EXAMINATION One 3-hour examination and oral/aural tests at the end of the year; language tests will be given each term. Assignments throughout the year will be taken Into account at the annual examination.

126-102 GERMAN PART 1 A

Four classes per week throughout the year with two additional sessions in the language laboratory.

SYLLABUS The course is adapted to the needs of students who have little or no knowledge of German, and It is therefore open only to these. it offers an Introduction to all the important structures of the German language and provides a training in pronunciation, aural and written comprehension, conversation, grammar, translation and composition. It is an Intensive course which alms at enabling students to make active use of the spoken and written language within a relatively short period. Audio-visual aids (language laboratory, films and slides) will assist students to achieve this aim. The number of students admitted to the subject will be limited. Applica- tion for enrolment must be made through the Arts Faculty office during the normal enrolment period on the appropriate "Quota Subject" form. When deciding priorities, the Germanic Studies department may contact students directly for further information. Candidates may also be required to undergo an elementary language-oriented test. Successful completion of this subject is a prerequisite for German 2A and may then lead to German 3. BOOKS For preliminary reading: Adams M ed The German Tradition, J Wiley Prescribed textbooks: Schulz-Grìesbach Deutsche Sprachlehre f йr Ausländer, Grundstufe in l Band, Hueber Munich and the supplementary works: Contrastive Grammar, German-English von Adele T Рalтbeгg und U Henry Gerlach, Hueber München Glossar Deutsch-Englisch, Hueber München Additional texts will be available from the department. Reference books: Langenscheidt's Concise Dictionary, Eng- Rйdenbеrg W & Messinger H lish-German, German-English, 2 vols latest ed or Klatt E & G Lengenscheidt's Pocket Dictionary of the English and Ger- man Languages, 2 pts in 1 vol latest ed Farrell R B A Dictionary of German Synonyms, latest ed CUP paperback WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit regular written work as specified by the lecturer. 231 Faculty of Arts

EXAMINATION One 3-hour written examination, written class and terminal tests, oral- aural tests. The quality of the candidate's work throughout the course will be taken into account.

126-201 GERMAN PART 2 (PASS) A course of one lecture and four seminars with one hour in the language laboratory per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS (i) Advanced language studies (one 2-hour language seminar plus one hour in the language laboratory). (ii) German literature: authors, themes and forms 1770-1970 (one leс- ture per week throughout the year). (iii) One 2-hour seminar per week throughout the year on drama, prose and poetry of the 19th and 20th centuries. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: (i) Schulz-Griesbach Moderner Deutscher Sprachgebrauch, latest ed Max Hueber Verlag linchei Hammond Robin T Fortbildung in der deutschen Sprache, OUP 1969 (Students will not be required to purchase this book.) (ii) and (iii) (a) Prose: Deutschland erzählt. Von Goethe bis Tieck, Fischer 738 Deutschland erzählt. Von B йchner bis Hauptmann, Fischer 711 (b) Drama: Brecht B Leben des Galilei, Suhrkamp Buchner G Dentons Tod, Reclam Hauptmann G Vor Sonnenaufgang, Ullstein Kleist H v Der Prinz von Hamburg, Reclam (c) Poetry: The Penguin Book of German Verse, ed Forster, latest ed Penguin Additional material will be supplied by the department. EXAMINATION One 3-hour examination; language tests; oral-aural tests; assignments submitted throughout the year will be taken into consideration.

126-202 GERMAN PART 2A (PASS) Admission to this subject depends upon successful completion of German Part 1A. A course of six hours per week throughout the year one of which will be conducted in the language laboratories. SYLLABUS i Advanced language study. A two-hour seminar and one class, together with one hour in the language laboratory. 232 Germanic Studies

ii Introduction to the study of literature and German society illustrated by selected texts from the 17th to the 20th centuries. A one-hour lecture throughout the year. Iii Prose, drama and poetry of the 19th and 20th centuries. A one-hour seminar throughout the year. BOOKS (i) Hammond R T Heutzutage, OUP (ii) Texts supplied by the department (iii) Adams M & Kirchhoff Zeitgeschehen, Harrap Brecht B Der kaukasische Kreidekreis, Suhrkamp Dürrenmatt F Der Besuch der alten Dame, Methuen Schulz G German Verse, Macmillan German Short Stories 2, Penguin WRITTEN WORK Weekly exercises and one 2,000 word essay. EXAMINATION One 3-hour examination, term tests, oral examinations. Written work submitted throughout the year will be taken into account.

126-203 GERMANIC STUDIES PART 2В (PASS) Students who have completed German Part 1 or 1A or Dutch Part 1 or Swedish Part 1 and who have completed or enrol for German Part 2 or 2A or Dutch Part 2 or Swedish Part 2 may take this subject after obtaining formal approval from the chairman of the department. SYLLABUS Two seminar courses selected from Germanic Studies Part 2 (hofs). (For books and examinations see Germanic Studios Part 2 (hoes).)

126-301 GERMAN PART 3 (PASS) A course of five lectures/seminars per week: (i) A lecture on German literature in context (one hour per week). (ii) A seminar on German literary texts between 1750 and 1960 (two hours per week). (iii) A language seminar (two hours per week).

BOOKS (i) and (ii) German literature: Hebbel F Maria Magdalena, Reclam Hauptmann G Der Biberpelz, Ullstein Wedekind F Frühlings Erwachen, Reclam Lessing G E Minna von Garnhelm, Reclam Goethe J W Die Leiden des ¡ungen Werthers, Reclam Goethe J W Faust I, Reclam Schiller F Maria Stuart, Reclam Plenzdorf U Die neuen Leiden des jungen W., Suhrkamp Fontane Th Schach von Wuthenow, Reclam Deutschland erzählt. Von Goethe bis Tieck, Fischer 738

233 Faculty of Arts

Deutschland erzählt. Von B йchner bis Hauptmann, Fischer 711 (iii) Language seminar Kaufmann S & G Übungen zur deutschen Sprache 1, Duden Übungsbuch 5 Additional textual material will be made available by the department.

EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper; assignments on literature; language tests; oral tests.

126-303 GERMANIC STUDIES PART 3В (PASS) Students who have completed German Part 2 or 2A or Dutch Part 2 or Swedish Part 2 and who have completed or enrol for German Part 3 or Dutch Part 3 or Swedish Part 3 may take this subject after obtaining formal approval from the chairman of the department.

SYLLABUS Four half-year courses selected from Germanic Studies Part 3 (hofs) and to be approved by the chairman of the department. (For books and examinations see Germanic Studies Part 3 (hops.))

126-111 DUTCH PART 1 A course of three lectures, one tutorial and one language laboratory session per week throughout the year. Lecture and language laboratory times can be obtained from the departmental notice-board but tutorial times will be arranged in the first week of term.

SYLLABUS (i) Grammar, translation, composition, conversation and language laboratory work. (ii) Study of prescribed texts. (iii) Outline of Dutch history and civilization. No previous knowledge of Dutch is required. Attendance at a summer school is also NOT a prerequisite. People with H.S.C. Dutch and native- speakers may be admitted directly to Dutch 2, subject to approval by the chairman of the department.

WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit regular written work as specified by the lecturer.

BOOKS Contact the department of Germanic Studies before purchasing any of the following texts: (i) Smit J & Meijer R P Dutch Grammar and Reader, Stanley Thornes London 1976 Shatter W Introduction to Dutch, Martinus Nijhoff Renier F G Dutch-English and English-Dutch Dictionary, Routledge & Kegan Paul 234 Germanic Studies

(li) Minco M Het bittere kruid, Bert Bakker (iii) Schaffer 1 A Shon History of the Netherlands. Amsterdam 1956 Wilson C The Dutch Republic, London 1968 Preliminary reading: See (iii) above.

ASSESSMENT One 3-hour language paper and an oral test of 15 minutes at the end of the year will account for approximately 50 per cent of the marks. The remainder will be assessed from essays, tests and general performance throughout the year. NOTE: An exhibition of $30 is awarded to the student with the best result in Dutch 1 at the end of the year. However, anybody who has attended a Dutch-speaking secondary school will be considered ineligible.

126-211 DUTCH PART 2 (PASS) The course will consist of four hours a week throughout the year. With prior approval those who have done HSC Dutch or are native- speakers may be admitted directly to Dutch 2. Due to the small number of students involved the time-table will be arranged in the first week of term after consultation with the students.

SYLLABUS (I) Language: Two separate language hours will be held weekly throughout the year. The level of instruction will endeavour to follow on logically from that which was reached in Dutch I in third term 1977. It is expected ex-Dutch 1 students will still possess Shatter and Smit & Meijer. Anyone joining the course for the first time at second year level who does not have these texts is advised to purchase them. (ii) Nederlandse Taalkunde: This mainly socio-linguistic course will endeavour to trace the history of the Dutch language from the early Middle Ages through to the present day, looking in particular at the effect of the Great Migra- tions on the Netherlands, the emergence of an Algemeen Beschaafd Nederlands, the fight for a standard simplified spelling, the language situation in Belgium and past and current language developments in Friesland and South Africa. In addition to the above socio-linguistic phenomena, the course will look at capita selecta from the history of Dutch grammar, e.g. the development of gij/jij/U/jullie, the tendency for strong verbs to become weak, the diminutive etc. This course will run for two terms only and will be assessed by examination at the beginning of third term. (iii) Modern Literature and Literary History: The development of Dutch literature since 1880 will be covered during the year simultaneously with selected modern literary texts. WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit regular written work as specified by the lecturers.

235 Faculty of Arts

BOOKS Contact the department of Germanic Studies before purchasing any of the following texts: (i) Grammars and dictionaries as for part 1 although K ten Bruggencate's Dutch/English, English/Dutch dictionary in two volumes published by Wolters, Groningen, is strongly recommended at this level. Koolhoven H Teach Yourself Dutch, English Universities Press London Wilmots J Voor wie al wat Nederlands kent, Wetenschappelijk Onderwijs Diepenbeek Belgium (ii) Vooys C G N de Geschiedenis van de Nederlandse Taal, Wolters Groningen Toom M C van den Nederlandse Taalkunde, Het Spectrum Utrecht 1974 Lockwood W B Informal History of the German Language, André Deutsch London (iii) Meijer R P Literature of the Low Countries, van Gorcum Assen Modern Poetry (on stencils) Elsschot W Her Dwaallicht, Querido Amsterdam Hermans W F Het behouden huis, De Bezige Bij Amsterdam Mulisch H Wat er gebeurde met Sergeant Massuro (on stencils) Wolkers J Zwarte Advent ( on stencils) Schendel A van Angelina en de lente (on stencils) Couperus L Assorted Short Stories (on stencils) Reve G van het Assorted Short Stories (on stencils) Preliminary reading: Lockwood W B Informal History of the German Language, André Deutsch London Meijer R P Literature of the Low Countries, van Gorcum Assen ASSESSMENT Language will be assessed by regular vocabulary tests based on lists circulated throughout the year. There will be two term tests and a 3-hour language examination at the end of the year. In addition a 15-minute oral examination will be held at the end of third term. Taalkunde will be assessed by a 2-hour examination held at the beginning of third term. Modern Literature will be assessed by two essays done during the year and a 2-hour examination at the end of the year. NOTE: The subject 126-203 GERMANIC STUDIES PART 26 (PASS) may be taken concurrently with Dutch Part 2 to enrich a Dutch course sequence. For details of the subject see p. 233.

126-311 DUTCH PART 3 (PASS) A course of four lectures a week throughout the year. Owing to the small group involved the time-table will be arranged in the first week of term after consultation with the students.

SYLLABUS (i) Two hours a week of advanced language study consisting of translation, composition, comprehension and conversation. Extensive stencilled material will be provided for language classes due to the lack of text books suitable for this advanced level. 236 Germanic Studies

(ii) One hour a week of Middle Dutch literature in first and second term. (iii) One hour a week in third term (following Middle Dutch) of seventeenth century poetry. (iv) One hour a week throughout the year of modern literary texts since 1860.

WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit regular written work as specified by the lecturers.

BOOKS (i) Grammars and dictionaries as for Dutch 2. ten Bruggencate's dictionary is highly recommended at this level but should be accompanied by Woordenlijst Nederlandse Taal, Martinus Nijhoff 1954 (ii) Beatrijs, Malmberg Den Bosch Karel ende Elegast, Malmberg Den Bosch (iii) Stencils will be provided (iv) Modern Poetry: Stencils will be provided. Couperus L De stille kracht, Veen Wageningen Vestdijk S De koperen tuin, Nijgh en van Ditmar Den Haag Heyermans H Op hoop van zegen, Querido Amsterdam Bordewijk Karakter, Nijgh en van Ditmar Den Haag Emants M Een nagelaten bekentenis, G A van Oorschot Amsterdam Prins A Selected works De Jong M J G Tweesprong, Nijgh Den Haag

ASSESSMENT Two 3-hour papers and an oral test at the end of the year will account for a proportion of the marks. The remainder will be assessed on the basis of essays, tests and general performance throughout the year. NOTE: The subject 126-303 GERMANIC STUDIES PART 38 (PASS) may be taken concurrently with Dutch Part 3 to augment a major course sequence in Dutch. For details of the subject see p. 234.

126-121 SWEDISH PART 1 A course of four classes per week, including one hour in the language laboratory. SYLLABUS (i) Modern Swedish expression, oral and written. (ii) Study and discussion of prescribed texts. (iii) An outline of the cultural history of Sweden with special emphasis on the nineteenth and twentieth centuries, and an introduction to modern Swedish society. The course is planned to attain a standard comparabie with that of other first year subjects, but in its early stages it Is adapted to the needs of those previously unacquainted with the language. Such students must contact the department of Germanic Studies during the preceding long vacation, and are strongly advised to attend an orientation course in February, 1978. The orientation course, however, is not obligatory for enrolment in Swedish 1.

237 Faculty of Arts

WRITTEN WORK Students are required to submit written work during the year. Some of this work will constitute part of the examination in the subject. BOOKS Students are asked to contact the lecturer in Swedish before buying their books. Hildeman N G and Beite A M Learn Swedish, Almqvist och Wiksell Stockholm 1974 Hildeman N G Hildeman P A & Olsson I Practise Swedish, Almqvist och Wiksell Stockholm 1971 Beite A M Englund G Higelin S and Hildeman N G Basic Swedish Grammar, Almqvist & Wiksell Stockholm 1975 Hjort A Manne G Wistrand P Ekroth G Leva bland människor, Sveriges Radios fõrlag Stockholm 1974 Holm M & Mathlein M Svensk, Svenska, Skriptor Stockholm 1974 Modern Svensk-engelsk ordbok, Prisma Stockholm 1974 Modern Engelsk-svensk ordbok, Prisma Stockholm 1974 Factsheets on Sweden, Swedish Institute EXAMINATION Work assessed during the year will be supplemented by two oral tests of 15 minutes each to be conducted in the second and third terms respectively and by two written tests at the beginning of the second and third terms respectively and one R-hour written examination at the end of the year.

126-221 SWEDISH PART 2 A course of four classes per week throughout the year. Students are advised to spend at least one hour in individual work in the language laboratory. SYLLABUS (i) Modern Swedish expression. (ii) Modern Swedish poetry. (iii) Modern Swedish prose. (iv) The writings of August Strindberg. (v) Contemporary Swedish debate as reflected in literature. (vi) A survey of twentieth century Swedish literature and society. (vii) Orientation in Scandinavian languages. WRITTEN WORK Students are required to submit written work during the year. This will include three assignments selected from sections (ii) to (vi) of the syllabus. These assignments and some of the other written work will form part of the examination in the subject. BOOKS Students are required to contact the lecturer in Swedish before buying their books. In most instances any edition of the prescribed text will suit. 238 Germanic Studies

(i) Modern Swedish expression • Nylund-Brodda E Holm B Deskriptiv svensk grammatik, Skriptor Trelleborg SantoSon R ed Svensk-engelsk ordbok, Låromedels fárlagen Stockholm 1968 or Svensk-engelsk ordbok, Bokfõrlaget Prisma Stockholm 1970 Kärre-Llndkvist-Nõjd-Rodin Engelsk-svensk ordbok, Norstedt Stockholm 1949 or Engelsk-svensk ordbok, Bokfõrlaget Prisma Stockholm 1970 Hjort А. Manne G. Wistrand P, Ekroth G Leve bland miniskor, Sveriges radios fõrlag Stockholm 1972 Mathlein M Läsebok för invandrare, Läromedelsfõrlagen, Stockholm 1972 Mathlein M Läsebok för invandrare, övninger, Läromedelsfõrlagen Stockholm 1972 Texts supplied by the department.

(11) Modern Swedish poetry McLean R J A Book of Swedish Verse, The Athlone Press 1968 •Tidestrõm G Lyrik fran var egen tid. Gleerups 1961 Texts supplied by the department.

(iii) Modern Swedish prose •Jersild P S Stumpen, any ed 'Johnson E Noveller, any ed •Lagerkvist P Gäst hos verkligheten, any ed •Lokrantz M G & G Litterära texter, Svenska Institutet Stockholm 1972 Niland G Dagboken, Gebers •Sundman P 0 Jägarna, any ed (iv) The writings of August Strindberg Strindberg A Fadren, any ed • Strandberg A Fгöken Julie, any ed (v) Contemporary Swedish debate •Hjort A Manne G Wistrand P Ekroth G Leva bland mãnniskor, Sveriges radios fõrlag Stockholm 1972 Texts supplied by the department.

(vi) Survey of twentieth century Swedish literature and society Hammar T Leva 1 Sverige, Sveriges radios fõrlag 1971 Texts supplied by the department.

(vii) Orientation in Scandinavian Languages • Bergman G A Short History of the Swedish Language, Swedish Institute 1973 Berulfsen B & Boardman P Elementary Norwegian, Oslo 1968 Hildeman N & Hedback A Leer dansk, Giellerup 1970 Gordon E Introduction to Old Norse, rev Taylor OUP

EXAMINATION In addition to assignments two oral tests of 20 minutes each will be conducted in the second and third terms respectively and two 2-hour written tests will be held at the beginning of the second and third terms respectively and one 3-hour written examination at the end of the year.

239 Faculty of Arts

NOTE: The subject 126-203 GERMANIC STUDIES PART 2В (PASS) may be taken concurrently with Swedish Part 2 to enrich a Swedish course sequence. For details of subject see p. 233.

126-321 SWEDISH PART 3 A course of four classes per week throughout the year. Students are advised to spend at least one hour in individual work in the language laboratory. SYLLABUS (i) Advanced modern Swedish expression. (ii) The Swedish novel in the nineteenth and twentieth centuries. (iii) The history of Swedish poetry. (iv) The writings of August Strindberg. (v) Contemporary Swedish debate as reflected in literature. (vi) Orientation in Scandinavian languages. WRITTEN WORK Students are required to submit written work during the year. This will include three assignments selected from sections (ii) to (v) of the syllabus. These assignments and some of the other written work will form part of the examination of the subject. BOOKS Students are required to contact the lecturer in Swedish before buying their books. In most instances any edition of the prescribed text will suit. (i) Advanced modern Swedish expression Bruzaeus L Wallin U Svenska, Kursverksamheten vid Lunds universitet 1972 Bruzaeus L Wallin U Mera svenska, Kursverksamheten vid Lunds universitet 1972 Bruzaeus L Wallin U Äппи mera svenska, Kursverksamheten vid Lunds universitet 1972 See section (i) of the syllabus for Swedish Part 2 (ii) The Swedish novel in the 19th and 20th centuries •Evander P G Det sista äventyret • Johnson E Nu var det 1914, any ed •Lokrantz M G & G Litterãra texter, Svenska lnstitutet Stockholm 1972 Moberg V Utvandrerne, any ed •Ragnerstam Innan dagen gryr, any ed Sõderberg R Martin Birks ungdom, any ed (iii) History of Swedish poetry Gellman C M Fredmans epistlar, Prisma 1962 •Frõding G Ur Gustaf Frõdings diktning, Svenska Вokfõrlaget 1959 McLean R J A A Book of Swedish Verse, The Athlone Press 1968 Tidestrõm G Lyrik fån var egen tid, Gleerups 1961 Material supplied by the department. (iv) The writings of August Strindberg •Strindberg A Spõksonaten, any ed 240 Germanic Studies

Strindberg A Mister Olaf, any ed 'Strindberg A Tjiinstekvinnans son, any ed

(v) Contemporary Swedish debate as reflected in literature Hammar T Leva i Sverige, Sveriges radios fõrlag 1971 Material supplied by the department.

(vi) Orientation in Scandinavian Languages 'Bergman G A Short History of the Swedish Language, Swedish institute 1973 Berulfsen B & Boardman P Elementary Norwegian, Oslo 1968 Hildeman N & Hedback A Laer dansk, Gjellerup 1970 Gordon E Introduction to Old Norse, rev Taylor OUP EXAMINATION in addition to assignments two oral tests of 30 minutes each will be conducted in the second and third terms respectively and two 2-hour written tests will be held at the beginning of the second and third terms respectively and one 3-hour written examination at the end of the year. NOTE: The subject 123-303 GERMANIC STUDIES PART 38 (PASS) may be taken concurrently with Swedish Part 3 to augment a major course sequence in Swedish. For details of subject see p. 234.

HONOURS DEGREE G. SCHOOL OF GERMANIC STUDIES Courses for the degree with honours in the school of Germanic Studies are offered from a wide range of subjects: Gorman language and literature. Dutch language and literature, Scandinavian language and literature, and Medieval Germanic languages and literature. Combinations with other schools are also possible (see pp. 519 ff.). In each case students should consult the chairman of the department, but the following guidelines are given:

Second Year The following enrolment requirements apply: Students taking an honours course in the school of Germanic Studies enrol for either German 2 (hens), German 2A (hens) or Dutch 2 (hols), or a combination of German and Dutch. Prerequisites are German 1, 1A or Dutch 1 respectively. Only those students who pursue a pure honours course in Germanic Studies also enrol for Germanic Studies Part 2 (hens). The following study requirements apply: 1. Students for a pure honours course specializing in German take German 2 (hols) or 2A (hols) plus two seminar courses from the syllabus of Germanic Studies Pert 2 (hols), plus two additional grade 2 subjects one of which is to be specially approved by the chairman of the department of Germanic Studies. 2. Students for a pure honours course combining German and Dutch take German 2 (hens), or 2A (hens), Dutch 2 (hens), plus two seminar courses selected from the syllabus of Germanic Studies Part 2 (hons), plus one additional grade 2 subject. 241 Faculty of Arts

3. Students combining honours in Germanic Studies with honours in another school take German 2 (hens) or 2A (hons) or Dutch 2 (hens), plus one seminar course selected from the syllabus of Germanic Studies Part 2 (hons) together with such work as is prescribed by the other honours school, plus one additional grade 2 subject. Third Year The following enrolment requirements apply: Students taking an honours course in the school of Germanic Studies enrol for either German 3 (hons) or Dutch 3 (hens). ONLY those students who pursue a pure honours course in Germanic Studies also enrol for Germanic Studies Part 3 (hens). The following study requirements apply: 1. Students for a pure honours course specializing in German take German 3 (hons) plus four half-year courses selected from the syllabus for Germanic Studies 3 (hons). 2. Students for a pure honours course combining German and Dutch take German 3 (hens), Dutch 3 (hens) plus two half-year courses selected from the syllabus for Germanic Studies З (hens). 3. Students combining honours in Germanic Studies with honours in another school take German 3 (hens) or Dutch 3 (hens) plus one half-year course selected from the syllabus for Germanic Studies 3 (hens) together with such work as the other honours school r - quires. е Fourth Year Pure honours students in the school of Germanic Studies enrol for and study Germanic Studies Part 4S (hons) and Germanic Studies Part 4T (hons). Students combining honours in the school of Germanic Studies with honours in another school enrol for and study Germanic Studies Part 43 (hens).

Examination requirements: The final examination will consist of two parts, part I taken at the end of third and part II at the end of fourth year.

Part I: One 3-hour paper, as for the ordinary degree, an oral test of thirty minutes, and papers in relation to the half-courses taken.

Pure Honours: Four papers of which not more than one may be taken at a prescribed date prior to the time of the end-of-year examinations. Combined Honours: One paper taken at the time of the end-of-year examinations. Candidates are required to prepare under supervision for the thesis which forms part of the final examination of the school. Choice of topic must be made by the beginning of second term after consultation with the chairman of the department.

Part li: The examination of all honours students consists of a thesis of not more than 10,000 words which is to be handed in on the first day of third term, an oral test of thirty minutes, and papers in relation to the half-courses taken.

Pure Honours: Six papers of which not more than two may be taken at a prescribed date prior to the time of the end-of-year examinations. 242 Germanic Studies

Combined Honours: Three papers of which not more than one may be taken at a prescribed date prior to the time of the end-of-year examinations. A thesis of not more than 10,000 words is to be handed in on the first day of third term. Comments: Admission to the honours course is conditional upon satisfactory performance in the first year, and students must be approved by the faculty of Arts as candidates for the degree with honours. The chairman of the department of Germanic Studies will normally recommend such approval for candidates who have gained at least second-class honours either in German 1 or Dutch 1. Admission to German Part 2A (honours) will only be granted to students who have gained exceptionally good results in German Part 1A, and who have obtained special permission from the chairman of the department of Germanic Studies. No extra work will be demanded for admission to German 2 (hofs), German 2A (hofs) or Dutch 2 (huns).

126-261 GERMAN PART 2 (IONS) German Part 2 (Pass) together with one seminar course selected from those listed under Germanic Studies Part 2 (Ions). EXAMINATION As for the ordinary degree together with the examination for the seminar course taken.

126-262 GERMAN PART 2A (IONS) German Part 2A (Pass) together with one seminar course selected from those listed under Germanic Studies Part 2 (Ions). EXAMINATION As for the ordinary degree together with the examination for the seminar course taken.

126-271 DUTCH PART 2 (IONS) Dutch Part 2 (Pass) together with one seminar course selected from those listed under Germanic Studies Part 2 (Ions). EXAMINATION As for the ordinary degree together with the examination for the seminar course taken.

126-263 GERMANIC STUDIES PART 2 (IONS) For pure honours students: two seminar courses throughout the year: (i) German Language and Literature around 1200. (ii) Reformation texts from North West Europe; Germanic Philology. Lecturers in charge will consult with students on textbooks and other textual material.

243 Faculty of Arts

EXAMINATION One three-hour paper or an equivalent examination for each seminar course taken by the student.

126-361 GERMAN PART 3 (IONS) German Part 3 (Pass) together with one half-year course selected from those listed under Germanic Studies Part 3 (lions). EXAMINATION Final examination part I. See p. 242. 126-371 DUTCH PART 3 (IONS) Dutch Part 3 (Pass) together with one half-year course from those listed under Germanic Studies Part 3 (Ions). EXAMINATION Final examination part I. See p. 242.

126-363 GERMANIC STUDIES PART З (IONS) For pure honours students, specialising in German: Four half-year courses selected from the list available in the department. For pure honours students, combining German with Dutch: Two half-year courses selected from the list available in the department. sYLLABus A list of courses is available from the department. Courses will be available depending on enrolment numbers. Details will be provided by the department. EXAMINATION Final examination, part 2. See p. 242.

126-461 GERMANIC STUDIES PART 4S (IONS)

Three half-courses, selected from the list provided under Germanic Studies Part 3 (Ions).

126-462 GERMANIC STUDIES PART 4T (IONS) Three half-courses, selected from the list provided under Germanic Studies Part 3 (Ions). SYLLABUS See under Germanic Studies Part 3 (Ions). Courses will be available depending on enrolment numbers. Details will be provided by the department. 244 History

EXAMINATION Final examination, part 2. See p. 242.

MASTER OF ARTS 126-601 G. SCHOOL OF GERMANIC STUDIES Candidates will under supervision prepare a thesis in either German or Dutch on an approved subject and will be required to report to their supervisor regularly during the year. Candidates are expected to pass an oral test covering the general field of their research. Research students are required to attend the research seminars held by the department. An entry form for examination for higher degrees must be submitted to the Registrar. Three copies of each thesis (A4, typewritten, dour e-spaced and bound) should be submitted, one of which will be deposited in the departmental library, another in the University Library. Each copy should be provided with a summary in English up to 1,500 words in length. The thesis should normally be submitted for examination within two years from the commencement of candidature for M.A. by full-time candidates and within four years by part-time candidates. Except In special circumstances and with the permission of the faculty no thesis or course work will be examined unless the candidate presents for examination within four years from the commencement of his candidature or, in the event of his having been granted leave of absence for the maximum period of one year, within five years from the commencement of his candidature.

DEPARTMENT OF HISTORY Chairman of Department: Dr ALISON M. H. PATRICK, B.A., Ph.D. Max Crawford Professor of History: Professor G. M. DENING, Ph.D. (Harv.) M.A. (Harv. & Melb.) Ernest Scott Professor of History: Professor G. N. BLAINEY, M.A. 1. Subjects offered in the History School are listed below. In an attempt to give all students the opportunity to take subjects of their choice the lecture time-table has been planned for 1978/79, alternating day and evening lectures where appropriate. Day lectures are between 9 a.m. and 4.15 p.m.; evening lectures are at 4.15 p.m. and 5.15 p.m. Details for the Honours School follow those for the Ordinary degree.

Subject Lecture times

First Year 1978 1979 131-101 History 1A (British History 1485-1700) Evening Day 131-102 History 1B (Age of Revolutions 1750-1800) Day Evening 131-103 History 1C (The Ancient World) Evening Day 131-104 History 1D (Culture Contact in the Pacific) Day Not avail. 245 Faculty of Arts

1978 1979 131-105 History 1 E (Urban History) Not avail. Evening 131-106 History 1F (Prehistoric Archaeology) Day Day Second year Ordinary degree 131-201 History 2G (Australian)• Evening Day 131-202 History 2H (American)• Day Evening 131-203 History 2J (East Asian)• Day Day 131-204 History 2K (French)• Day Evening 131-205 History 2L (Modern British) • Evening Evening 131-206 History 2M (Pre-classical Antiquity)• Day Evening 131-207 History 2N (German) Evening Day 131-210 History 2Q (Roman)• Evening Day 131-213 History 2T (Social & Reflective) • Not avail. Day 131-214 History 2V ((Reformation Europe)• Evening Day Honours degree 131-262 History 2H Ions (American) • Day Evening 131-263 History 2J Ions (East Asian)• Day Day 131-264 History 2K Ions (French)• Day Evening 131-265 History 2L Ions (Modern British) • Evening Evening 131-266 History 2M Ions (Pre-classical Antiquity)• Day Evening 131-267 History 2N Ions (German) Day Evening 131-270 History 20 Ions (Roman)• Evening Day 131-273 History 2T Ions (Social & Reflective) • Not avail. Day 131-274 History 2V Ions (Reformation Europe)• Evening Day Third year Ordinary degree 131-301 History 3G (Australian)• Evening Day 131-302 History 3H (American)• Day Evening 131-303 History 3J (East Asian)• Day Day 131-304 History 3K (French)• Day Evening 131-305 History 3L (Modern British) • Evening Evening 131-306 History 3M (Pre-classical Antiquity)• Day Evening 131-310 History ЭQ (Roman)• Evening Day 131-311 History 3R ("Renaissance" Italy) Day Day 131-313 History 3T (Social & Reflective)• Not avail. Day 131-314 History 3V (Reformation Europe)• Evening Day Honours degree 131-361 History 3G Ions (Australian) Evening Day 131-362 History 3H Ions (American)• Day Evening 131-363 History 3. Ions (East Asian)• Day Day 131-364 History 3K Ions (French)• Day Evening 131-365 History 3L Ions (Modern British) • Evening Evening •May be taken as either a grade 2 or a grade 3 subject, but not both. 246 History

1978 . 1979 131-366 History 3M Ions (Pre-classical Antiquity) Day Evening 131-370 History 3Q Ions (Roman)• Evening Day 131-371 History 3R Ions ("Renaissance" Italy) Day Day 131-372 History 3S Ions (Early Modern British) Day Day 131-373 History 3T Ions (Social & Reflective) • Not avail. Day 131-374 History 3V Hons (Reformation Europe)• Evening Day

Fourth year 131-461 History 4W Ions (Theory & Method of History) 131-462 History 4X Ions (Special Study)

Postgraduate 131-499 M.A. Preliminary Examination—School of History 131-601 M.A. School of History 131-701 Ph.D. Department of History

2. Major: A major in History consists of: one grade 1 subject one grade 2 subject one grade 3 subject

3. Prerequisites: A grade 1 History subject is a prerequisite for all grade 2 History subjects, and a grade 2 History subject is a prerequisite for all grade 3 History subjects. East Asian Studies 1 is an acceptable prerequisite for History 2J (East Asian History). History 1C, History 1F or Classical Studies 1A are prerequisites for History 2M (Pre-Classical Antiquity). History 1 C is a recommended preliminary for History 2Q (Roman History). German Part 1 is an acceptable prerequisite for History 2N (German History). French Part 1 is an acceptable prerequisite for History 2K (French) and French Part 2 is an acceptable prerequisite for History 3K.

4. Progression: All subjects listed as grade 2 pass, except German History, are also offered at grade 3 level to permit flexibility in choosing a major, but none of these may be taken at both levels. 'Renaissance"' History is normally available only at grade 3 level but may by arrangement be taken at grade 2 level.

5. No external enrolments are accepted.

• May be taken as either a grade 2 or a grade 3 subject, but not both.

247 Faculty of Arts

131-101 HISTORY 1A (BRITISH HISTORY, C. 1558-1689) Mr L. R. Gardiner A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS The history of England c. 1558-1689, with special regard to the period from 1603-1660.

OPTIONAL ADDITIONAL WORK (see p. 27) Additional work will consist of lectures on selected authors and wider reading by students in these authors. The second term essay may be written on the additional work.

BOOKS (a) Prescribed for preliminary reading: •Smith A G R The Government of Elizabethan England, Arnold •Aylmer G E A Short History of Seventeenth-Century England, Mentor Books

(b) Prescribed textbooks: •Elton G R The Tudor Constitution, CUP •Hurstfieid J & Smith A G R eds Elizabethan People, State and Society, Arnold •Kenyon J P The Stuart Constitution, CUP •Elton G R England Under the Tudors, Methuen •Tanner J R English Constitutional Conflicts of the Seventeenth Century, CUP Hill C Society and Puritanism in Pre-Revolutionary England, Mercury Books Further reading will be suggested during the course.

(c) Recommended for additional work: • Bunyan J Grace Abounding, etc, Everyman •Bunyan J The Holy War, Sovereign Grace Union •Huehns G Selections from Clarendon, World's Classics • Milton J Prose Writings, Everyman Aylmer G E The Levellers in the English Revolution, Thames & Hudson paperback Further reading will be suggested during the course.

WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit written work at the times specified early in first term. This will consist of not more than one short essay (2,000 words) in first term and one essay (3,000 words) in second term. The Rosemary Merlo Prize for the best essay in the subject will be awarded annually.

EXAMINATION Not more than two 3-hour papers. Written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination. The examination papers will allow intending honours students to use their additional work.

248 History

131-102 HISTORY 1 B (THE AGE OF REVOLUTIONS, 1750-1800)

Dr A. Patrick A course of two lectures and one tutorial oer week throughout the year. with one additional lecture (optional) during part of the year, and individual guided study in carrels during a short part of first term.

SYLLABUS A study of the relationship between social tensions, social and political concepts and political action in the American colonies in the second half of the eighteenth century and in France in the last quarter of the eighteenth century. Particular attention will be paid to the connections between ideology and revolutionary action, and to the social situations giving "democratic"' assumptions their relevance. The areas of study will be the American Revolution and the French Revolution of 1789, including some study of the impact of revolutionary events on local communities and of the significance of local responses.

OPTIONAL ADDITIONAL WORK (see p. 27) The syllabus for additional work for those specially interested in some of the problems raised by the course, and particularly for those considering entry to the honours school In history, will consist of further study of social structures and tensions and the significance attached to these by historians seeking to explain the origins and course of revolutionary movements. BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Hobsbawm E J The Age of Revolution, Mentor (b) Prescribed textbooks: 'Bailyn B The Ideological Origins of the American Revolution, Harvard UP, paperback edition 'Henretta James A The Evolution of American Society 1700-1815, loath 'Morgan E S The Birth of the Republic, Chicago 'Rudé G Revolutionary Europe, Fontana (c) Reference books: Detailed reading-lists will be distributed in lectures. The following books should be of use to all students, irrespective of their special interests. Cobban A History of Modern France, vols 1-2, Penguin Jacobson D L ed Essays on the American Revolution, Holt, Rinehart Lefebvre G The Coming of the French Revolution, Vintage Palmer R R Twelve who Ruled, Atheneum Hampson N A Social History of the French Revolution, Toronto Rudé G The Crowd in the French Revolution, Oxford paperback The following books of documents, among others, will be used: Greene J P Colonies to Nation, 1763-1789, McGraw-Hill Kaplow J France on the Eve of Revolution, Wiley Stewart J I A Documentary Survey of the French Revolution, Mac- millan

249 Faculty of Arts

(d) Prescribed for additional work:

No books prescribed. Documents used for tutorial work will be distributed in lectures. Students will be able to follow up their Individual Interests by essay-work.

WRITTEN WORK Written work must be submitted at times specified during the year. This will consist of ONE short essay (1,500 words), ONE longer essay (2,500 words) and not more than TWO class-papers (800 words each). For their own interest and to help in gaining historical technique, students will be asked in first term to undertake practical exercises, in individual carrels at times convenient to themselves, in note-taking from books and lectures and In the analysis of documentary sources.

EXAMINATION Not more than two 3-hour papers, one of which will be a "seen" paper. The final result will be based on an assessment of written work done during the year and examination work at the end of the year.

131-103 HISTORY 1C (THE ANCIENT WORLD)$• Mr R. T. Ridley A course of two lectures and one tutorial throughout the year. SYLLABUS A course surveying the history and institutions of the ancient near east (1st term) and the Mediterranean world to the fourth century AD (2nd term Greece, 3rd term Rome). The course is designed to fill the need for a study of the ancient (western) world, placing each of the maior civilizations in its proper context. Students will be encouraged to devote themselves to aspects which interest them, but two major themes will form a foundation: (a) the development of politics, from the democratic and autocratic institutions of the east, through the multifarious experiments of the Greeks to the oligarchy and imperialism of Rome. (b) man's changing religious experiences, especially polytheism v. monotheism. Tutorials each week will build upon the lectures by studying important (usually contemporary) documents.

BOOKS (a) Preliminary reading: Carr E H What is History?, Penguin Frankfort H Before Philosophy, Pelican Roebuck Е The World of Ancient Times, Scribners t The attention of students Is drawn to the Handbook p. 370 where there Is listed another Ancient World course (Middle Eastern Studies 1), which Is a comparative study of the cultures and mythologies of the Ancient Middle East down to the end of the Persian period. Students should note that those enrolled In the other Ancient World course Classical studies lA (See p. 83) attend some lectures In History 1C; therefore no student may receive credit for both subjects. Either Classical Studies 1A or History 1C may lead to work at Grade 2 level In both History and Classical Studies and serve as a first part of a maior In either. (In other words, students who proceed to Classical Studies 2В or 2C and/or to any Grade 2 History subject may take either Classical Studies 1A or History 1C as the first year subject of this sequence.) 250 History

(b) Prescribed textbooks: Gardiner A H Egypt of the Pharaohs, Oxford paperback Kramer S N The Sumerians, Chicago paperback Saggs H The greatness that was Babylon, Sidgwick and Jackson Frye R The heritage of Persia, Mentor Bury J History of Greece, Macmillan or N Hammond History of Greece, Oxford Cary M History ot the Greek World 323-146, Methuen paperback Boak A and Sinnigen W History of Rome, Macmillan paperback Pritchard J B The ancient near east, an anthology of texts and pictures, Princeton paperback 2 vols Herodotos Histories, trans. Carter, Oxford Thucydides, trans. Warner Penguin Livy Early history of Rome, trans. de Selincourt, Penguin Hannibalic War, trans. de Selincourt, Penguin Tacitus Complete Works, Modern Library (c) Reference books: Lists will be issued during the year.

WRITTEN WORK There will be three essays varying between 2,000 and 3,000 words during the year to be submitted at times specified.

ASSESSMENT There will be two 3-hour papers at the end of the year. Written work during the year will constitute an important part of assessment, by a formula to be determined at the beginning of the year.

131-104 HISTORY 1D (CULTURE CONTACT IN THE PACIFIC)

(Not available in 1979) Professor G. M. Darling A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year with one optional additional lecture per week during part of the year.

SYLLABUS The course will explore the ways in which indigenous societies in Polynesia and Melanesia reacted to the European intrusion in the late 18th Century and early 19th Century, and the ways in which different European social groups reacted toe totally new environment. Issues studied will Include the nature of Oceanic societies and their processes of change, different European social systems in the contact situation (beachcombers, missionaries, traders, explorers), the consequences of culture contact such as depopulation, racial prejudice and revitalisation movements, the role of scientific expeditions and anthropology in the development of European racial images. Historiographical problems will turn about interdisciplinary approaches to historical issues. A substantial amount of the students' work will involve the study of unpublished and archival material. BOOKS: Prescribed. (a) Preliminary reading:

251 Faculty of Arts

Oliver Douglas The Pacific Islands, New York 1961 Suggs R C The island Civilizations of Polynesia, N.Y. New American Lib. 1960 Howells W D The Pacific Islanders, Scribner N.Y. 1974 (b) The basic texts are the published and unpublished accounts of 18th and 19th Century explorers, missionaries, etc. They will be available in the library.

Recommended reading: Sharp, Andrew Ancient Voyages in Polynesia. Pelican 1957 Beaglehole J C The Exploration of the Pacific, London 1966 Davidson J W & Scarr J W Pacific Island Portraits, Melbourne 1970 Maude H E Of Islands and Men, OUP 1968 Harding T G & Wallace B A Cultures of the Pacific, N.Y. 1970 Dening G M ed The Marquesan Journal of Edward Roberts, Canberra 1972 Smith, Bernard European Vision and the South Pacific 1768-1850, OUP 1960 Shineberg Dorothy They Came for Sandalwood, MUP 1967 Beaglehole J C ed The Endeavour Journal of Joseph Banks, 2 vols Sydney 1963 Beaglehole J C ed The Journals of Captain James Cook, Hakluyt Society, 4 vols 1955-1968 Vayda A Peoples and Cultures of the Pacific, N.Y. 1968 WRITTEN WORK AND ASSESSMENT

Maximum possible examination would be two 3-hour papers, with no more than three essays as written work constituting part of the examination.

131-105 HISTORY 1E (URBAN HISTORY) (Not available in 1978, but available in 1979) Dr G. J. Davison A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year. Additional optional lectures or tutorials may be given during part of the year. This course alternates with History 1 D.

SYLLABUS A study of the historical development of post-industrial cities as reflected in the experience of Manchester c. 1830-50, London 1850-90, Melbourne 1860-1900 and Chicago 1890-1930. Among the issues to be considered are the nature and sources of city growth, the relations between industry and social structure, spatial segregation, problems of casual labour and urban poverty, the absorption and settlement of immigrants, the process of inner city decay, urban crime, suburban development and the character of urban politics. Particular attention will be devoted to the historical relationship between the emergence of urban problems and the development of 'urban sociology'. Tutorial work will be geared to the study of primary sources, including maps, drawings and other visual materials. BOOKS (a) Recommended for general reference: 252 History

•Briggs Asa Victorian Cities, Pelican •Engels Frederick The Condition of the Working Class in England, Panther 1989 Sheppard F The Infernal Wen — London 1808-1870, Secker and War- burg 1971 •Thompson E P & Yeo E The Unknown Mayhew, Pelican 1973 Twopeny R E N Town Life In Australia, Penguin 1973 James Stanley The Vagabond Papers, MUP Jones G Stedman Outcast London, 1971 •Mayer H & Wade Richard Chicago: Growth of a Metropolis, University of Chicago Press 1969 Park Robert E The City, Chicago University Press Sinclair Upton The Jungle, Penguin (b) Tutorial guides will be issued through the year. WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit written work at specified times during the year. This will consist of not more than two essays of 3,000 words.

EXAMINATION To be finally determined through consultation at the beginning of the year, but to consist of no more than two 3-hour papers with written work.

131-106 HISTORY 1F (PREHISTORIC ARCHAEOLOGY) (PASS) Mr W. Culican A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year, with one optional additional lecture per week during part of the year.

SYLLABUS A study of Palaeolithic and Mesolithic hunter-gatherer cultures of Africa and Europe (Term 1), Neolithic agricultural communities of Europe and Central and Western Asia (Term 2). The first half of Term 1 is devoted to archaeological method and theory. Term 3 will be devoted to the beginning of the European Bronze Age and to an outline course on Australian prehistory. Students who wish to devote the whole of Term 3 to one or the other of these areas may do so under a special tutorial system. Books (a) Preliminary reading: Clark G The Stone Age Hunters, Thames & Hudson 1967 Higham C An Introduction to Prehistoric Anthropology, University Book Shop Ltd, Dunedin N.Z . 1970

(b) Prescribed textbooks: •Bordes F The Old Stone Age, Weidenfeld and Nicolson 1968 Cole S The Neolithic Revolution, British Museum 1961 •Daniel G E The Megalith Builders of Western Europe, Pelican 1958 Fagan B M Corridors of Time: A Reader in Introductory Archaeology, Little, Brown & Co 1974 Fagan B M Introductory Readings in Archaeology, Little, Brown & Co 1970

253 Faculty of Arts

Fagan B M Men of the Earth: an Introduction to World Prehistory, Little, Brown & Co 1974 Heiser C B Seed to Civilization: the Story of Man's Food, Freeman 1973 •Hole F & Heizer R F An Introduction to Prehistoric Archaeology, Holt, Rinehart & Winston 1973 leiiaart J Earliest Civilizations of the Near East, Thames and Hudson 1965 Mulvaney D J The Prehistory of Australia, rev ed Penguin 1975 Mulvaney D J & Golson J eds Aboriginal Man and Environment in Australia, ANU Press 1971 •Piggott S Ancient Europe, Edinburgh University Press 1965 •Pilbeam D The Ascent ot Man: An Introduction to Human Evolution, Macmillan N.Y. 1972 Renfrew C ed British Prehistory: A New Outline, Duckworth 1974 •Tringham R Hunters, Fishers and Farmers of Eastern Europe 6000- 3000 B.C., Hutchinson paperback 1971 WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit at times specified during the year two essays of 3,000 words and a shorter paper embodying results of practical work. Practical work will consist of short reports on museum study, or on field excursions or participation in excavations. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper at the end of the year. Written work done during the year will also be taken into account.

131-201 HISTORY 2G (AUSTRALIAN HISTORY) (PASS) (History 3G may not be taken in addition to 2G) Professor G. Blainey, Dr G. Davison, Dr Joy Parnaby A course of two lectures and not more than one tutorial per week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS The history of Australia, 1788-1977. The course will consist of a thematic study of the Australian colonies in the nineteenth century, and an examination of selected social and political problems in the federal period. Students during the year will have the opportunity to specialize in areas of interest such as women's history, Australia between the wars, urban history and bourgeois hegemony and the rise of labor. Books (a) Introductory reading:

Clark C M H ed Select Documents in Australian History, 1788-1900, 2 vols Angus & Robertson Clark C M H A Shоrt History of Australia, Mentor Books Clark C M H A History of Australia, vols I, II and III, MUP Clark C M H ed Sources of Australian History, World Classics Crowley F K ed Modern Australia in Documents 1901-1970, 2 vols Wren Crowley F K ed A New History of Australia, Heinemann 254 History

Dixson M The Real Matilda, Penguin 1976 Encel S Tebbitt M & Mackenzie N Women and Society: An Australian Study, Cheshire Melbourne 1974 Golan R Radical and Working Class Politics. A Study of Eastern Aus- tralia 1850-1910, MUP Greenwood G ed Australia—A Social апд Political History, Angus & Robertson Inglis K S The Australian Colonists: An Exploration of Social History 1788-1870, MUP Kiddie Margaret Men of Yesterday: A Social History of the Western District of Victoria, MUP McQueen H A New Britannia: An Argument Concerning the Social Origins of Australian Radicalism and Nationalism, Pelican Reynolds H ed Aborigines and Settlers, Cassell Serie G From Deserts the Prophets Come, Heinemann Ward R The Australian Legend, Oxford (b) Reference books: Reading guides will be Issued during the course. ASSESSMENT Students will be required to submit written work at specific times during the year. This will consist of no more than two 3,000-word written pieces and no more than three shorter pieces of work, each of about 1,500 words. Students will be assessed on this instead of on a formal end-of-year examination.

131-202 HISTORY 2H (AMERICAN HISTORY) (PASS)

(History 3H may not be taken in addition to 2Н) Dr Donna Merwick, Mr A J Johnston A course of one lecture, one workshop and one tutorial per week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS Emphasis on three major topics: colonial history with attention to land, family and community; the United States during the nineteenth century: black migration and ethnic diversity; intellectual trends; territorial expansion; social and intellectual change after World War II, with focus on women and the family.

BOOKS Prescribed books (in paperback): Students will be expected to purchase a number of core books available in paperback editions. Among them: Demos J Remarkable Providences, 1600-1760 Nash G ed Class and Society in Early America Воуег P & Nissenbaum S Salem Possessed: The Social Origins of Witchcraft Cooper J F Home as Found Miller P ed American Transcendentalists

255 Faculty of Arts

Turner F J Significance of the Frontier Williams T H ed Abraham Lincoln: Selected Speeches and Writings

WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit, at specified times, three pieces of research of 3,000 words each.

EXAMINATION Not more than one 3•hour paper. Written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination.

131-203 HISTORY 2J (EAST ASIAN HISTORY) (PASS)

(History 3J may not be taken in addition to 2" Dr Sow-Thong Leong, Dr C. T. Fisher

A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS Select problems in the history of East Asia. Problems will concern the traditional society and politics of China. China's subsequent modernization and emergence as a world power.

BOOKS

(a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Fairbank J K The United States and China. Harvard paperback Bianco L Origins of the Chinese Revolution 1915-1949, Stanford paperback Mote F W Intellectual Foundations of China, Knopf paperback Chesneaux J Peasant Revolts in China 1840-1949, Thames & Hudson paperback

(b) Prescribed textbooks: Fairbank J K Reischauer E 0 & Craig A M East Asia: The Modern Transformation, Allen & Unwin - Wakeman F The Fall of Imperial China, Collier Macmillan Sheridan J E China in Disintegration, Collier Macmillan Pelissier R The Awakening of China, Capricorn paperback Spence J Emperor of China: Self Portrait of K'ang Hsi, Vintage Random paperback Teng Ssu-yu & Fairbank J K China's Response to the West. Athenaeum paperback Levenson J R Confucian China and its Modern Fate, University of California Press paperback Ch'й Tung-tsu Local Government in China under the Ch'ing, Stanford paperback Fay P W The Opium War, Norton Library paperback Wright Mary C China in Revolution: The First Phase 1900-1913, Yale paperback Schwartz B I In Search of Wealth and Power, Harper Torchbooks paperback Schiff г in H Z Sun Yet-sen and the Origins of the Chinese Revolution, Campus paperback

256 History

Chow Tse-tsung The lay Fourth Movement, Stanford paperback Isaacs H R Tragedy of the Chinesa Revolution, Stanford paperback Seiden Mark The Yenen Way in Revolutionary China, Harvard paperback Hinton W Fanshen, A Documentary of Revolution in a Chinese Village, Pelican Vogel E Canton Under Communism, Harvard paperback Schram S Mao Tse-tung Unrehearsed, Pelican (c) Full tutorial guides will be issued each term. WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit, at times specified, one essay of 3,000 words, three class exercises of 1,000 words each, and three review exercises of 1,800 words each. EXAMINATION Written work and class performance during the year will constitute the assessment.

131-204 HISTORY 2K (FRANCE SINCE 1848) (PASS) (History 3K may not be taken in addition to 2K) (May not be available in 1979) Or C. Sowerwine A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year. An additional optional lecture time will be used for occasional films.

SYLLABUS A study of French History from 1848 to the present. The course will emphasize the evolution of social structure in relation to political developments. It will focus especially upon the revolution of 1848, the Commune of 1871, the Popular Front of 1936, and the events of May-June 1968.

BOOKS (a) Suggested for preliminary reading:

•Wright G France in Modern Times, Rand McNally, 2nd ed Fasel G Modern Europe in the Making, Dodd lead paperback Zeldin T France 1848-1945: 1, Ambition, Love and Politics, Oxford

(b) Prescribed textbooks: •Feuer L ed Marx and Engels: Basic Writings on Politics and Philo- sophy, Fontana paperback • Edwards S ed P-J Proudhon: Selected Writings, Macmillan paperback •Zola E Germinal, Penguin Schulkind E The Paris Commune of 1871: The View from the Left, Jonathan Cape paperback Jellinek F The Paris Commune of 1871, Grosset & Dunlap paperback •Edwards S The Communards of Paris 1871, Thames & Hudson paperback •Barbusse H Under Fire, Everyman paperback

257 7 Faculty of Arts

Ferro M The Great War 1914-1918, Routledge & Kegan Paul paperback •Singer D Prelude to Revolution: France in May 1968, Híii & Wang paperback

One of the following four groups: Either:

Goldberg H The Life of Jean ✓aurès, University of Wisconsin Green N Crisis and Decline, The French Socialist Party in the Popular Front Era, Cornell Or: Wohl R French Communism in the Making 1914-1924, Stanford Brower D The New Jacobins, The French Communist Party and the Popular Front, Cornell Or: McClelland J S ed The French Right (from de Maistre to Maurras) Roots of the Right, Jonathan Cape paperback Weber E Action française Royalism and Reaction in Twentieth Century France, Stanford paperback Or:

Larmour P The French Radical Party in the 1930s, Stanford N.B.: Although the course is intended for non-French speakers, students with a reading knowledge of French are invited to join a tutorial involving a greater degree of primary research made possible by the use of materials in French, including independent work on the Commune and May '68. (Students who use French Part 1 as a prerequisite will be expected to join this tutorial.) The reading for this group will be as follows:

(a) Suggested for preliminary reading: Same as above

(b) Prescribed textbooks:

•Feuer (same as above) •Edwards (same as above) Zola E Germinal (in French) Pleiade edition (Vol III of Histoire des Rougon-Macquart) is recommended, but cheaper editions may be used •Lissagary P Histoire de la Commune de 1871, Maspero paperback •Rougerie J Paris libre 1871, Seuil paperback • Barbusse H Le feu, J'ai lu paperback Martin du Gard R L'été 1914, Frolic paperback • Weil S La condition ouvrière, Gallimard paperback •Singer D Prelude to Revolution: France in May 1968, Hill & Wang paperback

WRITTEN WORK Students will submit three critical essays of not more than 2,500 words as well as up to two short exercises, at times specified during the year.

EXAMINATION Not more than one 3-hour paper or synthetic essay. Class work and written work done during the year will constitute the major part of the examination. 258 History

131-205 HISTORY 2L (MODERN BRITISH HISTORY) (PASS) Dr D. Mackay, Dr D. Philips (History 3L may not be taken in addition to 2L)

A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS A study of British History from the Iate eighteenth to the twentieth century. Most emphasis is given to social, political and economic changes and their relationships, e.g. the social and political consequences of industrialization; developments in religion, ideas, working-class organizations, Anglo-Irish relations and Imperialism will all be dealt with. This course Is not designed as a background to Australian History, but aspects of It will prove useful to students who subsequently take that subject.

BOOKS (a) Prescribed for preliminary reading: Briggs A The Age of Improvement 1783-1867, Longmans (b) Prescribed textbooks: Webb R K Modern England, Dodd lead & Co Perkin Harold The Origins of Modern English Society, 1780-1880, Rout- ledge & Kegan Paul Thompson E P The Making of the English Working Class, Pelican Briggs A The Age of Improvement, 1783-1867, Longmans Ensor Sir Robert England 1870-1914, Oxford Taylor A J P English History 1914-1945, Oxford (c) Reference books: Reading guides will be issued during the year.

WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit written work at times specified during the year. This will consist of two essays of 3,000 words each and not more than two class papers of 1,500 words each.

EXAMINATION Not more than one 3-hour paper or thematic essay. Written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination.

131-206 HISTORY 2M (PRE-CLASSICAL ANTIQUITY) (PASS) (History 3M may not be taken in addition to 2M) Mr W. Culican A course of two weekly lectures and one tutorial throughout the year devoted to expanding themes studied in History IC and 1F and to examining source materials in selected topics in Ancient History and Archaeology. The topics are: (i) Early Sumerian History; (ii) The Early Dynastic Period in Egypt;

259 Faculty of Arts

(iii) The Annals of Sargon II of Assyria; (iv) The Behistun Inscription of Darius I; (v) Documents of the Athenian Empire; (vi) The Archaeological and Textual Evidence for Greek and Phoenician Colonisation; (vii) The Bronze and Iron Ages in South Europe. BOOKS (a) Prescribed textbooks: Gomme A W A Historical Commentary on Thucydides. Oxford 1958 How W and Wells J A Commentary on Herodotus, Oxford 1928 • Kramer S N The Sumerians, Chicago 1963 •Gardiner A Egypt ot the Pharaohs, Oxford 1961 Huxley G L The Early Ioniens, London 1965 'Gadd C J The Dynasty of Agade, Cambridge Ancient History fasc Blazquez J M Tartessos y los Origenes de la Colonizacion Fenicia en Occidente, Madrid 1968 •Brea L B Sicily Before the Greeks, London 1957 •Boardman J The Greeks Overseas, Pelican 1964 •Edwards I E S The Early Dynastic Period in Egypt, Cambridge Ancient History fasc Meiggs R The Athenian Empire, Oxford 1972 ' Vermente E Greece in the Bronze Age, Chicago University Press 1964 (b) Reference works: Kent R G Old Persian: Grammar, Texts, Lexicon, Oriental Society, New Haven 1950 Jacobsen T The Sumerian King List, Chicago 1966 Dunbabin T J The Western Greeks, Oxford 1948 Compernolle R van Etude de chronologie et d'historiographie siciliotes, Brussels 1960 Evans J D Prehistoric Antiquities of the Maltese Islands, London 1971 Desborough V The Greek Dark Ages, London Benn 1972 Selected papers in Historia, Proceedings of the Prehistoric Society etc WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit two essays, each of 3,000 words, at times specified during the year. EXAMINATION Not more than two 3-hour papers. Written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination.

131-207 HISTORY 2N (GERMAN HISTORY) (PASS) Dr J. H. Foster A course of one lecture and one 2-hour seminar per week throughout the year with an occasional additional lecture. SYLLABUS A study of German History since 1870. The course will explore political and social change in Imperial Germany, the Weimar Republic and Nazi Germany. Emphasis will be placed on the problems of War and Society, the development of extremist movements of the Left and the Right, and the failure of liberal democracy. Some material on Italian fascism may also be considered for comparison. 260 History

BOOKS 'Rosenberg A Imperial Germany, Beacon paperback 'Nicholls A J Weimar and the Rise ot Hitler, Papormac 'Bullock A Hitler, A Study in Tyranny, Penguin 'Bracher K D The German Dictatorship, Allen Lane

WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit written work at times specified during the year. This will consist of three essays of 3,000 words and one report as part of a group project.

EXAM I NATI O N Written work done during the year will constitute the examination.

131-210 HISTORY 2Q (ROMAN HISTORY) (PASS) (History ЗQ may not be taken in addition to 2Q) (May not be available in 1979) Mr R. T. Ridley A course of two lectures or one lecture and one seminar a week throughout the year.

Ρ sп LАВUs The course is predominantly a seminar course devoted to select periods of Roman history with special reference to source criticism: (i) From Monarchy to Republic (to c. 300 B.C.); (ii) The Augustan Principate; (iii) The period of Diocletian and Constantine.

BOOKS 'tivy Books 1-6, of which the first five are translated as The Early History of Rome by de Selincourt, Penguin ' Cicero The Republic and The Laws, Loeb Classical Library • Heurgon J The Rise of Rome, Batsford 'Grant M Roman Myths, Pelican 'Lewis & Reinhold Roman Civilisations, 2 vols, Harper & Row 'Brunt P & Moore J eds Res Gestae Divi Augusti, OUP Mentor or Grant, Penguin 'Tacitus Annals, iг Dudley, ' Suetonius Lives of the Caesars, tr Graves, Penguin 'Syrne R The Roman Revolution, OUP •Jones A H M Studies In Roman Government and Law, Blackwell 'Parker H M D History of the Roman World, A.D. 138-337, Methuen •Eusebius The History of the Church, Penguin Classic

WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit one essay or class paper each term. EXAMINATION Not more than two 3-hour papers. Class work and written work done during the year will constitute at least half the assessment.

261 Faculty of Arts

131-213 HISTORY 2T (PROBLEMS IN SOCIAL AND REFLECTIVE HISTORY) (PASS)

(History ЗT may not be taken in addition to 2T) (Not available in 1978, but available in 1979) Professor G. M. Deling No more than three hours of lectures, workshops and tutorials per week.

SYLLABUS The course will cover the image of man in the historical and social sciences in the 19th and 20th centuries, the processes of perceiving and explaining meaning in human behaviour, and such problems as relativism, objectivity, the function of inquiry as are raised by the disciplines of history, anthropology and sociology. First term will be devoted to ethnography, symbol, myth, ritual, gesture and metaphor; second term to a specific historico-anthropological problem, such as culture change in the Pacific at the European intrusion; third term to a review of problems in theory and method of social sciences.

BOOKS (a) Prescribed textbooks: •Berger P & Luckman T The Social Construction of Reality, Doubleday Anchor 1967 •Lewis O The Children of Sanchez, Penguin 1961 •Blythe R Akenfield, Penguin 1969 • Carr E H What is History? Penguin Books 1967 •Berger P Invitation to Sociology—A Humanist Approach, Penguin Books 1967

(b) Recommended reading: Aron R Main Currents in Sociological Thought, 2 vols, Penguin Books 1965 Berkhofer R F A Behavioural Approach to Historical Analysis, Free Press 1969 Collingwood R G The Idea of History, Oxford 1946 Daedalus Myth Culture and Symbol, Vol 101, 1972 Goffman E Presentation of Self in Everyday Life, 1959 Geertz C The Description of Culture 1974 Kuhn T S The Structure of Scientific Revolutions, Chicago 1970 Marwick A The Nature of History, Macmillan 1970 Meyerhoff H The Philosophy of History in our Time, Doubleday 1959 Mills C W The Sociological Imagination Stern F Varieties of History, Meridian Books 1956 Skotheim R A The Historian and the Climate of Opinion 1969 Redfield R The Little Community Zinn H The Politics of History, Boston 1970

WRITTEN WORK AND ASSESSMENT Students will be expected to engage themselves in the discovery of appropriate assessment in the course. Maximum possible examination in the course would be two 3-hour papers with written work, no more than three essays contributing part of the examination.

262 History

131-214 HISTORY 2V (REFORMATION EUROPE) (PASS) (History 3V may not be taken in addition to 2V) (May not be available in this form in 1979) Mr C. Zika A course of two-hour seminars per week throughout the year with two lectures per week In first term and one lecture per week in third term, as well as some additional discussion and tutorial sessions. The total number of hours per week not to exceed four. SYLLABUS An examination of the nature of reform within European society from c.1480 to the end of the sixteenth century, with particular emphasis upon the interrelationship between religious reformation and the call for political, social and intellectual reform. Geographically and chronologically, the course will tend to concentrate upon the Reformation in the German and Swiss territories to 1559, although other areas and the later period will not be neglected.

BOOKS (a) Preliminary reading: Elton G R Reformation Europe, 1517-1555), Fontana paperback Hillerbrand H J Men and Ideas in the Sixteenth Century, Rand McNally paperback Rice E F Jr The Foundations of Early Modern Europe, Weidenfeld and Nicolson paperback

(b) Prescribed textbooks: Dickens A G The German Nation and Martin Luther, Fontana Dillenberger J ed Martin Luther: Selections from his Writings, Double- day Anchor paperback Imperial Cities end the Reformation, Fontana Moeller В Strauss G ed Manifestations of Discontent in Germany on the Eve of the Reformation, Indiana UP paperback Strauss G ed Pre-Reformation Germany, Harper & Rowe paperback WRITTEN WORK AND ASSESSMENT Students will be required to submit written work at specified times during the year, but its length and nature will be decided In consultation with them. It will consist of not more than two essays (4,000 words each) and two class papers, or their equivalent. Assessment will be based on the two essays and class papers, or their equivalent, submitted during the year.

131-301 HISTORY 3G (AUSTRALIAN HISTORY) (PASS) (History 3G may not be taken in addition to 2G) Professor G. Blainey, Dr G. Davison, Dr Joy Parnaby A course of two lectures and not more than one tutorial per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS For details of this subject see History 2G, but additional research work will be required.

263 Faculty of Arts

ASSESSMENT Students will be required to submit written work at specific times during the year. This will consist of no more than three 3,000-word written pieces and no more than three shorter pieces of work, each of about 1,500 words. Students will be assessed on this instead of on a format end-of-year examination.

131-302 HISTORY 3H (AMERICAN HISTORY) (PASS) (History 3H may not be taken in addition to 2H) Dr Donna Merwick, Mr A. J. Johnston A course of one lecture and one workshop per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS For details of this subject see History 2H, but additional research work will be required. WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit, at specified times, three pieces of research of 3,000 words each. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. Written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination.

131-303 HISTORY 3J (EAST ASIAN HISTORY) (PASS) (History 3J may not be taken in addition to 2J) Dr Sow-Theng Leong, Dr C. T. Fisher A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year.

SYLLAВ US For details of this subject see History 2J, but additional research will be required. WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit, at times specified, one essay of 4,000 words, three class exercises of 1,000 words each, and three review exercises of 1,800 words each.

EXAMINATION Written work and class performance during the year will constitute the assessment.

131-304 HISTORY 3K (FRANCE SINCE 1848) (PASS) (History 3K may not be taken in addition to 2K) (May not be available in 1979) Dr C. Sowerwine A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year. An additional optional lecture time will be used for occasional films. 264 History

BOOKS (a) Suggested for preliminary reading: • Wright G France in Modern Times, Rand McNally, 2nd ed Faset G Modern Europe in the Making, Dodd lead paperback Zeldin T France 1848-1945: 1, Ambition, Love and Politics, Oxford (b) Prescribed textbooks: • Feuer L ed Marx and Engels: Basic Writings on Politics and Philo- sophy, Fontana paperback •Edwards S ed P-J Proudhon: Selected Writings, Macmillan paperback •Zola E Germinal, Penguin Shulkind E The Paris Commune of 1871: The View from the Left, Jonathan Cape paperback Jellinek F The Paris Commune of 1871, Grosset & Dunlap paperback •Edwards S The Communards of Paris, 1871, Thames & Hudson paperback •Barbusse H Under Fire, Everyman paperback Ferro I The Great War 1914-1918, Routledge & Kegan Paul paperback Paxton R Vichy France, Old Guard and Now Order, Barrie & Jenkins Werth A France, 1940-1955, Beacon paperback •Singer D Prelude to Revolution: France in May 1968, Hill & Wang paperback Schnapp & Vidal Naquet P French Student Uprising, Beacon paperback

One of the following four groups: Either: Goldberg H The Life of Jean Jaurès, University of Wisconsin Green N Crisis and Decline, The French Socialist Party in the Popular Front Era, Cornell Or: Wohl R French Communism in the Making 1914-1924, Stanford Brower D The New Jacobins, The French Communist Party and the Popular Front, Cornell Or: McClelland J S The French Right (from de Maistre to Maurras) Roots of the Right, Jonathan Cape paperback Weber E Action française Royalism and Reaction in Twentieth Century France, Stanford paperback Or: Larmour P The French Radical Party in the 1930s, Stanford N.B.: Although the course is intended for non-French speakers, students with a reading knowledge of French are invited to join a tutorial In- volving a greater degree of primary research made possible by the use of materials in French, Including independent work ois the Commune and May '68. The reading for this group will be as follows:

265 Faculty of Arts

(a) Suggested for preliminary reading: Same as above (b) Prescribed textbooks: • Feuer (same as above) •Edwards (sume as above) Zola E Germinal (in French) Pleiade edition (Vol Ill of Histoire des Rougon-Macquart) is recommended, but cheaper editions may be used •Lissagary P Histoire de la Commune de 1871, Ма sрего paperback •Rougerie J Paris libre 1871, Seuil paperback •Barbusse H Le feu, J'ai lu paperback Martin du Gard R L'été 1914, Frolic paperback Paxton R (same as above) singer D Prelude t о Revolution: France in May 1968, Hí11 & Wang paperback

WRITTEN WORK Students will submit three critical essays of not more than 2,500 words as well as up to two short exercises.

EXAMINATION Not more than one 3-hour paper or synthetic essay. Class work and written work done during the year will constitute the major part of the examination.

131-305 HISTORY 31 (MODERN BRITISH HISTORY) (PASS) (History 31 may not be taken in addition to 21) Dr D. Mackay, Dr D. Philips A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS AND BOOKS For details of this subject, see History 2L.

WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit written work at times specified during the year. This will consist of two essays of 3,000 words and two class papers.

EXAMINATION Not more than one 3-hour paper or thematic essay. Class work and written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination.

131-306 HISTORY 3M (PRE-CLASSICAL ANTIQUITY) (PASS) (History 3M may not be taken in addition to 2M) Mr W. Culican A course of two weekly lectures and one tutorial throughout the year devoted to expanding themes studied in History 1C and 1F and to examining source materials in selected topics in Ancient History and Archaeology. For details of this subject see History 2M, but additional class work will be required. 266 History

WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit two essays, each of 3,000 words, at times specified during the year. EXAMINATION Not more than two 3-hour papers. Written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination.

131-310 HISTORY За (ROMAN HISTORY) (PASS) (History ЗQ may not be taken in addition to 2Q) (May not be available in 1979) Mr R. T. Ridley

A course of two lectures or one lecture and one seminar each week throughout the year. SYLLABUS For details of this subject see History 2Q, but additional research will be required. WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit one essay or class paper each term. EXAMINATION Not more than two 3-hour papers. Class work and written work done during the year will constitute at least half the assessment.

131-311 HISTORY ЗR ("RENAISSANCE" ITALY) (PASS) (May not be avaiIabIe in this form in 1979) Mr I. G. Robertson A course of lectures and tutorials, not more than 3% hours per week, throughout the year. SYLLABUS A study of the social, political and cultural history of Italy from about 1250 to about 1550. BOOKS (a) Prescribed preliminary reading: (i) Europe: Students will be assumed to have some knowledge of the general history of Europe in the period under study. One or two of the following works should be read: Hale John R Renaissance Europe 1480-1520, Collins (The Fontana History of Europe) 1971 Hay Denys Europe in the Fourteenth and Fifteenth Centuries, Longmans, 1966 Holmes George Europe: Hierarchy and Revolt 1320-1450, Harvester Press in association with Fontana (The Fontana History of Europe) 1975 Miskimin Harry A The Economy of Early Renaissance Europe 1300- 1460, Prentice-Hall: Economic Civilization of Europe 1969

267 Faculty of Arts

Waley Daniel Later Medieval Europe from Saint Louis to Luther, Long- mans 1964 (ii) Italy: •Brucker Gene Renaissance Florence, John Wiley & Sons: New Dimen- sions in History: Historical Cities 1969 •Burke Peter Culture and Society in Renaissance Italy 1420-1540, Batsford 1972 •Hay Denys The Italian Renaissance in its Historical Background, CUP 1961 Hyde J K Society and Politics in Medieval Italy. The Evolution of the Civil Life, 1000-1350, Macmillan 1973 •Larner John Culture and Society in Italy 1290-1420, Batsford 1971 Leven Peter Renaissance Italy, 1464-1534, Capricorn Books 1967 •Pullan Brian A History of Early Renaissance Italy from the mid- Thirteenth to the mid-Fifteenth Century, Allen Lane 1973 •Waley Daniel The Italian City-Republics, Weidenfeld & Nicholson: World University Library 1969 (b) Detailed reading guides will be distributed in classes in the course of the year. A list of 'key' books for the course may be obtained beforehand from the office of the department of History.

WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit written work at times specified during the year. This will consist of not more than two class papers (2,000 words) and two essays (3,000 words).

EXAMINATION Not more than two 3-hour papers. Class work and written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination.

131-313 HISTORY 3T (PROBLEMS IN SOCIAL AND REFLECTIVE HISTORY) (PASS) (History 3T may not be taken in addition to 2T) (Not available in 1978, but available in 1979) Professor G. M. Daning A course of one lecture, one tutorial and one seminar per week through. out the year.

SYLLABUS AND BOOKS For details of this subject see History 2T.

WRITTEN WORK AND ASSESSMENT Students will be expected to engage themselves in the discovery of appropriate assessment to the course. Maximum possible examination in the course would be two 3-hour papers with written work, no more than two essays contributing part of the examination. 268 History

131-314 HISTORY 3V (REFORMATION EUROPE) (PASS) (History 3V may not be taken in addition to 2V) (May not be available in this form in 1979) Mr C. Zika A course of two-hour seminars per week throughout the year with two lectures per week in first term and one lecture per week in third term, as well as some additional discussion and tutorial sessions. The total number of hours per week not to exceed four. SYLLABUS For details of this subject see History 2V, but additional research work will be required. WRITTEN WORK AND ASSESSMENT Students will be required to submit written work at specified times during the year, but its length and nature will be decided in consultation with them. It will consist of not more than two essays (4,000 words each), two class papers, and a critical exercise, or their equivalent. Assessment will be by class and written work done during the year.

HONOURS DEGREE В. SCHOOL OF HISTORY (For possible combinations with this school, see pp. 519 ff.) 1. The course for the degree with honours to the school of History comprises a first preliminary year and three years in the honours school, as set out below. Students should plan their courses in consultation with a member of the academic staff of the department of History, and should make appointments for this purpose at the departmental office, as well as with the sub-dean. Admission into the honours school must be approved by the faculty through the sub-dean.

2. First (Preliminary) Year (a) The normal requirements for admission, in the second year, to the honours school of History are: (i) A suitable standard (usually the equivalent of first or second class honours) in ONE of History 1A, 1B, 1C, 1 D, 1 E and 1F; and (ii) Passes in three other first-year subjects. (b) These latter subjects must be chosen to comply with the requirements of the ordinary degree but it is recommended that students Intending to pursue honours in History Include in their first-year studies: (i) A second first-year History subject; (ii) Part I of a language other than English. (Note: competence in specified foreign languages may be a prerequisite for certain final-year special studies in History); (iii) a subject (other than History) which can form the first part of a major (or at least a two-subject sequence) 269 Faculty of Arts

supporting or complementing an honours course in History; and (iv) the optional additional work in one history subject. The object of this additional work is to amplify and deepen the student's course, and to introduce students to skills useful in honours work in later years.

3. Second Year (a) Students entering the honours school of History shall take in their second year: (i) TWO of History 2H Honours (American)• History 2J Honours (East Asian)• History 2K Honours (French) History 2L Honours (Modern British)• History 2M Honours (Pre-classical Antiquity)' History 2N Honours (German) History 20 Honours (Roman)' History 2T (Honours) (Social & Reflective)' History 2V (Reformation Europe)• (ii) A grade 2 subject in a discipline other than History, forming a two-subject sequence with a subject taken in the first year. (b) Students who fail to gain first or second class honours in the examinations in honours history subjects in the second year will normally not be permitted to proceed in the honours school.

4. Thi,d Year (a) In the third year, in the honours school, students shall take: (i) TWO of History 3G Honours (Australian) History 3H Honours (American) • History 3J Honours (East Asian) • History 3K Honours (French)• History ЗL Honours (Modern British)' History 3M Honours (Pre-classical Antiquity)• History 30 Honours (Roman)• History 3R Honours ("Renaissance" Italy) History 3S Honours (Early Modern British) History 3T Honours (Social and Reflective) History 3V Honours (Reformation Europe)' (1i) Methods of Historical Research, a course of classes in preparation for the final honours thesis of 8-9,000 words to be submitted by the first day of the second term of the fourth year. Students are expected to take the first steps in selecting their thesis subjects during the second term of the third year, and will be required to define the limits of their subjects at the beginning of the third term. Members of the academic staff of the department of His- tory will discuss possible subjects in the course Methods

• American, Pre-classical Antiquity, East Asian, French, Modern British, Roman History, Social & Reflective History, and Reformation Europe are offered In both the second and third years of the honours school, but no studont may take more than one subject In these fields. Thus students may take either but not both Honours 2H or 3H, 2J or 3.1, 2K or 3K, 2L or 3L, 2M or 3M, 20 or 30, 2T or 3T, 2V or 3V. 270 History

of Historical Research, and will eiso be available for consultation et specified times. It is expected that students will have progressed sufficiently by the end of third term to be able to do substantial work on the thesis during the long vacation." (iii) in addition, students may take an additional pass subject or approved course of study. Students may use this opportunity to complete a pass major or to undertake a course which will increase linguistic or other skills relevant to particular historical fields. (b) Students will not be permitted to proceed to the fourth year in History unless they achieve a satisfactory honours standard in the third-year examinations. (c) Students who are unable to proceed to the fourth year, may, if their results have been satisfactory, be admitted to the ordinary degree and should apply to the faculty for approval. 5. Fourth Year: Final Honours (a) The final year in the school of History consists of: (i) History 4W Honours (Theory and Method of History) (ii) History 4X Honours (Special Study in History) (iii) Completion of the final honours thesis of 8-9,000 words, due to be submitted on the first day of second term. 6. Final Examination. Examinations in third and final years will be regarded as comprising a final examination in the school of History, and will normally consist of: (i) In the third year not more than two papers In each of the honours History subjects taken in third year. (ii) In the final year not more than two papers in each of 4W (Theory and Method of History) and 4X (Special Study in History): and (ili) Assessment of the final honours thesis (4Y). (iv) Written work done during the year will constitute part of both examinations. 7. Attendance at classes and the completion of written work by the due dates are compulsory in the honours school of History. 8. Students wishing to combine the honours school of History with a Law course should consult the head of the department.

HISTORY IN COMBINED HONOURS COURSES In general. History in combined honours courses consists of half the History subjects required or recommended in the pure honours school: i.e. one grade 1 History subject in the first year, one honours History subject in each of the second and third years, and History 4X honours (Special Study in History) in the fourth year. The short course in Methods of Historical Research in the third year Is also Included as part of the preparation for the final honours thesis, which is to be completed in the fourth year. Courses in which History is combined with honours work in almost ali

" For faculty rules on the submission of final honours thesis, etc.. see pp. 23-24, 62. 271 Faculty of Arts

other disciplines available in the Arts faculty have been approved; some of them are set out later in the Handbook (see pp. 519 ff.). Students intending to undertake a combined honours course including History are strongly recommended to take the optional additional work in a History subject in first year, and also to include part 1 of a language other than English among the subjects taken in the first year. Students whose first year does not include a language other than English should note that competence in specified foreign languages is a prerequisite for some special studies in History in the fourth year. For details of History IA (British History c. 1485-1700), History 1B (Age of Revolutions, 1750-1850), History 1C (The Ancient World), History 1D (Culture Contact in the Pacific), History fE (Urban History) and History 1F (Prehistoric Archaeology), see details of the ordinary degree.

131-262 HISTORY 2H HONOURS (AMERICAN HISTORY) (History 3H Honours may not be taken in addition to 2H) Dr Donna Merwick, Mr A. J. Johnston A course of 2-hour seminars as well as one lecture and one workshop each week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS Emphasis on three major topics: colonial history with attention to land, family and community; the United States during the nineteenth century: black migration and ethnic diversity; intellectual trends; territorial expansion; social and intellectual change after World War ll, with focus on women and the family.

BOOKS Prescribed books (in paperback): Students will be expected to purchase a number of core books available in paperback editions. Among them: Demos J Remarkable Providences, 1600-1760 Nash G (ed) Class and Society in Early America Boyer P & Nissenbaum S Salem Possessed: The Social Origins of Witchcraft Cooper J F Home as Found Miller P ed American Transcendentalists Turner F J Significance of the Frontier Williams T H ed Abraham Lincoln: Selected Speeches and Writings

WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit three pieces of research of 3,000 words each.

EXAMINATION Not more than one 3-hour paper. Class work and written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination. 272 History

131-263 HISTORY 2J HONOURS (EAST ASIAN HISTORY) (History 3J Honours may not be taken in addition to 2J) Dr Sow-Theng Leong, Dr C. T. Fisher

A course of 2-hour seminars each week throughout the year. Students will also attend the two lectures per week in History 2J. Occasional additional lectures may be given.

SYLLABUS A study of selected themes from the syllabus for History 2J: Select problems in the history of East Asia. Problems will concern the trа- ditional society and politics of Japan and China, their subsequent modernization, and their emergence as world powers.

BOOKS

(a) Recommended for preliminary reading:

Fairbank J K The United States and China, Harvard paperback Mote F W Intellectual Foundations of China, Knopf paperback Chesneaux J Peasant Revolts in China 1840-1949, Thames & Hudson paperback Bianco Lucien Origins of the Chinese Revolution, 1915-1949, Stanford paperback

(b) Prescribed texts:

Fairbank J K Reischauer E 0 & Craig A M East Asie: The Modern Transformation, Allen & Unwin Wakeman F The Fall of Imperial China, Collier Macmillan Sheridan J E China in Disintegration, Collier Macmillan Pelissier R The Awakening of China, Capricorn paperback Spence J Emperor of China: Self-Portrait ot K'ang Hsi, Vintage Random paperback Teng Ssu-yu & Fairbank J K China's Response to the West, Athenaeum paperback Levenson J R Confucian China and Its Modern Fate, University of California Press, paperback Ch'ü Tung-tsu Local Government in China under the Ch'ing, Stanford paperback Fay P W The Opium War, Norton Library paperback Wright Mary C China in Revolution: The First Phase, 1900-1913, Yale paperback Schwartz B I In Search of Wealth and Power, Harper Torchbooks paperback Schiffrin H Z Sun Yat-sen and the Origins of the Chinese Revolution, Campus paperback Chow Tse-tsung The May Fourth Movement, Stanford paperback Isaacs H R Tragedy of the Chinese Revolution, Stanford paperback Seiden Mark The Yenan Way in Revolutionary China, Harvard paperback Hinton William Fanshen, A Documentary of Revolution in a Chinese Village, Pelican Vogel Ezra Canton Under Communism, Harvard paperback Schram S Mao Tse-tung Unrehearsed, Pelican (c) Full tutorial guides wil be issued each term. 273 Faculty of Arts

WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit, at times specified, one essay of 3,000 words, three class papers of 1,000 words each, and three review exercises of 1,800 words each.

EXAMINATION Written work and class performance during the year will constitute the assessment.

131-264 HISTORY 2K HONOURS (FRANCE SINCE 1848) (History 3K Honours may not be taken in addition to 2K) (May not be available in 1979) Dr C. Sowerwine

A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year. An additional optional lecture time will be used for occasional films. SYLLABUS A study of French History from 1848 to the present. The course will emphasize the evolution of social structure in relation to political developments. It will focus especially upon the revolution of 1848, the Commune of 1871, the Popular Front of 1936, and the events of May- June 1968. N.B.: Although the course is intended for non-French speakers, students with a reading knowledge of French are invited to join a seminar involving a greater degree of primary research made possible by the use of materials in French, including independent work in the Commune and May '68. (Students who use French Part 1 as a prerequisite will be expected to join this tutorial.) BOOKS Prescribed textbooks as for the pass course with additional reading provided in the Baillieu Library.

WRITTEN WORK Students will submit three critical essays of not more than 2,500 words as well as up to two short exercises, at times specified during the year.

EXAMINATION Not more than one 3-hour paper or synthetic essay. Class work and written work done during the year will constitute a major part of the examination.

131-265 HISTORY 2L HONOURS (MODERN BRITISH HISTORY) Dr D. Mackay, Dr D. Philips A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS A study of aspects of British society from the late eighteenth to the twentieth century. Students should acquire a general knowledge of the main developments in social, political and economic history early in the

274 History

year, preferably during the long vacation, by reading through some of the better textbooks on the period. Special emphasis will be given to a selection from such topics as the following: (a) social consequences of industrialism; (b) political and social reform; (c) religion and society; (d) literature and society; (e) doubt and confidence in Victorian England; (f) old and new Imperialism; (g) working class movements; (h) Liberalism and Conservatism; (i) Anglo-Irish relations. BOOKS (a) Prescribed for preliminary reading: Briggs Asa The Age of Improvement 1783-1867, Longmans (b) Prescribed textbooks: Webb R K Modern England, Dodd, lead & Co. Perkin Harold The Origins of Modern English Society, 1780-1880, Rout- ledge & Kegan Paul Thompson E P The Making of the English Working Class, Pelican Briggs Asa The Age of Improvement, 1783-1867, Longmans Ensor R C K England, 1870-1914, Oxford Taylor A J P English History, 1914-1945, Pelican (c) Reference books: Lists will be issued during the year. WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit written work at times specified during the year. This will consist of two essays of 3,000 words and not more than two class papers of 1,500 words each. EXAMINATION Not more than one 3-hour paper or thematic essay. Class work and written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination.

131-266 HISTORY 2M HONOURS (PRE-CLASSICAL ANTIQUITY) (History 3M Honours may not be taken in addition to 2 М ) Mr W. Culican A course of two weekly lectures throughout the year, as in History 2M pass course, plus one additional seminar each week during second and third terms. SYLLABUS The items prescribed for study are the same as in the pass course. The additional seminar will be devoted to the following texts and topics: (i) The inscriptions of the First Akkad dynasty; (ii) The historical Inscriptions of Rameses II; (iii) Further Documents of the Athenian Empire; (iv) The Bronze and Iron Ages in Italy. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks as for pass, plus 'Gardiner Sir A The Kadesh Inscriptions of Remeses Il, Oxford 1960 Hirsch H 'Die Inschriften der Könge von Agade'. Archiv fűr, Orientfors- chung, 20, 1963 (translation available) 275 ▪

Faculty of Arts

Merritt B D et aI The Athenian Tribute List, Princeton 1950 Trump D H Central and Southern Italy before Rome, Thames & Hudson 1966 Selected Papers in the Proceedings of the Prehistoric Society and Historia etc WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit three 3.000 word essays during the year.

EXAMINATION Not more than two 3-hour papers. Class work and written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination.

131-267 HISTORY 2N HONOURS (GERMAN HISTORY) Dr J. H. Foster A course of one lecture and a two hours seminar per week throughout the year, with an occasional additional lecture. SYLLABUS A study of German history since 1870. The course will explore political and social change in Imperial Germany, the Weimar Republic and Nazi Germany. Emphasis will be placed on the problems of War and Society, the development of extremist movements of the Left and the Right, and the failure of liberal democracy. BOOKS •Rosenberg A Imperial Germany, Beacon paperback Nicholls A J Weimar and the Rise of Hitler, Papermac • Bullock A Hitler, A Study in Tyranny, Penguin •Bracher K D The German Dictatorship, Allan Lane WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit written work at times specified during the year. This will consist of three essays of 3,000 words and one report as part of a group project. Special arrangements with regard to assessment will be made for students enrolled in the German Reading Course. For further details consult the lecturer in charge. EXAMINATION Written work done during the year will constitute the examination.

131-270 HISTORY 2Q HONOURS (ROMAN HISTORY) (History ЭQ may not be taken in addition to 2Q) (May not be available in 1979) Mr R. T. Ridley A course of two lectures or one lecture and one seminar a week throughout the year as for the pass course with one additional seminar during second and third terms. 276 History

SYLLABUS Four periods of Roman History with special reference to source criticism: (i) From Monarchy to Republic (as for pass); (ii) The Augustan Principato (as for pass); (ill) The Age of Diocletian and Constantine (as for pass); (iv) The Collapse of the Roman Empire in Italy and the Central Euro- pean Provinces, the reactions of contemporary Romans and major modern explanations. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks as for the pass course with the addition of: "Jones A H M The Decline of the Ancient World, Longmans "Bury J B The invasion of Europe by the Barbarians, Norton paperback •Dill S Roman Society in the Last Century of the Western Empire, Gordon Press • Gordon C D The Age of Attila, Ann Arbor 'Moss H L B The Birth of the Middle Ages, 395-814, Oxford paperback Mazzarino S The End of the Ancient World, Faber 1966 Thompson E A The Visigoths In the Time of Ulfila, Oxford 1966 Boak A Manpower Shortage and the Fall of the Roman Empire in the West, Ann Arbor 1955 Walbank F The Awful Revolution, Liverpool 1969 WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit one essay or class paper each term plus an assignment on the barbarians. EXAMINATION Not more than two 3-hour papers. Class work and written work done throughout the year will constitute at least half the assessment.

131-273 HISTORY 2T HONOURS (PROBLEMS IN SOCIAL AND REFLECTIVE HISTORY) (History 3T Honours may not be taken in addition to 2T) (Not available in 1978, but available in 1979) Professor G. M. Deling No more than three hours of lectures, workshops and tutorials per week.

SYLLABUS The readings will cover the image of men in the historical and social sciences in the 19th and 20th centuries. Special attention will be given to the writings of Durkheim, Weber, Marx and to the works of later philosophers and sociologists and social anthropologists as Schutz, Malinowski, lead, Redfield, Levi-Strauss. There will be a thematic inquiry into symbol, myth, ritual, gesture and metaphor as elemonts in ethnography and historical inquiry.

Books (a) Prescribed textbooks: 'Berger P & Luckman T The Social Construction of Reality, Doubleday Anchor 1967 'Lewis 0 The Children of Sanchez, Penguin 1961

277 Faculty of Arts

•Blythe R Akenfield, Penguin 1969 •Carr E H What is History? Penguin Books 1967 • Berger P Invitation to Sociology — A Humanist Approach, Penguin Books 1967 (b) Recommended reading: Aron R Main Currents in Sociological Thought, 2 vols, Penguin Books 1965 Berkhofer R F A Behavioural Approach to Historical Analysis, Free Press 1969 Collingwood R G The Idea of History, Oxford 1946 Daedalus Myth Culture and Symbol, vol 101, 1972 Goffman E Presentation of Self in Everyday Life, 1959 Geertz C The Description of Culture, 1974 Kuhn T S The Structure of Scientific Revolutions, Chicago 1970 Marwick A The Nature of History, Macmillan 1970 Meyerhoff H The Philosophy of History in our Time, Doubleday 1959 Mills C W The Sociological Imagination Stern F Varieties of History, Meridian Books 1956 Skotheim R A The Historian and the Climate of Opinion, 1969 Redfield R The Little Community Zinn H The Politics of History, Boston 1970 WRITTEN WORK AND ASSESSMENT Students will be expected to engage themselves in the discovery of appropriate assessment in the course. A maximum possible examination in the course would be two 3-hour papers with written work, no more than three essays, contributing part of the examination.

131-271 HISTORY 2V HONOURS (REFORMATION EUROPE) (History 3V Honours may not be taken in addition to 2V) (May not be available in this form In 1979) Mr C. Zika A course of two-hour seminars per week throughout the year with two lectures per week in first term and one lecture per week in third term, as well as some additional discussion and tutorial sessions. The total number of hours not to exceed four.

SYLLABUS An examination of the nature of reform within European society from C. 1480 to the end of the sixteenth century, with particular emphasis upon the interrelationship between religious reformation and the call for political, social and intellectual reform. Geographically and chronologically, the course will tend to concentrate upon the Reformation In the German and Swiss territories to 1559.

BOOKS (a) Preliminary reading: Elton G R Reformation Europe, 1517-1555, Fontana Hillerbrand H J Men and Ideas in the Sixteenth Century, Rand McNally paperback Rice E F Jr The Foundations of Early Modern Europe, Weidenfeld and Nicolson paperback

278 History

(b) Prescribed textbooks: Dickens A G The German Nation and Martin Luther, Edward Arnold Dillenberger J ed Martin Luther. Selections from his Writings, Double- day Anchor paperback Moeller B Imperial Cities and the Reformation, Fontana Strauss G ed Manifestations of Discontent in Germany on the Eve of the Reformation, Indiana UP Strauss G ed Pre-Reformation Germany, Harper & Rowe

WRITTEN WORK AND ASSESSMENT Students will be required to submit written work at specified times during the year, but its length and nature will be decided in consultation with them. It will consist of not more than two essays (4,000 words each) and two class papers, or their equivalent. Assessment will be by class and written work done during the year.

131-361 HISTORY 3G HONOURS (AUSTRALIAN HISTORY) Professor G. Blainey, Dr G. Davison, Dr Joy Parnaby SYLLABUS A general survey of Australian history along the lines set down for the pass subject, History 3G. In addition, students will undertake a detailed study, including documentary work, of selected periods or topics within the general field. Students during the year will have the opportunity to specialize in areas of interest such as women's history, Australia between the wars, urban history and bourgeois hegemony and the rise of labor. BOOKS (a) Introductory reading: Clark C M H ed Se/ есt Documents in Australian History, 2 vols 1788- 1850, 1851-1900, Angus & Robertson Clark C M H ed Sources of Australian History, World Classics Clark, C M H ed A History of Australia, 3 vols, MUP Clark C M H A Short History of Australia, Mentor Books Crowley F K ed Modern Australia in Documents, 2 vols, Wren Crowley F K ed A New History of Australia, Heinemann Dixson M The Real Matilda, Penguin 1976 Encel S Tebbitt M & Mackenzie N Women and Society: An Australian Study, Cheshire Melbourne 1974 Golan R Radical and Working Class Politics: A Study of Eastern Aus- tralia 1850-1910, MUP Greenwood G ed Australia—A Social and Political History, Angus & Robertson Inglis K S The Australian Colonists: An Exploration of Social History 1788-1870, MUP Kiddie Margaret Men of Yesterday: A Social History of the Western District of Victoria, MUP McQueen H A New Britannia: An Argument concerning the Social Origins of Australian Radicalism and Nationalism, Pelican Reynolds H ed Aborigines and Settlers, Cassell Series G From Deserts the Prophets Come, Heinemann Ward R The Australian Legend, Oxford

279 łacuity of Arts

(b) Reference books: Reading guides will be issued during the course

ASSESSMENT Students will be required to submit written work at specific times during the year. This will consist of no more than two essays (3,000-5,000 words), two class papers and two seen examination answers. Students will be assessed on this work in lieu of a formal end-of-year examination.

131-362 HISTORY 3H HONOURS (AMERICAN HISTORY) (History 3H Honours may not be taken in addition to 2Н ) Dr Donna Merwick, Mr A. J. Johnston A course of 2-hour seminars as well as one lecture and one workshop each week throughout the year. Students will attend the two lectures each week in History 3H (American).

SYLLABUS For details of this subject see History 2H Honours.

BOOKS Prescribed books: As for History 2H Honours.

WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit, at times specified, three pieces of research of 3,000 words each.

EXAMINATION Not more than one 3-hour paper. Class work and written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination.

131-363 HISTORY 3.. HONOURS (EAST ASIAN HISTORY) (History 3J Honours may not be taken in addition to 2J) Dr Sow-Thong Leong, Dr C. T. Fisher A course of 2-hour seminars each week throughout the year. Students will also attend the two lectures per week In History 3J. Occasional additional lectures may be given.

SYLLABUS For details of this subject see History 2J Honours, but additional research will be required.

WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit, at times specified, one essay of 4,000 words, three class papers of 1,000 words, and three review exor- cises of 1,800 words each.

EXAMINATION One review essay on a set topic and with a word limit for the examination period. Written work and performance done during the year will constitute the assessment.

280 History

131-364 HISTORY 3K HONOURS (FRANCE SINCE 1848) (History 3K Honours may not be taken in addition to 2K) (May not be available in 1979) Dr C. Sowerwine A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year. An additional optional lecture time will be used for occasional films. SYLLABUS A study of French History from 1848 to the present. The course will emphasize the evolution of social structure in relation to political developments. It will focus especially upon the revolution of 1848, the Commune of 1871, the Popular Front of 1936, and the events of May- June 1968. N.B.: Although the course is intended for non-French speakers, students with a reading knowledge of French are invited to join a seminar involving a greater degree of primary research made possible by the use of materials in French, including Independent work on the Commune and May '68. (Students who use French Part 1 as a prerequisite will be expected to join this seminar.) BOOKS Prescribed textbooks as for the pass course with additional reading provided in the Baillieu Library. WRITTEN WORK Students will submit three critical essays of not more than 3,000 words as well as up to two short exercises, at times specified during the year.

EXAMINATION Not more than one 3-hour paper or synthetic essay. Class work and written work done during the year will constitute the major part of the examination.

131-365 HISTORY 3L HONOURS. (MODERN BRITISH HISTORY) (History 3L Honours may not be taken in addition to 2L) Dr D. Mackay, Dr D. Philips A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS AND BOOKS For details of this subject see History 2L Honours. WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit written work at times specified during the year. This will consist of two essays of 3,000 words and not more than three class papers. EXAMINATION Not more than one 3-hour paper or thematic essay. Class work and written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination. 281 Faculty of Arts

131-366 HISTORY 3M HONOURS (PRE-CLASSICAL ANTIQUITY) (History 3M Honours may not be taken in addition to 2М ) Mr W. Culican

A course of two weekly lectures throughout the year, as in History 2М pass course plus one additional seminar each week during second and third terms. SYLLABUS For details of this subject see History 2M Honours, but more advanced essay work will be required. WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit three 3,000 word essays during the year and one class paper. EXAMINATION Not more than two 3-hour papers. Class work and written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination.

131-370 HISTORY ЗQ HONOURS (ROMAN HISTORY) (History 3Q Honours may not be taken in addition to 2Q) (May not be available in 1979) Mr R. T. Ridley A course of two lectures or one lecture and one seminar a week throughout the year as for the pass course with one additional seminar during second and third terms. SYLLABUS For details of this subject see History 2Q Honours, but additional research work will be required. WRITTEN WORK Students will re required to submit one essay or class paper each term plus an assignment on the barbarians. EXAMINATION Not more than two 3-hour papers. Class work and written work done throughout the year will constitute part of the examination.

131-371 HISTORY 3R HONOURS ("RENAISSANCE" ITALY) Mr I. G. Robertson (May not be available in 1979) A course of lectures and tutorials, not more than 3% hours per week, throughout the year. SYLLABUS A study of the social, political and cultural history of Italy from about 1250 to about 1550. BOOKS (a) Prescribed preliminary reading: 282 History

(I) Europe: Students will be assumed to have some knowledge of the general history of Europe in the period under study. One or two of the following works should be read: Hale J R Renaissance Europe 1480-1520, Collins (The Fontana History of Europe) 1971 Hay D Europe in the Fourteenth and Fifteenth Centuries, Longmans 1966 Holmes G Europe: Hierarchy and Revolt 1320-1450, Harvester Press in association with Fontana (The Fontana History of Europe) 1975 Miskimin H A The Economy of Early Renaissance Europe, 1300-1460, Prentice-Hall: The Economic Civilization of Europe 1969 Waley D Later Medieval Europe from Saint Louis to Luther, Longmans 1964 (ii) Italy: •Brucker G Renaissance Florence, John Wiley & Sons: New Dimensions in History: Historical Cities 1969 •Burke P Culture and Society in Renaissance Italy 1420-1540, Batsford 1972 •Hay D The Italian Renaissance in its Historical Background, CUP 1961 'Hyde J K Society and Politics in Medieval Italy. The Evolution of the Civil Life, 1000-1350, Macmillan 1973 Lerner J Culture and Society in Italy 1290-1420, Batsford 1971 'Laven P Renaissance Italy, 1464-1534, Capricorn Books 1967 'Pullen B A History of Early Renaissance Italy from the mid-Thirteenth to the mid-Fifteenth Century, Allen Lane 1973 'Waley D The Italian City-Republics, Weidenfeld & Nicholson: World University Library 1969 (b) Detailed reading guides will be distributed in classes In the course of the year. A list of 'key' books for the course may be obtained beforehand from the office of the department of History. WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit written work at times specified during the year. This will consist of not more than two class papers (2,000 words each) and two essays (3,000 words each).

EXAMINATION Not more than two 3-hour papers.Class work and written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination.

131-372 HISTORY 3S HONOURS (EARLY MODERN BRITISH HISTORY) (Fifteenth and early sixteenth centuries) Mr L. R. Gardiner Students in this subject will normally be required to have taken History 1A (British). A course with a weekly seminar supported by a weekly lecture. SYLLABUS Social, political and religious themes In English society between 1400 and 1560.

283 Faculty of Arts

В OOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Lander J R Conflict and Stability in Fifteenth Century Englad, Hutchinson paperback Loades D M Politics and the Nation 1450-1660: Obedience Resis- tance and Public Order, Fontana/Collins Pill D H The English Reformation 1529-58, University of London Press paperback (b) Prescribed Source Books: •Davis N The Paston Letters: A Selection, World's Classics •Dickens A G & Carr D eds The Reformation in England to the Acces- sion of Elizabeth I, Arnold paperback •Slavin A J Humanism, Reformation and Reform in England, Wiley •Sylvester R S & Harding D P eds Two Early Tudor Lives, Yale Paper- bound •Fletcher A Tudor Rebellions, Longmans Seminar Studies in History •More Sir Thomas Utopia, Penguin •Elyot Sir Thomas The Governor, ed S E Lehmberg Dent Everyman (c) Prescribed Commentaries: •Du Bouiay F R H An Age of Ambition, Nelson •Scarisbrick J J Henry VIII, Penguin •Elton G R Reform and Renewal: Thomas Cromwell and the Com- monweal, Cambridge paperback •Dickens A G The English Reformation, Fontana (d) For reference: Lander J R The Wars of the Roses, Sacker and Warburg Myers A R English Historical Documents 1327-1485, Eyre and Spottis- woode Williams C H English Historical Documents 1485-1558, Eyre and Spottlswoode Thomas Keith Religion and the Decline of Magic, Penguin WRITTEN WORK Students will be expected to submit written work at times specified at the beginning of first term. This will consist of a bibliographical essay and an essay arising from it (in all, not more than 6,000 words).

EXAMINATION Not more than two 3-hour papers. Class work and written work in the year will constitute part of the examination.

131-373 HISTORY 3T HONOURS (PROBLEMS IN SOCIAL AND REFLECTIVE HISTORY) (History 3T Honours may not be taken in addition to 2T) (Not available in 1978, but available in 1979) Professor G. M. Daning No more than three hours of lectures, workshops and tutorials per week. SYLLABUS The readings will cover the image of men in the historical and social sciences in the 19th and 20th centuries. Special attention will be given 284 History

to the writings of Durkheim, Weber, Marx and to the works of later philosophers and sociologists and social anthropologists as Schutz, Malinowski, lead, Redfield, Levi-Strauss. There will be a thematic inquiry into symbol, myth, ritual, gesture and metaphor as elements in ethnography and historical inquiry.

BOOKS See History 2T Honours

WRITTEN WORK AND ASSESSMENT Students will be expected to engage themselves in the discovery of appropriate assessment in the course. A maximum possible examination in the course would be two 3-hour papers with written work, no more than three essays, contributing part of the examination.

131-374 HISTORY 3V HONOURS (REFORMATION EUROPE) (History 3V Honours may not be taken in addition to 2V) (May not be available in this form in 1979) Mr C. Zika A course of two seminars per week throughout the year with two lectures per week in first term and one lecture per week in third term, as well some additional lecture, discussion and tutorial sessions. The total number of hours per week not to exceed four.

SYLLABUS For details of this subject see History 2V Honours, but additional research work will be required. WRITTEN WORK AND ASSESSMENT Students will be required to submit written work at specified times during the year, but its length and nature will be decided in consultation with them. It will consist of not more than two essays (4,000 words each), two class papers, and a critical exercise, or their equivalent. Assessment will be by class and written work done during the year.

131-461 HISTORY 4W HONOURS (THEORY AND METHOD OF HISTORY) A weekly seminar during the fourth year. Theory and Method of History is designed to encourage reflection on the assumptions, the methods and the conclusions of historical study. A number of different approaches to this subject will be offered of which students will be asked to choose one. The choice available will be notified towards the end of the third year.

BOOKS General reading: Walsh W H An Introduction to Philosophy of History, Hutchinson's University Library

285 Faculty of Arts

Collingwood R G The Idea of History, OUP Gardiner P Theories of History, Free Press Gardiner P The Nature of Historical Explanation, OUP Dray W Laws and Explanation in History, OUP WRITTEN WORK Students will be expected to submit written work at times specified during the year. This will consist of not more than one class paper or essay in each term. EXAMINATION Not more than two 3-hour papers in the final examination. Class work and written work throughout the year will be considered in determining the result.

131-462 HISTORY 4X HONOURS (SPECIAL STUDY IN HISTORY) Students will be asked to choose, towards the end of their third year, one of the subjects announced for special study in the following year. It is hoped that courses will normally be available in all the principal fields taught in the department, i.e. Ancient History, Later Medieval and Early Modern European History, Seventeenth-Century British History, Aus- tralian, American, East Asian, Far Eastern, Modern European, Modern British History, American апд Pacific. Some interdisciplinary subjects are also available. Each course is normally conducted as a weekly 2-hour seminar, with occasional special lectures. The courses offered will involve advanced study of a restricted theme in each field. Courses available in recent years include, for example: The Fifteenth-Century Papacy; Seventeenth-Century English Puritanism; Local Government during the French Revolution; Germany in the Weimar and Nazi periods; Race Relations in the U.S.A.; Selected Aspects of the History of Japan and China in the Nineteenth and Twentieth Centuries; Urban History with particular reference to Australia; The Involvement of Australia in the Great War; Studies in the modern history of China and Japan. A course in Palaeography and Diplomatic will be offered from time to time as occasion warrants. (Enquiries should be directed to Dr D. E. Kennedy or Mr L. R. Gardiner.) Each course will presuppose earlier general study of the field and period, and students will not normally be admitted to a particular course unless they have already taken the relevant prerequisite subject at pass or honours level. In some cases reading ability in specified foreign languages may also be a condition of admission. Students are advised to keep choice of a special study in mind when planning earlier years of the course. EXAMINATION Not more than two 3-hour papers in the final examination. Class work and written work done during the year will be considered in determining the result. MASTER OF ARTS 131-601 В. SCHOOL OF HISTORY 1. Admission to candidature for the degree of Master of Arts requires either B.A. degree with honours, or B.A. ordinary degree and subsequent 286 History

completion of M.A. preliminary work as prescribed by the Faculty of Arts. In all cases enquiries should be made to the chairman of the Research Committee, department of History, before application for admission is made through faculty. Acceptance as a candidate for the M.A. Preliminary qualification requires the recommendation of the department of History and the approval of faculty, and In most cases requires the completion of a History major In the ordinary degree. To complete the M.A. Preliminary qualification in History the minimum normally expected is (a) to reach a satisfactory honours level In two later-year honours history subjects; (b) to complete a thesis of 8-9,000 words; and (c) to attend the course in Methods of Historical Research. The M.A. Preliminary course may be done in two years of part-time work or (in exceptional cases) one year of full-time work. 2. Examination Is normally by thesis, prepared under supervision and assisted by participation In research seminars. All candidates may be required to take any subject or attend any classes relevant to their M.A. subject. For certain students the chairman of the department may approve M.A. courses which require a shorter thesis and give credit for time spent in the mastering of ancillary studies (such as languages, statistics, etc.), or in other course work. Students pursuing the traditional M.A. course will submit a thesis not exceeding 50,000 words, excluding footnotes, bibI lographies and appendices which are transcripts of relevant documents. For students pursuing a course giving more time to ancillary studies, the length of thesis will be prescribed by the Research Committee. All M.A. students must write regular reports on the progress of their research as requested. An entry for examination for higher degrees must be submitted to the Registrar. Three copies of each thesis (international size paper, A4, measuring 297mm x 210mm, typewritten, double-spaced) should be submitted, one of which will be deposited in the University Library and one in the department. The attention of candidates is drawn to the recommendations of the Professorial Board on the format of theses (regulation 4:6 in the University Calendar). The thesis should normally be submitted for examination within two years from the commencement of candidature for M.A. by full-time candidates and within four years by part-time candidates. Except in special circumstances and with the permission of the Faculty no thesis or course work will be examined unless the candidate presents for examination within four years from the commencement of his candidature or, in the event of his having been granted leave of absence for the maximum period of one year, within five years from the commencement of his candidature.

DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY The Ph.D. In History is under the control of the Professorial Board rather than the Faculty of Arts, and is administered through the Secretary for Graduate Studies; but all enquiries should be made In the first Instance to the chairman of the Research Committee, department of History. Admission to Ph.D. In History normally requires the completion of an M.A. at good honours standard, although candidature may, in appropriate

287 Faculty of Arts

circumstances, be recommended after one year's post-graduate research experience following a B.A. honours degree of a suitable standard without the completion of the M.A. degree.

DEPARTMENT OF HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE Chairman of Department: Professor R. W. HOME, Ph.D. (Indiana) B.Sc. Science is obviously a central phenomenon In our modern world, indeed there are good grounds for claiming that it is the distinguishing characteristic of "the advanced nations". It Is therefore important that humanities students, who are not studying science as such, should nevertheless have an opportunity to study the way in which science has developed, how It has changed the framework of our world vision and our mode of thought, as well as our material environment. ORDINARY DEGREE The subjects offered by the department are as follows: Grade One: H.P.S.1. Grade Two: H.P.S.2A and H.P.S.28. Grade Three: H.P.S.Э C and H.P.S.3F. A major in N.P.S. will consist of one subject from each grade. An H.P.S. major may be enriched at either the second or third year level by taking an additional H.P.S. subject of the appropriate grade. H.P.S. subjects are constituted from units which are also available for separate enrolment by students in the Science faculty. Most of these units are designed expressly to be suitable for Arts students with no scientific or mathematical knowledge. The topics dealt with in these units are chosen because: CO They are comprehensible to students who have no previous scientific or mathematical training. (2) They are central to the development of science. (3) They can be shown to have played a major part in modifying man's view of himself or his intellectual or material environment. The first year units are of this kind, as are the following second and third year units. Philosophy of Science (203); third year Philosophy of Science (303); Darwinism, second and third year units (223 and 323); The Scientific Revolution, second and third year units (224 and 324); History of Public Health and Germ Theory (225); Directed Study (390); Scientific Change, designated "H.P.S. Education" (311 but available to second year students). Also the Philosophy unit, Rudiments of Symbolic Logic (161- 281) may be included. There is also a unit available which does presuppose some background in mathematics. History of Mathematics B, Terms 2 and 3. Students without University mathematics should consult the lecturer before enrolling. (212) See the details of subjects below for the way these units may be taken in an Arts course. The details of the units follow the details of the subjects in each case. Enrolment. Students should enrol in the specific subject and also in the specific units which constitute that subject. Students are required at the 288 History and Philosophy of Science

beginning of the academic year to choose which specific units they wish to study and to enrol in those units. Students may with the permission of the chairman of the department and of faculty change this initial enrolment in specific units later in the year. e.g. H.P.S 2A, 136-241 consisting of units 136-201 136-225 or H.P.S. Э C, 136-343 consisting of units 136-203 136-225 136-325 Mixed Majors. A number of mixed majors including H.P.S. subjects together with science, philosophy or history subjects are available. In particular the following are available. H.P.S.1 or Aspects of Contemporary Biology together with second year Social Biology,' H.P.S. 3C or 3F including units 225 and 325. Episte- mology, Logic and Methodology (Philosophy 2L, 3L or 3LL) may replace the second or third year H.P.S. subject respectively in the normal major. B.Sc. units to the value of 8 points may replace H.P.S. 1 and some sequences of two science or mathematics units and H.P.S. 3C or 3F constitute a major. There are also majors with H.P.S. and either one of two of the Statistics 200 and 300 units (see p. 46). Students should note that it is possible for other combinations, provided they constitute a reasonable sequence of study, to be approved by faculty as majors. Anyone with such a proposal should consult the chairman of the department. Note: Students with appropriate prerequisites who wish to concentrate on H.P.S. may take an enriched H.P.S. major, or a major in H.P.S. together with a mixed-major including H.P.S. subjects.

136-141 HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE 1 This subject consists of two units. (Under special circumstances and with permission of the chairman of the department, and of faculty through the Sub-Dean, one or other of these units may be approved as a half subject in a student's course.) The subject will normally consist of units 101 and 103. Special permission will be required to take unit 102. Students taking H.P.S.1 will enrol for this subject and also the two units which constitute it. The details of these units are as follows:

136-101 HISTORY OF ASTRONOMY Monica MacCallum 36 hours divided into lectures and discussion groups, plus 7 hours to be used for films, class exercises, etc. during the first half of the academic year. Written work, due on specified dates, and tests will be required during the course and will be taken into account in the final result. The main concern will be a detailed study of the development of astro- nomical theories using, where possible, the writings of the scientists concerned. This study will involve a discussion of the problems that had *it may be possibie, subject to approval, to combine a half-subject unit from Social Biology with an appropriate H.P.S. unit to constitute a full second year H.P.S. subject. 289 Faculty of Arts

to be faced, the emergence of the new concepts necessary to solve these problems and the general outlook and philosophy of the times dealt with.

BOOKS Preliminary reading: Moore P Basic Astronomy, Oliver & Boyd 1968 Toulmin S & Goodfield J The Fabric of the Heavens, Pelican 1963

Prescribed textbooks: •Roneoed Source Material issued by the department Cohen I B The Birth of a New Physics, Heinemann Dreyer J L E A History of Astronomy from Thales to Kepler, Dover •Koestler A The Watershed, Heinemann Science Study Series also con- tained in The Sleepwalkers, Hutchinson •Kuhn T S The Copernican Revolution, Harvard paperback 1973

EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper in November. Students may earn partial exemption from this examination by reaching a satisfactory standard in essays and class assignments given during the course.

136-103 EXPLANATION IN SCIENCE 36 hours divided into lectures and discussion classes during the second half of the academic year. Written work, due on specified dates, not exceeding 2,000 words will be required. SYLLABUS An examination of the nature and scope of scientific explanation. Examples of different kinds of explanation will be examined; and the applicability of those found in the natural sciences to human actions will be of special concern.

BOOKS A list of recommended preliminary reading and text books will be shown on the department notice board in December 1977.

EXAMINATION Not to exceed one 3-hour paper.

136-102 HISTORY OF THEORIES OF GENERATION AND INHERITANCE A course available to a limited number of students for directed self study. No lectures or tutorials are given. Students will be provided with study guides, and written assignments, due on specified dates, will be set and corrected.

BOOKS Preliminary reading: Asimov I Wellsprings of Life, Mentor 1967 Asimov I A Short History of Biology, Natural History Press 1964 Prescribed textbooks: •Roneoed Source Material issued by the department • Gasking E Investigations into Generation 1651-1828, Hutchinson 1967

290

History and Philosophy of Science

'BBC Pamphlet The Science of Man, No. 3, Egg to Adult, BBC Publi- cation EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper at the end of the year.

136-241 HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE 2A (PASS) 136-242 HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE 2В (PASS) Neither of these subjects consists of a fixed syllabus. Each will consist of two units from the following list, normally one given in the first half of the year and one In the second half. Units available as components of H.P.S. 2A or 2B: 136-201 Philosophy of Mathematics (not available in 1978) 136-202 Philosophy of Science (not available until 1979) 136-203 Philosophy of Science 136-212 History of Mathematics B (commences at the beginning of second term) 136-223 Darwinism 136-224 The Scientific Revolution 136-225 History of Public Health and Germ Theory 136-226 The Social Context of Science 136-311 H.P.S. Education, Scientific Change. (This unit is available to second year students) 161-281 Rudiments of Symbolic Logic (Philosophy 2F-1) Details of these units are listed after the details of subjects H.P.S. 3C and 3F. (However, the details of Rudiments of Symbolic Logic are included under the Philosophy department.) Students taking one H.P.S. second year subject will enrol for H.P.S. 2A and also for the two units which they wish to constitute the subject. (This is required by Students' Records.) Students taking two H.P.S. second year subjects will enrol for H.P.S. 2A and H.P.S. 2B end also for the four units which they wish to constitute these subjects. (H.P.S. 2A will consist of the unit in the first half of the year with the lowest course number, together with the unit in the second half of the year with the lowest course number. H.P.S. 2B will consist of the other two units.) (Note: Arts students passing in H.P.S. 2A or 2B will be credited only with a pass In that subject and not also with passes in the constituent units. Students can not gain credit towards a B.A. degree for separate units. These units must be constituents of H.P.S. 2A, 26, ЗC or 3F.)

136-343 HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE 3C (PASS) 136-344 HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE 3F (PASS) Each of these subjects will consist of three units. No more than two of the units may be taken in either half of the year. The units chosen may include any unit available for H.P.S. 2A or 26 for which credit has not already been obtained. In addition there are the following units available only as components of H.P.S. 3C or 3F. 291 Faculty of Arts

136-303 Philosophy of Science, third year level. Students taking this unit should normally EITHER have completed each of units 136-202 and 136-203 OR have completed one of these and be currently enrolled in the other. Students without this background who believe they have sufficient background in philosophy should consult the lecturer in charge.

136-323 Darwinism, third year level. 136-324 The Scientific Revolution, third year level. 136-325 History of Public Health and Germ Theory, third year level. (Not available until 1979.) 136-390 Directed Study. Each of these units is a development of the corresponding second year unit. Students enrolling in either of these units must be studying concurrently the corresponding second year unit. Students must take one of the units 303, 323, 324, 325 or 390 in the third year of a major in H.P.S. Students are required to enrol for the constituent units as well as enrolling for the subject. A student taking one third year H.P.S. subject will enrol for H.P.S. 3C and only those taking two third year subjects will enrol in 3F. (The rule determining which units constitute Э C and which 3F is parallel to the rule for the second year subjects except that unit 323 will always be included in the same subject as 223 and likewise for 324, 325 and 303. See also note following Н.P.S. 2A and 28.)

DETAILS OF UNITS WHICH MAY CONSTITUTE GRADES 2 AND 3 HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE SUBJECTS The period of the academic year in which each unit is to be given will be stated in the timetable. 136-201 PHILOSOPHY OF MATHEMATICS (Not available in 1978) A course of 25 lectures, 12 tutorial classes and about 6 hours of practice classes for half of the year. An essay of about 2,000 words is part of the prescribed work in this subject. SYLLABUS A critical examination of the basis of mathematics. Attention will be directed to the meaning of mathematical concepts and the nature of mathematical truth. BOOKS (a) Preliminary reading: Kline Morris ed Mathematics in the Modern World, Sections I and IV Readings from Scientific American, W H Freeman & Co 1968 (b) Prescribed textbooks: To be set. 292 History and Philosophy of Science

(N.B. A fuller guide to preliminary reading and the suitability of various reference books will be available from the H.P.S. department office.) EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. Candidates may ba exempt from part of this paper by achieving a suitable standard in the essay and class assignments.

136-202 PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE (Not available until 1979) A course of 25 lectures and weekly tutorials during the first half of the year; two essays of 2,000 words each will be required, due on specified dates. No prerequisites. SYLLABUS Discussion of methods of reasoning. Is the scientific method better than alternatives? A critical examination of the tradititonal view of science as based on observation. BOOKS (a) Preliminary reading: Popper K Conjectures and Refutations, Routledge & Kegan Paul 1969 (b) Recommended for reference: Skyrms B Choice and Chance, Dickenson Hospers J An Introduction to Philosophical Analysis, 2nd ed UlIlan J & Quine W The Web of Belief, Pergamon Salmon W The Foundations of Scientific Inference, Pittsburgh UP EXAMINATION. Assessment will be based on the two essays.

136-203 PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE Dr H. Krips A course of 25 lectures and 12 tutorial classes in the first half of the year. Two essays, each of about 2,000 words, due on specified dates, are part of the prescribed work in the unit. There are no prerequisites for this unit. SYLLABUS An examination of philosophical problems relating to scientific theories and explanation. A selection of the following or similar topics will be examined: the distinction between science and fringe science; the covering law account of explanation; the role of statistical laws and theories In explanation; the relation between theory and observation; instrumentalism and realism; the selection of theories. BOOKS (a) Preliminary reading: Chalmers A F What is this thing called Science?, U of Queensland Press. (b) Recommended for reference: Salmon W Statistical Relevance and Statistical Explanation, Pittsburgh UP

293 Faculty of Arts

Popper K Conjectures and Refutations, Routledge & Kegan Paul Hempel Carl G Philosophy of Natural Science, Prentice-Hall

EXAMINATION Assessment will be based on the two essays.

136-212 HISTORY OF MATHEMATICS В (In 1979 this will be replaced by a similar unit, History of Mathematics, 136-210) Dr J. C. Pottage A course of one 2-hour lecture-seminar per week throughout second and third terms. Prescribed written work, due on specified dates, amounting to one or more papers totalling approximately 2,000 words will be required and will count towards the final result in the unit.

SYLLABUS Greek mathematics with special reference to Archimedes. The European successors of Archimedes and a study of the beginnings of the calculus in the seventeenth century. Students who have not done any university mathematics should consult the lecturer before enrolling. BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Ball W W R A Short Account of the History of Mathematics, Dover (b) Prescribed textbooks: • Duplicated Source Material issued by the H.P.S. department EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper, from which exemption may be granted to students electing to submit approved written work totalling not more than 5,000 words.

136-223 DARWINISM Miss Monica MacCallum Two lectures and one 2-hour discussion period per week; for the second half of the year. The substance of the course will for the most part be confined to one lecture a week; the second lecture will normally be used for class exercises and to compensate for lectures missed due to inter-faculty timetable problems, holidays, etc. SYLLABUS A study of Darwin's ideas and some of the ways in which they have influenced the intellectual history and everyday life of modern man. BOOKS (a) Preliminary reading: de Beer Gavin Charles Darwin, Nelson (b) Prescribed textbooks: 'Appleman P ed. Darwin, Norton •Darwin C The Origin of the Species, Pelican Classics 294 History and Philosophy of Science

EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper at the end of the year. Students may earn exemption from this examination by reaching a satisfactory standard in essays, due on specified dates, and class assignments given during the course.

136-224 THE SCIENTIFIC REVOLUTION A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week during the second half of the academic year. Written work not exceeding 4,000 words, due on specified dates, will be required and will be taken into account in the final result.

SYLLABUS The emergence of modern science during the 17th and early 18th centuries. In 1978 the course will focus on the "Mechanical Philosophy" and its application to the physical sciences. Renaissance magic. The "Sceptical Crisis". Descartes and Newton. The Mechanical Philosophy. Theory and experiment: light, gravity, magnetism and chemical forces.

BOOKS Preliminary reading: Kearney H Science and Change 1500-1700, Weidenfeld & Nicolson 1971

Prescribed textbooks: Descartes R The Philosophical Works of Descartes, vol. 1, trans. Hal- dane & Ross, CUP 1967 Newton I Optiks, Dover 1952 Westfall R S The Construction of Modern Science

EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. Written work will be taken Into account in the final result.

136-225 HISTORY OF PUBLIC HEALTH AND GERM THEORY Miss D. J. Dyason A course of three lectures and one tutorial per week during the first half of the year. Because absolutely no scientific knowledge is presupposed approximately one lecture per week will be devoted to the factual scientific content necessary for an understanding of the historical material. Because of inter-faculty timetable problems up to five of these lecture times may be used to compensate for missed lectures and public holidays. The aim of this course is to study the development of scientific and medical ideas which have had important social or economic consequences.

SYLLABUS Epidemiology and the development of the germ theory from Fracastorius to Koch with emphasis on the public health problems and reforms in the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries which lead ultimately to the development of the National Health Service in the United Kingdom.

295 Faculty of Arts

BOOKS The emphasis will be on extracts from original scientific publications provided as source material. Preliminary reading: Gale A H Epidemic Diseases, Penguin 1959 (available on loan from H.P.S. library and some local libraries) Postgate J Microbes and Men, Pelican 1969 Poynter F N L & keele K D A Short History of Medicine, Mills & Boon 1961 Winslow C A E Man and Epidemics, Princeton 1962 Longmate N Alive end Well, Penguin 1970 Prescribed textbooks: Winslow C A E Conquest of Epidemic Disease, Hafner 1967 Roneoed Source Material issued by the department. A further list of essential reading will be issued by the department. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. Written work, due on specified dates, and tests will be required and will be taken into account in assessing the final result.

136-226 THE SOCIAL CONTEXT OF SCIENCE (Not available in 1978) A course of 36 hours of classes divided between lectures and tutorials for half of the year. The way that scientific developments are influenced and modified by the social context will be examined in a number of examples drawn from the past four centuries.

EXAMINATION Essays not exceeding 4,000 words, due on specified dates, will be set during the year and will be taken into account in the final assessment. The examination will not exceed one three-hour paper.

136-303 PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE Dr F. J. Clendinnen and Dr H. Krips Twelve 1 %/2 hour seminars and substantial reading assignments in second and third terms. PREREQUISITES In the absence of a suitable background of Philosophy subjects, at least one of 136-201, 136-202, 136-203. If only one of these units has been passed, one of the others must be taken concurrently with 303. Enrolments will be limited to students who have shown better than average ability in philosophy of science. SYLLABUS Students will be set a course of reading which together with material covered in the pre and co-requisites will provide a basis for the study of issues dealt with in current literature in a number of areas central to philosophy of science. A selection of the following topics will be covered: Inference and Con- firmation Theory; Philosophical Theories of Probability; Logical Structure 296 History and Philosophy of Science

of theories; Explanation and Reduction; Demarcation of Science from Non-Science; Epistemological problems of Space and Time; the Role of Axiomatic Formal Systems in the logic of science. Students will be required to prepare literature reports, to initiate discussion in seminars and to write an essay. Total written work, due on specified dates, will not exceed 6,000 words. BOOKS No single text book is set. EXAMINATION Assessment will be based on written work.

136-311 HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE (EDUCATION) A course of 24 lectures, 16 in first term and 8 in second, together with tutorial classes through both terms. No classes in third term. SYLLABUS An examination of the process of scientific change with special attention to the importance of factors such as analogy, experiment, simplicity, elegance, generality, personality, instrumentation, cultural values, education, social needs, and metaphysics. Specific examples of scientific development will be studied. BOOKS Preliminary reading: Chalmers A F What is this thing called Science?, U of Queensland Press Prescribed textbooks: Kuhn T S The Structure of Scientific Revolutions, U of Chicago 1970 Leicester H C Historical Background of Chemistry, Wiley Other material will be distributed in class. EXAMINATION The method of examining in this subject will be that of progressive assessment. Students will be required to submit no more than three essays (each approximately 1,500 words in length), due on specified dates. The final assessment for pass or honours will be made on the basis of student's performance in these essays.

136-323 DARWINISM A course of one 2-hour seminar per week during the second half of the academic year. This unit may only be taken concurrently with 136-223 except where special permission is given by the lecturer in charge. PREREQUISITES Two H.P.S. units. SYLLABUS Some topics arising in unit 136-223 will be the subject of intensive study.

297 Faculty of Arts

EXAMINATION Assessment will be based on written work, due on specified dates, during the course.

136-324 THE SCIENTIFIC REVOLUTION (May only be taken concurrently with 136-224, except where special permission is given by the lecturer in charge.) A course of one 2-hour lecture/seminar per week during the second half of the academic year.

PREREQUISITES Two H.P.S. units.

SYLLABUS A study in depth of some topics arising in unit 136-224.

EXAMINATION Assessment will be based on written work, due on specified dates, presented during the course.

136-325 HISTORY OF PUBLIC HEALTH AND GERM THEORY (Not available in 1978) (May only be taken concurrently with 136-225, except where special permission is given by the lecturer in charge.) A one-and-a-half hour seminar each week during the first half of the year, developing in depth themes from unit 136-225.

PREREQUISITES Two H.P.S. units.

EXAMINATION Assessment will be based on written work, due on specified dates, presented during the course.

136-390 DIRECTED STUDY

(Students wishing to enrol in this unit must apply for permission through a member of the department who is willing to supervise the course of study.) The classes per week will not exceed three hours; for hal the year.

PREREQUISITES At least two H.P.S. units.

SYLLABUS A course of directed study in the history or philosophy of science which is not covered in other units available. The study will be directed by a member of the department and must be approved by the department committee. The course of study may include part of some appropriate unit offered in the Arts or Science faculty. Written work, due by specified dates, not exceeding 4,000 words will be required.

298 History and Philosophy of Science

EXAMINATION Not to exceed one 3-hour paper at the end of the year. The written work may be taken into account and an exemption from the examination paper may be granted on the basis of such written work. HONOURS DEGREE

O. • SCHOOL OF HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE (For some possible combinations with this school see p. 519 ff.) The course for the degree for the pure History and Philosophy of Science honours degree should be in accordance with the following pattern: First year: H.P.S.1 and three other subjects (at least one history or philosophy subject is desirable, but not essential). Second year: H.P.S. 2A at honours standard, together with two additional second year subjects, one of which should be Philosophy 2L or an approved substitute. The course must include the unit "Philosophy of Science", this will normally be achieved by including it in a second or third year subject. But it is possible to take the unit separately as an extra. Third year: H.P.S. 3C and 3F at honours standard. Fourth year: 136-461 H.P.S. 4A, 4B and 4C. 1. Students should consult the chairman of the department for advice on their choice of subjects in second year and on whether a pure or combined honours course would best suit their Interests. 2. Students may also be advised to attend other lecture courses which are relevant to their work. 3. The final honours examination will normally consist of three papers for H.P.S.4 together with essay work. In the final assessment, results in other subjects may be taken into account. 4. Where appropriate, subjects from other departments, or one of the interdepartmental programmes, such as Eighteenth Century Studies' may replace one of H.P.S. 4A, 48 or 4C.

HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE IN COMBINED COURSES The department will require the following subjects as part of a combined honours course: H.P.S.1. H.P.S.2A (hofs) Н.р.S.3C (hofs) H.P.S.4A, 48 or 4C H.P.S.4D. 136-261 HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE 2A (HONS) 136-262 HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE 26 (HONS) 136-363 HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE 3C (HONS) 136-364 HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE 3F (HONS) Each of these subjects will be the same as the corresponding subject in the ordinary degree except that candidates for honours will be See p. 503.

299 Faculty of Arts

expected to show a wider and more detailed knowledge than pass candidates in both the examination and the essay work.

136-462 HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE 4A

136-463 HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE 4B

136-464 HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE 4C Each of these subjects will consist of one lecture-seminar per week throughout the year, together with written work in the form of (a) seminar papers, and (b) essay work (either ane 5,000 word essay per seminar course or as otherwise arranged, but not exceeding a total of 15,000 words). This will count towards the final examination result.

SYLLABUS Intensive studies of topics in the history and philosophy of science to be decided on in the light of the scientific, historical and philosophical backgrounds of the students concerned.

EXAMINATION Not to exceed one 3-hour paper per subject.

Each year a number of seminar courses will be offered by the department. Normally, the topics covered will vary from year to year, so that the content of a fourth year subject in one year may be quite distinct from that for another year.

136-465 HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE 4D This will be a study in the same style as H.P.S. 4A, 46 and 4C, and possibly based on one of these subjects, but of half the normal load.

EXAMINATION Not to exceed one 2-hour paper.

MASTER OF ARTS 136-601 0. SCHOOL OF HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE Candidates are required to prepare a thesis on an approved subject. They may be required to sit for an examination at honours standard in the field of the proposed thesis before the subject is approved. The work is to be carried out under the supervision of a member of the History and Philosophy of Science department to whom regular reports on progress are to be made. Normally candidates will also be required to attend two courses of weekly lecture-seminars as specified by the department. Written work will be required in such courses and it will constitute a part of the final examination. An M.A. approval form (obtainable from the Arts faculty office) is to be submitted by the beginning of each year in which the student is a candidate for the M.A. degree (or for M.A. preliminary study). Three copies of each thesis (typed double-spaced on International standard A4) are to be submitted together with an examination entry form 300 Indian Studies

for higher degrees (obtainable from Students' Records). The attention of candidates is drawn to the recommendations of the Professorial Board on the format of theses (regulation 4.6 in the University Calendar). Candidates may also be examined orally on the subject of their thesis. Except in special circumstances and with the permission of the faculty, no thesis or course work will be examined unless the candidate presents for examination within four years from the commencement of his candidature or, in the event of his having been granted leave of absence for the maximum period of one year, within five years from the commencement of his candidature.

MASTER OF SCIENCE Suitar y qualified students (see Faculty of Science Handbook) may apply for M.Sc. candidature. Further advice may be obtained from the chairman of the department.

DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY Admission to Ph.D. candidature in H.P.S. normally requires the completion of a master's degree at a suitably high standard.

DEPARTMENT OF INDIAN STUDIES Chairman of Department: lг S. N. RAY, M.A. (Calcutta and Melb.) Indology has been an established discipline in the West for more than a century, but its introduction in Australian universities is a recent development. Melbourne was the first university in Australia to establish a department of Indian Studies in 1961. The department offers courses in Indian history and civilization (a three year pass course and a four year combined honours course), an introductory course in Sanskrit and a two year course in Bengali. It also accepts candidates for the degree of Master of Arts. The importance of Indian Studies is obvious. India possesses a very ancient civilization which is virtually unique In its continuity to modern times. In the past it has made great contributions to human progress; Its achievements in philosophy, science, literature, arts, religion and social organization are universally recognized. Its population is only second in size to China's. Its cultural influence on China, Japan and the countries of South East Asia has been considerable. It is the world's largest democracy, and in spite of its vast and complex problems, it is currently engaged in a momentous experiment in peaceful social engineering which has hardly any parallel in history. In view of the recent geo-political revolution which has tied up Australia's future with developments in Asia, it is vital that this country should produce a growing number of citizens who understand India well. The courses offered by the department are guided by an inter-disciplinary approach, and examine the living continuity of Indian civilization from the Нагаррап civilization to the present time, the harmonious co-existence of various schools of thought and religions, the significant social, political and cultural transformations brought about by Islam and Western influences, and the problems and efforts of contemporary India. The course in Bengali would be particularly useful to those who wish to specialize In modern Indian intellectual developments. The language is

301 Faculty of Arts

one thousand years old and is spoken by over one hundred and fifteen million people in the Indian subcontinent; It also possesses the richest modern literature of India which includes the works of Rabindranath Tagore who in creative versatility and accomplishments was the peer of world figures like Dante and Goethe. For those with an interest in classical India there is now available an introductory course in Sanskrit.

ORDINARY DEGREE Indian Studies 1A may be taken as one subject in the Arts degree course or as the first part of a major which is completed with pans 28 and 3C or 2C and 38. After the first year the following courses will be offered: Modern Indian Political Thought and Movements (half-subject) Classical Indian Thought (half-subject) Indian Studies 2В or 313 Modern Indian Literature (half-subject) Sanskrit and Prakrit Literature (half-subject) Indian Art and Architecture . Indian Studies 2C or 30 (half-subject) Islam in India (half-subject) Each of these courses constitutes only one half of a degree subject. Indian Studies 28 or 38 shall consist of any two of these courses, and Indian Studies 2C or 3C shall consist of any two not yet taken as part of Indian Studies 28 or 38.

These courses will be available to students of Indian Studies 2 and 20 on the following basis: В

INDIAN S ТUD1ES 2C or 3C' Indian Art and Architecture Available in 1978 Islam in India and alternate years Sanskrit and Prakrit Literature

INDIAN STUDIES 2B or 3В Classical Indian Thought Modern Indian Literature Available in 1979 Modern Indian Political Thought and alternate years and Movements

141-101 INDIAN STUDIES 1A (INTRODUCTION TO INDIAN CIVILIZATION) Mr S. N. Ray, Mr A. Mojumder, Mr J. M. Dunham

A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS An introductory course on Indian history and civilization devoted to the study of the relationship between traditional and modern India. The relationship will be examined with reference to the following

'Indian Studies 3В or З C will be taken by students enrolling In the half-subjects es grade Ill half-subjects, i.e. such students will normally be completing a major in the discipline. 302 Indian Studies

selected themes: the family, caste and elements of continuity and change; major religions and religious reform movements; and the forces of national unity and regional diversity.

BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Cohn Bernard S India: The Social Anthropology of a Civilization. Prentice-Hall paperback (b) Prescribed textbooks: Basham A L The Wonder that was India, Fontana paperback de Bary W T et al ed Sources of Indian Tradition, 2 vols Columbia U paperback Ahmad A Islam in Indian Environment, OUP Dobbin C ed Basic Documents in the Development of Modern India and Pakistan 1835-1947, Van Nostrand Reinhold (c) Recommended for reference: Basham A L ed A Cultural History of India, OUP Majumdar R C et a1 ed An Advanced History of India, MacMillan Lannoy R The Speaking Tree, OUP paperback Moore C D & Eldridge D India Yesterday and Today. Bantam paperback Spate O H K & Learmonth A T A India end Pakistan, Methuen EXAMINATION Students will be assessed on the basis of tutorial assignments, and either one three-hour end of the year examination or three essays of 2,000 words each submitted during the year. Details of tutorial assignments and three optional essays are put on the departmental noticeboard before the start of the first term.

141-201 INDIAN STUDIES 26 (PASS) 141-261 INDIAN STUDIES 2B (HONS) 141-202 INDIAN STUDIES 2C (PASS) 141-262 INDIAN STUDIES 2C (HONS) 141-301 INDIAN STUDIES 36 (PASS) 141-361 INDIAN STUDIES 3B (HONS) 141-302 INDIAN STUDIES 3C (PASS) 141-362 INDIAN STUDIES 3C (HONS) Students enrolling in any of the grade 3 half-units offered, where such units constitute the third part of a major, must enrol formally In either Indian Studies 3В or Indian Studies ЭC.

141-021 INDIAN STUDIES 2В (MODERN INDIAN POLITICAL THOUGHT AND MOVEMENTS) (Half-Subject) (Available in 1979) Mr S. N.. Ray

A course of one lecture per week and one tutorial per week throughout the year.

303 Faculty of Arts

SYLLABUS This will be an advanced study of some of the major Indian political thinkers and schools of thought during the twentieth century. Their ideas and activities will be examined in the context of contemporary political developments. BOOKS (a) Prescribed textbooks: de Bary W T ed et a1 Sources of Indian Tradition, Vol II, Columbia U paperback •Pandey В N The Break-up of British India, Macmillan paperback •Ray S N ed Gandhi India and the World, Hawthorn Press •lardy P The Muslims of British India, CUP paperback Kothari R Politics in India, Little Brown & Co paperback Ghose S Socialism and Communism in India, Allied Bombay (b) Recommended for reference: Spate O H K& Learmonth A T A India and Pakistan, Methuen Majumdar R C ed Struggle for Freedom, Vol Eleven of The History and Culture of the Indian People, Bharatiya Vidyabhavan Bombay Norman Dorothy ed Nehru the First Sixty Years, 2 vols, Godley Head Ahmad A Islamic Modernism in India and Pakistan, OUP Bhatia K The Ordeal of Nationhood, Atheneum NY EXAMINATION Students will be assessed on the basis of tutorial assignments, and either one three-hour end of the year examination or two essays submitted during the year. Details of assessment are put up on the departmental noticeboard before the start of the first term.

141-031 INDIAN STUDIES 3B (MODERN INDIAN POLITICAL THOUGHT AND MOVEMENTS)

As above for 2В but taken as a grade 3 half-subject.

141-022 INDIAN STUDIES 2В (CLASSICAL INDIAN THOUGHT) (Half-Subject) (Available in 1979) Mr J. M. Dunham, Dr T. Rahula A course of one lecture per week and one tutorial per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS An introduction to the formative religious and philosophical literature of Hinduism. In 1979 special attention will be given to the Upanishads and to their most important commentators. (a) Prescribed textbooks: Hiriyanna M Outlines of Indian Philosophy, Allen & Unwin paperback de Bary W T ed et al Sources of Indian Tradition, vol 1, Columbia U paperback 304 Indian Studies

Hume R A Thirteen Principal Upanishads, OUP paperback Radhakrishnan S & Moore C A A Source Book of Indian Philosophy, Princeton U paperback (b) Recommended for reference: Edgerton F The Beginnings of Indian Philosophy, Allen & Unwin Eliade M Yoga Immortality and Freedom, Routledge & Kegan Paul paperback Deutsch E & van Buitenen J A B A Source Book of Advaita Vedanta, U of Hawaii Zaehner R C The Bhagavad-Gita, OUP paperback EXAMINATION Students will be assessed on the basis of tutorial assignments, and either one three-hour end of the year examination or two essays submitted during the year. Details of assessment are put up on the departmental noticeboard before the start of the first term.

141-032 INDIAN STUDIES 3B (CLASSICAL INDIAN THOUGHT) As above for 2В but taken as a grade 3 half-subject.

141-023 INDIAN STUDIES 26 (MODERN INDIAN LITERATURE) (Half-Subject) (Available in 1979) Mr A. Mojumder, Mr S. N. Ray A course of one lecture per week and one tutorial per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS This will be a study of Modern Indian literatures with prescribed literary texts in English translation. Background material will be provided by the department. BOOKS (а ) Prescribed textbooks: •Bandopadhyay Manik Padre river Boatmen, University of Queensland Press paperback 'Pillai T A Chemmeen, Jaico Bombay paperback Jussawalla A New Writing in India, Penguin •Premchand Goden, Jaico Bombay paperback •Banerjee Bibhutibushan Pather Panchali, Allen & Unwin 'Tagore Rabindranath One Hundred and One, Asia Bombay •Chitre Dilip ed An Anthology of Marathl Poetry, Nirmala Sadanand Publishers Bombay •Banerjee Tarasanker Ganadevata, Kutub-Popular Bombay paperback •Pendse S N Wild Bapu of Garambi, Sahltya Akademi Delhi •Ray S N & Maddern M eds 1 have seen Bengal's Face, Editions Indian Calcutta Tagore Rabindranath Chaturanga, Sahitya Academi New Delhi Tagore Rabindranath The Four Chapters, Viswabharati Calcutta (b) Recommended for reference: •Chatterjee S K Languages and Literatures of India, Bengal Publishers Calcutta

305 Faculty of Arts

Contemporary Indian Literature: A Symposium, 2nd ed Sahitya Akademi New Delhi Modernity and Contemporary Indian Literature, Institute of Advanced Study, Simla, India Kripalani K Modern Indian Literature, Nirmala Sadanand Publishers Bombay EXAMINATION Students will be assessed on the basis of tutorial assignments, and either one 3-hour end-of-year examination or two essays submitted during the year. Details of assessment are put up on the departmental noticeboard before the start of the first term.

141-033 INDIAN STUDIES 36 (MODERN INDIAN LITERATURE) As above for 2B but taken as a grade 3 half-subject.

141-024 INDIAN STUDIES 2C (SANSKRIT AND PRAKRIT LITERATURE) (Half-Subject)

(Availaы e in 1978) Mr J. M. Dunham, Dr T. Rahula

A course of one lecture per week and one tutorial per week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS Some major works of Sanskrit and Prakrit literature (lyrical, didactic, narrative and dramatic) will be studied in translation. The course also includes the study of Indian poetics.

BOOKS (a) Prescribed textbooks: Ingalls D H H tr Sanskrit Poetry from Vidyakara's Treasury, Harvard U paperback O'Flaherty W Hindu Myths, Penguin Ryder A W tr Kalidasa Sakuntala and Other Writings, Dutton paperback Ryder A W tr The Ten Princes: Dandin's Dasha-Kumara-Charita, Chicago U paperback Van Buitenen J A B tr Tales of Ancient India, Chicago U paperback Van Buitenen J A B tr Two Plays of Ancient India, Chicago U paperback (b) Recommended for reference: Burrow T The Sanskrit Language, Faber Warder A K Indian Kavya Literature, 3 vols Motilal Banarsidass Winternitz M A History of Indian Literature, 3 vols Calcutta EXAMINATION Students will be assessed on the basis of tutorial assignments, and either one 3-hour end-of-year examination or two essays submitted during the year. Details of assessment are put up on the departmental noticeboard before the start of first term.

306 Indian Studies

141-034 INDIAN STUDIES 3C (SANSKRIT AND PRAKRIT LITERATURE) As above for 2C but taken as a grade 3 half-subject.

141-025 INDIAN STUDIES 2C (INDIAN ART AND ARCHITECTURE) (Half-Subject) (AvailabI e in 1978) Mr S. N. Ray

A course of one lecture per week and one tutorial per week throughout the year.

sYLLAВ US An historical survey of Indian painting, sculpture and architecture to the end of the Hindu period, with some discussion of the canons of Hindu- Buddhist art.

BOOKS (a) Preliminary reading: Ray N An Approach to Indian Art, Panjab U Chandigarh Rowland B Art in East and West, Beacon paperback, Boston (b) Prescribed textbooks: 'Rowland B The Art and Architecture of India, Pelican paperback 'Brown P Indian Architecture: Buddhist and Hindu, Taraporevala, Bombay. Craven R .0 A Concise History of Indian Art, Thames & Hudson paperback • Dasgupta S N Fundamentals of Indian Art, Bharatiya Vidyabhavan paperback

(c) Recommended for reference: Zimmer H The Art of Indian Asia, 2 vols Pantheon Bachhofer L Early Indian Sculpture, Munshiram Manoharlal N Delhi Coomaraswamy A K The Transformation of Nature in Art, Dover paperback Coomaraswamy A K History of Indian end Indonesian Art, Dover paperback Ray N Idea and Image in Indian Art, Munshiram Manoharlal N Delhi Zimmer H Myths and Symbols in Indian Art and Civilization, Harper Torchbooks paperback

EXAMINATION Students will be assessed on the basis of tutorial assignments and either one 3-hour end-of-year examination or two essays submitted during the year. Details of assessment are put up on the departmental noticeboard before the start of first term.

141-035 INDIAN STUDIES 3C (INDIAN ART AND ARCHITECTURE) As above for 2C but taken as a grade 3 half-subject.

307 Faculty of Arts

141-026 INDIAN STUDIES 2C (ISLAM IN INDIA) (Half-Subject)

(Available in 1978) Mr A. Mojumder A course of one lecture per week and one tutorial per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS An introduction ta Islam's contribution to cultural, social and political developments in India. Its scope will be limited mainly to the pre-British period.

BOOKS (a) Preliminary reading: Titus M T Islam In India and Pakistan, YMCA Calcutta paperback Mujeeb M The Indian Muslims, Allen & Unwin

(b) Prescribed textbooks: •Sources of Indian Tradition, ed de Bary W T and others, vol. 1, Columbia UP •Chand T Influence of Islam on Indian Culture, Indian Press Allahabad paperback Husain Y Glimpses of Medieval Indian Culture, Asia Bombay paperback Mujeeb M Islamic Influence of Indian Society, Meenakshi Prakashan Delhi Arberry A J Aspects of Islamic Civilization and Culture, OUP (c) Recommended for reference: The History and Culture of the Indian People, Vol 6 Bharatiya Vidyab- havan Bombay Smith Vincent Oxford History of India, OUP paperback Ahmad Aziz Studies in Islamic Culture in the Indian Sub-continent. OUP Sushterry A M A Outlines of Islamic Culture, Bangalore

141-036 INDIAN STUDIES ЭC (ISLAM IN INDIA) As above for 2C but taken as grade 3 half-subject.

INDIAN LANGUAGE: ORDINARY DEGREE Two Indian languages are available to students in the department: Bengali and Sanskrit. Bengali is available as a single subject or as a sequence of two subjects. Sanskrit is offered as a half-subject, and may be taken at the second-year level in combination with another half-subject in Indian Studies 2В or 2C to constitute a full subject. Students intending to do a combined honours course in Indian Studies should take one of these

308 Indian Studies

languages as part of their course. Students who wish to take Sanskrit as part of their course should consult the Sub-Dean and the chairman of the department. Normally such students will enrol in Indian Studies 2В or 2C, one unit thereof. They will also enrol as complementary course students at Monash University.

141-111 BENGALI 1 Mr A. Mojumder A course of two lectures per week plus two tutorials throughout the year. SYLLABUS (i) General historical outline of the origin and development of the Bengali language. (ii) Basic elements of Bengali grammar, phonetics, phonology and orthography. (iii) Spoken Bengali. (iv) Reading from set texts, translation from Bengali into English and from English Into Bengali. BOOKS (a) Prescribed textbooks: Tagore Rabindranath Gitanjali, Viswabharati Calcutta 'Sengupta Subodh ed Samsad Bengali-English Dictionary, Sahitya Samsad Calcutta (b) Recommended for reference: Sen Sukumar History of Bengali Literature, Sahitya Akademi N Delhi The department will supply transcript material on Bengali grammar, pronunciation, vocabulary and prescribed texts.

EXAMINATION Not more than two 3-hour papers, together with an oral test.

141-211 BENGALI 2 Mr A. Mojumder A course of two lectures plus two tutorials per week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS (i) Advanced course in Bengali grammar, phonetics and phonology; (ii) The two forms of written Bengali: high (literary) and colloquial; (iii) Reading from set texts, translation from Bengali into English and from English into Bengali. (iv) Modern Bengali Literature.

BOOKS (a) Prescribed textbooks: Tagore Rabindranath Balaka (selections), Viswabharati Calcutta Tagore Rabindranath Dakghor, Viswabharati Calcutta Chatterji Saratchandra Srikanta, pt I M C Sarkar & Sons Calcutta Basu Rajsekhar Galpakalpa, M C Sarkar & Sons Calcutta

309 Faculty of Arts

(b) Recommended for reference: Sengupta Subodh Samsad Bengali-English Dictionary, Sahitya Samsad, Calcutta Sengupta Subоdh Samsad English-Bengali Dictionary, Sahitya Samsad, Calcutta Вa зu Rajsekhar Chalantika, M C Sarkar & Sons Calcutta Ghose J C Bengali Literature, OUP The department will supply transcript material on Bengali grammar, vocabulary and prescribed texts comprised of selected essays, stories and poems. EXAMINATION Not more than two 3-hour papers.

141-212 INTRODUCTORY SANSKRIT (HALF SUBJECT) Dr R. Slonek, Dr T. Rahula A course of one lecture and one tutorial per week throughout the year. Students intending to take this course should consult with the Sub-Dean, Faculty of Arts, and Dr R. Slonek, Monash University.

SYLLABUS This course is an intensive introduction to the Sanskrit language and to readings from early classical literature. During the first half-year it comprises study and exercises in: (i) the devanagari alphabet, (ii) basic Sanskrit grammar and syntax, (iii) simple English to Sanskrit sentence construction. In the second half of the year selections from the Upanishads, the Mahabharata and/or kavya texts will be translated. BOOKS (a) Prescribed textbooks: Gonda J A Concise Elementary Grammar of the Sanskrit Language, U of Alabama Lanman C R Sanskrit Reader; with vocabulary and notes, Harvard U Mayrhofer M Sanskrit Grammar, with Comparative Indo-European Ex- planations, U of Alabama (b) Reference works: Burrow T The Sanskrit Language, 2nd ed Faber Monier-Williams M et al Sanskrit-English Dictionary, OUP Whitney W D Sanskrit Grammar, 2nd ed Harvard U EXAMINATION Not more than one З hour paper.

HONOURS DEGREE S. SCHOOL OF INDIAN STUDIES

Indian Studies may at present only be taken in combined honours schools. These combined honours schools will include a selection of pass courses

310 Indian Studies

in Indian Studies and Bengali or Sanskrit together with such honours work as may be agreed from time to time by the chairmen of the departments concerned and approved by the faculty. The fourth year programme will also include thesis work to be approved in consultation with the two chairmen of the departments concerned. Currently the department offers special honours level courses in the following subjects under the general title "Advanced Study in Indian Civilization": Indian Historiography; Regional History (Bengal); Budd- hist Religion and Philosophy; Hindu Social organization; Communism in India; Rabindranath Tagore and his Age; and Tribal India. The courses are given in the form of weekly 2-hour seminars throughout the year. Details of courses available each year are put up on the departmental noticeboard before the start of the first term and copies are available from the department's office. Students who wish to proceed to a combined honours course involving the school of Indian Studies should seek approval from the chairman of the department and from faculty through the sub-dean.

141-261 INDIAN STUDIES 2В (IONS) Consisting of: 141-027 Advanced study in Indian Civilization 2A and two half-subjects chosen from 141-021 141-022 141-023 141-028 Advanced study in Indian Civilzation 2В.

141-262 INDIAN STUDIES 2C (IONS) Consisting of: 141-027 Advanced study in Indian Civilization 2A and two half-subjects chosen from 141-024 141-025 141-026 141-028 Advanced study in Indian Civilization 2В

141-361 INDIAN STUDIES 3В (IONS) Consisting of: 141-037 Advanced study in Indian Civilization 3A and two half-subjects chosen from 141 -03 1 141-03 2 141-033 141-038 Advanced study in Indian Civilization 3В.

141-362 INDIAN STUDIES ЭC (IONS) Consisting of: 141-037 Advanced study in Indian Civilization 3A and two half-subjects chosen from 141-034 141-035

311 Faculty of Arts

141-036 141-038 Advanced study in Indian Civilization 36.

141-461 INDIAN STUDIES 4 (HONS)

MASTER OF ARTS 141-601 S. SCHOOL OF INDIAN STUDIES

Admission to candidature for the degree of Master of Arts requires either BA degree with honours, or BA ordinary degree and subsequent completion of MA preliminary work as prescribed by the faculty of Arts. MA preliminary work in Indian Studies consists of at least one year of full-time work or two years of part-time work in honours subjects including the completion of a thesis. The examination for the degree of Master of Arts is by thesis. Candidates are required to prepare a thesis on an approved subject (which should not exceed 50,000 words in length, excluding footnotes, bibliography and catalogue raisonne). They will work under the supervision of a member of the Indian Studies department, to whom they must report regularly on the progress of their work. They may also be required to attend seminars or lectures bearing on their subject. An entry form for examination for higher degrees must be submitted to the Registrar. Three copies of each thesis (A4, typewritten, double-spaced) should be submitted, one of which will be deposited in the University Library. The attention of candidates is drawn to the recommendations of the Professorial Board on the format of theses (regulation 4.6, in the University Calendar.) The thesis should normally be submitted for examination within two years from the commencement of candidature for MA by full-time candidates and within four years by part-time candidates. Except in special circumstances and with the permission of the faculty no thesis or course work will be examined unless the candidate presents for examination within four years from the commencement of his candidature or, in the event of his having been granted leave of absence for the maximum period of one year, within five years from the commencement of his candidature.

DEPARTMENT OF INDONESIAN AND MALAYAN STUDIES

Chairman of Department: Mr M. SL AMET, doctorandus rеr. soc. (Ley.) COURSES OFFERED 146-101 Indonesian and Malayan Studies 1 146-201 Indonesian and Malayan Studies 2 (Pass) 146-210 Indonesian Language 2 146-020 Indonesian History 2 (Half-subject) 146-021 Indonesian Politics 2 (Half-subject) 146-022 Indonesian Anthropology 2 (Half-subject)• 146-023 Indonesian Sociology 2 (Half-subject) 146-202 Indonesian History and Politics 2 (Pass) 146-203 Indonesian Anthropology and Sociology 2 (Pass)• 146-301 Indonesian and Malayan Studies 3 (Pass) • Not available In 1978. 312 Indonesian and Malayan Studies

146-310 Indonesian Language 3 146-030 Indonesian History 3 (Half-subject) 146-031 Indonesian Politics 3 (Half-subject) 146-032 Indonesian Anthropology 3 (Half subject) 146-033 Indonesian Sociology 3 (Half-subject)• 146-034 Modern Indonesian Writers 3 (Half-subject) 146-311 Indonesian and Malayan Studies 3A• 146-302 Indonesian History and Politics 3 146-303 Indonesian Anthropology and Sociology 3• 146-261 Indonesian and Malayan Studies 2 (Ions) 146-361 Indonesian and Malayan Studies 3 (Ions) 146-461 Indonesian and Malayan Studies 4 (Ions) 146-601 Master of Arts—School of Indonesian and Malayan Studies

ENROLMENT Students enrolling in Indonesian and Malayan Studies 2 must enrol in 146-210 Indonesian Language 2 and one other half-subject of their choice.. Students enrolling in Indonesian and Malayan Studies 3 must enrol in 146-310 Indonesian Language 3 and one other half-subject of their choice. Students who wish to take the non-language subjects 146-202, or 146-203, or 146-302, or 146-303, must enrol both in the umbrella subject and the two half-subjects which constitute the full subject. e.g. 146-303 Indonesian Anthropology and Sociology 3 146-032 Indonesian Anthropology 3 146-033 Indonesian Sociology 3

COURSES IN INDONESIAN Indonesia's motto Is 'Unity in Diversity'. Despite the multitude of islands and peoples and the many different languages and different culture patterns, there are certain strong unifying bonds of sentiment and interest which have held the country together and have made possible the formidable task of welding a single nation with a distinct national identity. The discovery of the underlying similarities as well as of the wealth of regional variations in ways of life, in art, literature, religion and in political and social structures in the different parts of the archipelago is one of the great fascinations of studying Indonesia closely. The colourful past still impinges on the present in all kinds of ways, enriching the country culturally even though it has left formidable problems eco- nomically. Because of its geographical position across the historic trade routes from India to the Spice Islands and to China, Indonesia has experienced various waves of influence from the world's great civilizations: Indian Buddhism and Hinduism, Islam from Arabia, Christianity from the Portu- guese and Dutch. The Chinese, too, have traded with Indonesia for a thousand years and now form about two per cent of the population. Yet the Indonesians have absorbed all these influences without losing their own individuality and, especially after having obtained political independence, have continued the search for a national identity in both politico-economic patterns and in the cultural and ideological spheres, where the country's writers and artists are groping their way towards a united and independent Indonesia. Their efforts deserve our sympathy

• Not available In 1978.

313 Faculty of Arts

and attention, for they are our nearest neighbours and there is much that we can learn from them. The Commonwealth Advisory Committee on the Teaching of Asian Lan- guages and Cultures in its report of September, 1970 feels that it is through the social studies course in primary schools and in the core area studies, taken by all students at secondary level, that Australian students may be given an opportunity to learn about Asia. The Com- mittee believes that the school systems should concentrate on Indonesian/ Malay, Japanese and Chinese, and holds the view that, in this respect. Australia should become a major centre. Any significant expansion in Asian language teaching will require a substantial increase in the number of teachers. In 1978 more than 90 secondary schools in Victoria are teaching the Indonesian language. There is also a demand for teaching the history of Indonesia within the Asian History Syllabus. In addition to these openings in the teaching profession graduates majoring in Indonesian and Malayan Studies have also found employment with the Departments of Foreign Affairs, Defence and Trade, Radio Australia, various news- papers and as business representatives. From 1978 the courses in IMS are being changed from those in previous years to enlarge the range of choices open to them. As before, a student majoring in Indonesian and Malayan Studies will combine two types of study: (1 ) the study of Indonesian language and literature, and (2) the "area study", i.e. the study of historical, political, social, and economic problems and structures in present-day Indonesia. On the other hand, students who do not wish to undertake the study of Indonesian language and literature beyond a certain stage or at all will as from 1978 be able to undertake the second and third year area study courses offered by the department. In first year, IМ S 1 is primarily devoted to basic language study. In second year, students may either take IМ S 2 (consisting of one of the area study half-subjects offered in that year, and work in Indonesian language and literature) or a full area study subject (consisting of the two area study half-subjects being offered in that year).•• In third year, students have a range of options open. They may either: (a) take 115 3 (consisting of work in Indonesian language and literature together with the new literature half-subject Modern Indonesian Writers) or (b) take IMS 3 (consisting of work in Indonesian language and literature and one of the area study half-subjects offered in that year) or (c) take a full area study subject (consisting of the two area study half- subjects offered in that year).' • In fourth year, IMS 4 includes both an area study content and work in Indonesian language and literature. IMS 1 is a prerequisite for entry to IMS 2 (except for those who have obtained exemption); IМ S 2 is a prerequisite for entry to 1М S 3; IMS 2 and either a pass or concurrent enrolment in 1М S 3 is a prerequisite Not available In 1978. Students In future years taking this option may In addition take the subject I1S 3A (consisting of the two area study half-subjects offered in that year), thus completing a supermajor in IMS. The Indonesian area study half-subjects (with the exception of Indonesian History) are also avaiiable for students to take individually at second or third year level as part of Politics 2 or 3. A student may thus If he wishes enrol both in IMS 2 (consisting of work In Indonesian language and literature and one of the area study half-subjects being offered In that year) and also In a Politics subject (which would Include the other Indonesian area study half-subject). Politics units available Include other Asian Studies courses such as Chinese Politics and Society and Indian Politics and Society. 314 Indonesian and Malayan Studies

for entry to IMS ЗА; an unspecified first year subject is a prerequisite for entry to Indonesian History and Politics 2 and Indonesian Anthro- pology and Sociology 2; and a history, social science or Asian Studies subject at second year level is a prerequisite for entry to Indonesian History and Politics 3 and to Indonesian Anthropology and Sociology 3. Students should note the following provisions governing the area study half-subjects in second and third year: (1) Students may not select half-subjects which contain subject matter which was included in subjects already passed; e.g. students who have passed IMS 2 or IMS 3 in 1976 or earlier even years may not enter for the half-subjects Indonesian History or Indonesian Politics; students who have passed IMS 2 or IMS 3 in 1977 or earlier odd years may not enter for the half-subjects Indonesian Anthropology or Indonesian Sociology. Students who have passed a particular half-subject as part of IMS 2, Indonesian History and Politics 2, Indonesian Anthropology and Sociology 2, Politics 2A or 2B may not enter for that same half- subject as part of IMS 3, IMS ЗA, Indonesian History and Politics 3. Indonesian Anthropology and Sociology 3, Politics ЭA or 36. More details on this point may be obtained from the Arts faculty office or the department of Indonesian and Malayan Studies. (2) Students may not enrol concurrently in separate subjects which include a half-subject common to both; e.g. a student may not enrol in both IMS 2 (including Indonesian History 2) and Indonesian History and Politics 2. (3) Both half-subjects comprising a full subject will be examined at the end of the year. Students may not enrol in single half-subjects, unless they have special permission from the faculty to do so.

ORDINARY DEGREE (Details for the honours degree are set out at the end of this section.)

146-101 INDONESIAN AND MALAYAN STUDIES 1 A course of two lectures, two tutorials and one language laboratory session per week throughout the year. Students who have passed the Victorian Higher School Certificate examination in Indonesian are exempted from Indonesian and Malayan Studies 1. They may take instead Dutch 1, Chinese 1, Japanese 1, East Asian Studies or another approved subject as the first part of a major with Indonesian and Malayan Studies 2 and 3. Other candidates who hold recognized professional qualifications in Bahasa Indonesia or Malay may apply in writing for similar exemption from the chairman of department.

SYLLABUS (i) Basic elements of sentence structure and idiom in Bahasa Indo- nesia. Translation from Indonesian into English from prescribed texts and elementary translation from English into Indonesian. Pro- nunciation and elementary conversation. (ii) Reading from set texts. (iii) During the year ten lectures will be given as an introduction to the study of Indonesian society and its history.

315 Faculty of Arts

BOO КS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: •Legge J D Indonesia, Prentice-Hall •Zainu'ddin A A Short History of Indonesia, Cassell Missen G J Viewpoint on Indonesia, Nelson МаКау E ed Studies in Indonesian History, Pitman (b) Prescribed textbooks: Echols J M and Shadily Hasan An Indonesian-English Dictionary, Cor- nell UP Echols J M and Shadily Hasan An English-Indonesian Dictionary, Cor- nell UP Sarumpaet J P The Structure of Bahasa Indonesia, Sahata Publications Sarumpaet J P & Hendrata H A Modern Reader in Bahasa Indonesia, latest ed Books 1 and 2, PO Box 282, Box Hill, Vic The department will supply typescript material, including explanation of more advanced grammatical structures and extracts for reading from In- donesian novels and stories. An annotated reading list and additional material for reading will be available in the department for students wishing to proceed to honours in Indonesian and Malayan Studies. ASSIGNMENTS AND TESTS One short written exercise on the language will be required every week. A written test of 60 minutes will be held in the middle of the year. Results of these assignments and the test will be taken into account in determining examination results.

EXAMINATION Not more than two 3-hour papers, together with an oral test of 15 minutes. The area study will be examined by an essay of 2,000 words to be submitted during the year.

146-201 INDONESIAN AND MALAYAN STUDIES 2 (PASS) A course of one lecture a week and one tutorial a week throughout the year on Section 1 (language) and two lectures a week and one tutorial a week for half the academic year on Section 2 (area). IMS-1 is a prerequisite for this course, except for students who have passed the Victorian Higher School Certificate in Indonesian or have been exempted by the chairman of department because they hold some other professional qualifications In Bahasa Indonesia or Malay. (See under Indonesian and Malayan Studies 1.)

SECTION 1 (Language) 146-210 INDONESIAN LANGUAGE 2 SYLLABUS Further work in Bahasa Indonesia with emphasis on composition. Ma- terial for reading will also be taken from writings in modern Bahasa Indonesia related to the area study.

BOO КS As for Indonesian and Malayan Studies 1 with:

316 Indonesian and Malayan Studies

Poerwadarminta W J S Kamus Umum Bahasa Indonesia, Balai Pustaka Jakarta Idrus Dari Ave Maria ke Jalan Lain ke Roma, any ed Selected extracts from writing related to the area study and short stories will be supplied by the department.

SECTION 2 (Area) The area section will consist of one of the following half-subjects: Indonesian History, Indonesian Politics, Indonesian Anthropology and Indonesian Sociology. Only two of these half-subjects will be offered in any one year. Students who have already been credited with a pass in one of these half-subjects as part of another course may not enter for the same half-subject In IMS 2. 146-020 INDONESIAN HISTORY 2 (Half-Subject) (Available in 1978, and thereafter in alternate years) A course of two lectures a week and one tutorial a week during the first half of the academic year. SYLLABUS A study of Indonesian history from the early kingdoms of Srivijaya and Majapahit to the Japanese invasion and Dutch surrender in 1942. Themes to be explored include the response of indigenous states to exogenous influence (Hindu, Buddhist, Islamic and European), the nature and impact of Dutch colonial rule, and the emergence of broader group identities and ideologies among Indonesians in the twentieth century.

BOOKS (a) Preliminary reading: Kartini R A Letters of a Javanese Princess, Norton Legge J D Indonesia, Prentice-Hall latest ed Sjahrir S Out of Exile, Greenwood (b) Prescribed textbooks: Hall D G E A History of South-East Asia, Macmillan Penders Chr L M ed Indonesia: Selected Documents on Colonialism and Nationalism 1830-1942, U of Queensland Press Steinberg D J ed In Search of Southeast Asia, Praeger Detailed reading guides will be issued during the course.

146-021 INDONESIAN PouТICS 2 ( Нalf-Subject) (Available in 1978, and thereafter in alternate years) A course of two lectures a week and one tutorial a week during the second half of the academic year.

SYLLABUS A study of Indonesian politics. The course will include an introductory section on the emergence of Indonesian nationalism and will then focus on a comparison of three systems of government (Parliamentary De- mocracy, Guided Democracy and New Order) and the periods of Instability which preceded them (Japanese occupation and Revolution, regional rebellions and constitutional deadlock, and the 1965 coup attempt and its aftermath).

317 Faculty of Arts

BOOKS (а ) Preliminary reading: Legge J D Sukarno, Penguin Mortimer R ed Showcase State, Angus & Robertson Polomka P Indonesia Since Sukarno, Penguin Reid A Indonesian National Revolution 1945-50, Longman (b) Prescribed textbooks: Feith H & Castles L eds Indonesian Political Thinking 19454965, Cor- nell UP Detailed reading guides will be issued during the course.

146-022 INDONESIAN ANTHROPOLOGY 2 (Half-Subject) (Available in 1979, and thereafter in alternate years) A course of two lectures a week and one tutorial a week during the first half of the academic year.

SYLLABUS The anthropology course will deal with the pre-peasant and pre-urban cultures and communities of Indonesia and their transformations.

BOOKS (a) Preliminary reading: Coon C S The Hunting Peoples, Pelican Fox R Encounter with Anthropology, Penguin/Peregrine (b) Prescribed textbooks: Durkheim E & Mauss M Primitive Classifications, Routledge & Kegan Paul Fox R Kinship and Marriage, Pelican Koentjaraningrat Anthropology in Indonesia, Martinus Nijhoff Rassers W H Panji, the Culture Hero, Martinus Nijhoff Worsley P The Trumpet Shall Sound, Paladin Detailed reading guides will be issued during the course.

146-023 INDONESIAN SOCIOLOGY 2 (Half-Subject) (Avaiiabie in 1979, and thereafter in alternate years) A course of two lectures a week and one tutorial a week during the second half of the academic year.

SYLLABUS The sociology course will deal with the peasant and gentry cultures and societies of Indonesia and their responses towards modernity.

BOOKS (a) Preliminary reading: Parrinder C Asian Religions, Sheldon Press Potter J M & Diaz M N & Foster G M Peasant Society, Little Brown (b) Prescribed textbooks: Boland B J The Struggle of Islam in Modern Indonesia, Martinus Nijhoff Geertz C The Religion of Java, Phoenix Geertz C Agricultural Involution, U California Press 318 Indonesian and Malayan Studies

Koentjaraningrat Villages in Indonesia, Cornell UP Sartono Kartodirdjo Protest Movements in Rural Java, OUP Detailed reading guides will be Issued during the course.

ASSIGNMENTS AND TESTS For Section 1 (language) One short written exercise will be required every fortnight. For Section 2 (area) one essay of 2,000 words will be required during the course.

EXAMINATION For Section 1 (language) Not more than one 3-hour paper and an oral test in Bahasa Indonesia. Written assignments will be taken into account in determining examination results. For Section 2 (area) Not more than one 3-hour paper at the end of the year. Written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination. Students must perform satisfactorily in both language and area sections.

146-202 INDONESIAN HISTORY AND POLITICS 2 (PASS)

(Available in 1978, and thereafter in alternate years) A course of two lectures a week and one tutorial a week, consisting of the half-subjects Indonesian History and Indonesian Politics. An unspecified first year subject is a prerequisite for this course. Students who have already been credited with a pass in one or both of these half-subjects as part of another course may not enrol in Indonesian History and Politics 2.

146-020 INDONESIAN HISTORY (Half-Subject)

A course of two lectures a week and one tutorial a week during the first half of the academic year.

SYLLABUS AND BOOKS As above for Indonesian History 2 taken as part of Indonesian and Malayan Studies 2.

146-021 INDONESIAN POLITICS 2 (Half-Subject)•

A course of two lectures a week and one tutorial a week during the second half of the academic year.

SYLLABUS AND BOOKS . As above for Indonesian Politics 2 taken as part of Indonesian and Malayan Studies 2.

ASSIGNMENTS AND TESTS Students will be required to submit during the course one essay of 2000. words for Indonesian History and one essay of 2,000 words for Indo- nesian Politics. EXAMINATION Not more than one 3-hour paper at the end of the year for Indonesian

• This half-subject may also be taken In conjunction with a unit from Politics 2.

319 Faculty of Arts

History and not more than one 3-hour paper at the end of the year for Indonesian Politics. Written work done during the year in each half- subject will constitute part of the examination.

146-203 INDONESIAN ANTHROPOLOGY AND SOCIOLOGY 2 (PASS ) (Available in 1979, and thereafter in alternate years) A course of two lectures a week and one tutorial a week consisting of the half-subjects Indonesian Anthropology and Indonesian Sociology. An unspecified first year subject is a prerequisite for this course. Students who have already been credited with a pass in one or both of these half-subjects as part of another course may not enrol in Indonesian Anthropology and Sociology 2.

146-022 INDONESIAN ANTHROPOLOGY 2 (Half-Subject)• A course of two lectures a week and one tutorial a week during the first half of the academic year. SYLLABUS AND BOOKS As above for Indonesian Anthropology 2 taken as part of Indonesian and Malayan Studies 2.

146-023 INDONESIAN SOCIOLOGY 2 (Half-Subject)•

A course of two lectures a week and one tutorial a week during the second half of the academic year.

SYLLABUS AND BOOKS As above for Indonesian Sociology 2 taken as part of Indonesian and Malayan Studies 2.

ASSIGNMENTS AND TESTS Students will be required to submit during the course one essay of 2,000 words for Indonesian Anthropology and one essay of 2,000 words for Indonesian Sociology.

EXAMINATION Not more than one 3-hour paper at the end of the year for Indonesian Anthropology and not more than one 3-hour paper at the end of the year for Indonesian Sociology. Written work done during the year in each half-subject will constitute part of the examination.

146-301 INDONESIAN AND MALAYAN STUDIES 3 (PASS) A course of one lecture a week and one tutorial a week throughout the year on Section 1 (language) plus either two lectures a week and one tutorial a week for half the academic year on Section 2 (area) or one lecture a week and one tutorial a week throughout the year on Section 3 (literature). IMS 2 is a prerequisite for this course. • Each of these half-subjects may also be taken In conjunction with a unit from Politics 2. 320 Indonesian and Malayan Studies

SECTION 1 (Language) 146-310 INDONESIAN LANGUAGE 3 SYLLABUS Advanced language study with emphasis on composition, and the study of the development of modern Indonesian literature. BOOKS Prescribed books: Alisjahbana T Leer Terkembang, any ed Kartamihardja A Atheis, any ed Moeis A Salah Asuhan, any ed Pane A Belenggu, any ed Pramudya A Toer. Perburuan, any ed Pramudya A Toer Cerito dari Biora, any ed Rusli M Sitti Nurbaya, any ed Teeuw A Modern Indonesian Literature, Martinus Nijhoff The Hague One of the novels will be selected by each student after consultation with the lecturer. SECTION 2 (Area) The area section will consist of one of the following half-subjects: Indonesian History, Indonesian Politics, Indonesian Anthropology and Indonesian Sociology. Only two of these half-subjects will be offered in any one year. Students who have already been credited with a pass in one of these half-subjects as part of another course may not enter for the same half- subject in IMS 3.

146-030 INDONESIAN HISTORY 3 (Half-Subject) As above for Indonesian History 2 but taken as a grade 3 subject.

146-031 INDONESIAN POLITICS 3 (Half-Subject) As above for Indonesian Politics 2 but taken as a grade 3 subject.

146-032 INDONESIAN ANTHROPOLOGY 3 (Half-Subject) As above for Indonesian Anthropology 2 but taken as a grade 3 subject.

146-033 INDONESIAN SOCIOLOGY 3 (Half-Subject) As above for Indonesian Sociology 2 but taken as a grade 3 subject. SECTION 3 (Literature) The literature section consists of the half-subject Modern Indonesian Writers 3. This will normally be available every year, commencing in 1979.

146-034 MODERN INDONESIAN WRITERS 3 (Half-Subject) (Not avaiiabIe in 1978) A course of one lecture and one tutorial a week throughout the year.

L 321 Faculty of Arts

SYLLABUS A study of a selection from post-war writing. Most of the lectures and tutorials will be given and conducted in Bahasa Indonesia. 800 KS (a) Preliminary reading: Teeuw A Modern Indonesian Literature, Martinus Nijhoff The Hague (b) Prescribed textbooks: Aveling H Contemporary Indonesian Poetry, U of Queensland Press Jassin H B Angkatan '66—Prosa dan Puisl, Gunung Agung Raffel B The Complete Poetry and Prose of Chaini Anwar, State U of New York Press Detailed reading guides will be issued during the course. ASSIGNMENTS AND TESTS For Section 1 (language) one short written exercise will be required every fortnight, and one Indonesian language essay of 1,000 words will be required in the middle of the year. For Section 2 (area) one essay of 2,500 words will be required during the course. For Section 3 (literature) one Indonesian language essay of 1,000 words will be required during the year. EXAMINATION For Section 1 (language) not more than one 3-hour paper, and an oral test in Bahasa Indonesia. The essay and written assignments will be taken into account in determining examination results. For Section 2 (area) not more than one 3-hour paper at the end of the year. Written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination. For Section 3 (literature) not more than one 3-hour paper. The essay written during the year will form part of the examination. Students must perform satisfactorily in both language and literature/ area sections.

146-311 INDONESIAN AND MALAYAN STUDIES 3A (PASS)

A course of two lectures a week and one tutorial a week consisting of two of the area half-subjects Indonesian History, Indonesian Politics, Indonesian Anthropology and Indonesian Sociology. This subject is available only to students who have either passed or are concurrently enrolled in 1MS 3 (including the half-subject Modern Indonesian Writers). IMS 3A will not be available in 1978. Students who have already been credited with a pass in one or both of the two half-subjects being offered in the year of enrolment as part of another course may not enrol in iMS ЗА.

I 46-IЗO INDONESIAN HISTORY 3 (Half-Subject) As above for Indonesian History 2 but taken as a grade 3 subject.

146-031 INDONESIAN POLITICS З (Half-Subject) As above for Indonesian Politics 2 but taken as a grade 3 subject. 322 Indonesian and Malayan Studies

146-032 INDONESIAN ANTHROPOLOGY 3 (Half-Subject) As above for Indonesian Anthropology 2 but taken as a grade 3 subject.

146-033 INDONESIAN SOCIOLOGY 3 (Half-Subject) As above for Indonesian Sociology 2 but taken as a grade 3 subject. ASSIGNMENTS AND TESTS Students will be required to submit during the course one essay of 2,500 words in each of the two half-subjects. EXAMINATION Not more than one 3-hour paper at the end of the year for each of the two half-subjects. Written work done during the year In each half-subject will constitute part of the examination.

146-302 INDONESIAN HISTORY AND POLITICS 3 (PASS) (Available in 1978, and thereafter in alternate years) A course of two lectures a week and one tutorial a week, consisting of the half-subjects Indonesian History and Indonesian Politics. A history, social science or Asian Studies subject at second year level is a prerequisite for this course. Students who have already been credited with a pass in one or both of these half-subjects as part of another course may not enrol in Indo- nesian History and Politics 3.

146-030 INDONESIAN HISTORY 3 (Half-Subject) As above for Indonesian History 2 but taken as a grade 3 subject.

146-031 INDONESIAN POLITICS 3 (Half-Subject)• As above for Indonesian Politics 2 but taken as a grade 3 subject. ASSIGNMENTS AND TESTS Students will be required to submit during the course one essay of 2,500 words for Indonesian History and one essay of 2,500 words for Indo- nesian Politics. EXAMINATION Not more than one 3-hour paper at the end of the year for Indonesian History and not more than one 3-hour paper at the end of the year for Indonesian Politics. Written work done during the year in each half- subject will constitute part of the examination.

146-303 INDONESIAN ANTHROPOLOGY AND SOCIOLOGY 3 (PASS)

(Available in 1979, and thereafter in alternate years) A course of two lectures a week and one tutorial a week, consisting of the half-subjects Indonesian Anthropology and Indonesian Sociology.

323 Faculty of Arts

A history, social science or Asian Studies subject at second year level is a prerequisite for this course. Students who have already been credited with a pass in one or both of these half-subjects as part of another course may not enrol in Indo- nesian Anthropology and Sociology 3.

146-032 INDONESIAN ANTHROPOLOGY 3 (Half-Subject)• As above for Indonesian Anthropology 2 but taken as a grade 3 subject.

146-033 INDONESIAN SOCIOLOGY 3 (Half-Subject)• As above for Indonesian Sociology 2 but taken as a grade 3 subject. ASSIGNMENTS AND TESTS Students will be required to submit during the course one essay of 2,500 words for Indonesian Anthropology and one essay of 2,500 words for Indonesian Sociology. EXAMINATION Not more than one 3-hour paper at the end of the year for Indonesian Anthropology and not more than one 3-hour paper at the end of the year for Indonesian Sociology. Written work done during the year in each half-subject will constitute part of the examination.

HONOURS DEGREE (It is possible to combine Indonesian and Malayan Studies with most honours subjects in the Faculty of Arts. For some examples see pp. 519 ff.) 1. Indonesian and Malayan Studies may at present be taken only In combined honours schools, which will include the three honours level courses outlined below and the subjects prescribed by the other departments concerned. In their fourth year, students will be required to do one of the following: (a) Submit a short thesis in each department. (b) Submit a thesis in only one of the two departments concerned subject to the approval of the chairmen of the two departments. A student who submits his thesis in another department will be required to undertake a short translation project in lieu of his thesis with Indonesian and Malayan Studies. (c) Submit a joint thesis in both departments with the approval of both chairmen. In each case the subject of the Indonesian and Malayan Studies thesis or the translation project must be approved by the chairman of the department by the end of third year. 2. Students who wish to proceed to a combined honours course involving the school of Indonesian and Malayan Studies should seek approval from the chairman of the department and from faculty through the Sub-Dean. Such approval will normally be given to students who have obtained the equivalent of second class honours in Indonesian 1 and who have performed well in their remaining three subjects. • Each of these half-subjects may also be taken In conjunction with a unit from Politics 3. 324 Indonesian and Malayan Studies

146-261 INDONESIAN AND MALAYAN STUDIES 2 (HONS) Admission to this course will be dependent on good performance (i.e. at least second class honours division B) in the first year annual examinations. A course of study as for IMS 2 in the ordinary degree with an additional weekly class and additional reading. The weekly classes will be divided between language work (Section 1) and the area study (Section 2).

SYLLABUS As for 1MS 2 in the ordinary degree, together with: in Section 1, a more Intensive study of the language and in Section 2, either (A) an intensive study of changes in certain political and social institutions of Indonesia, or (B) the study of socio-economic features of Indonesia. Only one of either 2A or 2 В will be offered in any one year. Section 2A will be offered in 1978 (and subsequent even years), while section 2В will be available in 1979 (and subsequent odd years). Students should note that the weekly honours classes for both language and area study extend throughout the year. BOOKS (a) Prescribed books for section 1: As for the ordinary degree, with Toha Mohtar Pulang, any ed (b) Prescribed books for section 2A: As for the ordinary degree plus the following: Benda H J Continuity and Change In Southeast Asia, Yale Southeast Asia Monograph Dahm B Sukarno and the Struggle for Indonesian Independence, Cornell UP Holt C ed Culture end Politics in Indonesia, Cornell UP Pye L W ed Cases in Comparative Politics: Asia, Little Brown Sartono Kartodirdjo Protest Movements In Rural Java, OUP (c) Prescribed books for section 2B: As for the ordinary degree plus the following: Cockroft J D Frank A G & Johnson D L Dependence and Underdevelop- ment, Anchor paperback 1972 Geertz C Agricultural Involution, U of California P any ed McGee T G The Urbanization Process in the Third World, Bell & Sons London any ed Mortimer R ed Showcase Stete, Angus & Robertson 1973 Rex J Sociology and the Demystification of the Modern World, Rout- ledge & Kegan Paul 1974 Wilber C K ed The Political Economy of Development and Under- development, Random House 1973

ASSIGNMENTS AND TESTS As for the ordinary degree, together with one additional assignment on the language every fortnight.

EXAMINATION As for the ordinary degree, together with one additional 3-hour paper comprising both the language and the area sections.

325 Faculty of Arts

146-361 1NDONESIAN AND MALAYAN STUDIES З (HONS) A course of study as for IMS 3 in the ordinary degree, with an additional weekly class. The weekly classes will be divided between language work (Section 1) and either the area study (Section 2) or literature (Section 3). SYLLABUS As fir IMS 3 in the ordinary degree, together with: In Section 1, a more intensive study of the language which Includes an introduction to Jawi script; in Section 2, either (A) an intensive study of changes in certain political and social institutions of Indonesia, or ( В ) the study of socio- economic features of Indonesia; and in Section 3, a more intensive study of aspects of Indonesian literature. Only one of either 2A or 28 will be offered in any one year. Section. 2A will be offered in 1978 (and subsequent even years), while section 28 will be available in 1979 (and subsequent odd years). Section 3 will normally be available every year but will not be available in 1978. Students should note that the weekly honours classes for language, area study and literature extend throughout the year. BOOKS (a) Section 1. As for the ordinary degree plus additional reading, for which material will be supplied by the department. (b) Prescribed books for section 2A: As for the ordinary degree plus the following: Benda H J Continuity and Change in Southeast Asia, Yale Southeast Asia Monograph Dahm B Sukarno and the Struggle for Indonesian Independence, Cornell UP Holt C ed Culture and Politics in Indonesia, Cornell UP Руе L W ed Cases in Comparative Politics: Asia, Little Brown Sагtоno Kartodirdjo Protest Movements in Rural Java, OUP (c) Prescribed books for section 2В: As for the ordinary degree, plus the following: Cockroft J D Frank A G & Johnson D L Dependence and Underdevejop.. ment, Anchor paperback 1972 Geertz C Agricultural Involution, U of California P any ed McGee T G The Urbanization Process in the Third World, Bell & Sons London any ed Mortimer R ed Showcase State, Angus & Robertson 1973 Rex J Sociology and the Demystification of the Modern World, Rout- ledge & Kegan Paul 1974 Wilber C K ed The Political Economy of Development and Under- development, Random House 1973 (d) Prescribed books for section 3: Ajip Rosidi Masalah Angkatan dan Periodisasi Sejarah Sastra Indo- nesia, Pustaka Jaya Subagio Sastrowardojo Bakst Alam dan Intelektualisme, Pustaka Jaya Subagio Sastrowardojo Keroncong Motinggo, Pustaka Jaya Subagio Sastrowardojo Simphoni, Pustaka Jaya ASSIGNMENTS AND TESTS As for the ordinary degree, with an additional assignment on the language every week (Jawi script or translation into Bahasa Indonesia).

328 Indonesian and Malayan Studies

EXAMINATION As for IMS 3 in the ordinary degree, with one additional 3-hour paper comprising language, area and literature sections.

146-461 INDONESIAN AND MALAYAN STUDIES 4 (HONS) A course of study based on a 1%-hour lecture on advanced Bahasa Indonesia and a 1 %-hour seminar on the area study. It would be an advantage for students taking this subject to have a reading knowledge of Dutch. SYLLABUS An intensive study of selected aspects of Indonesian society and culture. Traditional literature as a source of historical evidence. A thesis or a translation project on an approved subject, which must be submitted by the second week of third term. The subject must be approved by the chairman of the department before the end of the third year. (For details see the introductory section to the requirements for the honours degree p. 324.) BOOKS Jassin H B Kesusasterean Indonesia Modern dalem Kritik dan Esei, 4 vols Gunung Agung Djakarta Klinkert H C Facsimiles van eenige Maleische Handschriften, Brill Leiden Resink G J Indonesia's History between the Myths, van Hoeve The Hague Soedjatmoko ed An Introduction to Indonesian Historiography, Cornell UP Winstedt R A History of Classical Malay Literature, OUP Extracts from: Hikayat Hang Tuah. Hikayat Abdullah. Sejarah Meiауи. EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers, one on language and literature and the other on the area study.

MASTER OF ARTS 146-601 SCHOOL OF INDONESIAN AND MALAYAN STUDIES 1. Admission to candidature for the degree of Master of Arts requires a BA degree with honours or a BA ordinary degree with subsequent completion of MA Preliminary work in Indonesian and Malayan Studies as prescribed by the Faculty of Arts. In all cases enquiries should be directed to the department before a formal application for admission is made to Faculty. To complete the MA Preliminary qualification in Indonesian and Malayan Studies the minimum normally expected is (a) to reach second class honours In IMS 2, 3 and 4, (b) to reach a satisfactory level in an approved supporting subject, and (c) to complete a thesis of 8,000 to 10,000 words. Candidates from other universities who have reached a

327 Faculty of Arts

satisfactory honours level in subjects similar to IMS 2 and IMS 3, may, with the permission of the department, proceed to do IMS 4 and to complete the work mentioned under (b) and (c) above. The MA Preliminary course may be done In one year of full-time work or in two to three years of part-time work. 2. Examination is by thesis, prepared under supervision and assisted by participation In research seminars. The thesis must not exceed 50,000 words, excluding footnotes, bibliographies and appendices. Three copies of each thesis (typewritten, double-spaced on international size paper, A4, measuring 297mm x 210mm) should be submitted, one of which will be deposited in the University Library. The attention of candidates is drawn to the recommendations of the Professorial Board regarding the format of theses in Regulation 4:6 in the University Calendar. The thesis should normally be submitted for examination within eighteen months from the commencement of candidature for the MA by full-time candidates and within four years by part-time candidates. DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY See Regulation 3:60 on pp. 63 ff. and also on pp. 52 ff. DEPARTMENT OF ITALIAN Chairman of Department: Professor C. A. McCORMICK, Cavaliere dell 'Ordine al Merito dalla Repubblica Italiana, B.A. (Cantab.) INTRODUCTION The department of Italian offers a full range of courses at both pass and honours levels. At the pass degree level there are two streams. H.S.C. stream—This is for students who have passed Italian at the H.S.C. examination with at least a D grade (or have equivalent knowledge). Students in any doubt about their standard are strongly advised to consult the department before enrolling in Italian 1. This stream offers a 3-year sequence— Italian 1 Italian 2 Italian 3 Beginners' stream—This is for students with little or no knowledge of Italian. This stream offers either a 2-year sequence— Italian 1A Italian 2A or, for those who wish to complete a major in Italian, a further second- year subject, Italian 2Z, which can then lead to admission to Italian З— Italian 1A Italian 24 and Italian 2Z Italian 3 Admission to Italian 1A may be subject to quota restrictions. Interested students should consult the department and faculty office during the enrolment period. Admission to Italian 2Z Is subject to the permission of the chairman of department. Apart from English, Italian is the most used language in Australia. It is very natural that many students of Italian origin should choose to study Italian at the University and thus to gain a familiarity with 328 Italian

the culture of the land from which they or their parents have come. It is equally natural that Australians who are not of Italian origin should wish to study a language and a culture of great intrinsic importance and also of particular relevance to Australia. The department seeks to provide courses that will be of interest to both groups, but it aims to set standards which can be achieved by those for whom Italian Is a foreign language. Modern Italian is taught progressively throughout the department's courses, but it is a particular feature of Italian that the written literary language has remained remarkably stable throughout the country's long history. Texts of the 13th century are written in what is still, funda- mentally, the language of today. To read Dante does not require the learning of 'Old Italian'. This means that, potentially, almost 1,000 years of Italian literature is available to the student. The department cannot, of course. cover everything, but It attempts, through an introductory course in first year and a range of optional choices in subsequent years, to give students both a general overall view and to allow them to study In depth the authors or periods which they find most interesting.

ORDINARY DEGREE (Details for the honours courses are set out at the end of this section.) Subjects offered: Italian Part 1 Italian Part 1A Italian Part 2 (Pass) Italian Part 2A (Pass) Italian Part 2Z (Pass) Italian Part 3 (Pass) BOOKS The books listed hereunder are for general consultation. Detailed reading lists for each course will be issued at the beginning of the year. (a) Grammars Battaglia S e Pernicone V La grammatica italiana, Loescher Torino Trabalza C e Allodoli E La grammatica degl'italiani, Le Monnier Firenze Jones F J A Modern Italian Grammar, ULP Shewring W Italian Prose Usage, CUP (b) Dictionaries Cassell's Italian Dictionary Purees J English-Italian, Halien-English Dictionary, Routledge Hazon M Dizionario Inglese-italiano, italiano-inglese, Garzanti Milano The Cambridge Italian Dictionary, Vol I Italian-English CUP Cappuccini G e Migliorini B Vocabolario della lingua italiana, Paravia Torino Zingarelli N Vocabolario della lingua Italiana, Zanichelli Bologna Panzini A Dizionario moderno, Hoepli Milano Gabriel!! A Dizionario linguistico moderno, Mondadori Milano Dizionario Garzanti della lingua italiana, Garzanti per tutti Dizionario Garzanti italiano-inglese inglese-italiano, Garzanti per tutti (c) Histories of Literature Wilkins E H History of Italian Literature, Harvard UP Whitfield J H History of Italian Literature, Penguin

329 Faculty of Arts

Sapegno N Compendio di storia della letteratura italiana, La Nuova Italia Firenze Rossi V Storia della letteratura italiana, Vallardi Milano Flora F Storie delta letteratura italiana, Mondadori Milano Various authors Storie letteraria d'Italie, Vallardi Milano Binni W & Scrivano R Introduzione a1 problemi critic! della letteratura italiana, D'Anna (d) Histories SalvatoreIli L Sommario dells storia d'Italia, Einaudi Torino Rodolico N Storia degli italiani, Sansoni Firenze Trevelyan J P A Sńort History of the Italian People, Allen & Unwin

149-101 ITALIAN PART 1 A course of not more than five classes weekly, including tutorial assistance and language laboratory work. Facilities for private study in the language laboratory will also be available. This course assumes that students have reached matriculation standard in Italian and is a prerequisite for Italian Part 2. Italian Part 1 builds on the knowledge of the language gained for H.S.C. A revision of grammar is carried out through prose translation classes and composition exercises are used to increase facility in written expression. Conversation practice and practice in understanding the spoken language are given in tutorials and through the language laboratory sessions. During first term a modern text is studied in tutorials both as a basis for conversation and for translation. During the rest of the year conversation is based on texts illustrating contemporary Italy. The main literary element in the course is the Introduction to the History of Italian literature. These lectures are based on selected readings from the main authors and include also orientation lectures on the principal periods. Another series of classes, based on selected readings, give an outline of the history of Italy during the 19th and 20th centuries and illustrate some aspects of contemporary life in the country, the political situation, the education system, etc. SYLLABUS (i) Translation of prescribed texts and unseen translation. (ii) Translation into Italian; composition in Italian; grammar and syntax. (iii) Conversation. (iv) Literary study. (v) Introduction to the history of Italian literature. (vi) Introduction to modern Italy. OPTIONAL ADDITIONAL WORK A fortnightly tutorial class on history of literature and contemporary texts. BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Cole J P Italy, Chatto & Windus Pettoello D An Outline of Italian Civilization, Cassell 330 Italian

Salmi A The Making of Modern Italy, Benn Salvador! M Italy, Prentice-Hall (b) Prescribed textbooks: 'МсСоrmick C A Basicltalian Grammar, Cheshire 'Levi C Cristo al д fermato a Eboli, Harrap 'Ceruttl T A Guide to Composition in Italian, CUP N.B. Students intending to proceed beyond Italian Part 1 are strongly recommended to acquire Cappuccio C Storia della letterature italiana, Sansoni Firenze. EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers, the first on translation into Italian, unseen translation Into English and composition in Italian: the second on history of literature; an oral test of about 16 minutes which will include questions on Item (vi) of the syllabus; class tests on translation, composition and history of literature and an essay on the modern literature which must be completed before the annual examinations and will be taken into account in the determination of examination results.

149-102 ITALIAN PART 1A Four classes of written and oral work and two language laboratory sessions per week. SYLLABUS This course is aimed at students with little or no knowledge of Italian. It is not therefore available to those with a pass in Italian at H.S.C. or its equivalent. The number of students admitted to the subject will be limited. Permission to enrol may be subject to interview with the chairman of department during the enrolment period. This is an intensive course which provides an introduction to modern Italian, both spoken and written. Successful completion of Italian 1A is a prerequisite for Italian 2A. Students wishing to complete a major in Italian may, subject to the chairman of department's approval, also enrol for Italian 2Z. BOOKS 'Soriani A Corso di lingue italiana per stranieri, vol. 1 Libreria Editrice Fiorentina 'McCormick C A Basic Italian Grammar, Cheshire 'Panorama Italiano, Holt Rinehart Additional texts will be available from the department. WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit regular written work as specified by the lecturer. EXAMINATION One 3-hour examination. Written and oral/aural tests during the year.

149-201 ITALIAN PART 2 (PASS) A course of not more than three lectures per week and two tutorial classes throughout the year.

331 Faculty of Arts

SYLLABUS 1. Translation and composition. 2. Literary exercises. з. 20th century literature. 4. One of the following units:• (i) 20th century studies. (ii) Historical Grammar. 5. Conversation and modern reading. • In special circumstances and with the chairman of department's permission, students may take Dante (Inferno) in place of one of these units. WRITTEN WORK Weekly exercises on Item 1; a total of three exercises on item 2; an essay or exercise on item 3; exercises as prescribed on items 4(i) and 4(ii). This written work will be taken into account in the determination of examination results.

BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: (numbers refer to relevant units) •Pirandello L Three Plays, ed Firth, Manchester UP (3) •Testori G L'Arialda, Feltrinelli Economica Milano (3) 'Moravia A Racconti romani, Bompiani Scolastica Milano (3) • Sciascia L Il giorno della civetta, Einaudi Torino (3) •Ungaretti G Montale E & Quasimodo S Da "Tutte le opere", ed Sco- lastiche Mondadori Milano (3) 'Chabod F L'Italia contemporanea (1918-1948), Einaudi Torino (4(i)) Manacorda G Letteratura e cultura del periodo fascista, Principato Milano (4(i)). •Rohlfs G Grammatica storica della lingua italiana e dei dialetti, vols 1 and 2, Piccola Biblioteca Einaudi Torino (4(ii)) Further texts may be prescribed.

EXAMINATION One 2-hour paper on item 3. Item 4 will be assessed either by written and class work during the year, or by a 3-hour paper, or by both. Language tests will be given each term. An oral test of about 15 minutes will include questions on item 5 of the syllabus.

149-202 ITALIAN PART 2A (PASS)

A course of not more than six hours per week during the year.

SYLLABUS This course is available to students who have passed Italian 1A. It continues the intensive language work undertaken in the previous year and offers also an introduction to the literature and to the soclo-historical background of modem Italy.

BOOKS •Soriani A Corso di lingua italiana per stranieri, vols 1 and 2 Libreria Editrice Fiorentina Firenze • McCormick C A Basic Italian Grammar, Cheshire 'Levi C Cristo si è fermato a Eboli, Harrap 332 Italian

'Panorama italiano, Holt Rinehart Further texts may be prescribed. WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit regular written work as prescribed by the lecturer. EXAMINATION Not more than two 3-hour examination papers. Alternative methods of assessment may also be offered. Written and oral/aural tests during the year.

149-203 ITALIAN PART 2Z (PASS)

A course of not more than four lectures per week with tutorial assistance as required. This subject may be taken in conjunction with or after the completion of Italian 2A. Admission to the course is subject to the permission of the chairman of department who will be guided in his decision by the standard reached in Italian 1A. Students who complete both Italian 2A and Italian 2Z may proceed to Italian 3 (pass). N.B. Special arrangements may be made for students wishing to enter the Italian honours school. Such students must consult the chairman of department. SYLLABUS 1. Introduction to the history of Italian literature. 2. Literary exercises. 3. 20th century literature. 4. One of the following: (i) 20th century studies (ii) Historical Grammar. BOOKS Materials for items 1 and 2 supplied by the department. For items 3 and 4 see the relevant texts under Italian 2 (pass). WRITTEN WORK A total of three exercises on item 2. An essay or exercise on item 3. Exercises as prescribed on items 4(i) and 4(i1). EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper on item 1 and one 2-hour paper on item 3. Item 4 will be assessed either by written and class work during the year, or by a 3-hour paper, or both.

149-301 ITALIAN PART 3 (PASS ) A course of not more than four lectures per week with one tutorial class throughout the year. N.B. Minor modifications to the syllabus may have to be made. These will be advised on the departmental notice-board.

333 Faculty of Arts

SYLLABUS 1 Translation and Composition. 2. Dante (Inferno) 3. One of the following areas: (i) Literature of the 13th and 14th centuries. (ii) Dante (Purgatorio).• (iii) Literature of the Renaissance. (iv) Literature of the 19th century. (v) Historical Grammar. (vi) History of the Italian Language.•• 'Dante (Purgatorio) is available only to students who have previously completed Dante (Inferno). ••History of the Italian Language is available only to students who have previously completed Historical Grammar. N.B. Students who have completed Dante (Inferno) but do not wish to take Dante (Purgatorio) may, instead, choose two areas from item 3. 4. Any two of the following: (i) An advanced essay based on one of the areas in item 3. (ii) Advanced Language Studies. A course of classes which investi- gates aspects of modern Italian and could be of particular interest to future teachers. (iii) A group project. Under the direction of a supervisor, students will work in groups, each investigating an area of study and writing a report. 5. Conversation and modern reading. WRITTEN WORK Weekly exercises on item 1; an essay on item 2; an essay or written exercise on item 3; advanced essay, exercises, report on item 4 according to choice made; a composition in Italian on a literary topic based on item 5. Students choosing to write one of their essays in Italian will be exempted from the composition. This written work will be taken into account in the determination of examination results. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks (numbers refer to relevant items): •Dante Alighieri La Divina Commedia, Vol I, Inferno, ed Sapegno, La Nuova Italia Firenze, 2nd ed (2) • Di Salvo T Lettura critica delle Divina Commedia, Vol I, Inferno, La Nuova Italia Firenze (2) 'Dante Alighieri La Divina Commedia, Vol Il, Purgatorio, ed Sapegno, La Nuova Italia Firenze (3(ii)) •Di Salvo T Lettura critica della Divina Commedia, Vol li, Purgatorio, La Nuova Italia Firenze (3(ii)) •Petrarch F Selected Poems, ed Griffith, Manchester UP (3(i)) 'Boccaccio G Decameron, Grande Universale Mursia Milano (3(i)) ' Ariosto L Orlando furioso, Mursia Milano (3(11)) 'Machiavelli N li principe e Discorsi, Feltrinelli Economica Milano (3 (iv)) •Verga G Pane nero and other stories. Manchester UP (3(iv)) 'Verga G I Malavoglia, Manchester UP (3(iv)) 'Manzoni A I Promessi Sposi, ed Momigliano, Sanson; Firenze (3(1v)) •Leopardi G Canti, ed Bandini Garzanti Milano (3 (iv)) 334 Italtan

•Rohlfs G Grammatica storica della lingua italiana e dei dialetti, Vols. 1 and 2, Piccola Вiblioteca Einaudi Torino (3(v)) •Migliorini В Storle della lingua italiana, Universale Sanson' Firenze (3(vi)) Further texts may be prescribed. EXAMINATION A 3-hour paper on item 2. The area selected from item 3 of the syllabus will each be assessed either by written and class work during the year, or by a 3-hour paper, or by both. Language tests will be given each term. An oral test of about 15 minutes which will include questions on item 5 of the syllabus.

HONOURS DEGREE R. SCHOOL OF ITALIAN LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE Combined honours courses are available with most other subjects. Students should consult the department for full details and advice in planning their courses. 1. The course for the degree with honours in the school of Italian language and literature will comprise the following subjects: 149-101 Italian Part 1 149-261 Italian Part 2C (Ions) 149-262 Italian Part 2D (Ions) 149-361 Italian Part 3A (Ions) 149-362 Italian Part 3В (Hons) 149-461 Italian Part 4A (Ions) 149-462 Italian Part 46 (Ions) in accordance with the details set out below. Candidates for the degree with honours must take also four additional subjects at pass or honours standard, two of which should form a sub- major. 2. In their first year, candidates who intend to enter the honours school will take Italian Part 1, and three additional subjects in accordance with the requirements for the ordinary degree. Admission to the higher years of the course is conditional upon satisfactory performance in this first year, and students must be approved by the faculty of Arts as candidates for the degree with honours before entering the honours school. The chairman of department will normally recommend such approval for candidates who have gained at least second class honours in Italian Part 1. Other candidates who wish to enter honours school must consult the chairman of department, who will be guided in his recommendation by the merits of each case. 3. In their second year, candidates will take the two honours courses, Italian Part 2C and Italian Part 2D, and the second part of their sub- major or additional remaining subject. In order to proceed to the third year, they will be required to be 'recommended to proceed' at the end of the second year. 4. In their third year, candidates will take the honours courses, Italian

335 Faculty of Arts

Part ЭА and Italian Part 38. In their fourth year, candidates will take the honours courses Italian Part 4A and Italian Part 4В. The final examination will be held in two parts, part 1 at the end of the third year, and part 2 at the end of the fourth year, and will consist of: (a) At the end of the third year. Formal examination papers and other work and testing as set out in the details of Italian Part ЭА (Ions) and Italian Part 3 В (Ions). (b) At the end of the fourth year. Formal examination papers, thesis, other work and testing as set out in the details of Italian Part 4A (Ions) and Italian Part 48 (Ions).

ITALIAN IN COMBINED SCHOOLS Candidates taking Italian in a combined honours course will take the following Italian subjects: 1st year: Italian Part 1 2nd year: Italian Part 2C (Ions) 3rd year: Italian Part ЭА (Ions)' 4th year: Italian Part 4A (Ions) 'Students particularly interested in linguistic studies should consult the chairman of department about the possibility of varying their third year course. They are advised to take the Historical Grammar unit as part of their second year work and are referred to the note on this in the Italian Part 2C (Ions) details. Both Pure and Combined Honours students wishing to take certain of the linguistic units offered in third and fourth year will require a basic knowledge of Latin. Honours students combining Italian with certain other foreign languages or with English may be permitted to specialize in Italian in their 4th year and should consult the department on the extra work in Italian that will be required of them in that year. (See also pp. 519 L)

149-261 ITALIAN PART 2C (IONS) A course of not more than five lectures per week with one tutorial class throughout the year.

SYLLABUS 1. Items 1, 2, 3 and 5 of the Part 2 (Pass) Syllabus. 2. Dante (Inferno). N.B. Combined honours students wishing to specialize in language may take Historical Grammar in place of the full item З of the Part 2 (Pass) syllabus. However their course, which requires approval by the chairman of department, must include a section of this item. WRITTEN WORK As for Part 2 (Pass) for those items taken in common; an essay on Dante (Inferno); an honours level assignment on either 20th century literature or Dante (Inferno). Students taking Historical Grammar will do their assignment either on Historical Grammar or on Dante (Inferno). This written work will be taken into account in the determination of examination results. 338 Italian

Books Prescribed textbooks: See Part 2 (Pass) for books prescribed for item 1. •Dante Alighieri La Divina Commedia, Vol 1, Inferno, ed Sopegno, La Nuova Italia, Firenze, 2nd ed 'Di Salvo T Lettura critica della Divina Commedia, Vol 1, Inferno, La Nuova Italia Firenze

EXAMINATION As for the relevant sections of the Part 2 (Pass) syllabus. A 3-hour paper on Dante (Inferno). N.B. Students taking Historical Grammar will do one 3-hour paper on this unit and one 3-hour paper on Dante (Inferno). Twentieth century literature will be assessed on work during the year.

149-262 ITALIAN PART 2D (IONS) A course of not more than five lectures per week. (N.B. This subject Is available only to Pure Honours candidates. It will be taken in addition to Italian Part 2C (Ions)).

SYLLABUS 1. Advanced linguistic exercises. 2. 20th century studies. 3. Historical Grammar.

WRITTEN WORK Exercises throughout the year on item 1; written exercises on item 2. An honours level assignment on either item 2 or item 3; an essay on item 3.

BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: See relevant texts under Italian Part 2 (Pass). Further texts may be prescribed.

EXAMINATION Items 1 and 2 will be assessed on written work and tests during the year with, in addition, appropriate oral/aural tests for item 1. Item 3 will be examined either by written and class work during the year, or by a 3-hour paper, or by both.

149-361 ITALIAN PART ЭА (IONS) A course of not more than five lectures with one tutorial hour per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS 1. Items 1, 4•, and 5 of the Part 3 (Pass) syllabus 2. Three of the areas in item 3 of the Part 3 (Pass) syllabus. 3. Tutorial work on the 20th century novel.

337 Faculty of Arts

'Pure Honours students may not select Advanced Language Studies which they will take as part of the work in Part 3 В (Ions). WRITTEN WORK An essay on each of two of the areas chosen and an honours level assignment on the third area. Other written work as for the Part 3 (Pass) syllabus. This written work will be taken into account in the determination of examination results. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: Books as prescribed for the corresponding items under Italian Part 3 (Pass). EXAMINATION The areas selected in item 3 will each be assessed either by written and class work during the year, or by a 3-hour paper, or by both. An oral test on the 20th century novel work in tutorials. Other testing as for the Part 3 (Pass) syllabus.

149-362 ITALIAN PART 39 (IONS) A course of not more than four lectures throughout the year. SYLLABUS 1. History of the Italian language. 2. Le Origini.• 3. Advanced Language Studies (see item 3 of the Part 3 (Pass) syllabus). ' In special cases and subject to the permission of the chairman of department, a unit from item 3 of the Part 3 (Pass) syllabus may be substituted for this. WRITTEN WORK Two honours assignments and written exercises on items 1 and 2; written exercises on item 3. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks (numbers refer to relevant items): •Migliorini B Storia della lingua italiana, Universale Sansoni Firenze (1) •Castellani A I più antichi testi italiani, Patron Bologna (2) •Dionisotti C & Grayson C Early Italian Texts, Blackwell Oxford (2) EXAMINATION Items 1 and 2 will each be examined either by written and class work during the year, or by a 3-hour paper, or by both. Item 3 will be assessed on written and class work during the year.

149-461 ITALIAN PART 4A (IONS) 1. Advanced study of modern Italian. 2. Three of the units listed below. Each unit will consist of not more than 2 hours' class work per week. 338 Italian

(i) Dante (Paradiso)t (ii) The 20th century novel (iii) 20th century poetry (iv) The Literature of the 17th and 18th centuries (v) Le Origini.•• (vi) Linguistic studies—assignments.•• (vii) The Interdepartmental Programme in Eighteenth Century Stud- ies or in European Romanticism. (For details, see pp. 503 ff.) Students wishing to take this unit must consult the chairman of department before 28 February, as some adjustments in the rest of their course may have to be made. tPrerequisite Dante (Purgatorio) ••Prerequisite Historical Grammar. The department reserves the right not to give any of the units in 2 above. 3. Each student will be required to prepare under the guidance of a supervisor and submit In third term a thesis in Italian on an approved topic of his choice. Alternatively the thesis may be written in English but a substantial essay in Italian on an approved literary or linguistic topic will also be required. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks (numbers refer to relevant items): •Dante Alighieri La Divina Commedia Vol iii, Paradiso. A cura di N Sapegno. La Nuova Italia, Firenze (N.B. second edition) (i) •Di Salvo T Lettura Critica della Divina Commedia Vol III Paradiso, La Nuova Italia, Firenze (i) 'Svevo I Una vita, Senilità, La cosciànza di Zeno, ed economica Dall' Oglio Milano (ii) •Montale E Ossi dl seppia' Mondadori Milano (iii) •Montale E Le occasioni, Mondadori Milano (iii) 'Saba U Antologia del Canzoniere, Einaudi Torino (iii) Patron Bologna (v) •Castellani A I piů antichi testi italiani, 'Dionisotti C & Grayson C Early Italian Texts, Blackwell Oxford (v) Material for items (iv) and (vi) will be supplied by the department. EXAMINATION Item 1 will be assessed on written work during the year. Each unit in item 2 may be examined by a 3-hour paper but other forms of assessment may also be offered. The thesis.

149-462 ITALIAN PART 46 (IONS) This subject is for Pure Honours students only and will be taken In conjunction with Italian Part 4A (Ions). Two further units selected from the Italian Part 4А (Ions) details, item 2. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: See Italian Part 4А (Ions) details. EXAMINATION The two units selected may each be examined by a 3-hour paper but other forms of assessment may be offered.

339 Faculty of Arts

MASTER OF ARTS 149-601 R. SCHOOL OF ITALIAN LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE Candidates will, under supervision, prepare a thesis in Italian, and will be required to report to their supervisor regularly during the year. They will be advised of a suitable course of reading and may be required to pass an oral examination covering the general field of their research. An entry form for examination for higher degrees must be submitted to the Registrar. Three copies of each thesis (A4, typewritten, double-spaced) should be submitted, one of which will be deposited in the University Library. In certain cases candidates may also be required to pass a written and oral examination on subjects approved by the head of the department. The thesis should normally be submitted for examination within two years from the commencement of candidature for MA by full-time candidates and within four years by part-time candidates. Except in special circumstances and with the permission of the faculty no thesis or course work will be examined unless the candidate presents for examination within four years from the commencement of his candidature or, in the event of his having been granted leave of absence for the maximum period of one year, within five years from the commencement of his candidature.

DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS Chairman of Department: Professor C. J. THOMPSON, B.Sc., Ph.D. (N.S.W.) Professors of Mathematics: Professor S. ROSENBLAT, M.Sc., Ph.D. (Syd.) Professor C. F. MILLER, B.A. (Le High), M.S. (N.Y.U.), Ph.D. (Ill.) BOOKS Prescribed and/or recommended textbooks will be announced In the School of Mathematical Sciences Course Book or on the Mathematics department's noticeboard at the beginning of each unit or term, unless specified below.

PASS DEGREE (Details for the honours degree are set out at the end of this section.) SUBJECTS OFFERED (1) GRADE 1 SUBJECTS Mathematics 1A, Mathematics 1B, General Mathematics. Note: (a) Not more than one of Mathematics 1A, General Mathematics can be taken. (b) Mathematics 1 В must be accompanied by Mathematics 1A. (2) GRADE 2 SUBJECTS Mathematics 2A, Mathematics 2В. Note: Mathematics 2В must be accompanied by Mathematics 2A. (3) GRADE 3 SUBJECTS Mathematics ЗA, Mathematics 3В. must be accompanied by Mathematics Note: Mathematics 3В ЗA. 340 Mathematics

MAJOR SEQUENCES Two major sequences are available in Mathematics. These are: Sequence 1. Mathematics 1A Mathematics 2A Mathematics ЭА OR Sequence 2. Mathematics 1 В Mathematics 26 Mathematics 36 Note: 1. Sequence 2 is only available for students who are also taking Sequence 1. 2. There are mixed majors involving Mathematics 26, 3 В. These mixed sequences are only available for students who are also taking Sequence 1.

ENROLMENT Students enrolling for Mathematics or units thereof must consult the Sub-Dean of Arts.

618-011 MATHEMATICS 1A This comprises either units 131 and 132 or the unit 171. The choice must be approved by the department of Mathematics prior to enrolment Students intending to do or thinking of doing an honours degree in Mathematics should take 131 and 132. The units 131 and 132 are basic course units in Mathematics (unit 152 is the other basic course unit). They are intended for students who wish to study Mathematics Inten- sively. Students choosing to do 131 and 132 will be expected to have obtained good results in HSC Pure Mathematics. The unit 171 is intended for students who regard Mathematics as an important but not dominant part of their studies. .Compared with 131 and 132, it covers less material and does so less deeply. Students choosing to do 171 will be expected to have satisfactorily completed HSC Pure Mathematics or to have obtained good results in HSC General Mathematics. Students taking Mathematics 1A may not take General Mathematics.

618-131 ANALYSIS 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS Sequences and series: convergence and divergence. limits tests, inequalities. Real numbers: least upper bound, monotonic sequence theorem. Functions of one real variable: elementary functions, inverses, continuity, differentiation, mean-value theorem, Taylor's series. Integra- tion and its applications: an elementary integral and its properties, fundamental theorem of calculus for continuous functions; arc length, surfaces and solids of revolution. Functions of several real variables: geometry, partial derivatives, tangent plane, maxima and minima. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 3 hours of written examinations.

341 Faculty of Arts

618-132 ALGEBRA AND GEOMETRY 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS Group theory: symmetry groups, permutation groups, order, normal subgroups. Number systems: integer, real, complex; complex exponential function. Fields. Elements of set theory: equivalence relations, cardin- ality. Vector spaces: subspaces, linear dependence, basis, dot and cross products; generalizations. Geometry of 3-dimensions: equations of lines and planes, quadric surfaces. Linear transformations: inverses, matrices, solution of equations, determinants, geometric illustrations. Elgenvalues and eigenvectors: rotations, central conics and quadrics. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 3 hours of written examinations.

618-171 CALCULUS AND LINEAR ALGEBRA 3 lectures and 1 tutorial per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS Mathematical induction. Complex numbers, complex exponential function. Introduction to group theory: cyclic and permutation groups; subgroups, cosets, Lagrange's theorem; isomorphism, groups of small order. Vectors: vector algebra, applications to lines and planes. Determinants. Matrix algebra; eigenvalues and eigenvectors and their applications to conics and quadric surfaces; representation of linear transformations by matrices. Calculus of functions of one real variable: differentiation, Integration, applications; trigonometric, exponential, hyperbolic functions, and their inverses. Differential equations: simple first order, second order, linear with constant coefficients. Functions of two real variables: partial derivative, chain rule, double integrals. EXAM I NATI O N Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 6 hours of written examinations.

618-012 MATHEMATICS 1 B This is the unit 152 Differential Equations. It is a basic course unit in Mathematics (131 and 132 are the other two). It is a prerequisite for many later courses in applications of mathematics. Students taking this course will be expected to have satisfactorily completed HSС Pure Mathematics; either HSC Applied Mathematics or HSC Physics would be advantageous but is not essential. Students taking Mathematics 1B must take or must have previously taken Mathematics 1A.

618-152 DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS Ordinary differential equations: first order separable and homogeneous, 342 Mathematics

first order linear, integrating factor, second order linear equations with constant coefficients, complementary function, particular solutions, special cases; initial value problems for second order equations; systems of equations; linear difference equations; applications to falling bodies, pro- jectiles, harmonic motion, population growth. Partial differential equations: functions of two real variables, partial derivatives, differentiation of Integrals; conservation equations; simple partial differential equations; characteristics, fluid flow, traffic flow, heat conduction, vibrating strings; separation of variables, Fourier series. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 3 hours of written examinations.

618-015 GENERAL MATHEMATICS (SOCIAL SCIENCES) This Is the unit 618-183 General Mathematics (Social Sciences), but other than Science students (e.g. Arts students) are to use the subject number 618-015. This is a course intended for students who have only taken HSC General Mathematics. It aims at giving an understanding of elementary mathematical principles and some basic mathematical techniques for application to other disciplines, particularly the social sciences. It is not available to students who take Mathematics 1A. While students who have good results in HSC General Mathematics may do Mathematics 1A (unit 171 ), many students who have satisfactorily completed HSC General Mathematics and wish to continue with Mathe- matics in second and third years may find that unit 171 is beyond them. Unit 618-185 is intended to bridge the gap between General Mathematics (Social Sciences) and Mathematics 1A for such students. It is a summer vacation course. Note that 618-185 is not part of 618-015. Note that 618-015 General Mathematics is a terminal course; it does not qualify as a prerequisite for any second year Mathematics course. Only when coupled with 618-185 does It become equivalent to Mathematics 1A (unit 171).

618-183 GENERAL MATHEMATICS (SOCIAL SCIENCES)

З lectures and 1 tutorial per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS Vectors, matrices, determinants. Elements of linear programming and game theory. Introduction to probability. Graph sketching and curve fitting. Differentiation and integration of standard elementary functions. Differential and difference equations. Functions of two variables, partial differentiation. Applications will include economic and sociological models. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 6 hours of written examinations.

618-185 MATHEMATICS 27 lectures with practice classes. Four weeks' full-time during the summer vacation.

343 Faculty of Arts

Prerequisite: General Mathematics (Social Sciences). SYLLABUS Complex numbers. Vectors and linear algebra. Differentiation and integration. Differential equations. Group theory. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-021 MATHEMATICS 2A (PASS) This comprises units 271, 273, 293 and one of the other units listed below. In certain cases students may be required to substitute unit 233 for unit 273; see the condition on 273. Note that individual units have specific prerequisites: these may be waived in certain circumstances. The selection must be approved by the department of Mathematics prior to enrolment. The prerequisite for Mathematics 2A is a pass in Mathematics 1A. Assessment in this subject will be based on overall performance In the component units.

618-022 MATHEMATICS 2В (PASS) This course is available to students who are taking or have previously taken Mathematics 2A. Mathematics 2B comprises four of the units listed below which have not been included in Mathematics 2A. The selection must be approved by the department of Mathematics prior to enrolment. Assessment in this subject will be based on overall performance In the component units.

618-261 CLASSICAL MECHANICS 24 lectures, weekly practice class. Prerequisite: Mathematics 1 B. SYLLABUS Lagrangian, Hamiltonian; conservation laws. Particle dynamics, small oscillations. Rigid body dynamics, Euler's equations, non-inertial frames. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-262 CONTINUUM MECHANICS 24 lectures, weekly practice class. Prerequisites: unit 293, unit 294. SYLLABUS Fluids: Euler and Bernoulli theory of inviscid fluids. Solids: theory of elastic rods and beams. Stress and strain tensors.

344 Mathematics

EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-263 OPTIMIZATION AND APPROXIMATION 24 lectures, weekly practice class. SYLLABUS Optimization of functions of several variables. Constraints: Lagrange multipliers. Calculus of variations. Elements of control theory, linear programming, game theory. Applications in economic, physical, social and industrial areas. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-264 LINEAR PROGRAMMING MODELS 24 lectures, weekly practice class. Prerequisite: 233 or 273. SYLLABUS Formulation of programming problems. Linear programming problem. simplex methods, degeneracy. Duality and its interpretation. Transporta- tion problems. EXAM I NATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-265 METHODS OF COMPLEX ANALYSIS 24 lectures, weekly practice class. Prerequisite: 131 or 271. SYLLABUS Power series, differentiability, conformal mapping. Cauchy theorems, residues and contour integration. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-271 REAL ANALYSIS 24 lectures, weekly practice class. SYLLABUS Limits, sequences and series, real numbers. Integrals, their properties, infinite and improper integrals. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

345 Faculty of Arts

618-272 FURTHER REAL ANALYSIS 24 lectures, weekly practice class. Prerequisite: 271. SYLLABUS Continuous functions, sequences, and series of functions; introduction to metrics and topology. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-273 LINEAR ALGEBRA 24 lectures, weekly practice class. Condition: Students who have gained credit for 132 will not normally be permitted to take 273. SYLLABUS Vector spaces, linear transformations, matrix representation, rank, determinants. Inner product spaces, spectral decomposition of Hermitian transformations. Applications. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-274 ALGEBRA 24 lectures, weekly practice class. Condition: Students who have gained credit for 132 will not normally be permitted to take 274. SYLLABUS Groups, rings, fields. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-293 VECTOR ANALYSIS 24 lectures, weekly practice class. SYLLABUS Functions of several variables, multiple integrals. Vector calculus: gradient, divergence, curl. Volume, surface and line integrals. Theorems of Gauss, Green and Stokes. Introduction to tensors. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations. 346 Mathematics

818-294 METHODS OF MATHEMATICS 24 lectures, weekly practice class. SYLLABUS Ordinary and partial differential equations, series solutions, special functions. Problems and applications. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-031 MATHEMATICS ЗА (PASS) This comprises four, five or six of the 300-level units listed below. The number of units depends on the combination chosen, which combination must be approved by the department of Mathematics prior to enrolment. Assessment in this subject will be based on overall performance in the component units. Note that not all the units listed are available in any one year. Details of units to be offered subject to student demand and staff availability are available from the department of Mathematics. The prerequisite for Mathematics 3A is a pass in Mathematics 2A. Note that individual units have specific prerequisites: these may be waived in certain circumstances. Note: For prospective school teachers units 340, 341, 342, 343, 344, 350, 351, 352 and 371 are specially recommended, although other units may be almost as valuable.

618-032 MATHEMATICS 3В (PASS) This course is available only to students who are taking, or have previously taken, Mathematics ЗA. Usually a student will also have passed Mathematics 28, but in certain mixed majors this is not necessary: consult the Sub-Dean. Mathematics 38 comprises four, five or six of the 300-level units listed below, which have not been included in Mathematics ЗA. The number of units depends on the combination chosen, which combination must be approved by the department of Mathematics prior to enrolment. Assessment in this subject will be based on overall performance in the component units. Note that not all the units listed are available in any one year; see under Mathematics ЗA.

618-340 COМВINATORICS 16 lectures, practice classes by arrangement. SYLLABUS Selections and binomial coefficients. Pairing problems. Recurrence problems. Inclusion-exclusion. Block designs and codes. Steiner systems. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

347 Faculty of Arts

618-341 MATHEMATICAL LOGIC 24 lectures, practice classes by arrangement. Prerequisite: 234 or 274. SYLLABUS First order theories and basic model theory, including completeness and compactness. Undecidability and incompleteness. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than. 2 hours of written examinations.

618-342 HISTORY OF MODERN MATHEMATICS 24 lectures, practice classes by arrangement. SYLLABUS A selection of topics from the history of mathematics from the 17th century to the present, with some emphasis on lines of development in applied mathematics over the whole period, e.g., fluids, electricity, elasticity. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-343 NUMBER THEORY 16 lectures, practice classes by arrangement. Prerequisite: 234 or 371. SYLLABUS Factorization, algebraic number fields, algebraic Integers and integral bases, ideal theory, units. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

818-344 COMPLEX ANALYSIS

24 lectures, practice classes by arrangement. Prerequisite: 272 or 231. Condition: Students may not gain credit for both 344 and 265. SYLLABUS Differentiability. Conformal mapping. Power series. Residues. Contour integration. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations. 348 Mathematics

618-345 TOPOLOGY OF SURFACES 16 lectures, practice classes by arrangement. SYLLABUS Topics selected from: classification of surfaces, equivalence and orientation, topological polygons, winding numbers. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-350 MATHEMATICAL MODELLING 24 lectures, practice classes by arrangement. SYLLABUS Mathematical models based on graphs, Markov chains and n-person games, as applied to structural balance, tournaments, traffic flow, archaeology, food webs, group decision making. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-351 LINEAR PROGRAMMING 16 lectures, practice classes by arrangement. Condition: Students may not gain credit for both 351 and 264. SYLLABUS The linear programming problem. Simplex and revised simplex methods. Degeneracy. Duality. Transportation problem. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-352 PROGRAMMING EXTENSIONS 24 lectures, practice classes by arrangement. Prerequisite: 264 or 351. SYLLABUS Extensions of linear programming, integer programming, perturbations, decomposition methods. Transportation and networks. Dynamic programming. Methods for computing a minimum. The knapsack problem. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-353 OPTIMIZATION METHODS 16 lectures, practice classes by arrangement. Prerequisites: 264 or 351, 233 or 273.

349 Faculty of Arts

SYLLABUS Constrained and unconstrained minimization pro ы ems. Univariate search and approximation methods. Multivariate constrained minimization by simplex search, conjugate gradient, variable metric methods. Constrained optimization, Kuhn-Tucker conditions, gradient methods, penalty methods. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-356 VARIATIONAL METHODS

16 lectures, practice classes by arrangement. Prerequisite: 254 or 294. SYLLABUS Extrema of functionals: necessary and sufficient conditions. Minimizing sequences. Direct methods. Eigenvalues. Isoperimetric problems. Applica- tions: variational principles in mechanics (Hamiltonian theory), optics, continuum mechanics, economics, etc. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

818-360 MECHANICS OF CONTINUOUS MEDIA 24 lectures, practice classes by arrangement. Prerequisite: 262. SYLLABUS Viscous fluids, boundary layers, slow flow. Elastic media, linear equations, elastostatics, waves. EXAMINATION Prescribed written, work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-361 SYSTEMS THEORY

24 lectures, practice classes by arrangement. Prerequisite: 294 or 254. SYLLABUS Linear operators, transforms, input, output, feedback, stability, applications: renewal equation, traffic dynamics. Phase plans analysis. Volterra problem of competing species. Dynamical systems in biology. EXAMINATION Prescribed written, work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-362 APPLICATIONS OF MATHEMATICS 16 lectures, practice classes by arrangement. Prerequisites: 293 or 253, 294 or 254. 350 Mathematics

SYLLABUS Applications of mathematics in one or more fields, such as tensors and their application in Theology; dynamical systems in biology, competing species models; application of stability and bifurcation theory to chemical reactions, elasticity. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-363 LIE GROUPS AND APPLICATIONS 24 lectures, practice classes by arrangement. Prerequisites: 274 or 234, 293 or 253. SYLLABUS Introductory treatment of Lie groups and their applications to physical problems, the classical groups, invariant integral, Lie algebras and their relation to Lie groups, outline of classification and representation. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-364 THERMODYNAMICS AND STATISTICAL MECHANICS 24 lectures, practice classes by arrangement. Prerequisite: 261. SYLLABUS Laws, thermodynamic relations and Ideal gas. Elements of kinetic theory Gibbs ensembles and the thermodynamic limit. Phase transitions and critical points. Model systems. Applications to biology. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-365 MATHEMATICAL METHODS 16 lectures, practice classes by arrangement. Prerequisite: 294 or 254. SYLLABUS Topics selected from: Laplace and Fourier transforms; asymptotic approximation, stationary phase, Poincaré method. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations. .

618-371 RINGS AND MODULES 16 lectures, practice classes by arrangement. Prerequisite: 274.

351 Faculty of Arts

SYLLABUS Rings, domains, modules. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

818-372 INTRODUCTION TO METRIC SPACES

16 lectures, practice classes by arrangement. Prerequisite: 272 or 231. SYLLABUS Metric and topology, open and closed sets, convergence and continuity. Completeness, contraction mapping theorem, applications. Heine-Borel theorem, compactness, continuous functions on compact sets, total boundedness. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-373 LINEAR ANALYSIS

24 lectures, practice classes by arrangement. Prerequisite: 272 or 372. SYLLABUS Banach and Hilbert spaces, Bessel and Schwarz inequalities, Parseval formula. Spaces of sequences, continuous functions, functions of inte- grable square. Linear functionals and operators; dual spaces; Riesz representation theorem. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-374 ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS

16 lectures, practice classes by arrangement. Prerequisite: 294 or 254. SYLLABUS Ordinary differential equations, systems of equations, singular points, regular singular points, phase plane, stability, index, limit cycle. Poinceré- Bendixson theory. Sturm-Liouville theory. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-375 PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS

16 lectures, practice classes by arrangement. Prerequisites: 293 or 253, 294 or 254.

352 Mathematics

SYLLABUS Partial differential equations of wave propagation, potential theory, heat conduction, quantum mechanics. Maximum principles, Green's function, singular solutions. Mean value theorem. Similarity solutions. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

HONOURS DEGREE D. SCHOOL OF MATHEMATICS 1. The course for the B.A. with honours in Mathematics covers four years, during which the following subjects must be taken: First Year: Mathematics 1A (units 131 and 132) Mathematics 1 B Two other grade 1 subjects. Second Year: Mathematics 2A Ions. Mathematics 26 Ions. One other subject at grade 2 level. Science language if no language (other than English and the student's native language) has been passed at Higher School Certificate or grade 1 level. Third Year: Mathematics ЭА Hons. Mathematics 3B Ions. Fourth Year: Mathematics 4. The details of the Mathematics subjects of this course are given below. 2. Students in combined honours courses which Include Mathematics will take Mathematics 1A, 2A Ions. and ЭА Ions. The following provisions, so far as they are relevant, apply to them. 3. Students proposing to take the second year of the honours school of Mathematics should normally have obtained at least second class honours in Mathematics 1A and Mathematics 16. In exceptional circumstances students may be admitted without these qualifications; if admitted they will be advised what reading to undertake in the long vacation. Admission to the second and higher years of the honours school must be approved by the faculty; candidates should make application as soon as possible after the examination results of the first year have been published. 4. At the final examination the Wyselaskie Scholarship of $346 in Mathematics is awarded. This award may be held in conjunction with a University research grant. Normally the Wyselaskie scholar will be required to pursue study or research in Mathematics or some other subject. See Calendar, regulation 6.7. 5. For students majoring in Mathematics who wish to pursue Physics or Chemistry to part 2 level the B.Sc. degree is available under the provisions of section 9, regulation 3.20, in the Calendar. Such students may further proceed to the degree of B.Sc. with honours on completing the fourth year of the honours school of Mathematics (as above). 6. The Professor Wilson Prize and the Professor Nanson Prize are

353 Faculty of Arts

awarded in alternate years for the best original memoir in Pure or Applied Mathematics. Candidates must be graduates of not more than seven years' standing from matriculation. See regulation 6.72 (2) and (14) in the University Calendar. MATHEMATICS IN COMBINED COURSES Possible combinations are listed on pp. 519 ff. The subjects prescribed by the department of Mathematics for combined honours courses are as follows. Students will also study such other subjects as faculty may require. First Year: Mathematics 1A (units 131 and 132) Second Year: Mathematics 2A Ions. Science language, if no language (other than English and the student's native language) has been passed at Higher School Certificate or grade 1 level. Third Year: Mathematics 3A Ions. Fourth Year: A number of units from Mathematics 4. The number and choice of units must be approved by the department of Mathematics. It is also recommended that the first year subjects should include: Mathematics 1 B.

618-061 MATHEMATICS 2A (HONS) This course comprises units 231, 233, 253 and one of the other units listed below (except 227, 228, 229). The selection must be approved by the department of Mathematics prior to enrolment. In addition It is recommended that students take one of the vacation projects 227, 228 or 229 detailed below. Mathematics 2A Honours may be taken by students who have obtained adequate honours in Mathematics 1A, subject to approval by the department and the faculty as noted above. Students who have not been accepted into Mathematics 2A Honours may be allowed to join the course provisionally; their applications will be reconsidered at the end of first term in the light of their work during first term. Assessment in this subject will be based on overall performance in the component units.

618-062 MATHEMATICS 2В (HONS) This course is available only to students who are taking Mathematics 2A Honours, or who have taken it previously, and who have obtained adequate honours in Mathematics 1A and 1B. Mathematics 2B Honours comprises four of the units listed below (except 227, 228, 229) which have not been included in Mathematics 2A Honours. The selection must be approved by the department of Mathematics prior to enrolment. Assessment in this subject will be based on overall performance in the component units.

Note: The individual units have specific prerequisites: these may be waived in certain circumstances. 354 Mathematics

818-227 NUMERICAL PROJECT Vacation work. Assessment by written work. Intending students should obtain the instructions and exercises from the Mathematics department in November or December, and should hand in their work complete not later than 31 March. Condition: Students must not gain credit for both 227 and Computer Science 622-202. SYLLABUS Numerical exercises on summation of series, difference tables, interpolation, integration, differential equations, curve fitting, simultaneous linear equations and determinants. Calculating machines will be available, for use In the Mathematics department, on request.

818-228 NUMBER THEORY PROJECT Vacation work. Assessment by written work. Intending students should obtain the instructions and exercises from the Mathematics department in November or December. and should hand in their work complete not later than 31 March. SYLLABUS Exercises on prime numbers, factorization, congruences, quadratic residues, continued fractions, Dlophantlne approximation, quadratic forms.

618-229 SPHERICAL TRIGONOMETRY PROJECT Vacation work. Assessment by written work. Intending students should obtain the booklet from the Mathematics department in November or December and should hand in their work complete not later than 31 March. SYLLABUS Cosine and sine formulae for spherical triangles. Spherical excess. Polar triangles. Supplemental formulae. A selection of topics from: Half-angle formulae. Four-part formulae. Nearly flat spherical triangles. The sphe- roidal Earth. Length of meridian arcs.

618-231 REAL ANALYSIS 24 lectures, weekly practice class. Prerequisite 131. SYLLABUS Sequences and series, continuity and differentiation, uniform convergence; integrals, properties of integrals, improper integrals. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-232 METRIC SPACES

24 lectures, weekly practice class. Prerequisite: 231.

З 55 Faculty of Arts

SYLLABUS Metric and topology, uniform convergence, completeness, compactness, connectedness. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-233 LINEAR ALGEBRA 24 lectures, weekly practice class. Prerequisite: 132 SYLLABUS. Vector spaces, linear transformations, matrix representation; inner product spaces, norms; spectral resolution of linear transformation; applications; dual spaces, adjoint transformation. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-234 ALGEBRA 24 lectures, weekly practice class. Prerequisite: 132 SYLLABUS Groups, rings, fields. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-253 VECTOR ANALYSIS 24 lectures, weekly practice class. Prerequisites: 131 and 132. SYLLABUS Functions of several variables: Fréchet derivative; inverse function theorem. Volume, surface and line integrals; theorems of Green, Stokes and Gauss. Introduction to tensors. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-254 METHODS OF MATHEMATICS 24 lectures, weekly practice class. Prerequisite: Mathematics 1 B. In certain cases this may be waived. SYLLABUS Differential equations, power and Fourier series solutions, special functions including Bessel and Legendre functions, integrals and asymptotics. 356 Mathematics

EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-261 CLASSICAL MECHANICS 24 lectures, weekly practice class. Prerequisite: Mathematics 1 B. SYLLABUS Lagrangian, Hamiltonian; conservation laws. Particle dynamics, small oscillations. Rigid body dynamics. Euler's equations, non-inertial frames. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-262 CONTINUUM MECHANICS 24 lectures, weekly practice class. Prerequisites: 253, 254. SYLLABUS Fluids: Euler and Bernoulli theory of lnviscid fluids. Solids: theory of elastic rods and beams. Stress and strain tensors. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-264 LINEAR PROGRAMMING 24 lectures, weekly practice class. Prerequisite: 233. SYLLABUS Formulation of programming problems. Linear programming problem, simplex methods; degeneracy. Duality and its interpretation. Transporta- tion problems.

357 Faculty of Arts

EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-265 METHODS OF COMPLEX ANALYSIS

24 lectures, weekly practice class.

SYLLABUS Power series, differentiability, conformal mapping. Cauchy theorems, residues and contour integration.

EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-071 MATHEMATICS ЗА (HONS) This comprises about five of the 300-level units listed below. The number of units will depend on the combination chosen. For students going on to Mathematics 4, the normal selection is 301, 302, 303, 304 and 305; in addition, for entry into Mathematics 4 a student must have passed either 618-265 or 618-344. The combination chosen must be approved by the department of Mathematics prior to enrolment. Assessment in this subject will be based on overall performance in the component units.

618-072 MATHEMATICS 3В (HONS) This course is available only to students who are taking Mathematics 3A Honours, or who have taken it previously. Mathematics 38 Honours comprises about five of the units listed below which have not been Included in Mathematics 3A Honours. The number of units will depend on the combination chosen, which must be approved by the department of Mathematics prior to enrolment. Assessment in this subject will be based on overall performance in the component units. Note: 1. Not all the units listed below are available in any one year. Details of the units available subject to student demand and staff availability are available from the department of Mathematics. 2. The individual units have specific prerequisites: these may be waived in certain circumstances; consult the department.

618-301 MEASURE AND INTEGRATION 24 lectures. Prerequisite: 232 or 372. SYLLABUS Measures and measurable sets in n-space; Lebesgue measure and more general measures; measurable functions. Lebesgue integral and its properties; dominated convergence, Fubini's theorem, applications. Bounded variation; absolute continuity. 358 Mathematics

EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-302 FUNCTIONAL ANALYSIS 24 lectures. Prerequisites: 233, 301. SYLLABUS Normed vector spaces, sequence and function spaces, Banach spaces, dual spaces; Hahn-Banach, open mapping, bounded inverse, closed graph and Banach-Steínhaus theorems; applications. Hilbert spaces, complete orthonormal systems, Riesz representation theorem. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-303 FURTHER ALGEBRA

24 lectures. Prerequisite: 234. SYLLABUS Modules, tensor products, fields. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-304 ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS

24 lectures. Prerequisite: 254 (or good result in 294).

SYLLABUS Existence and uniqueness theorems. Linear systems: fundamental matrix. Floquet theory. Stability of linear and nonlinear systems. Plane auto- nomous systems. Perturbation theory of non-linear systems. Comparison theorems and maximum principle for second order systems.

EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-305 PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS

24 lectures. Prerequisites: 253, 254. SYLLABUS Partial differential equations: examples; classification of equations as elliptic, hyberbolic, parabolic. Existence and uniqueness theorems. Quali- tative theory, characteristics, potentials.

359 Faculty of Arts

EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written! examinations.

618-310 COMPLEX ANALYSIS 24 lectures. Prerequisites: 232 or 372, 265 or 344. SYLLABUS Theoretical development of complex function theory: Cauchy's theorem, the maximum principle, singularities, Rouché's theorem, the Riemann mapping theorem, analytic continuation, Picard's theorem. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-311 SMOOTH MANIFOLDS 16 lectures. Prerequisites: 232 or 372, 253. SYLLABUS Manifolds, bundles, Lie theory, integration. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-312 ALGEBRAIC TOPOLOGY 16 lectures. Prerequisites: 232 or 372, 234 or 274. SYLLABUS Fundamental groups, covering spaces, homology theory. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-313 HIGHER ALGEBRA 16 lectures. . SYLLABUS A selection of topics in algebra, e.g., cohomology theories, group representation theory, Lie algebras, Boolean algebras, advanced algebraic number theory, advanced group theory, model theory. EXAMINATION

Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations. 360 Mathematics

818-314 HIGHER ANALYSIS 16 lectures. SYLLABUS One or more topics in analysis, e.g., advanced complex function theory, Riemann surfaces, harmonic functions, harmonic analysis, advanced real analysis, analytic number theory, general topology for analysis, advanced functional analysis. EXAMINATION ' Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-315 TOPOLOGY AND GEOMETRY 16 lectures. SYLLABUS Topics from topology and geometry, e.g., projective spaces, algebraic geometry, complex projective varieties, general topology, manifolds differential topology, algebraic topology, advanced differential geometry, homology theory, homotopy theory. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-320 FURTHER MATHEMATICAL METHODS 16 lectures. SYLLABUS Topics selected from: Integral transforms, distributions. Asymptotic methods in a complex variable, turning point theory. Special functions. Approximate methods for solving differential equations. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

818-321 APPLICATIONS OF MATHEMATICS 16 lectures. SYLLABUS Applications of mathematics in mechanics, economics, biology, optimization, control theory, and other fields. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-322 FURTHER CONTINUUM MECHANICS 16 lectures.

361 Faculty of Arts

SYLLABUS A selection from topics in the mechanics of continua, e.g., fluid and solid mechanics, general rheology, non-newtonian fluids, waves in continuous and other media. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-323 FURTHER DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 16 lectures. SYLLABUS A selection of topics in the theory and applications of differential equations, e.g., perturbation theory, bifurcation, Sobolev spaces, weak solutions, elliptic operators. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-324 MATHEMATICAL MODELLING 16 lectures. SYLLABUS Mathematical models and techniques selected from various fields of application, e.g., optimization, programming, game theory, wave motion. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-340 COMBINATORICS 16 lectures, practice classes by arrangement. SYLLABUS Selections and binomial coefficients. Pairing problems. Recurrence problems. Inclusion-exclusion. Block designs and codes. Steiner systems. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-341 MATHEMATICAL LOGIC

24 lectures, practice classes by arrangement. Prerequisite: 234 or 274. SYLLABUS First order theories and basic model theory, including completeness and compactness. Undecidability and incompleteness. 362 Mathematics

EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-343 NUMBER THEORY 16 lectures, practice classes by arrangement. Prerequisite: 234 or 371. SYLLABUS Factorization, algebraic number fields, algebraic integers and integral bases, ideal theory, units. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618.344 COMPLEX ANALYSIS 24 lectures, practice classes by arrangement. Prerequisite: 272 or 231. Condition: Students may not gain credit for both 344 and 265.

SYLLABUS Differentiability. Conformal mapping. Power series. Residues. Contour integration. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-345 TOPOLOGY OF SURFACES 16 lectures, practice classes by arrangement. SYLLABUS Topics selected from: classifications of surfaces, equivalence and orientation, topological polygons, winding numbers. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

363 Faculty of Arts

618-353 OPTIMIZATION METHODS 16 lectures, practice classes by arrangement. Prerequisite: 264 or 351. SYLLABUS Constrained and unconstrained minimization problems. Univariate search and approximation methods. Multivariate constrained minimization by sim- plех search, conjugate gradient, variable metric methods. Constrained optimization, Kuhn-Tucker conditions, gradient methods, penalty methods. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations. 364 Mathematics

618-356 VARIATIONAL METHODS 16 lectures, practice classes by arrangement. Prerequisite: 254 or 294. SYLLABUS Extrema of functionals: necessary and sufficient conditions. Minimizing sequences. Direct methods. Eigenvalues. Isoperimetric problems. Applica- tions: variational principles in mechanics (Hamiltonian theory), optics, continuum mechanics, economics, etc.

EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-360 MECHANICS OF CONTINUOUS MEDIA 24 lectures, practice classes by arrangement. Prerequisite: 262. SYLLABUS Viscous fluids, boundary layers, slow flow. Elastic media, linear equations, elastostatics, waves. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-361 SYSTEMS THEORY 24 lectures, practice classes by arrangement. Prerequisite: 294 or 254. SYLLABUS Linear operators, transforms, input, output, feedback, stability, applications: renewal equation, traffic dynamics. Phase plane analysis. Volterra problem of completing species. Dynamical systems in biology.

EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-362 APPLICATIONS OF MATHEMATICS 16 lectures, practice classes by arrangement. Prerequisites: 293 or 253. 294 or 254. SYLLABUS Applications of mathematics in one or more fields, such as tensors and their application in rheology; dynamical systems in biology, competing species models; application of stability and bifurcation theory to chemical reactions, elasticity. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

365 Faculty of Arts

618-363 LIE GROUPS AND APPLICATIONS

24 lectures, practice classes by arrangement. Prerequisites: 274 or 234, 293 or 253.

SYLLABUS Introductory treatment of Lie groups and their applications to physical problems, the classical groups, invariant integral, Lie algebras and their relation to Lie groups, outline of classification and representation.

EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-364 THERMODYNAMICS AND STATISTICAL MECHANICS 24 lectures, practice classes by arrangement. Prerequisite: 261.

SYLLABUS Laws, thermodynamic relations and ideal gas. Elements of kinetic theory. Gibbs ensembles and the thermodynamic limit. Phase transitions and critical points. Model systems. Applications to biology. EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-365 MATHEMATICAL METHODS 16 lectures, practice classes by arrangement. Prerequisite: 294 or 254.

SYLLABUS Topics selected from: Laplace and Fourier transforms; asymptotic approximation, stationary phase, Poincayé method.

EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations.

618-372 INTRODUCTION TO METRIC SPACES 16 lectures, practice classes by arrangement. Prerequisites: 273, 272 or 231. Condition: Students may not gain credit for both 372 and 232.

SYLLABUS Metric and topology, open and closed sets, convergence and continuity. Completeness, contraction mapping theorem, applications. Heine-Borel theorem, compactness, continuous functions on compact sets. total boundedness.

EXAMINATION Prescribed written work and a total of not more than 2 hours of written examinations. 366 Mathematics

618-400 MATHEMATICS 4 The fourth-year course will consist of (a) about 180-200 lectures, arranged in units. The units will be chosen from a list covering topics in Pure and Applied Mathematics, and each student's selection must be approved by the chairman of the department. In special circumstances, and subject to approval, some Mathematics units may be replaced by 4th-year units offered by other departments. (b) a thesis to be written on a special topic. The work for the thesis will Involve the reading, analysis and collation of relevant mathematical literature. The topic should be chosen in consultation with the staff of the department, and the work will be directed by a staff member. The final results of the fourth year will be determined on the basis of examinations, set work connected with lectures, and the thesis. MASTER OF ARTS 618-602 SCHOOL OF MATHEMATICS Candidates will prepare a thesis incorporating their reading and research on some approved topic in Mathematics. Students are expected to attend seminars and colloquia. An entry form for examination for higher degrees must be submitted to the Registrar. Three copies of the thesis (typewritten), on A4 paper and double-spaced, should be submitted; one will be deposited in the Univer- sity Library if approved. Candidates may also be examined orally on the subject of the thesis. The thesis should normally be submitted for examination within two years from the commencement of candidature for M.A. by full-time candidates and within four years by part-time candidates. Except in special circumstances and with the permission of the Faculty no thesis or course work will be examined unless the candidate presents for examination within four years from the commencement of his candidature or, in the event of his having been granted leave of absence for the maximum period of one year, within five years from th' commencement of his candidature. SCHOOL OF MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES Courses in Mathematical Sciences comprise the following units:

617-101 MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES 1 E This comprises the units Computer Science 622-101 (or 111) and 622- 103, Statistics 111 (or 121).

617-103 MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES 1G This comprises three of the units Computer Science 622-101 (or 111), 622-102, 622-103, Mathematics 618-185, Statistics 619-112, 619-111 (or 121), which have not been included in any one of Computer Science 1, Statistics 1A or Mathematical Sciences 1E. The selection must be approved by the chairman of the School of Mathematical Sciences prior to enrolment.

617-201 MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES 2E This comprises the units Computer Science 622-202, Statistics 619-201 and 619-202.

367 Faculty of Arts

617-203 MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES 2G

This comprises three or four of the units listed under Computer Science 2A and 28 (except 111), Mathematics 2A or 2A (hols) and Statistics 2A, which have not been included in any of those subjects or in Mathematics 26 or 28 (hoes) or in Mathematical Sciences 2E. The number of units will depend on the combination chosen, which combination must be approved by the chairman of the School of Mathematical Sciences prior to enrolment. Three examples of such combinations are: (i) Computer Science 622-202, Mathematics 618-264, Statistics 619-201; (ii) Com- puter Science 622-202, Mathematics 618-263, Statistics 619-263; and (iii) Mathematics 618-263 and 618-264, Computer Science 622-212 or 622-213 or 622-253.

617-301 MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES 3E This comprises a combination of units totalling between 18 and 20 points which must include Mathematics 618-361 (5), Statistics 619- 301 (5), Statistics 311 (5), and a selection from Computer Science 622-321 (4), 622-322 (4), 622-323 (4); Mathematics 618-373 (5), 618-351 (3), 618-352 (5); Statistics 619-313 (5), 619-316 (4), 619- 321 (4). The combination must be approved by the chairman of the School of Mathematical Sciences prior to enrolment.

617-361 MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES 3E (HONS) This comprises a combination of 300-level units in Computer Science, Mathematics and/or Statistics totalling at least 24 Science points. The combination must be approved by the chairman of the School of Mathe- matical Sciences prior to enrolment.

617-303 MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES 3G This comprises a combination of 300-level units in Computer Science, Mathematics and/or Statistics totalling between 19 and 23 Science points. The combination must be approved by the chairman of the School of Mathematical Sciences prior to enrolment. Note: For details of the above-mentioned units students are referred to the Faculty of Science Handbook and the entries in this Arts Hand- book under the three departments listed above.

DEPARTMENT OF MIDDLE EASTERN 'STUDIES

Chairman of the Department: Mr A. D. HALLAM, M.A. (Leeds), B.A.

Professor: Professor J. BOWMAN, M.A., B.D. (Glas.), D.Phil. (Oxon.), M.A. The department of Middle Eastern Studies is an extension of the department of Semitic Studies which was established in 1945. In 1967 the name was changed to the department of Middle Eastern Studies in order to give a better description of the range of study undertaken In the department. With the arrival of Professor John Bowman in 1960 new courses of a cultural kind were introduced. In the course of the years the shape of these has changed somewhat but the department today provides lectures In the language and literature of modern and 368 Middle Eastern SYadies

classical Arabic and Hebrew, and of Syriac, and also in the related cultural subject Middle Eastern Studies which covers Ancient, Judaeo- Christian, Islamic and Modern aspects of the Middle East. In addition, in support of the Ancient Middle East, some work is offered in Akkadian, Ugaritic, Semitic Inscriptions and the Archaeology of Palestine. In addition to the pass course, alternatives are available for both Pure and Combined Honours,

COURSES OFFERED First year: 181-111 Arabic Part 1 181-121 Hebrew Part 1 181-131 Middle Eastern Studies 1 181-141 Syriac Part 1

Second year: Ordinary Degree 181-211 Arabic Part 2 (Pass) 181-221 Hebrew Part 2 (Pass) 181-231 Middle Eastern Studies Part 2A (Pass) 181-232 Middle Eastern Studies Part 28 (Pass)

Honours Degree 181-261 Hebrew Part 2 (Ions) 181-271 Arabic Part 2 (Ions) 181-281 Syriac Part 2 (Ions) 181-291 Middle Eastern Studies 2A (Ions) 181-292 Middle Eastern Studies 28 (Ions)

Third year: Ordinary Degree 181-311 Arabic Part 3 (Pass) 181-321 Hebrew Part 3 (Pass) 181-331 Middle Eastern Studies ЭА (Pass) 181-332 Middle Eastern Studies 3В (Pass) Honours Degree 181-361 Hebrew Part 3 (Ions) 181-371 Arabic Part 3 (Ions) 181-381 Syriac Part 3 (Ions) 181-391 Middle Eastern Studies 3А (Ions) 181-392 Middle Eastern Studies 3В (Ions) Fourth year: 181-461 Hebrew Part 4 181-471 Arabic Part 4 181-481 Syriac Part 4 181-491 Middle Eastern Studies 4 2. Pass courses in Middle Eastern Studies Parts 2 and 3 comprise two half courses. In either case, two half courses constitute one full course, four half courses constitute two full courses. Students are required to enrol for both the full subject and the separate units. 369 Faculty of Arts

3. No external enrolments are accepted. N.B. Students are invited to consult the chairman of the department at any time about their courses. Enquiries should be made in the first instance at the departmental office.

MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES The department offers one major pass course in Middle Eastern Studies consisting of one subject from each year.

First year: MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES 1 The Ancient Middle East Second year: MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES 2A MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES 2B Each of these subjects consists of two of the units listed below: The Judaeo-Christian Middle East A (Pass) The Islamic Middle East A (Pass) The Modern Middle East A (Pass): (Non-Arab States) —available 1978 and alternate years. (Arab States) — available 1979 and alternate years. The Archaeology of Palestine A (Pass) Third year:

MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES ЭА MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES 36 Each of these subjects consists of two of the units listed below: The Judaeo-Christian Middle East B (Pass) The Islamic Middle East B (Pass) The Modern Middle East B (Pass): (Non-Arab States) — available 1978 and alternate years, (Arab States) —available 1979 and alternate years. The Archaeology of Palestine В (Pass)

181-131 MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES 1 A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS The study will cover aspects of the rise of literate civilization In the Middle East; lectures will cover Sumero-Babylonian mythology, Canaanite and Egyptian Literature, concepts of social life and institutions against a background of ancient art, and in the context of comparative religion. 370 Middle Eastern Studies

In the first term a brief introduction to the pre-history of the Middle East and a short outline of the history and major folk movements including Israel's exodus and settlement will be followed by a consideration of the major early law codes and a discussion of the Ancient Middle Eastern Vassal Treaties and the Biblical Covenant. In the second term attention will be concentrated on the mythologies of the Ancient Middle East—Sumerian, Egyptian, Babylonian and Assyrian, West Semitic, Hittite. Particular attention will be given to Canaanite mythology. In the third term ideas of kingship in the Ancient Middle East, in Sumer, Egypt, Israel, Babylon and Assyria will be discussed. Some attention will be given to concepts of death, judgment, the after-life, time, good and evil. The study will take Into consideration the Ideas of Iranians, Classical Zurvanism and Zoroastrianism. BOOKS Students are expected to possess a personal copy of the two books asterisked and to consult other prescribed books. Aldred Cyril Akhenaten, Pharaoh of Egypt, Sphere, London 1972 Aldred Cyril Egypt to the end of the Old Kingdom, Thames and Hudson, London 1965 Frankfort H Ancient Egyptian Religion, Harper paperback 1961 Frankfort H Before Philosophy, Pelican 1953 Gurney O The Hittites, 2nd ed Pelican 1954 Hooke S H Middle Eastern Mythology, Pelican 1963 Kramer S N The Sumerians, Chicago paperback 1963 Lloyd Seton The Art of the Ancient Near East, Thames and Hudson London 1961 Mellaart J Earliest Civilization of the Near East, Thames and Hudson 1965 •Pritchard J B ed The Ancient Near East, Princeton and OUP 1958 •Roux G Ancient Iraq, Penguin 1964 de Vaux R Ancient Israel, Vols. 1 and 2 paperback, McGraw-Hill 1965 Additional reference books: These will be furnished to students from time to time during the course. WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit two essays (of approximately 2,500 words) during the year. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. Written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination.

181-231 MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES 2A (PASS)

181-232 MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES 2В (PASS) Each of these subjects is made up of two of the units listed below: Units available: 181-001 The Judaeo-Christian Middle East A (Pass) 181-002 The Islamic Middle East A (Pass) 181-003 The Modern Middle East (Arab States) (Pass), (available 1979 and alternate years) 181-004 The Archaeology of Palestine A (Pass) 181-007 The Modern Middle East (Non-Arab States) (Pass) (available 1978 and alternate years)

371 Faculty of Arts

181-001 THE JUDAEO-CHRISTIAN MIDDLE EAST A (PASS) A course of one lecture and up to one tutorial a week throughout the year. SYLLABUS The course will concentrate on three aspects of Judaeo-Christian thought and is based on a study of biblical and non-biblical texts in English translation. Topics for consideration will be: (i) Problems in the early history of Israel: Patriarchs, Exodus, Settle- ment, The rise of the Kingdom. (ii) The prophetic movement in Israel with special reference to Isaiah and Jeremiah. (iii) The rise of Judaism.

BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading. (The substance of this reading will be assumed in the course.) Bright J A History of Israel, SCM 1960 Heaton E W The Old Testament Prophets, Pelican 1961 Rowley H H The Faith of Israel, SCM 1956 (b) Prescribed textbooks: Bright J A History of Israel, SCM 1960 Fohrer G History of Israelite Religion, SPCK 1973 Forster W Palestinian Judaism in New Testament Times, Oliver & Boyd 1964 Heaton E W Solomon's New Men, Thames & Hudson 1974 Rad G von The Message of the Prophets, 1968 In addition students should possess one modern commentary on Isaiah and Jeremiah. Volumes in any of the following series are suitable: Anchor Bible, Century Bible, New Clarendon Bible, The Old Testament Library.

WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit one essay of approximately 2,500 words and one class paper of approximately 1,000 words during the year.

EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. Written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination.

181-002 THE ISLAMIC MIDDLE EAST A (PASS) A course of one lecture and up to one tutorial a week throughout the year. SYLLABUS The course is basically an introduction to Islamic thought and is based on a study of the Koran and other texts in English translation. Topics for consideration will be: 1. Antecedents of Islam: A survey of central teachings of Zoro- astrianism, Judaism and Syrian Christianity and their relevance to the teachings of the Qur'an. 372 Middle Eastern Studies

2. The life and teachings of the Prophet Muhammad as witnessed by the Qur'an and Hadith.

BOOKS Prescribed books: Bowman J "The Debt of Islam to Monophysite Syrian Christianity" in Thatcher Memorial Volume, ed MacLaurin E C, Sydney University Press Cragg K The Cell of the Minaret, New York 1956 Guillaume A Islam, Pelican 1955 Rahman F Islam, Weidenfeld & Nicolson 1967 Watt G Montgomery Muhammad, Prophet and Statesmen, CUP 1961

WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit one essay of approximately 2,500 words and one class paper of approximately 1,000 words.

EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will form part of the examination.

181-003 THE MODERN MIDDLE EAST (ARAB STATES) (PASS) (Not available in 1978) A course of one lecture per week and up to one tutorial a week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS A study of the social, economic, technological and political aspects of the Modern Arab States with particular reference to the impact of the Western nations since World War 1.

BOOKS (a) Prescribed books: Antonius G The Arab Awakening, Capricorn 1965 Laqueur W ed The Israel—Arab Reader; a Documentary History of the Middle East Conflict, Penguin 1969 McDonald R W The League of Arab States, Princeton 1965 Lenczowskl G The Middle East in World Affairs, 3rd ed Cornell University Press 1962 Students will be encouraged to consult academic journals dealing with Middle Eastern problems, such as the International Journal of Middle East Studies, The Middle East Journal, The Middle East and North Africa.

WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit one essay of approximately 2,500 words and one class paper of approximately 1,000 words during the year.

EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. Written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination.

373 Faculty of Arts

181-004 THE ARCHAEOLOGY OF PALESTINE A (PASS)

A course of one lecture and up to one tutorial per week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS The course consists of a number of introductory lectures on methodology followed by a study of the Archaeology of Palestine from the Palaeo- lithic to the Middle Bronze Age. Comparison with neighbouring cultures will be made constantly. An introduction to the study of pottery; description, cataloguing and drawing forms part of the course. BOOKS (a) Preliminary reading: Kenyon K M Beginning in Archaeology, Phoenix 1961 (b) Prescribed texts: Kenyon K M Archaeology in the Holy Land, 3rd ed Oxford 1969 Kenyon K M The Biblical Archaeologist Reader 2, Doubleday 1964 Anati E Palestine before the Hebrews, Jonathan Cape 1963 Albright W F The Archaeology of Palestine, Pelican 1960 Winton Thomas D ed Archaeology and Old Testament Study, Oxford 1967 Pritchard J B The Ancient Near East, Princeton 1965 (c) Books recommended for reference and additional reading: Students will be introduced to the basic journals dealing with the Archaeology of Palestine and also to representative definitive archaeological reports.

WRITTEN WORK One essay of approximately 2,500 to 3,000 words and one class paper of 1,000 words.

EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper and a half-hour test on pottery. Written work submitted during the year will form part of the examination.

181-007 THE MODERN MIDDLE EAST (NON-ARAB STATES) (PASS)

A course of one lecture and up to one tutorial a week throughout the year. Available in alternate years 1978, 1980, etc. In the years 1979, 1981, etc., students will take course 181-003. Additional essay work is expected and a higher standard of pass in the annual examination.

SYLLABUS A study of social, economic, technological and political aspects of the non-Arab states Iran, Turkey and Israel, with particular reference to the impact of the Western nations in the post-World War 1 period. Prescribed textbooks: Bentwich N Israel Resurgent, Benn 1960 Jacobs N The Sociology of Development—Iran as an Asian Case Study, Praeger 1966 Lewis G Turkey, Ernest Benn 1965 374 Middle Eastern Studies

Peretz Don The Middle East Today, Holt Rinehart & Winston 1965 Robinson D R The First Turkish Republic — A Case Study in National Development, Harvard 1965 Weingrod A Israel, Group Relations in a New Society, Pall Mail Press 1965 Wilber D N Iran Past and Present, Princeton 1967 Students will be encouraged to consult the Year Books of the UNO, and make constant use of The Middle East and North Africa (Europa) and also of current academic journals dealing with the Middle East. WRITTEN WORK One essay of approximately 3,000 words and one class paper of approximately 1,500 words. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will form part of the examination.

181-331 MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES ЗА (PASS) 181-332 MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES 3В (PASS) Each of these subjects is made up of two of the units listed below: 181-003 Modern Middle East (Arab States) (Pass) (not available in 1978) 181-005 Judaeo-Christian Middle East B (Pass) 181-006 Islamic Middle East B (Pass) 181-007 Modern Middle East (Non-Arab States) (Pass) 181-008 Archaeology of Palestine B (Pass) Students are required to enrol both for the full subject and for the separate units using the numbers of the courses.

181-003 MODERN MIDDLE EAST (ARAB STATES) (PASS)

(Not available in 1978) A course of one lecture and up to one tutorial a week throughout the year. SYLLABUS See p. 373.

WRITTEN WORK One essay of approximately 3,000 words and one class paper of approx?- mately 1,500 words.

EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will form part of the examination.

181-005 THE JUDAEO-CHRISTIAN MIDDLE EAST B (PASS) A course of one lecture and up to one tutorial a week throughout the year. SYLLABUS The course will concentrate on three aspects of Judaeo-Christian thought and is based on a study of biblical and non-biblical texts in English. Topics for consideration will be:

375 Faculty of Arts

(i) The historical Jesus and the Synoptic Gospels, with special reference to Luke's Gospel. (ii) The debt of Christianity to Judaism and the lid Testament illustrated by the Johannine literature. (iii) The contribution of Paul to emergent Christianity with special reference to Romans and Galatians. Prescribed textbooks: Bowman J The Fourth Gospel and the Jews, Pickwick 1975 Bruce F F New Testament History, Nelson London 1969 Forster W Palestinian Judaism In New Testament Times, Oliver and Boyd 1964 Lightfoot R H St John's Gospel, Oxford paperback 1963 Neil S The Interpretation of the New Testament 1861-1961, Oxford paperback 1966 Robinson J M A New Quest for the Historical Jesus, SCM 1959 In addition, students should possess one modern commentary on Luke, John, Romans and Galatians. Volumes in any of the following series are suitable: Anchor Bible, New Century Bible, Black's New Testament Commentaries, The New London Commentary. WRITTEN WORK

One essay of approximately 2,500 - 3,000 words and one class paper of approximately 1,000 words. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will form part of the examination.

181-006 THE ISLAMIC MIDDLE EAST B (PASS)

A course of one lecture and up to one tutorial a week throughout the year. SYLLABUS The syllabus will concentrate on two aspects of Islamic thought and is based on a study of the Qur'an and other texts in English. Topics for consideration will be: (i) A study of some basic concepts and doctrines in Muslim Theology. (ii) A study in Islamic Mysticism and a comparison with other mystical streams. Prescribed textbooks: Quran Агbеrrу A J Sufism, an account of the Mystics of Islam, London 1950 Nicholson R A Studies in Islamic Mysticism, CUP 1967 Watt G Montgomery Islamic Theology and Philosophy, Islamic Survey No 1 Further reading guldes will be furnished to students during the year. WRITTEN WORK One essay of approximately 2,500 words and one class paper of approximately 1,000 words. 376 Middle Eastern Studies

EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will form part of the examination.

181-007 THE MODERN MIDDLE EAST (NON-ARAB STATES) (PASS) SYLLABUS See p. 374. WRITTEN WORK One essay of approximately 3,000 words and one class paper of approximately 1,500 words. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will form part of the examination.

181-008 THE ARCHAEOLOGY OF PALESTINE B (PASS) A course of one lecture and up to one tutorial a week throughout the year. SYLLABUS The course will cover the period of Late Bronze Age to the Iron II. in Palestine. Comparison with neighbouring cultures will be made continually. The study of pottery will continue and will Include the drawing of more difficult items. Some restoration work will be done. BOOKS (a) Prescribed books: Amiran R Ancient Pottery of the Holy Land, Messada Jerusalem 1969 Kenyon K M Archaeology in the Holy Land, 3rd ed Oxford 1969 Albright W F The Archaeology of Palestine, Pelican 1960 Winton Thomas D ed Archaeology and Old Testament Study, Oxford 1967 Pritchard J B The Ancient Near East, Princeton 1965 Closer attention will be paid to definitive archaeological reports and to archaeological journals like Palestine Exploration Fund Quarterly, Israel Exploration Journal, Bulletin of the American Schools of Oriental Re- search, Biblical Archaeologist, Levant. WRITTEN WORK One essay of approximately 3,000 words. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper and a half-hour pottery test. Written work submitted during the year will form part of the examination.

181-141 SYRIAC PART 1 A course of three lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS (1) Study of the accidence and syntax of Syriac. Translation from, and into Syriac.

377 Faculty of Arts

(2) Study of selected passages from the Gospels and Psalms. (3) Study of simple non-biblical narratives. (4) Literary and historical introduction to the prescribed books plus a general introduction to Syriac Literature. BOOKS Prescribed texts: Luke in the Peshitta and Old Syriac A flood in Edessa in Carl Brockelmann Syriche Grammatik, Leipzig 1960 pp 21-23 Robinson T H Paradigms and Exercises in Syriac Grammar, latest ed Jennings W Lexicon to the Syriac New Testament, revised by Gantillon OUP 1926 WRITTEN WORK Written exercises will be submitted throughout the year. EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers. Written work submitted throughout the year will be taken into consideration.

181-121 HEBREW PART 1

A course of three lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year. Students in option (a) (see below) who have not reached Leaving or Higher School Certificate standard in Hebrew before enrolment may be required to give evidence of their ability to follow the course. Students in option (b) may commence the study of Biblical Hebrew without previous knowledge of the language. A Summer School in Modern Hebrew is generally available: consult the chairman of the department.

SYLLABUS Students must choose one of the following options: (a) Modern Hebrew. (b) Biblical Hebrew. (a) Modern Hebrew will consist of translation of selected modern texts together with grammar and prose styles of Modern Hebrew and a background study of modern Israeli society. Tuition will be given in modern conversational Idioms. (b) Biblical Hebrew will consist of translation of selected Biblical texts together with work on grammar and prose styles, and the exegesis of passages studied.

BOOKS Prescribed texts: Option (a) (i) Selected Biblical texts. (ii) Selections from Chomsky M., Bialik, Ch N., and Agnon, S. Y. Option (b) Genesis 21-24; Selections from the books of Samuel and Kings.

378 Middle Eastern Studies

Prescribed books: Option (a): Poetry Bialik Ch N Shirim, Dvir, Tel-Aviv 1966 Stories Chomsky M ed Sha' аг leSifrut, Am Oved, Tel-Aviv 1969 Agnon S Y Maaseh ha Ez, Shocken, Tel-Aviv Yedidut, Shocken, Tel-Aviv Israeli Society Ben-Sasson H H Trial and Achievement, Kater, Jerusalem 1974 Dictionary Alcalay R The Complete Hebrew-English Dictionary, Massadah, Tel Aviv Grammar Livny & Kokhba A Hebrew Grammar, Mass, Jerusalem 1964 Barkaly S Luach haP'alim haShalem, Mass, Jerusalem Option (b): Biblia Hebraica, ed R. Kittel 3rd or later ed Dictionaries: Koehler L & Baumgartner W Lexicon in Veteris Testamenti Libros Holladay W L A Concise Hebrew end Aramaic Lexicon on the Old Testament, 1961 Brown-Driver-Briggs A Hebrew Lexicon, 1952 Old Testament Introductions: Eissfeldt 0 The Old Testament: an Introduction, 1965 Pfeiffer R H The Books of the Old Testament, 1957 Weiser A Introduction to the Old Testament, 1961 Commentaries: The Series Old Testament Library and International Critical Commentary. Others may be consulted. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper in either Option (a) or Option (b). Note: In Option (a) an oral test forms part of the examination. In Option (b) work done during the year contributes to the examination.

181-221 HEBREW PART 2 (PASS) A course of three lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year. External studies are not available. SYLLABUS Students must choose one of the following options: (a) Modern Hebrew. (b) Biblical Hebrew. (a) Modern Hebrew option will continue translation of selections from Modern Hebrew literature of various styles. Modern Hebrew syntax, modern conversational Hebrew, and a background study of modern Israeli 379 Faculty of Arts

society (taken conjointly with Hebrew 3). (b) The Biblical Hebrew option will continue translation of Bid ical material together with syntax, prose composition in Biblical Hebrew, and the exegesis of prescribed texts (to be taken with Part 3). BOOKS Prescribed texts: Option ( а ): (i) Selected Biblical texts. (ii) Selections from Bialik Ch N, TchernlchovskI S and Agnon S Y Option (b): Selections from Ezekiel and Deuteronomy Prescribed books: Option (a): Poetry Tchernichovski S Shirim, Divr, Tel-Aviv 1966 Stories Bialik Ch N Sippurim, Divr, Tel-Aviv 1971 Agnon S Y Sippurim, Sifriah Qatanah No 3 Shocken, Jerusalem 1971 Israeli Society Ben-Sasson H H Trial and Achievement, Keter, Jerusalem 1974 Dictionary Alcalay R The Complete Hebrew-English Dictionary, Massadah, Tel Aviv Grammar and Syntax Blau Y Ysodot HaTachbir, 2 vols Hebrew Institute Option (b): As for Hebrew Part 1.

EXAMINATION No more than two 3-hour papers.

181-321 HEBREW PART 3 (PASS ) A course of three lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year. External studies are not available. SYLLABUS Students must choose one of the following options: (a) Modern Hebrew. (b) Biblical Hebrew. (a) Modern Hebrew option will consist of translation of advanced texts, prose composition, modern Hebrew conversation, Israeli society. (b) Biblical Hebrew option will continue the study of selected Biblical literature together with work in advanced Biblical prose composition and studies on topics in Biblical literature and exegeses. BOOKS Prescribed texts: Option (a): Selections from Alterman N, 'Oz 'Amos, Agnon S Y. Option (b): As for Hebrew Part 2. 380 Middle Eastern Studies

Prescribed books: Option ( а ): Poetry Alterman N Simchаt 'Anyyim Shirim, Qibbuts Ha Me'uchad 1971 Novel 'Oz 'Amos Mikha'el Sheli, 'Am 'Oved, Tel Aviv 1974 Agnon S Y 'Oreach Natah lelun, Vol IV Shocken-Haaretz 1953 Dictionary: as for Part 1 Option (b): As for Hebrew Part 1.

EXAMINATION No more than two 3-hour papers.

181-111 ARABIC PART 1-MODERN ARABIC A course of three lectures per week plus one tutorial class throughout the year. Facilities for study in the language laboratory will also be available.

SYLLABUS No previous knowledge of Arabic Is necessary for this course. Students will be Introduced Into modern literary Arabic. The emphasis will be on the literary form both written and oral, not colloquial. There will be some introductory lectures an Arab society today.

BOOKS Prescribed texts: Frayha Anis The Essentials of Arabic, Khayat 1958 Ziadeh F J & Winder R B Introduction to Modern Arabic, Princeton University Press 1957 Recommended for reference: Hitti P K A History of the Arabs, 6th ed Macmillan 1958 Cremeans C D The Arabs and the World, Praeger 1963 Wehr Hans Dictionary of Modern Written Arabic, Otto Harrassowitz Wiesbaden 1961 Doniach N S ed The Oxford English-Arabic Dictionary of Current Usage, Oxford University Press 1972

EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper and an oral examination.

181-211 ARABIC PART 2 (PASS) - MODERN ARABIC A course of three lectures per week plus one tutorial class throughout the year. Facilities for study In the language laboratory will also be available.

SYLLABUS Translation from prescribed texts from modern Arabic Literature (prose) and selections of modern Arabic poetry. Translation from English into Arabic and composition. Accidence and syntax. Study of modern Arabic society continued.

381 Faculty of Arts

BOOKS Frayha Anis The Essentials of Arabic, Khayat 1958 Cowan David An Introduction to Modern Literary Arabic, Cambridge UP 1968 Selections from Modern Arabic writings. Recommended for reference: Hitti P K A History of the Arabs, 6th ed Macmillan 1958 Cremeans C D The Arabs and the World, Praeger 1963 Wehr Hans Dictionary of Modern Written Arabic, Otto Harrassowitz Wiesbaden 1961 Doniach N S ed The Oxford English-Arabic Dictionary of Current Usage, Oxford University Press 1972 EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers and an oral examination.

181-311 ARABIC PART 3 (PASS)-CLASSICAL ARABIC A course of three lectures per week with one tutorial class throughout the year. SYLLABUS A study of Classical texts including selections from the Qur'an, pre- Islamic poetry and Belles Lettres. BOOKS Prescribed texts: Qur'an: chapter Maryam Selections from Diwans of Abu 'I- Atahiya and Abu Nuwas Majani 1-Аdаb, vol. 4 pp. 265-305 Ibn al-Mugaffa' Kahle we Dimna EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers.

HONOURS DEGREE SCHOOL OF MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES (For possible combinations with this school, see pp. 519 ff.) 1. The courses for the degree with honours in the school of Middle Eastern Studies comprise the following subjects: Hebrew parts 1 (pass), 2 (hofs), 3 (hens) and 4 (hens). Arabic parts 1 (pass), 2 (hofs). 3 (hofs) and 4 (hofs). Syriac parts 1 (pass), 2 (hens), 3 (hofs) and 4 (hens). Middle Eastern Studies 1 (pass), 2A and/or 28 (hens), ЭА and/or 36 (hens) and 4 (hens). 2. Candidates who intend to enter the honours school should normally take in their first year: One of: Hebrew 1, Arabic 1 or Syriac 1 together with Middle Eastern Studies 1. Plus two additional grade 1 subjects. Admission to the honours course is conditional upon a satisfactory performance in the first year. This will normally be the equivalent of at 382 Middle Eastern Studies least second class honours. Other candidates who wish to enter the honours school must consult the chairman of the department who will be guided in his recommendation by the merits of the case. In their second year candidates will take the appropriate honours courses in two of the following: Hebrew 2 (hofs). Arabic 2 (huns), Syriac 2 (hofs), Middle Eastern Studies 2 (hofs). Plus one additional grade 2 subject. In their third year students will take the Honours courses in two of the following: Hebrew 3 (hofs), Arabic 3 (hofs) or Syriac 3 (hofs). Middle Eastern Studies 3 (hurts). Towards the end of the third year candidates are required to select a subject for their fourth year honours thesis. This will be prepared during the fourth year and submitted by the end of second term as part of the final examination. The final examination will be taken in two parts, part 1 at the end of the third year, part 2 at the end of the fourth year.

PART 1 Two papers from one of the following: Prescribed Hebrew texts and unseen translation. Prescribed Arabic texts and unseen translation. Prescribed Syriac texts and unseen translation. Two papers in: Middle Eastern Studies 3 (hofs). PART 2 There are several patterns: (a) Two papers In one of: Advanced Hebrew prescribed texts and prose composition. Advanced Arabic prescribed texts and prose composition. Advanced Syriac prescribed texts and prose composition. One paper in one of: Hebrew Literature Biblical and post-Biblical. Arabic Literature Classical and Modern. Syriac Literature. One paper in Middle Eastern Studies 4 (Ions). (b) One paper in one of: Advanced Hebrew/Arabic/Syriac prescribed texts and prose composition. Three papers of Middle Eastern Studies 4 (Ions). (c) Four papers in Middle Eastern Studies 4 (Ions). In each of the above patterns students are required to submit in addition a thesis of between 8,000 and 10,000 words in length.

MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES IN COMBINED COURSES in general, Middle Eastern Studies in combined honours courses consists of half of the Middle Eastern Studies subjects required or recommended in the pure Honours School, that is, one Middle Eastern Studies unit in the first year, one Honours Middle Eastern Studies subject in

383 Faculty of Arts

each of the second and third years and half of the requirements (repre- sented by two papers at the final examination) of the fourth year. The final honours thesis will be mutually arranged with the second department with which the candidate works.

181-291 MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES 2A (HONOURS)

181-292 MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES 2В (HONOURS) Honours courses in each of the five half-courses (pass) referred to above, namely 181-001, 181-002, 181-003, 181-004 and 181-007 will comprise the pass course plus additional seminar work of up to one hour per week. An honours course will consist of two pass units plus seminar work In each unit.

181-009 JUDAEO-CHRISTIAN MIDDLE EAST A (HONOURS) A course of one lecture and up to one tutorial a week plus a series of seminars each of one hour's duration throughout the year. SYLLABUS As for Judaeo-Christian Middle East A (pass) course 181-001. The seminar will investigate a limited number of topics in greater depth. Among the topics discussed the following may be included — additional historical problems, form criticism and Old Testament literature, Wisdom literature in Israel, pre-Christian Jewish literature.

BOOKS As for the pass course. The bibliography will depend on seminar topics discussed. Appropriate lists will be supplied to honours students. WRITTEN WORK One essay of approximately 3,000 words, and one class paper of approximately 1,000 words.

EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. Written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination.

181-010 ISLAMIC MIDDLE EAST A (HONOURS) A course of one lecture and up to one tutorial a week plus a series of seminars each of one hour's duration throughout the year. SYLLABUS As for Islamic Middle East A (pass) course 181-002. The seminars will study a limited number of the topics taken up in the pass course at greater depth. BOOKS As for the pass course. The bibliography will depend on the precise seminar topics discussed. Appropriate lists will be supplied to honours students. 384 Middle Eastern Studies

WRITTEN WORK One essay of approximately 3,000 words and one class paper of approximately 1,000 words. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken into consideration.

181-011 THE MODERN MIDDLE EAST (ARAB STATES) (HONOURS) (Not available in 1978)

A course of one lecture per week and up to one tutorial a week throughout the year, plus a series of seminars of one hour's duration. SYLLABUS As for the pass course 181-003. The seminar will investigate a limited number of topics in greater depth. Among these the following may be included: oil in the Middle East; problems of water distribution; political contacts with non-Arab States; sociological changes since the end of World War II. BOOKS As for the pass course. Additional bibliography arising from the precise seminar tonics discussed will be supplied. WRITTEN WORK One essay of approximately 3,000 words and one class paper of approximately 1,000 words. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. Written work done during the year will be taken into consideration.

181-012 THE ARCHAEOLOGY OF PALESTINE A (HONOURS) A course of one lecture and one tutorial a week throughout the year plus a series of seminars of one hour's duration. SYLLABUS As for the pass course 181-004. The seminar will investigate In greater depth a number of methodological problems and study at greater depth appropriate typical sites with the aid of excavation reports. Students will be encouraged to develop individual interests. BOOKS As for pass course. Additional biЫiography will be supplied to students to cover seminar topics. WRITTEN WORK One essay of approximately 3,000 words and one class paper of approximately 1,000 words.

385 N Faculty of Arts

EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken into consideration.

181-015 THE MODERN MIDDLE EAST (NON-ARAB STATES) (HONOURS)

A course of one lecture and up to one tutorial per week throughout the year plus a series of seminars of one hour's duration.

SYLLABUS As for pass course 181-007. The seminar will consider a limited number of topics in depth. These may include the following — land reforms in Iran, experiments in democracy in Turkey, sociological problems in Israel.

BOOKS As for pass course. Additional bibilography will be provided for seminars during the year.

181-391 MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES ЗА (HONOURS) 181-392 MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES 3В (HONOURS) Honours courses in each of the five half-courses (pass) referred to above, namely 181-003, 181-005, 181-006, 181-007, 181-008. Courses 181-009 and 181-010 are honours courses with certain prerequisites. TWO honours courses comprise ONE honours subject.

181-011 THE MODERN MIDDLE EAST (ARAB STATES) (HONOURS)

(Not available in 1978)

A course of one lecture per week and up to one tutorial a week throughout the year, plus a series of seminars of one hour's duration.

SYLLABUS As for the pass course 181-003. The seminar will investigate a limited number of topics in greater depth. Among these the following may be included: oil in the Middle East; problems of water distribution; political contacts with non-Arab States; sociological changes since the end of World War II. BOOKS As for the pass course. Additional bibliography arising from the precise seminar topics discussed will be supplied.

386 Middle Eastern Studies

WRITTEN WORK One essay of approximately 3,000 words and one class paper of approximately 1,000 words. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken into consideration.

181-013 JUDAEO-CHRISTIAN MIDDLE EAST В (HONOURS) As for the pass course 181-005. Plus a seminar. Several topics will be studied in depth among which the following may be included: form criticism and the Gospels; Paul and rabbinic exegesis; interpreting the parables; redaction criticism; archaeology and the New Testament. BOOKS As for the pass course. Additional bibliography will be supplied to students depending on the precise seminar topics discussed. WRITTEN WORK One essay of approximately 3,000 words and one class paper of approximately 1,000 words. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken into consideration.

181-014 ISLAMIC MIDDLE EAST B (HONOURS)

A course of one lecture and up to one tutorial per week throughout the year plus a series of seminars of one hour's duration. SYLLABUS As for Islamic Middle East—Part 2 (pass) course 181-006. The seminar will be based on Kitab al-Milal wa'l-Nihal by Shahrastani, translated by Drs Kazi and Flynn; Аbг-Nahrain, vols VII-X and Studies In Islamic Mysticism by R A Nicholson as well as A J Arberry's Fifty Poems of Hafiz, CUP 1962. BOOKS As for pass course. Additional biЫiography will be provided during the course of the seminars. WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit two essays of approximately 2,500 words during the year. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken into consideration.

387 Faculty of Arts

181-015 THE MODERN MIDDLE EAST (NON-ARAB STATES) (HONOURS) A course of one lecture and up to one tutorial per week throughout the year plus a series of seminars of one hour's duration. SYLLABUS As for pass course 181-007. The seminar will consider a limited number of topics in depth. These may include the following — land reforms In Iran, experiments in democracy in Turkey, sociological problems in Israel. BOOKS As for pass course. Additional bibliography will be provided for seminars during the year. WRITTEN WORK One essay of approximately 3,000 words and one class paper of approximately 1,000 words. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken into consideration.

181-016 ARCHAEOLOGY OF PALESTINE B (HONOURS) A course of one lecture and up to one tutorial per week throughout the year plus a series of seminars of one hour's duration. SYLLABUS As for the pass course 181-008. The seminar will be concerned with an introduction to Semitic Alpha- betic Inscriptions. Examples of inscriptions from the earliest Serabit el Khadim texts to early Syriac texts will be studied. Alternately, the course 181-017 in Akkadian will be regarded as equivalent. BOOKS As for the pass course. No set books will be prescribed for inscriptions but the following are recommended for general reference: Donner H & Rolig W K вnвanãische und Aramãische Inschriften, Her- rassowitz Wiesbaden 1964 Gibson J C L Syrian Semitic Inscriptions vol 1, Oxford 1971 WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit one essay of approximately 3,000 words during the year. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. Written work submitted during the year will be taken into consideration.

181-017 THE ANCIENT MIDDLE EAST—AKKADIAN PART 1 (PASS & HONOURS) A course of one lecture and up to one tutorial a week throughout the year. As a prerequisite for this course students will be required to have completed two years of a Semitic language. 388 Middle Eastern Studies

SYLLABUS An introduction to the basic grammar and syntax of Akkadian with the reading of simple texts both In transliteration and in cuneiform. N.B. The work in Akkadian can be continued in Middle Eastern Studies 4. BOOKS These will be referred to in the course of the year. For the most part the course will be developed independently of standard texts which can be consulted for reference. WRITTEN WORK Exercises will be prepared regularly during the year. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper.

181-018 INTRODUCTION TO THE SEMANTICS OF SEMITIC LANGUAGES (PASS & HONOURS) A course of one lecture and up to one tutorial a week throughout the year. As a prerequisite for 'his course students will be required to have completed two years of a Semitic language. SYLLABUS The course will consist of a brief survey of general semantics and an introduction into the semantic structure of Semitic languages, with a few exhaustive examples of common Semitic roots, starting from Biblical Hebrew. BOOKS Preliminary reading: Barr J The Semantics of Biblical Language, Oxford 1961 Prescribed texts: Holladay W L The root/shub/in the Old Testament, Leiden 1958 Murtonen A "The use and meaning of the words/lbarek/and/braka in the Old Testament" Vetus Testamentum IX, Leiden 1959 WRITTEN WORK Tutorial class assignments through the year. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper; more advanced class work will also be taken into account.

181-491 MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES—PART 4 A series of lecture-seminars weekly throughout the year. SYLLABUS Towards the close of the third year a range of topics will be decided with honours students in the light of the interests and backgrounds of the students, each involving the advanced study of a restricted theme in Middle Eastern Studies. Typical themes might be: Law and Covenant in 389 Faculty of Arts

the Ancient Near East; Ideas of Salvation in Middle Eastern Religions; Historiography in the Middle East; Literary Forms and Motifs in Middle Eastern Literatures; Cultural and Religious Cross-fertilization in the Ancient Middle East; the emergence of Nationalism in the Modern Middle East; Economic Problems in the Middle East. Note: Where linguistic areas are elected, e.g. Akkadian, Ugaritic, Ara- maic, Ethiopic, Epigraphy or some part of Arabic 4, Hebrew 4, Syriac 4, the amount of work to be undertaken in Middle Eastern Studies 4 will be reduced. See patterns of examinations in the Second Part Final Examina- tion. It is expected that, in any case, students will make functional use of language studies in Parts 1 to 3. BOOKS Bibliography will be supplied in the course of the year. WRITTEN WORK Students will be required to submit written work at times specified in the form of (a) Seminar papers, and (b) essay work. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper or its equivalent for each seminar.

181-261 HEBREW PART 2 (HONS) A course of four lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS In addition to the work of the ordinary class, honours students will do additional work. (a) Modern Hebrew, to be taken jointly with Hebrew Part 3. (b) Additional Biblical Hebrew; to be taken jointly with Hebrew Part 3. BOOKS Prescribed texts: As for the ordinary degree plus: Option (a): 'Oz 'Amos Mikha'el Shell, 'Am 'Oved Option (b): Selections from Proverbs Prescribed books: As for the ordinary degree. EXAMINATION No more than two 3-hour papers.

181-361 HEBREW PART 3 (HONS) A course of four lectures per week with one tutorial class throughout the year. Some of the lectures are taken with Part 3 (Pass) and some with Part 4 (Ions). 390 Middle Eastern Studies

SYLLABUS In addition to the work of Hebrew 3 (Pass), honours students will do additional advanced work in either: (a) Modern Hebrew. (b) Biblical Hebrew. BOOKS Prescribed texts: As for the ordinary degree, plus: Option ( а ): Jehoshua Abraham B 9 Sippurim, Qibbuts Ha Me'uchad 1972 Option (b): Selections from Proverbs Prescribed books: As for the ordinary degree. EXAMINATION No more than two 3-hour papers.

181-461 HEBREW PART 4 A course of two lectures and one seminar per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS (a) Advanced translation: modem Hebrew literature. or (b) Advanced translation: Biblical Hebrew literature or early Hebrew dialects. BOOKS Prescribed texts: Option (a): Poetry Bialik Ch N Shirim Tchernichovski S Shirim Alterman N Simchat 'Onyyim Shirim Shimoni D Matseivah Novels Agnon S Y Sippur Pashut 'Oz 'Amos Mikha'ei Shell Stories Jehoshua Abraham B 9 Sippurim Option (b): Selections from Job, Proverbs, Nome and Ecclesiastes or Samaritan Pentateuch and early Mediaeval Liturgical poetry with Palestinian punctuation. Students at this stage in their course are expected to prepare their own bibliographies as an essential part of their preparation for research. EXAMINATION No more than two 3-hour papers and thesis.

391 Faculty of Arts

181-271 ARABIC PART 2 (HONS) A course of three lectures per week, with one tutorial throughout the year. N.B. The course comprises the two lectures of Arabic 2 (pass), plus certain parts of the prescribed texts for Arabic 3 (pass). Lectures will be taken at the same hours. Students should consult the lecturers in Arabic. SYLLABUS As for Arabic 2 (pass) with additional grammar. BOOKS As for Arabic 2 (pass) plus Taha Husayn: Al Ayyain; Muhamud Taymur: Nids' al-Ma jhul, pp. 9-31. EXAMINATION No more than two 3-hour papers.

181-371 ARABIC PART 3 (HONS) A course of three lectures per week, with one tutorial, throughout the year. N.B. Two of the lectures are identical with those for Arabic 3 (pass) and will be taken at the same hours. Students should consult the lecturer in Arabic. SYLLABUS As for Arabic 3 (pass) plus history of classical Arabic literature consulting Arabic sources. BOOKS Prescribed texts: Al-Zayyat A H Tarikh al-Adab al-'Arabi (History of Arabic Literature), Cairo AI-Fakhuri H Tarikh al-Adab al-'Arabi (A History of Arabic Literature), Beirut 1960 EXAMINATION No more than two 3-hour papers.

181-471 ARABIC PART 4 A course of two lectures per week, with one seminar throughout the year.

SYLLABUS One only of the following options may be taken in any one year. (1) Advanced study of Arabic historiography. or (2) Advanced study of special topics in modern Arabic literature. or (3) Advanced study of Arabic philosophical and scientific works. or (4) Study of Arabic and Muslim linguistic, literary and cultural in- influence among non-Arabic speaking Muslim communities, with special reference to Persian and Urdu. BOOKS Prescribed texts: 392 Middle Eastern Studies

1. al-Mubarrad: Al Кámil; al-Mãs' йdi: Тanbih; al-Tabari: Annals; al- Baldhuri: Fut йh al Виldáп; Salih 'Ali: Muhidarat fi Ta'rikh А l'А rab. 2. Taha Husayn: 'Ala Нimish as-Sira; Мahmйd Taymur: al-Atlii1; Taw- fiq a1 Hakim: Нimári lala Li; Amin al-Rayhãni: Mul йk al-Arab; Juri Zaydan: Riwayat al-Maml йk. 3. Ibn Tafayl: Heyy Ibn yagzán; Ibn Rushd: Fasl Al-Magill; al-Мa'arri: L uzumiyyát; ai-Biruni:Rasa'il; Abd al-Quadir аl-Jitãni: Fat Fath al Rabbani wa-fayd al-Rahmanl (Cairo 1960 pp. 112-138; 146- 194) 4. Igbal M: Reconstruction of Religious Thought in Islam; Yusuf Ja'fari: Kalam I-Urdu; Prem. Chand: Gau-Dan; Sarshar R N: Fisane-e- azad; Hafiz: Diwan; Rum!: Masnavi; Sa'di: Gulistan; Omar Khayyam: Rubayyat. Recommended for reference:

Platte J T A Grammar of Hindustani or Urdu Language, OUP 1941 Lambton A K S Persian Grammar, CUP 1953 Browne E G Literary History of Persia, 2 vols T F Unwln 1902-06 Bailey T G History of Urdu Literature, OUP 1932 EXAMINATION No more than two 3-hour papers and thesis.

181-281 SYRIAC PART 2 (HONS) A course of two lectures per week with one tutorial class throughout the year. SYLLABUS (u Study of Syriac of the Patristic period, with reading of prescribed texts. All three scripts to be read. Translation and prose-work. Ad- vanced grammar and unprepared translation. and (ii) Literary, historical and cultural background to the texts prescribed. BOOKS Prescribed texts: Jansma T A Selection from the Acts of Judas Thomas, Brill Leiden 1952 (both prose and poetry) Bardalsan Kthava d'Namusa d'Athrawatha, Patrologia Syriaca Eusebi us Historia Ecclesiae, Bk I x111 ed by Wright & Maclean CUP Brockelmann C Syrische Grammatik mit Paradigmen, Literatur, Chresto- mathie und Glossar, Leipzig 1960 ((ii) The Teaching of Addas, pp 12-21; (vii) From Kalilah and Dimnah pp 129-135) EXAMINATION No more than two 3-hour papers.

181-381 SYRIAC PART 3 (HONS) A course of two lectures per week with one tutorial class throughout the year.

393 Faculty of Arts

SYLLABUS (i) More advanced treatment of grammar and syntax, together with translation of unprescribed texts from Syriac. (ii) Study of Syriac Biblical commentators, and advanced study of Patristic texts. BOOKS Prescribed texts: Beck E Des heiligen Ephraim des Syrers Nishibina, I, 11, CSC°, 218- 219. 240-241, Louvain 1961, 1963 Moberg A The Book of the Himyarites. Lund 1924 Wright W Joshua the Stylite, Chronicle, CUP 1880 Gibson M D The Commentaries of Ishodad on the Gospel of Matthew ногае Semiticac vi CUP 1911 Burkitt F C Euphemia and the Goth, Williams & Norgate 1913 Aphraates De Monachis, Patrologia Syriaca Vol. 1 ed Graffin R EXAMINATION No more than two 3-hour papers. 181-481 SYRIAC PART 4 A course of two lectures per week, with one seminar, throughout the year. SYLLABUS The overall plan will be as follows: Texts: (i) Syriac: Study of Nestorian and Monophysite liturgies and homilies. (ii) A special study on a selected topic. BOOKS Prescribed texts: Charlesworth J H The Odes of Solomon, Oxford 1973 Liber Graduum, Patrologia Syriaca ed Graffin R, Firmin-Didot Paris 1926 Cols 584-765 Dionysius Bar Salibi Against the Muslims Martyrium Beati Simeonis bar Sabba-e Patrologia Syriaca, Vol II Cols 714-960 Mingana A Commentaries of Theodore Mopsuestia on the Nicene Creed, on the Lord's Prayer and on the Sacraments of Baptism and the Eucharist, in Woodbroke Studies, V, VI, Cambridge 1932, 1933 Liturgical texts from the departmental collection viz: The Liturgies of Addai and Mari, and Theodore of Mopsuestia, etc. Bibliography at this stage will be considered to be the responsibility of students, as part of their initial training for research. EXAMINATION No more than two 3-hour papers. Thesis on special subject.

MASTER OF ARTS 181-601 J. SCHOOL OF MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES

Candidates will prepare а thesis on an approved subject. They will work under the supervision of a member of the department of Middle Eastern 394 Music

Studies to whom they should report regularly upon the progress of their work. Research seminars may be held throughout the year. An entry form for examination for higher degrees must be submitted to the Registrar. Three copies of each thesis (A4, typewritten, dour e-spaced) should be submitted, one of which will be deposited in the University Library. Candidates may also be examined orally on the subject of the thesis. The thesis should normally be submitted for examination within two years from the commencement of candidature for MA by full-time candidates and within four years by part-time candidates. Except in special circumstances and with the permission of the faculty no thesis or course work will be examined unless the candidate presents for examination within four years from the commencement of his candidature or, in the event of his having been granted leave of absence for the maximum period of one year, within five years from the commencement of his candidature.

DEPARTMENT OF MUSIC Chairman of Department: Mr M. COOKE, M.Mus., Dip.Mus., Perfectionnement 6 éme degré (Edole Normale de Musique), M.A.C.E. Ormond Professor of Music: Professor G. F. LOUGHLIN, D.Mus. (Dunelm.), M.A., F.R.C.M., F.R.C.O. Professor of Music: Professor P. J. DENNISON, BMus. (Syd.), M.A. (Oxon. & Cantab.), D.Phil. (Oxon.), Ph.D. (Cantab.), F.R.C.O. ORDINARY DEGREE The subjects which may be taken in the ordinary degree course are Music 1A, 2 В, 3C and Music Performance 1A. The major is Music 1A, 28, Э C. Music Performance 1A is a terminal first year subject for students wishing to take practical music. No pure honours course in Music is available, but honours courses In Music 1A, 2В, ЭC, 40 or 4E may be taken as part of an approved combined honours course. (See pp. 519 ff.) External tuition is not available. Satisfactory attendance at both lectures and tutorials is necessary.

740-011 MUSIC 1A (LATE RENAISSANCE AND BAROQUE MUSIC) A course in first year of two lectures and one tutorial per week. Students entering this subject will be expected to have the ability to follow musical scores and to understand discussions on the formal, harmonic and contrapuntal structures. Students without this background would have difficulty in comprehending the subject. Therefore, those wishing to enrol without this background are strongly urged to attend a Basic Music Theory summer course in February, 1978. Other students are also welcome to attend the summer course. Details will be available at the Faculty of Music and the Office for Continuing Education during the preceding long vacation. SYLLABUS

The history of European music from с.1550 to с.1750 together with an analytical study of the works of representative composers of the period.

395 Faculty of Arts

ASSIGNMENTS Two assignments will be given during the year and will form part of the examination assessment. PRESCRIBED SCORES Bach J S B Minor Mass Handel Serse Monteverdi L'Incoronazione di Popper. Faber 1966 Purcell Dido and Aeneas BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: Abraham G History of Music in Sound, Vols IV, V and VI, OUP 1953-4 Bukofzer M Music in the Baroque Era, Dent 1948 Davison A T & Apel W Historical Anthology of Music, Vols. 1 & II, Hary UP 1959 Harman & Mellers Man and his Music, Barrie & Rockllff 1962 Lang P H Music in Western Civilization, Norton 1941 or Dent 1965 Recommended for reference: Anthony J R French Baroque Music, Batsford 1974 Arnold D Monteverdi. Dent 1963 Blume F Protestant Church Music, Gollancz 1975 Blume F Renaissance and Baroque Music, Norton 1967 Brown H M Music in the Renaissance. Prentice-Hall 1976 Burney C Music, Men and Letters in France and Italy 1770, Eulenburg Books 1974 Cronin V The Flowering of the Renaissance, Collins 1969 Dart T The Interpretation of Music, 4th ed Hutchinson 1967 Dent E J Alessandro Scarlatti, Arnold 1962 Geiringer K The Bach Family, Allen & Unwin 1954 Grout D J A A Short History of Opera, Columbia UP 1963 Hutchings A J B The Baroque Concerto, Faber & Faber 1961 Lang P H George Frederick Handel, Faber & Faber 1966 Moser H J M Heinrich Sch йtz, Faber & Faber 1967 Newman W S The Sonata in the Baroque Era, Chapel Hill U of North Carolina 1959 O'Brien G The Golden Age of Italian Music, Jarrolds 1948 O'Brien G The Golden Age of German Music, Jarrolds 1953 Roche J The Madrigal, Hutchinson 1972 Sadie S Handel, Calder 1962 Schweitzer A J S Bach, 2 vols, Black 1935 Selfridge-Field E Venetian Instrumental Music from Gabrieli to Vivaldi, Blackwell 1975 Spink I English Song: Dowland to Purcell, Batsford 1974 Terry C S The Music of Bach, OUP 1933 Terry C S Bach's Orchestra, OUP 1932 Westrup J A ed The New Oxford History of Music, Vols IV & V, OUP 1968-1975 Westrup J A Purcell, Dent 1947 ASSESSMENT Two three-hour papers together with two assignments. The weighting allotted to the different forms of assessment will be announced on notice-boards at the beginning of the academic year. 396 Music

740-016 MUSIC PERFORMANCE 1A A course consisting partly of group and partly of individual teaching. Individual lessons will be of 45 minutes and classes approximately 2 hours (average of one hour per week). Students will attend the same classes as Music Performance 1 students enrolled in the Faculty of Music. Except with the special permission of the chairman of department, students must have reached H.S.C. or an equivalent level in the instrument concerned to enrol in the subject. The subject will consist of technical work, two studies and a 20 minute recital programme containing at least two pieces in contrasting styles. There will be a study of the development of the instrument.

ASSESSMENT (1) A 25-minute practical test during the November examination period. The Dean will set a piece or song one month prior to the examinations. The programme is to be submitted not later than 48 hours before the assessment on a form obtainable from the faculty office. The programme must contain at least two works in contrasting styles. (2) A 45-minute written test during the November examination period on the development of the instrument. This test must be passed before a result can be obtained in the subject but it will not be counted in the result. (3) Satisfactory attendance at lessons and classes. The weighting allotted to the various forms of assessment will be announced on notice-boards at the beginning of the academic year.

740-021 MUSIC 2В (CLASSICAL AND ROMANTIC MUSIC) (PASS)

A course of two lectures and one tutorial each week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS A survey of European music from C. 1760 to c. 1914. Illustrated with an analytical study of set works. The course will examine the flowering of the classical symphony in the second half of the eighteenth century and its expansions and modifications throughout the period to c. 1914; the development of the opera from Gluck and Mozart through the German, Italian and French styles of the nineteenth century, the growth of sacred music outside an ecclesiastical setting, and the composition of vocal and instrumental works of a smaller nature during the period.

ASSIGNMENTS Two essay assignments will be set during the year.

PRESCRIBED SCORES The editions specified are those that will be used by the lecturer. Students should acquire the full rather than the vocal score. Beethoven String Quartet in A minor, Op 132, Dover or Kalmus Beethoven Symphony no 3 in E flat, the Eroica, Eulenburg Berlioz Symphony, Romeo et Juliette, Eulenburg Brahms Ein deutsches Requiem, Eulenburg Elgar The Dream of Gerontius, Novella Gluck Orfeo Haydn Mass in D minor, the Nelson, Eulenburg

397 Faculty of Arts

Haydn Symphony no 102 in B flat, Eulenburg Liszt A Faust Symphony, Eulenburg Mahler Symphony no 5 in C sharp minor, Kalmus Mozart The Marriage of Figaro. Eulenburg or Kalmus Mozart Piano Concerto in C, К467, Kalmus Schubert String Quintet in C, D956, Lea Schubert Wanderer Fantasia for Piano, D760, Lea Schumann Symphony no 3 in E flat, the Rhenish, Eulenburg Strauss Ein Heldenleben, Eulenburg Verdi Otello, International full score or Schirmer vocal score Wagner Tristan und Isolde, Dover Weber Der Freischütz, Eulenburg BOOKS Abraham G A Hundred Years of Music, Methuen or Duckworth 1964 Abraham G Slavonic and Romantic Music, Faber 1968 Andrews H K The Oxford Harmony, vol 2 OUP paperback Arnold D and Fortune N The Beethoven Companion, Faber paperback 1973 Blume F Classic and Romantic Music: a Comprehensive Survey, Faber 1972 Brown M J E Schubert: a Critical Biography, Macmillan 1961 Cooke D The Language of Music, OUP paperback 1962 del Mar N Richard Strauss: a Critical Commentary on his Life and Works, 3 vols Barrie & Rockcliff 1962-72 Dent E J Mozart's Operas, OUP paperback 1962 Donington R Wagner's "Ring" and its Symbols, 3rd ed Faber paperback 1974 Einstein A Gluck, Master Musicians 1964 Einstein A Music in the Romantic Era, Dent 1947 Forbes E ed Thayer's "Life of Beethoven", 1-vol ed Princeton UP paperback 1970 Geiringer K Brahms: his Life and Work, 2nd ed Allen & Unwin 1948 Grout D J A History of Western Music, rev ed Dent 1973 Grout D J A Short History of Opera, 2nd 1-vol ed, Columbia UP 1965 Howard P Gluck and the Birth of Modern Opera, Rockcliff 1963 Hutchings A A Companion to Mozart's Piano Concertos, OUP 1950 Kennedy M Mahler, Dent 1974 Kennedy M Portrait of Elgar, OUP paperback 1974 Kerman J Opera as Drama, Vintage paperback 1958 Kerman J The Beethoven Quartets, OUP 1967 Landon H C Robbins The Symphonies of Joseph Haydn, Barrie & Rockcliff 1955 supplement 1961 Landon H C Robbins and Mitchell D The Mozart Companion, Barrie & Rockcliff paperback 1956 Lang P H Music in Western Civilization, Dent 1942 Longyear R M Nineteenth Century Romanticism in Music, Prentice-Hall 1969 Martin G Verdi: his Music, Life and Times, Macmillan 1965 Palmer C Impressionism in Music, Hutchinson paperback 1973 Primmer B The Berlioz Style, OUP 1973 Rosen C The Classical Style, Faber paperback 1973 Rosen C schoenberg, Fontana 1975 Stein J Richard Wegner and the Synthesis of the Arts, Wayne State UP 1960

398 Music

Walker A ed Franz Liszt: the Man and his Music, Barrie & Jenkins 1970 Walker A ed Robert Schumann: the Man and his Music, Barrie & Jenkins, 1972 Warrack J Carl Maria von Weber, 2nd ed Cambridge 1977 Watson D Bruckner, Dent 1975 Young P M Elgar 0 M, 2nd ed London 1973 Zuckerman E The First Hundred Years of Wagner's "Tristan", Colum- bia UP 1964 ASSESSMENT Two 3-hour papers and the two assignments.

740-031 MUSIC 3C A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week, with assignments, throughout the year. SYLLABUS (a) European music from earliest times to A.D. 1600. (b) Post-romantic music to the present day.

ASSIGNMENTS Two assignments will be given during the year, one in each part of the course. These assignments will be taken into consideration when assessing examination results. A programme of listening assignments and other tutorial projects will be set at the commencement of the year. BOOKS (for section (a) of the syllabus) Prescribed textbooks: Abraham G The History of Music in Sound, vols I Il Ill and IV, OUP 1953 Davison A T and Apel W Historical Anthology of Music, vol I, Harv UP 1959 Harman A and Mellers W Man and his Music, Barrie & Rockliff 1962 Lang P Music in Western Civilization, Norton 1941 or Dent 1963 Strunk 0 Source Readings in Music History, Faber 1952 Recommended for reference: Apel W Gregorian Chant, Burnes and Oates 1958 Bowra M Medieval Love-Song, ULP 1961 Brown H M Music in the Renaissance, Prentice-Hall 1976 Bukofzer M Studies in Medieval and Renaissance Music, Dent 1951 Dart T The Interpretation of Music, 4th ed Hutchinson 1967 De Rougemont D Passion and Society, Faber 1956 Dronke P The Medieval Lyric, Hutchinson 1968 Grout D J A History of Western Music, Norton 1960 Harrison F L Music in Medieval Britain, Routledge & Kegan Paul 1958 Marrou H I A History of Education in Antiquity, Sheed & Ward 1956 Reese G Music in the Middle Ages, Norton 1940 Reese G Music In the Renaissance, Dent 1954 Sachs C The Rise of Music in the Ancient World, Norton 1943 Stevens J Music and Poetry in the Early Tudor Court, Methuen 1961 Wellesz E ed The New Oxford History of Music, vols l-IV, OUP Wellesz E Eastern Elements in Western Chant, Munksgaard 1967 Werner E The Sacred Bridge, Dobson 1959

399 Faculty of Arts

PRESCRIBED SCORES (for section (b) of the syllabus) Any readily available editions of the following works may be used: Debussy Préludes for Piano, Books 1 and II Debussy Prélude rł l'agrès midi d'un faune Debussy La Mer Debussy Jeux Debussy Pelléas et MéliSande Schoenberg Chamber Symphony, Op. 9 Schoenberg Five Pieces for Orchestra, Op. 16 Schoenberg Six Little Piano Pieces, Op. 19 Schoenberg Pierrot Lunaire, Op. 21 Schoenberg String Quartet No. 4, Op. 37 Berg Concerto for Violin and Orchestra Berg Wozzeck Stravinsky Petrushka Stravinsky The Rite of Spring Stravinsky Oedipus Rex Stravinsky Symphony of Psalms Stravinsky Symphony in Three Movements Bartok Music for Strings, Percussion and Celeste Bartok Concerto for Orchestra Bartok String Quartet No. 4

BOOKS (for section (b) of the syllabus) Prescribed textbooks: Abraham G The History of Music in Sound, vol X, OUP 1953 Austin W Music in the Twentieth Century, Norton 1966 Harman A and Mellers W Man and his Music, Barrie & Rockcliff 1962 Lang P Music in Western Civilization, Norton 1941 or Dent 1963

Recommended for reference: Abraham G A Hundred Years of Music, Duckworth 1949 Bacharach A L British Music of Our 're, Penguin 1951 Cooper M French Music, OUP 1951 Copland A Our New Music, Whittlesey House 1941 Ewen D The Book of Modern Composers, Knopf 1950 Grout D J A History of Western Music, Norton 1960 Hartog H European Music in the Twentieth Century, Routledge & Kegan Paul 1957 Hindemith P A Composer's World, Harvard UP 1952 Lambert C Music Hof, Faber & Faber 1937 Leibowitz R Schoenberg and his School, Da Capo 1970 Lockspeiser E Debussy, Dent 1951 Lockspeiser E Debussy, His Life and Mind, 2 vols, Cassell 1962 and 1965 Machlis J Introduction to Contemporary Music, Dent 1963 Mellers W Music and Society, Dobson 1946 Mellers W Studies in Contemporary Music, Dobson 1947 Myers R Music in the Modern World, Arnold 1948 Myers R Ravel: Life and Works, Duckworth 1960 Salazar A Music in Our Time, Godley Head 1948 Stevens H The Life and Music of Bela Bartok, OUP 1964 Vlad R Stravinsky, OUP 1960 400 Music

White E W Stravinsky: The Composer and his Works, Faber & Faber 1966 ASSESSMENT Two 3-hour papers and assignments. The weighting allotted to the various forms of assessment will be announced on notice-boards at the beginning of the academic year.

HONOURS DEGREE (Combined Honours Course) (see also pp. 519 ff.)

740-026 MUSIC 2В (Combined Honours Course) CLASSICAL AND ROMANTIC MUSIC The requirements for Music 2B (Ions) are as specified for the Music 2В (Pass) course, with the addition of a weekly 1-hour seminar devoted principally to the study of the following additional prescribed works. PRESCRIBED SCORES Beethoven Fidelio, Eulenburg Berlioz Les Troyens, Eulenburg Elgar Symphony no 2 in E flat, Novelli Mahler Des Lied von der Erde, Universal Schoenberg First Chamber Symphony, Universal Wagner Die Walküre, Eulenburg ASSIGNMENTS Students will be required to submit two assignments during the year. ASSESSMENT Honours students will be required to sit for the two Pass papers. In addition, a further three hour paper will be set on the works studied in the Honours seminar.

740-036 MUSIC ЭC (Combined Honours Course) The course prescribed for Music ЭC Ions. is as specified in the details of subjects for Music ЭC Pass course with the addition of a weekly one hour seminar in Palaeography. In this part of the course, students will be required to study the various notational systems evolved for polyphonic music from the 10th to the end of the 17th centuries as well as various types of lute and keyboard tablatures.

PRESCRIBED BOOKS Ape' W The notation of polyphonic music 900-1600, Rev 4th ed with commentary, The Mediaeval Academy of America, Cambr. Mass, 1953 Strunk 0 Source readings in music history, W Norton, N.Y. 1950 In addition, the department will supply texts for transcription. ASSESSMENT There will be no formal examination in this part of the course, but students will be required to submit a folio of transcriptions in the last week of the third term upon which their assessment will be based. 401 Faculty of Arts

740-046 MUSIC 4D (Combined Honours Course)

A course of one 2-hour seminar and one 2-hour creative workshop each week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS A survey of contemporary music theory, through study of selected compositions since 1950 and practical work in the creative workshop.

PRESCRIBED SCORES Berio Sequenza V Boulez Structures la Cage Music of Changes Feldman In Search of an Orchestration leale Clouds now and then Messiaen Chronochromie Penderecki Sonata for Violoncello and Orchestra Sculthorpe Sun Music I Stockhausen Gruppen Xenakis Pithoprakta

BOOKS Prescribed textbook: Brindle R S The New Music, OUP 1975 Recommended for reference: Adorno T Philosophy of Modern Music, Sheed & Ward 1973 Appleton J H The Development and Practice of Electronic Music, Prentice-Hall New Jersey 1975 Cope D New Directions in Music, W Brown Iowa 1971 Cott J Stockhausen, Simon & Schuster 1973 Covell R Australia's Music, Sun Books Aust 1967 Howe Jr H S Electronic Music Synthesis, W W Norton NY 1975 Karkoshga Notations and New Music, Universal London 1971 Meyer L Music the Arts & Ideas, Chicago 1967 Murdoch J Australia's Contemporary Composers, Macmillan leIb 1972 Peyser J The New Music, Decotorte Press NY 1970 Poggioli R The Theory of Avant-Garde, Harvard 1973 Russcol H The Liberation of Sound, Prentice-Hall 1972 Searle G From Deserts the Prophets Come, Melbourne 1973 Strange A Electronic Music, Systems, Techniques and Controls, W Brown Iowa 1971 Worner, Stockhausen — Life and Work, Faber London 1973 Xenakis I Formalized Music, Indiana UP 1971

Periodicals: Perspectives of New Music, Princeton Journal of Music Theory, Yale Source, Davis die Reihe, Universal Edition and Theodore Presser & Co.

WRITTEN WORK Students are required to prepare two written papers (3,000 to 4,000 words) and up to three seminar papers. 402 Music

ASSESSMENT Assessment is based on performance in seminars and all written material. The weighting allotted to the various forms of assessment will be announced on notice-boards at the beginning of the academic year.

740-047 Music 4E (RESEARCH METHOD) (Combined Honours Course) A weekly 2-hour seminar throughout the year. SYLLABUS A study of the theory and method of historical musicology. BOOKS General reading: Allen W D Philosophies of Music History, Dover Collingwood R G The Idea of History, OUP • Donington R The Interpretation of Early Music, Faber Esdaile A A Student's Manual of Bibliography, Allen & Unwin Gardiner P Theories of History, Free Press Humphries C & Smith W C Music Publishing in the British Isles, Cas- sell & Co. Riemann H History of Music Theory, transi R H Haggh, Univ of Nebraska Spiess L B Historical Musicology, Inst of Mediaeval Music 'Strunk 0 Soигcе Readings in Music History, Norton Walsh W H An Introduction to Philosophy of History, Hutchinson's University Library Other reading will be specified by the lecturer. ASSESSMENT (i) Students will be required to submit a thesis of approximately 8,000 words; (ii) a folio of editing assignments; (iii) an open book examination of not more than 3 hours' duration. Students will also be required to read two papers in class during the year. N.B. For Combined Honours Arts students, the dissertation may be on a topic mutually acceptable to both departments concerned or, alternatively, of not more than 5,000 words, where a separate thesis Is required in the other discipline.

MASTER OF ARTS 740-611 SCHOOL OF MUSIC Candidates are required to prepare a thesis on a subject approved by the chairman of the department. They will work under the supervision of a member of the department, to whom they should report regularly upon the progress of their work. The thesis should normally be submitted for examination within one year from the commencement of candidature for MA by full-time candidates and within four years by part-time candidates. Except in special circumstances and with the permission of the faculty no thesis or course work will be examined unless the candidate presents for examination within four years from the commencement of his candidature, or, in the event of his having been granted leave of absence for

403 Faculty of Arts

the maximum period of one year, within five years from the commencement of his candidature.

DEPARTMENT OF PHILOSOPHY Chairman of Department and Reader: Fr J. E. D'ARCY, D.Phil. (Oxon.), Ph.D. (Greg.), M.A. Boyce Gibson Professor of Philosophy: Professor L. GODDARD, BPhil. (Oxon.), M.A. (St. Andrews) Philosophy is a controversial subject. That is to say, hardly any philosophical question, outside formal logic, has a "correct" answer, agreed on by all the qualified experts. This does not mean that in philosophy anything goes. There are some very good answers as well as some fairly good ones, some poor ones and some quite incompetent ones. A good answer is one that is backed up by well-ordered and clear arguments — indeed an answer without supporting argument is worthless and frequently barely intelligible. Moreover an answer, if it is to have any chance of being a contribution to the subject, must be informed — must take account of the arguments advanced and of the criticisms and distinctions made by others who have thought deeply about the same questions. Thus in learning philosophy you have to learn how to argue for or against philosophical opinions, and you have to become familiar with some of the arguments that have been advanced on certain topics in the past. The latter, however, involves no great effort of memorization: the difficulty is one of understanding rather than of remembering. Once you have really understood an argument you are not very likely to forget it. Broadly speaking, you learn in lectures what are the main arguments that have been advanced on a certain topic or at a certain period in the over two-thousand-year-long history of the subject; and in tutorials and written work you acquire by practice the skill of advancing cogent and informed arguments of your own. It is very difficult to give a short and helpful explanation of what a philosophical question is, and how it differs from other sorts of questions. Perhaps the best idea is to give a few examples (although the handful that follow will scarcely give an adequate idea of the range of different topics that philosophers have taken an interest in). A problem about the minds of other people Suppose that everything that looks red to you has always looked green to Smith, and vice versa. He will nevertheless describe the colours of things with the same words that you use. He will have learnt as a child that "red" is the name for the green colour he sees on looking at letter- boxes, stop lights and Russian flags, so he will call all such things "rед". Similarly he will have learnt to apply "green" to the red colour he sees in spring grass. So he will talk just as you do. He will also behave as you do, e.g. he will stop at the red traffic-lights. There seems to be no way of telling that Smith is or is not perceiving in the way supposed. But in that case how do we know that such differences in experiencing are not widespread in the community? A problem of free will With advances in scientific knowledge we are more and more able to predict what people will do. But if we could always predict exactly what they would do, surely they would not have free will and so could not justly be praised or blamed for their actions. Yet surely you are 404 Philosophy

sometimes free to choose one course of action rather than another? Surely you can be justly praised or bIamed for what you do? A problem about morality You know that some actions are right and some wrong. But what is it to say that an action Is right or wrong? Is it to state a special sort of fact about the action? Is it to say how you feel about the action? is it to report an arbitrary convention adopted by a particular human society? Or what? A problem about theology Can the existence of God be proved? What sort of evidence would count for or against a theological statement? A problem about scientific method The laws which scientists state are supposed to hold for all time. But how do they know that the laws they now state will hold in the future? On the basis of past experience? But they are justified in going from "this always has happened" to "this always will happen" only if they can be sure the future will be like the past. And how do they know that In future the future will be like the past? All we know is that in the past the future has (so far) been like the past. A problem about mathematics Chemists study substances of various kinds, geologists study rocks, botanists plants, and so on. What do mathematicians study? Numbers? But what are they? "What is an elephant?" is an easy question: you can point to an elephant or describe one. "What is a number?" is not so easy. Nor is it a mathematical question. Mathematicians do not study this sort of question about numbers.

COURSES OFFERED BY THE PHILOSOPHY DEPARTMENT For complete and up-to-date details of all courses in Philosophy students should consult the pamphlet Department of Philosophy—Information About Courses-1978. This publication will be available from the departmental secretariat at the beginning of the December re-enrolment period. First year Philosophy 1A, Philosophy 1 B and Philosophy 1 C are alternative first year courses. In 1978 students may, if they wish, enrol for both Philo- sophy 1A or 1 C and Philosophy 18; however, no student may receive credit for both Philosophy 1A and Philosophy 1C (see p. 44 above). Each of the alternative courses consists of two lectures and one tutorial per week, and each can be used as the basis for a Philosophy major. 161-101 Philosophy 1A 161-102 Philosophy 18 161-103 Philosophy 1 C Second year (ordinary degree)' (Each course consists of two lectures and one tutorial per week.) 161-200 Philosophy 2C (Contemporary European Philosophy) 161-201 Philosophy 20 (Political and Social Philosophy) 161-202 Philosophy 2E (Ethics)

• For details of honours courses In Philosophy see below, pp. 421 ff. 405 Faculty of Arts

161-203 Philosophy 2F (Formal Logic) 161-204 Philosophy 2 G (Greek Philosophy) (available in 1978; will not be offered in 1979) 161-205 Philosophy 2H (Philosophy of Psychology) 161-206 Philosophy 2J (Philosophy of Religion) 161-207 Philosophy 2K (Aesthetics) (not available in 1978; will be offered in 1979) 161-208 Philosophy 2L (Epistemology, Logic and Methodology) 161-209 Philosophy 2M (Modern Philosophy) 161-210 Philosophy 2N (Recent Philosophy) 161-213 Philosophy 2Q (Medieval Philosophy) (available in 1978; will not be offered in 1979)

Third year (ordinary degree)

Each third-year subject consists, in effect, of the corresponding second- year subject with the additional requirement of a 3,000 word essay, or its equivalent, on a prescribed topic in that subject. 1 61 -300 Philosophy 3C (Contemporary Philosophyt) 161-301 Philosophy 3D (Political and Social Philosophy)- ) 161-302 Philosophy 3E (Ethicst) 161-303 Philosophy 3F (Formal Logict) 161-304 Philosophy 3G (Greek Philosophyt) (available in 1978; will not be offered in 1979) 161-305 Philosophy 3H (Philosophy of Psychologyt) 161-305 Philosophy 3J (Philosophy of Religiont) 161-307 Philosophy 3K (Aestheticst) (not available in 1978; will be offered in 1979) 161-308 Philosophy 3L (E.L.M.t) 1 61 -309 Philosophy 3M (Modern Philosophyt) 161-310 Philosophy 3N (Recent Philosophyt) 161-313 Philosophy 3Q (Medieval Philosophyt) (available in 1978; will not be offered in 1979)

RESTRICTED COMBINATIONS

Subjects for the ordinary degree labelled with the same letter of the alphabet have a common ingredient, and students may therefore only do one of them, e.g. they may do only one of 2C or Э C; only one of 2E or 3E; and so on.

PREREQUISITES

(a) The prerequisite for Philosophy 2D is either one philosophy subject, or two Political Science subjects, or a Diploma of Social Studies. (b) The prerequisite for Philosophy 2F and for Philosophy 2L is either one philosophy subject or any two university subjects. (c) The prerequisite for Philosophy 2H is one philosophy subject and Psychology 1 or Behavioural Studies 1. (d) The prerequisite for the remaining second-year philosophy subjects is one philosophy subject. (e) The prerequisite for any third-year subject is any two philosophy subjects.

t & 3,000 word essay or equivalent. 406 Philosophy

161-101 PHILOSOPHY 1A Professor L. Goddard, Dr V. I. Rice, Dr G. D. Marshall

A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year. Each tutor will set two written assignments (two essays, two class papers, or one of each).

SYLLABUS An introduction to philosophy by way of the discussion of certain classi- ca1 philosophical themes to do with man's place in Nature. In 1978 the themes to be discussed will include: the mind/body problem; perception; values and human freedom. The course will include a brief introduction to basic ideas in the study of argument and reasoning. Term 1: Mind/Body: The nature of mind and the relation of the mental to the physical have posed fundamental problems for modern philosophy. This part of the course will investigate some of these problems, and will include the introduction to logic mentioned above. Additional text: Goddard L Philosophical Problems, Scottish Academic Press 1977

Term 2: Perception: (a) a study of the classical theories of perception; (b) further reflections on the problems connected with perception and the development of an adequate theory to deal with them.

Term 3: Values and Human Freedom: A discussion of human action and action towards other persons in an Impersonal, physical world.

B 00 КЅ Prescribed textbook: Tillman Berofsky & O'Connor eds Introductory Philosophy, Harper & Row 1967

EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper, covering the whole course. Written work and tests, or a combination of both as approved by the department, may be required during the year as an alternative or in addition to, or as a total or partial substitution for, this paper.

161-102 PHILOSOPHY 1B (PHILOSOPHY AND LAW)

Professor L. Goddard, Fr E. D'Arcy, Dr B. Scaгlett, Mr D. L. Gunner A course of two lectures and one tutorial a week throughout the year. Each tutor will set two written assignments (two essays, two class papers, or one of each). SYLLABUS An introduction to philosophy by way of the discussion of philosophical problems to do with human freedom and the reality of man as a thinking, social being. In 1978 the themes to be discussed will include: determinism; political philosophy; psychological concepts and the nature of the person. The course will include a brief introduction to basic ideas in the study of argument and reasoning.

407 Faculty of Arts

The course is designed for Arts students generally and will not presuppose any specialist knowledge of the Law. First year Law students should also find the course of particular interest. Term 1: Political Philosophy: the rights of individual freedom in relation to the demands of social organization and political authority; the origin of the state, its nature, and the powers it needs if it is to pursue effectively its appointed ends, purposes and values. The introduction to logic mentioned above will be given during this term. Term 2: Determinism: (1) the consequences of determinism for the explanation of human action and for morality, both of which are often said to require freewill; (2) arguments for and against determinism and freedom. Additional texts: Mill J S On Liberty, OUP 1974 Devlin P The Enforcement of Morals, OUP 1965 Term 3: Psychological Concepts and the Nature of the Person. Additional texts: Freud S Two Short Accounts of Psycho-Analysis, Pelican Teichman J The Mind end the Soul, RKP 1974 BOOKS Prescribed textbook: Tillman Berofsky & O'Connor eds Introductory Philosophy, Harper & Row 1967

EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper, covering the whole course. Written work and tests, or a combination of both as approved by the department, may be required during the year as an alternative, or in addition to, or as a total or partial substitution for, this paper.

161-103 PHILOSOPHY 1C (PHILOSOPHY AND POLITICS) Professor L. Goddard, Dr V. I. Rice, Mr D. Tucker A course of two lectures and one tutorial a week throughout the year. Each tutor will set two written assignments (two essays, two class papers, or one of each). SYLLABUS This is a course made up of two units which Introduce students both to certain classical philosophical themes to do with man's place in Nature and to certain problems of political theory that have philosophical In- gredients. In 1978 the first unit of the course will be identical with the first half of Philosophy 1A, and will contain: Term 1: Mind/Body. The nature of mind and the relation of the mental to the physical have posed fundamental problems for modern philosophy. This part of the course will investigate some of those problems. A brief introduction to basic ideas in the study of argument and reasoning will be given during the term. 408 Philosophy

Additional text: Goddard L Philosophical Problems, Scottish Academic Press 1977 Term 2: Perception. A study of the classical theories of perception. The second unit of the course will be identical with the second half of Politics 1B', and will be concerned with problems in liberal and democratic theory, especially as these relate to the idea of a citizen's rights. Discussion will focus on such rights as the citizen's right to disobey the law, to privacy and to equal treatment. • For details, see Political Science section. Books Tillman Berofsky & O'Connor eds Introductory Philosophy, Harper & Row 1967 Dworkin R Taking Rights Seriously, Duckworth 1977 Marshall G Constitutional Theory, Clarendon 1971 EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper, covering the whole course. Written work and tests, or a combination of both as approved by the department, may be required during the year as an alternative to, or in addition to, or as a total or partial substitution for, this paper.

161-200 PHILOSOPHY 2C PASS (CONTEMPORARY EUROPEAN PHILOSOPHY)

Ms Brenda Judge A grade two subject (not to constitute the third part of a major). It consists of two lectures and one tutorial a week throughout the year. Students are required to write two essays and one class paper in the course of the year. SYLLABUS This course will be devoted to a study of various treatments of "consciousness" by phenomenological and existentialist philosophers. These treatments will be examined critically, in comparison—when appropriate —with treatments of consciousness in the British analytical tradition. By means of this approach the contrasting ways in which it is possible for us to think of ourselves as knowing subjects in relation to the world will be explored. Terms 1 and 2: Consciousness and its treatment by phenomenologists and structuralists. (i) an introduction to phenomenology and an examination of some of the basic concepts of Husserl, the first major phenomenologist; (ii) a brief study of Heidegger; (iii) the philosophy of Sartre and Merleau-Ponty; (iv) "Structuralism". This term refers to a loosely-connected group of philosophers who have in common a tendency to seek the explanation for human behaviour, thinking, perception, etc. by structures and phenomena which are "below the surface". In different ways, this has been done by our three main subjects of study; Levi-Strauss, Piaget and

409 Faculty of Arts

Foucault. And this approach is also to be found in the thinkers who are acknowledged to be the precursors of the movement; Saussure, Marx and Freud. Term 3: Some of the implications of phenomenological and existentialist conceptions of consciousness in some other areas of philosophy. Possible areas to be investigated here are the philosophy of the emotions, social and ethical philosophy. The approach in this course will be a critical one. Both the particular contributions and the weaknesses of some modern European philosophers will be examined. One aim of the course will be to put the contribution of the European phenomenological tradition into perspective in the history of philosophical treatments of consciousness in the conviction that European philosophers have an important contribution to make to modern philosophy of mind.

ВООКS: Preliminary reading: Solomon R C ed Phenomenology and Existentialism, Introduction Schmitt R "Phenomenology" in The Encyclopedia of Philosophy ed Paul Edwards Кockelmans J J ed Phenomenology; the philosophy of Edmund Husserl and its interpretation (Pt 1 Ch 1 "What is phenomenology?") Natanson M ed Essays in Phenomenology (Introduction)

Reading list: •Schmitt R "Phenomenology" in The Encyclopedia of Philosophy ed Paul Edwards •Solomon R C ed Phenomenology and Existentialism Кockelmans J J A First Introduction of Husserl's Phenomenology Кockelmans J J ed Phenomenology; the philosophy of Edmund Husserl and its interpretation Husserl E "Phenomenology" in Encyclopedia Britannica 14th ed Manser A Sartre Sartre J-P The Transcendence of the Ego • Sartre J-P The Psychology of Imagination •Meneau-Ponty M Phenomenology of Perception •Charlesworth M "Structuralism and structuralists" (ABC lectures) • DeGeorge R & F The Structuralists from Marx to Levi-Strauss Levi-Strauss C The Savage Mind •Piaget J Structuralism Piaget J The Principles of Genetic Epistemology Furth H G Piaget and Knowledge Foucault M The Order of Things •Sartre J-P Sketch for a Theory of the Emotions Note: Starred items are the major texts.

EXAMINATION

One 3-hour examination paper. Written work and tests or a combination of both as approved by the department may be required during the year as an alternative, or in addition to, or as a total or partial substitution for, this paper.

410 Philosophy

161-201 PHILOSOPHY 2D PASS (POLITICAL & SOCIAL PHILOSOPHY) Fr E. D'Аrсу A grade two subject (not to constitute the third part of a major). It is divided into two units.

UNIT 1. 161-021 CLASSICAL PHILOSOPHICAL TEXTS IN SOCIAL THEORY A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week for the first half of the year.

SYLLABUS A study of eight texts which are forerunners of classical social theory, with particular attention to (1) versions of Social Contract theory, (2) attitudes to Social Justice & Human Rights, and (3) the origins of "Historicist" political philosophies. BOOKS Prescribed texts: 'Aristotle The Politics, Penguin •Bigongiari D ed Political Ideas of St. Thomas Aquinas, Hafner paperback •Hegel G W F Philosophy of Right, Oxford paperback Hobbes Thomas Leviathan, Everyman •Locke Hume Rousseau Social Contract, Oxford paperback Marx Karl Early Texts of Karl Marx, ed D McLellan, Blackwell paperback

UNIT 2. 161-023 JUSTICE AND SOCIAL STRUCTURES A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week for the second half of the year.

SYLLABUS A study of the contemporary debate about the principles which must govern the basic structures of a society if it is to be just: with particular reference to Equality, Liberty and Rights.

BOOKS Preliminary reading: Bedau H ed Justice and Equality, Prentice-Hall 1971 Prescribed reading: Barry B The Liberal Theory of Justice, OUP 1973 Daniels N ed Reading Rawls, Blackwell 1974 •Nozick R Anarchy, Stete and Utopia, Blackwell 1974 •Rawls J A A Theory of Justice, OUP 1973

EXAMINATION One 3-hour examination paper. Written work and tests or a combination of both as approved by the department may be required during the year as an alternative, or in addition to, or as a total or partial substitution for, this paper.

411 Faculty of Arts

161-202 PHILOSOPHY 2E PASS (ETHICS) Mr D. L. Gunner A grade two subject (not to constitute the third part of a major). It consists of two lectures and one tutorial class per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS Greek beliefs and values before Christianity. The cult of reason within Christianity. Nietszche's appraisal of Christianity and the Greek tradition. The eighteenth century mechanist enlightenment. Romantic and existentialist protest. The cult of the will. British utilitarianism. Some of the intellectual consequences of Darwin, Marx and Freud. Social movements under world pictures. Belief and action. Wittgenstein and others on fact and value. The cult of analysis in the twentieth century. What can we say about the meaninglessness, or meaningfulness, of life? Judge- ment. BOOKS Prescribed texts: •Aristotle Nichomechean Ethics, Penguin Classics •Foot, Philippa ed Theories of Ethics, OUP Hare R M Freedom and Reason, OUP Hare R M Language of Morals, OUP Hume David A Treatise of Human Nature, OUP Kant I Groundwork of the Metaphysic of Morals (One useful edition of this work of Kant's is that of H J Paton entitled The Moral Law Hutchinson.) •Moore G E Principia Ethica, Cambridge paperback Nietszche The Birth of Tragedy and the Genealogy of Morals, Anchor Plato The Republic, Penguin Classics EXAMINATION One 3-hour examination paper. Written work and tests or a combination of both as approved by the department may be required during the year as an alternative, or in addition to, or as a total or partial substitution for, this paper. 161-203 PHILOSOPHY 2F PASS (FORMAL LOGIC) Dr B. M. Taylor A grade two subject (not to constitute the third part of a major). A course in deductive logic, which is built from two units. No mathematical or philosophical knowledge is presupposed. Students will be introduced to various logical symbolisms, and will be expected to acquire facility in manipulating them.

UNIT 1. 161-281 RUDIMENTS OF SYMBOLIC LOGIC 1 This unit comprises approximately 24 lectures and 12 practice classe. SYLLABUS An elementary development of the classical systems of modern logic, viz the sentential and lower predicate calculus. In particular, the following topics will be dealt with: the intuitive basic of logic; deductive and formal validity of arguments; the syntax of the sentential calculus (SC); the semantics of SC; truth-tables for SC; proof-theory for SC via the method of proof-trees; the Consistency and Completeness Theorems for SC; the 412 Philosophy

syntax of the Lower Predicate Calculus (LPC); proof-theory for LPC via the method of proof-trees; the semantics of LPC; the Consistency Theorem for LPC. BOOKS The course will be conducted by means of lecture notes to be issued by the department. Recommended for reference is: Jeffrey R C Formal Logic: Its Scope and Limits, McGraw-Hill 1967 EXAMINATION There will be an examination at the conclusion of this unit consisting of one 3-hour paper.

UNIT 2. 161-382 RUDIMENTS of SYMBOLIC LOGIC 2 This unit comprises approximately 24 lectures and 12 practice classes. SYLLABUS An extension of the topics of unit one, involving in particular a treatment of the following themes: the Completeness Theorem for LPC; adequate sets of connectives; normal form theorems; alternative approaches to the proof-theory of LPC (axiomatic and natural deduction techniques, and their relation to the method of proof-trees); alternative approaches to the semantics of LPC; extensions of LPC (functors, identity, definite descriptions); first order languages and theories. BOOKS Lecture notes will be issued by the department. The following works will be found useful for reference on various topics in the course: Hunter G Metalogic, Macmillan Kleene S C Mathematical Logic, Wiley Lemon E J Beginning Logic, Nelson Mendelson E Introduction to Mathematical Logic, van Nostrand Smullyan R First-Order Logic, Springer-Verlag EXAMINATION One 3-hour examination paper. Written work and tests or a combination of both as approved by the department may be required during the year as an alternative, or in addition to, or as a total or partial substitution for this paper.

161-204 PHILOSOPHY 2G PASS (GREEK PHILOSOPHY) (This subject will be available in 1978, but will not be offered in 1979) Dr E. L. Burge, Fr E. D'Arcy, Dr B. F. Scarlett A grade two subject (not to constitute the third part of a major). There are two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year. Students are required to write one essay and one class paper In the course of the year. SYLLABUS A study of Plato's and Aristotle's works selected to show some of their distinctive contributions in metaphysics, philosophical psychology, ethics and related areas.

413 Faculty of Arts

BOOKS Introductory reading: Burnet J Greek Philosophy from Thales to Plato, Macmillan Texts: Plato Collected Dialogues, eds E Hamilton & H. Cairns Pantheon Aristotle De Anima, tr D W Hamlyn Clarendon 1968 Aristotle The Nichomachean Ethics, tr D Ross Oxford World Classics For further references consult the Philosophy notice-board.

EXAMINATION One 3-hour examination paper.

161-205 PHILOSOPHY 2H PASS (PHILOSOPHY OF PSYCHOLOGY)

(The presentation of this course in 1978 will depend on availability of staff) Ms Brenda Judge and others A grade two subject (not to constitute the third part of a major) for which the formal prerequisites will be a Philosophy 1 subject or some other philosophy subject AND Psychology 1 or Behavioural Studies 1. There will be two lectures and one tutorial a week throughout the year. Two essays or class papers are required of students in the course of the year.

SYLLABUS A study of some conceptual issues arising out of current work in empirical psychology. The course will be divided into about five segments within the areas of cognition/language and philosophy of mind/epistemology/philosophy of language. It is likely that each segment will be introduced by a psychologist who will recommend reading (at an appropriate level) from current work in psychology; the topic will then be pursued by a member of the Philosophy department who will recommend further reading in philosophy. Depending on size of classes, there may be some seminar-type sessions with joint discussions between philosophers and psychologists. Topics for the segments will be selected from such areas as: representation (in imagery and language); acquisition of or development of language; genetic epistemology or developmental studies (e.g. Piaget's theory of knowledge); thinking processes; mind/brain questions arising out of neuro-psychological studies; memory; comparative studies in thinking (e.g. apes and humans); concepts and concept-formation.

READING Reading will be carefully selected from both psychology, at an appropriate level, and philosophy. A detailed reading list will be made available from the department early in the year.

EXAMINATION One 3-hour examination paper. Written work may be required during the year as an alternative to, or in addition to, or as a total or partial substitution for this paper.

414 Philosophy

161-206 PHILOSOPHY 2J PASS (PHILOSOPHY OF RELIGION)

Fr E. D'Агсy. Dr V. I. Rice, Mr W. K. Presa A grade two subject (not to constitute the third part of a major). It consists of two lectures and one tutorial a week throughout the year. Students write one essay and one class paper in the course of the year. SYLLABUS A philosophical study of (1 ) The philosophical nature of Christian beliefs. (2) Certain arguments for the existence of God. (3) Mysticism. BOOKS Recommended for preliminary reading: Broome J H Pascal, Edward Arnold 1965 King R G The Meaning of God, SCM 1974 Prescribed reading: Helm P Varieties of Belief, Allen & Unwin 1973 •Hick J The Existence of God, NY, Macmillan paperback 1963 Miller L ed God and Reason, Macmillan Mitchell В G Justification of Religious Belief, Macmillan 1974 •Pascal B Pensées, Penguin 1975 Staal F Exploring Mysticism, Penguin EXAMINATION One 3-hour examination paper. Written work and tests or a combination of both as approved by the department may be required during the year as an alternative, or in addition to, or as a total or partial substitution for, this paper.

161-207 PHILOSOPHY 2K PASS (AESTHETICS) (This subject will not be available in 1978, but will be offered in 1979)

161-208 PHILOSOPHY 2L PASS (EPISTEMOLOGY, LOGIC AND METHODOLOGY) Dr L. J. O'Neill A grade two subject (not to constitute the third part of a major). It consists of two lectures and one discussion class per week throughout the year. Two essays or class exercises are required of students in the course of the year. SYLLABUS A philosophical discussion of the aims, techniques and tools of rational enquiry. Topics will include most of the following: Reasonable belief and knowledge. Intuition, judgement and inference. Types of argument and types of statement. Generalization. Laws. hypotheses. Applying loose generalizations and balancing considerations. Probability. Causal investigations. Types of explanation. Empirical and a priori. Necessity, meaning and analyticity. Types of concept. Goals and techniques of definition.

415 Faculty of Arts

BOOKS For reference: Ackerman R J Belief and Knowledge, Doubleday Anchor 1972 or Mac- millan 1973 Ackermann R Nondeductive Inference, Routledge & Kegan Paul Alston W Philosophy of Language, Prentice-Hall Chisholm R Theory of Knowledge, Prentice-Ha Il Dray W Philosophy of History. ChB 1 & 2, Prentice-Hall Hempel C Philosophy of Natural Science, Prentice-Hall Lerner D ed Evidence and Inference, Free Press of Glencoe Michalos A Principles of Logic, Prentice-Hall Nidditch P H ed The Philosophy of Science, Oxford readings in Philo- sophy Salmon W C The Foundations of Scientific Inference, U of Pittsburgh P 1967 EXAMINATION One 3-hour examination paper. Written work and tests or a combination of both as approved by the department may be required during the year as an alternative, or in addition to, or as a total or partial substitution for, this paper.

161-209 PHILOSOPHY 2M PASS (MODERN PHILOSOPHY) Dr V. I. Rice, Dr В. Langtry A grade two subject (not to constitute the third part of a major). It consists of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year. Two essays or class exercises are required of students in the course of the year.

SYLLABUS (1) Descartes and the empiricists. (2) The rationalists and Kant. Issues to be considered in various parts of the course will include: (i) Rationalism and empiricism—Are our concepts innate or derived from experience? Is our knowledge derivable in principle from reason alone, without recourse to experience? (ii) Monism and pluralism— is reality essentially one substance or a multiplicity of different substances? (iii) Some questions about the existence of God and arguments for it. (iv) Perception—when we are said to perceive something, does this mean that we are aware of an external world or only of ideas in our minds? (v) Substance and the self—must we postulate a substratum distinct from the sensible qualities of material objects? Must we posit a self as a subject of our conscious experiences? (vi) Universals—how do we link objects of the same sortvia objective forms, by abstract ideas or only by common names based on resemblances? (vii) Causality —are causal connections merely a species of statistical correlation or are they real connections in nature?

BOOKS Prescribed books: Descartes R Philosophical Writings, ed E Anscombe & P Geach, Nelson Locke J An Essay Concening Human Understanding, 2 vols ed Yolton Everyman

416 Philosophy

Berkeley G Berkeley's Philosophical Writings, ed D M Armstrong, Col- lier Books Hume D A Treatise of Human Nature, Everyman 548 549 or Selby- Biggs ed, Clarendon Spinoza B Works of Spinoza, vol 2, tr R W Elwes, Dover Leibniz G Leibniz Selections, ed P P Wiener, Scribner Kant 1 Critique of Pure Reason, tr N Kemp Smith, Macmillan

161-210 PHILOSOPHY 2N PASS (RECENT PHILOSOPHY) Dr L. J. O'Neill, Dr G. D. Marshall A grade two subject (not to constitute the third part of a major). It consists of two lectures and one tutorial a week throughout the year. SYLLABUS A study of the main issues in analytical philosophy during the first half of the twentieth century. Discussion in 1978 will be concerned (a) with the approach to philosophical problems by means of the construction of a "logically correct" language, based on Gottlob Frege's philosophical works and Wittgenstein's Tractatus Logico-Philosophicus; and (b) with problems concerning analysis, sense-data and meaning In Russell, Moore and the philosophers of the Vienna Circle. Books Prescribed texts: (a) •Russell B Logic and Knowledge, ed Marsh R C, Allen & Unwin •Russell B Mysticism and Logic, Pelican •Russell B Our Knowledge of the External World, Allen & Unwin Moore G E Philosophical Papers, Alien & Unwin •Ayer A J ed Logical Positivism, Free Press (b) Geach P and Black M eds Philosophical Writings of Gottlob Frege, Blackwell 1970 Wittgenstein L Tractatus Logico-Philosophicus, tr Pears D & Mc- Guinness B, RKP 1961 EXAMINATION One 3-hour examination paper. Written work and tests or a combination of both as approved by the department may be required during the year as an alternative to, or in addition to, or as a total or partial substitution for, this paper.

161-213 PHILOSOPHY 2Q PASS (MEDIEVAL PHILOSOPHY) (This subject will be available in 1978; it will not be offered in 1979) Mr W. K. Presa, Ms Brenda Judge A grade two subject (not to constitute the third part of a major). It consists of two lectures and one tutorial a week throughout the year. Two essays or class papers are required of students in the course of the year.

417 л Faculty of Arts

SYLLABUS The Middle Ages were an important period in the history of philosophy, and philosophy might well be considered to have been the major field of study in the period. In this course attention will be concentrated on St Thomas Aquinas, usually regarded as the most outstanding thinker of the period. He made significant contributions to the philosophy of mind and to the philosophy of action and of the emotions. His work in these areas has an important bearing on contemporary discussions. Topics to be examined will include—the intellect, knowledge and judgment; purpose, acts; emotions; dispositions; and immortality.

BOOKS, Aquinas, St Thomas Summa Theologiae, Vols 11 and 12, and 16-22 inclusive, Blackfriars and Eyre & Spottiswoode Duns Scotus John Philosophical Writings, ed Wilder Allan, Nelson EXAMINATION One 3-hour examination paper. Written work may be required during the year as an alternative to, or in addition to, or as a total or partial substitution for, this paper. 161-300 PHILOSOPHY 3C PASS (CONTEMPORARY EUROPEAN .PHILOSOPHY)

Ms Brenda Judge A grade three subject, to terminate a philosophy major. Since it has a common element with Philosophy 2C it may not be taken by students who have completed that subject. Students must complete the requirements for Philosophy 2C (for its syllabus, booklist and examination requirements see details for that subject). and IN ADDITION must submit a 3,000 word essay which will receive a weighting of one-third in the overall result. 161-301 PHILOSOPHY 3D PASS (POLITICAL & SOCIAL PHILOSOPHY) Fr E. D'Arcy A grade three subject, to terminate a philosophy major. Since it has a common element with Philosophy 2D it may not be taken by students who have completed that subject. Students must complete the requirements for Philosophy 20 (for its syllabus, booklist and examination requirements see details for that subject). and IN ADDITION must submit a 3,000 word essay which will receive a weighting of one-third in the overall result. 161-302 PHILOSOPHY 3E PASS (ETHICS) Mr D. L. Gunner A grade three subject, to terminate a philosophy major. Since it has a common element with Philosophy 2E it may not be taken by students who have completed that subject.

418 Philosophy

Students must complete the requirements for Philosophy 2E (for its syllabus, booklist and examination requirements see details for that subject). and

IN ADDITION must submit a 3,000 word essay which will receive a weighting of one-third in the overall result. 161-303 PHILOSOPHY 3F PASS (FORMAL LOGIC) Dr B. M. Taylor A grade three subject, to terminate a philosophy major. Since it has a common element with Philosophy 2F it may not be taken by students who have completed that subject. Students must complete the requirements for Philosophy 2F (for its syllabus, booklist and examination requirements see details for that subject). апд IN ADDITION must submit a 3,000 word essay which will receive a weighting of one-third in the overall result. 161-304 PHILOSOPHY 3G PASS (GREEK PHILOSOPHY) (This subject will be available in 1978, but will not ba offared in 1979) Dr E. L. Burge, Fr E. D'Arcy, Dr B. F. Scarleìt A grade three subject, to terminate a philosophy major. Since it has a common element with Philosophy 2G It may not be taken by students who have completed that subject. Students must complete the requirements for Philosophy 2G (for its syllabus, booklist and examination requirements see details for that subject). апд IN ADDITION must submit a 3,000 word essay which will receive a weighting of one-third in the overall result. 161-305 PHILOSOPHY 3H PASS (PHILOSOPHY OF PSYCHOLOGY) (The presentation of this course in 1978 will depend on availability of staff) Ms Brenda Judge end others A grade three subject, to terminate a philosophy major. Students must complete the requirements for Philosophy 2H (for its syllabus, booklist and examination requirements see details for that subject) апд IN ADDITION must submit a 3,000 word essay which will receive a weighting of one-third In the overall result.

161-306 PHILOSOPHY 3J PASS (PHILOSOPHY OF RELIGION) Fr E. D'Arcy, Dr V. I. Rice, Mr W. K. Presa A grade three subject, to terminate a philosophy major. Since it has a common element with Philosophy 2J it may not be taken by students

419 Faculty of Arts

who have completed that subject. Students must complete the requirements for Philosophy 2.1 (for its syllabus, booklist and examination requirements see details for that subject). and IN ADDITION must submit a 3,000 word essay which will receive a weighting of one-third in the overall result.

161-307 PHILOSOPHY 3K PASS (AESTHETICS) (Not available in 1978, but will be offered in 1979)

161-308 PHILOSOPHY 31 PASS (EPISTEMOLOGY, LOGIC AND METHODOLOGY) Dr L. J. O'Neill A grade three subject, to terminate a philosophy major. Since it has a common element with Philosophy 2L it may not be taken by students who have completed that subject. Students must complete the requirements for Philosophy 21. (for its syllabus, booklist and examination requirements see details for that subject). and IN ADDITION must submit a 3,000 word essay which will receive a weighting of one-third in the overall result.

161-309 PHILOSOPHY 3M PASS (MODERN PHILOSOPHY) Dr V. I. Rice, Dr В. Langtry A grade three subject, to terminate а philosophy major. Since it has a common element with Philosophy 2M It may not be taken by students who have completed that subject. Students must complete the requirements for Philosophy 2M (for its syllabus, booklist and examination requirements see details for that subject). and IN ADDITION must submit a 3,000 word essay which will receive a weighting of one-third in the overall result.

161-310 PHILOSOPHY 3N PASS (RECENT PHILOSOPHY) Dr L. J. O'Neill, Dr G. D. Marshall A grade three subject, to terminate a philosophy major. Since it has a common element with Philosophy 2N it may not be taken by students who have completed that subject. Students must complete the requirements for Philosophy 2N (fir its syllabus, booklist and examination requirements see details for that subject). and IN ADDITION must submit a 3,000 word essay which will receive a weighting of one-third in the overall result. 420 Philosophy

161-313 PHILOSOPHY За PASS (MEDIEVAL PHILOSOPHY) (This subject will be available to 1978; it will not be offered in 1979) Mr W. K. Presa, Ms Brenda Judge A grade three subject, to terminate a philosophy major. Students must complete the requirements for Philosophy 2Q (for its syllabus, booklist and examination requirements see details for that subject) and IN ADDITION must submit a 3,000 word essay which will receive a weighting of one-third in the overall result.

HONOURS DEGREEt C. SCHOOL OF PHILOSOPHY Students hoping to enter the honours school in their second year should include either Philosophy 1 A, 1 B, or IC among their first-year subjects. It is suggested that they should, if possible, broaden their acquaintance with philosophy by attending some or all of the lectures (but not the tutorials or examinations) in the other Philosophy 1 subjects.

PURE HONOURS SCHOOL In their second year students are required to obtain overall honours standard in the following subjects: 161-262 Philosophy 2E Honours (Ethics—for details see Philosophy 2E entry) 161-268 Philosophy 2L Honours (Epistemology, Logic and Methodology —for details see Philosophy 2L entry) 161-269 Philosophy 2M Honours (Modern Philosophy—for details see Philosophy 2M entry) and

in the unit courses: 161-278 Philosophy 2D2 Honours (Justice and Social Structures—for details see Philosophy 2D: Unit 2 entry) 161-281 Philosophy 2F1 Honours (Rudiments of Symbolic Logic I—. for details see Philosophy 2F: Unit 1 entry) In addition, they must obtain a pass in a non-philosophical subject (being the second part of a major). In their third year students are required to participate to a satisfactory level in a special third-year honours seminar of an hour and a half per week. Each student will be required to read to the group an essay which will then be handed in for assessment.

Students are further required to obtain overall honours standard in: (i) 161-370 Philosophy 3N Honours (Recent Philosophy—for details see Philosophy 2N entry) (ii) EITHER three full subjects and one unit selected from the following lists OR two full subjects and three units: t All prospective Philosophy honours students should register with the Philosophy departmental administrative assistant, Room 141, Old Arts, when enrolling at Students' Records.

421 Faculty of Arts

Full Subject Options 161-360 Philosophy 3C Honours (Contemporary European Philosophy —for details see Philosophy 2C entry) 161-364 Philosophy 3G Honours (Greek Philosophy—for details see Philosophy 2G entry)• 161-365 Philosophy 3H Honours (Philosophy of Psychology—for details see Philosophy 2H entry) 161-366 Philosophy 3J Honours (Philosophy of Religion—for details see Philosophy 2J entry) 161-367 Philosophy 3K Honours (Aesthetics—not available in 1978; will be offered in 1979) 161-373 Philosophy ЭQ Honours (Medieval Philosophy—for details see Philosophy 2Q entry)' 161-374 Philosophy 3R Honours (Rationalist Metaphysics—not available in 1978; will be offered in 1979) 100-467 Classical Social Theory (for details see pp. 510 ff.) Students who wish to do an Interdepartmental Programme should approach the departmental chairman to obtain approval. Details of Inter- departmental Programmes appear in the Handbook on pp. 503 ff.

Unit Options 161-377 Philosophy 3D1 Honours (Classical Philosophical Texts in Social Theory—for details see Philosophy 2D: Unit 1 entry) 161-382 Philosophy 3F2 Honours (Rudiments of Symbolic Logic II— for details see Philosophy 2F: Unit 2 entry) 161-383 Philosophy 3G1 Honours (Greek Philosophy: Unit 1—for details see entry p. 427)• 161-384 Philosophy 3G2 Honours (Greek Philosophy: Unit 2—for details see entry p. 427)• 161-387 Philosophy 3R1 honours (Rationalist Metaphysics: Unit 1— not available in 1978; will be offered in 1979) 161-388 Philosophy 3R2 Honours (Rationalist Metaphysics: Unit 2— not available in 1978; will be offered in 1979) 161-397 Philosophy ЭР1 Honours (Philosophical Problems—for details see pp. 427-428) 161-398 Philosophy 3Р2 Honours (Logical Problems—for details see p. 428) 161-022 Analytical Social Theory (Classical Social Theory; Unit 6— for details see entry p. 515)

Essays and Examinations Third year honours students are not required to submit the additional 3,000 word essay required in grade three pass subjects. Unless otherwise provided for in the details of relevant subject or unit, there will be one 3-hour paper in each subject and in each unit.

In their fourth year candidates must obtain honours standard in six of the seven subjects listed below. 161-475 Philosophy 4S Honours (Philosophical Psychology—for details see entry pp. 428-429)

• Available In 1978; will not be offered 1п 1979. 422 Philosophy

161-476 Philosophy 4T Honours (Ethics—for details see entry p. 429) 161-477 Philosophy 4U Honours (Political Philosophy—for details see entry p. 429) 161-478 Philosophy 4V Honours (Kant—for details see entry p. 430) 161-479 Philosophy 4W Honours (Current Issues in Philosophy—for details see entry p. 430) 161-480 Philosophy 4X Honours (Philosophy of Knowledge and Rational Inquiry—for details see entry pp. 430-431) 161-481 Philosophy 4Y Honours (Advanced Formal Logic—for details see entry p. 431) Pure Philosophy Honours students may do one approved Interdepart- mental Programme in fourth year, substituting it for a Philosophy final year subject approved by the chairman. The basis of the approval is that the substitution should be appropriate and should not disrupt the balance of the course. Essays and Examinations Standard assessment procedures are specified in the details of the above subjects. In addition students must submit two essays (of about 3,000 words) during the year. Topics and dates due will be set during the year. Students who wish to vary these topics must obtain the approval of the departmental chairman by submitting a one hundred word outline of the essay they propose to write, together with a bibliography of works to be used in writing it, not later than two weeks after the topics are known. In arriving at an overall assessment the two essays will jointly be given the same weight as one examination paper. More detailed requirements will appear in the Departmental Information Sheet: 1978.

COMBINED HONOURS SCHOOL All students are required to obtain overall honours standard in the philosophy component in each year of their course. They are further expected to achieve the required standard in the other School. Before enrolling, all combined honours students should seek advice from the Philosophy department on the planning of their course. in their second year they should complete the Group One subjects listed below and one other Philosophy subject (or Its unit equivalents) chosen from Groups 2, 3 or 4.

In their third year students are required to participate to a satisfactory level in a special third-year honours seminar of an hour and a half per week. Each student will be required to read to the group an essay which will then be handed In for asessment. in addition they must do two more philosophy subjects (or their unit equivalents) chosen from the two groups not already covered.

GROUP ONE 161-268 Philosophy 2L Honours (Epistemology, Logic and Method- ology—for details see Philosophy 2L entry) 161-281 Philosophy 2F1 Honours (Rudiments of Symbolic Logic I— for details see Philosophy 2F: Unit 1 entry)

423

Faculty of Arts

GROUP TWO 2nd year Subject No. 3rd year Subject No. and Name Description and Name EITHER 161-269 Philosophy 2M Modern 161-369 Philosophy 3M Honours Philosophy Honours OR 161-270 Philosophy 2N Recent 161-370 Philosophy 3N Honours Philosophy Honours

GROUP THREE

EITHER 161-261 Philosophy 20 Political 161-361 Philosophy 3D Honours Philosophy Honours OR 161-262 Philosophy 2E Ethics 161-362 Philosophy 3E Honours Honours OR 161-267 Philosophy 2K tAesthetics 161-367 Philosophy 3K Honours Honours

GROUP FOUR

EITHER One of the Group 2 or 3 subjects not already selected OR One of EITHER Contemporary 161-360 Philosophy 2C 161-260 Philosophy 2C Honours European Honours Philosophy or 161-264 Philosophy 2G • Greek 161-364 Philosophy 3G Honours Philosophy Honours or 161-265 Philosophy 2H Philosophy of 161-365 Philosophy 3H Honours Psychology Honours or 161-266 Philosophy 2J Philosophy of 161-366 Philosophy 3J Honours Religion Honours or 161-273 Philosophy 20 •Medieval 161-373 Philosophy 30 Honours Philosophy Honours or 161-274 Philosophy 2R t Rationalist 161-374 Philosophy 3R Honours Metaphysics Honours or 100-467 Classical Classical 100-467 Classical Social Theory Social Theory Social Theory

• WI11 be availaЫe 1п 1978; will not be offered 1п 1979. t W111 not be avellebie 1п 1978; wil b. offered In 1979. 424 Philosophy

OR Two of EITHER 161-277 Philosophy •Classical Philo- 161-377 Philosophy 201 Honours sophical Texts n 301 Honours Social Theory or 161-278 Philosophy 'justice and 161-378 Philosophy 2D2 Honours Social Structures 302 Honours or 161-282 Philosophy Rudiments of 161-382 Philosophy 2F2 Honours Symbolft Logic I1 3F2 Honours or 161-283 Philosophy tGreek Philo- 161-383 Philosophy 2G1 Honours sophy: Unit 1 3G1 Honours or 161-284 Philosophy tGreek Philo- 161-384 Philosophy 2G2 Honours sophy: Unit 2 3G2 Honours or 161-287 Philosophy *Rationalist Meta- 161-387 Philosophy 2R1 Honours physics Unit 1 3R1 Honours or 161-288 Philosophy #Rationalist Meta- 161-388 Philosophy 2R2 Honours physics: Unit 2 3R2 Honours or Philosophical 1 61 -397 Philosophy Problems 3Р1 Honours or Logical Problems 1 61 -398 Philosophy 3Р2 Honours or Analytical Social Theory 161-022 Analytical Social Theory (Classical Social Theory: Unit 6) or an approved Interdepartmental Programme."" In their fourth year candidates must fulfil the requirements of the other School and obtain honours standard in two of the seven subjects listed on pp. 422-423 under Pure Honours School. Candidates may do one approved Interdepartmental Programme in fourth year, substituting it for the two Philosophy 3,000 word essays. Essays and Examinations Examination requirements are identical with those for the pure school. Essay requirements vary in different combinations. Every Combined Philosophy Honours student must do at least one 3,000 word essay in philosophy in their final year to be counted for assessment. Students should ascertain the essay requirements applying to their combination by consulting the Philosophy department chairman or his deputy. PHILOSOPHY WITH X COMBINED HONOURS COURSE—FINAL YEAR This is a course designed to allow a student who has completed three years of the Philosophy and X Combined Honours course to transfer and complete the degree by only doing philosophy subjects. Students who

• If the candidate hes not already enrolled for the whole subject. t Will be available In 1978; will not be offered In 1979. t Not available In 1978; will be offered In 1979. •• An Interdepartmental Programme Is commonly credited equally between the two Schools but permission to enrol from both Chairmen concerned must be sought before approval Is given.

425

Faculty of Arts

wish to make this transfer should first consult the departmental chairman or his deputy. Such students are allowed certain concessions within the framework of the Pure Philosophy Honours final year should they wish to make use of them, since their preparation for final year in Philosophy will be less comprehensive than that of Pure School students. Students enrolling for Philosophy with X Combined Honours may therefore substitute for two of the six final honours subjects normally required: EITHER a thesis in philosophy of not more than 9,000 words on an approved topic OR two subjects approved by the departmental chairman which are not offered by this department. Students electing to do the thesis should enrol in the philosophy subjects chosen and in 161-482 Philosophy 4Z Honours (Philosophy Special Thesis). In all other respects the final year will be exactly similar to that of the Pure Philosophy Honours School.

OVERDUE ESSAYS Unless a long extension has been granted on strong medical or other grounds, a final year essay which is more than two weeks overdue will not be accepted. In place of it the student will be required to sit, within the department, a 3-hour essay-type examination paper.

COURSES, WITHOUT GRADE ONE PHILOSOPHY SUBJECT A student who does a grade two subject as his first philosophy subject may, if his work is of sufficient standard, be admitted to the honours school. Such students will not do a grade one philosophy subject. Instead they will qualify for the honours degree by satisfying the standard requirements for the second, third and fourth years of the pure honours course, with the following modifications: (a) If the first philosophy subject was Philosophy 2L the student must do 161-281 Philosophy 2F1 Honours, and in addition either do an extra subject chosen from the list of third-year honours subject options or do two extra units chosen from the list of third-year unit options. (b) If the first philosophy subject was Philosophy 2F the student must do 161-268 Philosophy 2L Honours, and in addition do an extra unit chosen from the list of third-year unit options. (c) If the first philosophy subject was Philosophy 2D the student must do 161-262 Philosophy 2E Honours, and in addition do an extra unit chosen from the list of third-year unit options.

CONCESSIONS The department of Philosophy offers some standard concessions to honours students doing a Bachelor of Arts in combination with another degree, and a list of those approved is given below. Nevertheless all students seeking any variation from the standard course including any of the concessions given below must obtain the permission of the departmental chairman. (i) Pure Philosophy Honours/LL.B. In the third year of the Philosophy Honours course students may omit either one full subject or two units from the list of options set out on pp. 421-422. Students taking advantage of this concession are expected to elect Jurisprudence as one of their third or fourth year law subjects' 426 Philosophy

(ii) Combined Philosophy Honours/LL.B. Students doing the Combined Philosophy Honours course may omit either one full subject or two units from the list of options set out under the heading Group Four on pp. 424-425. There is also a standard concession available to students converting from Combined Honours to Pure Philosophy at the end of the second year: A. In their third year such students may omit either one full subject or two units from the list of alternatives set out on pp. 421-422. B. In all cases by the end of their third year, pure philosophy honours students must obtain overall honours standard (in either their second or third years) in the appropriate honours equivalent of Philosophy 2D: Unit 2, Philosophy 2E, Philosophy 2M and Philosophy 2N, so that students converting to pure philosophy who have not done any of these subjects in their second year will find their choice of third year subjects severely curtailed.

161-383 PHILOSOPHY 3G1 HONOURS (GREEK PHILOSOPHY: UNIT 1) (This subject will be available in 1978, but will not be offered in 1979) Dr E. L. Burge, Fr E. D'Arcy A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week for the first half of the year.

SYLLABUS A study of Plato's and Aristotle's works selected to show some of their distinctive contributions in metaphysics and ethics. Advice about texts and other readings will be given at the beginning of the course.

EXAMINATION One 3-hour examination paper. 161-384 PHILOSOPHY 3G2 HONOURS (GREEK PHILOSOPHY: UNIT 2) (This subject will be available in 1978, but will not be offered in 1979) Fr E. D'Arcy, Dr B. F. Scarlett A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week during the second half of the year. SYLLABUS A study of Aristotle's works selected to show some of their distinctive contributions in ethics and philosophical psychology. Advice about texts and other readings will be given at the beginning of the course. EXAMINATION One 3-hour examination paper.

161-397 PHILOSOPHY ВР1 HONOURS (PHILOSOPHICAL PROBLEMS) Dr B. F. Scarlett

A unit (half-subject) consisting of one 11/з-hour lecture-seminar per week during the first half of the year, being one of the unit-options open to third-year honours students.

427 Faculty of Arts

SYLLABUS The course will centre on the concept of cause and will also deal with some related philosophical theories and problems including causal theories of mind and knowledge. BOOKS Preliminary reading: Hanfling O Cause and Effect, Open University 1973 Further references will be supplied during the course. Prescribed texts: •Beauchamp T L Philosophical Problems of Causation, Dickenson 1974 •Campbell K Body and Mind, Macmillan 1971 'Sosa E Causation and Conditionals, OUP 1975

ESSAYS AND EXAMINATIONS One 3-hour examination paper, or two 1,500 word essays.

161-398 PHILOSOPHY 3Р2 HONOURS (LOGICAL PROBLEMS) Dr B Langtry A unit (half-subject) consisting of one 1%z-hour lecture-seminar per week during the second half of the year, being one of the unit-options open to third-year honours students.

SYLLABUS The course will consist of a selection of problems in the philosophy of logic. Students should consult the departmental secretariat for detailed information about the proposed course in 1978. ESSAYS AND EXAMINATIONS One 3-hour examination paper. Written work and tests or a combination of both as approved by the department may be required during the year as an alternative, or in addition to, or as a total or partial substitution for, this paper.

161-475 PHILOSOPHY 4S HONOURS (PHILOSOPHICAL PSYCHOLOGY) Mr W. K. Presa, Dr B. Scarlett One lecture-seminar of one and a half hours per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS (1) Emotions (2) Materialism and sensation Action theory and rationality (з ) Books Borger R & Cioffi F eds Explanation in the Behavioural Sciences, CUP 1970 Cornman J Perception, Commonsense end Science, Yale UP Cornman J Materialism and Sensations, Yale UP 428 Philosophy

Davidson D "Mental Events" in Foster L and Swanson J W eds Experi- ence and Theory, Duckworth Gosling Pleasure and Desire, Methuen Mische' T ed Human Action: Conceptual and Empirical Issues, Academic Press 1969

ESSAYS AND EXAMINATION One 3-hour examination paper. Written work and tests or a combination of both as approved by the department may be required during the year as an alternative, or in addition to, or as a total or partial substitution for, this paper.

161-476 PHILOSOPHY 4T HONOURS (ETHICS) Mr D. L. Gunner, Fr E. D'Аrсу One seminar of one and a half hours per week throughout the year. Students should consult the departmental secretariat for detailed information.

SYLLABUS The course will consist of a study of (1) a number of contemporary issues in moral philosophy, and (2) Aristotle's Nicomachean Ethics.

EXAMINATION One 3-hour examination paper.

161-477 PHILOSOPHY 4U HONOURS (POLITICAL AND SOCIAL PHILOSOPHY) Dr J. T. Sгzednicki One lecture-seminar of one and a half hours per week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS An examination of the feasibility of representative forms of government, public good and public interest.

BOOKS Plamenatz J Consent, Freedom and Political Obligation, 2nd ed OUP 1968 Quinton A ed Political Philosophy, Oxford 1967 Elements of Social and Political Philosophy, Martinus •Srzеdnicki J Nijhoff 1976 Further questions, pertaining to other areas in political philosophy may also be asked in accordance with the known Interests of staff and students In the department.

429 Faculty of Arts

161-478 PHILOSOPHY 4V HONOURS (KANT) Dr J. T. J. Srzednicki

One seminar of one and a half hours per week throughout the year. Students should consult the departmental secretariat for detailed information.

SYLLABUS Questions on Kant's Critique of Pure Reason, tr Kemp Smith, Macmillan. Further relevant questions may also be asked in accordance with known interests of staff and students in the department. A list of books to be consulted should be collected from the Philosophy department office at the beginning of 1978.

BOOKS Kemp Smith trans Kant's Critique of Pure Reason, Macmillan

161-479 PHILOSOPHY 4W HONOURS (CURRENT ISSUES IN PHILOSOPHY) Dr В. M. Taylor One seminar of one and a half hours per week throughout the year. Students should consult the departmental secretariat for detailed information.

SYLLABUS Questions concerning various contemporary theories of meaning, especially the views of Donald Davidson, Michael Dummett and Paul Grice. Preliminary reading: Davidson D "Truth and Meaning", Synthese, 1967 Dummett M "Truth" in Pitcher G ed Truth, Prentice-Hall Grice H P "Meaning", Philosophical Review, 1957

161-480 PHILOSOPHY HONOURS 4X (PHILOSOPHY OF KNOWLEDGE AND RATIONAL INQUIRY) Dr В. Langtry, Professor L. Goddard One seminar of one and a half hours per week throughout the year. Students should consult the departmental secretariat for detailed information about the proposed course in 1978.

430 Philosophy

SYLLABUS Questions concerning (1) the epistemology of K. R. Popper, and (2) evidence. Preliminary reading: for (1) Popper K R The Logic of Scientific Discovery, Hutchinson for (2) Cross R Evidence, Butterworths 1974 Keynes J M A Treatise on Probability, Macmillan

161-481 PHILOSOPHY 4Y HONOURS (ADVANCED FORMAL LOGIC) Dr B. M. Taylor, Professor L. Goddard and others One lecture-seminar of 11/2 hours weekly throughout the year. Students should consult the departmental information sheet for 1978 for detailed information. The chairman of the Philosophy department must satisfy himself that in selecting this option the balance of an individual's total course is not disturbed. SYLLABUS The course is offered in conjunction with the Mathematics department, two or three units to be given by this department and two units selected from the fourth year Mathematics course, from which sudents would select three units. In 1978 the course will be: Term 1: Recursive Function Theory (Mathematics) Term 2: Elementary Set Theory (Philosophy) Term 3: Advanced Set Theory (Mathematics) or The Paradoxes (Philosophy)

EXAMINATION One 3-hour examination paper. Written work and tests or a combination of both, as approved by the department, may be required during the year as an alternative to, or in addition to, or as a total or partial substitution for, this paper.

161-499 THE M.A. PRELIMINARY COURSE IN PHILOSOPHY

Any person who has completed the course for the degree of Bachelor of Arts or is a graduate of some other faculty may apply for admission to the M.A. preliminary course with a view to qualifying for admission to the M.A. course in philosophy. Closing date for applications for 1978 is 24 December, 1977. A form giving details of the course is available from the Philosophy department secretary. MASTER OF ARTS 161-601 C. SCHOOL OF PHILOSOPHY Students seeking admission to the M.A. course in Philosophy (for which the normal prerequisite is at least second class honours in the school of

431 Faculty of Arts

Philosophy, in the philosophical part of a combined honours school, or an equivalent standard in the М.A. preliminary examination in philosophy) should consult the department before sending an application form to the Registrar. Closing date for applications for 1978 is 24 December, 1977. Examination is normally by thesis on an approved topic. The length of the thesis must not exceed 35,000 words. (The chairman of the department may give permission to exceed this limit by a specified amount in the case of a thesis requiring extensive quotation of source material.) Subject, however, to the availability of suitable courses a candidate may, with the approval of the chairman of department, satisfy the requirements of the M.A. degree in part by course-work and in part by thesis. In this case the department will also set an upper limit to the length of the thesis. Unless specially exempted, candidates must also attend an oral examination covering the general field of their research. They will work under the supervision of a member of the Philosophy department to whom they should report regularly on the progress of their work, and who will advise them about a suitable course of reading. They may also be required to attend such lectures or discussion classes and to submit such pieces of interim written work as may be prescribed by their supervisor or by the department. Three copies of each thesis (A4, typewritten, double-spaced) are required, of which one copy, in the case of the successful candidate, will be deposited in the University Library and one in the departmental library.

DEPARTMENT OF POLITICAL SCIENCE Chairman of Department: Professor A. F. DAVIES, М.A. ORDINARY DEGREE (Details of honours degree are set out at the end of this section.) SUBJECTS OFFERED First Year: Politics 1A Politics 1B Politics 1 C Second Year: Politics 2A Politics 2B International Relations 2 Public Administration 2 Third Year: Politics 3A Politics 3В International Relations 3 Government and Society 3 Political Sociology 3 Public Administration 3 All students enrolling in 1978 must indicate the serial numbers of the subjects they are enrolling in. The subject or unit number must be prefixed by the departmental number 166-. No student may enrol for both International Relations 2 and 3 or Public Administration 2 and 3. For approved majors see pp. 41, 46-47. For prerequisites for certain subjects see pp. 44-45. 432 Political Science

Note: Students other than those taking honours in Political Science may also enter for individual Political Science subjects at honours level. Details of the additional honours syllabus in each subject will be found below, under the heading 'Honours Degree: School of Political Science'. First year students in Political Science In 1978 there will be three first year Political Science courses available, two of which are combinations of various half courses. Students will be asked at the beginning of the year to enrol in the full subject or subjects, but they may change these subjects after consultation with the department and the faculty office. The subject Politics 1A will run throughout the year. The subject Politics 1B will consist of the first half of Politics 1A together with the half course Courts and Democracy: Problems in Liberal Democratic Theory. Politics 1C will consist of a half course offered by the department of Philosophy (see details for Philosophy 1B) together with the half course Courts and Democracy: Problems in Liberal Democratic Theory. Students, therefore, may enrol in Politics 1A and Politics 1C, but not Politics 1A and Politics 1B nor Politics 16 and Politics 1C. Students interested in the half course Courts and Democracy: Problems in Liberal Democratic Theory, should also look at the details for Philo- sophy 1C in the Philosophy section.

166-101 POLITICS 1A (AUSTRALIAN POLITICS) Mr Jonathan King and others A course of two lectures and one tutorial class per week throughout the year. Students will be required to submit at least two essays to gain a pass in the subject. SYLLABUS This course offers an overview of the working of the Australian political system. It looks first at the ideas which prompted the creation of this particular kind of "liberal democracy", the institutions that grew out of these ideas and the Issues now confronting those institutions. Students enrolling in this course may change their enrolment during the first half of the year to Politics 1 B, but they cannot simultaneously enrol in Politics 1 B. They may, however, choose to enrol simultaneously in Politics 1 C. Note: Students with a special interest in political rights and constitutions may take up Politics 1 B in the second half of the year, and other options, e.g., public policy or political culture may be available. SOOKs There is no formal text and students should buy reference books from those set out in the reading guides issued during the year. Advice about book purchases will be given in the first lectures and tutorials. Some stimulation may be found in the following: Manning Clark A Shon History of Australia, Heinemann McQueen H A New Britannia: Social Origins of Australian Radicalism and Nationalism, Pelican Horne D The Lucky Country: Australia in the Sixties, Penguin Conway R The Great Australian Stupor: An Interpretation of the Austra- lian Way of Life, Sun Books Kelly P The Unmaking of Gough, Angus & Robertson

433 Faculty of Arts

Mayer H ed Australian Politics: A Fourth Reader, Cheshire Emy H Politics of Australian Democracy, Macmillan Connell R W Ruling Class, Ruling Culture, CUP Miller J D B & Jinks B Australian Government and Politics, Duckworth Solomon D Australia's Government and Parliament, Nelson ASSESSMENT Assessment will be based on prescribed written work, which may include an examination of not more than 3 hours. 166-102 POLITICS 1 B This subject consists of the first half of Politics 1A together with the following half course. Students enrolling in this subject may not enrol in Politics 1A or Politics 1C.

COURTS AND DEMOCRACY: PROBLEMS IN LIBERAL DEMOCRATIC THEORY (Half Course) Mr David Tucker This course will be concerned with the way that rights are protected and specifically with the role which courts have played as arbiters in the English and American systems of government. How do each of these very different democracies manage to take rights seriously? As is well- known, it is not easy to reconcile the ideal of democratic representation, associated as it is with majority rule, with the liberal view that citizens have political rights. We will attempt to characterize the ways in which this conflict has been resolved in practice and we shall try to show not only how the notion of judicial review can be accommodated within a theory of representative government but why such an accommodation ought to be made. It is hoped that a comparative analysis of the competing claims of the English Westminster system and that of the American system, based as it is on a separation of powers, will provide a useful way of introducing some of the more fundamental problems in political and constitutional theory. Apart from an Introduction concerned with the concept of law and with the place of courts in liberal political theory, the following topics will provide the core material for the course: (a) the Right to Disobey the Law (b) the Right to Equal Treatment (c) Freedom of Speech and Assembly (d) Police Accountability and Due Process (e) Privacy and Dignity Students should bear in mind that it will not be possible to deal with more than three of these topics in any one year. BOOKS Basic texts: Dworkin R Taking Rights Seriously, Duckworth London 1977 Marshall G Constitutional Theory, Clarendon Oxford 1971 Preliminary reading: Cox A The Warren Court, Cambridge Mass 1968 Cox Howe & Wiggens Civil Rights and the Courts, Cambridge Mass 19 67 434 Political Science

Cox В Civil Liberties in Britain, Penguin Special 1975 Dean H E Judicial Review and Democracy, New York 1967 ASSESSMENT Assessment will be based on written work which may include an examination of not more than three hours.

166-103 POLITICS IC This subject will consist of the first half of Philosophy 1 В (see details for Philosophy) together with the half course Courts and Democracy: Problems in Liberal Democratic Theory (see details for Politics 1 B). Students enrolling in this course may also enrol in Politics 1A.

166-201 POLITICS 2A (PASS)

166-202 POLITICS 26 (PASS)

There is no one fixed syllabus for either of these subjects—they are made up from the units described below. A pass subject will consist of two units; an honours subject will consist of three units. The full list of units offered is as follows: 166-001 American Politics and Society (compact unit, first half of the year). 166-002 Problems of American Politics (compact unit, second half of the year). 166-003 Western European Politics (compact unit, second half of the year). 166-004 Indian Politics and Society (compact unit, first half of the year). 166-005 Chinese Politics and Society (compact unit, first half of the year). 166-006 Soviet Politics and Society (compact unit, second half of the year). 166-009 Stratification, Power and Leadership (extended unit). In 1978 Indonesian Politics (compact unit, second half of the year) may be taken as a unit in Politics 2A, 2В, ЗА, 38, in combination with one or more of the above. Students enrolling in only one of these subjects in a given year must enrol in Politics 2A; students enrolling in two of these subjects in a given year must enrol In Politics 2A and 28. Students should note the following provisions governing these subjects and the units of which they are composed: (1) An enrolment must be lodged both for the subject and for the units being studied. Thus a second year student enrolling in one Political Science subject could enrol for: 166-201 Politics 2A, comprising units 166-001 and 166-002. Some other possible combinations would be:

435 Faculty of Arts

166-001 -I- 166-003 166-004 + 166-006 166-001 + 166-006 166-004 + 166-009 166-001 + 166-009 166-005 + 166-006 166-003 + 166-004 166-005 + 166-009 166-003 + 166-005 166-006 -1- 166-009 166-003 + 166-009 No other combination is recommended by the department. (2) Both units in a subject will be examined at the end of the year. Students may not enrol in single units, unless they have special permission from the faculty to do so. (3) A student must construct his subject on one of the following patterns: Two compact units' taught in different halves of the year. One compact unit and one extended unit'. (4) Students enrolling at the honours level must include three units. One of these units must be selected from 166-002 or 168-007 or 166- 008 or 166-009 (see under ноnоигѕ Degree', School of Political Science). (5) Students may not take unit 166-002 unless they have already studied unit 166-001. (6) Students may not select units which contain subject matter which was included in subjects already passed; e.g. students who have passed Modern Government B in 1973 or earlier may not enter for Unit 166-001 American Politics and Society; students who have passed Modern Government C in 1973 or earlier may not enter for unit 166-006 or unit 166-005. Students who have passed a particular unit as part of Politics 2A or 2B may not enter for that same unit as part of Politics 3A or 3B. More details on this point may be obtained from the Arts faculty office or the Political Science department.

168-001 AMERICAN POLITICS AND SOCIETY Mr K. G. Armstrong A course of two lectures and one tutorial a week throughout the first half of the academic year. SYLLABUS An introduction to the United States political system in its social and constitutional setting. Students will be required to submit one essay of 1,400 words during the course. BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Denenberg R V Understanding American Politics, Fontana (b) Prescribed textbooks: ' Carr R K Bernstein M H Murphy W F & Danielson M N Essentials of American Democracy, 8th ed Dryden Press 1977 (c) Recommended for reference: Detailed reading guides will be issued throughout the course.

• A compact unit consists of a course of two lectures and one tutorial a week over half the academic year. An extended unit consists of one lecture a week and ono tutorial a fortnight throughout the academic year. 436 Political Science

EXAMINATION Not more than one 2-hour paper. Written work done during the year will also constitute part of the assessment in this unit.

166-002 PROBLEMS OF AMERICAN POLITICS Mr K. G. Armstrong and Ms Marion Simms A course of two lectures and one tutorial a week throughout the second half of the academic year. This unit can оnly be taken by students who have already taken unit 166-001 American Politics and Society. Students will be required to submit an essay of 1,400 words. SYLLABUS A study of aspects of American society which raise problems for policy makers or for those who wish to interpret and evaluate the American political system. Each year a selection will be made from such topics as the following: (a) raclai minorities and integration; (b) elite, class and pluralist Interpretations of American politics; (c) the need and prospects for institutional reform; (d) the alienation of youth and the 'silent majority'; (e) the rise of the political amateur—Goldwater, McCarthy, McGovern; (f) the politics of poverty. (g) Sex, class and politics in America.

В OOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Hamilton Richard Class and American Politics, Wiley 1974 (b) Prescribed textbooks: As for Unit 168-001 American Politics and Society.. (c) Recommended for reference: Detailed reading guides will be issued throughout the course. EXAMINATION Not more than one 2-hour paper. Written work done during the year will also constitute part of the assessment in this unit.

166-003 WESTERN EUROPEAN POLITICS Dr Alan Hughes and others A course of two lectures a week and one tutorial a week during the second half of the academic year. SYLLABUS The course will be concerned with the socio-political structures of West Germany and France, with special attention to trends towards greater democratization in West Germany. The process of political integration within the Common Market will also be discussed. EXAMINATION Not more than one 2-hour paper. Written work done during the year will also constitute part of the assessment in this unit.

437 Faculty of Arts

166-004 INDIAN POLITICS AND SOCIETY Mr D. F. Miller A course of two lectures a week and one tutorial a week during the first half of the academic year.

SYLLABUS The course presents an analysis of some aspects of contemporary Indian politics, stressing the interaction of Indian society and culture and politics. Students will be required to submit at least one essay of 1,400 words during the course.

BOOKS Prescribed books: Kothari K Politics in India, 1970 Weiner W Party Building in a New Nation, 1968 Lannoy R The Speaking Tree, 1971 Miller D F Pervasive Politics, Melbourne Politics Monograph 1972 Dumont L Homo hierarchicus, 1972 Detailed reading guides will be issued during the course. EXAMINATION Not more than one 2-hour paper. Written work done during the year will also constitute part of the assessment in this unit.

166-005 CHINESE POLITICS AND SOCIETY Mr L. G. Churchward and others A course of two lectures and one tutorial a week during the first half of the academic year. SYLLABUS A course dealing with the Chinese Communist Revolution, Chinese political culture, Maoist ideology and Chinese government. The course will include a substantial amount of comparative material. Students will be required to submit one essay of 1,400 words during the course.

BOOKS Recommended for preliminary reading: Fitzgerald C P The Birth of Communist Chine, Pelican Huck E A The Security of China, Chatto & Windus 1970 Schram S Mao Tse-tung, Pelican Detailed reading guides will be issued during the course.

EXAMINATION Not more than one 2-hour paper. Written work done during the year will also constitute part of the assessment in this unit.

166-006 SOVIET POLITICS AND SOCIETY Mr L. G. Churchward A course of two lectures a week and one tutorial a week throughout the second half of the academic year.

438 Political Science

SYLLABUS A short course dealing with the political history of the Soviet Union, with the functioning of the Soviet political system, and with social and political change in the USSR since the death of Stalin. The course will include a substantial amount of comparative material. Students will be required to submit one essay of 1,400 words during the course.

BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Armstrong J A Ideology, Politics and Government in the Soviet Union, Praeger McAuley Mary Politics and the Soviet Union, Penguin 1977 Lane David The End of Inequality? Pelican 1971 (b) Prescribed textbooks: •Lane David Politics and Society in the USSR, Weidenfeld & Nicolson 1970 or •Churchward L G Contemporary Soviet Government, Routledge & Kegan Paul 2nd ed 1975 or Hammer Darrell P USSR The Politics of Oligarchy, Dryden 1974 or • Barghoorn F C Politics in the USSR, Little Brown 2nd ed 1972 or • Reshetar Jr, J S The Soviet Polity, Dodd lead 1971 or •Hazard J N The Soviet System of Government, Chicago UP 4th edition 1968 Detailed reading guides will be issued throughout the course.

EXAMINATION Not more than one 2-hour paper. Written work done during the year will also constitute part of the assessment in this unit.

166-009 STRATIFICATION, POWER AND LEADERSHIP

Mr В. Headey A course of one seminar per week (or of one lecture per week and one tutorial per fortnight) throughout the academic year. This is a Pass-or- Honours Unit, but the admission of Pass students will be subject to the availability of places.

SYLLABUS Each year, the course will involve an examination of some areas of controversy In the social sciences such as the following: (i) the nature and alleged necessity of social inequality; (ii) the nature and distribution of power in particular societies; (iii) the nature of political leadership; (iv) the impact of policy programmes on social and economic conditions. The course will involve Communist-Capitalist comparisons and a consideration of how power structures and policy programmes could be reformed in order more fully to meet people's needs and aspirations.

BOOKS Detailed reading guides will be issued throughout the year.

439 Faculty of Arts

EXAMINATION Not more than one 2-hour paper. Written work done during the year will also constitute part of the assessment in this unit.

166-301 POLITICS ЗА (PASS) 166-302 POLITICS 36 (PASS) Syllabus, books and examination as above for Politics 2A, 26. Students will also be required to submit additional essay work.

166-203 INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS 2 (PASS) Dr P. G. C. Darby and others

A course of two lectures and one tutorial a week throughout the year. SYLLABUS The aim of the course is to provide an introduction to international politics by focussing on the changing relations between the developed countries and the new states of Africa, Asia and Latin America. Broadly the course will proceed chronologically, covering the period from the second expansion of Europe (ca 1870 to 1914) to the present time. Within this historical frame of reference both theoretical and empirical material will be considered. Emphasis will be placed on the linkages and ramifications of perceived interests, ideological considerations and strategic conceptions. Perhaps the most distinctive feature of the course will be the attempt to explore and explain changing international relationships in terms of the particular social processes at work in the developed states and the new states. BOOKS Suggested books: Achebe C Things Fall Apart, Heinemann 1972 Lenin V Imperialism, the Highest Stage of Capitalism, Foreign Languages Publishing House Donaldson P Worlds Apart: the Economic Self Between Nations, Pelican 1973 Wilson D Asia Awakes, Pelican 1972 Harris J E Africans and Their History, Mentor 1972 Fanon F The Wretched of the Earth, Penguin 1971 Taber R Wer of the Flea, Paladin 1970 First R The Barrel of a Gun, Penguin 1972 Reich C The Greening of America, Penguin 1974 Nisbet R The Twilight of Authority, Heinemann 1976 Russet B & Hanson E Interest and Ideology, Freeman 1975 Bell D The Cultural Contradictions of Capitalism, Heinemann 1976 EXAMINATION Not more than one 3-hour paper. Written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination.

166-303 INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS 3 (PASS) As above for International Relations 2 but this subject shall be taken solely as a Grade 3 subject. 440 Political Science

166-204 PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION 2 (PASS) L. G. Peres A course of three lectures and/or tutorial classes a week throughout the year. SYLLABUS A study of the relationship between administration and policy development. An introductory outline deals with the Australian administrative system. Particular policy areas will be examined in some detail to Illus- trate the Interaction of politics and administration. BOOKS General references: Marx F M The Administrative State; Chicago 1957 Lindblom Charles E The Policy-Making Process, Prentice-Hall Spann R N Public Administration in Australia, new ed NSW Govt Printer 1973 Spann R N & Curnow R C eds Public Policy end Administration in Aus- tralia, Wiley 1975 Forward R K ed Public Policy in Australia, Cheshire 1974 Parris H Constitutional Bureaucracy, Allen & Unwin Chapman R A & Dunsire A eds Style in Administration, Allen & Unwin Rourke Francis E Bureaucracy, Politics and Public Policy, Little Brown A detailed reading guide will be issued In this subject. EXAMINATION Not more than one 3-hour paper. Written work done during the year will constitute all or part of the examination.

166-304 PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION 3 (PASS) Syllabus, books and examination as for Public Administration 2. In addition students will be required to submit extra essay work.

166-305 POLITICAL SOCIOLOGY 3(PASS) Dr A. Hughes, Dr G. Little A course of seminars and lectures, totalling three to four hours per week, throughout the year. SYLLABUS The first half of the course in 1978 will have a sociological focus; topics will cover a wide range, and may include patterns of political motivation and party preference; the behaviour of political elites; the politics of institutions such as prisons and psychiatric hospitals; industrial sociology; the dynamics of attitude change; the influence of a culture on socio-political processes and "reality construction" within a society. The course will have, as a certain component, social survey craft. The second half of the course in 1978 will have a "psycho-social" focus, i.e., It will draw on traditions In the social sciences which emphasize experience and the person. Topics will be outlined at the beginning of the academic year. They may be drawn from: the 'problem' of the individual-in-society or the individual-

441 Faculty of Arts

in-politics; authority and the individual; leadership and followership; etc. As well, students will be expected to train in 'intensive'—sometimes called 'qualitative'—methods of enquiry, particularly interviewing and the analysis of interviews. Students enrolling in this subject should normally have done at least one political science subject and have some knowledge of political theory. BOOKS Preliminary reading: Lasswell H D Psychopathology and Politics, Viking 1960 Davies A F Essays in Political Sociology, Cheshire 1972 Little G Politics and Personal Style, Nelson 1973 Prescribed books: Greenstein F Personality and Politics, Markham 1969 Hughes A Psychology and the Political Experience, Cambridge 1975 Warwick D P & Lininger C A The Sample Survey: Theory and Practice, McGraw-Hill 1975 ASSESSMENT The components of the annual examination will be decided at the beginning of the academic year. Students will be notified by published sheets on departmental notice-boards no later than March 31, 1978.

166-306 GOVERNMENT AND SOCIETY 3 (PASS) Mrs Jean Holmes A course of seminars and lectures totalling three hours per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS The course deals with political attitudes and beliefs in Australia, and the links between them and the political institutions. Comparisons with other Western political systems are drawn, with an emphasis on political participation and policy outcomes. A basic knowledge of political science concepts and empirical methods of analysis is assumed. BOOKS Preliminary reading: Davies M R & Lewis V Models of Political Systems, Macmillan 1971 Davies A F Encel S & Berry M J Australian Society, 3rd ed Cheshire 1977 Connell R W Ruling Class: Ruling Culture, CUP 1977 Prescribed books: Detailed reading guides will be issued throughout the year. ASSESSMENT Assessment in the subject will be based on written work done during the year and not more than one 3-hour examination. HONOURS DEGREE 1. SCHOOL OF POLITICAL SCIENCE (For possible combinations of this school with other honours schools, see pp. 519 ff. 442 Political Science

1. The course for the degree with honours in the school of Political Science comprises the following subjects: A. POLITICS 1 • В. Two subjects chosen from POLITICS 2A hofs; POLITICS 2В hons; International Relations 2 hens; Public Administration 2 hons. C. Two subjects chosen from POLITICS 3A hons; POLITICS 38 hofs; International Relations 3 huns; Government and Society 3 hofs; Public Administration 3 hons; Political Sociology 3 hofs. D. Two courses in Politics 4 selected from the range of courses offered in the 4th year of the course. E. A pass sequence (i.e. one subject at grade 1 and grade 2 levels) In a discipline other than Political Science. 2. The course for the degree with honours in the school of Political Science consists of a first (preliminary) year and three years in the honours school, as set out below:

First (Preliminary) Year: A. POLITICS 1. В . Three other Grade 1 Arts subjects, one of which should be selected to form the first part of a two-subject sequence supporting or complementing an honours course In Political Science. It is strongly recommended that another of these subjects should be part 1 of a foreign language. Second Year: (a) The general requirements for admission to the honours school of Political Science are a suitable standard (usually the equivalent of first or second class honours) in POLITICS 1 • and passes in three other first year subjects. Students who do not secure an honour in POLITICS 1 • are not automatically debarred from the honours school, but they may only be admitted with the approval of the chairman of the department. (b) Students entering the honours school of Political Science shall take in their second year: Two of POLITICS 2A hofs; POLITICS 2В hons; International Relations 2 hons; Public Administration 2 hons. In addition students must take an approved Grade 2 pass subject in a discipline other than Political Science forming a two-subject sequence with a subject taken in the first year. (c) Students who fail to gain first or second class honours in the examination in Political Science subjects at the end of this year will normally not be permitted to continue in the honours school.

Third Year: (a) Two of POLITICS 3A hofs; POLITICS 3В hons; International Rela- tions 3 hons; Government and Society 3 hons; Public Administration 3 hons: Political Sociology 3 hofs. In addition students may take a further pass subject or approved course of study. Students may use this opportunity to complete a pass major in another discipline, to do an additional political science subject, or to do a reading course in a foreign language. (b) Methods of Research in Political Science, a series of seminars arranged for students in the third year of the honours school. These

• Either Politics 1A or 18 or 1C.

443 Faculty of Arts

seminars are intended to assist students in the selection of topics for their final year theses. (c) Students will not be permitted to proceed to the fourth year in Political Science unless they secure a satisfactory honours standard in the third year examinations. (d) Students who are unable to proceed to the fourth year, may. If their results have been adequate, apply to the faculty for approval to be admitted to the degree of Bachelor of Arts, Ordinary. Fourth Year: Two parts of Politics 4 and the completion of a final year honours thesis, embodying the results of independent research, of approximately 12,000 words on an approved subject.

з. Final Examination Examinations in the third and fourth year will be regarded as comprising a final examination in the school of Political Science and will normally consist of: (a) In the third year not more than two pap ers in each of the political science subjects taken in that year. (b) In the final year, not more than one paper in each of the two Politics 4 courses taken by the student. (c) Assessment of the final honours thesis and of other written work submitted during the final year. The thesis must be handed In at the beginning of third term.

Political Science in Combined Honours Courses The subjects required by the department for the combined honours degree courses involving Political Science are as follows: First Year: 166-101 POLITICS 1.• It is strongly recommended that students take, if possible, part 1 of a foreign language. Second Year: One second year political science subject at the honours level. Third Year: One third year political science subject at the honours level. Fourth Year: Politics 4A. A thesis of 12,000 words shell be submitted in Political Science, or a thesis of an agreed length shall be submitted to the two honours schools for joint examination, or a thesis shall be submitted in the other honours school in conformity with the regulations of that school.

166-261 POLITICS 2А (HoNS) 166-262 POLITICS 2В (HoNS) 166-361 POLITICS 3A (HoNS) 166-362 POLITICS 3В (HoNS) • Either Politica 1A or 1B or 1C. Political Science

Units offered: 166-001 American Politics and Society (Pass unit) 186-002 Problems of American Politics (Pass-or-Honours unit) 166-003 Western European Politics (Pass unit) 166-004 Indian Politics and Society (Pass unit) 166-005 Chinese Politics and Society (Pass unit) 168-008 Soviet Politics and Society (Pass unit) 166-007 Communist Political Theory (Honours unit) 166-008 Political Development ( Нопоига unit) 166-009 Stratification, Power and Leadership (Pass-or-Honours unit) 166-010 Quantitative Methods in Political Research (Honours unit) The honours subjects Politics 2A (hofs), Politics 2 В (bons), Politics (hols) each consist of two pass units plus one 3А (hofs) and Politics 3В honours unit. The honours units available in 1978 are Problems of American Politics; Stratification, Power and Leadership (both of which are also available as pass units) and Communist Political Theory. The two further honours units, Political Development and Quantitative Methods in Political Research, will normally be taken only In the third year of the honours degree. The syllabuses for units 166-001 to 166-006, and for 166-009, may be found above on pp. 436 ff. The syllabuses for units 166-007, 166-008 and 166-010 are listed below. Students will be required to submit essays in at least two of the units undertaken. Students will be required to attend lectures and tutorials in all three units.

EXAMINATION Not more than three 2-hour papers. Written work done during the year will also constitute part of the assessment in this subject.

166-007 COMMUNIST POLITICAL THEORY

Mr L. G. Churchward and others A course of one seminar a week throughout the academic year. This Is an honours unit available to 2nd and 3rd year honours degree students /38 (hens). If and to students enrolled in Politics 2А/2В (hens) or ЗА numbers permit the course may also be available for grade 3 pass students on special application to the lecturer in charge. Students will be required to submit at least one long essay (3,000-4,000 words) during the course.

В O 0КЅ: Recommended for preliminary reading: Meyer A G Communism, 3rd ed Random House 1967 Tucker R C The Marxian Revolutionary Idea, Norton 1969 Mills C W The Marxists, Laurel 1962 Schram S R The Political Thought of Mao Tse-tung, Penguin 1969 Detailed reading guides will be issued throughout the course.

EXAMINATION Not more than one 2-hour paper. Written work done during the year will also contribute part of the assessment in this course.

445 Faculty of Arts

166-008 POLITICAL DEVELOPMENT

(Not available in 1978) Mr D. F. Miller A weekly seminar throughout the year. This course will normally be available only to third year students.

SYLLABUS An introduction to the study of change. In particular, an examination of the formation and change of "consciousness" and its relation to social, cultural and political change. While the emphasis of the course is theoretical, empirical case-studies from both "underdeveloped" and modern societies will also be included. Students will be required to submit two essays of approximately 3,000 words each.

BOOKS Detailed reading guides will be issued throughout the year.

EXAMINATION Not more than one 2-hour paper. Written work done during the year will also constitute part of the assessment in this unit.

166-010 QUANTITATIVE METHODS IN POLITICAL RESEARCH Mr K. G. Armstrong (This course is normally only open to students in the third year of the pure or combined honours school of Political Science and to M.A. Preliminary students at an equivalent stage of their studies. In Politics ЗА (Ions) it can be taken instead of one of the pass units, and it may be possible to take it as a replacement for part of another 3rd-year honours subject. It can also be taken as a voluntary additional course, with or without assessment.) A weekly seminar throughout the second half of the academic year, together with a series of practical instruction sessions on the use of electronic calculators and the department's interactive computer terminal. SYLLABUS An introduction to the quantitative analysis of political data. The course aims to equip students not only to understand an increased proportion of the contemporary literature of Political Science but also to engage in their own quantitative research for the purposes of the final honours thesis.

ASSESSMENT Assessment will be based on a series of short exercises during the course and on one longer project, the precise nature of which will be discussed with students at the commencement of the course.

166-263 INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS 2 (IONS) A course of lectures as for the ordinary degree together with regular seminars throughout the academic year. Students are required to submit extra written work and to prepare class papers. 446 Political Science

SYLLABUS (1) As for the ordinary degree. (2) A study of international relations theory with special emphasis on the role of values and ideology. BOOKS Detailed reading guides will be issued throughout the year. EXAMINATION Not more than two 3-hour papers. Written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination.

166-363 INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS 3 (HONS) As for International Relations 2 (Ions) but this subject will be taken by 3rd year honours students only.

166-264 PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION 2 (HONS) L. G. Peres A course of lectures and/or tutorials as for the ordinary degree, together with one honours seminar each week throughout the academic year. SYLLABUS (1) As for the ordinary degree. (2) Some aspects of organizational analysis. BOOKS (1) As for the ordinary degree. (2) Detailed reading guides for the honours seminars will be issued. EXAMINATION Assessment will be based on written work done during the year.

166-364 PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION 3 (HONS) As above for Public Administration 2 Ions.

166-365 POLITICAL SOCIOLOGY 3 (HONS) The honours component of the subject will be decided at the beginning of the academic year. Students will be notified by published sheets on departmental noticeboards no later than 31 March, 1978.

166-366 GOVERNMENT AND SOCIETY 3 (HONS) A course of seminars and lectures totalling up to four hours per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS (1) As for the ordinary degree. (2) Pubic policy formulation In Australia. BOOKS Detailed reading guides will be issued throughout the year.

447 Faculty of Arts

ASSESSMENT Assessment in this subject will be based on written work done during the year and not more than two 3-hour examinations.

166-401 POLITICS 4A A weekly seminar for 4th year honours students dealing with various problems in political analysis. Selected texts and detailed reading guides will be announced at the beginning of the course. EXAMINATION Not more than one 3-hour paper. Written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination.

166-402 POLITICS 4B A weekly seminar for 4th year honours students dealing with the contribution of some leading writers to political studies. Selected texts and detailed reading guides will be announced at the beginning of the course. EXAMINATION Not more than one 3-hour paper. Written work done during the year will constitute part of the examination.

166-499 M.A. PRELIMINARY For general information and procedure for enrolling see pp. 51, 59.

MASTER OF ARTS 166-601 I. SCHOOL OF POLITICAL SCIENCE Candidates will prepare a thesis on an approved subject and will be advised as to a suitable course of reading. A discussion class may be arranged. Candidates may be expected to pass an oral examination covering the general field of their research. An entry form for examination for higher degrees must be submitted to the Registrar. Three copies of each thesis (А4, typewritten, double-spaced) should be submitted, one of which will be deposited in the University Library. The thesis should normally be submitted for examination within two years from the commencement of candidature for M.A. by full-time candidates and within four years by part-time candidates. Except in special circumstances and with the permission of the faculty no thesis or course work will be examined unless the candidate presents for examination within four years from the commencement of his candidature or, in the event of his having been granted leave of absence for the maximum period of one year, within five years from the commencement of his candidature.

166-801 POST-GRADUATE DIPLOMA IN PUBLIC POLICY The pre-requisite for admission to the Diploma course is a Bachelor's Degree (or its equivalent). Applicants will normally have some work experience. They will have demonstrated in their work-life or in their

448 Political Science

studies, or both, a clear interest in public policy. The duration of the course should normally be two years of part-time study or one year full-time. The first year is concerned primarily with the setting of theoretical, historical, sociological and institutional contexts. Students proceed in second year to research in problems in public policy and the application of a variety of analytic techniques to them.

166-811 FIRST YEAR SYLLABUS Each first year course will be at a level equivalent to fourth year honours and will consist of one two-hour seminar per week. Students will be assessed on written reports submitted during the year. A maximum of 8,000 words per course will be required.

166-812 RECENT DEVELOPMENTS IN AUSTRALIAN PUBLIC POLICY Professor John Power The course will have three main sections which will focus in turn on recent policy developments in the Commonwealth, State and regional/ local spheres. Recommended for reference: Spann R Public Administration in Australia, NSW Government Printer 1973 Reports of Committees of Inquiry into the Australian Government, Government of Victoria and the Government of South Australia 1974 1975 and 1976 Report of the Royal Commission into the Australian Post Office 1975 Richardson J E Patterns of Australian Federalism, Research Monograph No. 1 Centre for Research into Federal Financial Relations ANU 1973 Mathews, R L Fiscal Federalism: Retrospect and Prospect, ANU Can- berra 1974 Intergovernmental Relations in Australia, A & R Sydney 1975 First Report of the Commonwealth Task Force on Co-ordination in Welfare and Health (the Bailey Report) Proposals for change in the Administration and Delivery of Programmes and Services, AGPS 1977 Holmes J The Government of Victoria, Queensland University Press 1976 Power J & Nelson G eds The Regional Administrator in the Riveriva, Canberra Series in Administrative Studies 1, 1976

166-813 POLITICAL AND ADMINISTRATIVE LEADERSHIP AND PUBLIC POLICY Dr Bruce Headey The first section of the course will deal with the political, social and economic factors which affect policy outputs and outcomes. We shall consider recent attempts to develop models (both mathematical and non-mathematical) of policy processes end to discover characteristic patterns of both crisis and routine decision-making. In the second section of the course, methods and techniques (e.g. systems analysis, policy experiments, future studies) intended to promote greater ration-

P 449 Faculty of Arts

ality in policy making and programme evaluation will be reviewed. In the third section, we shall examine the roles and skills required of politicians and administrators as they seek to exercise effective leadership in the formulation and implementation of policy. The course will have an international comparative perspective; comparisons will be drawn between Australian, North American and Western European political and administrative leadership and policy processes. Recommended for reference: Simon Herbert Administrative Behaviour, 1957 ed Downs Anthony Inside Bureaucracy, 1966 Headey Bruce British Cabinet Ministers: The Roles of Politicians in Executive Office, 1974 Neustadt Richard E Presidential Power, 1960 Barber James D The Presidential Character, 1972 Putnam Robert D The Comparative Study of Political Elites, 1976 Armstrong John A The European Civil Service, 1974 Almond Gabriel A et al Crisis, Choice & Change: Historical Studies of Political Development, 1973 ledlo Hugh Modern Social Politics in Britain & Sweden, 1974 Allison Graham T Essence of Decision: The Cuban Missile Crisis, 1971 Pressman Jeffrey & Wildaysky Aaron Implementation, 1973 Parkin Frank Class Inequality & Political Order, 1972 Wilensky Harold L The Welfare State & Equality 1975 Caro R A The Power Br ker: Robert Moses & the Fall of New York, 1975 Wilson J Q Political Organizations, 1973 Bardach E The Skill Factor in Politics, 1972

166-821 SECOND YEAR SYLLABUS Each student will be required to attend two 2-hour seminars as follows.

166-822 PUBLIC POLICY AND FUNCTIONAL PROGRAMMES Professor John Power A range of functional programmes will be appraised and the inter-relations between them examined in order to gain an understanding of the determinants of public policy decisions, their impact and effectiveness. Wherever possible, this understanding will be heightened through interaction between graduate students and practising programme administrators, typically in the context of an intensive short course.

166-823 THE ANALYSIS OF PROBLEMS IN POLICY MAKING

Professor John Power and others Graduate students will be encouraged to expose policy problems encountered in previous courses and work situations to a range of potentially useful techniques drawn from such fields as micro-economics, operations research and organization theory/management science.

BOOKS Recommended for further reference: Dupre J S Cameron D M McKechnie G H& Rotenburg Federalism and Policy Development, 1973

450 Psychology

Simeon R Federal-Provincial Diplomacy: The Making of Recent Policy in Canada, 1973 Friend J K Power J M& Yewlett C J L Public Policy: the lntercorporate Dimension, 1974 Smith В L R & Hague D C eds The Dilemma of Accountability in Modern Government, 1971 Lindblom C E The Intelligence of Democracy: Decision Making Through Mutual Adjustment, 1965 Self P Administrative Theories and Politics, 1972 Jones M A Organizational and Social Planning in Australian Local Government, 1977 ASSESSMENT At the end of the year, students will submit a report on research undertaken in the context of these two courses. For example, a student could report on the usefulness of AIDA (a planning technique developed at the Institute for Operational Research) for policy makers operating on the interface between two functional areas (say, health and education).

DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY

166-701 SCHOOL OF POLITICAL SCIENCE See the regulation, p. 63; also p. 52.

DEPARTMENT OF PSYCHOLOGY Chairman of Department: Professor A. J. WEARING, M.A. (Adel.), Ph.D. (III), M.B.Ps.S., M.A.Ps.S. Professors of Psychology: Professor S. B. HAMMOND, B.A. (W.Aust.), Ph.D., F.A.Ps.S. Professor G. V. STANLEY, B.A., Ph.D. (W.Aust.), A.B.Ps.S., F.A.Ps.S. (Enrolment procedures and numbering of subjects may be reviewed for 1978. Students should consult the faculty office and the department to ensure they are correctly enrolled)

INTRODUCTION Psychology is that branch of scientific enquiry concerned with human behaviour and experience. It is related to physiology and zoology on the one hand, and social sciences such as sociology, political science, economics, history and policy science on the other. The profession of psychology involves putting into practice knowledge of psychology and related disciplines, and carrying out research to extend that knowledge. The psychology course thus involves training in the scientific study of behaviour. This naturally starts from what everyone knows of human nature, but is very much more detailed, elaborate, and exact. The courses therefore include training in methods of analyzing and assessing behaviour, including those of statistical analysis and inference. The major fields of study include child development, perception, behaviour of groups, attitudes, personality, abilities, cognition, organizational psychology, neuropsychology, and various kinds of abnormal behaviour. Psychologists are employed mainly by government departments, both Commonwealth and State, especially those concerned with labour, industry, education, and mental health, and also by public hospitals. The field of industrial and commercial employment is growing. Just

451 Faculty of Arts

what the psychologist does depends of course on the employing body. The work may be concerned with advising young men and women on how best to find and settle into a job suited to their capacities and interests or with advising school children and their parents on difficulties encountered in work at school. Or it may be concerned with the special problems of handicapped persons (deaf, partially crippled, or with speech defects), or with the psychological examination and treatment of patients. In industry, the psychologist may deal with problems of social relations (morale, absenteeism, managerial problems, and so on), of ergonomics (the study of human factors in complex engineering systems), or of consumer research. These various fields are also engaged in by psychologists in the armed forces. Many psychologists are engaged in scientific research, not only in universities and colleges of advanced education but also in government departments. Membership of the Australian Psychological Society, which amounts to recognition of professional status, requires four years of academic training in psychology and two years of supervised postgraduate experience. Those intending a career in psychology should therefore become candidates for the honours degree. A basic training in psychology Is considered relevant to many openings in the Education Department, although details vary, and in general it is desirable that "teaching subjects" should also be undertaken at undergraduate level.

AVAILABLE COURSES The 'ordinary' degree. This is the basic course, consisting of the sequence Psychology 1, 2A and ЭА leading to a major. The degree with honours. This consists of the three subjects of the 'ordinary' degree, together with an additional second year subject Psychology 2B (honours), and additional units taken in the third and fourth years of the honours course. For admission to provisional honours at the beginning of the second year, a student should have obtained honours In Psychology 1 and passes at least in the other three subjects. To be considered for admission to Final Honours a student normally should have obtained adequate honours in the courses of Psychology 2A and 28, which together comprise provisional honours. N.B. The additional units of the honours course are not open to non- honours candidates or to part-time students. Subjects to study at school. In view of the mathematical and statistical work in Psychology, mathematics at Higher School Certificate is now virtually essential for prospective students. (HSC General Mathematics is an especially suitable preparation.) A science subject (preferably Biology) is also very desirable. A student can also study Psychology in the Science faculty or in the faculty of Economics andCommerce (see the respective handbooks). Finally, note that some Psychology is required for other courses, such as those in Social Work and Criminology, and is of special value to those who are intending to become teachers.

THE BEHAVIOURAL STUDIES TERMINAL SEQUENCE Behavioural Studies 1 and 2 are offered as a first and second year sequence for students who wish to study Psychology but whose primary interest is in another discipline. It Is not normally possible to proceed 452 Psychology

from Behavioural Studies 1 to Psychology 2A or 26, and Behavioural Studies 1 and 2 do not constitute prerequisites for third year courses In Psychology.

ORDINARY DEGREE (Details for the honours degree are set out at the end of this section.)

SUBJECTS OFFERED 171-100 Psychology 1 171-200 Psychology 2A 171-300 Psychology 3A

MAJOR Psychology 1, Psychology 2A, Psychology 3A (taken in separate years). This is the only course that is accepted as a first and single major in Psychology. Criminology A does not form part of any major. The attention of students Is drawn to faculty regulations concerning prescribed written work, laboratory work, etc., on p. 23 of the Handbook.

171-100 PSYCHOLOGY PART 1 A course of two lectures per week with three hours per week practical and discussion classes throughout the year. SYLLABUS The development of behavioural patterns, individual differences and personality. Biological and social foundations of behaviour, Including perception and learning. A programmed Introduction to quantitative methods. No formal lectures are given In Quantitative Methods. Instead, students are expected to spend 1%-2 hours per week, for 15 weeks, working through a series of programmed manuals which cover the Quantitative Methods syllabus. BOOKS Preliminary reading: Miller G A Psychology, the Science of Mental Life, Pelican 1968 Prescribed textbooks: The titles marked with an asterisk are expected to be In the hands of every student. Chaplin J P Dictionary of Psychology, Dell paperback 1975 •Hllgard E R Atkinson R C & Atkinson R L Introduction to Psychology, 6th ed Harcourt Brace Jovanovltch 1975 All students with less than HSC mathematics competence or who doubt their ability to deal with the material in the course should buy and start studying the following paperback text: Bashaw W L Mathematics for Statistics, Wiley 1969 EXAMINATION Examinations will take place during and at the end of the year. Labora- tory reports and other practical work must be submitted at specified times. 453 Faculty of Arts

171-200 PSYCHOLOGY PART 2A A course of 72 lectures, 48 hours of discussion and practical work through the year.

SYLLABUS The course consists of four units, all compulsory. They are 171-241, 204, 205 and 206.

171-204 LANGUAGE ACQUISITION (List A)

The course will examine theories of language acquisition; development of the ability to produce and comprehend syntax; acquisition of word meanings; the influence of environmental factors on language acquisition.

BOOKS Dale P Language Development: Structure and Function, 2nd ed Holt Rinehart & Winston 1976

171-205 COGNITIVE DEVELOPMENT (List A)

(a) Theories of cognitive development with particular emphasis on Jean Piaget's theory. Examination of Piagetian and other empirical and experimental work in technological and non-technological cultures. (b) Perceptual development, with primary emphasis on the development of vision and audition in young children. Recent studies of perception in human infants will be examined and comparisons made with animal studies. Relevant details about the neurophysiological development of the visual and auditory systems will be discussed and the etiology and manifestation of perceptual disorders in childhood will be considered.

BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: •Baldwin A L Theories of Development, Wiley 1967 • Bower T G R Development in Infancy, Freeman 1974

171-206 AFFECTIVE AND SOCIAL DEVELOPMENT (List A)

(a) Theoretical formulations and empirical studies relating to psychoanalytic theory. (b) Socialization process and outcomes. Major theories and evidence will be examined, with special reference to aggression, moral development, and competence.

BOOKS Prescribed text: •Baldwin A L Theories of Development, Wiley 1967 Recommended reading: Bowlby J Attachment and Loss, Vol. I Attachment, Pelican 1971 Mannoni O Freud, Vintage Books 1974 - Stafford-Clark D What Freud Really Seid, Pelican 1975

454 Psychology

171-208 LANGUAGE AND SOCIAL BEHAVIOUR (List B)•

The study of language In its social context: criteria for comparing human language and animal "language"; introduction to sociolinguistic concepts; the functions of language in social settings; languages and social class; the relationship between verbal and non-verbal communication.

BOOKS Preliminary reading: Farb P Word Play: What Happens when People Talk, Bantam 1975

171-209 INFORMATION PROCESSING (List B)•

A unified approach to the complexities of skilled human performance. The capacities which the human brings to the performance of motor and Intellectual skills; limitations in human ability to sense, perceive, store and transmit information; experimental analysis of the flow of information within the human nervous system; applications of information processing principles to the study of man-machine systems.

BOOKS Prescribed textbook: Kеele S W Attention and Human Performance, Goodyear 1973

171-210 ORGANIZATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY (List B)• Theories and research in the social psychology of organizations.

BOOKS To be advised.

171-213 DEVELOPMENTAL ISSUES (List B)•

Prerequisite or Co-requisite: One of either 204, 205, or 208. The course will cover in a detailed manner a limited number of specific developmental phenomena. The emphasis will be on research methodology, empirical findings and theoretical interpretations. Specific areas may change from year to year, and will be chosen from social, emotional and cognitive behaviours characteristic of normal and abnormal behaviour.

BOOKS To be announced at the beginning of each year.

171-223 INTERPRETATION OF SOCIAL RESEARCH (List B)•

The course will cover selected theories and methods of research in social psychology with particular attention paid to (a) the relationship between methodology and the interpretation of research findings, and (b) the relevance of the selected theories and methods to contemporary social problems.

BOOKS To be advised.

• Not available In 1978.

455 Faculty of Arts

171-241 QUANTITATIVE METHODS Analysis of variance, linear regression, and various correlational statistics. Prescribed textbook: 'Керреl G Design and Analysis: a Researcher's Handbook, Prentice- Hall 1973 Recommended textbook: Guilford J P Fundamental Statistics in Psychology and Education, 5th ed McGraw Hill 1973 EXAMINATION All examinations will take place during or at the end of units. Reports must be submitted at times to be specified on the practical and observa- tional work relating to the course and candidates must submit satisfactory workbooks.

171-300 PSYCHOLOGY PART 3A A course of 60 lectures, 24 tutorials, and 40 hours of practical work. The tutorials and practical work are presented in a coordinated manner so as to complement and to integrate the lecture units. The course consists of units 307, 320, 333. 341 and one other unit. Stu- dents may be offered a choice from 171-321 and 171-334. Prerequisite: Psychology Part 2A.

171-307 PERSONALITY INTEGRATION Selected personality theories and issues in personality psychology. Commentaries on the concepts and assumptions of the field and the relations to neighbouring disciplines. BOOKS Prescribed text(s): to be advised. EXAMINATION At end of year or an essay.

171-320 PSYCHOSOCIAL THEORY Process and analytic models of individual and group behaviour in social contexts. BOOKS Prescribed text(s): to be advised. EXAMINATION At end of year or an essay.

171-321 METHODOLOGY IN PSYCHOSOCIAL RESEARCH Conceptual issues; measurement and model building in contemporary psychosocial research. 456 Psychology

BOOKS Prescribed text(s): to be advised. EXAMINATION At end of year or an essay.

171-333 PSYCHOLOGY OF ADJUSTMENT Defining the field. Conceptual models of behavioural development and change. Behaviour modification. Research tactics. BOOKS Prescribed text(s): to be advised. EXAMINATION At end of year or an essay.

171-334 PSYCHOPATHOLOGY A Overview and theoretical orientations to behavioural disorders. General clinical issues. BOOKS Prescribed text(s): to be advised. EXAMINATION At end of year or an essay.

171-341 MEASUREMENT: PERSONALITY AND ABILITIES The theory and practice of personality and ability measurement. BOOKS Prescribed text(s): to be advised. EXAMINATION At end of year or an essay (to be advised), together with a mld-unit test.

171-102 BEHAVIOURAL STUDIES PART 1 A course of two lectures per week with three hours per week practical and discussion classes throughout the year. SYLLABUS The biological and social foundations of psychological enquiry. Patterns of individual and interactive behaviour. Contemporary psychological theories and their application. A short programmed introduction to quantitative methods. BOOKS Preliminary reading: Miller G A Psychology the Science of Mental Life, Pelican 1966 Prescribed textbooks: The titles marked with an asterisk are expected to be In the hands of every student.

457 Faculty of Arts

Chaplin J P Dictionary of Psychology, Dell paperback 1975 •Hiigard E R Atkinson R C & Atkinson R L Introduction to Psychology, 6th ed Harcourt Brace Jovanovitch 1975 All students with less than HSC mathematics competence or who doubt their ability to deal with the material in the course should buy and start studying the following paperback text: Bashaw W L Mathematics for Statistics, Wiley 1969 EXAMINATION Examinations will take place during and at the end of the year. Labora- tory and other practical work reports must be submitted at specified times. 171-203 BEHAVIOURAL STUDIES 2 Students wishing to enrol for this subject should have passed either Behavioural Studies 1 or Psychology 1. Behavioural Studies 2 is the second and terminal part of the Behavioural Studies sequence and does not constitute a prerequisite for third year courses in the department of Psychology. However, the sequence is recognized as constituting the first two years of certain approved mixed majors in the faculty of Arts. Details of the subject(s) which can be taken in an approved sequence are available from the faculty of Arts. COURSE DETAILS A course of 72 lectures, and weekly discussion and/or practical classes through the year. SYLLABUS The course consists of four units, 204, 205, 206 and 266.

171-204 LANGUAGE ACQUISITION Details of this unit are given in the entry for Psychology Part 2A.

171-205 COGNITIVE DEVELOPMENT Details of this unit are given in the entry for Psychology Part 2A.

171-206 AFFECTIVE AND SOCIAL DEVELOPMENT• Details of this unit are given in the entry for Psychology Part 2A. 171-208 LANGUAGE AND SOCIAL BEHAVIOUR Details of this unit are given in the entry for Psychology Part 2A. 171-209 INFORMATION PROCESSING' Details of this unit are given in the entry for Psychology Part 2A. 171-210 ORGANIZATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY' The details of this unit are given in the entry for Psychology Part 2A. 171-213 DEVELOPMENTAL ISSUES' Prerequisite or Corequisite: One of either 204, 205 or 206. The details of this unit are given in the entry for Psychology Part 2A. 171-266 SOCIAL RESEARCH METHODS Details of this unit are given in the entry for Psychology 29 (Provisional Honours) (p. 460). • Not available In 1978. 458 Psychology

The course will cover selected theories and methods of research in social psychology with particular attention paid to (a) the relationship between methodology end the interpretation of research findings, and (b) the relevance of the selected theories and methods to contemporary social problems.

EXAMINATION Assessment will take place during and at the end of the year. Laboratory or other practical work reports must be submitted at specified times. Note: The remaining units in the second year Psychology programme may be open to Behavioural Studies 2 students, but special application must be made to the lecturer in charge.

HONOURS DEGREE K. SCHOOL OF PSYCHOLOGY The degree with honours. This consists of the three subjects of the "ordinary" degree, together with an additional second year subject Psy- chology 28 (honours), and additional units taken in the third and fourth years of the honours course. For admission to provisional honours at the beginning of second year, a student should have obtained honours in Psychology 1 and passes at least in the other three subjects. To be considered for admission to final honours a student normally should have obtained adequate honours in the courses of Psychology 2A and 28, which together comprise provisional honours. N.B. The additional units of the honours course are not open to non- honours candidates or to part-time students.

171-100 PSYCHOLOGY 1 As for Psychology 1.

171-200 PSYCHOLOGY 2A (HONOURS) As for Psychology 2A (pass).

171-260 PSYCHOLOGY 26 (PROVISIONAL HONOURS) A course of 52 lectures and 100 hours of practical work sessions through the year. Prerequisites: Honours in Psychology 1 and enrolment In or completion of Psychology 2A. SYLLABUS This course consists of four units, all compulsory; they are units 212, 261, 263 and 266.

171-212 NEUROPSYCHOLOGY A Functional organization of the brain In relation to man's higher processes, e.g. perception, memory, learning, thinking, speech, emotion and attention. Prescribed textbook: •Luria A R The Working Brain, Penguin 1973 EXAMINATION During and at the end of the unit.

459 Faculty of Arts

171-261 PERCEPTION A Structure and function of perceptual sub-systems. In particular, vision and hearing with emphasis on human pattern perception processes. Prescribed textbook: Day R H & Stanley G V eds Studies in Perception, Univ of WA Press & Monash Press 1977 EXAMINATION During and at the end of the unit.

171-263 QUANTITATIVE METHODS В Non-parametric statistics and advanced analysis of variance designs. Prescribed textbooks: • Керреl G Design and Analysis: a Researcher's Handbook, Prentice- Hail 1973 •Siegel S Non-parametric Statistics, McGraw-Hill 1956 EXAMINATION During the unit.

171-265 INFORMATION PROCESSING В A corequisite of this unit is Information Processing A (Unit 209). The course will examine recent research issues In the areas of sensory storage, word recognition, semantic memory, theories of attention, movement control. EXAMINATION During and at the end of the unit.

171-266 SOCIAL RESEARCH METHODS Methods of obtaining, analysing and interpreting data from large and small samples. Prescribed textbook: •Gardner G Social Surveys for Social Planners, Holt Rinehart & Winston 1976 EXAMINATION At the end of the unit.

171-267 FORMAL MODELS An introduction to the use of logico-mathematical systems for the representation of behavioural processes. Models of structure and process; deterministic and stochastic methods. Prerequisite: It is highly desirable that students who take the unit should have taken some 100-level courses in the department of Mathematics.

FINAL HONOURS Candidates for the degree of Bachelor of Arts with Honours in Psychology: (a) must have been admitted as provisional honours candidates (normally on the basis of honours in Psychology 1 ); and • Not available In 1978. 460 Psychology

(b) to be considered for admission to final honours at the beginning of third year should have obtained adequate honours in Psychology 2A and in Psychology 28; (c) must qualify for the ordinary degree of BA; and (d) must obtain honours in Psychology ЭА and in the additional units required for final honours.

THIRD YEAR Full-time third year honours students should enrol for both 171-300 Psychology ЭА and 171-360 Psychology 3 (Hопs).

171-300 PSYCHOLOGY ЭА See pp. 456 ff.

171-360 PSYCHOLOGY 3 (HONOURS) This subject comprises four compulsory units, 383, 388 and 391 (double unit), and three optional units to be chosen from the list below.

171-383 QUANTITATIVE METHODS C An introduction to multivariate data analysis and an elementary course In Fortran programming and the use of some computer statistical packages for psychology.

171-388 THEORY IN PSYCHOLOGY A Principal psychological concepts in their historical context. The development of psychology as a systematic enquiry. An analytic examination of some major theoretical systems, e.g. psychoanalytic theory, learning theory, and neurophysiologlcal models of behaviour. The relationship between methods and epistemological foundations of these disciplines. Formalization in psychology. Theories as deductive systems.

171-391 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY SEMINAR (Double Unit) Discussion of research methodologies and procedures in psychology. Description by staff members of their own research activities.

FOURTH YEAR 171-460 PSYCHOLOGY 4A (HONOURS) (full-time students) 171-461 PSYCHOLOGY 4В (HONOURS) (Part-time students, year 1) 171-462 PSYCHOLOGY 4C (HONOURS) (pan-time students, year 2) The fourth year honours course will comprise one compulsory unit, 389, a research project thesis and three optional units to be chosen from the list below. 461 Faculty of Arts

Students who wish to complete this course in one year of full-time study should enrol for 171-460 Psychology 4A (Ions). Students who have permission to complete the course over two years of part-time study should enrol for 171461 Psychology 46 (Ions.) in the first of these two years and 171-462 Psychology 4C (Ions.) in the second.

171-389 THEORY IN PSYCHOLOGY В The logic of scientific concept formation in the natural and in the social sciences in so far as they are relevant to psychological theory. The role of artificial and natural language in psychological theory construction. The systematic analysis of the differences between structural and epistemological characteristics in a variety of psychological theories. Chom- sky's conception of mind and language. The role of value concepts in tasks will be studied in depth and, where appropriate, related to problems in language development, human learning and cross-cultural research. RESEARCH PROJECT THESIS This is a substantial research thesis which is normally commenced in fourth year and submitted by the end of that year. OPTIONAL UNITS Three of the fallowing units are to be selected in third year and three in fourth year, in consultation with the staff of the department. Not all of the units will be offered in any one year; the department Manuel lists the units available in 1978.

171-363 INTERACTION IN GROUPS An experiential learning group where the data for study are the interactions between members as they occur.

171-364 PSYCHOLOGY OF LANGUAGE A A study of sociolinguistic phenomena. Semantic and syntactic factors in sentence production. Social class and speech codes.

171-365 COGNITIVE PROCESSES Problem solving and decision making, the structure of intelligence, concept formation and attainment, creativity, language and thought.

171-366 INFORMATION PROCESSING C Perceptual processing; pattern recognition; memory processes. acquisition, storage, retrieval.

171-368 COGNITIVE DEVELOPMENT В The main focus of interest in the course will be on the following two developmental transitions: (i) preoperational to concrete operational thought; (ii) concrete operational to formal operational thought. Conservation, classification and formal operational tasks will be studied and. where appropriate, related problems in language development. Human learning and cross-cultural research. 462 Psychology

171-389 and -382 APPLIED PERSONALITY THEORY aпд THEORIES OF PERSONALITY CHANGE By linking these two units, a more flexible syllabus is possible. Unit 369 concerns using personality theories to understand and explain the individual person (e.g., via case studies, biographies) and the small social unit (e.g., groups, families). Unit 382 concerns some theoretical aspects of therapy, counselling and other interventions in both two-person and group settings. It is proposed to use a self-analytic group framework for both units, with roughly equal emphasis on experiential learning within the group, seminar- type discussions of case material, and didactic presentations of theory, 171-370 PSYCHOLOGY OF LANGUAGE B An introduction to psycholinguistic theorizing. Topics will include: Syntax recognition; semantic factors in sentence processing; the mental lexicon; language acquisition.

171-371 PERCEPTION B Models for pattern recognition and perceptual development, neurophysiological and behavioural evidence on contour and feature detection, computer simulation pattern recognition systems, binocular vision and pattern coding, visual adaptation, eye-movements.

171-372 NEUROPSYCHOLOGY B The clinical relationship between neurology and psychology, Psycho- logical assessment of the neurological patient. Functional localization. Theories of frontal lobe function. Temporal lobe dysfunction and memory deficit. Aprazia, aphasia, agnosia. Cerebral dominance, lateralization, the minor hemisphere. Split-brain studies in man. The effects of head injury. Vascular disturbances. Differentiation of functional and organic disorders. Convulsive disorders. The unit will consist of lectures and demonstrations of the assessment of neurological patients with a wide variety of procedures. 171-373 HUMAN PERFORMANCE Structure and function of perceptual-motor systems; reaction time phenomena, complex motor behaviour; monitoring and tracking performance.

171-374 PSYCHOPHYSICS Theories of sensory discrimination, theory of signal detection, information theory, integration theory. The course will cover basic quantitative methods and models for application in detection and recognition processes. The practicats will demonstrate applications of the models.

171-376 INTRODUCTION TO SIMULATION Techniques and applications of simulation procedures related to problems in behavioural science will be introduced and discussed. 171-377 SOCIAL INTERACTION PROCESSES Social research in organizations. Students will be required to present in class a critique of a recent research report. Subsequently this critique will be submitted formally for examination in this unit.

463 Faculty of Arts

171-378 INTRODUCTION TO OCCUPATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY (a) Occupational Choice and Vocational Guidance. Theories of occupational choice and career development. Vocational guidance techniques and their evaluation; and (b) Occupational Behaviour. Studies of job satisfaction and job performance. Psychological aspects of personnel practices.

171-379 INTERPERSONAL PROCESSES An introduction to theory and method of interpersonal relationships, in an experiential group setting. The main aim of this unit is to promote increased self understanding and interpersonal skills by studying the interactions between group members as they occur, and to relate these to relevant theory and research.

171-381 PSYCHOLOGY OF RELIGION Measurement of religious behaviour; relationships between religious and other psychological variables; theories of religious behaviour.

171-386 ASSESSMENT Problems of test construction, administration, scoring and interpretation. Concepts of reliability and validity in psychological measurement. Intro- duction to some measures of personality, attitudes, values and Interests. Response sets and other spurious factors. The ethical responsibilities of the tester. Note: practical work in the student's own time is required.

171-386 MODELS OF DATA IN SOCIAL SCIENCE Topics covered in this seminar may include fundamental measurement, uni- and multi-dimensional scaling, cluster analysis, as well as other models relating to the description of static and dynamic systems.

171-387 THE ANALYSIS OF CATEGORICAL DATA An examination of some advanced methods for analysing polychotomous data, especially (0, 1) data. Multivariate contingency tables with or without vacuus cells. Use of dummy quantal variables for metricizing categories. (As maximum likelihood techniques will be used extensively, it will be assumed that students have some knowledge of calculus.)

171-392 READING COURSE One of the student's units may be a course of approved reading under the supervision of a member of staff. The assessment of this unit is normally in the form of a theoretical essay. It is essential that the student consult with a member of staff before embarking on this unit.

171-393 COMMUNICATION AND SPECIFIC LEARNING DISORDERS Topics will include dyslexia, aphasia and other communication disorders in children; psychology of deafness. Both theoretical and practical aspects will be covered, including an introduction to assessment and therapy.

171-394 PSYCHOPATHOLOGY В An examination of symptoms, syndromes, and some of the categories and constructs used in psychopathology and psychodiagnosis. The medical model and its present day viability. Seminars by students on topical areas. 464 Psychology

171-395 MATHEMATICAL PSYCHOLOGY The nature and development of mathematical models for behavioural processes; deterministic and probabilistic models. Applications to latency phenomena and Interaction processes.

171-398 PSYCHOLOGY OF POLITICS Some theories of political socialization.

171-397 NEUROPSYCHOLOGY C The unit will be a workshop on the clinico-experimental assessment of the patient with suspected cerebral impairment. Participants will be expected to test patients in the clinic and to attend the weekly theoretical and case discussions. Students should familiarize themselves with the WAIS before the sessions commence.

171-398 PSYCHOLOGY OF WOMEN An examination of some physical, developmental and social determinants of personality. A critical examination of sex differences leading to a detailed study of the literature on sex differences in spatial ability.

MASTER OF ARTS 171-601 K. SCHOOL OF PSYCHOLOGY 1. All candidates are required to take part In a programme of seminars, lectures and laboratory work, and to submit a thesis based on advanced research on an approved topic. 2. Candidates accepted for courses leading to the Master's degree in Clinical Psychology, Occupational Psychology or Neuropsychology are required to study for not less than two years, and must obtain professional experience under approved supervision. All other candidates for the Master's degree are required to study for not less than one year full-time or an equivalent period pan-time. 3. Applications for admission to a course for the Master's degree should be made on the appropriate form. All intending students should consult the department Manual of Graduate Studies in which full details of requirements will be found. Note: There will be no intake of students into the MA Occupational Psychology course in 1978. 4. Three copies of each thesis (A4, typewritten, double-spaced) must be submitted, one of which will be deposited in the University Library. An entry form for examination for higher degrees must be submitted to the Registrar. The thesis should normally be submitted for examination within two years from the commencement of candidature for MA by full-time candidates and within four years by part-time candidates. Except for special circumstances and with the permission of the faculty no thesis or course work will be examined unless the candidate presents for examination within four years from the commencement of candidature or, in the event of having been granted leave of absence for the maximum period of one year, within five years from the commencement of candidature.

465 Faculty of Arts

DEPARTMENT OF RUSSIAN Chairman of Department: Mr P. CUBBERLEY, M.A. (Glas.) Professor: Professor R. D. SUSSEX, M.A. (Cant.), Ph.D. (Lend.) The University of Melbourne's department of Russian Language and Literature is the oldest in Australia. Degree courses began In 1946 and the department became fully independent in 1949. Three programmes leading to a University degree are offered: (1 ) A three-year pass course in Russian Language and Literature. (2) A four-year pure honours course in Russian Language and Literature. (3) A four-year combined honours course (see p. 449). The aim of the pass course in Russian is to give the students competence and fluency In the Russian language and to acquaint them with some aspects of Russian literature. The honours courses aim to provide students with a deeper knowledge of Russian language and literature, and to prepare them for postgraduate work in one of these fields, including the ability to write their theses in Russian. Provision is made for the supervision of such postgraduate work. In addition to this, the department offers a grade 1 course, Russian Literature and Society, plus a grade 2 half-subject, Soviet Writers and Society, for students with no knowledge of Russian, the aim of which is to acquaint such students with the heritage of Russian culture. Russian Literature and Society is strongly recommended for all students of Russian.

COURSES OFFERED 176-101 Russian 1A (for beginners) 176-103 Russian 1 176-104 Russian Literature and Society 176-201 Russian 2A Pass (Syllabus as for 176-103) 176-203 Russian 2 Pass 176-204 Soviet Writers and Society (Half-Subject) 176-211 Soviet Studies 2 comprising 176-204 166-006 176-301 Russian ЭА Pass (Syllabus as for 176-203) 176-303 Russian 3 Pass Unit 1176-204 Unit Il 1 Unit to be chosen from units for 176-362 176-263 Russian 2 Honours (Syllabus as for 176-203) 176-261 Russian 2A Honours (Syllabus as for 176-201) 176-262 Russian 28 Honours 176-266 Unit I Russian Language. 176-267 Unit Il Russian Literature. 176-363 Russian 3 Honours (Syllabus as for 176-303) 176-361 Russian 3A Honours (Syllabus as for 176-301) 176-362 Russian 39 Honours consisting of two of the following units: 176-371 Advanced Syntax and Stylistics 176-372 History of the Russian Language 176-373 Comparative Slavonic Philology 176-374 Advanced Translation into Russian 466 Russian

176-375 Pre-nineteenth century Russian Literature 176-376 Nineteenth century Russian Literature—first half 176-377 Nineteenth century Russian Literature—second half 176-378 Twentieth Century Russian Poetry 176-461 Russian 4A Honours Three of the units listed under 176-362 176-462 Russian 4В Honours Two of the units listed under 176-362 N.B. Russian 176-262 (Russian 2В Honours) and Russian 176-362 (Russian 3 В Honours) may be taken by PASS students to form an enriched or super-major in Russian.

176-101 RUSSIAN 1A No prerequisite. A beginners course of six classes per week, including individual language laboratory work throughout the year. SYLLABUS (1) Aural comprehension. (2) Reading comprehension and composition. (3) The fundamentals of grammar: morphology and syntax. (4) Translation from Russian and into Russian. (5) Practice in speaking, reading and writing, with stress on spoken Russian. В OOKS Dictionaries: Akhmanova 0 S Russko-angliiskii slovar', Moskva, any ed after 1960 or Lapidus & Shevtsova A Russian-English Dictionary, any ed М ller V K Anglo-Russkii stover', Moskva, any ed after 1961 Avanesov 1 Ozhegov Russkoe literaturnoe proiznoshenie i udarenie, Moskva 1960 Prescribed textbooks: •Stilman G Stilman L Harkins W E Introductory Russian Grammar, Xerox College Publishing Lexington, Massachusetts Toronto •Khavronina S A Russian in Exercises, 2nd ed Moscow •SkГlрпik L Z Baranovskaia L N and Dziubanova N M Му govorim po-russki, Vyshcha shkola, Kiev 1972 •Gerkan I K Russkii iazyk v kartinakh, Progress, Moscow

EXAMINATION An oral examination of 15 minutes on part (5) of the syllabus and in addition, aural comprehension and dictation tests. Class work both oral and written, together with weekly assignments, will be taken into account in determining the results of the examination. Two 3-hour papers, the first on parts (2) and (3) of the syllabus, the second on part (4).

176-103 RUSSIAN 1

This course assumes that students have passed in Russian at the Higher School Certificate examination. A course of three lectures, tutorials and language laboratory sessions as detailed below. This course Is offered for students who have passed the

467 Faculty of Arts

HSC examination (or equivalent) in Russian. Students are required to spend at least one hour per week in individual work in the language laboratory.

SYLLABUS Unit 1: Language (a) Special problems of grammar, sentence structure and idiomatic expressions (2 hours per week). (b) Translation into Russian and composition at an advanced level (1 hour per week). (c) Practice In conversation (1 hour per week). Unit 2: Literature Reading and study of set texts.

BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: 'Stilman G Stilman L & Harkins W E Introductory Russian Grammar, Xerox College Mass. Unbegaun B O Russian Grammar. Oxford 1972 or Pufkina I M A Shon Russian Reference Grammar, Moscow 1960 Borras and Christian Russian Syntax, Oxford 1963 •SkГiрпik L Z Baranovskaia L N and Dziubanova N M My govorim po-russki, Vyshcha shkola, Kiev 1972 Turgenev I Pervaie luibov', Bradda Chekhov A Dama s sobachkoi I drugie rasskary, Moscow 1975 Tolstoi L Detstvo, Bradda 'Obolensky D The Penguin Book of Russian Verse, Penguin 1962 Typescript material will be provided by the department.

EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers, the first on Unit 1(a) and (b) of the syllabus, and the second on Unit 2 of the syllabus. Oral tests and one essay during the year. 30 per cent of the final mark will comprise an oral test of 15 minutes at the end of the year, class work and weekly assignments.

176-104 RUSSIAN LITERATURE AND SOCIETY No prerequisite. Grade I course consisting of two lectures and one tutorial per week. Students completing this course may proceed to: a. the unit Soviet Writers and Society, a half-subject normally combined with the half-subject Soviet Politics (166-006), to form the approved Grade 2 subject Soviet Studies: 176-211. b. Politics 2, provided that one of the Grade 2 Politics units chosen is either Soviet Politics and Society or Communist Political Theory. This course is strongly recommended for all students of Russian. SYLLABUS The principal aim of this course is to give students who have no Russian an opportunity to satisfy and develop the Interest that Russian literature 468 Russian

arouses in the Western world. All the texts are therefore studied in English. A second factor guiding the structure of the course is that Russian literature to an intense degree reflects the life and concern of the society that produced it: the course is therefore designed to allow the study of works of fiction (which form its backbone) to be supplemented by an understanding of the development of Russian thought from the Kievan period up to the Revolution. Hence some time is given to Russia's pre-nineteenth century history, religious thought and art, while the inter- weaving of nineteenth century and pre-Soviet politics and literature are studied in detail. Thus the course overall studies works of International significance in the context of the society which produced them. and invites the student to integrate the normally separate disciplines of national culture and political history — or, of literature and life. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: Pushkin The Captain's Daughter, Dutton paperback Gogol The Overcoat In Diary of a Madman and Other Stories, Penguin Dead Souls, Penguin Lermontov A Hero of Our Time, Penguin Goncharov Oblomov, Signet paperback Belinsky Dobroliubov and Chernyshevsky Selected Criticism, any ed Turgenev On the Eve, any ed Fathers and Soпs, Penguin Tolstoi Happy Ever After, The Death of Ivan 1IIych, The Cossacks, (all In one volume), Penguin Anna Karenina, Penguin Resurrection, Penguin Dostoevskil The House of the Dead, Dell paperback Notes from Underground, Penguin The Devils, Penguin Chekhov Penguin edition of the plays Lady with a Lapdog and other stories, Penguin Gorki! My Childhood, Penguin Sholokhov Quiet Flows the Don, Penguin Pasternak Dr Zhivago, Penguin Kochan The Making of Modern Russia, Pelican or Hoetzsch The Evolution of Russia, Thames & Hudson EXAMINATION One 3-hour examination paper, two essays and one tutorial paper throughout the year.

176-201 RUSSIAN 2A (PASS) Prerequisite: 178-101. A course of three lectures per week, with at least one tutorial class, throughout the year. Relevant materials are provided for use in the language laboratory. SYLLABUS As for 176-103 Russian 1

469 Faculty of Arts

BOOKS As for 176-103.

EXAMINATION As for 176-103.

176-203 RUSSIAN 2 (PASS) Prerequisite: 176-103. A course of four classes per week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS Language: (a) Grammar. (b) Translation from English into Russian. (c) Composition. Literature: (a) Prose: Pushkin, Gogol, Dostoevskii, Tolstoi. (b) Drama: Chekhov; Poetry: Selections.

BOOKS Pushkin A Stantsionnyi smotritel', any ed Gogol N Shine'', any ed Dostoevskii F Bednye liudi, any ed Tolstoi L Kazak' and Anna Karenina Chekhov A Chaika and Vishnevyi sad, Bradda Unbegaun B 0 Russian Grammar, Oxford 1962 Borras and Christian Russian Syntax, Oxford 1963 Pulkina 1 M A Short Russian Reference Grammar, Moscow 1970 'Vocabulary to 'Evgeny Onegin', Bradda London 1964

EXAMINATION Three 3-hour papers. First paper: unseen translation from and into Russian. Second paper: Prose. Third paper: Drama and poetry. An oral examination. An essay during the year.

176-204 SOVIET WRITERS AND SOCIETY (PASS) Prerequisite: 176-104. A half-subject normally to be combined with the half-subject 166-006 to form Grade 2 subject Soviet Studies: 176-211. Students enrolling in this half-subject must enrol in the full subject Soviet Studies 2 (176-211) and in the specific units 176-204 Soviet Writers and Society and 166-006 Soviet Politics. A course of 1 t/2 hours weekly seminars throughout the year.

SYLLABUS A study of Soviet writing centred around a core group of novels, with background reading in theories of contemporary criticism. Soviet realism and the relationship between a society and the literature it produces. 470 Russian

BOOKS Preliminary reading: James C V Soviet Socialist Realism, Macmillan Thompson B The Premature Revolution

Prescribed textbooks: Zamyatin We, Penguin The Dragon and other stories, Penguin Olesha Envy, Anchor Pilnyak The Naked Year, Ardis Babel Selected Stories, Penguin Bulgakov Black Snow, Penguin The Master and Margarita, any ed 11f and Petrov The Golden Calf, Sphere Pasternak Safe Conduct, Penguin Solzhenitsyn One Day in the Life of Ivan Denisovich, Penguin The First Circle, Penguin Zoshchenko Before Sunrise, Ardis Note: It is not insisted that students will have to make a thorough study of every novel on the syllabus; a choice may be made of particular novels, provided the main trends are understood.

ASSESSMENT One essay of 2,000 words. Not more than one 2-hour paper. Written work during the year will constitute part of the examination. The weighting of assessment components will be specified at the beginning of the year.

176-301 RUSSIAN ЗА (PASS) Prerequisite: 176-201. A course of four classes per week with one tutorial class throughout the year. Students are expected to spend at least one hour per week on individual work in the language laboratory.

SYLLABUS As for 176-203.

BOOKS As for 176-203.

EXAMINATION As for 176-203.

176-303 RUSSIAN З (PASS) Prerequisite 176-203. Unit 1: Syllabus as for 176-204. Unit 2: Any honours option, i.e. any unit from group 176-362.

471 Faculty of Arts

HONOURS DEGREE

M. SCHOOL OF RUSSIAN LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE 1. The course for the degree with honours in the school of Russian Language and Literature comprises the following subjects: Russian 2 (Ions) or Russian 2A (Ions) and Russian 2В (Ions) Russian 3 (Ions) or Russian 3A (Ions) and Russian 3В (Ions) (see information below) Russian З (Ions) and Russian 3В (Ions) (see information below) Russian 4A (Ions) (for pure honours students) or Russian 4В (Ions) (for combined honours students) (see information below)

It is recommended that students should acquire some knowledge of modern history, in particular Russian history of the 19th century, and of European philosophy, especially the French philosophers of the 18th and the German philosophers of the 19th centuries.

2. First (preliminary) year In their first year, candidates who intend to enter the honours school should take Russian 1, or Russian 1A, and three additional subjects in accordance with the requirements for the ordinary degree.

3. Second year In their second year, students who have received honours in Russian 1 or 1A may, with the approval of the department, enrol in Russian 2 Ions or Russian 2A Ions.

4. Third year In their third year all students will do Russian 3 Ions or Russian ЭA Ions and 3В Ions. ЗВ Ions will consist of two of the options offered.

5. Fourth year Russian 4A will consist of three of the options offered. The options are as follows: 176-371 A. Advanced Syntax and Stylistics (2 hours per week) (2 hours per week) 176-372 В. History of the Russian Language 176-373 C. Comparative Slavonic Philology (2 hours per week) 176-374 D. Advanced Translation into Russian (2 hours per week) 176-375 E. Pre-nineteenth century Russian (2 hours per week) Literature 176-376 F. Nineteenth century—first half (2 hours per week) 176-377 G. Nineteenth century—second half (2 hours per week) 176-378 H. Twentieth Century Russian Poetry (2 hours per week) 1978 (and every alternate year) Russian 3: any two of В. D, F, H. Russian 4A: any three of В. D, F, H. Russian 4В: any two of В, D, F, H. 1979 (and every alternate year) Russian 3: any two of A, C. E, G. Russian 4A: any three of A, C. E, G. Russian 4В: any two of A, C, E. G. Either A or D must be taken in one of the years. 472 Russian

6. Final examination The final examination in the school of Russian Language and Literature will be held in two parts, part 1 In the third year and part 2 in the fourth year, and will comprise one 3-hour paper on each option studied in that year. In addition, students will be examined by oral examination in Russian, weekly assignments and class tests. Third year students will be required to submit an essay or equivalent in each option. Fourth year students will be required to submit early in third term a thesis of not more than 10,000 words on an approved literary topic. The Interdepartmental Programme in Eighteenth Century Studies will be accepted in lieu of one of the seminars in the final year of both the pure and combined honours courses. Vacation reading Suggestions for reading for the essay will be posted on the departmental noticeboard. RUSSIAN in combined courses. See pp. 476, 519 ff.

176-263 RUSSIAN 2 (IONS) Syllabus as for 176-203 (Russian 2). Russian 2 (Ions) or 2A (Ions).

176-261 RUSSIAN 2A (IONS) Syllabus as for 176-201 (Russian 2A). Either 176-261 or 176-263 must be taken by all honours students in conjunction with 176-262.

176-262 RUSSIAN 26 (IONS) This course must be taken by all honours students, together with Russian 2 (Ions). For pure honours students—Unit 1 and Unit 2 as set out below. For combined honours students—Unit 1 or Unit 2. SYLLABUS 176-266 Unit 1: Language ( 2 hours per week throughout the year): (a) Russian Phonology. (b) Russian Word-Formation. (c) Old Church Slavonic. 176-267 Unit 2: Literature (2 hours per week throughout the year): (a) Study of prescribed texts from Russian literature and literary criticism in Russian. (b) Practice in the writing of literary criticism in Russian. BOOKS For Unit 1: Nandris G Old Church Slavonic, Part 1 of Handbook of GCS, London 1960 Auty R Texts and Glossary, Part 2 of Handbook of GCS, London 1965 Jones D and Ward D The Phonetics of Russian, CUP 1969 Townsend C E Russian Word Formation, Slavica 1975 473 Faculty of Arts

For Unit 2: Dostoevskii F Prestuplenie i nakazanie, any ed Lermontov M Geroi hashego vremeni, Bradda Pushkin A Evgenii Onegin, any ed A list of set works of poetry will be available from the department. EXAMINATION Unit 1: One 1-hour test in (a) and one in either (b) or (c). Class work and weekly assignments will be taken into account in determining the results of the examination. Unit 2: Oral test. One 3,000 word essay, two 2-hour tests and one class paper.

176-363 RUSSIAN 3 (HONS) syLLAВus As for 176-303 (Russian 3)

В O O КЅ As for 176-303 EXAMINATION As for 176-303

176-361 RUSSIAN ЗА (HONS) Syllabus as for 176-301 (Russian ЗА). Either 176-361 or 176-363 must be taken by all honours students in conjunction with 176-362.

176-362 RUSSIAN 38 (HONS) To be taken by all honours students. For pure honours students, any two of the following options, as offered In any given year; for combined honours students, any one of the following options.

В O O КЅ 176-371 A. Advanced Syntax and Stylistics (not in 1978): A list of reading will be supplied by the department. 176-372 В. History of the Russian Language (1978): Matthews W K Russian Historical Grammar, Athlone Press London 1960 Ivanov V istonlcheskaia grammatika russkogo lazyka, Moscow 1964 Gudzil N K Khrestomatiia po drevne' russkol literature, any ed Moscow or Stokes A D Anthology of Early Russian Literature, Bradda 1968 176-373 C. Comparative Slavonic Philology (not in 1978): de Bray R G A Guide to the Slavonic Languages, 2nd ed Dent London 1969 176-374 D. Advanced Translation into Russian (1978): Material to be provided by the department. 474 Russian

176-375 E. Pre-nineteenth century Russian Literature (not in 1978): Gudzil N Кhrestometiia po drevnel russkoi literature, Moscow (available from the department) Kokorev Кhrestomatiia po russkoi literature 18 veka, Moscow 1952 (available from the department) Stokes A D Anthology of Early Russian Literature, Bradda 1968 Vodovozov N V lstorija drevnel russkoi literatury, any ed Moscow Pronin A History of Old Russian Literature (Bilingual Lectures), Posse" 1968 Yeleonskaya A S Istorije russkoi literatury XVII-XVIII vekov, Moscow 1969 176-376 F. Nineteenth century—first half (1978): Pushkin A Plinio sobranie sochinenil, any ed in Russian Griboedov A Gore of ume, any ed in Russian Gogol N SobraHja sochinenil, any ed Lermontov M Sochineniia v shetyrekh tomakh, any ed in Russian 176-377 G. Nineteenth century—second half (not in 1978): Selections from the works of: A I Hertsen, A I Goncharov, I S Turgenev, N G Chernyshevsky, D I Pisarev, H A Dobroljubov, A N Ostrovsky, L N Tolstoi, F M Dostoevskii, A P Chekhov, M E Saltykov-Schedrin, V M Garshin, D N Mamin-Sibirjak, ✓ G Korolenko, N S Leskov, A M Gorkij, F I Tiutchev, A A Fet, A N Majkov, N A Nekrasov, S J Nadson, V I Soloviev. A reading list will be provided by the department. 176-378 H. Twentieth century Russian Poetry (1978): Selections from the works of: ✓ Sriusov, K Balmont, A Веlу. A Blok, N Gumilev, A Akhmatova, O Mandel'stam, S Gorodetsky, I Severianin, V Mayakovsky, V Khlebnikov, ✓ Kamensky, S Esenln, N Aseyev, B Pasternak, N Tikhonov, E Sagritsky, M Svetlov, I Selvinsky, M Tsvetayeva, N Zabolotsky, L Martynov, S Marshak, K Chukovsky, A Tvardovsky, K Simonov, M Lsakovsky, Ye Yevtushenko, A Voznesensky and other "newcomers ". A reading list will be provided by the department.

EXAMINATION (Final examination, part I.) As for Russian 3 (pass) and in addition, one 3-hour paper on each option selected. Essay in Russian. Oral test of 30 minutes.

176-461 RUSSIAN 4A (HONS) For pure honours students only. Any three of the options noted under 176-362, as offered in any given year, and remembering that either 176-371 or 176-374 must be taken here if neither has been taken as part of Russian 38.

EXAMINATION (Final examination, part 2.) One 3-hour paper on each option selected. Oral test of 30 minutes.

475 Faculty of Arts

176-462 RUSSIAN 4В (HONS) For combined honours students only. Any two of the options noted under 176-362 as offered in any given year and remembering that either 176-371 or 176-374 must be taken here if neither has been taken as part of Russian 3 В.

RUSSIAN IN COMBINED COURSES For candidates taking Russian in a combined honours course the required Russian subjects are Russian 1 (or Russian 1A); Russian 2 (Ions) or Russian 2A (Ions) together with one of the Russian 2B (Ions) units; Russian 3 (Ions) or Russian 3A (Ions) together with one of the Russian 36 (Ions) options offered in that year; two of the Russian 4A (Ions) options offered in that year.

GENERAL PATTERN OF RUSSIAN IN COMBINED COURSES: First year Russian 1 or Russian 1A second year Russian 2 (Ions) or Russian 2A (Ions) Russian 26 (Ions) Unit 1 or Unit 2 Third year Russian 3 (Ions) or Russian ЗA (Hons) and Russian 3B (lins) which will consist of only one of the following: 1978 (and every alternate year) B. History of the Russian Language D. Advanced Translation Into Russian F. Nineteenth century Russian literature — first half H. Twentieth Century Russian Poetry 1979 (and every alternate year) A. Advanced Syntax and Stylistics C. Comparative Slavonic Philology E. Pre-nineteenth century Russian literature G. Nineteenth century Russian Literature — second half Fourth year Russian 46 (Ions) Two of the options listed above.

FINAL EXAMINATION The final examination will be held in two parts, part 1 at the end of third year, and part 2 at the end of fourth year. Pert 1 A. Formal Examination Papers: As for Russian 3 (Pass) or Russian 3A (Pass) and in addition, one 3-hours paper on the option chosen for Russian 36 (Ions) in that year. B. (a) Essay or Its equivalent in Russian. (b) Oral test of 30 minutes. Part 2 A. Formal Examination Papers: Two 3-hour papers on the options chosen for Russian 4B (Ions) in that year. B. (a) Oral test of 30 minutes. 476 Statistics

(b) A thesis on a subject approved by the chairmen of both departments, based on independent research and not exceeding 12,000 words, will be required to be handed in at the beginning of third term.

MASTER OF ARTS 176-601 M. SCHOOL OF RUSSIAN LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE Candidates will, under supervision, prepare a thesis in Russian on an approved subject, and will be required to report to their supervisor regularly during the year. They will be advised of a suitable course of reading and may be required to pass an oral examination covering the general field of their research. An entry form for examination for higher degrees must be submitted to the Registrar. Three copies of each thesis (A4, typewritten, double-spaced) should be submitted, one of which will be deposited in the University Library. In certain cases candidates may also be required to pass a written and oral examination on subjects approved by the chairman of the department. The thesis should normally be submitted for examination within two years from the commencement of candidature for MA by full-time candidates and within four years by part-time candidates. Except in special circumstances and with the permission of the faculty no thesis or course work will be examined unless the candidate presents for examination within four years from the commencement of his candidature or, in the event of his having been granted leave of absence for the maximum period of one year, within five years from the commencement of his candidature.

DEPARTMENT OF STATISTICS Chairman of Department: Professor E. J. WILLIAMS, B.Com. (Tes.), D.Sc., F.I.M.S., M.I.S.I. ORDINARY DEGREE (Details for the honours degree are set out at the end of this section.) SUBJECTS OFFERED Statistics 1A, Statistics 1T. See also Mathematical Sciences 1E and 1G. Note: Not more than one of Statistics 1A and 1T and Mathematical Sciences 1 E and 1G may be taken, except as indicated under the School of Mathematical Sciences (see pp. 367 ff.). Statistics 2A. See also Mathematical Sciences 2E and 2G, and the restrictions imposed there. Statistics ЗА, Statistics 3H. See also Mathematical Sciences 3E and 3G. Statistics 4. MAJOR SEQUENCES Students wishing to major in Statistics are recommended to take one of the following sequences: Pass: 1. Statistics 1A or Mathematical Sciences 1E Mathematics 1A Two other subjects. 477 Faculty of Arts

2. Statistics 2A Mathematics 2A (Pass) One other subject. з. Statistics 3A Mathematics 3A or Mathematical Sciences 3E or another subject. Honours: 1. Statistics 1A or Mathematical Sciences 1E Mathematics 1A (units 131, 132) Two other subjects. 2. Statistics 2A Mathematics 2A (Ions.) One other subject. 3. Statistics 3H Mathematics 3A (Ions).

ENROLMENT Students enrolling for subjects containing Statistics must consult the Sub-Dean of Arts.

619 STATISTICS 100 LEVEL There are essentially two courses at first level. These are the Practice of Statistics (1T) and the Principles of Statistics (1A). Students may not gain credit for both 1A and 1T. Students may take Statistics 111 (or 121) as part of Mathematical Sciences 1 E. The subject IT forms an integrated service course for students majoring in disciplines other than Mathematical Sciences, who may require to understand or carry out basic statistical analyses. There is an emphasis on methods and applications and not on theory; there are many examples and very few proofs. While Statistics 1T is generally a terminal course, students with good results may be permitted to continue to 200 level Statistics units. The subject Statistics 1A is designed to prepared mathematically oriented students for Statistics at 200 level. Students with no H.S.C. mathematics subjects are strongly advised to take 1T. Students with two H.S.C. mathematics subjects and/or those considering taking 200 level Statistics units are recommended to take 1A.

619-100 STATISTICS 1T

This subject consists of three units which are examined individually.

619-101 BASIC STATISTICS AND PROBABILITY

A course of 16 lectures end 24 hours of tutorial and practice classes; first term.

SYLLABUS Description of sample data by means of tables, graphs and simple statistics. Presentation and interpretation of data. Elements of probability, including conditional probability, independence, Bayes theorem. Random variables and their basic properties. Standard probability distributions: binomial, Poisson, uniform, normal. Distribution of the sample mean; law of large numbers, central limit theorem. Random sampling and random numbers. 478 Statistics

EXAMINATION A 2-hour terminal examination. Candidates must also satisfactorily complete the practical work.

619-102 STATISTICAL INFERENCE A course of 24 lectures, 24 hours of tutorial and practice classes plus practical work; second term. SYLLABUS Population and sample parameters. Point and interval estimation; properties of estimators. Hypothesis testing for a simple null hypothesis; critical region, type I and Il errors, significance level, power. Applications of the normal, t and chi-square distributions. Goodness of fit tests, contingency tables. Distribution free tests, including sign and two-sample Wilcoxon, Wilcoxon signed rank, permutation tests. EXAMINATION A 2-hour terminal examination. Candidates must also satisfactorily complete the practical work.

619-103 STATISTICAL ANALYSIS A course of 24 lectures, 24 hours of tutorial and practice classes plus practical work; third term. SYLLABUS Linear regression; least squares, assumptions of normal model, t tests for slope and intercept, prediction intervals, transformations of data. Problem of multiple linear and polynomial regression. Covariance and correlation; rank correlation tests for zero correlation. Elements of the design of experiments and analysis of variance. One and two-way classification. The linear normal model. Descriptive introduction to factorial designs. Tests of equality of two variances. Uses of the F distribution. EXAMINATION A 2-hour terminal examination. Candidates must also satisfactorily complete the practical work. BOOKS Details of prescribed and recommended books will be posted on the departmental notice-boards. Preliminary reading: Borel E Probabilities and Life, Dover Walls W A and Roberts H V The Nature of Statistics, Free Press Huff D How to Lie with Statistics, Gollancz

619-110 STATISTICS 1A This subject consists of two units which are examined individually.

819-111 INTRODUCTORY STATISTICS 24 lectures, 24 hours of tutorial and practice classes plus practical work; 3rd term. 479 Faculty of Arts

This unit may be taken as part of Mathematical Sciences 1 E. This course is designed to prepare mathematically oriented students for statistics at 200 level. Prerequisite: The student must have taken or be taking concurrently a 100 level Mathematics unit. Students with less mathematical background should do Statistics 101, 102, 103 or 112. SYLLABUS Introduction to the methods and principles of statistical estimation and hypothesis testing. Non-parametric methods, Including randomization and rank tests. Tests based on the X2 distribution. Introduction to parametric methods. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Conover W J Practical Nonparametric Statistics, Wiley Hodges J L & Lehmann E L Basic Concepts of Probability, Holden-Day Mosteller F & Rourke R E H Sturdy Statistics, Addison-Wesley EXAMINATION One 2-hour written paper together with satisfactory completion of the practical work. 619-112 DATA ANALYSIS 16 lectures and 24 tutorial/practice class hours plus a practical project; 2nd term. The unit may be taken as part of Mathematical Sciences i E. SYLLABUS Techniques for summarizing, description and representation of data. Basic techniques of data analysis and inference, including estimation and testing of hypotheses with particular emphasis on graphical methods. Presentation of results and conclusions. Use and misuse of package programs in data analysis. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Huff D How to Lie with Statistics, Gollancz Могопеу M J Facts from Figures, Penguin Books Chase C I Elementary Statistical Procedures, McGraw-Hill Walpole R E Elementary Statistical Concepts, Collier MacMillan Lancaster H O An Introduction to Medical Statistics, Wiley Ehrenberg A S C Data Reduction—Analysing and Interpreting Statistical Data, Wiley EXAMINATION One 2-hour written paper together with assessment of practical work and project.

619-121 INTRODUCTORY STATISTICS (a) 619-122 DATA ANALYSIS (b) 24 lectures (a) or 16 lectures (b), 24 hours of tutorial and practice classes plus practical work; summer courses (February). These are alternatives to Statistics 111 and 112. 480 Statlstics

SYLLABUS As for Statistics 111 (112). EXAMINATION A 2-hour examination before the start of first term. Candidates must also complete the practical work.

619-200 STATISTICS 2A This subject consists of units 201-203, which are examined individually. This course Is intended to give a basic understanding of Statistics. Mathematics 1A is a prerequisite, and it is recommended that students taking this course should be studying Mathematics at 200 level concurrently or have taken it previously. Students who have not previously taken Statistics 1A or Mathematical Sciences 1E are recommended to consult the departmental notice-board concerning preliminary reading.

819-201 PROBABILITY 24 lectures and 24 tutorial/practice class hours plus a practical project; first term. This unit may be taken as part of Mathematical Sciences 2E. Prerequisites: Mathematics 1A or 1C. Statistics 1A or Mathematical Sciences 1H is strongly recommended. SYLLABUS Elementary probability concepts. Random variables and descriptions of their probability distributions. Expectation. Generating functions. Appli- cations to Bernoulli trials, Poisson process and random sampling. Simple Markov chains. Standard probability distributions, Including hypergeo- metric, binomial, Poisson, negative binomial, normal, gamma and beta distributions, and some of their applications. Sampling theory; order statistics; t, x2 and F distributions. The law of large numbers and the central limit theorem. EXAMINATION A 2-hour terminal examination, together with assessment of practical work and project.

819-202 STATISTICAL INFERENCE 24 lectures and 24 tutorial/practice class hours plus a practical project; second term. SYLLABUS Estimation of parameters of probability distributions; desirable properties of estimators—consistency, unbiasedness and efficiency. Methods of estimation. Miпiтит variance bound for unbiased estimators. Properties of maximum likelihood estimators. Confidence intervals for parameters. Testing of hypotheses concerning parameters; critical region, size and power of tests. Likelihood ratio tests. Particular reference is made to the case of sampling on a normal distribution, for which the t, x2 F distributions are required. Details of some commonly occurring statistical tests including contingency tables, goodness of fit tests, one-way analysis of variance, and some distribution free tests. An introduction to sequential analysis, sample surveys and decision theory. 481 Q Faculty of Arts

EXAMINATION A 2-hour terminal examination, together with assessment of practical work and project.

619-203 STATISTICAL ANALYSIS 24 lectures and 24 tutorial/practice class hours plus a practical project; third term.

SYLLABUS Linear regression and the method of least squares. Correlation: bivariate and multivariate normal distributions. The theory and the applications of the general linear model—with particular reference to regression problems including multiple and polynomial regression; to one-way and two-way analysis of variance; and to the analysis of statistical experiments such as randomization and formation of blocks. The study of some standard experimental designs including randomized block, balanced incomplete bIock and 2k factorial experiments.

EXAMINATION A 2-hour terminal examination, together with assessment of practical work and project. BOOKS FOR STATISTICS 2A Details of prescribed books may be obtained from the department of Statistics. Recommended for reference and preliminary reading: Hodges J L. and Lehmann E L Вasic Concepts of Probability and Sta- tistics, Holden-Day Larson H J Introduction to Probability Theory end Statistical Inference, Wiley Larson H J Introduction to the Theory of Statistics, Wiley Brunk H D An Introduction to Mathematical Statistics, Blairdell

619-210 STATISTICS 26 This subject consists of units 251-253, which are examined individually. The units Statistics 251, 252 and 253, previously offered only to BSc (Ed) students, are now intended also for students majoring in fields such as Psychology, Economics, or related fields. This course requires a slightly lower mathematical level than Statistics 201, 202 arid 203, though students taking this course must have passed a first year mathematics unit, and it is recommended that they should have taken Statistics 111 (121) or 112 (122). This course, like the standard second year course, is intended to give a basic understanding of mathematical statistics, though here there is an emphasis on applications, particularly in Education and Psychology. Students having achieved good results in this course may be permitted to take 300 level Statistics units.

619-251 PROBABILITY

24 lectures and 24 tutorial/practice class hours; 1st term. Prerequisite: A first year Mathematics unit. It will be assumed that Mathematics 212 or 271 has already been passed or is being taken concurrently. 482 Statistics

SYLLABUS Elementary probability concepts. Random variables and descriptions of their probability distributions. Expectation. Generating functions. Appli- cations of these concepts to Bernoulli trials. Poisson processes and random sampling. Standard probability distributions including hyper- geometric, binomial, Poisson, negative binomial, normal, gamma and beta distributions, and some of their applications. Sampling theory: the law of large numbers and the central limit theorem.

BOOk Recommended for reference: Larson H J Introduction to Probability Theory and Statistical Inference, Wiley EXAMINATION One 2-hour written paper together with assessment of practical work.

619-252 STATISTICAL INFERENCE 24 lectures and 24 tutorial/practice class hours; 2nd term. Prerequisites: Statistics 251. Statistics 111 (or 121 ) or Applied Mathe- matics 1 E (Mathematics 151) is strongly recommended. SYLLABUS Estimation of parameters of probability distributions; desirable properties of estimators — consistency, unbiasedness and efficiency. Methods of estimation: method of moments, method of maximum likelihood. Confi- dence intervals for parameters. Testing of hypotheses concerning parameters; critical region, significance level, size and power of tests. Likelihood ratio tests. Inference for a normally distributed population: t, X2 and F tests. Details of some commonly occurring statistical tests including contingency tables, goodness of fit tests and one-way analysis of variance. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Larson H J Introduction to Probability Theory end Statistical Inference, Wiley Hodges J L & Lehmann E L Basic Concepts of Probability & Statistics, Holden-Day EXAMINATION One 2-hour written paper together with assessment of practical work.

619-253 STATISTICAL ANALYSIS 24 lectures and 24 tutorial/practice class hours; 3rd term. Prerequisite: Statistics 252. SYLLABUS Linear regression and correlation. The method of least squares. The general linear model, particularly as applied to regression problems including multiple and polynomial regression, to the analysis of one-way and two-way classifications, and to the analysis of standard statistical

483 Faculty of Arts

experiments. Basic principles of experimental design, including randomization and formation of blocks. The study of some standard experimental designs including randomized block, balanced incomplete block and 2k factorial experiments. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Burr I W Applied Statistical Methods, Academic Press Li C C Introduction to Experimental Statistics, McGraw-Hill EXAMINATION One 2-hour written paper, together with assessment of practical work.

819-263 FORECASTING 16 lectures and 16 tutorial/practice class hours plus a practical project; third term. This unit may be taken as part of Mathematical Sciences 2E. Prerequisite: An approved basic course to mathematical statistics—at least of the standard of Statistics 1T or Statistics 1A. SYLLABUS Mathematical aids to trend estimation and forecasting. The forecasting of traffic matrices. Simple analysis of time series into seasonal fluctua- tion, trend and disturbance components. Optimum choice of forecasting methods. BOOKS Recommended for reference: ICI Monograph No 2 Short Term Forecasting, Oliver and Boyd Kendall M G Time Series, Oliver & Boyd ICI Monograph No 1 Mathematical Trend Curves en Aid to Forecasting, Oliver & Boyd Brown R C Smoothing Forecasting and Prediction of Discrete Time Series, Prentice-Hall

EXAMINATION A 2-hour terminal examination, together with assessment of practical work and project.

619-300 sТАТ1sтiсs ЭA The Statistics units in third year develop the material of Statistics 2A and 26, and introduce new probabilistic and statistical areas. Statistics 3A consists of an acceptable selection of five units, subject to prerequisites in Statistics and Mathematics. There are streams in probability and stochastic processes (301, 321, 322), inference (311, 313, 314 -}- 315, 316, 317, 318) and operational research (361 or 301 ± 311, 362, 363, 364). Students may take individual units as part of Mathematical Sciences 3E or 3G. Students intending to study fourth year honours in Statistics should take Statistics 3H together with some advanced level Mathematics 300 level units. 484 Statistics

619-301 PROBABILITY 24 lectures and 18 tutorial/practice class hours; first term. Prerequisites: Statistics 201; Mathematics 271 (or 231) and 273 (or 233). Conditions: Students may not gain credit for this course and for Statistics 361. SYLLABUS Basic methods In probability and distribution theory for discrete and continuous sample spaces. Distribution functions, generating functions, characteristic functions. Convergence and limit laws. Detailed treatment of various special distributions and their Inter-relations. BOOk Heathcote C R Probability: Elements of Mathematical Theory, Unwin EXAMINATION A 3-hour terminal examination together with assessment of practical work.

619-311 STATISTICAL INFERENCE 16 lectures and 24 tutorial/practice class hours plus a practical project; first term. Prerequisites: Statistics 202; Mathematics 271 ( ог 231) and 273 (ог 233). Conditions: Students may not gain credit for this course and for Sta- tistics 361. SYLLABUS Estimation; consistency, bias, Information—function, Cramer-Rao lower bound, efficiency, sufficiency, Blackwell-Rao theorem, maximum likelihood estimators and their asymptotic properties, comparison of methods of estimation, exponential families of distributions. Hypothesis testing: size and power of tests, Neyman-Pearson lemma, uniformly and locally most powerful tests, likelihood ratio tests. Confi- dence intervals.

BOO К Recommended for reference: Rao C R Linear Statistical Inference end Its Applications 2nd ed, Wiley EXAMINATION A 3-hour terminal examination, together with assessment of practical work and project.

619-313 LINEAR MODELS 16 lectures and 24 tutorial/practice class hours plus a practical project: second term. Prerequisites: Statistics 203 (Statistics 311 or 361 recommended).

485 Faculty of Arts

SYLLABUS General least squares theory of estimation and hypothesis testing. Appli- cation to one and two way classifications, analysis of covariance, multiple regression, polynomial regression, non-linear regression, discriminant analysis. BOOk Recommended for reference: Rao C R Linear Statistical Inference and Its Applications 2nd ed, Wiley EXAMINATION A 2-hour terminal examination, together with assessment of practical work and project.

619-314 EXPERIMENTAL DESIGN AND DATA ANALYSIS 16 lectures and 24 tutorial/practical class hours plus a practical project; third term. Prerequisite: Statistics 313. SYLLABUS Design and analysis of experiments. particularly factorial and quasi- factorial designs; confounding, partial replication, orthogonal contrasts. Analysis of experimental data using examples from practical situations. EXAMINATION A 2-hour terminal examination, together with assessment of practical work and project.

619-315 DISTRIBUTION-FREE METHODS 16 lectures and 24 tutorial/practice class hours; third term. Prerequisite: Statistics 311 (or 361). SYLLABUS Estimation, including U-statistics, estimation of quintiles, tolerance intervals. Hypothesis testing, including permutation and rank tests for the one-, two- and k-sample problems; tests of independence. Optimum ranks tests and comparisons with parametric tests. Smirnov statistics. Кolmogorov- BOOK Recommended for reference: Gibbons J D Nonparametric Statistical Inference, McGraw-Hill EXAMINATION A 2-hour terminal examination, together with assessment of practical work.

619-316 SAMPLE SURVEYS 16 lectures, 16 tutorial and practice class hours plus a practical project. Prerequisite: Statistics 202. 486 Statistics

SYLLABUS Simple random sampling; stratified random sampling; ratio and regression estimators; cluster sampling; sampling with probability proportional to size; some other sampling techniques. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Cochran W G Sampling Techniques 2nd ed, Wiley Raj D Sampling Theory, McGraw-Hill Sampford M R Sampling Theory, Oliver & Boyd EXAMINATION A 2-hour examination, together with assessment of practical work and project.

619-317 TIME SERIES ANALYSIS 16 lectures and 24 tutorial/practice class hours; second term. Prerequisite: Statistics 301 or 311 or 361. SYLLABUS Nature of time series. Analysis and decomposition of such series into components. Smoothing, filtering and spectral analysis methods. Types of time models and classification of modelling methods. Review of predic- tive methods and their limitations. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Kendall M G Time Series, Griffin Anderson T W The Statistical Analysis of Time Series, Wiley Box G E and Jenkins G M Time Series Analysis and Forecasting, Holden Day Brillinger D R Time Series—Data Analysis and Theory, Holt Rinehart & Winston Brown R C Smoothing Forecasting and Prediction of Discrete Time Series, Prentice-Hall EXAMINATION A 2-hour terminal examination, together with assessment of practical work and project.

619-318 DECISION THEORY 16 lectures and 24 tutorial and practice class hours. Prerequisite: Statistics 301, 311. SYLLABUS Elements of Wald's decision theory and their application to mathematical statistics. Comparison between zero-sum two person game and statistical decision theory. Bayes principle, minimax principle and admissibility with much of the analysis restricted to finite parameter space. Minimax theorem and statistical Inference from a decision theoretic viewpoint.

487 Faculty of Arts

BOOk Recommended for reference: Ferguson T S Mathematical Statistics: A Decision Theoretic Approach, Academic Press EXAMINATION A 2-hour examination, together with assessment of practical work.

619-321 STOCHASTIC PROCESSES 16 lectures and 24 tutorial/practice class hours; second term. Prerequisite: Statistics 301. SYLLABUS Sequences of independent trials; recurrent and transient events, regenera- tive phenomena. Markov chains: classification of states; stationary distributions; matrix methods for finite Markov chains. Poisson process and generalizations. Birth and death process. Branching processes.

BО O К Recommended for reference: Karlin S and Taylor H A First Course in Stochastic Processes Voi 1, Academic Press EXAMINATION A 2-hour terminal examination, together with assessment of practical work.

619-322 APPLIED STOCHASTIC PROCESSES 16 lectures and 24 tutorial/practice class hours; third term. Prerequisite: Statistics 321. SYLLABUS Stochastic process modelling and model manipulation including simple population models, storage models and models for inventories and queues. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Bailey N T J The Elements of Stochastic Processes, Wiley Lee A Applied Queueing Theory, St Martins EXAMINATION A 2-hour terminal examination, together with assessment of practical work.

619-331 STATISTICS READING PROJECT The study of a special topic and presentation of a written report. Prerequisite: Statistics 301 or 361 or 311. 488 Statistics

SYLLABUS An approved topic in Statistics not covered in any of the student's other units.

819-361 PROBABILITY AND INFERENCE 24 lectures and 24 tutorial/practice class hours plus a practical project; first term. This is a part alternative to Statistics 301 and 311, 361 which may not be offered in 1978. Prerequisites: Statistics 201 and 202; Mathematics 271 (or 231) and 273 (or 233). Conditions: Students may not gain credit for this course and for either Statistics 301 or Statistics 311. SYLLABUS Basic methods In probability and distribution theory. Integral transforms and their uses. Convergence and limit laws. Principles of parametric estimation and hypothesis testing. Maximum likelihood estimation. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Heathcote C R Probability: Elements of the Mathematical Theory, Allen & Unwin Rao C R Linear Statistical Inference and Its Applications 2nd ed, Wiley Wllks S S Mathematical Statistics 2nd ed, Wiley EXAMINATION A 3-hour terminal examination, together with assessment of practical work and project.

619-363 STOCHASTIC MODELS 16 lectures and 24 tutorial/practice class hours plus a practical project; third term. Prerequisite: Statistics 321. SYLLABUS As for Statistics 322, plus a practical project which is specifically oriented towards Operational Research. EXAMINATION A 2-hour terminal examination, together with assessment of practical work and project.

819-364 SIMULATION METHODS 16 lectures and 16 tutorial/practice class hours plus a practical project; third term. This unit may not be offered in 1978. Prerequisite: Statistics 361 (or 301 and 311), 321. SYLLABUS Nature and general use of simulation. Direct simulation systems. Use of Monte Carlo methods for the evaluation of integrals, probabilities and

489 Faculty of Arts

functions. Accuracy improving devices. Examples of simulation exercises and the use of simulation in statistical inference.

BOOKS Recommended for reference: Hammersley J M and Handscombe D C Monte Carlo Methods, Methuen Tocher K D The Art of Simulation, English Univ Press EXAMINATION A 2-hour examination, together with the assessment of practical work and project.

HONOURS DEGREE

L. SCHOOL OF MATHEMATICAL STATISTICS

1. The course for the degree with honours in the school of Mathematical Statistics comprises the following subjects: (a) Mathematics 1A, 2A, 3A and units of Mathematics 4 or alternative units to be approved by the chairman of the department. (b) Statistics 2A, 3H, 4. (c) Three first-year subjects approved by the chairman of the department, Including normally at least one of Biology, Chemistry part 1, Physics part 1 or Psychology part 1, with Mathematics 1A, Eco- nomics A, Geography part 1, or Epistemology, Logic and Metho- dology as alternatives. Statistics 1A or Mathematical Sciences 1E is strongly recommended. (d) Mathematics 2В, Economics 2В, Psychology part 2A, or Computer Science 2, or another grade 2 subject approved by the chairman of the department. The details of subjects for Mathematics are set out under the school of Mathematics. The details of subjects for Statistics 2A are as for the ordinary degree; those for Statistics 3H and those for Statistics 4 are as set out below. A student proposing to enter the honours school of Statistics should normally have obtained honours in Pure Mathematics and in Calculus and Applied Mathematics at the Higher School Certificate examination. Candidates who have not this qualification are advised to consult the chairmen of the departments of Mathematics and Statistics before they enter. 2. In their first year, candidates who intend to enter the honours school will take the course in Mathematics 1A (units 131 and 132), and three subjects as listed in (c), preferably including Statistics 1A or Mathe- matical Sciences 1 E. Admission to the second and higher years of the honours school must be approved by the faculty; candidates should make application as soon as possible after the examination results of the first year are published. in their second year, candidates will take the courses in Mathematics 2A, Statistics 2A, and one subject listed in (d). In their third year, candidates will take the courses In Mathematics ЗA, option (i) and Statistics 3H. In their fourth year, candidates will take Statistics 4 together with a number of units from Mathematics 4 or alternative units approved by

490 Statistics

the department of Statistics. They will also carry out, under direction, a practical project and the study of a special topic, involving the reading and collation of the relevant literature, and will present a thesis ombody- Ing this work at the beginning of the third term.

619-360 STATISTICS 3H (HONOURS COURSE) [ В.A.(HONS)] SYLLABUS At least five of the units listed for the pass course, 301, 311, 313 being compulsory. Unit 321 should be taken by students intending to take 400 level units. In addition a special project (unit 331) should be undertaken, and a written report of this work must be presented.

BOOKS As for pass course.

EXAMINATION As for pass course.

619-460 STATISTICS 4 ( В.A.(HONS)] A course of approximately 100 lectures with practice classes throughout the year, together with preparation of a thesis and a practical project referred to in the section 'SCHOOL OF MATHEMATICAL STATISTICS'. Unit examinations will be held at times provided during the year. Students will be advised about recommended books and journal articles.

MASTER OF ARTS 619-602 SCHOOL OF MATHEMATICAL STATISTICS Candidates will, under supervision, prepare a thesis on an approved subject, in which they will be advised as to a suitable course of reading. Candidates must also pass a test in two of the following languages to the satisfaction of the chairman of the department concerned: French, Ger- man, Russian. An entry form for examination for higher degrees must be submitted to the Registrar. Three copies of each thesis (A4, typewritten, double-spaced) should be submitted, one of which will be deposited in the University Library. Candidates may also be examined orally on the subject of the thesis. The thesis should normally be submitted for examination within two years from the commencement of candidature for MA by full-time candidates and within four years by part-time candidates. Except in special circumstances and with the permission of the faculty no thesis or course work will be examined unless the candidate presents for examination within four years from the commencement of his candidature or, in the event of his having been granted leave of absence for the maximum period of one year, within five years from the commencement of his candidature. 491 Faculty of Arts

SCIENCE SUBJECTS Certain Science subjects, viz: Physics (Arts), Chemistry 1, Biology, and Geology, may be teken as one year courses in the faculty of Arts. 640-012 Physics (Arts) is a terminal course and is consequently a suitable subject for Arts students who wish to study one Science subject. Any Arts student who may possibly want to complete a B.Sc. and study Physics for more than one year is advised to consult the assistant to the Dean of the faculty of Science; provided the student is sufficiently qualified, permission may be granted to proceed to the normal first-year course in Physics.

600-016 THE BIOLOGY OF MAN Drs B. Evans, P. Lediges, D. Porter 72 lectures; 24 hours tutorials; 48 hours of practical work; 2 one-day excursions; terms 1, 2 and 3. SYLLABUS Man as a functional organism, his position in the living world and interaction with his environment. The diversity of live and evolutionary approaches to classification. Life processes; cell functions and energy transformations, reproduction, control of fertility, foetal development, the physiology of man, homeostasis, cell recognition, transplants and immunity, cancer, diseases, aging. The chemical basis of inheritance, cell division, mutation, types of inheritance and pedigree analysis, human blood groups and haemolytic diseases, Inborn errors of metabolism, genetic counseling. Population genetics, polygenic inheritance and intelligence, mechanisms of evolution, races and species concepts, adaptive radiation, evolution of man. Ecology, behaviour and man; communities, species distributions and interactions, niche diversity, productivity and nutrient circulation, changes with time. Populations and intraspecific interactions, regulation of numbers, co-operation and social behaviour, the human population in the biosphere, cultural evolution. TEACHING Formal lectures will be kept to a minimum and emphasis will be placed on group discussions. Open-laboratory classes allow for independent instruction and some project work. Book Prescribed textbooks: Volpe P E Men, nature and society, Brown 1975 kirk D & Starr C eds Biology Today, 2nd ed CRM Random House 1975 EXAMINATIONS Assessment will be based on: Reports of work; project reports or essays; short answer tests—one per term; one 3-hour written examination at the end of the year.

600-002 BIOLOGYtt Dr D. Porter (Genetics) (Co-ordinator for the Departments of Botany, Genetics and Zoology) ttThle Is the subject 600-101. However, Arts students are to use the code number 600.0'' о. 492 Science Subjects

72 lectures; 72 hours practical; weekly tutorials and demonstrations; half-day and whole-day excursions may be arranged at weekends through the year Prerequisites: a knowledge of Chemistry and Physics to H.S.C. standard is assumed. A knowledge of H.S.C. Biology would be an advantage. Stu- dents who have not studied H.S.C. Biology are advised to study sections 1, 2, 6, 7, 9, 10 and 11 in Biological Science — The Web of Life. SYLLABUS An Introduction to the living world; plant and animal diversity. The cell as the basic unit of life; structure and fine-structure of plant and animal cells; mitosis and meiosis. Growth, morphology and physiology of flowering plants and vertebrates. Behaviour responses of plants and animals — nervous and hormonal control. Photosynthesis, respiration and the flow of energy in biological systems. Plant and animal reproduction, embryology and development. Structure, life-history and biological significance of selected Invertebrates and non-flowering plants emphasizing the Increasing complexity of the organism, the increasing adaptation to the terrestrial environment and the associated changes in life-cycles. Modes of nutrition and the significance of heterotrophic plants in disease and decay and the cycling of carbon and nitrogen. Introduction to population genetics; the population as a biological unit, its structure and regulation. The community and interaction of populations. Environmental biology. Variation and evolution, "family" genetics and natural selection. LABORATORY WORK Students must provide themselves with a razor or single-edged razor- ades, dissecting instruments and laboratory drawing books (No. 7), a number of microscope slides, cover-slips and a hand lens (x10). Microscopes are provided in the laboratory in the Redmond Barry Building.

ADDITIONAL FACILITIES Students are advised to attend weekly tutorials; the time tables for these will be arranged in the first week of term. Self-teaching carrels equipped for individual study are also available. From time to time these carrels will be used Instead of demonstration work. BOOKS Prescribed textbook: Baker J W & Allen G E The Study of Biology, 3rd ed Addison-Wesley 1977 EXAMINATIONS Three written papers, one in each of the Science Faculty examination periods. Practical examinations may also be held during these examination periods. The practical work of each student is assessed throughout the year and Is taken into account, along with all examination results, in compiling the final mark. 610-010 CHEMISTRY PART 1 A course of approximately three lectures and one tutorial per week, together with laboratory work throughout the year. A preliminary standard equivalent to Higher School Certificate Chemistry will be assumed.

493 Faculty of Arts

SYLLABUS (i) Physical Chemistry The energetics of the transformation of matter in chemical reactions and changes of state: the fundamentals of thermodynamics, enthalpy, free energy and entropy, and their application of gaseous and solution reactions; phase equilibria and electrochemistry, applications of electro- chemical cells; fuel cells, electrolysis, corrosion. The kinetics of chemical change: effects of temperature, catalysis and radiation. Simple photo- chemistry and introduction to spectroscopy. (ii) Inorganic Chemistry Atomic structure and the theory of valency: electrovalent, covalent, co-ordinate, hydrogen, metallic and van der Waals bonding. Structure of solids: influence of bond type on chemical and physical properties and type of structure. Introduction to co-ordination chemistry: nature of complex compounds, Werner's original experiments, isomerism and stereo-chemistry of complex compounds, typical reactions, elementary approach to bonding. practical applications.

(iii) Organic Chemistry The scope of organic chemistry. Bonding, structure and elementary stereochemistry of carbon compounds. An outline of the chemistry of hydrocarbons and of the major groups of mono-functional compounds in terms of molecular structure and elementary electronic theory.

LABORATORY WORK Three hours per week, throughout the year, Illustrating the principles of inorganic, physical and organic chemistry together with exercises in quantitative and qualitative analysis. The practical classes for this subject are taken in the Chemistry building.

BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Stranks D R et al Chemistry: A Structural View, 2nd ed MUP 1970 The lectures in Chemistry 1 will be based on the assumption that all students have read the textbook by Stranks et al. (b) Prescribed textbooks: Snyder C H Introduction to Modern Organic Chemistry, Harper & Row 1973 'Departmental Publications. Experiments in Physical Chemistry. Experi- ments in Organic Chemistry. Inorganic Chemistry Laboratory Manuel. 1978 ed. 'Aylward G H & Findlay T J V eds S I Chemical Data, 2nd ed Wiley 1974

EXAMINATION In Physical Chemistry there will be written assignments during the course of the year, performance in which will be taken into account in assessing the final result. There will also be three hours of written examination to be held in the Science faculty exam. weeks or at the end of the- 494 Science Subjects

year. In Organic and Inorganic Chemistry there will be assignments and tests throughout the course and these will be taken into account in determining the candidate's success in the year's work. The final examination will consist of one 2-hour written paper in Inorganic Chemistry and one 2-hour written paper in Organic Chemistry in Science faculty exam. weeks.

626-003 GEOLOGY 100-LEVEL While students intending to major in Geology must take Geology units 101, 102 and 103, those who Intend to study the subject for one year only are recommended to take unit 112 in place of 102. Tutorials will be given on various topics within the course. They will be arranged at the beginning of each unit. Field excursions will be held on Saturdays and/or Sundays, and during laboratory periods. The Library of the School of Geology is open to students, and advice as to reading on any special section of the work will be given by members of staff.

626-101 THE DYNAMIC EARTH Professor J. F. Lovering 24 lectures, 24 hours practical work and 2 days' field work in first term. SYLLABUS The origin and evolution of the solar system. The Earth as a dynamic planet; major geological processes (plate tectonics, evolution of ocean basins, mountain building). Surface processes including weathering; the formation of sedimentary rocks; the development of the landscape. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: Wyllie P J The Way the Earth Works, Wiley 1976 Hills E S Physiography of Victoria, Whitcombe & Tombs 1975 Selley R C An Introduction to Sediment°logy, Academic Press 1976 EXAMINATION A 2-hour theory examination to be held in the May examination period. The time for a 1-hour practical examination will be arranged during the unit. Short tests may also be held during the practical sessions.

626-102 THE CRYSTALLINE EARTH Dr R. W. Le Maitre 24 lectures, 24 hours of practical work and 2 days' field work in second term. SYLLABUS The nature and products of Igneous and metamorphic activity, including mineralization. The nature of crystalline substances; the relationship between crystalline structure, chemical composition and physical properties of common minerals.

495 Faculty of Arts

BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: Battey M H Mineralogy for Students, Longman 1972 Ernst W G Earth Materials, Foundations of Earth Science Series, Pren- tice-Hall 1969 EXAMINATION A 2-hour theory examination to be held in the August examination period. The time for a 1-hour practical examination will be arranged during the unit. Short tests may also be held during the practical sessions.

626-103 THE EVOLUTION OF THE EARTH Dr O. P. Singleton 24 lectures, 24 hours of practical work and 2 days' field work in third term. SYLLABUS The history of the Earth as elucidated by geological principles. The evolution of life as found in the geological record. Principles of palaeontology, stratigraphy and geological history. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: Eicher D L Geologic Time, Prentice-Hall 1968 Black R M The Elements of Palaeontology, CUP 1970 McAndrew J & Marsden M A H eds Regional Guide to Victorian Geology, 2nd ed School of Geology University of Melbourne 1973 EXAMINATION A 2-hour theory examination to be held in the November examination period. The time for a 1-hour practical examination will be arranged during the unit. Short tests may also be held during the practical sessions.

626-112 GEOLOGICAL PROCESSES AND THE ENVIRONMENT Mr E. В. Joyce 18 lectures, 2%2 days of field excursions, 3 tutorials and a written assignment in second term. SYLLABUS Man's activities interact with and may interfere with geological processes. Special problems arise from earthquakes, volcanic eruptions, landslides and floods. Coastal environments are particularly sensitive, and problems of soil erosion and river management are Important in Victoria. Only with an understanding of these processes can Man plan his future activities in both rural and urban areas.

BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: Watkins J S Bottino M L & Morisawa M Our Geological Environment, W B Saunders Co Philadelphia 1975 496 Science Subjects

EXAMINATION One 1'/2 hour theory paper to be held in the August examination period.

640-012 PHYSICS (ARTS) A course of three lectures per week, with tutorials and laboratory work, throughout the year. The subject will normally consist of the four terminal units Physics 161, 162, 163 and 198, the description of which is given below. A student may, however, enrol for the non-terminal series Physics 141, 142, 143 and 199, which permit entry, if desired, into second-year physics; students with a strong background In HSC mathematics and physics may be admitted to the advanced non-terminal series 121, 122, 123 and 199. Details of these units may be found in the Faculty of Science Handbook. In general, a pass in the terminal series will not permit entry into second-year physics: In special circumstances, however, the Faculty may grant permission for a student to proceed to second-year physics; In such cases, the school of Physics would arrange additional work in the long vacation prior to the commencement of the second year. SYLLABUS The syllabus for the terminal course will cover the basic principles of physics without the use of advanced mathematics. At the same time. material of general interest will be introduced and applications of physics to other disciplines will be used as much as possible. Details of the four terminal units are as follows:

640-161 MECHANICS AND PROPERTIES OF MATTER Most of the following topics will be covered: Motion of a point mass. Relative motion. The concepts of mess, momentum, energy and their conservation laws. Force arid impulse; Newton's laws of motion. Gravitation; orbital motion. The work-energy theorem. Accelerated frames of reference; centrifugal and other inertial forces; and centrifuge. Rigid body rotation about a fixed axis. Rotational kinetic energy, torque, moment of inertia; angular momentum and its conservation law. Elemen- tary treatment of gyroscopes with precession; the vector nature of torque and angular momentum. Combined rotation and translation; the role of friction. Equilibrium conditions. Elastic properties of solids and fluids; Hooke's law; the elastic moduli. Hydrostatics; pressure, buoyancy and Archimedes' principle. Hydro- dynamics; streamline flow; Bernoulli equation; simple applications. Turbulence; Reynold's number. Viscosity; laminar flow. Non-newtonian fluids (blood). Surface tension; capillarity; drops and bubbles; wetting and detergents. Rise of sap in trees. Vibrations; simple harmonic motion. Damped vibrations; forced vibrations and resonance; vibration insulation.

640-162 ELECTROMAGNETISM AND THERMODYNAMICS Thermal Physics: Temperature; First Law of Thermodynamics. Kinetic theory of matter; gases, liquids, solids, change of phase; heat transfer by

497 Faculty of Arts

conduction, convection and radiation; brief introduction to entropy and the Second Law of Thermodynamics. Electromagnetism: Electrostatics; electromotive forces and steady currents; steady magnetic fields; electromagnetic induction; transient effects, alternating currents and electromagnetic waves. Optics: Propagation, reflection and refraction of electromagnetic waves; spherical mirrors and lenses; optical instruments and the eye; interference, diffraction, and polarization; microscopy and X-ray diffraction.

640-163 MODERN PHYSICS

Wave motion: travelling waves, standing waves, phase and group velocity. Relativity: energy and momentum, rest energy, mass and energy. Quantum mechanics: waves and particles, uncertainty principle. Atoms: structure including Pauli exclusion principle, spectra, X-rays, absorption of X-rays. Molecular structure, molecular energy levels, semi- conductors, transistors. Nuclei: forces, radioactivity, reactions. 198 LABORATORY WORK Three hours per week. Due to present staff shortages, laboratory classes may not proceed throughout the entire academic year. Attendance at practical classes is compulsory. The practical work of each student is examined continuously during the year, and is taken into account in assessing the results (including the class list) for the year. An additional test in practical work may be given.

BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: Burns M & MacDonald S G Physics for Biology and Pre-Medical Students 2nd ed, Addison-Wesley Caro D E McDonell J A & Spicer B M Modern Physics 2nd ed, Arnold

EXAMINATION One 2-hour written paper after the completion of each term's work.

Prescribed written work may form part of the assessment.

DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL STUDIES

Chairman of Department: Professor V. S. LEWIS, A.B. (Huron), M.A. (Chic.), D.S.W. (Western Reserve) The department of Social Studies is located within the Board of Social Studies and it offers the professional training course leading to the degree of bachelor of Social Work. In addition to social work subjects, the department teaches four elective subjects, Social Biology, Social History, Sociology, Social Theory and Welfare Critique, one of which is normally taken by each social work student in his first year of the two year course. These electives other than Social Biology are not available to Arts students. The subject Social Biology (Arts Course) is offered by the department to Arts students as a grade two level subject. Students intending to subsequently undertake the social woork degree course may be interested in taking this subject. Students who pass this subject and subsequently gain selection in the social work course may be exempted from the

498 Social Studies

Social Biology elective in the course but will also be required to undertake one other approved elective subject.

760-281 SOCIAL BIOLOGY (ARTS COURSE)

(This course will not be available in 1978) The course will include lectures, seminars, audio-visual programmes, laboratory work and field work totalling four hours per week. The following subjects would form a valuable pre-study: Aspects of Contemporary Biology (600-016), Biology (600-002), History and Philo- sophy of Science 1 (136-141), Psychology 1 (171-100), Behavioural Studies 1 (171-102), or H.S.C. Biology. Students who have not passed any of the above subjects are advised, after consultation with the Social Biology staff, to study the references and study programmes available from the Social Studies department from 1st February.

SYLLABUS The course will examine socially significant issues in health and relationships throughout the human life span. The aim is to develop an integrated view of the biological and social determinants of health In the individual; of adaptation throughout the process of ageing beginning at conception; of the diversity of function which can be equated with "normality"; and some understanding of individual and community resources for those in need.

Students will be expected to select ONE topic from EACH of Units A a field and В for special study. One of these will be undertaken as study by arrangement with the Social Biology staff.

760-283 Unit A HEALTH OF A COMMUNITY A clear differentiation should be made between the health needs of an individual (biologically determined) and his health wants (socially determined). To meet these varied and frequently diverse health wants matched to health needs, knowledge and understanding of the individual, of the society of which he is a part, and of the environment is required. The patterns of interaction between these levels and the limits of their adaptability to change are studied.

1. Public responsibility for environmental health: Potential dangers to health inherent in an urban system in relation to infectious disease and environmental pollution. Individual adaptability — body defences, immunity. Population adaptability — the biological and social criteria used in the development of public health laws and practices related to community health services.

2. Individual and social responsibility in morbidity and mortality: A study of the changing patterns of mortality and morbidity in Victoria in relation to developments in public health practices and medical technology.

499 Faculty of Arts

Individual responsibility and the value of education in the control of the still prevalent infectious diseases e.g. sexually transmitted diseases, the influenzas, hepatitis, and of environmental pollution. 3. Demographic trends: A study of trends resulting from changing patterns of disease. Problems associated with the survival of mentally and physically handicapped people. Social and biological aspects of ageing. Population mobility — social and biological factors influencing the health of ethnic groups in the community. 4. Food and nutrition: Needs and wants throughout life span. Individual and cultural value systems, economic factors, advertising, peer-group pressures, food technology as determinants of eating patterns and therefore of the nutritional status of the community; special problems of affluence, ethnic groups, the elderly, etc. 5. Specific problems of urban societies: A study of biological rhythms related to neuro-endocrine mechanisms and of factors in the social and physical environment such as crowding, noise, repetitive work, shift work which may disturb these rhythms and produce stress in the individual. The physiological and pathological reactions to stress through leuroen- docrine responses; physical and mental health as related and interdependent. 6. Perceptions of health: The way individuals and different groups in the community perceive health and disease. The process of decision-making in the provision of health care services is considered in relation to various perceptions of health needs.

760-282 Unit B HUMAN SEXUALITY 1. Study of diversity of sexual behaviour: A study of man in different societies from earliest records to contemporary cultural groups: Totem & Taboo. 2. Reproduction: Aspects of the biology and psychology of development, pregnancy, birth and birth control. Foetal "quality control", population growth and fertility control, patterns and practices, genetic counselling. Family planning and social work practice. 3. Biological and ethological factors in sexual expression in the life span: Neuro-endocrine and genetic influences and physiology and sexual response. Communication and sexual symbolism. Sexual affect: love, aggression, etc. 4. Socialization: Gender identification and role acceptance: child development, feminine/masculine identification. Family and institutions — child care: needs of special groups. Transexualism and sex role reversals. Sex education. 500 Social Studies

5. Aspects of sexuality which may be identified as problems by societies: Prostitution, sexual discrimination, sexually transmitted diseases, porno- graphy, etc.

EXAMINATION This will include a survey of the literature related to one of the above study areas and will be associated with a field study by arrangement with the staff of the subject. One 3-hour examination paper. Written assignments to be completed by specified dates as approved by the department may be required during the year as an alternative, or in addition to, or as a total or partial substitution for, this paper.

BOOKS (a) Preliminary reading: Hetzel B Health and the Australian Community, Pelican 1976 Luce Gay Gaer Body. Time, Sun Books 1972 Diesendorf M ed The Magic Bullet, SSRS ACT 1976 Titmuss R The Gift Relationship, Penguin Masters L H & Johnson V E The Pleasure Bond, Bantam 1976 Rattray-Taylor G Sex in History, Vanguard NY 1970

(b) Prescribed texts: Katchadourian H H & Lunde D T Biological Aspects of Human Sexual- ity, Holt Rinehart & Winston 1975 OR Gordon Chad & Johnson Gayle ed Readings in Human Sexuality: Con- temporary Perspectives, 1976-7 ed Harper & Soame NY 1976 Robinson David Patients Practitioners and Medical Care, Wm Heine- mann Medical Books 1973 Social Biology Audio-Visual Programme Guides (will be made available to students)

(c) Recommended for reference: Schaefer M Administration of Environmental Health Programmes, WHO 1974 Gordon D The Health of Man in Australian Society, U of Queensland Press 1976 McKeown T & Lowe C R An Introduction to Social Medicine, Blackwell Oxford 1974 Schofield C B S Sexually Transmitted Diseases, Churchill Livingstone London 1976 Scientific American The Human Population, Sept 1974 Vol 231 No 3 Knutson A L The Individual, Society and Health Behaviour, Russell Sage Foundation NY 1965 Gifft H H Washbon M B& Harrison G C Nutrition, Behaviour and Change, Prentice Hall 1972 Lewis, M Rosenblum L ed The Effect of the Infant on its Caregiver, John Wiley & Sons 1974 Lloyd B & Archer J Exploring Sex Differences, Academic Press 1976 Wilson G & Nias D Love's Mysteries, the Psychology of Sexual Attrac- tion, Open Books London 1976 Weinberg G Society end the Healthy Homosexual, Anchor Books '1973

501 Faculty of Arts

Burnard J Women, Wives, Mothers: Values and Options, Aldine Chicago 1975 Heslinga K Schellon et al Not Made of Stone: The Sexual Problems of Handicapped People, Noordhoff Pub Co Leyden (Neth) 1974 Bellivean F & Richter L Understanding Human Sexual Inadequacy, Hodder & Stoughton 1970 Hinde R A Biological Bases of Human Social Behaviour, McGraw-Hill 1974 Rutter M Maternal Deprivation Re-assessed, Penguin

MASTER OF ARTS

760-601 SCHOOL OF SOCIAL STUDIES The faculty of Arts has approved candidates to undertake the advanced studies for the degree of Master of Arts in the department of Social Studies. Reference should be made to Regulation 3.6 in the University Calendar and interested students should consult the chairman of department.

502 Interdisciplinary Studies

INTERDISCIPLINARY STUDIES AND CONTINUING EDUCATION COURSES This chapter consists of two parts: Part A: Interdisciplinary Studies Part B: Continuing Education Courses PART A: INTERDISCIPLINARY STUDIES• Since 1974 the Faculty has been offering a number of new courses in interdisciplinary studies. Normally, these courses are available for later year honours students and for M.A. Preliminary and postgraduate students. As these courses are innovatory, and to some extent experimental, students are asked to note that close consultation with the Co-ordinators of the programmes and with the individual departments is strongly advised. Students who wish to enrol In such courses, as well as seeking the approval of the chairmen of departments concerned and of the Co-ordinators of the programmes, must also obtain the approval of Faculty through the Sub-Dean. Students will be advised individually of the nature of the credit rating of such courses by the various Co-ordinators of the programmes, except in the case of Drama, where the credit is the same as for a second-year-level subject. Enrolment: After having gained the approval of the people mentioned above, students should note the following necessary procedures for enrolment:— (a) Each student must enrol under the general code number for the year and specific nature of his/her course In general, for example:— code for 3rd Year Political Science Honours Pure School " 4th " History/Philosophy Combined Honour* " 3rd " B.A. Hons/LL.B Combined Honours in French/Political Science (A code list is available at Students' Records Office.) (b) Students will then enrol for the specific code numbers for the individual subjects to be studied, noting that interdisciplinary programmes bear a faculty code number. COURSES AVAILABLE: In 1978 the following courses may be available. (a) 100-461 Eighteenth Century Studies. (b) 100-462 Religious Studies. (c) 100-463 Recent Social Theory. (d) 100-464 Drama. (e) 100-468 Problems of Peace and Conflict. (f) 100-467 Classical Social Theory. (g) 100-468 European Romanticism

100-461 INTERDEPARTMENTAL PROGRAMME IN EIGHTEENTH CENTURY STUDIES Co-ordinator: Professor C. Duckworth, French Participants in 1978 will include: Professor J. T. A. Burke, Fine Arts Dr P. A. Clancy, French

• It Is possibІ e at the time of going to press that the faculty may not be able to provide all these courses in 1978.

503 Faculty of Arts

Miss D. J. Dyason, History & Philosophy of Science Dr C. Gundolf, Italian Mr D. L. Gunner, Philosophy Dr A. K. Holland, French Professor R. W. Home, History & Philosophy of Science Dr D. E. Kennedy, History Dr H. E. Le Grand, History & Philosophy of Science Mr M. Moan, Music Dr A. M. Patrick, History Mr H. J. Pitt, Germanic Studies Professor G. Schulz, Germanic Studies Dr P. Steele, English In 1978 the course will be available to fourth-year honours and graduate students (and to third-year honours students by permission). It will be given in a series of lectures each week throughout the year and a weekly one-hour workshop throughout most of the year. The purpose of the lectures is to provide stimulating material and raise questions for examination In the workshops and to secure the continuity of the course. The workshops will be chaired by the relevant staff paгticl- pants and given by members of the class out of their research. Early in the course students will be invited to design their own research programmes, having in mind their own particular disciplines and the interdisciplinary nature of the course. SYLLABUS An investigation of the major ideas of the Enlightenment and its place In eighteenth century European life and thought, by way of a consideration of the Encyclopédie and the principle works in European science, art, music, literature, philosophy, historiography and political economy.

ASSESSMENT Students will be required to submit workshop reports during the course of the year and submit one research essay. Research essays are to be no longer than 10,000 words and are to be submitted at the end of the year. In the normal case, satisfactory participation in the workshops and the workshop reports will constitute 25 per cent of the year's assessed work and the research essay 75 per cent.

CREDIT Where this course is undertaken as part of fouth-year honours (or in certain cases, third-year honours), whether pure or combined course, it will be credited as constituting one of the required papers in the end of year examination or examinations as prescribed by individual departments. The exact proportion of credit will thus depend on the workloads required of their honours students by individual departments. Students enrolling in this course as part of their Master of Arts or M.A. Preliminary will be advised by their departments, after consultation with the Co-ordinator of the programme, as to the exact nature of the credit to be offered.

BOOKS Preliminary reading: Boswell James Life of Johnson, ed R W Chapman, Oxford paperback Boswell James London Journal, ed Frederick A Pottle, Penguin 504 Interdisciplinary Studies

Franklin Benjamin Autobiography, ed Herbert W Schneider, Воbbs Merrill Voltaire F Candide, Penguin Dickinson H T ed Politics and Literature In the Eighteenth Century, Everyman Mossner E C The Forgotten Hume, Columbia University Press Pock S W C Admiral Lord Anson, Cassell Gendzler S J ed The Encyclopedia: Selected Articles, Harper Honour H Neo-Classicism, Penguin Anderson M S Europe in the Eighteenth Century, Longmans Cobban A The Age of the Enlightenment, Thames & Hudson Gay P The Party of Humanity, Weidenfeld & Nicolson Texts: Source material is available from the Secretary, room 109, Old Arts

100-462 INTERDEPARTMENTAL PROGRAMME IN RELIGIOUS STUDIES Co-ordinator: Dr J. G. Fraser, Middle Eastern Studies Participants: Dr W. K. Bartlett, Psychology Professor J. Bowman, Middle Eastern Studies Mr W. Culican, History Sister M. Manion, Fine Arts Dr J. S. Martin, Germanic Studies Dr N. A. Mirza, Middle Eastern Studies Mr L. R. Oates, East & Southeast Asian Studies Mr S. N. Ray, Indian Studies Dr G. V. Stanley, Psychology The course will consist of weekly lectures/seminars of one hour duration throughout the year plus a weekly tutorial, and will normally be available to honours (third and fourth year), M.A. Preliminary and Master of Arts students who have already completed at least one undergraduate course bearing upon some aspect of Religious Studies (e.g. Philosophy . 2; F; Middle Eastern Studies 2 / C; Indian Studies 2В /ЗС; Fine Arts 2E/З В З History 2J/3J, etc.). However, other students may also be permitted to enrol at the discretion of the Religious Studies Committee. SYLLABUS This course has evolved in such a way as to have a fixed central element together with a related variable topic which may change from year to year. This special topic for 1978 is Religion and the Written Word and has an obvious literary emphasis. The three other centres of concern which constitute the constant portion of the syllabus are as follows: 1. The Comparison of Religions Topics concerning the possibility of "comparative religion": In what sense can we "compare" religions (e.g. Buddhism, Hinduism, Judaism) with one another? Is it possible to evaluate religions es "higher" and "lower", more or less "primitive" etc.? Are there analogies between religious traditions and artistic traditions? 2. The Scientific Study of Religion Topics concerning the methodology of the "sciences of religion": the 19th century presuppositions of "comparative religion" e.g. Com-

505 Faculty of Arts

tean positivism's assumption that the religious mentality is "pre- scientific", and the evolutionist assumption that the history of religion is one of development from the simple and "primitive" to the more complex. The scope and limits of the psychology of religion, the sociology of religion, philosophy of religion, the history of religion. 3. The Religion of the Australian Aborigines An overview of Aboriginal religious ideas together with a discussion of the various interpretations of them by 19th century and contemporary comparative religionists. ASSESSMENT Students will be required to submit two tutorial papers during the year and to write an essay of 5,000 words on a selected topic. This written work plus participation in seminars will be the basis of evaluation of performance in lieu of a formal end-of-the-year examination.

CREDIT Where this course Is undertaken as part of fourth-year honours (or in certain cases, third-year honours), whether pure or combined course, it will be credited as constituting one of the required papers in the final examination or examinations, as prescribed by individual departments. The exact proportion of credit will thus depend on the workloads required of their final honours students by individual departments. Students enrolling in this course as part of their Master of Arts or M.A. Preliminary will be advised by their departments, after consultation with the Co-ordinator of the programme, as to the exact nature of the credit to be offered.

BOOKS Smart R N Reasons and Faiths, Routledge & Kegan Paul 1958 Smart R N The Phenomenon of Religion, Macmillan, London 1973 Pritchard E Evans Theories of Primitive Religion, OUP, London 1965 Lévi-Strauss C The Savage Mind, Weidenfeld & NicoIson, London 1966 Eliade M The Quest: History and Meaning in Religion, Chicago UP, Chicago 1969 Yinger J Milton The Scientific Study of Religion, Collier-Macmillan, London 1970 Towler R Homo Religiosus: Sociological Problems in the Study of Re- ligion, Constable 1974 Durkheim E The Elementary Forms of the Religious Life, Collier, NY 1961 Frazer James G The Golden Bough, Macmillan, London Lévy-Bruhl Lucien How Natives Think, Allen & Unwin, London 1926 Lévy-Bruhl Lucien Primitive Mentality, Allen & Unwin, London 1923 Malinowski B Magic, Science and Religion, Doubleday, NY 1954 Weber Max The Religion of China, Confucianism and Taoism, Ancient Judaism, The Religion of India, Collier-Macmillan, London 1951 1952 1958 Eliade M ed The History of Religions: Essays in Methodology, Chicago UP 1959 Stanner W E H ed Australian Aboriginal Studies, OUP, Melbourne 1963 Berndt R ed Aboriginal Man in Australia, Angus & Robertson, Sydney 1965 Berndt R ed Australian Aboriginal Religion, Brill, Leiden 1974 506 Interdisciplinary Studies

Stanner W E H "The Lineaments of Sacrifice", Oceania, 1960 XXX 2 Stanner W E H "Sacramentallsm, Rite and Myth", Oceania, 1960 XXX 4 Stanner W E H "Symbolism In the Higher Rites" Oceania, 1961 XXX 2 Stanner W E H "The Design-Plan of a Riteless Myth", Oceania, 1961 XXXI 4 Stanner W E H "The Design-Plan of Mythless Rites", Oceania, 1962 XXXII 2 Stanner W E H "Cosmos and Society Made Correlative", Oceania, 1963 XXXIII 4 Eliade M Australian Religions, Comell UP 1973 The above list is intended to supply a general reading list for the constant portion of the syllabus. Detailed lists for the special topic Religion and the Written Word and further information about the course will be available from the Secretariat of the Interdisciplinary Programmes before the beginning of the 1978 academic year.

100-463 INTERDEPARTMENTAL PROGRAMME IN RECENT SOCIAL THEORY A course of seminars running for two hours a week throughout the year. The programme is available to fourth year honours and graduate students. PARTICIPATING STAFF The subject provides a setting in which members of staff from a number of departments can contribute to the development of Recent Social Theory as an independent field of study in this University. Participants are likely to vary a little from year to year (in 1977 the course was conducted by a committee made up of persons from Education, History, Philosophy, Political Science, Psychology and Social Studies). SYLLABUS Contents The overriding theme Is the development of comprehensive interpretations of individual-and-society. During 1977 the course surveyed such major concepts as culture, symbol, communication, dialectics, practice and structure, especially as they have been treated by such writers as Geertz, Leach, Althusser, Douglas, Habermas, Bateson and Levi-Strauss. The course ended with a study of knowledge as metaphor, an attempt to link the arts and the sciences. In '1978 the course will be approximately the same. Structure The course attempts both to cover a wide scope and also to orient each student to a deeper analytic study of selected issues of his or her own choosing. ASSESSMENT Students will be required to write at least one essay per semester on a topic of their own choosing (subject to the approval of a committee member). There will be no end-of-year examination, but the Committee could require additional work from students not clearly meeting adequate standards. All scripts will be examined by at least two markers of whom it is hoped one will be constant across all students. The amount of credit for Recent Social Theory may depend to some extent on the department, faculty or board in which the student is based.

507 Faculty of Arts

Students are advised to discuss the amount of allowable credit with their departments and with the faculty early in the year. COURSE GUIDE A course guide will be available from the Interdisciplinary Studies office before the commencement of the academic year. BOOKS Students are strongly advised to undertake preliminary reading and study In the field of classical social theory and to Introduce themselves to the basic issues of epistemology and methodology. Preliminary reading: Friedrichs R W A Sociology of Sociology, The Free Press Murphy R The Dialectics of Social Life, Allen & Unwin Blackburn R Ideology in Social Science, Fontana Badcock C R Levi-Strauss, Structuralism and Sociological Theory, Hutchinson UL Bateson G Steps to an Ecology of Mind, Ballantyne Fay B Social Theory and Political Practice, Allen & Unwin

100-464 INTERDEPARTMENTAL PROGRAMME IN DRAMA Co-ordinator: Mrs Wonbok Develin Participants: Professor G. H. Gellie, Classical Studies Mr A. D. Pryor, Classical Studies Dr P. A. Clancy, French Dr J. Armstrong, Russian Dr H. R. Maclean, Germanic Studies Dr C. Gundolf, Italian The course constitutes a full subject, normally to be taken in the second year of a student's course, but not as part of a sequence. The only prerequisite is that the student should have passed at least one first-year subject. The enrolment for it will be limited to 30 students. It will consist of one lecture and four hours of workshop and/or seminar per week.

SYLLABUS The aim of the course is to extend knowledge of and sympathy for the nature of theatre. Many plays of the past will be examined by way of textual analysis, theatre history, and the ideas of the period. Some of the plays will be produced In the workshop either in part or in full. Although the course will attempt to cover the transitional periods in theatre history some emphasis will be given to Greek Drama, Commedia dell'Arte, Chekhov, Brecht, the theatre of the absurd and Oriental classical theatre. The students will be responsible for a 3-hour examination, and a paper which may, in part, be a result of a project. An original play written In the first two terms and which may be produced in the 3rd term can be a substitute for the paper. 508 Interdisciplinary Studies

ASSESSMENT The workshop participation, the examination, and the paper will be considered. BOOKS Nicoll A Mask, Mime and Miracles Berthold M History of World Drama Nagler A M A Source Book in Theatrical History Esslin M Theatre of the Absurd Styan J L Drama, stage and Audience

100-486 INTERDEPARTMENTAL PROGRAMME IN PROBLEMS OF PEACE AND CONFLICT Co-ordinator: Professor G. N. Blainey, History Participants: Professor V. T. Buckley, English Mr R. Foster, Education Mr S. W. Johnston, Criminology Dr J. R. V. Prescott, Geography Dr B. F. Scarlett, Philosophy The course will consist of one lecture/seminar a week of two hours duration. It will be available to third and fourth-year honours and graduate students (and to third-year pass students at the discretion of the Co-ordinator). SYLLABUS An investigation into various problems posed by the existence of war and other forms of violent conflict and by proposals for the maintenance of peace. In 1978 the course will probably be concerned with: (1) Attempts to bring warfare and related matters under moral judgment; (2) An analysis and evaluation of various theories about the causes of war and the nature of warfare; (3) An examination of the reactions of creative writers to war or revolution with a view to testing ideas about a writer's relation to his society in times of crisis. ASSESSMENT Students will be required either to submit one essay of 3,000 words during the year and sit for a 3-hour examination or to submit a research project on an approved topic. Research projects are to be no longer than 10,000 words and are to be submitted before the end of third term. In the first option the essay will be 25 per cent of the year's assessed work and the examination the remaining 75 per cent and in the second option the research project will be 100 per cent. Regular attendance at classes will be required. CREDIT Where this course is undertaken as part of third or fourth-year honours, whether pure or combined course, it will be credited as constituting one of the required papers in the final examination or examinations, as prescribed by Individual departments. The exact proportion of credit will thus depend on the workloads required of their final honours students by individual departments. Students enrolling in this course as part of their Master of Arts or M.A. Preliminary will be advised by their

509 Faculty of Arts

departments, after consultation with the Co-ordinator of the programme, as to the exact nature of the credit to be offered. Third-year pass students will be able to count it as a third-year subject in a pass degree. BOOKS Preliminary reading: Aron Raymond On War, New York 1963 Aron Raymond Peace and War: A Theory of International Relations, New York 1966 Bernard Luther War and Its Causes, New York 1944 Blainey G The Causes of War, London 1973 Clausewitz Karl von On War, ed F N laude, London 1940 Hobbes Thomas Leviathan, especially Ch 13, Oxford 1960 Horowitz I L War and Peace in Contemporary Social and Philosophical Theory, London 1973 Knoll E & McFadden N eds War Crimes and the American Conscience, New York 1970 Lorenz Konrad Z On Aggression, New York 1966 McDougal I & Feliciano F Law end Minimum World Public Order, Yale 1962 Sharp Gene The Politics of Non-Violent Action, Boston 1972 •Wasserstrom Richard War and Morality, Belmont Wadsworth 1970 Wright Quincy A Study of War, 2 Vols Chicago 1942 More detailed reading lists and further information about the course, prescribed texts, etc., will be available from the Secretariat of the Inter- departmental Programmes, Old Arts Building, before the beginning of the 1978 academic year.

100-467 CLASSICAL SOCIAL THEORY (See p. 28 for overall course structure requirements) Convenor: Dr F. Knopfelmacher Deputy Convenor: Dr J. T. J. Srzednicki Classical Social Theory is offered in four ways: 100-200: A grade 2 pass subject: two half-subjects; Classical Social Theory 2. 100-260 A grade 2 honours subject: two half-subjects with honours loading; Classical Social Theory 2 (Ions). 100-300: A grade 3 pass subject: three half-subjects; Classical Social Theory 3. 100-360: A grade 3 honours subject: three half-subjects with honours loading; Classical Social Theory 3 (Ions). ASSESSMENT Grade 2: Two essays and one 2-hour paper. Grade 3: Three essays and one paper of 3 hours duration. Honours loading: normally an extension of one essay in co-operation with a staff member of the student's choice or else an additional essay. The overall object of the course is to introduce students to the classics of social theory in the first half of the year, and to widen the theoretical base and integrate it with government and culture changes in the second half of the year. Each half-subject will normally consist of two lectures and one tutorial per week. Half-subject 1 is compulsory for all students of Classical Social Theory. 510 Interdisciplinary Studies

The following half-subjects (also called units) are available for 1977: 1. Introduction to Classical Social Theory First half-year (171-021) 2. Classical Theory and Culture Change Second half-year (166-020) 3. Individualism Second half-year (166-021) 4. Justice and Social Structuгes Second half-year (161-023) 5. Classical Philosophical Texts In Social Theory First half-year (161-021) 6. Analytical Social Theory Second half-year (161-022) (i) Students will normally choose their two half-subjects as end-on units, I.e., one from the first half and one from the second half of the year. (ii) While no specific prerequisite for entry to the grade 2 subject is recommended (apart from the completion of at least two grade 1 subjects), the half-subject "Introduction to Classical Social Theory" is a prerequisite for entry to the other half-courses available at both grade 2 and grade 3 levels. (iii) The half-subjects listed as (4) and (5) together constitute the subject Philosophy 2D and so may be taken together as a grade 2 Philosophy subject concurrent with "Classical Social Theory". (iv) Students who, at grade 3 level, choose half-subjects (1 ) and (5) in the first half of the year will be able to combine these half- subjects with any of the remaining four half-subjects in the second half of the year. (v) Half-subjects (4) and (5) form the core of Philosophy 3D, and under special circumstances, students who have passed the subject "Classical Social Theory" in their second year may be granted permission to take these two units of Philosophy 3D and the remaining half-subject not covered in their second year as one of their two required grade 3 subjects. (vi) Faculty may need to impose a quota on any or all of these half- subjects. (vii) Approval of combinations of half-subjects for degree purposes must be obtained from the Faculty through the Sub-Dean. Advice on choosing the order and number of half-subjects should be sought from the Faculty office and the lecturer-in-charge of such half- subjects. ENROLMENT PROCEDURES Pass Students: Students should enrol in the full subject Classical Social Theory at grade 2 or 3 level. Those taking the subject at grade 2 level must also enrol in unit 171-021 and one other unit of their choice. Those enrolling at grade 3 level must enrol in unit 171-021 and two other units of their choice.

В.А . Honours students, М.А. Preliminary and М.А . Students: Where honours students are taking this subject as a third grade 2 subject or as an extra subject they should enrol as indicated above for pass students. Where permission has been granted by the appropriate chairman

511 Faculty of Arts

or chairmen of departments and by the Sub-Dean to take the course as part of the honours programme students should enrol as follows: (i) Where Classical Social Theory (Ions) is a direct substitute for a full honours subject at 2nd or 3rd year level, students should enrol in subject number 100-260 and unit 171-021 and one other unit (at grade 2 level), or subject 100-360, unit 171-021 and two other units (at grade 3 level). (1i) Where specific units of the course but not the full subject have been approved as part of the honours programme students should enrol in their basic honours subjects, e.g. Politics 3A and enrol in addition in the specific unit or units of Classical Social Theory but not in the subject, i.e. an enrolment might be Politics ЗА, 166-301, consisting of unit 166-007, Soviet Politics and Society, unit 166-008, Political Development and unit 171-021 Introduction to Classical Social Theory. (iii) M.A. Preliminary and M.A. candidates who have gained approval for the subject as part of their graduate programmes should enrol in the subject 100-360 and three units. Where specific units only have been approved such candidates should enrol in these units only, not in the full subject.

Unit 1: 171-021 Introduction to Classical Social Theory Dr F. Knopfelmacher Two lectures and one tutorial per week. First half of the year. The object of this unit is to give a course in modern classical social theory which grew out of the industrial revolution. The course will centre on Marx, Max Weber and Durkheim, whose principal ideas and systems will be examined. Appropriate references will be made to related samples of ideas, e.g. from Nietzsche, Tönnies, Sombart, Simmel, Michels, Pareto, Scheler, Freud, and others. The discussion will link the theories to their respective cultural settings, yet relate them also to contemporary empirical work in social and psychosocial enquiry.

ASSESSMENT One essay of about 2,000 words and one 1-hour examination paper.

BOOKS A full reading list of prescribed and recommended books will be avail- abI e in December 1977. Preliminary reading: The Sociological Perspective, Units 1-4, No.D283-1 (1-4), Open Uni- versity 1973 Giddens A Capitalism and Modern Social Theory, CUP 1975 McLellan D The Young Hegelians end Karl Marx, Macmillan or Hook S From Hegel to Marx, Ann Arbor Paperback Bottomore T V and Rubel E Karl Marx: Selected Writings on Sociology and Social Philosophy, Penguin Nisbet R The Sociology of Emile Durkheim, OUP MacRae D Weber, Fontana Modern Masters Gerth U H and Mills C Wright From Max Weber: Essays in Sociology, Galaxy OUP 512 Interdisciplinary Studies

Unit 2: 166-020 Classical Social Theory and Culture Change Mr A. C. Theophanous This unit is concerned with the nature of, and the possibilities for social and cultural change. The views of Marx, Durkheim and Weber on these Issues are taken up and considered in relation to contemporary social theories such as those of Parsons, Levi-Strauss, Marcuse, Berger and Luckmann. The course divides into four sections. The first part is an analysis of the character and extent of the social determination of the individual. This is related to the existence of fundamental human needs and potentialities. Next there is an examination of contrasting views as to the nature of the determining social system — functionalist, symbolic interactionist, structuralist and Marxist theories are compared and a critique offered. In the third section, alternative conceptions of the nature of social change are developed from the above theories of man in society. It will be argued that rational potentialities for change are inherent in the very nature of man. Finally in the last section, theories of alienation which explain the continued suppression of people's potentialities a;è considered, and the ramifications for the transformation of society are explored.

ASSESSMENT An essay not exceeding 2,000 words and a paper of 1 hour's duration. BOOKS Reading and reference list: Note: Additional references will be provided later. Berger & Luckmann The Social Construction of Reality Durkheim E Rules of the Sociological Method Durkheim E Suicide Giddens A Capitalism and Modern Social Theory Habermas J Knowledge and Human Interests Israel J Alienation: From Marx to Modern Sociology Levi-Strauss C Structural Anthropology Levi-Strauss C The Savage Mind Marcuse H One Dimensional Man Marx Karl Economic and Philosophical Manuscripts Marx Karl The German Ideology Mead G H Mind, Self and Society Parsons T The Social System Unit 3: 166-021 Individualism

Mr D. F. B. Tucker Two lectures and one tutorial. Second half of the year. Individualism is a term which stands for a way of looking at the relations between man and society. At the level of social analysis it involves, primarily, an attempt either to model the relations between people in terms of strategy and conflict, or to ground explanation through reduction by postulating certain presumptive psychological generalizations about the character of man. It includes also certain ethical commitments such as the principle of the supreme and Intrinsic worth of the individual human being, the Ideal of self-determination and the notion that men have entitlements which they may demand as a right.

R 513 Faculty of Arts

In the lectures an attempt will be made to isolate the set of logically related core ideas which have been associated with individualism and to subject them to critical scrutiny. Three major themes will be explored: 1. The Abstract Individual and the Problem of Order 2. Methodological Individualism and Social Theory 3. Individualism, Ethics and Political Philosophy

ASSESSMENT Essay work and one 1-hour examination paper.

BOOKS A full reading list will be available in December 1977. Note: Wherever possible use will be made of cheap editions which can provide students with a selection of readings from a particular author. Preliminary reading: O'Neill J ed Modes of Collectivism and Individualism, Heinemann 1968 Lukes S Individualism, Basil Blackwell 1973 Rex J Key Problems in Sociological Theory, Kegan Paul 1961 Macpherson C B The Political Theory of Possessive Individualism, Clarendon OUP 1962

Unit 4: 161-023 Justice and Social Structures Fr Eric D'Arcy Two lectures and one tutorial weekly for the second half of the year.

SYLLABUS A study of the contemporary debate between Rawls and Nozick concerning the origin and content of Social Justice, with particular attention to Equality, Freedom and Rights. ASSESSMENT One essay and one 1-hour paper. BOOKS Recommended for preliminary reading: Barry B Political Argument, Routledge & Kegan Paul Laslett P and Runciman W G eds Philosophy, Politics and Society, Fourth Series Blackwell Prescribed texts: Bedau H A ed Justice and Equality, Prentice-Hall Hobbes T Leviathan, Everyman Locke Hume Rousseau The Social Contract, Oxford World Classics •Nozick R Anarchy, State and Utopia, Blackwell •Rawls J A Theory of Justice, OUP Wolff R P In Defence of Anarchism, Harper & Row

Unit 5: 161-021 Classical Philosophical Texts in Social Theory Fr Eric D'Arcy A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week for the first half of the year. 514 Interdisciplinary Studies

SYLLABUS A study of eight texts which are forerunners of classical social theory, with particular attention to (1) their versions of Social Contract theory, (2) their attitudes to Social Justice and Human Rights, and (3) the origins or historicist political philosophies. ASSESSMENT One essay and one 1-hour paper. BOOKS Prescribed texts: •Aristotle The Politics, Penguin • Bigonglari D ed Political Ideas of St Thomas Aquinas, Hafner NY paperback •Hegel G W F Philosophy of Right, Oxford paperback •Hobbes Thomas Leviathan, Everyman •Locke Hume and Rousseau Social Contract, Oxford paperback •Marx Karl Early Texts of Karl Marx ed D McLellan, Blackwell paperback

Unit 8: 181-022 Analytical Social Theory Dr J. Srzednickl Two lectures and one tutorial weekly in the second half of the year. SYLLABUS Analytical study of basic concepts of social and political discourse, basic terms such as "community", "right", "status" and their application. . The relation of such terms to the concepts of "group structure", "state", "legislation" and "administration". Ramifications of such concepts and their relations. ASSESSMENT Essay-work and one 1-hour examination paper. Books Prescribed text •Srzednickí J Elements of Social and Political Philosophy, Martinus Nijhoff 1976 Relevant additional references are given in the bib iography and on p. 185 of the text, and will be provided in class.

100-488 INTERDEPARTMENTAL PROGRAMME IN EUROPEAN ROMANTICISM Co-ordinator: Dr C. Grawe, Germanic Studies Participants: Dr M. Adams, Germanic Studies Dr J. Armstrong, Russian Mr M. Cooke, Music his A. Galbally, Fine Arts Dr B. Galli, French

515 Faculty of Arts

Dr C. Gundolf, Italian Dr C. Langley, Psychology Dr H. Le Grand, History and Philosophy of Science Professor C. McCormick, Italian Dr G. Marshall, Philosophy Mr M. Moon, Music Professor G. Schulz, Germanic Studies Mr C. Wallace-Crabbe, English

NATURE OF COURSE A course in literature and history of ideas for Part 3 and Part 4 Honours students and for M.A. and M.A. Prelim. students by arrangements with the relevant departments. In certain circumstances Part 3 Pass students may be admitted. PREREQUISITES A pass in Part 1 of any of the following: English, French, German, Italian or Russian; together with (for students In English) a reading knowledge of one of the above languages.

DURATION A 2-hour seminar throughout the year. Of the 25 sessions, some 18 will be spent on innovations and achievements by writers of the Ro- mantic generation in England, Germany, France, Italy and Russia. There will also be lectures on related developments in painting, music and philosophy from around 1800. SYLLABUS A. England The sessions will be concerned mainly with the poetry of Blake, Words- worth and Coleridge. B. Germany 1. The Magic of the World: Romantic Prose (Kleist, Hoffmann) 2. The Magic of Words: Romantic Poetry (Brentano, Eichendorff) 3. "Progressive Universal-Poesie": Theory and Development of German Romanticism C. France 1. Lyricism: a spiritual and moral revival (Mme de Staěl Chateau- briand, Lamartine) 2. The prophetic poet (Vigny, Hugo) 3. The visionary imagination (Nerval, Musset) D. Italy 1. The Romantic Controversy in Italy 2. Giacomo Leopardi between Classicism and Romanticism 3. Alessandro Manzoni and the Novel E. Russia 1. Telescopic development of Russian literature; its derivative nature; the self-conscious concern with a need for a national literature. 2. The Flawed Hera (Pushkin, Lermontov) 3. The Grotesqueries of Gogol 516 Interdisciplinary Studies

F. Fine Arts 1. Romantic Horror: The Art of Goya and Fuseli 2. The Romantic Landscape G. Music 1. Aspects of Romantic Music 2. Words and Music in Romanticism H. Philosophy Kant's Conception of the Nature and Value of the Person I. History and Philosophy of Science Science around 1800 J. Psychology The Behaviour of Romantic Heroes BOOKS Preliminary reading for all students: Furst Lilian R Romanticism, Vol 2 of 'The Critical Idiom' series Methuen 1976 Halsted John B ed Romanticism, Harper Torchbook 1969 Reading lists will be available from the Secretariat of the Interdepart- mental Programmes, Old Arts Building, before the beginning of the 1978 academic year. ASSESSMENT (a) Either a 4,000 word essay on two or more areas or two 2,000 word essays. (b) An oral test of 20 minutes.

PART В: CONTINUING EDUCATION COURSES The Office for Continuing Education was established to develop the Uni- versity's role in Continuing Education. Courses provided by the Office include ones of interest to specific professional, vocational or community groups and others closely related to the disciplines taught within the Uni- versity. In making these courses available, it is the University's Intention that persons who wish to pursue an educational interest or, who wish to enrich their earlier education, should be able to experience tertiary education in the area of their interest. Some Continuing Education courses have been specially developed to meet needs of particular professional, vocational or community groups and include short refresher courses, seminars and summer schools. Other courses have been developed as courses of generel interest and are based on a wide range of disciplines covered within the normal teaching of the University. There are Continuing Education courses developed from the range of disciplines within the faculty of Arts. These courses are based on, but are not identical to, the relevant departmental entries in this handbook. For specific details of these courses, please contact the Office for Con- tinuing Education. It should be noted that the taking of Continuing Education courses is unlikely to be of direct assistance in gaining selection for normal degree

517 Faculty of Arts

or diploma courses and studies taken within these courses will not be credited subsequently towards a degree or diploma. In all cases, departments offering courses reserve the right to exclude applicants on any of the following grounds: 1. Inadequate prior qualifications, including failure to satisfy any pre-requisites which may apply. 2. Lack of space in the course concerned. Intending students must complete an application form, obtainable in December and January from the Office for Continuing Education by 31 January 1978. Successful applicants will be notified and will be required to complete enrolment details, including payment of fees, with the Office for Continuing Education. The Office for Continuing Education, which is situated on the ground floor of the Appointments Board Building, is responsible only for enrolments in Continuing Education courses (extension 6827). Information about other methods of enrolment for degree studies Including additional subjects, complementary courses, admission ad еипdет statum, etc. are all dealt with in faculty offices and enrolments are made through the Students' Records Office.

518 Combined Honours Courses COMBINED HONOURS COURSES CONTENTS

Hereunder follows a list of courses which students interested in a сот- bined honours course can take. The courses listed below, have approved by the faculty. Ьееп

Ancient Greek & . . French & Philosophy Arabic & French French & RussiaП Arabic & Germanic Studies Geography & History Arabic & Indonesian Geography & Political Science Syriac & . . Germanic Studies & Arabic Chinese & Economics Germanic Studies & English Chinese & French Germanic Studies & Fine Arts Chinese & History Germanic Studies & French Chinese & Political Science Germanic Studies & History Computer Science & . . . Germanic Studies & Italian Dutch & .. . Germanic Studies & Music Economic History & History Germanic Studies & Philosophy Economics & History Germanic Studies & Political Economics & Mathematics Science Economics & Mathematical Germanic Studies & Russian Sciences Hebrew & . . . Economics & Philosophy History & Economics Economics & Political Science History & English English & Fine Arts History & Fine Arts English & French History & French English & Germanic Studies History & Geography English & History History & Germanic Studies English & Italian History & History and English & Latin Philosophy of Science English & Mathematics History & Italian English & Philosophy History & Latin English & Political Science History & Middle Eastern Studies Fine Arts & English History & Music Fine Arts & French History & Political Science Fine Arts & Germanic Studies History & Philosophy Fine Arts & History History & Russian Fine Arts & Latin History and Philosophy of Science Fine Arts & Middle Eastern & Economic History Studies History and Fine Arts & Philosophy Philosophy of Science Foreign Language & History & a Foreign Language and Philosophy of Science History and French & English Philosophy of Science French & Fine Arts & History French & Germanic Studies History and French & History Philosophy of Science French & Indonesian & Latin French & Italian History and French & Latin Philosophy of Science French & Middle Eastern & Maths Studies

'(Same es for combined соu гsеs with Latin)

519 Faculty of Arts

History and Mathematics & History and Philosophy of Science Philosophy of Science & Philosophy Mathematics & Latin Indian Studies & English Mathematics & Philosophy Indian Studies & French Mathematics & Russian Indian Studies & History Middle Eastern Studies & .. . Indian Studies & Politics Music & Germanic Studies Indian Studies & Philosophy Music & History Indian Studies & Indonesian Philosophy & Economics Indonesian & Arabic Philosophy & English Indonesian & French Philosophy & Fine Arts Indonesian & Geography Philosophy & French Indonesian & History Philosophy & Germanic Studies Indonesian & Indian Studies Philosophy & History Indonesian & Latin Philosophy & History and lndoneslan & Political Science Philosophy of Science Italian & English Philosophy & Mathematics Italian & French Philosophy & Political Science Italian & Germanic Studies Political Science & Economic Italian & History History Italian & Philosophy Political Science & Economics Latin & English Political Science & English Latin & Fine Arts Political Science & Geography Latin & French Political Science & Germanic Latin & History Studies Latin & History and Political Science & History Philosophy of Science Political Science & Philosophy Latin & Mathematics Political Science & Russian Linguistics & . .. . Russian & French Mathematics & Computer Science Russian & Germanic Studies Mathematics & Economics Russian & History Mathematics & English Russian & Political Science

Students interested in combinations not listed here should consult the Sub-Dean. In all cases, students are required to obtain approval from the Sub-Dean in consultation with the chairmen of the departments concerned where necessary. Faculty normally requires at least four of the main subjects from each of the two honours schools together with such other subjects as are considered necessary to provide a background for the main subjects or form an integral whole. Students should be aware that in many cases approved by Faculty they may, if they have completed the work of the first three years of a combined honours course, choose to specialise in their fourth year in one or other of the disciplines involved. Their degree would then be titled e.g. B.A. Hons. Latin with Philosophy or B.A. Ions. English with History, where Latin or English was completed as a full fourth year.

Candidates taking a combined honours course should make themselves familiar with the preambles to, and the details prescribed for, each of the two honours schools. In particular, they should note:

•Ап honours course In Middle Eastern Studies has recently been approved by faculty and will be availabIe in combination with certain other honours courses to De approved. 520 Combined Honours Courses

(1) that combined honours courses with Mathematics are approved only for the sequence Mathematics 1A, Mathematics 2A and Mathematics ЗА; (2) that English in a combined honours course may be combined either through English Literature or through English Language; that a knowledge of Latin is most desirable for all combined honours (з ) courses of which French or Italian form a part; (4) that admission to the second year is conditional upon satisfactory performance in the first year, and will normally be granted only to candidates who have obtained honours (usually at least second class) In each of the main subjects of the course; (5) unless the alternative of honours is specifically indicated in the courses below, candidates who wish to take a supporting subject at honours standard must seek special approval; (6) candidates enrolled for a combined honours course in certain languages may, on the recommendation of the chairmen of both departments concerned, be permitted to specialize in one of the two languages in fourth year; (7) a candidate enrolled for a combined honours course in English and a foreign language may, on the recommendation of the chairmen of the departments concerned, be permitted to specialize in that language in his fourth year; (8) unless otherwise stated. Faculty prefers that the supporting subject in second year be chosen from a discipline other than but related to the two honours disciplines of the combined course; (9) that combined honours courses in Dutch are available; (10) that combined honours courses to German and Italian following the beginners' courses German 1A and Italian 1A may in special cases be approved depending upon results in first year; (1 1 ) that combined honours courses in Linguistics are available. The prerequisite for admission to Linguistics 2 (hofs) will be two grade 1 subjects, at least one of which must be passed at honours level. The other honours component in combination with Linguistics must satisfy the requirements of the appropriate department and will typically consist of a four-year subject sequence at honours standard. Each Individual combination must be approved by the chairmen of the respective departments and the Sub-Dean; (12) that combined honours courses in Computer Science are available.

ARABIC AND GERMANIC STUDIES First Year: Arabic 1, German 1 or German 1A or Dutch 1, Middle Eastern Studies 1A and one other approved additional subject. Second Year: Arabic 2 (hoes), German 2 (hofs) or German 2A (hofs) or Dutch 2 (hols). Any grade 2 Middle Eastern subject or some other approved additional subject. Third Year: Arabic 3 (hofs), German 3 (huns) or Dutch 3 (hens). Fourth Year: Arabic 4 (hens), Germanic Studies 4S (hens). In addition, each candidate must submit during the fourth year a thesis (or theses) fulfilling one of the following requirements: (a) one thesis of approximately 5,000 words on an approved subject in accordance with the requirements of the school of Germanic

521 Faculty of Arts

Studies and another thesis of approximately 5,000 words in accordance with requirements of the school of Middle Eastern Studies; or (b) one thesis of approximately 9,000-10,000 words on a combined subject approved by the chairmen of both departments. The final examination will be held in two parts, part 1 at the end of third year and part 2 at the end of fourth year.

Part 1 A. Formal Examination Papers: Unseen translation from Arabic and prose composition. Translation of specified Arabic texts, with questions on Arabic literature. Assessment as for German 3 (hofs) or Dutch 3 (hofs).

В. Class Tests: (1) Oral test in Arabic.

Part 2 A. Formal Examination Papers: Unseen translation from Arabic and prose composition. Assessment as for Germanic Studies 4S (hofs).

CHINESE AND FRENCH First Year: Chinese 1. French 1. Two additional grade 1 subjects, one of which should normally be East Asian Studies 1. Second Year: Chinese 2 (huns). French 2 (hofs). An additional grade 2 subject (pass). Third Year: Chinese 3 (hofs). French 3 (huns). Fourth Year: Chinese 4. French 4. In addition, an essay of not more than 9,000 words on a subject approved by the chairmen of both departments concerned must be handed in early in third term, or two essays of not more than 5,000 words each, on subjects approved by the respective chairmen of the departments concerned. The final examination will be held in two parts, part 1 at the end of the third year, part 2 at the end of the fourth year. Part 1 A. Formal Examination Papers: (1) French 3 (hofs) unit 7 (Rimbaud, Mallarmé, Valéry). (2) French 3 hofs unit 6 (the selected modern literature or language option). (3) Chinese 3 (hofs). В. Class Tests, Essays, and Seminar Papers, etc.: (1 ) Advanced unseen translation from English into French. (2) Advanced unseen translation from French into English.

522 Combined Honours Courses

(3) Essay and explication of French 3 (hens) unit 3 (19th century fiction). (4) Oral test in French. (5) Test on French 3 (hofs) unit 5 (civilization of the 19th and 20th centuries). (6) Seminar papers, with participation in seminars, as bases for assessment of French 3 (hofs) unit 4 (20th century fiction and drama).

Part 2 A. Formal Examination Papers: (1) French 4 unit 4 (20th century fiction). (2) French 4 unit 4 (20th century drama). (3) Chinese 4.

В. Class Tests, etc.: (1) Advanced oral test on French 4 unit 4 (20th century fiction and drama). (2) Advanced unseen translation Into French. (3) Mid-year work, for instance terminal tests, on French 4 unit 5 (the selected literature or language option). (4) Chinese unseen translation. C. Essay or essays.

CHINESE AND HISTORY First Year: Chinese 1, and a first year History subject plus two other first year subjects. (In view of the fact that students will be doing East Asian history, they may, if they so wish, be exempted from East Asian Studies 1.)

Second Year: 1. History 2J (hofs). 2. Chinese 2 (comb. hofs). (For history students this Includes the four hours per week of Chinese 2 and two hours per week of Chinese 2A.) 3. One other second year subject.

Third Year: 1. Third year history for combined honours students. (This will include the approximate equivalent of one hour's reading per week of a history text in Chinese.) 2. Chinese 3 (comb. hofs). (For history students this Includes the five hours per week of Chinese 3 and two hours per week of Chinese ЗА.) Fourth Year: 1. Fourth year History for combined honours students in East Asian history. 2. The combined honours programme in Chinese (four hours per week).

The thesis will be done in the department of History or in the department of East Asian Studies except that where the thesis is done in the department of History it should Include an independent translation from modern Chinese.

523 Faculty of Arts

CHINESE AND POLITICS POLITICS AND CHINESE First Year: Chinese 1, Politics 1, East Asian Studies" and one other Grade 1 subject. Second Year: Chinese 2 (comb. bons), one Grade 2 Politics subject (hens). History 2J. Third Year: Chinese 3 (comb. bons), Politics 3A (hens) (including Chinese Politics and Society and Communist Political Theory). Fourth Year: Chinese 4; one of the Politics 4 courses; a combined thesis which includes a translation project from modern or Classical Chinese or two smaller theses, one on Politics topic and one on a topic in Chinese language or literature.

ECONOMICS AND HISTORY ECONOMIC HISTORY AND HISTORY Students wishing to take either of these combined courses should consult one of the chairmen of History, Economic History or Economics. The details of the course will be arranged by the chairmen in consultation, subject to the approval of the faculty of Arts, in order to provide for the needs and interests of those taking it.

ECONOMIC HISTORY AND HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE Students wishing to take this combination should consult with the chairmen of the departments concerned. The details of the course will be arranged in relation to the fields of interest of the individual candidates subject to approval of the faculty of Arts.

ECONOMICS AND MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES First Year: Economics 1A. Mathematics 1A. Mathematics 1 В or another subject. Math. Sci. 1. Second Year: Economics 2 (hens). Mathematics 2A (hofs). Math. Sci. 2 or Statistics 2A or Statistical Method. Third Year: Economics 3 (hens). Mathematics 3A (hofs) or Math. Sci. 3 (hofs). Fourth Year: Economics 4 (hofs). Math. Sc. 4 (hens). Thesis, in a topic to be agreed upon by the departments concerned with the subject-matter. The proposed composition of the Mathematical Sciences (hens) subjects are as follows: Mathematical Sciences 3 (hens): a combination of 300-level units in Computer Science, Mathematics and/or Statistics totalling at least 24 Science points.

exemption from East Asien Studies, which Is a pre-requisite for Chinese 2, may be given to students who take History 2J. 524 Combined Honours Courses

Mathematical Sciences 4 (hofs): about 100 lectures in a combination of 400 level units In Computer Science, Mathematics and/or Statistics. Notes: 1. The prerequisites for Mathematical Sciences 2, Mathematical Sciences 3 (hues) and Mathematical Sciences 4 (hofs) are a Mathematics (hans) subject and a Mathematical Sciences (hans) at the next lower level. 2. For students taking Mathematical Sciences 2 or Statistics 2A, the mathematics segment of Economics 2 (hans) is to be replaced by those parts of Statistical Method not already included In the other subjects taken. 3. The combination of units comprising Mathematical Sciences 3 (hans) and Mathematical Sciences 4 (hans) must be approved by the chairman of the school of Mathematical Sciences. 4. in the fourth year it Is intended that Economics 4 (hans) shall comprise about one-third, and the thesis about one-fifth, of the year's work. 5. The topic of the thesis is to be considered by the student, in consultation with the departments concerned, before the end of the third year of the course, to enable work on the thesis to be carried out during the Long Vacation.

ECONOMICS AND MATHEMATICS First year: Economics 1A. Mathematics 1A (units 131 and 132). Economic History 1A or another approved subject. Mathematics 1 В or Physics 1'. Second year: Economics 2 (hans). Statistical Method. Mathematics 2A (hans). Third year: Economics 3 (hoes)". Mathematics ЭА (hofs). Fourth Year: Economics 4. An approved selection of units from Mathematics 4. Thesis, on a topic to be jointly agreed upon by the two departments The final examinations will be held in two parts, part 1 at the end of the third year, part 2 at the and of the fourth year.

ECONOMICS AND POLITICAL SCIENCE First Year: Economics 1A. Economic History 1A or another approved subject. Politics 1. Part of a relevant language or another approved grade 1 subject. Second Year: Economics 2 (hans). A grade 2 Politics subject at honours level. Statistical Method. •Mathematics 1B Is preferable to Physics 1. ••With some topics omitted. 525 Faculty of Arts

Third Year: Economics 3 (huns). A grade 3 Politics subject at honours level. Fourth Year: Economics 4. Politics 4A or 4B. In addition, a thesis on the subject approved by the chairmen of the departments of Economics and Political Science is required to be handed in at the beginning of third term. The final examination will be held in two parts, part 1 at the end of third year, part 2 at the end of fourth year. Part 1 (1) Economics 3-3 papers. (2) Not more than 2 papers in the Political Science subject taken In the third year. Part 2 (1) Economics 4-3 papers. (2) Politics 4A or 46. (3) Thesis.

ENGLISH AND FINE ARTS First Year: English 1A or 1 B or 1 C. Fine Arts 1A. Two additional grade 1 subjects. It is strongly recommended that at least one of these subjects be a language other than English. Second Year: English Literature 2. Fine Arts 2E (hofs). An approved additional pass subject (normally at grade 2 level). Third Year: English Literature 3. Fine Arts 3F or 3K (hofs) Fourth Year: English Literature 4. Fine Arts 4R or Fine Arts 4S. In addition, each candidate must submit during his fourth year a thesis of 8,000-10,000 words either in English in accordance with the requirements of the school of English Language and Literature or in Fine Arts in accordance with the requirements of the School of Fine Arts or on a combined subject which must be approved by the chairmen of both departments. The final examination will be held in two parts, part 1 at the end of third year, part 2 at the end of fourth year. Pert 1 (1) Literature of the 17th and 18th centuries. (2) The 19th and 20th century novel or Australian and American literature or Studies in Drama. (3) Practice of criticism (dating). (4) (5) (6) The papers prescribed for Fine Arts 3F or 3K. Part 2 (1) Thesis. 526 Combined Honours Courses

(2) A course from those listed for part 2 of the final examination In English. ( З ) Another course chosen from those listed for part 2 of the final examination in English. (4) Fine Arts 4R or Fine Arts 4S.

ENGLISH AND FRENCH First Year: English 1A or 1B or 1C, French 1, two additional grade 1 subjects. Second Year: English Literature 2, French 2 (hans), an approved grade 2 pass subject. Third Year: English Literature 3, French 3 (hurls). Fourth Year: English Literature 4, French 4. In addition, each candidate must submit during his fourth year a thesis (or theses) fulfilling one of the following requirements: (a) one thesis of approximately 5,000 words on an approved subject in accordance with the requirements of the school of English Language and Literature, and another thesis of approximately 5,000 words on an approved subject in accordance with the requirements of the school of French; or (b) one thesis of approximately 9,000-10,000 words on a combined subject approved by the chairmen of both departments. The final examination will be held in two parts, part 1 at the end of the third year, part 2 at the end of the fourth year. Part 1 A. Formal Examination Papers: (1) Literature of the 17th and 18th centuries (English). (2) The 19th and 20th century novel or Australian and American litera- ure or Studies in Drama. (3) Practice of criticism (dating) (English). (4) French 3 (hofs) unit 7 (Rimbaud, Mallarmé, Valéry). (5) French (3 hofs) unit 6 (the selected modern literature or language option).

В. Class Tests, Essays, and Seminar Papers, etc.: (1) Advanced unseen translation into French. (2) Advanced unseen translation from French into English. (3) Essay and explication on French 3 (hofs) unit 3 (19th century fiction). (4) Oral test in French. (5) Test on French 3 (huns) unit 5 (civilization of the 19th and 20th centuries). (6) Seminar papers, with participation in seminars, as bases for assessment of French 3 (huns) unit 4 (20th century fiction and drama).

Part 2 A. Formal Examination Papers: (1) Thesis or theses. (2) A course from those listed for part 2 of the final examination in English.

527 Faculty of Arts

(3) Another course chosen from those listed for part 2 of the final examination in English. (4) French 4 unit 4 (20th century fiction). (5) French 4 unit 4 (20th century drama). B. Class Tests, etc.: (1) Advanced oral test on French 4 unit 4 (20th century fiction and drama). (2) Advanced unseen translation into French. (3) Mid-year work, for instance terminal tests, on French 4 unit 5 (the selected literature or language option).

ENGLISH AND GERMANIC STUDIES First Year: English 1A or 1B or 1C, German 1 or German 1A or Dutch 1 and two additional grade 1 subjects. Second Year: English Literature 2, German 2 (hols) or German 2A (huns) or Dutch 2 (huns) and one approved grade 2 pass subject. Third Year: English Literature 3, German 3 (hofs) or Dutch 3 (hofs). Fourth Year: English Literature 4, Germanic Studies 4S (hols). In addition, each candidate must submit during his fourth year a thesis (or theses) fulfilling one of the following requirements: (a) one thesis of approximately 5,000 words on an approved subject in accordance with the requirements of the school of English Language and Literature, and another thesis of approximately 5,000 words on an approved subject in accordance with the requirements of the school of Germanic Studies; or (b) one thesis of approximately 9,000-10,000 words on an approved subject In accordance with the requirements of the school of Germanic Studies; or (c) one thesis of approximately 9,000-10,000 words on a combined subject approved by the chairmen of both departments. The final examination will be held in two parts, part 1 at the end of the third year, part 2 at the end of the fourth year. Part 1 English (1) Literature of the 17th and 18th centuries. (2) The 19th and 20th century novel or Australian and American literature or Studies in Drama. (3) Practice of criticism (dating). German Assessment as for German 3 huns or Dutch 3 (huns). Part 2 (1) Thesis or theses. (2) A course from those listed for part 2 of the final examination In English. (3) Another course chosen from those listed for part 2 of the final examination in English. 528 Combined Honours Courses

Assessment as for Germanic Studies 4S (hofs). B. English language. Students should arrange their courses In consultation with the departments concerned.

ENGLISH AND HISTORY First Year: English 1 A or 1 B or 1 C. A grade 1 History subject, preferably History 1A (British History C. 1485-1700). Two additional grade 1 subjects, normally including a foreign language. Second Year: English Literature 2. . One second-year honours History subject. One approved grade 2 pass subject. Third Year: English Literature 3. One third-year honours History subject. Methods of Historical Research (no examination). Fourth Year: English Literature 4. Honours History 4X (special study in History). In addition, each candidate must submit during his fourth year a thesis of 8,000-10,000 words in English in accordance with the requirements of the school of English Language and Literature or in History in accordance with the requirements of the school of History or on a combined subject which must be approved by the chairmen of both departments.

ENGLISH AND ITALIAN First Year: English 1A or 16 or 1C. Italian 1. Two additional grade 1 subjects. Second Year: English Literature 2. Italian 2C (hofs). One approved additional grade 2 pass subject. Third Year: English Literature 3. Italian 3 course A (hofs). Fourth Year: English Literature 4. Italian 4A (hens). In addition, each candidate must submit during his fourth year a thesis (or theses) fulfilling one of the following requirements: (a) one thesis of approximately 5,000 words on an approved subject in accordance with the requirements of the school of English Language and Literature, and another thesis of approximately 5,000 words on an approved subject in accordance with the requirements of the school of Italian; or (b) one thesis of approximately 9,000-10,000 words on an approved subject in accordance with the requirements of the school of Italian; or (c) one thesis of approximately 9,000-10,000 words on a combined subject approved by the chairmen of both departments. The final examination will be in two parts, part 1 at the end of the third year, part 2 at the end of the fourth year.

529 Faculty of Arts

Part 1 A. Formal Examination Papers: (1) Literature of the 17th and 18th centuries. (2) The 19th and 20th century novel or Australian and American literature or Studies in Drama. (3) Practice of criticism (dating) (English). (4) Assessment as for Italian 3 course A huns. Part 2 A. Formal Examination Papers: (1) Thesis or theses. (2) A course from those listed for part 2 of the final examination in English. (3) Another course chosen from those listed for part 2 of the final examination in English. (4) Not more than three 3-hour papers in Italian. Note: Candidates choosing to take Italian 4 Language should consult the department of Italian for details of examination papers and class tests.

ENGLISH AND LATIN First Year: English 1A or 16 or 1C, Latin 1 and two additional grade 1 subjects. Second Year: English Literature 2, Latin 2 (hops), and one approved grade 2 pass subject. Third Year: English Literature 3, Latin 3 (hoes). At the beginning of the first term of the second and third years each candidate must, unless exempted by the chairman of the department of Classi- cal Studies, submit an essay or some other approved work prescribed by the department of Classical Studies. Fourth Year: English Literature 4, Latin 4. Each candidate must submit during his fourth year a thesis of 8,000- 10,000 words either in accordance with the requirements of the school of English Language and Literature, or in accordance with the requirements of the school of Classical Studies, or on a combined subject which must be approved by the chairmen of both departments. The final examination will be held in two parts, part 1 at the end of the third year, part 2 at the end of the fourth year.

Part 1 (1) Literature of the 17th and 18th centuries. (2) The 19th and 20th century novel or Australian and American literature or Studies in Drama. (3) Practice of criticism (dating). (4) Prescribed Latin texts. (5) Latin history and literature. Part 2 (1 ) Thesis. (2) A course from those listed for part 2 of the final examination in English. (3) Another course chosen from those listed for part 2 of the final examination in English.

530 Combined Honours Courses

(4) Extensive reading in Latin. (5) Latin unseen translation. (6) Latin literature. (7) Latin special studies.

ENGLISH AND PHILOSOPHY' First Year: English 1A or 1 B or 1 C. Philosophy l A or 1 B or 1 C. Two additional grade 1 subjects. (It is recommended that one of these should be a foreign language.) Second Year: English Literature 2. Philosophy 2L (huns), the unit course. Philosophy 2FI (hofs), and a second year honours subject (or its unit equivalents) chosen from either group 2, 3 or 4 on the listing on p. 424 of the Philosophy entry. Third Year: English Literature 3 Satisfactory participation in the third year Philosophy honours seminar Together with Two third year honours subjects (or their unit equivalents) chosen from the two Philosophy groups not already covered. (A student who wishes to proceed to final year is normally required to obtain at least second class honours in the Philosophy component, and to meet whatever minimum standard is required by the other department.) Fourth Year: English Literature 4. Two of Philosophy honours 4S, 4T, 4U, 4V, 4W, 4X or 4Y. In addition, each candidate must submit during his fourth year at least one 3,000 word essay in Philosophy AND either a thesis of 8,000- 10,000 words in English in accordance with the requirements of the school of English or an additional essay of 3,000 words in Philosophy in accordance with the requirements of the school of Philosophy. Students who wish to write a thesis on a topic combining both English and Philosophy should make application to the chairmen of both departments. The final examination in English will be held In two parts, part 1 at the end of the third year, part 2 at the end of the fourth year. The final examination in Philosophy will be held at the end of the fourth year. Part 1

(1) Literature of the 17th and 18th centuries. (2) The 19th and 20th century novel or Australian and American Litera- ture or Studies in Drama. (3) Practice of criticism (dating). Part 2 (1) Essay (Philosophy) and Thesis (English) or Essays (Philosophy). (2) A course from those listed for part 2 of the final examination in English.

Ali students planning to enrol for combined honours In Philosophy should first consult the Philosophy department Interviewer.

531 Faculty of Arts

(3) Another course from those listed for part 2 of the final examination in English. (4) Two of Philosophy honours 4S, 4T, 4U, 4V, 4W, 4X or 4Y.

ENGLISH AND POLITICAL SCIENCE First Year: English IA or 1 B or 1 C. Politics 1A or 18 or 1C. Two additional grade 1 subjects (preferably including a foreign language). Second Year: English Literature 2. A grade 2 Politics subject at honours level. One additional approved grade 2 pass subject. Third Year: English Literature 3. A grade 3 Politics subject at honours level. Fourth Year: English Literature 4. Politics 4A or 4В. In addition each candidate must submit during his fourth year a thesis either in English in accordance with the requirements of the school of English Language and Literature or in Political Science in accordance with the requirements of the school of Political Science or on a combined subject which must be approved by the chairmen of both departments. The final examination will be held in two parts, part 1 at the end of the third year, part 2 at the end of the fourth year. Part 1 (1) Literature of the 17th and 18th centuries. (2) The 19th and 20th century novel or Australian and American Litera- ture or Studies in Drama. (3) Practice of criticism (dating). (4) Not more than 2 papers in the Political Science subject taken in third year. Part 2 (1) Thesis. (2) A course from those listed for part 2 of the final examination In English. (3) Another course chosen from those listed for part 2 of the final examination in English. (4) Politics 4A or 4B.

FINE ARTS AND FRENCH First Year: Fine Arts 1A. French 1. Two additional grade 1 subjects. Second Year: Fine Arts 2E (hens). French 2 (hens). One approved additional grade 2 pass subject. Third Year: Fine Arts 3F or 3K. French 3 (hens). 532 Combined Honours Courses

Fourth Year: Fine Arts 4R or Fine Arts 4S. French 4. A thesis not exceeding 9,000 words on a subject approved by the chairmen of the departments of French and Fine Arts will be required to be handed in at the beginning of third term. The final examination will be held in two parts, part 1 at the end of the third year, part 2 at the end of the fourth year. Part 1 A. Formal Papers: (1) French 3 (hofs) unit 7 (Rimbaud, Mallarmé, Valéry). (2) French 3 (hens) unit 6 (the selected modern literature or language option) and the examination prescribed for the third year Fine Arts honours subjects, i.e., two or three 3-hour papers and a visual test.

В. Class Tests, Essays, and Seminar Papers, etc.: (1) Advanced unseen translation from English into French. (2) Advanced unseen translation from French into English. (3) Essay and explication on French 3 (hens) unit 3 (19th century fiction). (4) Oral test in French. (5) Test on French 3 (hofs) unit 5 (civilization of the 19th and 20th centuries). (6) Seminar papers, with participation in seminars, as bases for assessment of French 3 (hens) unit 4 (20th century fiction and drama). Part 2 A. Formal Papers: (1) French 4 unit 4 (20th century fiction). (2) French 4 unit 4 (20th century drama). (3) Fine Arts 4R or Fine Arts 4S.

В. Class Tests, etc.: (1) Essay in French on an approved topic. (2) Advanced oral test on French 4 unit 4 (20th century fiction and drama). (3) Advanced unseen translation into French. (4) Mid-year work, for instance terminal tests, on French 4 unit 5 (the selected literature or language option).

FINE ARTS AND GERMANIC STUDIES First Year: Fine Arts 1A, German 1 or German 1A or Dutch 1 and two additional grade 1 subjects. Second Year: Fine Arts 2E (hofs), German 2 (hofs) or German 2A (hols) or Dutch 2 (hans) and one approved additional subject. Third Year: Fine Arts 3F or 3K, German 3 (hans) or Dutch 3 (hans). Fourth Year: Fine Arts 4R or Fine Arts 4S, Germanic Studies 4S (hofs). The final examination will be held in two parts, part 1 at the end of the third year, part 2 at the end of the fourth year.

533 Faculty of Arts

Part 1 The examination prescribed for third year Fine Arts honours subject. Assessment as for German 3 (hofs) or Dutch 3 (hens). Part 2 Thesis (or theses) Fine Arts 4R or Fine Arts 4S. Assessment as for Germanic Studies 45 (hans). In addition, each candidate must submit during the fourth year a thesis (or theses) fulfilling one of the following requirements: (a) One thesis of approximately 5,000 words on an approved subject in accordance with the requirements of the school of Germanic Studies and one thesis on an approved subject in accordance with the requirements of the school of Fine Arts or (b) one thesis of approximately 9,000-10,000 words on a combined subject approved by the chairmen of both departments.

FINE ARTS AND HISTORY First Year: Fine Arts 1A. A grade 1 History subject. Two additional grade 1 subjects. (Note: it is desirable to include a foreign language and a second History subject). Second Year: Fine Arts 2E (hans). One second-year honours History subject. A grade 2 subject. Third Year: Fine Arts 3F or 3K. One third-year honours History subject. Methods of Historical Research (no examination). Fourth Year: Fine Arts 4R or Fine Arts 4S. Honours History 4X (special study in History). A thesis not exceeding 9,000 words on a subject approved by the chairmen of the departments of Fine Arts and His- tory will also be required. The chairmen of the departments should be consulted during the third year about the date on which the thesis will be required to be handed in.

FINE ARTS AND LATIN First Year: Fine Arts 1A. Latin 1. Two additional grade 1 subjects. Second Year: Fine Arts 2E (huns). Latin 2 (hans). An approved additional grade 2 subject. Third Year: Fine Arts 3F or 3K. Latin 3 (hofs). Fourth Year: Fine Arts 4R or Fine Arts 4S. Latin 4. 534 Combined Honours Courses

In addition, each candidate must submit during his fourth year a thesis of 8,000-10.000 words either in accordance with the requirements of the school of Classical Studies or in accordance with the requirements of the school of Fine Arts or on a combined subject which must be approved by the chairmen of both departments. Note: In addition, each student, unless exempted by the chairman of the department of Classical Studies, must submit at the beginning of each of the second and third years an essay or perform some other approved work prescribed by the department of Classical Studies. The final examination will be held in two parts, part 1 at the end of the third year, part 2 at the end of the fourth year. Part 1 (1) Prescribed Latin texts. (2) Latin History and Literature. And the examinations prescribed for the third year Fine Arts honours subject as set out on p. 533, i.e. two or three 3-hour papers and a visual test. Part 2 (1) Extensive reading in Latin. (2) Latin unseen translation. (3) Latin literature. (4) Latin special studies. (5) Fine Arts 4R or Fine Arts 4S. (6) Thesis.

FINE ARTS AND PHILOSOPHY First Year: Fine Arts 1A. Philosophy 1A or 18 or 1C. Two additional grade 1 subjects. (It is recommended that one of these should be a foreign language). Second Year: Fine Arts 2E (hoos). Philosophy 2L (hofs) and the unit course: Philosophy 2F1 (hofs). A second year honours subject (or its unit equivalents) chosen from either group 2, 3 or 4 of the listing on p. 424. of the Philosophy entry. Third Year: Fine Arts 3F or 3K. Satisfactory participation in the third-year Philosophy honours seminar. Together with Two third year honours subjects (or their unit equivalents) chosen from the two Philosophy groups not already covered. (A student who wishes to proceed to final year is normally required to obtain at least second class honours in the Philosophy component, and to meet whatever minimum standard is required by the other department.)

•А11 students planning to enrol for combined honours in Philosophy should first consult the Philosophy department Interviewer. 535 Faculty of Arts

Fourth Year: Fine Arts 4R or Fine Arts 4S. Two of Philosophy honours 4S, 4T, 40, 4V, 4W, 4X or 4Y. In addition, each candidate must submit during his fourth year at least one 3,000 word essay in Philosophy AND either a thesis of 8,000-10,000 words in Fine Arts in accordance with the requirements of the school of Fine Arts or an additional essay of 3,000 words in Philosophy in accordance with the requirements of the school of Philosophy. Students who wish to write a thesis on a topic combining both Fine Arts and Philosophy should make application to the chairmen of both departments. The final examination in Fine Arts will be held in two parts, part 1 at the end of the third year, part 2 at the end of the fourth year. The final examination in Philosophy will be held at the end of fourth year.

Part 1 (1) The examination prescribed for the third year Fine Arts honours subject as set out in handbook. Part 2 (1) Essay (Philosophy) and Thesis (Fine Arts) or Essays (Philosophy). (2) Fine Arts 4R or Fine Arts 4S. (3) Two of Philosophy honours 4S, 4T, 4U, 4V, 4W, 4X or 4Y.

FRENCH AND GERMANIC STUDIES First Year: French 1, German 1 or German 1A or Dutch 1 and two additional grade 1 subjects. Second Year: French 2 (hofs), German 2 (hofs) or Germen 2A (hofs) or Dutch 2 (hofs) and one approved additional subject. Third Year: French 3 (hofs), German 3 (hofs) Or Dutch 3 (hofs). Fourth Year: French 4, Germanic Studies 4S (hofs). The final examination will be in two parts, part 1 at the end of the third year and part 2 at the end of the fourth year.

Parti A. Formal Examination Papers: (1) French 3 (hofs) unit 7 (Rimbaud, Mallarmé, Valéry). (2) French 3 (hofs) unit 6 (the selected modern literature or language option). (3) Assessment as for German 3 (hofs) or Dutch 3 (hens).

В. Class Tests, Essays, and Seminar Papers, etc.: (1) Advanced unseen translation from English to French. (2) Advanced unseen translation from French to English. (3) Essay and explication on French 3 (hofs) unit 3 (19th century fiction). (4) Oral test in French. (5) Test on French 3 (hofs) unit 5 (civilization of the 19th and 20th centuries). (6) Seminar papers, with participation in seminars, as bases for assessment of French 3 (hofs) unit 4 (20th century fiction and drama). 536 Combined Honours Courses

Part 2 A. Formal Examination Papers: (1) French 4 unit 4 (20th century fiction). (2) French 4 unit 4 (20th century drama). (3) Assessment as for Germanic Studies 4S (hofs). В. Class Tests, etc.: (1) Advanced oral test on French 4 unit (20th century fiction and drama). (2) Advanced unseen translation into French. (3) Mid-year work, for instance terminal tests, on French 4 unit 5 (the selected literature or language option). C. Thesis. In addition, each candidate must during his fourth year submit a thesis (or theses), fulfilling one of the following requirements: (a) one thesis of approximately 5,000 words on an approved subject in accordance with the requirements of the school of Germanic Studies and one thesis of approximately 5,000 words on an approved subject in accordance with the requirements of the school of French. or (b) one thesis of approximately 9,000-10,000 words on a combined subject approved by the chairmen of both departments.

FRENCH AND HISTORY First Year: French 1. A grade 1 History subject, preferably History 1 В (The Age of Revolutions 1750-1848). Two additional grade 1 subjects. Second Year: French 2 (hofs). One second-year honours History subject. An additional grade 2 subject (pass). If honours History 2K is not taken, this subject could be History 2K. Third Year: French 3 (hofs). One third-year honours History subject. Methods of Historical Research (no examination). Fourth Year: French 4. Honours History 4X (special study in History). In addition, each candidate must submit during his fourth year, at a date to be approved, a thesis of not more than 9,000 words. The thesis shall be written in French, and the subject, which must be approved by the chairmen of both departments, should normally be historical in character. The final examination is held in two parts (in the third and fourth years).

Part 1 (3rd year) A. Formal Examination Papers: (1) French З (hofs) unit 7 (Rimbaud, Mallагmé, Valéry). (2) French 3 (hofs) unit ß (the selected modern literature or language option). (3) The third-year honours History subject studied. 8. Class Tests, Essays, and Seminar Papers, etc.: (1) Advanced unseen translation from English Into French.

537 Faculty of Arts

(21 Advanced unseen translation from French into English. (3) Essay and explication on French 3 (hofs) unit 3 (19th century fiction). ;4) Oral test in French. (5) Test on French 3 (huns) unit 5 (civilization of the 19th and 20th centuries). (6) Seminar papers, with participation in seminars, as bases for assessment of French 3 (hofs) unit 4 (20th century fiction and drama).

Part 2 (4th year) A. Formal Examination Papers: (1) French 4 unit 4 (20th century fiction). (2) French 4 unit 4 (20th century drama). (3) Honours History 4X (special study in History).

В. Class Tests, etc.: (1 ) Advanced oral test on French 4 unit 4 ( гUtn century fiction and drama). (2) Advanced unseen translation into Frarch. (3) Mid-year work, for instance terminal tests, on French 4 unit 5 (the selected literature or language option). C. Thesis.

FRENCH AND INDONESIAN STUDIES

First Year: French 1. Indonesian and Malayan Studies 1. Two additional grade 1 subjects. Second Year: French 2 (huns). Indonesian and Malayan Studies 2 (hofs). An additional pass subject which should normally be a grade 2 subject. Third Year: French 3 (huns). Indonesian and Malayan Studies 3 (huns). Fourth Year: French 4. Indonesian aid Malayari Studies 4 (huns). In addition, a thesis of not more than 9,000 words on a subject approved by the chairmen of both departments concerned must be handed in early in third term, or two theses of not more than 5,000 words each, on subjects approved by the respective chairmen of the departments concerned. The final examination will be held in two parts, part 1 at the end of the third year, part 2 at the end of the fourth year.

Part 1

A. Formal Examination Papers: (1) French 3 (hurls) unit 7 (Rimbaud, Mallаrmé, Valéry). (2) French 3 (hurls) unit 6 (the selected modern literature or language option). (3) Indonesian and Malayan Studies 3 (huns). (4) Indonesian unseen translation.

538 Combined Honours Courses

В. Class Tests, Essays, and Seminar Papers, etc.: (1) Advanced unseen translation from English into French. (2) Advanced unseen translation from French into English. (3) Essay and explication on French 3 (hofs) unit 3 (19th century fiction). (4) Oral test in French. (5) Test on French 3 (hens) unit 5 (civilization of the 19th and 20th centuries). (6) Seminar papers, with participation in seminars, as bases for assessment of French 3 (hols) unit 4 (20th century fiction and drama).

Part 2 A. Formal Examination Papers: (1) French 4 unit 4 (20th century fiction). (2) French 4 unit 4 (20th century drama). (3) Indonesian and Malayan Studies 4 (hofs).

В. Class Tests, etc.: (1) Advanced oral test on French 4 unit 4 (20th century fiction and drama). (2) Advanced unseen translation into French. (3) Mid-year work, for instance terminal tests, on French 4 unit 5 (the selected literature or language option). (4) Indonesian unseen translation. C. Thesis or theses.

FRENCH AND ITALIAN First Year: French 1, Italian 1 and two additional grade 1 subjects. Second Year: French 2 (hops), Italian 2C (hofs), and one approved additional subject. Third Year: French 3 (hens), Italian 3 course A (hofs). Fourth Year: French 4, ItaliaП 4A (hens). The final examination will be held in two parts, part 1 at the end of the third year and part 2 at the end of the fourth year.

Part 1 A. Formal Examination Papers: (1) French 3 (hofs) unit 7 (Rimbaud, Mallarmé, Valéry). (2) French 3 (hens) unit 6 (the selected modern literature or language option). (3) Assessment as for Italian 3 course A (hofs).

б39 Faculty of Arts

(5) Seminar papers, with participation in seminars, as bases for assessment of French 3 (hens) unit 4 (20th century fiction and drama). (6) Oral test in each language. Part 2 A. Formal Examination Papers: (1) French 4 unit 4 (20th century fiction). (2) French 4 unit 4 (20th century drama). (3) Not more than three 3-hour papers in Italian 4A. В. Class Tests, etc.: (1) Advanced unseen translation into French. (2) Oral test in each language. (3) Mid-year work, for instance terminal tests, on French 4 unit 5 (the selected literature or language option). (4) Advanced unseen translation into Italian. In addition, a thesis of not more than 9,000 words on a subject approved by the chairmen of both departments concerned must be handed in early in third term, or two theses of not more than 5,000 words each, on subjects approved by the respective chairmen of the departments concerned. Note: Candidates who wish to specialize in one of their two honours languages in the fourth year are required to apply to the chairmen of both departments as well as to the Sub-Dean's office. Candidates choosing to take Italian 4 (Language) should consult the department of Italian for details of examination papers and class tests.

FRENCH AND LATIN

First Year: French 1, Latin 1, and two additional grade 1 subjects. Second Year: French 2 (hofs), Latin 2 (hofs), and one approved additional subject. Third Year: French З (hofs), Latin 3 (huns). Fourth Year: French 4, Latin 4. Note: Each student, unless exempted by the chairman of the department of Classical Studies, must submit at the beginning of each of the second and third years an essay or perform some other approved work prescribed by the department of Classics. In addition, a thesis of not more than 9,000 words on a subject approved by the chairmen of both departments concerned must be handed in early in third term, or two theses of not more than 5,000 words on each, on subjects approved by the respective chairmen of the departments concerned. The final examination will be held In two parts, part 1 at the end of the third year, part 2 at the end of the fourth year. Part 1 A. Formal Examination Papers: (1) French 3 (hofs) unit 7 (Rimbaud, Mallarmé, Valéry). (2) French 3 (hofs) unit 6 (the selected modern literature or language option). (3) Prescribed Latin texts. (4) Latin history and literature. 540 Combined Honours Courses

B. Class Tests, Essays, and Seminar Papers, etc.: (1) Advanced unseen translation from English into French. (2) Advanced unseen translation from French into English. (3) Essay and explication on French 3 (hofs) unit 3 (19th century fiction) . (4) Oral test in French. (5) Test on French 3 (hans) unit 5 (civilization of the 19th and 20th centuries). (6) Seminar papers, with participation in seminars, as bases for assessment of French 3 (hofs) unit 4 (20th century fiction and drama).

Part 2 A. Formal Examination Papers: (1) Extensive reading in Latin. (2) Latin unseen translation. (3) Latin literature. (4) Latin special studies. (5) French 4 unit 4 (20th century fiction). (6) French 4 unit 4 (20th century drama). B. Class Tests, etc.: (1) Advanced oral test on French 4 unit 4 (20th century fiction and drama). (2) Advanced unseen translation into French. (3) Mid-year work, for Instance terminal tests, on French 4 unit 5 (the selected literature or language option). C. Thesis or theses.

FRENCH AND PHILOSOPHY•

First Year: French 1. Philosophy 1A or 1 B or 1 C. Two additional grade 1 subjects. Second Year: (a) French 2 (hofs). (b) Philosophy 2L (hofs), the unit course Philosophy 2F1 (hens), and a second year honours subject (ог its unit equivalents) chosen from either group 2, 3 or 4 of the listing on p. 424 of the Philosophy entry. Third Year: French 3 (hone). Satisfactory participation in the third year Philosophy honours seminar. Together with Two third year honours subjects (ог their unit equivalents) chosen from the two Philosophy groups not already covered. (A student who wishes to proceed to final year is normally required to obtain at least second class honours in the Philosophy component, and to meet whatever minimum standard is required by the other department.)

•All students planning to enrol for combined honours In consult the Philosophy department Interviewer. philosophy should first

541 Faculty of Arts

Fourth Year: French 4 (hone). Two of Philosophy honours 4S, 4T, 4U, 4V, 4W, 4X or 4Y. In addition, each candidate must submit during his fourth year Either a 6,000 word thesis in the language and a 3,000 word essay for Philosophy Or a 3,000 word essay in the language and two 3,000 word essays for Philosophy Or a 9,000 word combined thesis in English plus a 3.000 word summary of the thesis in the language Or a 6,000 word combined thesis in English plus a 3,000 word essay on another topic in the language. The final examination in French will be held in two parts, part 1 at the end of the third year, part 2 at the end of the fourth year. The final examination in Philosophy will be held at the end of the fourth year. Part 1 A. Formal Papers: (1) French 3 (hens) unit 7 (Rimbaud, Mallагmé, Valéry). (2) French 3 (huns) unit 6 (the selected modern literature or language option). . Class Tests, Essays and Seminar Papers, etc.: В (1) Advanced unseen translation from English into French. (2) Advanced unseen translation from French into English. (3) Essay and explication on French 3 (hans) unit 3 (19th century fiction). (4) Oral tests in French. (5) Test on French 3 (hens) unit 5 (civilization of the 19th and 20th centuries). Part 2 A. Formal Examination Papers: (1) French 4 unit 4 (20th century fiction). (2) French 4 unit 4 (20th century drama). (3) Two of Philosophy honours 4S, 4T, 4U, 4V, 4W, 4X or 4Y. В. Class Tests, etc.: (1) Advanced oral test on French 4 unit 4 (20th century fiction and drama). (2) Advanced unseen translation into French. (3) Mid-year work, for instance terminal tests, on French 4 unit 5 (the selected literature or language option). C. Thesis.

FRENCH AND RUSSIAN First Year: French 1. Russian 1 or Russian 1A. Two additional grade 1 subjects. Second Year: French 2 (hens). Russian 2 (hofs) and Russian 26 (hens-1 unit). One additional approved grade 2 pass subject.

542

Combined Honours Courses

Third Year: French 3 (hofs). Russian З (hofs) and Russian 3В (hons-1 of options). Fourth Year: French 4. Russian 4 (2 of options). There will no formal examination papers in Russian 2 (honours) at the end of the second year, but class tests in conversation and translation from and into Russian will be given together with prescribed essays on literature. In addition, a thesis of not more than 9,000 words on a subject approved by the chairmen of both departments concerned must be handed in early in third term or two theses of not more than 5,000 words each, on subjects approved by the respective chairmen of the departments concerned. The final examination will be held in two parts, part 1 at the end of the third year and part 2 at the end of the fourth year. Part 1 A. Examination Papers: (1) French 3 (hofs) unit 7 (Rimbaud, Мallагmé, Valéry). (2) French 3 (hofs) unit 6 (the selected modern literature or language option). (3) Russian з (hofs) papers (1) and (2) and Russian 3 В (hofs) (1 paper). В. Class Tests, Essays and Seminar Papers, etc.: (1) Advanced unseen translation from English Into French. (2) Advanced unseen translation from French into English. (3) Essay and explication on French 3 (hofs) unit 3 (19th century fiction). (4) Test on French 3 (hofs) unit 5 (civilization of the 19th and 20th centuries). (5) Seminar papers, with participation in seminars, as bases for assessment of French 3 (hus) unit 4 (20th century fiction and drama). Part 2 A. Examination Papers: (1) French 4 unit 4 (20th century fiction). (2) French 4 unit 4 (20th century drama). (3) Russian 4 (2 papers). В. Class Tests, etc.: (1) Advanced unseen translation into French. (2) Mid-year work, for instance terminal tests, on French 4, unit 5 (the selected literature or language option). (3) Advanced unseen translation Into Russian. (4) Oral test in each language. C. Thesis or Theses. Candidates who wish to specialize in one of their two honours languages in the fourth year are required to apply to the chairmen of both departments concerned, as well as to the Sub-Dean's office.

GEOGRAPHY AND HISTORY First Year: Geography 1. A grade 1 History subject.

543 Faculty of Arts

Two additional grade 1 subjects (preferably Including a foreign language). Second Year: Geography 26 (hofs). One second-year honours History subject. Third Year: Geography ЭC (hofs). One third-year honours History subject. Methods of Historical Research (no examination). Fourth Year: Geography 4B. Honours History 4X (special study in History). Thesis. The thesis of 9,000-12,000 words may be written in accordance with the requirements of the school of Geography, or in accordance with the school of History, or in a combined subject which must be approved by the chairmen of both schools. Final Examination: Part 1 (3rd year) (1) Geography ЭC (hofs). (2) The third-year honours History subject studied. Part 2 (4th year) (1) Geography 46. (2) Honours History 4X (special study in History). (3) Thesis.

GEOGRAPHY AND POLITICAL SCIENCEt First Year: Geography 1. Politics 1A or 16 or 1C. Two additional grade 1 subjects (normally History 1 B and a foreign language). Second Year: Geography 26 (hols). A grade 2 Politics subject at honours level. Third Year: Geography ЭC (hols). A grade 3 Politics subject at honours level. Fourth Year: Geography 4B. Politics 4A or 46. A thesis of not more than 9,000 words on a subject approved by the chairman of each department. The final examination will be held in two parts, part 1 at the end of the third year, part 2 at the end of the fourth year. Part 1 (1 ) Geography ЭC (huns). (2) Not more than two papers in the Political Science subject taken in the third year. Part 2 (1) Geography 46. (2) Politics 4A or 46. ( З ) Thesis. t Combination. of Geography with other subjects may be arranged. Students should consult the chairmen of the departments concerned and the Sub-Dean. 644 Combined Honours Courses

GERMANIC STUDIES AND HISTORY

First Year: German 1 or German 1 A or Dutch 1, History 1 B (The Age of Revolutions 1750-1848), and two additional grade 1 subjects. Second Year: German 2 (huns) or German 2A (hofs) or Dutch 2 (hens), Honours History 2N (German), and one approved additional subject. Third Year: German 3 (hofs) or Dutch 3 (hens), one third year honours History subject. Methods of Historical Research (no examination). Fourth Year: Germanic Studies 43, Honours History 4X (special study In History). In addition, each candidate must submit during his fourth year, at a date to be approved, a thesis of approximately 9,000-10,000 words. The thesis shall be written in German or Dutch, and the subject, which must be approved by the chairmen of both departments, should normally be historical in character.

Final Examination: Part 1 (3rd year) Formal Examination Papers: (1) Assessment as for German 3 (hoes) or Dutch 3 (hofs). (2) The third year honours History subject.

Part 2 (4th year) Formal Examination Papers: (1) Assessment as for Germanic Studies 4S (huns). (2) Honours History 4X (special study In History).

GERMANIC STUDIES AND ITALIAN

First Year: German 1 or German 1A or Dutch 1, Italian 1 and two additional grade 1 subjects. Second Year: German 2 (hofs) or German 2A (hofs) or Dutch 2 (hoes), Italian 2C (huns), and one approved additional subject. Third Year: German 3 (hans) or Dutch 3 (hans), Italian З course A (hurls). Fourth Year: Germanic Studies 4S, Italian 4A (huns). The final examination will be held in two parts, part 1 at the end of the third year and part 2 at the end of the fourth year.

Part 1 A. Formal Examination Papers: (1) Assessment as for Italian 3 course A (hofs). (2) Assessment as for German 3 (lions) or Dutch 3 (hofs). B. Class Tests: (1) Advanced translation into Italian and composition In Italian.

545 s Faculty of Arts

Part 2 A. Formal Examination Papers: (1) Not more than three 3-hour papers in Italian 4A (huns). (2) Assessment as for Germanic Studies 4S (hens). В. Class Tests: (1) Advanced unseen translation Into Italian. (2) Oral test in Italian. In addition, each candidate must during his fourth year submit a thesis (or theses), fulfilling one of the following requirements: (a) one thesis of approximately 5,000 words on an approved subject in accordance with the requirements of the school of Germanic studies and one thesis of approximately 5,000 words on an approved subject in accordance with the requirements of the school of Italian; or (b) one thesis of approximately 9,000-10,000 words on a combined subject approved by the chairmen of both departments. Candidates who wish to specialize In one of their two honours languages in the fourth year are required to apply to the chairmen of both departments concerned, as well as to the Sub-Dean's office.

GERMANIC STUDIES AND MUSIC First Year: German 1 or German 1A or Dutch 1, Music 1A and two additional grade 1 subjects. Second Year: German 2 (huns) or German 2A (hens) or Dutch 2 (hens), Music 2В (hens) with a study of prescribed musical scores and one approved additional subject.

Third Year: German 3 (hens) or Dutch 3 (hans), Music ЭC (huns), with a study of prescribed musical scores. Fourth Year: Germanic Studies 4S, Music 4D (huns) and Philosophy 3K. The final examination will be held in two parts, part 1 at the end of the third year, part 2 at the end of the fourth year.

Part 1 Prescribed Musical Scores. Music 3C (huns). Assessment as for German 3 (hens) or Dutch 3 (hus).

Part 2 Music 4D (hens). Philosophy 3K. Assessment as for Germanic Studies 4S (huns). In addition, each candidate must during his fourth year submit a thesis (or theses), fulfilling one of the following requirements: (a) One thesis of approximately 5,000 words on an approved subject in accordance with the requirements of the school of Germanic Studies and one thesis of approximately 5,000 words on an approved subject in accordance with the requirements of the school of Music;

546 Combined Honours Courses

or (b) one thesis of approximately 9,000-10,000 words on a combined subject approved by the chairmen of both departments.

GERMANIC STUDIES AND PHILOSOPHY

First Year: German 1 or German 1A or Dutch 1. Philosophy 1A or 1 B or IC. Two additional grade 1 subjects. Second Year: Germanic Studies Part 2 (hofs) with enrolment in German or Dutch. Philosophy 2L (hons), the unit course Philosophy 2F1 (hofs), and a second year honours subject (or its unit equivalents) chosen from either group 2, 3 or 4 of the listing on p. 424 of the Philosophy entry. Third Year: Germanic Studies Part 3 (hofs) with enrolment in Gorman or Dutch. Satisfactory participation in the third year Philosophy honours seminar, Together with Two third year honours subjects (or their unit equivalents) chosen from the two Philosophy groups not already covered. (A student who wishes to proceed to final year is normally required to obtain at least second class honours in the Philosophy component, and to meet whatever minimum standard is required by the other department). Fourth Year: Germanic Studies Part 4 comprising three half-year courses from the list provided. Two of Philosophy honours 4S, 4T, 4U, 4V, 4W, 4X, or 4Y. The final examination in Germanic Studies will be held in two parts, part 1 at the end of the third year, part 2 at the end of the fourth year.

Part 1 Assessment as for Germanic Studies 3 (hovs).

Part 2 (1) Either a 5,000 word thesis in German end two 3,000 word essays in Philosophy Or a 10,000 word combined thesis in German or English. The option for a thesis in English would need the special approval of the chairman of Germanic Studies and is likely to be granted only in exceptional circumstances. (2) Assessment as for Germanic Studies 4 (hofs). (3) Two of Philosophy honours 4S, 4T, 4U, 4V, 4W, 4X or 4Y.

'А11 students planning to enrol for combined honours in Philosophy should first consult the Philosophy department Interviewer.

547 Faculty of Arts

GERMANIC STUDIES AND POLITICAL SCIENCE First Year: German 1 or German 1A or Dutch 1, Politics 1A or 1B or 1C, and two additional grade 1 subjects (preferably including History 1B or Economics 1A (Arts)).

Second Year: German 2 (hens) or German 2A (hofs) or Dutch 2 (hens), a grade 2 Politics subject at honours level, and one additional approved grade 2 pass subject. Third Year: German 3 (hons) or Dutch 3 (halls), a grade 3 Politics subject at honours level. Fourth Year: Germanic Studies 4S (hens) and Politics 4A or 4В. A thesis on a subject approved by the chairmen of both departments concerned and based on independent work undertaken by the student during the preceding eight months will be required to be handed in early in third term. The final examination will be held in two parts, part 1 at the end of the third year, part 2 at the end of the fourth year,

Part 1 Assessment as for German 3 (hens) or Dutch 3 (hens). For Political Science, not more than two papers in the Political Science subject taken in the third year.

Part 2 Politics 4A or 48. Assessment as for Germanic Studies 4S (hofs). Thesis. In addition, each candidate must during his fourth year submit a thesis (or theses), fulfilling one of the following requirements: (a) one thesis of approximately 5,000 words on an approved subject in accordance with the requirements of the school of Germanic Studies and one thesis of approximately 5,000 words on an approved subject in accordance with the requirements of the school of Political Science. or (b) one thesis of approximately 9,000-12,000 words on a combined subject approved by the chairmen of both departments.

GERMANIC STUDIES AND RUSSIAN

First Year: German 1 or German 1A or Dutch 1. Russian 1 or Russian 1A. Two additional grade 1 subjects. Second Year: Garman 2 (hens) or German 2A (hens) or Dutch 2 (hens). Russian 2 (hens) and Russian 28 (hens-1 unit). One approved additional grade 2 pass subject. Third Year: German 3 or Dutch 3 (hens). Russian 3 (hens) and Russian 38 (hens-1 of options). Fourth Year: Germanic Studies 4S (hens). Russian 4 (2 of options). In addition, a thesis of not more than 9,000 words on a subject approved by the chairmen of both departments concerned and based on Independent work undertaken by the student during the preceding eight months must

548 Combined Honours Courses

be handed in not later than the end of the third term, or two essays of not more than 5,000 words each, on subjects approved by the respective chairmen of the departments concerned. There will be no formal examination papers in Russian 2 (hofs) at the end of the second year. Conversation and translation from and into Russian will be given together with prescribed essays on literature. The final examination will be held in two parts, part 1 at the end of the third year and part 2 at the end of the fourth year. Part 1 A. Examination Papers: Russian 3 (huns) papers (1 ) and (2) and Russian 3В (hone-1 paper). Assessment as for German 3 (hens) or Dutch 3 (hone). В. Class Tests: (1) Advanced unseen translation into Russian. (2) Advanced unseen translation from Russian into English. (3) Special Russian Linguistic or Literary study (Essay). (4) Oral tests in Russian. Part 2 A. Examination Papers: Russian 4 (2 papers). Assessment as for Germanic Studies 4S (hens). В. Class Test: Oral test in Russian. C. Thesis or Theses.

HISTORY AND HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE First Year: A grade 1 History subject. History and Philosophy of Science 1. Two additional grade 1 subjects preferably including a language other than English.

Second Year: One second-year honours History subject. History and Philosophy of Science 2A (hone). Units making up 2A (hens) should be approved by the department. A grade 2 subject.

Third Year: One third-year honours History subject. Methods of Historical Research (no examination). History and Philosophy of Science ЗC (hofs). Units making up 3C (hone) should be approved by the department. Fourth Year: Honours History 4X (special study in History). Selected topics from History and Philosophy of Science 4. In addition, each student must submit a thesis of not more than 9,000 words on a subject to be approved by the chairmen of both departments. The thesis must be handed in no later than the second week of the August vacation of the fourth year.

549 Faculty of Arts

The final examination will be held in the fourth year though the results obtained in other subjects will be taken into account, e.g. honours History subjects taken in the third year and History and Philosophy of Science in third year.

Final Examination (1) The honours History subject taken in the third year. (2) Special Study (History). (3) Selected papers from History and Philosophy of Science 4. (4) Thesis.

HISTORY AND ITALIAN

First Year: A grade 1 History subject, preferably History 1 B (The Age of Revolutions). Italian 1. Two additional grade 1 subjects. Second Year: Honours History 2K (French) or 2N (German). Italian 2C (hans). A grade 2 pass subject. This may be History 2K or 2N, whichever is not taken at honours level. Third Year: Honours History ЭR (Renaissance Italy). Italian part 3 course A (hofs). Methods of Historical Research (no examination). Fourth Year: Honours History 4X (special study in History). Italian 4A (hans). In addition, a thesis of not more than 9,000 words on a subject approved by the chairmen of both departments concerned, and based on iпдервn_ dent work undertaken by the student during the preceding eight months, must be handed in not later than the beginning of the second term. The final examination is held in two parts (in the third and fourth years).

Part 1 (3rd year) (1) Honours History 3R (Late Medieval European). (2) Assessment as for Italian 3 course A (hans).

Part 2 (4th year) (1) Honours History 4X (special study in History). (2) Not more than three 3-hour papers in Italian 4A (hens). В. Class Tests: (1) Advanced oral test in Italian. (2) Advanced unseen translation into Italian. C. Thesis (see above).

HISTORY AND LATIN First Year: History 1C (Classical Studies A), Latin 1, and two additional grade 1 subjects. Second Year: Honours History 2M (Ancient), Latin 2 (hofs), and an approved grade 2 pass History subject. 550 Combined Honours Course

Third Year: Honours History 3R (Renaissance Italy) and (Latin 3 (hons; Methods of Historical Research (no examination). Fourth Year: Honours History 4X (special study in History). Latin 4. In addition, each candidate must submit during his fourth year a thesis of 8,000-10,000 words, either in accordance with the requirements of the school of History or In accordance with the requirements of the school of Classical Studies, or on a combined subject which must be approved by the chairmen of both departments. Note: In addition, each student, unless exempted by the chairman of the department of Classical Studies, must submit at the beginning of each of the second and third years an essay or perform some other approved work prescribed by the department of Classical Studies. The final examination is held in two parts (in the third and fourth years).

Part 1 (3rd year) (1) Honours History 3R (Late Medieval European). (2) Prescribed Latin texts. (3) Latin history and literature.

Part 2 (4th year) (1) Honours History 3R (Renaissance Italy). (2) Extensive reading in Latin. (3) Latin unseen translation. (4) Latin literature. (5) Latin special study. (6) Thesis.

HISTORY AND MUSIC

First Year: History 1A (British) or 1 B (The Age of Revolutions). Music 1A. Two additional grade 1 subjects, preferably Including a foreign language and a second grade 1 History. Second Year: One second-year honours History subject. Music 2В (hofs) with a study of prescribed musical scores. An additional grade 2 subject, preferably a pass history subject (not relevant to the honours History subject to be taken) or Philosophy 2K (with addition of special reading and essay on Musical Aesthetics) or part 2 of a foreign language. Third Year: One third-year honours History subject. Methods of Historical Research (no examination). Music 3C (bons) with a study of prescribed musical scores. Fourth Year: Honours History 4X (special study in History). Music 4D (hofs). In addition, each candidate must present a thesis not exceeding 9,000 words on a subject approved by the chairmen of both departments, which combines the study of history and music, provided that the chairmen of the departments may approve a subject which lies entirely in the field of history, or in the field of music. The chairmen of the departments should

551 Faculty of Arts

be consulted during the third year about the date on which the thesis will be required to be handed in. The final examination is held in two parts (in the third and fourth years).

Part 1 (3rd year) (1) The third-year honours History subject studied. (2) Music ЭC (hofs). (3) Prescribed musical scores.

Part 2 (4th year)

(1) Honours History 4X (special study in History). (2) Music 4D (hofs). (3) Thesis.

HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY

First Year: History 1A (British) or 16 (The Age of Revolutions). Philosophy 1A or 1 B or 1 C. Two additional grade 1 subjects. (lt is recommended that one of these should be a foreign language.)

Second Year: One second year honours History subject. Philosophy 2L (hots), the unit course Philosophy 2F1 (hots), and a second year honours subject (or its unit equivalents) chosen from either group 2, 3 or 4 of the listing on p. 424 of the Philosophy entry.

Third Year: One third year honours History subject. Methods of Historical Research (no examination) and Satisfactory participation in the third year honours Philo- sophy seminar, Together with Two third year honours subjects (or their unit equivalents) chosen from the two Philosophy groups not already covered. (A student who wishes to proceed to final year is normally required to obtain at least second class honours in the Philosophy component, and to meet whatever minimum standard is required by the other department.)

Fourth Year: Honours History 4X (special study in History). Two of Philosophy honours 4S, 4T, 4U, 4V, 4W, 4X or 4Y. In addition, each candidate must submit during his fourth year at leest one 3,000 word essay in Philosophy AND either a thesis of 8,000- 10,000 words in History in accordance with the requirements of the school of History or an additional essay of 3,000 words in Philosophy in accordance with the requirements of the school of Philosophy. Students who wish to write a thesis on a topic combining both History and Philosophy should make application to the chairmen of both departments.

• All students planning to enrol for combined honours In Philosophy should first consult the Philosophy department Interviewer. 552 Combined Honours Courses

HISTORY AND POLITICAL SCIENCE

First Year: Politics 1 A or 1 В or 1 C. History 1A (British) or 16 (The Age of Revolutions). Two additional grade 1 subjects, preferably including a foreign language.

Second Year: Honours History 2K (French) or 2L (Modern British). A grado 2 Politics subject at honours level. One additional approved grade 2 pass subject.

Third Year: One of Honours History 3G (Australian) or 3H (American) or 3J (East Asian). Methods of Historical Research (no examination). A grade 3 Politics subject at honours level.

Fourth Year: Honours History 4X (special study in History) Politics 4A or 4В. in addition, a thesis of 9,000-12,000 words, which may be written either in accordance with the requirements of the school of History, or in accordance with the requirements of the school of Political Science, or in a combined subject which must be approved by the chairmen of both schools.

HISTORY AND RUSSIAN

First Year: A grade 1 History subject, preferably History 1 B (The Age of Revolutions). Russian 1 or Russian 1A. Two additional grade 1 subjects.

Second Year: One approved grade 2 honours History. Russian 2 (honours) and Russian 2B (honours-1 unit). An additional grade 2 pass subject. If honours History 2K is not taken, this subject must be History 2K.

Third Year: One grade 3 honours History subject. Methods of Historical Research (no examination). B (honours-1 of Russian З (honours) and Russian З options). Note: In Russian 3, honours students will be given class tests in unseen translation, and will have to write an essay, in Russian, on a subject approved by the chairmen of the two departments concerned; the essay is to be handed in at the beginning of third term. Fourth Year: Honours History 4X (special study in History). Russian 4 (2 of options). A thesis in English on a subject approved by the chairmen of both departments, based on independent research and not exceeding 9,000 words. The chairmen of the departments should be consulted during the third year concerning the dato on which the thesis will be required to be handed in.

The final examination is held In two parts, part 1 at the end of third year and part 2 at the end of fourth year.

553 Faculty of Arts

Part 1 (1) The third year honours History subject. (2) Russian 3 (hens) papers (1) and (2) and Russian 3В (hofs) (1 paper). (3) Oral test in Russian. Part 2 (1) Honours History 4X (special study in History). (2) Russian 4 (2 papers). (3) Oral test in Russian. (4) Thesis.

HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE AND LATIN First Year: History and Philosophy of Science 1. Latin 1. Two additional grade 1 subjects. Second Year: History and Philosophy of Science 2A (hens). Units making up 2A (hofs) should be approved by the department. Latin 2 (hofs). An additional approved grade 2 subject. Third Year: History and Philosophy of Science ЗC (hens). Units making up 3C (hens) should be approved by the department. Latin 3 (hens). Fourth Year: Latin 4. Selected topics from History and Philosophy of Science 4. The candidate must be classed in Latin 2, 3, 4, and History and Philo- sophy of Science 2A, 3C, History and Philosophy of Science 4. In addition, each candidate, unless exempted by the chairman of the department of Classical Studies, must submit at the beginning of each of the second and third years an essay or perform some other approved work prescribed by the department of Classical Studies. Each candidate must submit at the beginning of the third term of the fourth year either (a) a thesis of 9.000 words on a subject approved by the chairmen of the departments of Classical Studies and History and Philosophy of Science or (b) a thesis for the department of Classical Studies and a thesis for the department of History and Philosophy of Science. If two theses are presented, each should fulfil the requirements of the department in which it is presented except that it need not be of the length normally required.

HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE & MATHEMATICS First Year: History and Philosophy of Science 1. Mathematics 1 A. Physics 1. Mathematics 1 B or another approved part 1 Science subject. Science language. Second Year: History and Philosophy of Science 2A thons). Units making up 2A (hofs) should be approved by the department. Mathematics 2A (hens). Philosophy 2L. 554 Combined Honours Courses

Third Year: History and Philosophy of Science ЗC (hus). Units making up ЭC (hofs) should be approved by the department. Mathematics 3A (hofs). Fourth Year: History and Philosophy of Science 4. An approved selection of units from Mathematics 4. The final examination will be held in two parts, part 1 at the end of third year, part 2 at the end of fourth year. Part 1 (1) Mathematics ЗА (hofs). (2) History and Philosophy of Science 3C. Part 2 (1 ) Mathematics 4 selected units. (2) History and Philosophy of Science 4. (3) Thesis or prescribed essay work.

HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE AND PHILOSOPHY• First Year: Philosophy 1 A or 18 or 1 C. Philosophy IA or 1 B or 1 C. Two additional grade 1 subjects. (It is recommended that one of these should be a foreign language.) Second Year: History and Philosophy of Science 2A (hofs). Units making up 2A (hots) should ba approved by the department. Philosophy 2L (hofs), the unit course Philosophy 2FI (hots), and a second year honours subject (or its unit equivalents) chosen from either group 2, 3, or 4 of the listing on p. 424 of the Philosophy entry. Third Year: History and Philosophy of Science 3C (hofs). Units making up 3C (hofs) should be approved by the department. Satisfactory participation in the third year Philosophy honours seminar, Together with Two third year honours subjects (or their unit equivalents) chosen from the two Philosophy groups not already covered. (A student who wishes to proceed to final year is normally required to obtain at least second class honours in the Philosophy component, and to meet whatever minimum standard is required by the other department.) Fourth Year: History and Philosophy of Science 4D and one of 4A, 4В or 4C. Two of Philosophy honours 4S, 4T, 4U, 4V, 4W, 4X or 4Y. In addition, each candidate must submit during his fourth year two essays each of approximately 3,000 words in Philosophy in accordance with the requirements of the school of Philosophy end also meet the essay requirements for Individual H.P.S. subjects. Students who wish to write on a topic combining both History and Philosophy of Science and Philosophy should make application to the chairmen of both departments.

•A11 students planning to enrol for combined honours in Philosophy should first consult the Philosophy department interviewer.

555 Faculty of Arts

The final examination in History and Philosophy of Science will be held in two parts, part 1 at the end of the the third year, part 2 at the end of the fourth year. The final examination in Philosophy will be held at the end of the fourth year.

HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE AND POLITICAL SCIENCE

First Year: History and Philosophy of Science 1. Politics 1 A or 1 B or 1 C. Two additional grade 1 subjects. Second Year: History and Philosophy of Science 2A (hens). Units making up 2A (hens) should be approved by the department. A grade 2 Politics subject at honours level. One additional approved grade 2 (pass) subject. Third Year: History and Philosophy of Science 3C (hofs). Units making up 3C (hofs) should be approved by the department. A grade 3 Politics subject at honours level. Fourth Year: History and Philosophy of Science 4. Politics 4A or 46. In addition, each student must submit a thesis of not more than 12,000 words on a subject to be approved by the chairmen of departments. The thesis must be handed in no later than the second week of the August vacation of the fourth year. The final examination will be taken in the fourth year, but results in earlier years may be taken into account.

LATIN AND MATHEMATICS

First Year: Latin 1, Mathematics 1A, and two other approved grade 1 subjects. Second Year: Latin 2 (hols), Mathematics 2A (hofs), and one other approved grade 2 subject. Third Year: Latin 3 (hops), Mathematics 3A (hofs). Fourth Year: Latin 4, an approved selection of units from Mathe- matics 4. In addition, each candidate must present a thesis in the final year on a special topic to be decided in consultation with the professors of Mathe- matics and Classical Studies.

Note: In addition, each student, unless exempted by the chairman of the department of Classical Studies, must submit at the beginning of each of the second and third years an essay or perform some other approved work prescribed by the department of Classical Studies. The final examination will be held in two parts, part 1 at the end of the third year, part 2 at the end of the fourth year.

Part 1 (1) Mathematics 3A (hofs). (2) Prescribed Latin texts. (3) Latin literature and history. 556 Combined Honours Courses

Part 2 (1) Extensive reading in Latin. (2) Latin unseen translation. (3) Latin Literature. (4) Latin special studies. (5) Mathematics 4 units. (6) Thesis.

MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE

First Year: Mathematics 1A (units 131 and 132) Computer Science 1. Mathematics 1 B and one other grade 1 subject or two other grade 1 subjects. Second Year: Mathematics 2A (hens). Computer Science 2A (hofs). One other approved grade 2 subject. Third Year: Mathematics ЭА (hofs). Computer Science 3 (hens). Fourth Year: An approved selection of units from 400-level Mathe- matics and Computer Science, and a thesis on a topic to be agreed upon in consultation with the two departments. The final examinations will be in two parts, part 1 at the end of third year, part 2 at the end of fourth year.

MATHEMATICS AND PHILOSOPHY

First Year: Mathematics 1A, and either Mathematics 1 B or Physics 1. Philosophy 1A or 16 or 1C. Two additional grade 1 subjects. (It is recommended that one of these should be a foreign language.)

Second Year: Mathematics 2A (hens). Philosophy 2L (huns), the unit course Philosophy 2FI (hens), and a second year honours subject (or its unit equivalents) chosen from either group 2, 3 or 4 of the listing on p. 424 of the Philosophy entry.

Third Year: Mathematics 3А (huns). Satisfactory participation in the third year Philosophy honours seminar, Together with Two third year honours subjects (or their unit equivalents) chosen from the two Philosophy groups not already covered. (A student who wishes to proceed to final year is normally required to obtain at least second class honours in the Philosophy component, and to meet whatever minimum standard is required by the other department.) • li students planning to enrol for combined honours in Philosophy should first consultА the Philosophy department interviewer.

557 Faculty of Arts

Fourth Year: An approved selection of units from Mathematics 4. Two of Philosophy honours 4S, 4T, 4U, 4V, 4W, 4X or 4Y. In addition, each candidate must submit during his fourth year at least one 3,000 word essay in Philosophy AND either a thesis of 8,000- 10,000 words in Mathematics in accordance with the requirements of the school of Mathematics or an additional essay of 3,000 words in Philosophy in accordance with the requirements of the school of Philo- sophy. Students who wish to write a thesis on a topic combining both Mathematics and Philosophy should make application to the chairmen of both departments. . The final examination in Mathematics will be held in two parts, part 1 at the end of the third year, part 2 at the end of the fourth year. The final examination in Philosophy will be held at the end of the fourth year. Part 1 (1) Mathematics 3A (hofs). Part 2 (1) Essay (Philosophy) and Thesis (Mathematics) or Essay (Philo- sophy). (2) Mathematics 4 units and (3) Two of Philosophy honours 4S, 4T, 4U, 4V, 4W, 4X or 4Y.

PHILOSOPHY AND POLITICAL SCIENCE' First Year: Philosophy 1A or 1B or 1C. Politics 1A or 1B or 1C. Two additional grade 1 subjects. Second Year: Philosophy 2L (huns), the unit course Philosophy 2FI (hofs) and a second year honours subject (or its unit equivalents) chosen from either group 2, 3 or 4 of the listing on p. 424 of the Philosophy entry. A grade 2 Politics subject at honours level. Third Year: Satisfactory participation in the third year Philosophy honours seminar, Together with Two third year honours subjects (or their unit equivalents) chosen from the two Philosophy groups not already covered. (A student who wishes to proceed to final year is normally required to obtain at least second class honours in the Philosophy component, and to meet whatever minimum standard is required by the other department.) A grade 3 Politics subject at honours level. Fourth Year: Two of Philosophy honours 4S, 4T, 4U, 4V, 4W, 4Х or 4Y. Politics 4A. Fourth Year: in addition, each candidate must submit during his fourth year at least one 3,000 word essay in Philosophy AND either a thesis of 8,000- 10,000 words in Politics in accordance with the requirements of the •All students planning to enrol for combined honours in Philosophy should first consult the Philosophy department interviewer. 558 Combined Honours Courses

school of Politics or an additional essay of 3,000 words in Philosophy in accordance with the requirements of the school of Philosophy. Students who wish to write a thesis on a topic combining both Politics and Philosophy should make application to the chairmen of both depart. rents.

POLITICAL SCIENCE AND RUSSIAN

First Year: Politics 1A or i В or 1C. Russian 1 or Russian 1A. Two additional grade 1 subjects. Second Year: A grade 2 Politics subject at honours level. Russian 2 (hofs) and Russian 2В (hons-1 unit). One additional grade 2 pass subject. Third Year: A grade 3 Politics subject at honours level. Russian 3 (hofs) and Russian 3В (hoes-1 of options). Fourth Year: Politics 4A or 4В. Russian 4 (2 of options). In addition, a thesis on a subject approved by the chairmen of both departments, based on independent research and not exceeding 12,000 words, will be required to be handed in at the beginning of the third term of fourth year. The final examination will be held in two parts, pert 1 at the end of the third year, part 2 at the end of the fourth year.

Part 1 A. Examination Papers: (1) Russian 3 (hofs) papers (1) and (2), and Russian 3В (hofs) (1 paper). (2) Not more than two papers in the Political Science subject taken in third year. В. Class Test: Oral test in Russian. Part 2 A. Examination Papers: (1) Politics 4A or 4В. (2) Russian 4 (2 papers). В. Class Test: Oral test in Russian. C. Thesis.

559 Faculty of Arts

FINANCIAL ASSISTANCE A good many of the undergraduate scholarships listed in the summary (pp. 564-567 are under review. Students should make enquiries of tho chairman of the department concerned.

TERTIARY EDUCATION ASSISTANCE SCHEME See the Student Information Booklet 1978.

STUDENTS' LOAN FUND See the Student Information Booklet 1978.

PRIZES EXHIBITIONS and SCHOLARSHIPS (The value of the awards quoted may be subject to variation.) 1. The following awards may be made annually on the work of the Year— Open to competition among candidates taking such subjects in the First Year of their course:

Greek 1 H. B. Higgins exhibition of $30 Latin 1 John Grice exhibition of $30 English 1 John Sanderson exhibition of $30 French 1 Baillieu exhibition of $30 German 1 Exhibition of $30 Dutch 1 Exhibition of $30 Russian 1 Exhibition of $30 History 1A (British) Marion Boi,thby exhibition of $30 History 1B (The Age of Revolutions) Exhibition of $30 History 1C (Classical Studies A) Exhibition of $30 Philosophy 1A or Philosophy 16 Hastie exhibition of $30 Mathematics 1A or 1 C John MacFarland exhibition of $30 Mathematics 1 B Dixson scholarship of $30 Psychology 1 Exhibition of $30 Open to competition among candidates taking such subjects in the First Year of their course or in the Second Year of their course for the degree with honours: Politics 1 Exhibition of $30 Economic History 1A. Exhibition of $30 Open to competition among candidates taking such subjects in the Second Year of their course for the degree with honours: Greek 2 Douglas Howard exhibition of $30 Latin 2 Douglas Howard exhibition of $30 English Language 2 and fEdward Stevens exhibition of $30 English Literature 2 Alexander Sutherland prize of $24 (books) Medieval French Language and Literature Mary Taylor scholarship of $60 Dutch 2 Exhibition of $30 Russian 2 Exhibition of $30 Mathematics 2A Dixson scholarship of 940 560 Financial Assistance

Mathematics 26 Dixson scholarship of $40 Psychology Provisional Honours Exhibition of $30 Statistics (Units 201. 202 & 203) Maurice H. Beiz prize of books Open to competition among candidates taking such subjects in the Third Year of their course for the degree with honours: French 3 Mrs. William Smith exhibition of 830 Renaissance French Language and Literature or Advanced Medieval Language and Literature Mary Taylor scholarship of $60 German 3 Exhibition of 830 Psychology Final Honours part 1 Australian Psychological Society Prize of 820 Open to competition among candidates taking such subjects in the Third or Fourth Year of their course for the degree with honours: Comparative Philology Exhibition of $30

A Nestle exhibition in Philosophy of 860 shall be open to competition among candidates in the Second Year of their course in the honours school of Philosophy. The R. G. Wilson scholarship in History of $60 shall be open to competition among candidates in the Third Year of their course for the degree with honours, either in the school of History or in a combined course in which History forms a pert. The Dixson scholarships in Mathematics BA and Mathematics 3 В of $70 each shall be open to competition among candidates In the Third Year of their course either for bachelor of Arts (degree with honours), in the school of Mathematics or in a combined course in which Mathe- matics forms a part, or for bachelor of Science of for bachelor of Engineering. Except with the approval of the faculty these scholarships shall not be awarded except to a candidate who Is placed in the first class. Where no candidate in the Second Year of the honour school in Philo- sophy is placed in the first class the emoluments of the exhibition may with the approval of the faculty be awarded in whole or in part to a candidate who is placed in the first class in a combined honours course, of which Philosophy subjects form part. Except as otherwise provided In the details of subjects for any honours school no exhibition may be awarded to any candidate who is not at that examination placed in the class list in two subjects of a course for the degree with honours. No exhibition may be awarded to any candidate in any subject which he is not at that examination passing for the first time. Except with the approval of the faculty no exhibition in any subject shall be awarded except to a candidate who is placed in the first class in that subject. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in the preceding paragraph candidates taking Physics (First Уеаr), Chemistry (First Year), Geology (First Year) or Biology who pass or obtain honours at that examination in not less than three approved subjects may compete for any prize or exhiЫtion open for competition in such subjects in the course for the degree of bachelor of Science as set out in regulation 3.20.10, group 1.

561 т Faculty of Arts

2. At the final honours examination there shall be the following scholarships of $50 each in the named schools:

A. Classical Studies R. G. Wilson scholarship В. History Dwight final examination prize C. Philosophy Hastie scholarship E. English Language and Literature Dwight final examination prize F. French Language and Literature Dwight final examination prize G. Germanic Studies R. G. Wilson scholarship H. Economics Dwight final examination prize I. Political Scence Dwight final examination prize J. Middle Eastern Studies R. G. Wilson scholarship K. Psychology Dwight final examination prize L. Mathematical Statistics Dwight final examination prize M. Russian Language and Literature R. G. Wilson scholarship N. Fine Arts Dwight final examination prize 0. History and Philosophy of Science Dwight final examination prize P. Geography Dwight final examination prize 0. Chinese R. G. Wilson scholarship R. Italian Language and Literature R. G. Wilson scholarship

The scholarship or prize in each school shall be open for competition amongst those candidates who are presenting themselves in that school for the first time.

3. Except with the approval of the faculty no scholarship in any honour school at the final examination shall be awarded except to a candidate who is placed in the first class in the final examination. Where for any scholarship in an honour school there is no candidate or there is no candidate who is placed in the first class at the final examination and the scholarship is not otherwise with the approval of the faculty awarded, the scholarship may with the approval of the faculty be awarded in whole or in part to a candidate who is placed in the first class in the final examination in any combined honour course of which subjects of such honour school form a part. Where there is more than one combined honour course in which subjects of the same honour school form a part and in which candidates have been placed in the first class, the scholarship may be divided between such combined honour courses:

Provided that no candidate taking a combined honour course may at the one examination be awarded emoluments of greater value than two hundred and fifty dollars.

Where for any honour school there is no candidate or there is no candi. date placed in the first class and the scholarship is not otherwise with the approval of the faculty awarded in either a pure school or a combined course, the said scholarship may be transferred with the approval of the faculty to any other school or schools or combined courses in which there are a number of candidates placed in the first class at the final examination. 562 Financial Assistance

POSTGRADUATE STUDIES Grants from Research Funds Allocation: Grants from the general research fund are made by the Professorial Board on the advice of Its Standing Research Committee and the chairmen of the departments concerned. Research Awards: The University of Melbourne awards to students a limited number of research scholarships from its own resources. Where an award is made, scholars are expected to devote their whole time to research except for such tutoring and demonstrating work as is approved by the chairman of the appropriate department. Research grants are awarded to selected graduates of Bachelor standing. Research scholarships (some known as Williams Scholarships) are awarded to selected graduates who have shown marked ability for research and who are undertaking further research training, as Master degree or Ph.D. candidates. Research scholarships may be renewed annually for a period not exceeding three years. Emoluments of Awards: The value is $3,500 per annum plus compulsory fees. Research Fellowships: The University of Melbourne has established twelve research fellowships with the status and salary of a lecturer. Travelling allowance is made for a fellow appointed from overseas. Fellowships will be granted for one year in the first instance and, in exceptional circumstances, may be extended. Applications close on 31 January and 31 July. Fellowships will be advertised as they become vacant. Travelling Research Scholarships: Two travelling research scholarships are offered by the University in two years out of every three to enable a graduate who shows first-rate capacity for research to undertake approved work at an overseas university, or other suitable institution. The value of the scholarship, which is normally awarded for three years, is $4,500 per annum. The Aitchison Travelling Scholarship and the Myer Scholarship, which are together worth $4,500, are also available for research abroad. The combined scholarship is also offered for three years, as it becomes available. Research Report: All persons conducting research in the University, whether under research awards or otherwise, are required to submit, by the end of February in each year, reports on their research during the preceding twelve months to the chairmen of their departments, together with a list of their research publications during the period. Chairmen of departments also submit departmental research reports, which are published in the annual University of Melbourne Research Report. Mode of Application: Applications for research awards and grants must be made on a form designed for the purpose (and available at the office of the Dean of Graduate Studies). Applications must be lodged with the Secretary of Graduate Studies before 30 November. in general, research awards are made as from 1 March. Further information may be obtained from the Secretary for Graduate Studies.

563 Faculty of Arts

ADDITIONAL AWARDS AVAILABLE This table contains a list of awards included in the University Calendar in chapter 6 of the regulations, other than those previously listed. It also includes those awards available to students either as annual gifts or as income from funds not held by the University as trustee. The regulation establishing the award is listed where applicable, or the source of further information cited. Students should consult departments for further information. The value of awards quoted is an approximation and may be subject to variation. ENTRANCE Unrestricted awards: see the University Calendar, appendix 1.

UNDERGRADUATE AND GRADUATE Field Title and Approximate Calendar Reference or Value Information Source

CLASSICAL STUDIES Modern Greek Greek Professionals Assistant Registrar (Arts) Prize, 8100 Latin or Greek H. B. Higgins Scholarship R 6.16 Poetry $80 Final Honours Jessie Webb Scholarship R 6.132 Latin or Greek $2,500 combined with History Final Honours Wyselaskie Scholarship R 6.7 Latin and/or 8525 Greek CRIMINOLOGY Criminology A Exhibition Assistant Registrar (Arts) $30 Criminology B Exhibition Assistant Registrar (Arts) $30 Criminology C Exhibition Assistant Registrar (Arts) $30 Criminology D John Barry Medal Assistant Registrar (Arts)

EAST ASIAN STUDIES Chinese Australian-Asian Association for Victoria 850 ECONOMICS Political Economy Wyselaskie Scholarship R 6.7 $300 Economic Kilmany Scholarship R 6.43 Research $5,000 (Graduate Studies) 564 Awards

Field Title and Approximate Calendar Reference or Value Information Source

ENGLISH Drama Shakespeare Scholarship R 6.2 $652 Dramatic Murray Sutherland R 6.72 (30) Performance Prizes $28 Essay on subjects Bowen Prize R 8.72 (1) of History, $115 Institutions, Literature, Jurisprudence and Political Economy (subjects rotate annually) Essay Morris Prize R 6.72 (6) $34 books Poetry H. B. Higgins Scholarship R 6.16 $80 Enid Dorham Prize R 6.72 (22) $24 Masefield Prize R 6.72 (19) $40 Final Honours Kathleen Fitzpatrick R в.72 (52) English and Exhibition History $80 Final Honours Wyselaskie Scholarship R 6.7 English 1979, 1982 Language and $525 p.a. Literature Icelandic Lodewyckx Travelling R 8.101 Scholarship $1,000 or $500 Annual Percival Seri° Prizes R 6.148 Examinations FRENCH Final Honours Wyselaskle Scholarship R 6.7 French 1977, 1980 $525 p.a. Language and W. T. Mollison Scholarship R 6.9 Literature $1,300 Poetry H. B. Higgins Scholarship R 6.16 $80 Poetry Doctor Joseph Birch R 6.126 Hanson Prize $900 GERMANIC STUDIES Final Honours W. T. Mollison R в.9 Dutch or Scholarship $1,300 German

565 Faculty of Arts

Field Title and Approximate Calendar Reference or Value Information Source

Germanic Wyselaskie Scholarship R 6.7 Languages 1978, 1981 5525 p.a. Poetry H. B. Higgins Scholarship R 6.1в $80

HISTORY Ancient Rosemary Merlo Prize R 6.72 142) $40 Australian Gyles Turner Prize R 6.72 (12) $50 Dennis-Wettenhall Prize R 6.137 (Research) British Rosemary Merlo Prize R 6.72 (42) $30 Late Medieval Felix Raab Prize R 6.72 (56) European $35 Final Year Margaret Kiddie Prize R 6.72 (53) Honours $50 Essay Final Honours Kathleen Kitzpatrick R в.72 (52) History and Exhibition English $80 Final Honours Jessie Webb Scholarship R 6.132 History and $2,500 Latin or Greek History Harbison-Higinbotham R 6.28 Research Scholarship $200 (approx.) Caroline Kay Scholarship R 6.20 $300-$500 Ernest Scott Prize R 6.61 $500

ITALIAN Italian Poetry H. B. Higgins Scholarship R 6.16 $80

MATHEMATICS Mathematics Nanson Prize R 6.72 (14) $175 Wilson Prize R 6.72 (2) $200 Final Honours Wyselaskie Scholarship R 6.7 Mathematics $760 p.a. MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES Middle Eastern Fanny Reading Scholarship R 6.75 Studies $150 p.a. 566 Awards

Field Title and Approximate Calendar Reference or Value Information Source

POLITICAL SCIENCE Political Science Harbison-Higinbotham R 6.28 Research Scholarship $200 Jeanette Kosky Prize R 6.86 $140 RUSSIAN Russian Poetry H. B. Higgins Scholarship R 6.16 $80

GRADUATE RESEARCH Unrestricted Aitchison Travelling R 6.46 Scholarship Graduate Studies $4,500 Unrestricted Bartlett Research R 6.51 Scholarships $200 Graduate Studies

Unrestricted British Council Travel See "Announcements" Grants Tourist return sea passage or economy air fare Unrestricted Gowrie Research Travelling See "Announcements" Scholarships The Trustees, Gowrie £2,750 stg. Scholarship Trust Fund, P.O. Box E5, St. James, Sydney, N.S.W. 2001. Research Rhodes Scholarship See "Announcements" Scholarships £2,010 stg. p.a. plus fees Research Services Canteens Trust General Secretary Scholarships Fund Scholarships Services Canteens Trust (For study abroad) Fund, Victoria Barracks, Maximum $2,000 p.a. Melbourne Research Sir Arthur Sims Travelling R 6.80 Scholarships Scholarship Graduate Studios $2,500 Research Taft Interchange R 6.70 Scholarships Scholarship $2,000 Graduate Studies Arts Shell Scholarship See "Announcements" £2,750 stg. and travel- Staff Manager, ling expenses Shell Co. of Australia Ltd. 163 William Street, Melbourne, Vic. 3000. Arts Lizette Bentwitch R 8.98 Scholarship Graduate Studies $2,400 Arts (Literature) The Felix Meyer R 6.162 Scholarship

567 Faculty of Arts

ENROLMENT-ARTS SUBJECTS AND CODES The following Is a list of all Arts subjects and the code for each subject. The departments are listed alphabetically and each list is arranged alphabetically within the department. Students enrolling in any subject must ensure that they enrol using the correct code number. The following points should be noted. (a) Please note that the Pass and Honours subjects bear separate code numbers. Students taking any Honours subject must ensure that they enrol using the correct code number. (b) In some cases students must enrol in both the subject and the specific units which will comprise that subject. The code numbers for both subject and specific units must be used. e.g. 166-201 Politics 2A consisting of: 166-002 Problems of American Politics 166-005 Chinese Politics and Society. Failure to enrol In the correct subject will cause considerable confusion and inconvenience to students and staff so all students are asked to take some care in this matter. CLASSICAL STUDIES 104-001 Ancient Greek Prep 104-101 Ancient Greek 1 104-201 Ancient Greek 2 (Pass) 104-261 Ancient Greek 2 (Honours) 104-301 Ancient Greek 3 (Pass) 104-361 Ancient Greek 3 (Honours) 104-461 Ancient Greek 4 104-100 Classical Studies lA 104-203 Classical Studies 28 104-204 Classical Studies 2C (not available in 1978) 104-303 Classical Studies 38 104-304 Classical Studies 3C (not available in 1978) 104-102 Latin 1 104-112 Latin 1A 104-202 Latin 2 (Pass) 104-222 Latin 2A 104-262 Latin 2 (Honours) 104-302 Latin 3 (Pass) 104-362 Latin 3 (Honours) 104-462 Latin 4 104-002 Modern Greek Prep 104-111 Modern Greek 1 104-121 Modern Greek 1A 104-211 Modern Greek 28 (Pass) 104-212 Modern Greek 2C (Pass) (not available in 1978) 104-311 Modern Greek 38 (Pass) 104-312 Modern Greek 3C (Pass) (not available in 1978) 104-499 M.A. Preliminary Examination—School of Classical Studies 104-601 M.A. School of Classical Studies 104-701 Ph.D. Department of Classical Studies COMPUTER SCIENCE 622-100 Computer Science 1 568 Subjects and Codes

which is composed of units: 622-101 Computer Programming Fundamentals 622-102 Data Structures 622-103 Programming Applications 622-111 Computer Programming Fundamentals (vac. course) 622-200 Computer Science 2A (Pass) composed of a selection from the following units: 622-201 Computer Programming and Organization 622-202 Numerical Methods 622-203 Programming Systems 622-212 Data Management 622-213 Computer Architecture 622-253 Operating Systems Fundamentals 622-260 Computer Science 2A (Honours) Units as for Pass course. 622-210 Computer Science 2B (Pass) which is composed of units: 622-111 Computer Programming Fundamentals (vac. course) 622-21 Information Systems 622-212 Data Management 622-300 Coтрut вг Science 3 composed of a selection from the following units: 622-301 Theory of Computation 622-302 Formal Languages and Automata 622-303 Heuristic Programming 622-311 Computer Architecture 622-312 Advanced Data Structures 622-313 Computer Design 622-321 Approximation of Functions 622-322 Numerical Integration 622-323 Numerical Linear Algebra 622-332 Operating Systems 622-333 Real-time Systems 622-341 Software Engineering 622-342 Programming Languages 622-345 Programming Methodology 622-351 Data Base Management Systems 622-360 Computer Science 3 (Honours) 622-460 Computer Science 4 (Honours) 622-370 Combined Course Computer Science 3 (Honours) 622-470 Combined Course Computer Science 4 (Honours) 622-602 M.A. School of Computer Science 622-701 Ph.D. School of Computer Science

CRIMINOLOGY 191-201 Criminology 2 191-800 Postgraduate Diploma of Criminology 191-801 Criminology A 191-802 Criminology В 191-803 Criminology C 191-804 Criminology D 191-499 M.A. Preliminary Examination—School of Criminology 191-601 M.A. School of Criminology 191-701 Ph.D. Department of Criminology

569

Faculty of Arts

EAST ASIAN STUDIES 156-140 East Asian Studies 156-001 Chinese Prep 156-101 Chinese 1 156-102 Chinese Studies 1X Half-subject 156-111 Chinese 1A and tia ll-subject 156-112 East Asian Studies (Chinese) 156-103 Chinese Studies ly either f calf-subject 156-111 Chinese 1A and Half-subject 156-211 Chinese 2A or Half-subject 156-112 East Asian Studies (Chinese) and HaIf-subject 156-211 Chinese 2A 156-201 Chinese 2 156-202 Chinese Studies 2X {Half-subjects 156-211 Chinese 2A 166-005 Chinese Politics

156-203 Chinese Studies 2Y Half-subjects 156-211 Chinese 2A апд{ 156-311 Chinese 3A 156-204 Chinese Studies 2Z (Half-subject 156-211 Chinese 2A and Half-subject 156-212 Early Modern Chinese 2 (Pass) 156-261 Chinese 2 (Honours) (Chinese 2 & Chinese 2A) 156-262 Early Modern Chinese 2 (Honours) 156-301 Chinese 3 156-302 Chinese Studies 3Х {r Half-subject 156-311 Chinese 3A and `Half-subject 166-005 Chinese Politics 156-303 Chinese Studies 3Y Half-subject 156-311 Chinese 3A and. Half-subject 156-312 Early Modern Chinese 3 (Pass) 156-361 Chinese 3 (Honours) (Chinese 3 & Chinese ЗA) 156-362 Early Modern Chinese 3 (Honours) 156-363 Chinese 3B (Honours) 156-461 Chinese 4 (Honours) 156-462 Early Modern Chinese 4 (Honours) 156-002 Japanese Prep 156-121 Japanese 1 156-122 Japanese Studies 1X r. Half-subject 156-131 Japanese 1A and 1 56-1 13 East Asian Studies tНalfsцbіеct (Japanese) 156-123 Japanese Studies 1 Y Half-subject 156-113 East Asian Studies and (Japanese) Half-subject 1 56-23 1 Japanese 2A 156-221 Japanese 2 156-222 Japanese Studies 2X fHalf-subject 156-231 Japanese 2A and Half-subject 156-331 Japanese 3A 570 Subjects and Codes 156-321 Japanese 3 Half-subjects: 156-111 Chinese 1A 156-112 East Asian Studies (Chinese) 156-211 Chinese 2A 156-311 Chinese 3A 156-113 East Asian Studies (Japanese) 156-131 Japanese 1A 156-231 Japanese 2A 156-331 Japanese 3A 156-212 Early Modern Chinese 2 (Pass) 156-312 Early Modern Chinese 3 (Pass) 156-499 M.A. Preliminary Examination — School of East Asian Studies 156-601 M.A. School of East Asian Studies 156-701 Ph.D. Department of East Asian Studies

ECONOMICS, ECONOMIC HISTORY AND REGIONAL & URBAN ECONOMIC STUDIES 316-151 Economics 1A (Arts) 316-271 Economics 2 (Honours) 316-371 Economics 3 (Honours) 316-471 Economics 4 316-201 Economics B 316-312 Econometrics 316-301 Economics C1—International Economics 316-302 Economics C2—Economic Development 316-303 Economics C3—Economics of the Firm 316-304 Economics C4—Social Economics 316-305 Economics C5—Public Finance 316-306 Economics C6—Banking and Finance 316-307 Economics C7—Labour Economics 316-308 Economics C8—Industrial Relations 316-309 Economics C9—Agricultural Economics 316-310 Economics C10—Comparative Economic Systems 326-111 Economic History A 326-211 Economic History 28 (Pass) 326-212 Economic History 2C (Pass) 326-213 Economic History 20 (Pass) 326-214 Economic History 2E (Pass) 326-271 Economic History 2 В (Honours) 326-311 Economic History 3B (Pass) 326-312 Economic History 3C (Pass) 326-371 Economic History 3C (Honours) 326-313 Economic History 3D (Pass) 326-372 Economic History 3D (Honours) 326-314 Economic History 3E (Pass) 326-373 Economic History 3E (Honours) 326-401 Economic History 4 326-315 History of Economic Thought 3 (Pass) 326-375 History of Economic Thought 3 (Honours) 326-361 Methodology of Economic History 316-311 Mathematical Economics 321-101 Regional and Urban Development (Introduction)

571 Faculty of Arts

321-201 Regional Development 321-202 Regional Development in Asia (not available in 1978) 316-202 Statistical Method 321-301 Urban Economic Studies 321-361 Urban Economic Studies 3 (Honours) 321-461 Advanced Urban Economic Studies 4 (Honours) 316-498 M.A. Preliminary Examination-School of Economics 316-602 M.A. School of Economics

ENGLISH 106-101 English lA 106-111 English 1B 106-121 English 1 C 106-102 Rhetoric 106-201 English 2 106-301 English 3 106-261 English Literature 2 106-262 English Language 2 106-361 English Literature 3 106-362 English Language 3 106-461 English Language and Literature 4 106-462 Literature Component/Combined Courses 106-463 Language Component/Combined Courses 106-205 Linguistics 2 (Pass) 106-265 Linguistics 2 (Honours) 106-305 Linguistics 3 (Pass) 106-365 Linguistics 3 (Honours) 106-465 Linguistics 4 106-499 M.A. Preliminary Ex аmination—School of English Language and Literature 106-601 M.A. School of English Language and Literature 106-701 Ph.D. Department of English

FINE ARTS 111-101 Fine Arts 1A 111-201 Fine Arts 2E (Medieval & Renaissance Art History) (Pass) 111-261 Fine Arts 2E (Medieval & Renaissance Art History) (Honours) 111-301 Fine Arts 3F (Early Christian & Medieval Art History) (Pass) 111-361 Fine Arts 3F (Early Christian & Medieval Art History) (Honours) 111-302 Fine Arts 3K (19th & 20th Centuries European Art History) (Pass) 111-362 Fine Arts 3K (19th & 20th Centuries European Art History) (Honours) 111-461 Fine Arts 4R (Theory & Method of Art History & Art Criticism) (Honours) 111-462 Fine Arts 4S (Special Study in Art History) (Honours) 111-499 M.A. Preliminary Examination—School of Fine Arts 111-601 M.A. School of Fine Arts 111-701 Ph.D. Department of Fine Arts

EXPERIMENTAL FIRST YEAR (see pp. 49-51 of Handbook.) 100-101 Special Studies lA 572 Subjects and Codes

100-102 Special Studies 18

FRENCH 116-001 French Prep 116-101 French 1 116-102 French fA 116-201 French 2 (Pass) 116-202 Medieval French Language and Literature 2 (Pass) This subject may only be studied concurrently with, or after the completion of either French 2 (Pass) or French 3 (Pass). 116-203 French 2A (Pass) 116-261 French 2 (Honours) 116-262 Medieval French Language and Literature 2 (Honours) 116-301 French 3 (Pass) 116-302 Medieval French Language and Literature 3 (Pass) This subject may only be studied concurrently with, or after the completion of, either French 2 (Pass) or French 3 (Pass). 116-303 Renaissance French Language and Literature 3 (Pass) (Available in 1978 and thereafter In alternate years) This subject may only be studied concurrently with, or after the completion of French 3 (Pass). 116-304 Comparative Studies in Old French Language and Literature 3 (Pass) (Available In 1979 and thereafter in alternate years) This subject may only be studied concurrently with, or after the completion of French 3 (Pass). 116-361 French 3 (Honours) 116-363 Renaissance French Language end Literature 3 (Honours) (Available In 1978 and thereafter in alternate years) 116-364 Comparative Studies in Old French Language and Literature 3 (Honours) (Available in 1979 and thereafter in alternate years) 116-461 French 4 116-463 Renaissance French Language and Literature 4 (Available in 1978 and thereafter In alternate years) 116-464 Comparative Studies in Old French Language and Literature 4 (Available in 1979 and thereafter in alternate years) 116-499 M.A. Preliminary Examination---School of French Language and Literature 116-601 M.A. School of French Language and Literature 116-701 Ph.D. Department of French 116-801 Postgraduate Diploma in French Studies 116-811 Postgraduate Diploma In French Studies 1 116-821 Postgraduate Diploma in French Studies 2

GEOGRAPHY 121-101 Geography 1 121.201 Geography 2 (Pass) composed of three of the following units: 121-241 Terrain Analysis 121-242 Population Geography 121-243 Quantitative Methods in Geography 121-244 Political Geography 121-245 Rural Land Use Analysis 121-261 Geography 2 (Honours) 573 Faculty of Arts

121-262 Geography 2A (Honours) consisting of the following units: 121-246 Location Theory 121-247 Geographic Data Handling 121-248 Advanced Political Geography 121-263 Geography 28 (Honours) (Combined Course) 121-301 Geography 3 (Pass) composed of three of the following units: 121-341 Geography & Development 121-342 Man-Biosphere Relations: Theory & Applications 121-346 The Coastal Environment 121-347 Problems of Conservation 121-349 Urban Geography 121-302 Geography 3A (Pass) 121-361 Geography 3 (Honours) 121-362 Geography 38 (Honours) composed of a selection from the following units: 121-343 Advanced Population Geography 121-344 Problems in Human Geography 121-345 Development in Asia 121-348 Problem Areas in Man-Biosphere Relations 121-363 Geography 3C (Honours) (Combined Course) 121-461 Geography 4A 121-462 Geography 48 (Combined Course) 121-499 M.A. Preliminary Examination—School of Geography 121-601 M.A. School of Geography 121-701 Ph.D. Department of Geography 121-801 Postgraduate Diploma in Geography 121-811 Postgraduate Diploma in Geography (first year) 121-812 Postgraduate Diploma in Geography (second year)

GERMANIC STUDIES 126-001 Dutch Prep 126-111 Dutch 1 126-211 Dutch 2 (Pass) 126-271 Dutch 2 (Honours) 126-311 Dutch 3 (Pass) 126-371 Dutch 3 (Honours) 126-002 German Prep 126-101 German 1 126-102 German IA 126-201 German 2 (Pass) 126-202 German 2A (Pass) 126-261 German 2 (Honours) 126-262 German 2A (Honours) 126-301 German 3 (Pass) 126-361 German 3 (Honours) 126-203 Germanic Studies 28 (Pass) 126-263 Germanic Studies 2 (Honours) 126-303 Germanic Studies 38 (Pass) 126-363 Germanic Studies 3 (Honours) 126-461 Germanic Studies 4S 126-462 Germanic Studies 4T 126-003 Swedish Prep 574 Subjects and Codes

126-121 Swedish 1 126-221 Swedish 2 126-321 Swedish 3 126-499 M.A. Preliminary Examination—School of Germanic Studies 126-601 M.A. School of Germanic Studies 126-701 Ph.D. Department of Germanic Studies

HISTORY

131-101 History IA (British History c. 1558-1689) 131-102 History 18 (The Age of Revolutions 1750-1850) 131-103 History 1C (Ancient World) 131-104 History 10 (Culture Contact in the Pacific) 131-105 History 1E (Urban History) (not available in 1978) 131-106 History 1F (Prehistoric Archaeology) 131-201 History 2G (Australian History) (Pass) 131-301 History 3G (Australian History) (Pass) 131-361 History 3G (Australian History) (Honours) 131-202 History 2H (American History) (Pass) 131-262 History 2H (American History) (Honours) 1 31 -302 History 3H (American History) (Pass) 131-362 History 3H (American History) (Honours) 131-203 History 2J (East Asian History) (Pass) I З I -263 History 2J (East Asian History) (Honours) 131-303 History 3J (East Asian History) (Pass) 131-363 History 3J (East Asian History) (Honours) 131-204 History 2K (France since 1850) (Pass) 131-264 History 2K (France since 1850) (Honours) 131-304 History 3K (France since 1850) (Pass) 131-364 History 3K (France since 1850) (Honours) 131-205 History 2L (Modern British History) (Pass) 131-265 History 2L (Modern British History) (Honours) 131-305 History 3L (Modern British History) (Pass) 131-365 History 3L (Modern British History) (loueurs) 131-206 History 2M (Pre-Classical Antiquity) (Pass) 131-266 History 2M (Pre-Classical Antiquity) (Honours) 131-306 History 3M (Pre-Classical Antiquity) (Pass) 131-366 History 3M (Pre-Classical Antiquity) (loueurs) 131-207 History 2N (German) (Pass) 131-267 History 2N (German) (Honours) 131-210 History 20 (Roman History) (Pass) 131-270 History 20 (Roman History) (Honours) 131-310 History 30 (Roman History) (Pass) 131-370 History 30 (Roman History) (Honours) 131-311 History 3R (Renaissance Italy) (Pass) 131-371 History 3R (Renaissance Italy) (Honours) 131-372 History 3S (Early Modern British History) (Honours) 131-213 History 2T (Social and Reflective History) (Pass) (not 131-273 History 2T (Social and Reflective History) (Honours) avail- 131-313 History 3T (Social end Reflective History) (Pass) in гаые 131-373 History 3T (Social and Reflective History) (Honours) J 1978) 131-214 History 2V (Reformation Europe) (Pass) 131-274 History 2V (Reformation Europe) (Honours) 131-314 History 3V (Reformation Europe) (Pass) 131-374 History 3V (Reformation Europe) (Honours)

575 Faculty of Arts

131-461 History 4W (Theory and Method of History) (Honours) 131-462 History 4X (Special Study in History) (Honours) 131-499 M.A. Preliminary Examination—School of History 131-601 M.A. School of History 131-701 Ph.D. Department of History HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE 136-141 History and Philosophy of Science 1 consisting of two of the following units: 136-101 History of Astronomy 136-102 History of Theories of Generation and Inheritance 136-103 Explanation in Science 136-241 History and Philosophy of Science 2A (Pass) 136-242 History and Philosophy of Science 28 (Pass) Each subject consists of two units from the following: 136-201 Philosophy of Mathematics 136-202 General Philosophy of Science (not availaьl e in 1978) 136-203 Philosophy of Science 8 136-212 History of Mathematics В 136-223 Darwinism 136-224 The Scientific Revolution 136-225 History of Public Health and Germ Theory 136-226 The Social Context of Science (not available in 1978) 136-311 H.P.S. Education course: Scientific Change 161-281 Rudiments of Symbolic Logic (Philosophy 2F-1) 136-343 History and Philosophy of Science 3C (Pass) 136-344 History and Philosophy of Science 3F (Pass) Each subject consists of three units from the list for H.P.S. 2A and 28 and the following third year units: 136-303 Philosophy of Science (Third year level) 136-323 Darwinism (Third year level) 136-324 The Scientific Revolution (Third year level) 136-325 History of Public Health and Germ Theory (Third year level) (not availabIe in 1978) 136-390 Directed Study 136-261 History and Philosophy of Science 2A (Honours) 136-262 History and Philosophy of Science 28 (Honours) 136-363 History and Philosophy of Science 3C (Honours) 136-364 History and Philosophy of Science 3F (Honours) 136-462 History and Philosophy of Science 4A 136-463 History and Philosophy of Science 48 136-464 History and Philosophy of Science 4C 136-465 History and Philosophy of Science 4D 136-499 M.A. Preliminary Examination—School of History and Philo- sophy of Science 136-601 M.A. School of History and Philosophy of Science 136-701 Ph.D. Department of History and Philosophy of Science

INDIAN STUDIES 141-111 Bengali 1 141-211 Bengall 2 1 41 -21 2 Introductory Sanskrit (Half-subject) 141-101 Indian Studies 1A 576 Subjects and Codes

141-201 Indian Studies 28 (Pass) (available in 1979 and alternate years) consisting of two half-subjects chosen from 141-021 Modern Indian Political Thought 141-022 Classical Indian Thought 141-023 Modern Indian Literature. 141-261 Indian Studies 2B (Honours) (available in 1979 and alternate years) consisting of 141-027 Advanced study in Indian Civilization 2A and two half-subjects chosen from 141-021 141-022 141-023 141-028 Advanced study in Indian Civilization 26. 141-301 Indian Studies 3В (Pass) (available in 1979 and alternate years) consisting of two half-subjects chosen from 141-031 Modern Indian Political Thought 141-032 Classical Indian Thought 141-033 Modern Indian Literature 141-361 Indian Studies 3В (Honours) (available in 1979 and alternate years) consisting of 141-037 Advanced Study Indian Civilization 3A and two half-subjects chosen from 141-031 141-032 141-033 141-038 Advanced Study Indian Civilization 38. 141-202 Indian Studies 2C (Pass) (available in 1978 and alternate years) consisting of two half-subjects chosen from 141-024 Sanskrit & Prakrit Literature 141-025 Indian Art & Architecture 141-026 Islam in India 141-262 Indian Studies 2C (Honours) (available in 1978 and alternate years) consisting of: 141-027 Advanced Study in Indian Civilization 2A and two half-subjects chosen from 141-024 141-025 141-026 141-028 Advanced Studies in Indian Civilization 26 141-302 Indian Studies 3C (Pass) (available in 1978 and alternate years) consisting of two half-subjects chosen from 141-034 Sanskrit & Prakrit Literature 141-035 Indian Art & Architecture 141-036 Islam in India 141-362 Indian Studies 3C (Honours) (available in 1978 and alternate years) consisting of 141-037 Advanced Study in Indian Civilization ЭА 577 Faculty of Arts

and two half-subjects chosen from 141-034 141-035 141-036 141-038 Advanced Study in Indian Civilization 38 141-461 Indian Studies 4 (Honours) 1 41 -499 М.А . Preliminary Examination—School of Indian Studies 141-601 М.A. School of Indian Studies 141-701 Ph.D. Department of Indian Studies

INDONESIAN AND MALAYAN STUDIES 146-101 Indonesian and lalayan Studies 1 146-201 Indonesian and laloyan Studies 2 (Pass) 146-210 Indonesian Language 2 146-020 Indonesian History 2 (Half-subject) 146-021 Indonesian Politics 2 (Half-subject) 146-022 Indonesian Anthropology 2 (Half-subject) (not available 146-023 Indonesian Sociology 2 (Half-subject) J In 1978) 146-202 Indonesian History and Politics 2 (Pass) 146-203 Indonesian Anthropology and Sociology 2 (Pass) (not available in 1978) 146-301 Indonesian and lalayen Studies 3 (Pass) 146-310 Indonesian Language 3 146-030 Indonesian History 3 (Half-subject) 146-031 Indonesian Politics 3 (Half-subject) 146-032 Indonesian Anthropology 3 (Half-subject) І (not available 146-033 Indonesian Sociology 3 (Half-subject) in 1978) 146-034 lodern Indonesian Writers 3 (Half-subject) 146-311 Indonesian andialayan Studies 3A (not availaЫe in 1978) 146-302 Indonesian History and Politics 3 146-303 Indonesian Anthropology and Sociology 3 (not available in 1978) 146-261 Indonesian and Malayan Studies 2 (Honours) 146-361 Indonesian and Malayan Studies 3 (Honours) 146-461 Indonesian and Malayan Studies 4 146-499 М.A. Preliminary Examination—School of Indonesian and Malayan Studies 146-601 М.А . School of Indonesian and Malayan Studies 146-701 Ph.D. Department of Indonesian and Malayan Studies INTERDISCIPLINARY STUDIES 100-461 Interdepartmental Programme in Eighteenth Century Studies 100-462 Interdepartmental Programme in Religious Studies 100-463 Interdepartmental Programme in Recent Social Theory 100-464 Interdepartmental Programme in Drama 100-466 Interdepartmental Programme in Problems of Peace and Con- flict 100-468 Interdepartmental Programme in European Romanticism 100-200 Classical Social Theory 2 (Pass) 100-260 Classical Social Theory 2 (Honours) 100-300 Classical Social Theory 3 (Pass) 100-360 Classical Social Theory 3 (Honours) Each grade 2 subject consists of two half-subjects and each grade 3 subject consists of three half-subjects chosen from the following: 578 Subjects and Codes

171-021 Introduction to Classical Social Theory (compulsory half-subject) 166-020 Classical Theory and Culture Change 168-021 Individualism 161-021 Classical Philosophical Texts in Social Theory 161-022 Analytical Social Theory 161-023 Justice and Social Structures

ITALIAN

149-001 Italian Prep 149-101 Italian 1 149-102 Italian fA 149-201 Italian 2 (Pass) 149-202 Italian 2A (Pass) 149-203 Italian 2Z (Pass) 149-261 Italian 2C (Honours) 149-262 Italian 20 (Honours) 149-301 Italian 3 (Pass) 149-361 Italian 3A (Honours) 149-362 Italian 38 (Honours) 149-461 Italian 4A 149-462 Italian 4В 149-499 M.A. Preliminary Examination—School of Italian Language and Literature 1 49-60 1 M.A. School of Italian Language and Literature 149-701 Ph.D. Department of Italian

LANGUAGE CENTRE 102-301 French Reading Course 102-302 German Reading Course English for Foreign Students

MATHEMATICS (Refer to details of subjects for full information) 618-011 Mathematics 1A: This comprises either the units: 618-131 Analysis 618-132 Algebra and Geometry or the unit: 618-171 Calculus and Linear Algebra 618-012 Mathematics IB: This is the unit: 618-152 Differential Equations 61 8-01 5 General Mathematics (Social Sciences): This is the unit: 618-183 General Mathematics (Social Sciences), but other than Science students are to use the subject number 618-015. 618-185 Mathematics (vac. course) 618-021 Mathematics 2A (Pass): This comprises units: 618-271 Real Analysis 618-273 Linear Algebra 618-293 Vector Analysis and one other unit selected from the units listed below. The selection must be approved by the department of Mathematics.

579 Faculty of Arts

61В-261 Classical Mechanics 618-262 Continuum Mechanics 618-263 Optimization and Approximation 618-264 Linear Programming Models 618-265 Methods of Complex Analysis 618-272 Further Real Analysis 618-274 Algebra 618-294 Methods of Mathematics 618-022 Mathematics 28 (Pass): This is comprised of four units listed under Mathematics 2A (Pass) which have not been included in that subject. 618-031 Mathematics 3A (Pass): This comprises four, five or six (about 18 Science points) of the 300-level units listed below. The number will be four, five or six depending on the combination chosen, which combination must be approved by the department of Mathematics. Note that not all the units listed are available in any one year. 618-340 Combinatorics 618-341 Mathematical Logic 618-342 History of Modern Mathematics 618-343 Number Theory 618-344 Complex Analysis 618-345 Topology of Surfaces 618-350 Mathematical Modelling 618-351 Linear Programming 618-352 Programming Extensions 618-353 Optimization Methods 618-356 Variational Methods 618-360 Mechanics of Continuous Media 618-361 Systems Theory 618-362 Applications of Mathematics 618-363 Lie Groups and Applications 618-364 Thermodynamics and Statistical Mechanics 618-365 Mathematical Methods 618-371 Rings and Modules 618-372 Introduction to Metric Spaces 618-373 Linear Analysis 618-374 Ordinary Differential Equations 618-375 Partial Differential Equations 618-032 Mathematics 38 (Pass): This comprises four, five or six of the 300-level units listed under Mathematics ЭА (Pass), which have not been included in that subject. The number will be four, five or six (about 18 Science points) depending on the combination chosen, which combination must be approved by the department of Mathematics. 618-061 Mathematics 2A ( Нопоигs): This comprises units: 618-231 Real Analysis 618-233 Linear Algebra 618-253 Vector Analysis and one of the units listed below. The selection must be approved by the department of Mathe- matics. 618-232 Metric Spaces 618-234 Algebra 618-254 Methods of Mathematics 580 Subjects and Codes

818-261 Classical Mechanics 618-262 Continuum Mechanics 618-263 Optimization and Approximation 618-264 Linear Programming Models 618-265 Methods of Complex Analysis In addition, it is recommended that students should take one of the vacation projects: 618-227 Numerical Project 618-228 Number Theory Project 618-229 Spherical Trigonometry Project 818-062 Mathematics 28 (Honours): This comprises four of the units listed under Mathematics 2A (Honours), which have not been included in that subject. 618-071 This comprises four or five of Mathematics ЗА ( нопоигs): the units listed below. The number of units will depend on the combination chosen, which combination must be approved by the department of Mathematics. Note that not all the units listed are available in any one year. 618-301 Measure and Integration 618-302 Functional Analysis 618-303 Further Algebra 618-304 Ordinary Differential Equations 618-305 Partial Differential Equations 618-310 Complex Analysis 618-311 Smooth Manifolds 618-312 Algebraic Topology 618-313 Higher Algebra 618-314 Higher Analysis 618-315 Topology and Geometry 618-320 Further Mathematical Methods 618-321 Applications of Mathematics 618-322 Further Continuum Mechanics 618-323 Further Differential Equations 618-324 Mathematical Modelling 618-340 Combinatorics 618-341 Mathematical Logic 618-342 History of Modern Mathematics 618-343 Number Theory 618-344 Complex Analysis 618-345 Topology of Surfaces 618-350 Mathematical Modelling 618-351 Linear Programming 618-352 Programming Extensions 618-353 Optimization Methods 618-356 Variational Methods 618-360 Mechanics of Continuous Media 618-361 Systems Theory 618-362 Applications of Mathematics 618-363 Lie Groups and Applications 618-364 Thermodynamics and Statistical Mechanics 618-365 Mathematical Methods 618-072 Mathematics 3B (Honours): This comprises about five of the units listed under Mathematics 3A (Honours), which have not been included in that subject. The number of units will depend on the combination chosen, which combination must

581 Faculty of Arts

be approved by the department of Mathematics. Note that not all the units listed are available in any one year. 618-400 Mathematics 4 618-602 M.A. School of Mathematics 618-701 Ph.D. Department of Mathematics

MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES 617-101 Mathematical Sciences 1 E 617-103 Mathematical Sciences 1G 617-201 Mathematical Sciences 2E 617-203 Mathematical Sciences 2G 617-301 Mathematical Sciences 3Е 617-361 Mathematical Sciences 3E (Honours) 617-303 Mathematical Sciences 3G 617-400 Mathematical Sciences 4E

MIDDLE EASTERN STUDIES 181-101 Arabic Prep 181-111 Arabic 1 181-211 Arabic 2 (Pass) 181-271 Arabic 2 (Honours) 181-311 Arabic 3 (Pass) 181-371 Arabic 3 (Honours) 181-471 Arabic 4 181-102 Hebrew Prep 181-121 Hebrew 1 181-221 Hebrew 2 (Pass) 181-261 Hebrew 2 (Honours) 181-321 Hebrew 3 (Pass) 181-361 Hebrew 3 (Honours) 181-461 Hebrew 4 181-131 Middle Eastern Studies 1 (The Ancient Middle East) 181-231 Middle Eastern Studies 2A (Pass) 181-232 Middle Eastern Studies 28 (Pass) Each of these two subjects consists of two of the following units: 181-001 The Judaea-Christian Middle East A (Pass) 181-002 The Islamic Middle East A (Pass) 181-003 The Modern Middle East (Arab States) (Pass) (available in 1979 and thereafter in alternate years) 181-004 The Archaeology of Palestine A (Pass) 181-291 Middle Eastern Studies 2A (Honours) 181-292 Middle Eastern Studies 28 (Honours) Honours courses in each of the four half courses (Pass) referred to above, namely 181-001, 181-002, 181-003, 181-004 will comprise the pass course plus additional Seminar work of up to one hour per week. An honours course will consist of two pass units plus Seminar work in each unit. 181-009 The Judaeo-Christian Middle East A (Honours) 181-010 The Islamic Middle East A (Honours) 181-011 The Modern Middle East (Arab States) (Honours) (available in 1979 and thereafter in alternate years) 181-012 The Archaeology of Palestine A (Honours) 582 Subjects and Codes

181-331 Middle Eastern Studies ЗA (Pass) 181-332 Middle Eastern Studies 38 (Pass) Each of these subjects consists of two of the units listed below: 181-005 The Judaeo-Christian Middle East В (Pass) 181-006 The Islamic Middle East В (Pass) 181-007 The Modern Middle East (Non-Arab States) (Pass) (available in 1978 and thereafter in alternate years) 181-008 The Archaeology of Palestine В (Pass) 181-391 Middle Eastern Studies 3A ( Нonours) 181-392 Middle Eastern Studies 38 (Honours) Honours courses in each of the four half courses (Pass) referred to above, namely 181-005, 181-006, 181-007, 181-008. Courses 181-009 and 181-010 are Honours courses with certain prerequisites. Two Honours courses comprise ONE Honours subject. 181-013 The Judaeo-Christian Middle East В (Honours) 181-014 The Islamic Middle East В (Honours) 181-015 The Modern Middle East (Non-Arab States) (Honours) 181-016 The Archaeology of Palestine В (Honours) 181-017 The Ancient Middle East—Akkadian Part I (Pass and Honours) 181-018 Introduction to the Semantics of Semitic Languages (Pass and Honours) 181-491 Middle Eastern Studies 4 181-103 Syriac Prep 181-141 Syriac 1 181-281 Syriac 2 (Honours) 181-381 Syriac 3 ( Нonours) 181-481 Syriac 4 181-499 M.A. Preliminary Examination--School of Middle Eastern Studies 181-601 M.A. School of Middle Eastern Studies 181-701 Ph.O. Department of Middle Eastern Studies

MUSIC 740-011 Music 1A (Late Renaissance and Baroque Music) 740-016 Music Performance 1A 740-021 Music 28 ( Pass) (Classical and Romantic Music) 740-026 Music 28 (Combined lonours Course) (Classical and Romantic Music) 740-031 Music 3C (Pass) (Ancient and Modern Music) 740-036 Music 3C (Combined Нonours Course) (Ancient and Modern Music) 740-046 Music 40 (Contemporary Music) 740-047 Music 4E (Research Method) 740-499 M.A. Preliminary Examination—School of Music 740-602 M.A. School of Music 740-701 Ph.D. Department of Music

PHILOSOPHY 161-101 Philosophy 1A 161-102 Philosophy 18 (Law and Philosophy) 161-103 Philosophy lC (Philosophy and Politics)

583 Faculty of Arts

161-200 Philosophy 2C Pass (Contemporary European Philosophy) 161-300 Philosophy 3C Pass (Contemporary European Philosophy) 161-201 Philosophy 2D Pass (Political and Social Philosophy) comprising units: 161-021 Classical Philosophical Texts in Social Theory 161-023 Justice and Social Structures 161-301 Philosophy 3D Pass (Political and Social Philosophy) 161-202 Philosophy 2E Pass (Ethics) 161-302 Philosophy 3E Pass (Ethics) 161-203 Philosophy 2F Pass (Formel Logic) 161-303 Philosophy 3F Pass (Formal logic) 161-204 Philosophy 2G Pass (Greek Philosophy) 161-304 Philosophy 3G Pass (Greek Philosophy) 161-205 Philosophy 2H Pass (Philosophy of Psychology) 161-305 Philosophy 3H Pass (Philosophy of Psychology) 161-206 Philosophy 2J Pass (Philosophy of Religion) 161-306 Philosophy 3J Pass (Philosophy of Religion) 161-207 Philosophy 2K Pass (Aesthetics)l 161-307 Philosophy 3K Pass (Aesthetics) f (not availaы e in 1978) 161-208 Philosophy 2L Pass (Epistemology, Logic and Methodology) 161-308 Philosophy 3L Pass (Epistemology, Logic and Methodology) 1 61 -209 Philosophy 2M Pass (Modern Philosophy) 161-309 Philosophy 3M Pass (Modern Philosophy) 161-210 Philosophy 2N Pass (Recent Philosophy) 161-310 Philosophy 3N Pass (Recent Philosophy) 1 61 -21 3 Philosophy 20 Pass (Medieval Philosophy) 161-313 Philosophy 30 Pass (Medieval Philosophy) 161-260 Philosophy 2C Honours (Contemporary European Philosophy) 1 61 -360 Philosophy 3C Honours (Contemporary European Philosophy) 1 61 -261 Philosophy 2D Honours (Political and Social Philosophy) 161-361 Philosophy 3D Honours (Political and Social Philosophy) 161-262 Philosophy 2E Honours (Ethics) 1 61 -362 Philosophy 3E Honours (Ethics) 161-264 Philosophy 2G Honours (Greek Philosophy) 161-364 Philosophy 3G Honours (Greek Philosophy) 161-265 Philosophy 2H Honours (Philosophy of Psychology) 161-365 Philosophy 3H Honours (Philosophy of Psychology) 161-266 Philosophy 2J Honours (Philosophy of Religion) 161-366 Philosophy 3J Honours (Philosophy of Religion) 161-267 Philosophy 2K Honours (Aesthetics)) 161-367 Philosophy 3K Honours (Aesthetics) (not avai!abie in 1978) 161-268 Philosophy 2L Honours (Epistemology, Logic and Methodology) 161-269 Philosophy 2M Honours (Modern Philosophy) 161-369 Philosophy 3M Honours (Modern Philosophy) 161-270 Philosophy 2N Honours (Recent Philosophy) 161-370 Philosophy 3N Honours (Recent Philosophy) 161-273 Philosophy 20 Honours (Medieval Philosophy) 161-373 Philosophy 30 Honours (Medieval Philosophy) 161-377 Philosophy 3D1 Honours (Classical Philosophical Texts) 161-278 Philosophy 2D2 Honours (Philosophy of Social Justice) 161-378 Philosophy 3D2 Honours (Philosophy of Social Justice) 161-281 Philosophy 2F1 Honours (Rudiments of Symbolic Logic 1) 161-382 Philosophy 3F2 Honours (Rudiments of Symbolic Logic 2) 161-383 Philosophy 3G1 Honours (Greek Philosophy: Unit 1) 161-384 Philosophy 3G2 Honours (Greek Philosophy: Unit 2) 584 Subjects and Codes

161-397 Philosophy ЗР1 Honours (Philosophical Problems) 161-398 Philosophy 3Р2 Honours (Logical Problems) 161-475 Philosophy 43 Honours (Philosophical Psychology) 161-476 Philosophy 4T Honours (Ethics) 161-477 Philosophy 4U Honours (Political Philosophy) 161-478 Philosophy 4V Honours (Kant) 161-479 Philosophy 4W Honours (Current Issues in Philosophy) 161-480 Philosophy 4X Нoпoигs (Philosophy of Knowledge and Ratio- nal Inquiry) 161-481 Philosophy 4Y Honours (Advanced Formal Logic) 1 61 -482 Philosophy 4Z Honours (Philosophy Special Thesis) 161-499 M.A. Preliminary Examination—School of Philosophy 161-601 M.A. School of Philosophy 161-701 Ph.D. Department of Philosophy

POLITICAL SCIENCE 166-101 Politics 1A 166-102 Politics 18 166-103 Politics 1C 166-201 Politics 2A (Pass) 166-261 Politics 2A (Honours) 166-301 Politics 3A (Pass) 166-361 Politics 3A (Honours) 166-202 Politics 28 (Pass) 166-262 Politics 28 (Honours) 166-з02 Politics 38 (Pass) 166-362 Politics 38 (Honours) The units of— Politics 2A and 26—Pass and Honours Politics зА and 38—Pass and Honours are listed below. Consult the details of subjects for full information. 166-001 American Politics end Society (Pass unit) 166-002 Problems of American Politics (Pass or Honours unit) 166-003 Western European Politics (Pass unit) 166-004 Indian Politics and Society (Pass unit) 166-005 Chinese Politics and Society (Pass unit) 166-006 Soviet Politics and Society (Pass unit) 166-007 Communist Political. Theory (Pass or Honours unit) 166-009 Political Development (Honours unit) 166-009 Stratification Power and Leadership (Honours unit) 166-010 Quantitative Methods in Political Research 166-306 Government and Society 3 (Pass) 166-366 Government and Society 3 (Honours) 166-203 International Relations 2 (Pass) 166-263 International Relations 2 (Honours) 166-303 International Relations 3 (Pass) 166-363 International Relations 3 (Honours) 166-305 Political Sociology 3 (Pass) 166-365 Political Sociology 3 (Honours) 166-204 Public Administration 2 (Pass) 166-264 Public Administration 2 (Honours) 166-304 Public Administration 3 (Pass)

585 Faculty of Arts

168-364 Public Administration 3 (Honours) 166-401 Politics 4A 166-402 Politics 48 166-499 M.A. Preliminary Examination—School of Political Science 166-601 M.A. School of Political Science 166-701 Ph.D. Department of Political Science 166-801 Diploma of Public Policy 166-811 Diploma of Public Policy Part 1 Consisting of 166-812 Recent Developments in Australian Public Policy 166-813 Political & Administrative Leadership & Public Policy 166-821 Diploma of Puь is Policy Part 2 Consisting of 166-822 Public Policy & Functional Programmes 166-823 The Analysis of Problems in Policy Making

PSYCHOLOGY 171-100 Psychology f 171-200 Psychology 2A Consisting of three of the following units (including at least one from each of Lists A and В ) and unit 241 (compulsory): 171-204 Language Acquisition (A) 171-205 Cognitive Development (A) 171-206 Affective and Social Development (A) 171-208 Language and Social Behaviour (B) 171-209 Information Processing (B) 171-210 Organizational Psychology (B) 171-213 Developmental Issues ( В ) 171-223 Interpretation of Social Research (B) 171-241 Quantitative Methods (Compulsory) 171-300 Psychology 3A consisting of the following units: 171-307 Personality integration 171-320 Psychosocial Theory 171-321 Methodology in Psychosocial Research (alternative to unit 334) 171-333 Psychology of Adjustment 171-334 Psychopathology A (Alternative to unit 321) 171-341 Measurement: Personality and Abilities 171-102 Behavioural Studies 1 171-203 Behavioural Studies 2 consisting of four of the following units: 171-204 Language Acquisition 171-205 Cognitive Development 171-206 Affective and Social Development 171-208 Language and Social Behaviour 171-209 Information Processing 171-210 Organizational Psychology 171-213 Developmental Issues 171-223 Interpretation of Social Research (Compulsory) 171-260 Psychology 2B (Provisional Honours) consisting of four of the following units including compulsory unit 263: 586 Subjects and Codes

171-212 Neuropsychology A 171-261 Perception A 171-263 Quantitative Methods B (Compulsory) 171-265 Information Processing B 171-266 Social Research Methods 171-267 Formal Models 171-360 Psychology 3 (Honours) 171-460 Psychology 4A (Honours) (full course) 171-461 Psychology 48 (Honours) (part course—year 1) 171-462 Psychology 4C (Honours) (part course—year 2) 171-360, 171-460 (and 171-461 and 171-462 together) consist of, inter alia, the following units: 171-383 Quantitative Methods C 171-388 Theory in Psychology A 171-389 Theory in Psychology B 171-391 Research Methodology Seminar (Double unit) and six units to be selected from the list below in consultation with the staff of the department, as an appropriate combination for the specialty group to which the student has been allocated on application. 171-363 Interaction in Groups 171-364 Psychology of Language A 171-365 Cognitive Processes 171-366 Information Processing 171-368 Cognitive Development B 171-369 Applied Personality Theory 171-370 Psychology of Language B 171-371 Perception B 171-372 Neuropsychology B 171-373 Human Performance 171-374 Psychophysics 171-376 Introduction to Simulation 171-377 Social Interaction Processes C 171-378 Introduction to Occupational Psychology 171-379 Interpersonal Processes 171-381 Psychology of Religion 171-382 Theories of Personality Change 171-385 Assessment 171-386 Models of Data in Social Science 171-387 Analysis of Categorical Data 171-392 Reading Course 171-393 Communication and Specific Learning Disorders 171-394 Psychopathology B 171-395 Mathematical Psychology 171-398 Psychology of Politics 171-397 Neuropsychology C 171-398 Psychology of Women N.B. Some of the above units may not be available and others may be added, in any particular year. Those that are to be available, together with suggested reading, will be listed in the departmental Manual before the end of the previous year. Numbers may have to be limited for any particular unit. 171-291 A Research Project to be commenced during the middle of third year and completed by the middle of fourth year.

587 Faculty of Arts

171-499 M.A. Preliminary Examination—School of Psychology 171-601 M.A. School of Psychology 171-701 Ph.D. Department of Psychology

RUSSIAN

176-001 Russian Prep 176-101 Russian lA (beginners' course) 176-103 Russian I 1 76-1 04 Russian Literature and Society 176-201 Russian 2A (Pass) (Syllabus as for 176-103) 176-203 Russian 2 (Pass) 176-204 Soviet Writers and Society (Half-subject) 176-211 Soviet Studies 2 (Units 176-204, 166-006) 176-301 Russian 3A (Pass) (Syllabus as for 176-203) 176-303 Russian 3 (Pass) Unit 1 176-204 Unit 11 1 Unit to be chosen from units for 176-362 176-263 Russian 2 (Honours) (Syllabus as for 176-203) 176-261 Russian 2A (Honours) (Syllabus as for 176-201) 176-262 Russian 2В (Honours) 176-266 Unit 1 Russian Language 176-267 Unit II Russian Literature 176-363 Russian 3 (Honours) (Syllabus as for 176-303) 176-361 Russian 3A (Honours) (Syllabus as for 176-301) 176-362 Russian 3В (Honours) consisting of two of the following units: 176-371 Advanced Syntax and Stylistics 176-372 History of the Russian Language 176-373 Comparative Slavonic Philology 176-374 Advanced Translation into Russian 176-375 Pre-nineteenth century Russian Literature 176-376 Nineteenth century Russian Literature—first half 176-377 Nineteenth century Russian Literature—second half 176-378 Twentieth Century Russian Poetry 176-461 Russian 4A (Honours) Three of the units listed under 176-362 176-462 Russian 48 (Honours) Two of the units listed under 176-362 176-499 M.A. Preliminary Examination—School of Russian Language and Literature 176-601 M.A. School of Russian Language and Literature 176-701 Ph.D. School of Russian Language and Literature

STATISTICS 619-100 Statistics IT which is composed of units: 619-101 Basic Statistics and Probability 619-102 Statistical Inference 619-103 Statistical Analysis 619-110 Statistics lA which is composed of units: 619-111 Introductory Statistics 619-112 Data Analysis 619-121 Introductory Statistics (vac. course) 619-122 Data Analysis (vac. course) 819-200 Statistics 2A which is composed of units: 619-201 Probability 588 Subjects and Codes

619-202 Statistical Inference 619-203 Statistical Analysis 619-210 Statistics 2B which is composed of units: 619-251 Statistics: Probability 619-252 Statistics: Statistical Inference 619-253 Statistics: Statistical Analysis 619-300 Statistics 3A Pass Course students enrol for five of the units listed below: 619-251 Probability 619-252 Statistical Inference 619-253 Statistical Analysis 619-314 Experimental design and data analysis 619-315 Distribution-free Methods 619-316 Sample Surveys 619-317 Time Series Analysis 619-318 Decision Theory 619-321 Stochastic Processes 619-322 Applied Stochastic Processes 619-331 Statistics Reading Project 619-361 Probability and Inference 619-363 Stochastic Models 619-364 Simulation Methods 619-360 Statistics 3H Honours Course students enrol for at least five units listed for pass course, 301, 311, 313 being compulsory, 321 should be taken by students Intending to take 400 level. In addition a special project (Unit 331 ) should be undertaken, and a written report of this work must be presented. 619-460 Statistics 4 A course of approximately 100 lectures with practice classes throughout the year, together with preparation of a thesis and a practical project. Units may be chosen from Statistics 400 level units and units in Statistics 300 not previously taken. To complete the honours course students must take a further 80-100 lecture hours, usually Mathematics, but units in other areas may be approved. 619-602 М.A. Statistics 619-701 Ph.D. Department of Statistics

SOCIAL STUDIES SUBJECTS 760-281 Social Biology (Arts course) comprising units: 760-283 Unit A—Health of a Community 760-282 Unit B—Human Sexuality 760-601 М.A. School of Social Studies

SCIENCE SUBJECTS

600-016 The Biology of Man. This is the subject 600-102, however Arts students are to use the code number 600-016. 600-002 Biology. This is the subject 600-101, however Arts students ere to use the code number 600-002.

589 Faculty of Arts

610-010 Chemistry 1 626-003 Geology 100 (Arts Students). This consists of the units 626-101 The Dynamic Earth 626-102 The Crystalline Earth 626-103 The Evolution of the Earth 626-112 Geological Processes and the Environment 640-012 Physics (Aas) Consisting of the units: 640-161 Mechanics & Properties of Matter 640-162 Electromagnetism & Thermodynamics 640-163 Modern Physics 640-198 Laboratory Work

M.A. PRELIMINARY EXAMINATION Departmental Code No.-496 Research Topic 1 Departmental Code No.-495 Research Topic 2 Departmental Code No.-494 Research Topic 3

COMPLEMENTARY COURSES

The following code numbers are to be used for subjects being taken at another University for credit towards the Arts degree at this University. 998-501 Complementary Course—Grade 1 level 998-502 Complementary Course—Grade 2 level 998-503 Complementary Course—Grade 3 level 998-504 Complementary Course—Grade 4 level

590

Brown Prior Anderson Pty Ltd 5 Evans Street Burwood 3125 THE UNIVERSITY OF MELBOURNE

FACULTY OF DENTAL SCIENCE

н д N Д в о о к, 1978

PUBLISHED BY THE UNIVERSITY STUDENT INFORMATION BOOKLET 1978 Students are reminded that information on matters of general concern, e.g., Fees, Enrolment, Examinations, Matriculation Roll, Student Membership Cards, Colleges and Halls of Residence, Financial Assistance, University facilities, etc., is to be found in the Student Information Booklet 1978.

In exceptional circumstances the Council is empowered to suspend subjects and to vary the syllabus of a subject. Details of any such alteration will be available from the appropriate Faculty or Board of Studies office and will be announced on departmental notice-boards. TABLE OF CONTENTS FACULTY OF DENTAL SCIENCE 4

TEACHING AND RESEARCH STAFF 5

CHAPTER 1. Important Dates Bachelor of Dental Science: Applications, Course Commencement, Timetables 9 Master of Dental Science 9 Principal Dates 1978 10

CHAPTER 2. Courses Available Bachelor of Dental Science, Master of Dental Science, Doctor of Philosophy and Doctor of Dental Science 11

CHAPTER 3. Advice to Prospective Students Bachelor of Dental Science: Special Course Requirements, Preparatory Studies 12 Master of Dental Science 12 Doctor of Philosophy 15 Doctor of Dental Science 15

CHAPTER 4. Admission to Bachelor of Dental Science Course in 1978 University General Principles of Selection for First-Year Courses 16 B.D.Sc. Quotas for 1978 17 Special Faculty Principles of Selection 18 Notification 18 Photographic Record of Students 18 Dental Gowns, Deposit for Instruments 18

CHAPTER 5. List of Subjects with Code Numbers Bachelor of Dental Science 19 Master of Dental Science 19

CHAPTER 6. Course Requirements Lectures, Passing by Years, Examinations, Practical Work 20

CHAPTER 7. Dental School and Dental Hospital Services Common Rooms, Telephone, Rules 21

CHAPTER 8. Scholarships, Bursaries, Prizes and Financial Assistance Entrance Awards 23 John Iliffe Scholarships, Undergraduate Prizes 23 Student Financial Aid Officer 24 Financial Assistance from Trust Funds 25

CHAPTER 9. Details of Subjects and Books B.D.Sc., Div. 1 26 B.D.Sc., Div. 2 29 B.D.Sc., Div. 3 32 B.D.Sc., Div. 4 36 M.D.Sc. 43

CHAPTER 10. Regulations B.D Sc. - Reg. 3.41 48 M.D.Sc. - Reg. 3.42 49 D.D.Sc. - Reg. 3.43 50 Ph.D. - Reg. 3.60 50 Examination of Theses for Higher Degrees - Reg. 4.6 54

APPENDIX. Continuing Education Courses 55 FACULTY OF DENTAL SCIENCE

Dean: PROFESSOR READE Deputy Dean: Dr J. K. HARCOU RT Assistant Dean: Dr M. J. A. CAMPBELL The Vice-Chancellor Professors and Chairmen of Departments: Dr D. M. CALDER PROFESSORLOVELL PROFESSOR CAMERON Dr W A. McDOUGALL PROFESSOR G. CAMPBELL Dr C. A. M. MAURITZEN PROFESSOR CHRISTIE PROFESSOR PITTARD PROFESSOR DARIAN-SMITH PROFESSOR RAND PROFESSOR DAVIES PROFESSOR RAY Dr C. G. DENNIS PROFESSOR SPICER PROFESSOR EWING PROFESSOR STOREY Dr B. T. 0. LEE Readers: Dr B. G. RADDEN Senior Lecturers: Mr J. P. S. CAMPBELL Mr A. S. MALCOLM Mr K. D. B. FAULKNER Dr H. J. ORAMS Mr H. I. GILL Dr W. RALPH Mr R. H. HAMMOND Ms A. A. VERNIE КS Mrs A. LEONG MR V. C. WEST Dr H. A. McINTOSH Mr F. A. C. WRIGHT Appointed Annually by University Council: Dr J. BASSER Mr G. R. DICKINSON Dr V. BREMNER MR J. V. RASMUSSEN Mr R. M. COOK Mr R. C. TAYLOR Senior Dental Professional Officer of the Royal Dental Hospital of Melbourne Dr J. DAWKINS Nominated Annually by the Committee of Management of the Dental Hospital: Mr G. W. WEST Nominated Annually by the Dental Board of Victoria: Mr P. R. FINCH President of the Australian Dental Association (Victorian Branch): Mr D. C. LOADER Appointed by Graduate Committee: Mr K. JOHNSON Appointed by the University Council on the recommendation of the Faculty being Teachers in the University: Mr V. C. AMERENA Mr D. HAY Dr R. C. AUGUSTYN Mr I. H. JOHNSON Mr B. D. BOWDEN Dr L. G. O'BRIEN Dr P. CAMPBELL Mr I. RUSSELL Mr J. A. CARROLL Mr M. H. SPRATLEY Dr M. H. D. CHENNELLS Dr H. SYMONS Mr G. ELLENDER Mr F. T. WIDDOP Dr M. FENNESSY Student Members: Mr A. P. BARRETT Mr D. CASPER (graduate) (undergraduate) Miss P. P. DURHAM (undergraduate) Assistant Registrar (Dental Science): Mr J. M. HOLLIDAY The address of the Assistant Registrar (Dental Science) is 711 Elizabeth Street, Melbourne, Victoria 3000.

4 DENTAL SCIENCE TEACHING AND RESEARCH STAFF

Staff are listed alphabetically within categories, not according to seniority. • Indicates part-time staff. t Indicates associated staff. CONSERVATIVE DENTISTRY Chairman of Department and Reader WALLACE ARTHUR MCDOUGALL, BSc DDSc lid MDSc Professor of Child Dental Health ELSDÖN STOREY, PhD DDSc Professor of Conservative Dentistry VACANT Senior Lecturers MELDRUM JAMES ARTHUR CAMPBELL, DDSI FRAODS RICHARD HENRY HAMMOND, BDS Lind. MDSc ALAN SCOTT MALCOLM, MDSc FRAODS HARRY ATHOL Mc1NTOSH, DDS Tor. BDSc ASJAALMAVERNIEKS,MDSc . FREDERICK ALLAN CLIVE WRIGHT, MDS Otago Senior Lecturer in Orthodontics VICTOR CHARLES WEST, DDO Glas. BSc MDSc DipQrth RCS FRHCDS Lecturers JOHN ANDREW GARR0LL, BDSc IAN HOWARD JOHNSON, MDSc GRAHAM ELLENDER, BDS Lind. MDSc Special Dental Clinical Tutors ANDREW JOHN SPENCER, BDSc 'SOPHIE FEIK, MDS Syd. • ROBERT ALLAN JACKSON, BDSc Senior Clinical Demonstrators 'ROBERT HUGH AITKEN, BDS Otago MDSc -VINCENT CONRAD AMERENA, MDSv FRAODS 'CORNELIUS JOSEPH ARMSTRONG, BDS Syd. DDSc DipQrth RCS FDSRCS 'FREDERICK CHARLES BARNETT, DDS Tor. MDSs FRHCDS 'JULIAN BASSER, BDS Syd. DDS Tor. FRHCDS 'JOHN WILLIAM 6ROWN8ILL, MDSc 'JOHN CAREY, BDSc 'RICHARD CORNELIUS CASE, DDSs FRHCDS 'ANDREW EDWARD CATTERM0LE, MSc Lind. MOSG 'TREVOR JOHN CHARLES CLARK, DipEd Monash BSc BDSc 'GERARD DAVID CONDON, BDSc 'DESMOND JOSEPH CRACK, BDSc Old ' PAMELA JANE CRAIG, MOSG 'GEORGE CAMPBELL GUMMING, BDSc -JAMES LEO CURTAIN, BDSc ' ERNST HEINZ ERRMANN, DDS Tor. DipEudo U.S.A. BDSc FDSRCS FRHCDS 'ROGER KINGSLEY HALL, MDSc 'JOHN ROBERT HEATH, MDSc 'GONG SIEW HUA, BDS Sing. 'STANLEY GEORGE JACOBS, BDSc FDSRCS Eng. DOrth RCS Eng. FACDS 'ROBERT DEANS KING, BDSc 'GEOFFREY McDONALD KNIGHT, BDSc MSC Lind. ' PAULJOHN LAGRAL, BDSc 'JOHN DENNIS McDONALD, BDSc DipQrth RCS FDSRCS FRHCDS 'CYRIL SYDNEY MARTIN, BDS Syd. DipPublleatth (Dent) Syd. FACDS 'RICHARD ALAN MAYHEW, BDSc 'JULIE CORINNE MORRIS, BDSc 'LEONARD AUSTIN NASH, BDS Syd. MDSc FACDS 'LLOYD GEORGE O'BRIEN, DDS Tor. MDSc FRHCDS 'RAIN PAPLI, BDS Adel. MSC Lind. MDSc 'MARGARET PRESTON, BDSc 'STEPHEN JAMES SHIELD, BSc Moпash BDSc 'BLAIR ALAN SHRlMPYON, MDS Otago FRHCDS 'VEERENDRA SINGH, BDSc 'VILKO SКACEJ, DDS Tor. BDSc FRRCDS 'PETER KEVIN SMITH, BDSc 'DONALD FRANCIS SPRING, DDSs FRAODS 'JOAN ELAINE STEEL, BSc Syd.

5 'BASIL IAN STEELE, BDSG 'BRUCE EMERY TAYLOR, BDSc 'ARTHUR EARLOW TELFORD, BDSG MSc Lind. FRACDS 'FRED TALBOT WIDDOP, BSc MDSc FRACDS 'GEOFFREY JOHN WYLIE, DDS Tor. BDSG FRACDS Graduate Research Assistant DAVID BEIGH70N, BSc

DENTAL MEDICINE AND SURGERY Chairman of Department and Professor PETER CLARENCE READE, MDS PhD Adel. MDSc FDSRCS MRCPath FIAOS Reader in Oral Pathology BRYAN GRAY RADDEN, BDSc W.Aust. PhD Lind. MDSc FDSRCS MRCPath Senior Lecturers JOHN PRITCHARD STEWART CAMPBELL, MDSc FRACDS FlAOS HECTOR JOSIAH GRAMS, DDSc Lecturer KENNETH DAVID HAY, BDS Otago FDSRCS Edin. Lecturer in Anaesthesia 'JAMES MATTHEW BELL, MB BS DA FFARACS Lecturer in Radiology 'GEOFFREY WILLIAM SPURWAY, BDSc Special Dental Clinical Tutor ANTHONY PETER BARREI, BDSl Associate in Dental Medicine and Surgery 1PHILLIP RICHARD NEVILLE SUTTON, DDSc FRACDS Senior Clinical Demonstrators 'VINCENT CONRAD AMERENA, MDSc FRAODS 'ROBERT MALCOLM COOK, MDSc FRAcDS FDSRCS FICD 'JOHN DAWKINS, DDSc FRACDS 'OLYMPIA DE SOUSA, MB BS Poona 'WILLIAM CHARLES DWYER, MDSc FRAODS 'DAVID FEGENT, MB BS FFARACS 'JAMES EDWARD FIELD, MB BS FFARACS 'HARTLEV GIBSON, OBE BDSc LDS FICD 'JANICE GILLIES, MSc MB BS Syd. FFARACS 'HUGH GRAHAM GILMORE, MDSc 'JOHN LEWZS GODFREY, BDSc FDSRCS 'JOSEPHINE GOTTLICH, MB ChB DA Wrand 'KENNETH GRIGG, MB BS 'ROGER KINGSLEY HALL, MDSI FRACDS 'JOHN ALEXANDER LYLE IRWIN, BDSc 'DAVID WARD KENNAN, MDSc FRACDS 'BRUCE AARON LEVANT. MDSc FDSRCS 'WILLIAM IAN MacFARLANE, BDS laпc. MDSc FRACDS FDSRS 'JOHN BARCLAV MESSER, MDSc Old, 'MARY MORLAND, MB BS 'JOHN GRAHAM NIVEN, BDS Lund. 'NALLIAH PARAMANATHAN, BDS Sing. 'JOHN WILLIAM BIRCH PEDLEY, MDSc 'JOHN MALCOLM PIERCEY, MB BS DDSc ' KEITH POWLS, RDS She//. 'STEPHEN STEWART PRIME, BDS Вirm. ▪NEVILLE QUINN, MDSc MB BS FRCS FRcSFdiH. FRCS Ire. FRSRLS FRACDS 'JOHN BENNETT RICHARDSON, MB BS MDSc 'WILLIAM TYNDALE SMITH, LDSROS 'GEOFFREY WILLIAM TATE, BDSc 'RALPH COLEMAN TAYLOR, BDSc PhC 'JOHN ALBERT THORNE, BDSc 'WILLIAM WILLIAMSGN, MB ChB N.Z. FFARACS 6 Special Lecturers 'GERALD DAVID DALITZ, DDSc 'HUGH SIMPSON MILLAR, MB BS DLO FRCS FRACS 'JOHN WILLIAM ROSS, BSc

DENTAL PROSTHETICS Chairman of Department and Senior Lecturer CLIVE GEOFFREY DENNIS, DDSc Reader JOHN KENNETH HARCOURT, DDSc FRAODS Senior Lecturers KEITH D0UGLAS BURTON FAULKNER, MDSc Old FRACDS HARRY IAN GILL, MDSc FRAODS ALLIN LEONG, MDSc WILLIAM JAMES RALPH, DDSc FRACDS Lecturer MARTYN HARRY SPRATLEY, BDS Manc. Special Dental Clinical Tutor Vacant Associate: DERRICK ROY BEECH, MSc PhD Manc. CChem MRIC Senior Clinical Demonstrators 'VICTOR ALEXANDER BREMNER, DDS N'Westeru BDSC FRACDS -GERARD DAVID CONDON, BDSC 'BRENDAN FRANCIS DURKIN, BDSc 'RAYMOND MAXWELL VINCENT HALLAM, BDSC 'KENNETH JOHNSON, MDSc 'JAMES FREDERICK McCARTHY, BDS Syd. MDSc FRACDS 'STEWART ALEXANDER MITCHELL, BDSC 'LORETTA HARASH, MDSc 'NATALIE NEIöURGS, BDSc - BOYD FORSTER ORCHARD, ВDSc 'JOHN VINCENT RASMUSSEN, MDSc FRACDS 'JOHN RATTRAY, BDSC 'HOCK CHUAN SOH, MDS Sing. • 'ALEJZY SZWAJOER-PRICE, MDSc FRACDS 'SYDNEY CHARLES WARNEKE, MDSc FRACDS 'LAWRENCE RAY ALBERT WILLIAMS, DDS N'taestern BDSC FRACDS 'BRIAN GORDON WILSON, MDSc 'JOHN FREDERICKZETTL, HDSc FRACDS Special Lecturers 'DONALD BENREND, MDSc PhD 'LYNETTE GREULICH LAST

LECTURERS FROM OTHER DEPARTMENTS Lecturers in Anatomy BOYCE DARRYL BOWDEN, BDSc O"ld MDSc FDS DOrth RCS GEOFFREY CHARLES TREADGOLD KENNY, MB BS O'/d MSc Lecturer in Biochemistry ROBERT GORNELIS AUGUSTEYN, BSc PhD Old Lecturer in Histology JOHN OCHILTREE LAVARALK, MB BS PhD MCPA Lecturers in Human Behaviour DAVID JAMES DE LANCY HORNE, BA Adel. MPhil Lind. PhD MAPS ABPS. MURRAY OSBORNE McLACHLAN, BA N.Z. MB ChB Otago DPM Eng. MPhil Lond. MRC Psych.

7 Lecturer in Medicine HAROLD STANLEY SYMONS, MB BS MRCP Lind. MRACP Lecturer in Physiology MARY HAZEL DEAN CHENNELLS, BSc PhD Lind, Lecturer in Microbiology JOAN FORREST GARDNER, DPhil Oxoi. MSc Lecturer in Pathology PETER ELL'S CAMPBELL, MB BS FRCPA Lecturer in Pharmacology MAX RAPHAEL FENNESSY, BSc PhD Lecturer in Surgery IAN RUSSELL, MB MS FRCS FRACS Lecturer in Dental Materials SOPHIA MAJ, DipEng Warsaw MEngSc MIEAust

8 CHAPTER 1

IMPORTANT DATES

BACHELOR OF DENTAL SCIENCE

APPLICATIONS AND ENROLMENTS

Old Students 18 January 1978: Last day of enrolment for all students previously enrolled.

New Students Applications for admission into the course must be lodged with the Victorian Universities Admissions Committee, 1 1 Queens Road, Melbourne, 3004, on or before Friday, 28 October, 1977 for admission in 1978. Enrolments for new students, 14 December to 20 December 1977 and 5 January to 18 January 1978.

COMMENCEMENT OF COURSES

6 March for 1st, 2nd and 3rd years. For new students an orientation programme conducted by the Students Representative Council will be held during the previous week. Students in Division IV of the course will be notified of the commencement of clinical teaching.

TIM ETA В L ЕЅ

Detailed timetables for each year of the В .D.Sc course will be available from the Faculty Office before the beginning of the first term.

MASTER OF DENTAL SCIENCE

Applications for course selection in 1978 close on 9 December 1977 for Melbourne graduates; other graduates must apply by 28 October 1977 and all students including those selected in 1977 must apply for selection on a form obtainable from the Faculty Office. Applications for examination entrance are lodged at the Faculty Office on the prescribed form. The closing date for lodgement of examination entries is on 15 September. The examinations commence 9 October.

9 PRINCIPAL DATES, 1978

Students in 4th Div. of the course will be notified of the commencement and termination dates of clinical teaching.

MARCH 1 Wednesday Executive Committee. 6 Monday First Term Commences for 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th Div. B.D Sc. 8 Wednesday Faculty of Dental Science. 24 Friday Easter recess commences. Faculty Office re- opens Wednesday 29 March. APRIL 25 Tuesday Anzac Day (University holiday). 26 Wednesday Faculty of Dental Science. MAY 13 Saturday First Term ends. JUNE 5 Monday Queen's Birthday (University holiday). 6 Tuesday Second Term commences. JULY 5 Wednesday Faculty of Dental Science. 30 Monday Last day of entry for Annual Examinations. AUGUST 9 Wednesday Presentation of Student Projects. 12 Saturday Second Term ends. SEPTEMBER 4 Monday Third Term commences. 15 Friday Last day of entry for examinations for M.D.Sc. Degree OCTOBER 4 Wednesday Faculty of Dental Science. 9 Monday Examination for M.D.Sc. begins. 21 Saturday Third Term ends. 30 Monday Fourth Term begins (ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS). NOVEMBER 24 Friday Last day for lodgement of M.D.Sc. Theses for examination. 29 Wednesday Faculty of Dental Science. DECEMBER 8 Friday Last day of lodgement of applications for 1979 for entrance and continuation of Mas- ter of Dental Science course.

13 Wednesday Board of Review interviews. Last day of lodgement of applications for entrance into second or later years from students not in the course. 1 6 Saturday Fourth Term ends. M.D.Sc. course ends. NOTE: Labour Day, Melbourne Show Day and Melbourne Cup Day are not University holidays. See also Students' Information Booklet 1978.

10 CHAPTER 2

COURSES AVAILABLE

BACHELOR OF DENTAL SCIENCE The first degree course is of five years' duration. First Division consists of a basic science course designed to give candidates the knowledge to undertake the dental subjects in later years. The Fourth Division of the course is primarily clinical in content and applies the knowledge learnt in earlier Divisions to the practice of dentistry. Graduates are trained to enter private practice, hospitals service, the armed services or government health services.

MASTER OF DENTAL SCIENCE This course is designed for full-time study and all candidates will be required to do some research and submit a thesis on the results of their investigation. It is particularly suitable for those planning to enter an academic or research career.

DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY Courses towards this degree are available within the Faculty.

DOCTOR OF DENTAL SCIENCE This is the senior degree obtainable in the Faculty of Dental Science. It is gained only by submission of a thesis approved by the Faculty. The Assistant Registrar (Dental Science) should be consulted as to the form of application.

11 CHAPTER 3

ADVICE TO PROSPECTIVE STUDENTS The degree of Bachelor of Dental Science of the University of Melbourne is recognized by the Dental Boards of all Australian States and by the General Dental Council of the United Kingdom. The holder may apply for registration as a dentist, without further examination, anywhere in Australia, its Territories, in Britain, and in former British Commonwealth countries who accept qualifications recognized by the General Dental Council. Registration may also be granted in some other countries subject to entry requirements and those of the registering authorities.

BACHELOR OF DENTAL SCIENCE SPECIAL COURSE REQUIREMENTS In addition to satisfying the University entrance requirements, candidates must also have satisfied the special course requirements prescribed. For the B.D.Sc. course these requirements comprise passes at the Higher School Certificate Examination in English, Chemistry and either Physics or Biology or a branch of Mathematics. In special cases candidates may be given special treatment as regards prerequisites. Inquiries in such cases should be made to the Assistant Registrar (Dental Science) as soon as the results of the Higher School Certificate Examination are published. (See also Special Faculty Principles of Selection on p. 18.) PREPARATORY STUDIES In the year prior to the Higher School Certificate, students should include the following: 1. English 2. A subject from the Language/History group 3. Chemistry 4. Physics 5. A branch of Mathematics 6. Student's own choice, preferably a non-scientific subject. A pass in this subject is non-essential for university entrance purposes. Intending students are advised to include Chemistry. Physics, and a branch of Mathematics. The purpose of taking a branch of Mathematics is to obtain the mathematical background necessary to deal with Physics at the Higher School Certificate and first year stages. For students who are not mathematically inclined, Mathematics A may be considered to provide the minimum background knowledge. Otherwise, Mathematics I should prove adequate. There appears to be no necessity for students to take both Mathematics I and Mathematics — Il. Instead of taking these two branches of Mathematics it is desirable that another non- scientific subject be taken to avoid disadvantages of over-specialization at this stage. For the Higher School Certificate Examination, students should include the following: 1. English 2. Chemistry 3. Physics or a branch of Mathematics 4. Biology 5. Own choice, although a pass in one only of 4 and 5 is required to satisfy university entrance requirements. English and Chemistry are compulsory; one of Physics, Biology or a branch of Mathematics must also be passed. Students who wish to include a branch of Mathematics as an aid to Physics, are advised to take General Mathematics. Students are strongly advised to include Physics and Biology as students who gain a high pass at the Higher School Certificate Examination can apply for an exemption from the requirements to enter and pass the First Division of the course.

MASTER OF DENTAL SCIENCE The M.D.Sc. course is designed to take cognizance of the increased growth of dental knowledge and the changes in practice which are accruing. Candidates may proceed to gain the M.D.Sc. by submission of a thesis and by examination. The objectives of the M.D.Sc. course are to enable a candidate to achieve an advanced level of knowledge and competence in a branch of dental science by means of a prescribed course of study and a supervised research project. An organized course of lectures and seminars, to supplement, not supplant, the independent

12 work of the candidate is provided. This will enable him to improve the quality of his independent work, while extending and deepening certain areas of knowledge that cannot be developed in undergraduate courses. It has, for example, become clear that advanced work in some aspects of clinical dental science is an essential element of postgraduate training and that this work is best pursued in close association with training in research methods leading to the passing of the appropriate examinations in the chosen subjects. A candidate may elect to pursue a course in which the major emphasis would be on either: (i) formal study with clinical and/or laboratory work, or (ii) research. The Faculty's "Board of Graduate Studies" will approve through the appropriate department(s) suitable courses and the appointment of supervisor(s) for the candidate's approved research project. The course of study for a full-time candiate shall continue for two years. Part-time candidates will be required to complete an equivalent course, provided that they enrol for not less than four sessions per week, when the course will normally take a minimum of four years to complete. Candidates passing through Royal Dental Hospital House Surgeon/Registrar posts will require a minimum of three years to complete the course. Academic staff in junior positions will be given the opportunities equivalent to Royal Dental Hospital House Surgeon/Registrars. The Board of Graduate Studies approves on behalf of Faculty the proposed course study for the M.D.Sc. degree. Admittance to examinations will only be permitted to candidates who have been certified by the Faculty as having completed the prescribed course. Supervisors will be required to submit annual reports on candidates' work. The M.D.Sc. course for a candiate may be terminated at any time should the Board of Graduate Studies consider the candidate's progress to be unsatisfactory. For the nature of the thesis, see Chapter 9 ("Details of Subjects").

RULES 1. The Faculty has adopted strict rules governing the selection of candidates and those wishing to enrol must lodge with the Assistant Registrar (Dental Science) the relevant application form. Candidates already accepted by the Faculty must obtain permission to continue in the course each year. 2. Candidates who wish to proceed with major emphasis on research must be able to show evidence of potential research ability and Faculty requires applications to be supported by the chairman of the appropriate department. Such candidates are advised to consult the Assistant Registrar (Dental Science) regarding the form of their application before making a formal submission to the Board of Graduate Studies. 3. Faculty has agreed that a candidate who has not been recommended for immediate enrolment may be admitted on the recommendation of the chairman of the appropriate department as a preliminary candidate. A course of further study and reading will be prepared for any such candidate to enable him to re-submit his application. 4. Faculty has agreed that any applicant not permitted to enrol should be permitted to place his application directly before Faculty. 5. Candidates proceeding under clause 3 must submit to the Assistant Registrar (Dental Science) by the prescribed date their proposed course of study and reading, approved by the chairman of the appropriate department, together with an application to be enrolled as a preliminary candidate.

DEPARTMENT OF CONSERVATIVE DENTISTRY

Chairman of Department: Dr W. A. McDougall Within the department of Conservative Dentistry candidates may study for the master's degree in one of the following subjects: Child and Preventive Dentistry, Periodontics, Orthodontics, Conservative Dentistry. Candidates may be required to participate in other relevant courses of study in the University of Melbourne and will be required to discuss the nature of their proposed course of study with the chairman of the department at least six- twelve months prior to enrolment. Candidates will be expected to have a knowledge of recent advances in the subject, and to undertake a research project during the course of study and submit a thesis as part of the examination.

13 Child and Preventive Dentistry A course of advanced study and research relating to the prevention and correction of dental disorders particularly in children. The course will consist of lectures, tutorials, assignments, clinical and laboratory demonstrations, practical work and research.

Periodontics A course of advanced study and research relating to the nature and treatment of disorders of the tooth-supporting structures and the relationship of these to other dental and systemic conditions. The course will consist of lectures, tutorials, assignments, clinical and laboratory demonstrations, practical work and research.

Orthodontics A course of advanced study and research relating to the development of normal and abnormal skull growth and occlusion, and the prevention, interception and correction of dento-facial abnormalities by orthodontic means. The course will consist of lectures, tutorials, assignments, clinical and laboratory demonstrations, practical work and research.

Conservative Dentistry A course of advanced study and research relating to the conservation of teeth, with particular reference to restorative science. The course will consist of lectures, tutorials, assignments, clinical and laboratory demonstrations, practical work and research.

DEPARTMENT OF DENTAL PROSTHETICS

Chairman of Department: Dr C. G. Dennis Apart from teaching all aspects of prosthetic dentistry the department is also responsible for the courses in Dental Materials Science.

Dental Prosthetics The course is designed to give a thorough understanding of the anatomy, physiology and histo-pathology of the structures involved in speech and mastication. Particular attention is paid to muscle action, mandibular movement and the forces developed during normal chewing. The stability of the dental arch is studied in relation to tooth movement and the supporting structures of the periodontal ligament and the alveolar bone. Students are introduced to advanced methods of treatment in the following fields: partial dentures and precision attachments; full dentures and face bow registrations: immediate dentures; implant dentures; oral rehabilitation; temporomandibular joint dysfunction; intra- and extra-oral appliances for the correction of facial and other defects; cleft palate management and associated speech problems; speech in general; appliances for spastic and paraplegic patients; anodontia and partial anodontie; the management and treatment of children's prosthetic problems; geriodontics. After completing the above students may either continue a general course of advanced study or elect to proceed further in certain areas selected from those previously considered. All students are given training in research methods and introduced to research work at present being undertaken in the department. Students wishing to proceed to the degree of M.D.Sc. by thesis are given suitable topics for investigation which will occupy them for approximately two years.

Dental Materials Science This is a service subject to all branches of dentistry and as such the course of study involves fundamental concepts relating to the structure of matter and the relationship between atomic arrangements and the behaviour of materials. On this basis is built an understanding of materials in the oral environment as well as providing consideration relating to the selection of materials. Biological factors as they relate to the use and selection of those materials used in the different facets of dentistry are also considered. Research activity in both the fundamental and applied aspects of dental materials is in progress and in this field training in research methods and projects for further investigation are readily available.

14 DEPARTMENT OF DENTAL MEDICINE AND SURGERY

Chairman of Department: Professor Peter C. Reade Excellent facilities are available in this department for students planning to proceed to a master's degree in Dental Science in Oral Surgery or in Oral Pathology and Oral Medicine. At present courses in each of these areas are conducted each year. The department is fortunate to have a large collection of Oral Pathology material and shares with the Royal Dental Hospital of Melbourne, modern theatre and ward facilities for Oral Surgery. Master's candidates can approach a proposed course of study in one of three ways: 1. Those candidates who are accepted into the Royal Dental Hospital of Melbourne's house surgeon/registrar positions can apply to proceed to the degree by majoring in Oral Surgery in conjunction with course work in subjects such as anatomy, pathology and microbiology and in addition preparing a report on the results of an approved investigation. The normal time to complete this course will be 3 years.

2. Those candidates who plan to study full-time are required to spend a minimum of 2 years in the department engaged (a) in a major research project with some course work pertinent to the project. A thesis will be submitted for examination, or (b) in a clinical study in the general area of Oral Surgery or Oral Pathology with pertinent course work. Examination will be by written papers, viva voce and clinical examinations and by the presentation of a report on a particular aspect of the clinical study. 3. Part-time students may proceed to the degree as in 2 above spending a minimum of 4 sessions/week during the clinical year for a minimum of 4 years. Intending candidates must consult the chairman of the department as early as possible— preferably a year before it is intended to commence a course of study so that detailed planning of course and project together with grant applications can be adequately arranged. Laboratory and clinical facilities are also available for graduates planning to undertake a research project for a doctor of Philosophy or doctor of Dental Science degree and intending candidates are invited to discuss their plans with the chairman of the department. Other graduate research programmes are availabIe in the disciplines of Oral Anatomy, Oral Histology and Oral Embryology, which may lead to either a master's degree by thesis or a doctor of Philosophy. In addition to research projects carried out by candidates for higher degrees, places are available for career scientists supported by grant giving bodies.

DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY This degree is primarily for full-time research workers and is under the control of the Professorial Board. However, part-time candidates may be admitted if they comply with the rules laid down by the Board. Intending candidates should consult the chairman of the department in which they may wish to work, and the Secretary for Graduate Studies.

DOCTOR OF DENTAL SCIENCE Candidates for this degree must be bachelors of Dental Science of at least four years' standing, and must normally have passed the examination prescribed for the degree of master of Dental Science or have had a thesis accepted for the degree. The examination is by thesis, which must in the examiners' opinion, make 'an original and substantial contribution to some branch of Dental Science'.

15 CHAPTER 4

ADMISSION TO В .D.Sc. COURSE IN 1978

GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF SELECTION FOR FIRST-YEAR COURSES

Selection Committee The selection committee for each course shall consist of the Dean of the Faculty or the Chairman of the Board of Studies concerned and such other members as may be approved by the Professorial Board on the recommendation of that Faculty or Board of Studies. If any member of a selection committee is unable to act, the Chairman of the Professorial Board may approve the appointment of a substitute, on the recommendation of the Dean of the Faculty or the Chairman of the 3oагd of Studies concerned. Each selection committee shall have power to reach decisions on a majority vote and shall report its decisions to the Professorial Board as soon as possible. Such report shall include a list of those applicants who were selected and enrolled. Applications Applicants for selection in a quota must submit applications on the prescribed form by the date set down in the list of Principal Dates — the Friday nearest 1 November. No application for selection lodged after the due date shall be considered unless the selection committee concerned is satisfied that special circumstances exist justifying the Iate application. Persons of aboriginal extraction seeking admission to the University will, if they so wish, be considered by the Professorial Board under Regulation 1.1.2. Persons wishing to be considered under this regulation should apply to the Registrar. Selection 1 . Each selection committee shall be responsible for selecting, up to the number fixed by Council. those applicants who are considered most likely to pursue successfully the course concerned.

2. (a) Selection shall be based primarily on academic merit as judged by reference to results in the Victorian Higher School Certificate Examination. Provided that the qualifications of the applicants who have not attempted the Victorian H.S.C. Examination shall be equated as far as possible with the H.S.C. Examination. (b) Selection committees may also take into account (i) The results of any subsequent examinations attempted. (ii) The age of applicants when attempting the examination under consideration. (iii) Any illness, war or military service, or other serious cause, as a result of which the studies or performance of an applicant have, in the opinion of the committee, heen hampered. (iv) Physical handicaps or defects. (v) The number of years spent preparing for the Victorian Higher School Certificate Examination. This is to be considered only where the original scoring puts a candidate who did not sit in his first year of preparation for the H.S.C. in a marginal position in the order-of-merit list. (vi) Information revealed by such interviews as the selection committee may conduct. (vii) Any other factors approved by the Professorial Board and the Council on the recommendation of the Faculty or Board of Studies concerned. (c) Headmasters' reports shall not be taken into consideration, except in cases of illness or where an applicant has applied for a place in the succeeding year's quota. (d) No weight shall be given to the order of an applicant's course preferences, i.e., a first preference of one applicant is not to rate above a lower preference of another candidate with a higher selection score.

3. In assessing academic merit as judged by reference to results in the Victorian Higher School Certificate Examination, the formula adopted by the Victorian Universities Admissions Committee shall be used. Provided that: (i) Prerequisites approved by the Professorial Board and the Council may be included in the "best four subjects'.

16 (ii) Where prerequisite subjects must be included in the basic quota score, an applicant who has had more than one sitting at the Higher School Certificate Examination shall be credited with the best of his prerequisites from any sitting, with the proviso that, in order to be credited with the marks of a prerequisite taken at any sitting, a candidate must have passed in three subjects other than English at that sitting. (iii) Special debits and bonuses may be applied if stated in special principles of selection recommended by a Faculty or Board of Studies and approved by the Professorial Board and the Council. (iv) A selection committee shall have the right to consider an applicant's record as a whole in deciding between candidates near the borderline.

4. Under-age applicants in the selection range must be interviewed by or on behalf of the selection committee concerned before being selected.

5. In the absence of special reasons, applicants for admission to a quota who have not yet attempted a university course shall be preferred to graduates.

6. The percentage of overseas applicants admitted to any course should not normally exceed by more than 10 per cent the annual average percentage of such students admitted to that course over the past three years. No overseas applicant shall be selected in preference to an Australian applicant of equal or superior merit. ('Overseas' means a student whose home is overseas and who either has presented for the Victorian Higher School Certificate Examination or has been admitted ad eundem statum ) 7. If an applicant is not selected for the course of his first choice, his application must be considered for the course of his second and, if necessary, subsequent choice and he must be selected in preference to any other applicant of inferior academic merit.

8. An order of merit list shall be prepared according to the above principles, and places up to the number fixed by the Council shall be filled in order from this list. Reservation of places in quotas Places in the succeeding year's quota may be reserved for such applicants and in such numbers as may be decided by the Faculty or Board of Studies in accordance with its principles of selection on request for applicants in the top 80 per cent of those whose marks are above the cut-off point for admission to the quota concerned and, if there are special reasons, for applicants in the lower 20 per cent. Students accepted for fixed courses Once a student is accepted for a fixed course (that is, one for which there are no alternative subjects) and if he is not later prevented by failure from continuing in the course, the University must provide facilities for the student to complete the course as planned, shou Id he so request.

В .D.Sc. QUOTAS FOR 1978 The following shall be admitted in 1978: 1. First Division A total of fifty students. 2. Second Division (a) All who pass the First Division examination in 1977. (b) Students granted exemption from First Division of the course and thus admitted directly to the Second Division by virtue of Regulation 3.41. (c) Up to two students who have completed an approved science course, approved by the Faculty, and after selection. (d) Students permitted to repeat Second Division in 1978. (e) Students permitted to resume the course after leave of absence. If the total of the foregoing does not reach forty-eight then, at the discretion of Faculty, the following may be admitted (after selection on the basis of academic merit, if selection proves necessary) to bring the year to forty-eight. (f) Technically qualified transfers (from other courses in the University), and (g) Technically qualified ad eundem statum candidates (from other approved Un- iversities). Third and Fourth Divisions ad eundem statum admittances are not to exceed two in both divisions.

17 SPECIAL FACULTY PRINCIPLES OF SELECTION 1. Prerequisites Candidates must achieve a grade D or higher in English, Chemistry and one of Physics. Biology or a branch of Mathematics. The mark obtained in Chemistry and the best mark obtained in at least one of Physics or Biology or a branch of Mathematics will be included in the "best four" subject marks used to calculate an applicant's quota score. Candidates must also achieve a grade D or higher in English and, subject to the general principles of selection on the basis of academic merit, the selection of candidates whose home is overseas or outside Victoria will take into account the availability to the applicants of dental education in their own country or state, and the existence of any agreed programmes of assistance to overseas countries. 2. Debits A debit may be applied in a particular subject or subjects at the discretion of the Selection Committee if it appears that a quota score has been unduly influenced by a result in a native language.

3. Interviews Applicants may be required to present themselves for an interview before selection. It is essential that applicants are available for an interview during February or they will diminish their chances of selection. NOTIFICATION (a) All offers will be made by mail. (b) All applicants must attend in person for the acceptance of an offer. If an applicant does not appear when requested, his offer will lapse and will be offered to the next applicant on the waiting list. PHOTOGRAPHIC RECORD OF STUDENTS All students admitted to the first or later years of the Dental Science course in 1978 are required to be photographed for the purpose of records. Directions for having photographs taken will be given to students following enrolment. DENTAL GOWNS Students in Third and Fourth Divisions are supplied with dental gowns from the Central Linen Service on the basis of one clean gown exchanged for one dirty gown up to thrice weekly. DEPOSIT FOR INSTRUMENTS Students in the Second Division are required to pay to the Faculty Office a deposit of $25 for the use of instruments and a locker key during the course. This deposit will be returned at the end of the course, less any charge for instruments lost or damaged other than through fair wear and tear.

18 CHAPTER 5 LIST OF SUBJECTS

Code No. SUBJECT TITLE BACHELOR OF DENTAL SCIENCE First Year 610-003 CHEMISTRY 640-005 PHYSICS 600-003 BIOLOGY Second Year 516-028 ANATOMY 536-029 PHYSIOLOGY 521 -029 BIOCHEMISTRY 516-029 HISTOLOGY 233-201 ORALANATOMY & HISTOLOGY 241-201 DENTAL MATERIALS SCIENCE Third Year 531-039 PATHOLOGY 526-039 MICROBIOLOGY 241 -302 DENTAL PROSTHETICS A 236-301 CONSERVATIVE DENTISTRY A 534-039 PHARMACOLOGY Fourth Year 233-402 ORAL MEDICINE & ORAL SURGERY A 553-411 MEDICINE 556-411 SURGERY 241-403 DENTAL PROSTHETICS B 236-402 CONSERVATIVE DENTISTRY B Fifth Year 233-503 ORAL MEDICINE & ORAL SURGERY B 233-505 RESEARCH ELECTIVE—DENTAL MEDICINE & SURGERY 241 -504 DENTAL PROSTHETICS B 241 -505 RESEARCH ELECTIVE—DENTAL PROSTHETICS 236-503 CONSERVATIVE DENTISTRY B 236-505 RESEARCH ELECTIVE—CONSERVATIVE DENTISTRY

MASTER OF DENTAL SCIENCE 241-601 DENTAL PROSTHETICS 241 -602 DENTAL MATERIALS SCIENCE 236-601 CHILD & PREVENTIVE DENTISTRY 236-602 PERIODONTICS 236-603 ORTHODONTICS 236-604 CONSERVATIVE DENTISTRY 233-601 ORAL PATHOLOGY & ORAL MEDICINE 233-602 ORAL SURGERY 233-603 ORALANATOMY, ORAL HISTOLOGY & ORAL EMBRYOLOGY

19 CHAPTER 6

COURSE REQUIREMENTS

LECTURES

The syllabus for each course of lectures and for practical work is shown in the Details of Subjects (see Chapter 9). The lecture theatres and practical classrooms for First Year will be announced at the introductory lectures to be held on Tuesday, 28 February, 1978, in Lecture Theatre 1 in the Dental School, commencing at 9.30 a.m. Lectures for dental subjects and Pathology, Medicine, Pharmacology and Surgery, are held in the Dental School and a schedule of theatre allocation will be placed on the notice board outside the lecture theatres. Lectures in medical subjects are held in the department concerned or the Medical School lecture theatres, and each medical department notice board should be consulted for the lecture theatre and practical class rooms assigned. PASSING BY YEARS All students in the В.D.Sc. course are required to be full-time students and each year of the course must be passed as a unit before a student may enter a higher year. At the discretion of Faculty credit may be granted for subjects when a student is required to repeat a year. Exemption from part or whole of the requirements in any subject may be granted by a department on special consideration. EXAMINATIONS For examinations, special examinations, special consideration, and leave of absence. see the Student Information Booklet 1978 and the Regulations in Chapter 4 of the 1977 University Calendar. For progress in course, including unsatisfactory progress and suspension, see the Student Information Booklet 1978 and Regulations 2.5 and 2.5А in the Calendar. PRACTICAL WORK The following applies for practical work in all subjects for the В.D.Sc. degree: (a) Students are required to attend practical, clinical, seminar and tutorial classes and to complete all assignments as shown in the details of subjects. Unless excused on account of special circumstances, a candidate who fails to complete set work in any subject will be liable to disqualification in that subject. Candidates so disqualified will usually be notified in writing by the Faculty before the written examination, but the Faculty is not bound to give such notification. (b) Students must reach an adequate standard in practical work in order to complete the year's work. It is stated in the details of individual subjects whether the candidate's standard is to be assessed by means of a practical examination. and/or the work submitted by him during the year. Students must not expect to be notified before the written examination as to whether their practical work has been judged satisfactory or not. (c) Assignments (e.g. essays, laboratory and other reports), not submitted to the lecturer or demonstrator in charge by the due date may mean failure to have practical work in that subject counted as completed.

20 CHAPTER 7

DENTAL SCHOOL SERVICES AND RULES

COMMON Rooms

The Dental School provides a common room for students (in the basement) and locker rooms with associated facilities for male students (in the basement) and female students (on the 3rd floor). Students can obtain a locker for their use whilst in the Dental course on application to the Faculty Office. (The deposit for a key is included in the deposit for use of instruments— see p. 18.) The Dental School and Dental Hospital do not permit alcoholic liquor to be brought into or consumed in these areas. No non-dental students or other outsiders may be introduced into the students' common room without express permission.

TELEPHONE Inwards calls may be made to the extension in the male students' common room. No outward calls may be made through the Dental School switchboard. Urgent messages for students can be left at the Faculty Office, and they will be posted on the Faculty notice-board. .

DENTAL SCHOOL RULES FOR STUDENTS 1. For students attending clinical and pre-clinical areas specific rules are set out on noticeboards.

2. Normal timetable hours fall between 9 a.m. to 1 p.m. and 2 p.m. to 5 p.m. on Monday, Tuesday, Thursday and Friday, and 9 a.m. to 1 p.m. on Wednesday. Students are not allowed in departmentaI laboratories or clinics before 8.30 a.m. or after 5.30 p.m.

3. The laboratories and clinics are closed for maintenance on Wednesday afternoons. Students wishing to work in the departments on a Wednesday afternoon or at any time outside the above hours must first obtain permission from the chairman of the appropriate department. .

4. Students must wear an approved gown or laboratory coat when attending or working in the clinics or laboratories and the standard of dress and deportment in clinical precincts will at all times be consistent with that required for proper patient care.

5. Students must observe all safety precautions as detailed by the Safety Officers of the Royal Dental Hospital of Melbourne and the University of Melbourne which are posted on departmental notice-boards.

6. Students are permitted to carry out clinical work only on registered patients of the Royal Dental Hospital of Melbourne. This work must be approved and carried out under supervision and with the authority of the Demonstrator in charge of the patient.

7. No drugs, materials or instruments may be brought into the department for use in either the clinics or laboratories unless approved by the department. Students wasting drugs or materials will be required to make up the deficiency.

8. All dental technicians' laboratories, both University and Hospital, are out of bounds to students.

9. It is the responsibility of each student to keep his/her laboratory bench area clean and to dispose of all unwanted materials at the end of each session.

10. Clinical records, treatment cards, radiographs or any material relating to a patient's treatment or history must not be removed from departments by students.

21 11. Instruments, clinical or laboratory materials associated with patient treatment or laboratory exercises, either finished or unfinished, must not be taken out of departments or from pre-clinical or clinical areas without the permission of the appropriate chairman of department.

12. Clinical record books, schedules of requirements or other records of a student's work must not be removed from departments. The special instructions in relation to each year of the course as detailed in the appropriate departmental record book or schedule of requirements must be observed.

13. Students may only enter the theatre and ward areas when rostered to do so with the express permission of the duty Clinical Demonstrator'.

14. Smoking is not permitted in departments.

15. Students must wear a name badge when attending or working in the clinics or laboratories.

16. Students must vacate the premises by 6 p.m. on each evening except on library nights or when given special permission to work in a department by the head of that department. On library nights all areas of the building except the access route to the library and the library are out of bounds to students.

17. Students must also observe the detailed regulations governing conduct in each dental department as found on the department notice-board.

18. Students who will be absent from clinical classes must report their absence to the appropriate appointments clerk in the departments concerned.

Demonstrator means any memberof the academic staff. either full-time or part-time. of thedepanments of the Faculty of Dental Science 22 CHAPTER 8

SCHOLARSHIP, BURSARIES, PRIZES AND FINANCIAL ASSISTANCE

The awards summarized in the following list are available to Dental students. The approximate value of each award is given, together with the office at which full information may be obtained. ENTRANCE AWARDS (available for duration of course) For awards not restricted to Dental students see the 1977 University Calendar. For the Tertiary Education Assistance Scheme, see the Student Information Booklet 1978. JOHN ILIFFE SCHOLARSHIPS IN DENTAL SCIENCE These scholarships are provided under the Will of the late John I line. Five scholarships, each of the value of approximately $235, may be awarded each year. Conditions of Award: 1. A scholarship may be awarded in each year of the course to the student most proficient in the work of the whole of that year. Selection is made on results obtained at the Annual Examinations.

2. The Faculty of Dental Science is the judge for the award of these scholarships.

3. In awarding the scholarships, preference is given to candidates who are most proficient in the subjects referred to by the Testator in his Will as Practical Dental Surgery and Practical Dental Prosthetics'.

4. Should no candidate be adjudged of sufficient merit in any one year of the course, the scholarships for that year are not awarded. SUMMARY OF AWARDS The table following gives a summary of awards other than those described above which are available to Dental Science students at undergraduate level. More precise information concerning these and other awards may be obtained from the 1977 Calendar or from the person indicated in the table.

23 UNDERGRADUATE

Calendar Reference or Field Title and Approximate Value Information Source Conservative Frances Gray Prize R.6.72 Dentistry Medal plus $30 ( арргох.) (38) Dental Anatomy E. B. Nicholls Prize R.6.72 $17 (арргох.) (57) Dental Materials Alan Docking Prize Assistant Registrar Science $30 (Dental Science) Dental Prosthetics B William J. Tuckfield Prize Medal R.6.72 plus books and/or instruments (27) $53 (approx.) Dental Prosthetics Tuckfield-Shepherd Prize R.6.72 $84 (approx.) (66) Division Ill Bertha Bennett Scholarship $200 Dental Science Dental Board of Victoria Prize i Assistant Registrar Orthodontics Mervyn Townsend Memorial (Dental Science) Prize $30 Periodontology Australian Society of Periodontology 1 540 Periodontics James Monahan Lewis Prize R.6.72 $31 (арргох.) (63) Oral Surgery William Leslie Elvins Prize R 6.72 Medal and 547 (approx.) (49)

STUDENTS' LOAN FUND See the Student Information Booklet 1978. STUDENT FINANCIAL AID OFFICER Bursaries are awarded on the basis of both academic merit and financial need. Applications should be lodged with the Student Financial Aid Officer before 15 March Student loans. approved on the basis of financial need, are also available. Further information and application forms may be obtained from Student Financial Aid Officer, 272 Faraday Street, Carlton (extension 6053). (See also the Student Information Booklet 1978.)

24 FINANCIAL ASSISTANCE AVAILABLE TO STUDENTS FROM TRUST FUNDS

Value University Award per annum Available to Calendar Applications s Reference Close

Aitchison Undergraduate Scholarships 140 Undergraduate students who have completed one year of a R6.46 15 March (male applicants only) University course.

T. T. Dick Bursaries 100 Undergraduate Students. R6.54 15 March (max.) Lucy Knapp Bursaries Proportion Undergraduate Students. R6.143 15 March of net annual income T. E. & E. R. Moran Bursaries approx. Students recommended by the governing bodies of the R6.40 15 March 180 Methodist Ladies' College and Wesley College. Edwin Nonus Smith 215 Undergraduate Students. R6.91 15 March Scholarship Glasson Williams Bursary 208 Undergraduate Students. R6.145 15 March

OTHER AWARDS

Saltau-Price Memorial approх. Students enrolled for any year of a University course. 15 March Scholarship 200 Preference will be given to the descendant of the late Henry and Anne Saltau and to Students who have attended Warrnambool High School. CHAPTER 9

DETAILS OF SUBJECTS

DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF DENTAL SCIENCE Vacation Reading Students are advised that they are expected to use a considerable part of the summer and spring vacations for reading purposes. In some cases specific references are made in the following details; in others, a list of suitable books will be posted on the appropriate notice- board; in all cases the lecturers concerned should be consulted. Lectures, Practical and Research Work The provisions in the details as to the scope of the subject and the numbers of lectures, tutorials, demonstrations, practical clinical and research work are the maxima that will be given and may not be exceeded without the specific approval of the Professorial Board. Students are required to attend not less than 75 per cent of lectures, seminars, tutorials and practical work and must attend for clinical instruction as rostered. Students who are unable to fulfil these requirements may apply to the Faculty for Special Consideration. Examinations All examinations may include viva voce and practical tests. Books The books marked herein with an asterisk are essential books, which students should possess.

FIRST DIVISION

610-003 CHEMISTRY

A course of four lectures per week in first term, three lectures per week in second term with three hours of laboratory work throughout both terms. A knowledge of Chemistry to the standard prescribed for the Higher School Certificate Examination will be assumed in the course. SYLLABUS A general course in chemistry is given covering physical, inorganic and organic chemistry. Particular emphasis is given to those areas relevant to Dental Science. The course covers the following topics: Atomic structure and bonding in diatomic molecules; Spectroscopy and structural methods; Bonding in polyatomic molecules and hybridization; Coordination chemistry, stereochemistry, equilibria, bonding and structure; Thermodynamics; Oxidation-reduction, free energy, entropy; Acid-base theory, buffers, pH, Henderson-Hasselbalch; Colligative properties - FPj. , BF1 , osmosis; Theory of gases and phase equilibria; Colloids and surface chemistry; Chemical kinetics; Conductance and electrolytes; Solubility equilibria; Structure, properties and stereochemistry of hydrocarbons; Organic acids and bases; Mechanisms of organic reactions. LABORATORY WORK Three hours per week, covering general inorganic, physical and organic chemistry, the experiments being chosen to illustrate and amplify the theory course. The practical classes for this subject are taken in the Chemistry Laboratory of the Redmond Barry Building. The department supplies all the apparatus. Books (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Stranks D R et al Chemistry, A Structural View, M U P. The content of lectures will be based on the assumption that all students have read Stranks et al. 26 (b) Prescribed textbooks: Aylward G H & Findlay T J V eds: S/ Chemical Data, 2nd ed Wiley 1974 Snyder C H Introduction to Modern Organic Chemistry, Harper & Row 1973 liver N H Department Publications, 1977 ed: Experiments in Inorganic Chemistry; Experiments in Physical Chemistry; Experiments in Organic Chemistry. EXAMINATION

There will be two 3- hour examinations. These examinations may be held either at the end of the year or in stages throughout the year. Students will be informed of the form of the examination at the start of the year. The practical work of each student is assessed continually throughout the course, and is taken into account in determining the success of candidates in the examination.

640-005 PHYSICS A course of three lectures per week, with laboratory work, throughout the year. A knowledge of Physics to the standard of the Higher School Certificate examination will be assumed.

SYLLABUS Mechanics. Units and dimensions. Kinematics and dynamics. Equilibrium under the influence of forces, animal mechanics. Gravitation. Work, energy, power. Rotational motion, centrifuges. Conservation laws. Properties of Materials. Elastic behaviour, microscopic and macroscopic view points. Strength of materials, fractures. Hydrostatics, hydrodynamics. Surface tension. Optics. Nature of light. Wave and ray optics of plane and spherical surfaces. Mammalian eye. Optical instruments, microscopy, photography, spectrometers. Polarization. Interference and diffraction, resolving power. Lasers. Electron microscope. Wave Motion and Sound. Simple Harmonic Motion, wave propagation. Doppler effect. Production and detection of sound: speech and hearing. Quality of sound, loudness, pitch. Ultrasonics. Thermal Physics. Measurement of heat and temperature. Thermal properties of materials: expansion, heat transfer, changes of phase. Metabolism and energy balance in animals. Kinetic theory and thermodynamics. Diffusion and Osmosis. Electricity and Magnetism. Electrostatic force. Conductors and insulators. Current Electri- city. Units, dimensions and measurement of electric quantities. Kirchoff's laws. Thermo electricity. Magnetism. Electromagnetic induction, diathermy. Simple alternating current circuits. Electromagnetic waves. Electronics. Semi-conductor diodes and transistors. Amplification, feedback and control. Thermionic emission. Photo-electricity. Electronic instrumentation. Atomic and Nuclear Physics. Structure of atoms and nuclei. Evidence for quantum behaviour. Spectra. X-rays: production and interaction with matter, biological applications. Radioactivity, tracer techniques, activation analysis. Biological effects of radiation, dosimetry. Accelerators, sub-nuclear particles. Computers. Types, methods of use, applications in the life sciences.

LABORATORY WORK Three hours per week. Laboratory classes may not proceed throughout the entire academic year. Attendance at practical classes is compulsory. The practical work of each student is examined continually during each term; records of his success in experiment and impressions of his work are kept. This information is taken into account in assessing the results (including the Class List) at the Annual Examination. An additional test in practical work may be given.

BOOKS .. MacDonald S G G & Burns D B Physics for the Life and Health Sciences, Addison-Wesley

EXAMINATIONS Two written papers for pass and honours combined — one during the year and one final, totalling three hours. Prescribed written work may form part of the final assessment.

600-003 BIOLOGY (DENTAL COURSE) A course of four lectures per week with demonstrations and practical work throughout the year.

27 SYLLABUS Cell physiology and cytology. An introductory treatment of the fundamental properties of cells: irritability, selective permeability, respiration, ingestion, synthesis and degradation of metabolically useful substances, excretion, mobility. A broad study of cell structure as determined by various techniques as applied to living and dead cells and tissues. A brief functional account of cytological structures involved in synthesis of proteins and high energy compounds, storage and transfer of genetic information, the removal of metabolic wastes, cell ageing and death. This will be followed by a more detailed study of general cytology and the histology and cytology of the epithelia, connective tissues, nervous tissues, muscle and the development of bone. Anatomy. A brief, introductory account of human, anatomical systems and their physiology will be given. This will be followed by a study of selected tissues of the human body and later introductory lectures on the anatomy of the nervous system. Evolution. Genetics and Ecology. A general account of evolution including the principle mechanisms responsible for speciation, selection, adaptation, races and species, convergence, modern views on fossil Hominids and the emergence of man. Elementary account of the evolution of the biosphere and energy sources. Photosynthesis, the energetic basis of life, origin of oxygen. Carbon path, ecosystems, ecological pyramids.

Human Behaviour A course of 25 lectures.

SYLLABUS Introduction. Including a brief history of Psychology. Introduction to methodological and statistical procedures. Psychological development of the human being from infancy to old age.

Motivation and personality. Review of findings on the nature of motivation, both from a comparative (ethological) and human point of view, extending to a consideration of the nature of human personality. Cognitive processes. Perception, remembering and forgetting, learning, intelligence, language and thinking. Social Psychology. This will cover a consideration of the individual and his social interactions and also discussion of the broad patterns of social and cultural influences in society.

LABORATORY WORK Practical laboratory and demonstration periods will be taken in conjunction with various sections of the course. Students will be notified at the beginning of the year when these periods will be held. Students should consult the notice-boards throughout the year for further information. Students should supply themselves with a set of approved dissecting instruments (see notice-board, Biological Laboratory, 4th Floor, Redmond Barry Bldg.), drawing books, slides and cover slips; box of tissues, drawing pencils, colour pencils, and a half-set of human bones.

BOOKS (a) Preliminary reading: (To be read before the beginning of the course). For those without Н .S.C. Biology: Sections 1, 2, 6, 7, 9, 10 and 11 in Biological Science — The Web of Life, 2nd ed Aust Acad of Sci. (b) Prescribed textbooks: de Beer G Homology. An Unsolved Problem, Oxford Biology Readers No 11. 0 U P 1971 'Clark W E LeGros The Tissues of the Human Body, 6th ed Oxford Clarendon Press 1971 'Gillie O The Living Cell, The World of Science Library, Thames & Hudson 1971 Hammersen F Sobotta/Hammersen Histology, Urban & Schwarzenberg 1976 'Hilgard E R Atkinson R C & Atkinson R Llntroduction to Psychology, 6th ed Harcourt Brace Jovanovich 1974 'Lindgren H C An Introduction to Social Psychology. 2nd ed John Wiley & Sons 1974 Thompson J S & Thompson M W Genetics in Medicine, 2nd ed Saunders 1973 (c) Prescribed laboratory manual: 'Aгеу L B Human Histology, 1st or later ed Saunders 1957

28 (d) Recommended for reference: Bloom W & Fawcett D W A Textbook of Histology, 9th ed W B Saunders Co 1962 Jacob S W & Francone C A Structure and Function in Man. Saunders 2nd ed 1970 Mowbray R M & Rodger T F Psychology in Relation to Medicine, 4th ed Livingstone 1974 Cunningham's Мanиаl of Practical Anatomy, 3 vols, 11th or subsequent ed 0 U P Gray's Anatomy, Descriptive andApplied. 35th ed Longmans 1973 Ham A W Histology, 7th ed Lippincott 1974 Porter K R & Bonneville M A An Introduction to the Fine Structures of Cells and Tissues, Lea & Febiger 1964 EXAMINATIONS Two written examinations will be held at the conclusion of the course covering all parts of the course other than Human Behaviour. One 1-hour written examination in Human Behaviour. (The mark for this examination will count as 25 per cent of the total Biology mark.) Practical tests may be held at the completion of sections of the work. One practical examination to be held at the conclusion of the course.

SECOND DIVISION

516-028 ANATOMY A course of lectures, demonstrations and practical work throughout the year during which the structure and organisation of all systems of the human body are studied; in particular detailed attention is given to the anatomy of the head, neck and thorax. While attendance at lectures is not compulsory, students are required to attend practical classes and demonstrations.

PRACTICAL WORK The head and neck, central nervous system and thorax of the human body are dissected; in addition, students are required to study prepared dissections in the Museum. Demonstrations are given on previously prepared material and radiographs. Note: Students are required to wear white coats in the Dissecting Room and must provide themselves with a set of dissecting instruments and a half-set of bones.

BOOKS (a) Prescribed textbooks: •Cunningham's Маnu аl ofPractica/Anatomy, vols I1 and Ill, 14th ed O U P •Cunningham's Textbook of Anatomy, 10th or subsequent ed 0 U P 1964 or 'Gray's Anatomy, Descriptive and Applied, 35th ed Longmans 1973 or Lockhart R D Hamilton G F & Fyfe F W Anatomy of the Human Body, 2nd ed Faber 1965 (b) Vacation reading: Hamilton W J Simon G & Hamilton S G Surface andRadiologicalAnatomy. 5th ed Heffer 1971 Sicher H Oral Anatomy, 5th ed Mosby 1970

EXAMINATIONS One 3-hour written paper and a viva voce examination.

233-201 ORAL ANATOMY & HISTOLOGY A course of lectures, demonstrations, seminars and practical sessions throughout the year.

SYLLABUS The embryology, development and growth of the cranio-cervical region. The developmental and molecular biology, human and comparative anatomy, histology and physiology of oral and dental tissues.

PRACTICAL WORK A course of laboratory exercises during the period of instruction.

29 Books (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Galton L The laboratory of the body, Pyramid New York N 2604 1972 (b) Prescribed textbooks: Downer G C Dental Morphology: An Illustrated Guide, Wright & Son 1975 'Gaunt W A et al Advanced Dental Nistol оду, Dent Prac Handbook No 6, 3rd ed Wright & Son 1976 'Scott J H & Symons N B B Introduction to Dental Anatomy, 7th ed Livingstone 1974 'Sperber G H Craniofacial Embryology, Dent Prac Handbook No 15, Wright & Son 1976 (c) Recommended for reference: Jenkins G N Physiology of the Mouth, 3rd ed Blackwell 1966 Kraus B S Jordan R E & Abrams L DentalAnatomy and Occlusion, Williams & Wilkins 1969 Moore K L The Developing Human, 1 st ed Saunders 1973 Sicher H & Bhaskar S N Orban's Oral Histology and Embryology, 8th ed Mosby 1976 Slavkin H C & Bavetta L A Developmental Aspects of Oral Biology, Academic Press New York London 1972 Wheeler R CDentalAnatomy, Physiologyand Occlusion, 5th ed Saunders Philadelphia 1974

EXAMINATION One 3-hour written paper and one 3-hour practical examination for pass and honours. The progress of each candidate will be assessed during the course and may be taken into consideration in the final examination. Candidates whose progress in the practical classes has been satisfactory may be exempted from all or part of the final practical examination. However, all candidates may be required to submit to additional tests, including viva voce and/or practical examination.

241-201 DENTAL MATERIALS SCIENCE A course of approximately 40 lectures, with demonstrations and laboratory work throughout the year. An introductory lecture may be given during Orientation Week, the time and place of which and other relevant matters will be posted on the faculty and departmental notice- boards.

SYLLABUS Structure; interatomic bonding; crystallography; crystal imperfections; polymers. Phase diagrams and their determination; mechanical testing and fabrication. Deformation; classification; elasticity; crystallography of deformation mechanisms (dislocations); yielding and work-hardening; annealing. Fracture: Griffith theory; brittle fracture in crystals; ductile/brittle transition; ductile rupture; creep and fatigue. Strengthening mechanisms: theoretical approach; applications. Solidification: liquids; homogeneous and heterogeneous nucleation; growth behaviour; ingot structure; polyphase solidification. Properties of castings: volume change; gas solubility; inclusions; grain structure. Joining of metals. Multiphase structures: binary and ternary systems; specific metals and alloys. The chemical nature and physical and mechanical properties of dental materials. Ceramics including dental porcelain, gypsum and gypsum products, silicate and zinc phosphate cements, polycarboxylate cements, zinc oxide and eugenol mixtures, casting investments. Polymers, denture base resins, filling resins, impression materials. Non-crystalline solids: waxes, cavity varnishes, shellac. Metals: silver-tin and high copper amalgams, cobalt chromium or chromium-based alloys, gold, gold alloys, metal-ceramic veneering, stainless steels, orthodontic wires. X-ray films. Corrosion.

LABORATORY WORK Experiments will be performed to examine the structure and properties of the above materials as prepared and used in the dental clinic and laboratory; the preparation of special trays, registration rims and the setting up of teeth on selected casts as an introduction to clinical procedures. Problems, weekly assignments and end of term essays will be set during the year. Detailed laboratory notebooks must be kept.

BOOKS (a) Prescribed textbook: 'Phillips R W Skinner's Science of Dental Materials, 7th ed Saunders 1973 or Greener E H Harcourt J K & Lautenschlager E P Materials Science in Dentistry, Williams & Wilkins 1972 (b) Recommended for reference: Anderson J N Applied Dental Materials, 4th ed Blackwell 1972

30 Peyton F A et a1 Restorative Dental Materials, 5th ed Mosby 1975 Wulff J ed The Structure and Properties of Materials, vols 1, I1 and 111, Wiley 1965 Chalmers B Physical Metallurgy, Wiley 1964 Guy A G Elements of Physical Metallurgy, 2nd ed Addison-Wesley 1959 Reed-Hill R E Physical Metallurgy Principles, Van Nostrand 1964 Van Vlack L H Elements of Materials Science, 2nd ed Addison-Wesley 1964 Chalmers B & Holland J Crystallography, a programmed Course in Three Dimensions, Appleton-Century-Crofts 1965 American Dental Association guide to Dental Materials and Devices, Am Dent Assoc, 7th ed 1974-75 and 8th ed 1976-78 Combe E C Notes on Dental Materials, 3rd ed Churchill Livingstone 1977

EXAMINATION One 3-hour written paper. At the discretion of the examiners the annual written paper may be replaced by or supplemented with end-of-term written examinations. The laboratory work of each student is examined continually throughout each term; assessments are made and records of work kept. Students must pass in both the practical and written sections of the examination. In addition, short end-of-term practical examinations may be given. Information obtained in this way determines whether a candidate passes or fails in the practical work and it is taken into account in awarding honours at the Annual Examination. One 6-hour or one 3-hour practical test may, at the discretion of the examiners, replace the end-of-term tests. The examination papers may include questions requiring a knowledge of the work of the previous year.

516-029 HISTOLOGY A course of approximately 25 lectures with laboratory work throughout the year.

SYLLABUS The microscopic structure and functional basis of structure of human tissues and organs with special reference to the primary tissues and the basic structure of cardiovascular lymphatic, endocrine, respiratory, digestive and urogenital systems and skin.

LABORATORY WORK Practical work in the recognition of tissues and organs. Two hours per week. A notebook for drawing is required (No. 10 or similar). Students are supplied with a set of slides and a microscope by the department. Microscopes must not be removed from the laboratory. S1 ides must be returned to the department on the day of the viva voce examination at the conclusion of the course. -

BOOKS (a) Prescribed textbook: ' Bloom W & Fawcett D Textbook of Histology, 9th or later ed Saunders or Ham A W Histology. 6th or subsequent ed Lippincott (b) Prescribed for laboratory work: 'Агеу L B Human Histology. 3rd ed Saunders 1968 EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. Viva voce examination.

521-029 BIOCHEMISTRY A course of one lecture per week and 2% hours practical work per week throughout the year.

SYLLABUS An outline of the structure-function relationships of lipids, carbohydrates, amino acids, proteins and nucleic acids, and of their principal metabolic reactions and interactions. Mineral metabolism, nutrition and the biochemistry of oral tissues.

PRACTICAL WORK Apparatus and a storage locker are supplied by the Biochemistry department. In addition, each student requires a name disc, a laboratory coat and a practical note-book (No. 3A from the University Bookroom is suitable). The course will include laboratory practice of some reactions and methods used in biochemistry. Experiments of dental interest will be included.

31 Books (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Rose S The Chemistry of Life. Penguin 1966 (b) Prescribed textbook: Conn E E & Stumpf P k Outlines of Biochemistry, 4th ed Wiley 1976

EXAMINATION Continuous assessment of practical work and lecture material during the year; one 2-hour written paper at the end of the year. Viva voce tests if required.

536-029 PHYSIOLOGY A course of two lectures per week throughout the year and 2% hours laboratory work per week.

SYLLABUS Physiology. Principles of physiological integration. The interface between tissue cells and the internal environment. Biophysics of excitable and contractile tissue. The physiology of mammalian organ-systems: circulation of blood. respiration, electrolyte balance, digestion and absorption, sensation and movement. The co-ordination of bodily functions by hormonal and neural mechanisms. Brain function and behaviour.

LABORATORY WORK Students should enrol for laboratory work in Physiology in room N313, department of Physiology, during the second last week of the long vacation. Laboratory experiments supplement the lecture course Details will be found in the laboratory manual available on enrolment. Students work in pairs for laboratory work and may nominate their partner for the year. Each student will require a white coat, a name tag. a set of good dissecting instruments and a roll of recording paper: details available on enrolment.

BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Clowes R The Structure of Life, Penguin 1967 Nathan P The Nervous System, Penguin 1969 Rose S The Chemistry of Life. Penguin 1966 Moss A The Body, Penguin 1968 (b) Prescribed textbooks: 'Vander A J Sherman J H Luciano D S Human Physiology. The Mechanisms of Body Function, 2nd ed McGraw-Hill 1975 or •Кeele C A Neil E Samson Wright's Applied Physiology, 12th ed 0 U P 1971 'Laboratory Manual—obtainable from the Physiology department—room N313

EXAMINATIONS Student assessment to be based on: (a) a mid-year examination (1'% hours) and an end-of-year examination (3 hours) (b) assignments related to laboratory classes/demonstrations. The relevant loading of the different factors fixed for assessing the student's understanding of physiology will be outlined at the beginning of the year and indicated in the laboratory manual.

THIRD DIVISION

526-039 MICROBIOLOGY A course of approximately 55 lectures and 35 hours practical work is oriented to the following objectives:

SYLLABUS 1. Ti give students a basic knowledge of micro-organisms and their role in human infection, with particular emphasis on the mechanism of microbial injury of hard and soft tissues of the oral cavity and respiratory tract. 2. To understand the principles of host resistance, immunity and hypersensitivity, the latter being especially significant in relation to antibiotics and other drugs that are used in dentistry. 32 3. To inculcate the concept of asepsis in dental practice by examination of the epidemiology of dental disease and the possible pathways of infection in dental practice. In respect to control, the methods for sterilization of dental equipment and disinfection of skin, mucous membranes and surgery fittings are evaluated. 4. To underline the guiding principles and calculated risks of chemotherapy, with special reference to prophylactic use of antibiotics in high-risk patients such as those suffering the effects of rheumatic fever or cardiac defects due to other causes. 5. To outline how microbiology may be used and mis-used in the diagnosis and management of dental diseases and the complications which may follow.

PRACTICAL WORK Practical work will include exercises directly related to the theoretical content.

BOOKS (a) Prescribed textbook: Nolte W A ed Ora/ Microbiology. 2nd ed Mosby 1973 or Briody B A & Gillis R E Microbiology апд Infectious Disease, McGraw-Hill 1974 (b) Recommended for reference: Fenner F and White D O Medical Virology, Academic Press 1970 MacPhee T ed Host resistance to commensal bacteria: The response to dental- plaque. Churchill-Livingstone 1972 Roitt I M Essentiallmmunology, Blackwell, 1971

EXAMINATION One 3-hour written paper. One 2-hour practical test or assessment on submitted written work. Viva voce examination in special cases.

236-301 CONSERVATIVE DENTISTRY A Conservative Dentistry includes the following subjects: Preventive Dentistry, Public Dental Health, Pedodontics, Orthodontics, Periodontics, Endodontics, Restorative Dentistry, Crown and Bridge Dentistry, and Clinical Conservative Practice. An introduction to these subjects is given in Conservative Dentistry A, in a course of lectures, demonstrations and seminars throughout the year with appropriate practical and clinical work. SYLLABUS LECTURES: A course of approximately 40 lectures covering: The scope of Conservative Dentistry and the need for a preventive approach to the management of dental diseases. Preventive Dentistry. Introduction to prevention of dental caries, periodontal diseases and malocclusion. Public Dental Health. Introduction to the concept of Public Dental Health and epidemiological methods. Pedodontics. Introduction to the management of the child patient. Orthodontics. Growth and development. Aetiology of malocclusion, Introduction to orthodontic techniques. Periodontics. The anatomy and physiology of the periodontal tissues in health and disease. The aetiology of periodontal disease. Examination of the periodontal tissues. Principles of treatment and prevention of periodontal disease. Treatment of chronic marginal gingivitis. Dental Caries. Aetiology of dental caries. Histological appearance and gross morphology of carious lesions. Diagnosis and treatment of dental caries and carious lesions. Restorative Dentistry. Rationale of cavity preparation. Use of metallic and non-metallic restorative materials. Reactions of the dental pulp to dental caries, cavity preparation, restorative materials. Radiography. The physics of X-ray production. Effects of X-rays on living tissues. Principles of taking and processing simple dental radiographs. Radiographic interpretation. Clinical Conservative Practice. History taking, examination, diagnosis, prognosis and treatment planning for the dental patient and the recording of this data. Accidents and emergencies in the dental surgery. Clinical deportment and patient management. LABORATORY WORK A course of approximately 140 hours with written and practical assignments on the initiation

33 and progress of dental caries and periodontal disease, the restoration of teeth with amalgam, silicate, resin and gold materials, the treatment of periodontal disease, and procedures to prevent dental disease. SEMINARS Approximately 10 seminars related to the syllabus commence in second term.

CLINICAL PRACTICE Approximately 40 hours of clinical instruction in examination, diagnosis, treatment planning and treatment of selected patients.

SATISFACTORY PROGRESS Students are required to attend the above lectures, seminars, laboratory and clinical practice sessions. Assessment of each student's progress will be made during the course. The attention of students is drawn to the section on Practical Work on page 21.

BOOK Eccles '.l D & Green R M The Conservation o1 Teeth. Blackwell 1973 •Gainsford I D silverArnalgamin Clinical Practice, 2nd ed John Wright 1976 Gilmore H W & Lund M R Textbook of Operative Dentistry, 2nd ed Mosby 1973 Greener E H Harcourt J K & Lautenschlager E P Materials Science in Dentistry, Williams & Wilkins 1972 Jenkins G N The Physiology of the Mouth, 4th ed Blackwell 1975 ' MacPhee T & Cowley G Essentials o/ Periodontology and Periodontics, 2nd ed Blackwell 1975 Manson J D Periodontics, 3rd ed Kimpton 1975 Phillips R W The Science o1 Dental Materials. 7th ed Saunders 1973 Seltzer S and Bender I B The Dental Pulp, 2nd ed Lippincott 1975

EXAMINATION One 3-hour written paper. One 2-hour practical examination. Candidates may be required to submit to further clinical, laboratory and/or viva voce examinations. Assessments of each student's work are also made throughout the division and are considered in assessing the final result.

241-302 DENTAL PROSTHETICS A A course of approximately 25 lectures and related pre-clinical and clinical studies throughout the year in accordance with the published time table.

SYLLABUS An introduction to methods of treatment; treatment planning; psychological problems; the sterilization of dental prosthetic materials and appliances, the applied anatomy of the oral cavity and associated structures; the selection of suitable methods and materials for impressions; registrations -vertical component and free-way space; tooth form in relation to aesthetics and mastication; factors involved in retention; the checking of wax trial dentures; the insertion of dentures; the aftercare of the patient; the periodontal membrane; results of tooth loss; an introduction to the development of articulators; the use of surveyors and the designing of partial dentures. A knowledge of the work of previous years is required.

PRE-CLINICAL Demonstrations, tutorials and practical work related to the treatment of partially and fully edentulous patients. Demonstrations of clinical investigations concerned with the physiology of occlusion and mastication-mandibular movement and occlusal form: masticatory efficiency and tooth contact; electromyography and muscle physiology.

CLINICAL Demonstrations closely related to the above syllabus, and the treatment of edentulous patients.

WRITTEN WORK Up to seven pre-clinical assignments and two essays will be set during the year.

B0O К5 (a) Prescribed textbook: 'Watt D M & McGregor A R Designing Complete Dentures, Saunders 1976 34 (b) Recommended for reference: Boucher C 0 Prosthodontic treatment for edernulous patients, 7th ed Mosby 1975 Fish E W Principles of Full Denture Prosthesis. 6th ed Staples 1964 Osborne J & Lammie G A Partial Dentures, 4th ed Blackwell 1974 Phillips R W Skinner's Science of Dental Materials, 7th ed Saunders 1973 Together with books from the previous year.

EXAMINATION One 3-hour written paper. A practical test not exceeding 10 hours to be held on two consecutive days. Records of the year's work (written, pre-clinical and clinical) are considered in assessing the final result.

ORAL PATHOLOGY Lectures given at varying times during the year and intended to serve as an introduction to the Oral Pathology section of Oral Medicine and Oral Surgery A are included in the lecture series given in General Pathology.

BOOKS See books prescribed in Division 4.

EXAMINATIONS To be held in fourth year. 531-039 PATHOLOGY A course of 40 lectures covering General Pathology and applied Special Pathology. Practical work during the year includes pathological histology and museum tutorials, with attendance at autopsy demonstrations during second and third terms. Students are supplied with slides.

BOOKS (a) Prescribed textbooks: Ogilvie R F Histopathology, 6th ed Livingstone 1962 'Walter J B Hamilton M C & Israel M S Principles of Pathology for Dental Students, 3rd ed Livingstone 1974 (b) Recommended for reference: Florey H General Pathology. 4th ed Lloyd-Luke 1970 Willis R A & Willis A T Principles of Pathology and Bacteriology, 3rd ed Butterworths 1972

EXAMINATION One 1-hour multiple choice written examination paper at end of second term. Continuous assessment of practical work during year and presentation of a completed practical book at viva voce examination at end of year. One 3-hour written paper; one 3-hour practical test (on macroscopic and microscopic specimens) and viva voce examination at end of year.

534-039 PHARMACOLOGY A course of 50 hours instruction. Of this, approximately 40 hours will be devoted to lectures. The remaining time will be divided between practical classes and tutorials. The first part of each tutorial will be used as a continuing assessment period.

SYLLABUS The course will be concerned with the general principles of pharmacology and with the mechanisms of action of drugs in common use in dentistry and medicine under the following headings: 1. Route of administration, absorption, distribution, metabolism and excretion of drugs. 2. Autonomic nervous system: anatomy and function; drugs affecting cholinergie and adrenergic mechanisms. 3. Drugs affecting the neuromuscular function. 4. Drugs used in cardiovascular therapeutics. 5. Autacoids: histamine, serotonin, polypeptides, prostaglandins. 6. Drugs affecting the central nervous system: anaesthetics, analgesics, psychotropics, etc. 7. Anti-inflammatory drugs.

35 8. Principles of selective toxicity. 9. Local anaesthetics. 10. Drugs affecting dotting mechanisms. 11. Drug interactions and toxicology.

BOOKS (a) Prescribed textbooks: Bowman W C & Rand M J Textbook o/ Pharmacology, Blackwell Scientific Publications 1977 Rand M J Raper C & McCulloch M W An Introduction to the Physiology and Pharmacology of the Autonomic Nervous System, rev 1st ed Aust Pharmaceutical 1973 'Laurence D R Clinical Pharmacology, 4th ed Churchill 1973 * Catyson R A & Spector R G Clinical Pharmacology in Dentistry, Churchill Livingstone 1975 (b) Recommended for reference: Goodman L S & Gilman A The Pharmacological Basis of Therapeutics, 5th ed Macmillan 1975 Goldstein A Aranow L & kalman S M Principles of Drug Action, 2nd ed Harper & Row 1974 MattiWdale's Extra Pharmacopoeia, 26th ed Pharmaceutical Press 1973

EXAMINATION A 114-hours written examination consisting of multiple choice type questions will be held halfway through the 2nd term. Marks allotted to this examination will be used in making the end of the year assessment. The final examination of one 3- hour written paper will consist of multiple choice type questions and short answer questions. Oral examinations may be required for some students, who will be notified after assessment of the written paper.

FOURTH DIVISION

RESEARCH PROJECTS In the Fifth Year of the course students must enrol for one of the following: (a) 241-505 Dental Prosthetics—Research Projects. (b) 233-505 Dental Medicine & surgery—Research Projects. (c) 236-505 Conservative Dentistry—Research Projects.

In the third term of Fourth Year students shall arrange themselves into groups of not more than five which association will continue for all purposes throughout the Fifth Year. Each group should elect a chairman. Faculty reserves the right to adjust the membership of a group when necessary. Each group is required to choose from the list published in the Dental School during third term, a research project for which approximately 100 time-table hours have been scheduled, and contact immediately the chairman of the appropriate department for further information in relation to supervisors and facilities. The duties of the supervisor shall include: (a) A discussion of the aims and objects of the project with the group. (b) Consulting with the groups at regular intervals. (c) Liaising with other departments in relation to equipment, services, etc. (d) Informing students of the requirements to submit written reports on the due date. Each report shall be submitted to the appropriate departmental office, two weeks before the end of third term and must be in a form suitable for typing with all pages, illustrations, etc., numbered and secured in a ring binder. The general format of reports must follow the rules for theses obtainable from the Faculty Library.

EXAMINATION The written report will be examined and candidates may be required to submit for an oral examination in relation to their work as embodied in the written report and assessed as meeting requirements for Research Projects or not meeting requirements.

36 553-411 MEDICINE A course of lectures and demonstrations throughout Fourth Year. SYLLABUS Health and disease. Old age. Beginnings of disease and early symptoms. Visceral reserve. General causes of disease. Nutritional factors in disease states. Psychological factors in disease states. Environment and disease. Endocrine factors in disease. The routine examination. Infectious diseases; nature, modes of infection. Prophylaxis and immunity. Sensitivity. Pyrexia. Principles of treatment of fevers. Septicaemia, pyaemia, toxaemia. Non- localizing infections B.C.C., typhoid, dysentery. The Streptococcal infections — tonsillitis, scarlet fever, rheumatic fever. Diphtheria. The Virus diseases — measles, rubella, glandular fever, smallpox, chickenpox, mumps. The Upper Respiratory Tract infections — coryza, influenza. The Neurotropic Virus — polio, herpes. Tuberculosis. Syphilis. Oral sepsis and the role of focal sepsis in systemic disease. Chemotherapy and antibiotics — principles of treatment with penicillins, sulphonamides, streptomycin, tetracyclines. Chloramphenicol and Erythomycin. The allergic reaction and allergic diseases — asthma, hay fever. Metabolic diseases — gout, diabetes, obesity. Nutrition and disease— the deficiency diseases. Vitamins and their relationship to oral disease. Electrolyte patterns in diseases states. Diseases of each system — cardiovascular, renal, respiratory, alimentary, blood, nervous and the more common disorders affecting each. The diseases of the Locomotor system. The rheumatic diseases. Peripheral vascular disease. Diseases of the endocrine system - thyroid, adrenal, pituitary. Anaesthetic risks and the post-operative respiratory complications.

BOOKS (a) Prescribed textbooks: Lovell R R H & Doyle A E An Introduction to Clinical Medicine, 2nd ed M U P 1971 'Houston J C Joiner G L & Trounce J R Short Textbook of Medicine 5th ed English Universities Press Ltd 1975 (b) Recommended for reference: Harrison T R Textbook of Medicine, 8th ed McGraw-Hill 1976 EXAMINATION One written paper and a clinical examination at the end of 4th year

556-411 SURGERY A course of a weekly lecture given in the Dental School and a clinical demonstration throughout the academic year at the Royal Melbourne Hospital in Fourth Year. The aim of the course is to introduce students to the general principles of surgery as applied to surgery of the head and neck in particular.

SYLLABUS Surgical pathology of acute and chronic infection. Control of infection, asepsis, and sterilization. Antibiotics and surgical infections, tetanus. Gas gangrene. Surgical shock, haemorrhage. Surgical aspects of water and salt metabolism. Wound healing and treatment. Principles of treatment of fractures and dislocations. Head injuries. A general consideration of the aetiology, pathology, treatment and prevention of cancer. Surgical affections of the face, lips, mouth, nose and throat, including the accessory nasal sinuses and tonsils, cleft palate. Surgery of the salivary glands. The diagnosis and management of neck swellings. Diseases of the thyroid gland. Review of the common surgical disorders of the stomach, biliary tract and intestine and of the genito-urinary tract. Hernia. Diseases and tumours of bone. Degenerative arterial disease.

BOOKS Recommended for reference: Ellis H & Caine R Y Lecture Notes on General Surgery, 4th ed Blackwell 1972

EXAMINATION A multiple-choice examination mid-year, and a multiple-choice examination at the end of Fourth Year. Some students may be required to submit to an oral examination.

241-403 DENTAL PROSTHETICS В A course of lectures, seminars, special clinics, demonstrations, tutorials, essays and related para - clinical assignments and clinical practice extending over the two year period of Division IV and covering the following subjects: gnathology, speech pathology, cranio-facial

37 developmental pathology, precision appliance work, geriodontics, sports medicine, partial denture prosthetics and complete denture prosthetics. Students are required to attend lectures, tutorials, seminars, special clinics as rostered and to complete all para-clinical assignments and essays when required. Gradings given during para-clinical and clinical work will contribute towards the final assessment of the student. Permission to proceed with any clinical procedures will be dependent upon satisfactory progress in the para-clinical requirements. Prior to the commencement of the first term, students are required to arrange appointments with patients in accordance with the clinical rosters published on the departmental notice-boards. SYLLABUS LECTURES The following subjects will be covered — Gnathology. Masticatory forces and efficiency, function of the periodontal ligament, mandibular movements in mastication and speech, applied anatomy of the mandibular joint relative to articulator design, dysfunction, diagnosis and treatment planning, myographic analysis, bruxism. Speech patholоду. Speech analysis, development of normal speech, functions of the articulators, effects of dental treatment, velopharyngeal incompetence, treatment of speech defects. Sports medicine. Significance of sports trauma and its prevention. Properties of materials involved. Cranio-facial developmental pathology. Introductory embryology and neurology, patho- genesis, multidisciplinary treatment of congenital anomalies, effects of growth and development, prosthetic appliances: sucking plates, occlusal overlay appliances, obturators. Prosthetic treatment in relation to oral surgery. Immediate denture treatment, surgical and clinical aspects, bone remodelling and its control, post-irradiation treatment of head and neck cancer patients, maxillo-facial appliances, implantology. Geriodontics. General and oral problems of the aged, special geriatric patient care, age changes in the oral mucosa, musculature, mandibular joint, bone and periodontium, drug therapy in relation to dental treatment. Precision appliance work. Indications and contraindications, patient preparation, requirements of abutments and supporting tissues, types of precision retainers. Partial and complete denture prosthetics. Prosthetic appliances for infants and juveniles, tissue reactions to appliances, technical assistance and prescription writing. (a) Partial denture prosthetics: indications and limitations, clinical and para-clinical procedures, fundamentals of components, clinical and physical factors, design relative to aesthetics, function and oral health. (b) Treatment of the edentulous patient: assessment and treatment procedures, muscular and osseous disorders, relation to the clinical dental technician and the laboratory technician. Applied dental materials, recent developments.

CLINICAL AND PARACLINICAL The assessment and prosthetic treatment of a range of dentate and edentate patients involving the preparation of a variety of appliances. Demonstrations on the care of cleft palate patients, children requiring prosthetic treatment, patients with temporomandibular joint dysfunction, post-surgical and special prostheses and geriatric patients. Laboratory demonstrations and practical exercises related to the above clinical procedures. Some technical assistance will be provided for laboratory work associated with patient care. The designing of partial dentures and demonstrations of their production in both gold and cobalt/chrome alloys. Prescription writing in association with the preceding work. The work of each student is examined continually throughout each term. The information obtained in this way is considered in assessing progress at the end of the first year of the Division and is taken into account at the annual examination.

WRITTEN ASSIGNMENTS Up to six essays will be set during Division IV which, together with attendances at lectures, laboratories, clinics and tutorials, will be taken into account when assessing the candidate's status at the time of the Final Examinations.

TUTORIALS AND SPECIAL CLINICS Tutorials and special clinics will be arranged throughout the period of Division IV.

BOOKS (a) Prescribed textbooks: 'Sharry J J Complete Denture Prosthodontics, 2nd ed McGraw-Hill NY 1968 'Watt D M & MacGregor A R Designing Complete Dentures, Saunders 38 (b) Recommended for reference: Ney J M Planned Partials, 1 960 Grabb W L (ed.), Cleft Palate, Little Brown & Co Boston 1971 Osborne J & Lammie G A Partial Dentures, 4th ed Blackwell 1974 Stark R B ed Cleft Palate: A Multidiscipline Approach, loeber Medical Division 1968 Lammie G A Full Dentures, Blackwell 1956 Applegate 0 C Essentials of Removable Partial Denture Prosthesis, 3rd ed Saunders 1965 Schwartz L Disorders of the TemporomandibularJoint. Saunders 1959 Shore N A Occlusal Equilibration and Temporomandibular Joint Dysfunction, 2nd ed Lippincott 1976 Posselt U Physiology of Occlusion and Rehabilitation, 2nd ed Blackwell 1968 O'Connor J D Phonetics, Pelican 1973 Together with the books from the previous years. Students are expected to familiarize themselves with recent developments reported in the literature.

EXAMINATION (a) One 3-hour written paper. At the discretion of the examiners the annual written paper may be replaced by or supplemented with terminal written examinations. The examination papers may include questions requiring a knowledge of the work of previous years. (b) A clinical test at or prior to the time of the annual examinations involving the treatment of a patient or patients.

236-402 CONSERVATIVE DENTISTRY В A course of lectures, seminars, pre-clinical assignments, essays, tutorials, clinical demonstrations and clinical practice covering the following subjects: Preventive Dentistry, Public Dental Health, Pedodontics, Orthodontics, Periodontics, Endodontics, Restorative Dentistry, Crown and Bridgework, Clinical Conservative Practice. Students are required to attend lectures, tutorials, seminars, special clinics as rostered and to complete all pre-clinical assignments and essays when required. Gradings given during preclinical and clinical work will contribute to the final assessment of the student. Permission to proceed with any clinical procedures will be dependent upon satisfactory progress in the preclinical requirements. Prior to the commencement of the first term, students are required to arrange appointments with patients in accordance with the clinical rosters.

SYLLABUS LECTURES: A course of approximately 80 lectures covering: Preventive Dentistry. Formation and nature of the dental plaque, clinical aspects of dental caries, caries susceptibility, factors controlling the rate of progress of the carious lesion. The nature of dental disorders and their measurement in individuals and population groups. Dynamic concepts of hard tissue metabolism, demineralization, and remineralization, factors influencing rates of ionic exchange and crystallization. The mechanism of the action of anti- cariogenic agents. Bone rarefaction and its influence on tooth-supporting structures. Clinical application of preventive measures at the individual and community level. Dietetics, essential nutrients in diet, adequate dietary for the young and old, diet and dental disorders, dietary analysis and adjustment. Occupational health problems including muscle function, postural problems and complications, exercise and sit-down dentistry. Public Dental Health. The concept of Public Dental Health, epidemiological methods, the organization and implementation of Public Dental Health programmes. Periodontics. Restorative dentistry and the periodontium, occlusal factors in periodontal disease, a survey of the results of periodontal therapy. Endodontics. Diagnosis and treatment planning. Treatment of the exposed vital pulp and the necrotic pulp with and without periapical involvement. Biomechanical preparation, irrigants and chelating agents, intracanal medicaments. Filling of the root canal. Case management and prognosis. Endodontic emergency treatment. Endodontic-periodontal problems. The bleaching of the discoloured teeth. Restorative Dentistry. Gold inlays- indications, principles of cavity preparation, direct and indirect methods of inlay construction, relation of physical properties of materials to impressions and restorations. Gold foil-nature, indications and manipulation. Amalgam - restoration of gross lesions. Traumatised anterior teeth - diagnosis, prognosis and management. CrownaпdBridgework. Nature, history and classification, indications and contraindications, requirements of abutment teeth, retainers and supporting tissues, types of retainers and pontics, bridgework and partial dentures. Pedodontics. Psychological problems of children, special needs and clinical management of the sick and handicapped, examination and diagnostic procedures, pulp therapy, with 39 emphasis on the differences in procedure between primary and permanent teeth, preventive and clinical aspects of orthodontics and periodontics. Orthodontics. The growth and development of the skull and jaws coincidental with the eruption of teeth; a study of the physiology of the stomatognathic system and its relation to occlusion; a study of what is accepted as excellent occlusion in man and the process of its development; malocclusion in all its phases including aetiology and prevention; a consideration of the age at which to commence treatment of malocclusion; the principles involved in treatment and their application; the application of force in orthodontic treatment and the subsequent histological changes in the supporting tissues; appliances used for treatment with special reference to removal appliances; the indications and contraindications for extraction of teeth as part of treatment; cleft palate and hare lip and the resultant effect on occlusion. and an outline of the management of these cases; the use of radiology and cephalometric analysis in orthodontics with special reference to location, form and identification of teeth and their relation to skull anatomy. Oral diagnosis. Patient assessment, oral examination. diagnosis, prognosis and treatment planning. PRE-CLINICAL ASSIGNMENTS: including essays as required. Endodontics. Pulp canal anatomy. effect of biomechanical debridement, instrumentation and root canal filling materials, root canal obliteration. Pedodontics. Root canal form in deciduous teeth. Cavity preparation. Restorative. Treatment of gross lesions in posterior and anterior teeth using amalgam, gold inlays and crowns, porcelain crowns. Investigation of some problems of fixed bridgework and construction of a simple bridge. Orthodontics. Construction of orthodontic appliances. Periodontics. Periodontal therapy. SEMINARS Inlay patterns and gold castings, elastomers and hydrocolloids, temporary crowns and bridges, modifications of dental amalgams, adhesion and adhesives in dentistry, saliva and oral ecology, pulpotomy апд pulp capping, re-attachment in periodontal disease, trauma and periodontal disease, prevention of dental caries, development and correction of malocclusion.

SPECIAL CLINICS and CLINICAL TUTORIALS Students are required to attend as rostered: Preventive, Periodontics, Endodontics, Pedodontics, Restorative Dentistry, Orthodontics and Oral Diagnosis clinics and tutorials.

BOOKS Johnston J F Phillips R W & Dykema R W Modern Practice in Crown and Bridge PmsthodD пBcs, 3rd ed Saunders 1971 Johnston J F Muurford G & Dykema R W Modern Practice in Dental Ceramics, Saunders 1967 'Kantorowicz G F ed Inlays. Crowns апд Bridges, 2nd ed John Wright 19/0 McDonald R E Dentistry for the Child and Adolescent, 2nd ed Mosby 1974 Manson J D Periodontics, 3rd ed Kimpton 1975 'Jenkins G N Physiology of the Mouth, 3rd ed Blackwell Scientific Publications London 1966 Moyers R E Handbook of Orthodontics, 3rd ed Year Book Medical Publishing Co 1973 Ciba Foundation Symposium Caries Resistant Teeth, Churchill 1965 ' Macphee T & Cowley G Essentials of Periodontology and Periodontics, 2nd ed Blackwell 1975 Tulley W J & Campbell A C A Manual of Practical Orthodontics, 3rd ed Bristol Wright 1970 Foster T D A Textbook of Orthodontics, Oxford Blackwell Scientific Publications 1975 Ingle J I & Beveridge E E Endodontics, 2nd ed Lea & Febiger 1976 Bence R Handbook of Clinical Endodontics, C V Mosby Co 1976 Graber T M Orthodontics, 3rd ed W B Saunders 1972 Adams C P The Design and Construction of Removable Orthodontic Appliances, 4th ed Wright & Sons 1970 Enlow D H The Humai Face. Harper & Row NY 1968 Young W 0 & Striffler D F The Dentist, his Practice and his Community, 2nd ed Saunders 1969 Holloway P J & Swallow J N Child Dental Health, 2nd ed John Wright 1975 Grossman L 1 Endodontic Practice, 8th ed Lea & Febiger 1974 Jensen J R & Serene T P Fundamentals of Clinical Endodontics, 6th ed Dubuque Iowa Kendall-Hunt 1975 Serene T P krasny R M et al Principles of Pre-clinical Endodontics, 2nd ed Dubuque Iowa Kendall-Hunt 1975

40 Franks A S T & Hedegard Bjф rn Geriatric Dentistry, Blackwell Scientific Publications 1973 Basic journal references as prescribed for all essays and seminars. EXAMINATION At the conclusion of Fourth Year, Fourth Division students will be assessed on their year's work before permission is given to proceed to the latter part of the Fourth Division. At the end of Fourth Division candidates will be required to sit for two 3-hour written papers. Candidates may be required to submit to further tests including a viva voce examination and practical examination. Assessments of each student's work are also made throughout the division and are considered in assessing the final result.

233-402 ORAL MEDICINE AND ORAL SURGERY A

233-503 ORAL MEDICINE AND ORAL SURGERY В A course of lectures, seminars, pre-clinical assignments, essays, tutorials, clinical teaching and clinical practice covering the following topics: ORAL PATHOLOGY ORAL MEDICINE ORAL SURGERY ANAESTH ESIA RADIOLOGY Students are required to attend lectures, tutorials, seminars, special clinics, as rostered and to complete all pre-clinical assignments and essays when required. Gradings given during pre- clinical and clinical work will contribute to the final assessment of the student. SYLLABUS A course of instructions covering the following subjects, some of which are a continuation of earlier years instruction.

ORAL PATHOLOGY A continuation of the course commenced in Third Year and consisting of approximately 20 lectures during first and second terms of Fourth Year with laboratory demonstrations and practical histopathology of approximately twenty-five 2-hour sessions. This course of study is an extension of Pathology with special reference to the pathology of oral and related structures, systemic influences on the development of oral and dental structures, the pathology of teeth and their supporting structures, the pathology of the jaws, temporomandibular joint and associated structures due to local and distant causes.

ORAL MEDICINE A course of approximately 15 lectures, tutorials, and clinical teaching throughout Division 4. Means of assessing general and oral health including the significance of medical and dental history, clinical examination and special investigations with regard to diagnosis, treatment planning and prognosis. Disorders affecting the soft tissues of the oral cavity and supporting structures of teeth including both local disorders and oral manifestations of systemic diseases; oral and dental therapeutics.

ORAL SURGERY A course of approximately 50 lectures, tutorials, clinical teaching and clinical practice throughout Division 4. The principles and practice of oral surgery and the use of local analgesics, the surgical anatomy and pathology of the mouth, jaws, pharynx and face together with the special surgery of the oral cavity and associated techniques, management of patients before and after surgery and during surgical emergencies.

ANAESTHESIA A course of approximately ten lectures with clinical demonstrations in Fifth Year. The state of General Anaesthesia and the risks inherent in its induction. Applied physiology of respiration and circulation in relation to patients undergoing surgery under general anaesthesia. The pharmacology of drugs and agents used in general anaesthesia. Indications for general anaesthesia in dentistry. Endotracheal anaesthesia. The place of non-endotracheal techniques, including sedation, in dentistry; the risks and limitations of these techniques. The nature of 'surgical risk' and its assessment. Post operative and post anaesthetic complications: their prevention, recognition and management. Complications of local and general anaesthesia. Respiratory and circulatory resuscitation.

41 RADIOLOGY A course of approximately five lectures. tutorials, clinical teaching and clinical practice extending over the final three years of the course. Techniques involved in radiography; interpretation of radiographs and the correlation of radiographic findings with other aspects of investigation and diagnosis.

BOOks Oral Pathology (a) Prescribed textbooks: Shafer W G line M K & Levy B M A Textbook of Oral Pathology. 3rd ed Saunders 1974 or Spouge J D Oral Pathology. C V Mosby 1973 (b) Recommended for reference: Rushton M A Cooke B E D & Duckworth R Oral Histopathology, 2nd ed Livingstone 1970 Colby R A Kerr D A & Robinson H R G Colour Atlas of Oral Patholоду, 3rd ed Lippincott 1971 Gorlin R J & Goldman H M Thoma's Oral Pathology, 6th ed Mosby 1970 Lucas R B Pathology of Tumors of the Oral Tissues, 3rd ed Churchill 1976 Pindborg J J Pathology of the Dental Hard Tissues, Munksgaard 1970 Pindborg J J & Hjorting-Hansen E Atlas of Diseases of the Jaws. Munksgaard 1974 Cahn L R & Slaughter D P Oral Cancer. A Monograph for the Dentist, American Cancer Society Inc 1962 Killey H C & Kay L W Benign Cystic Lesions of theJaws, 3rd ed Churchill Livingstone 1977

Oral Medicine (a) Prescribed textbook: Burket L W Oral Medicine, 6th ed Lippincott 1971 (b) Recommended for reference: Glickman J Clinical Periodontology, 4th ed Saunders 1972 Gorlin R J & Goldman I M Thomas Oral Pathology, 6th ed Mosby 1970 Gardner A F Differential Oral Diagnosis in Systemic Diseases, Wright 1970 Nally F F & Eggleston D J A Manual of Oral Medicine. Manchester U P 1973

Oral Surgery (a) Prescribed textbook: Howe G L The Extraction of Teeth, 2nd ed Wright 1970 Howe G L Minor Oral Surgery, 2nd ed Wright 1971 Kay L W Drugs in Dentistry, 2nd ed Wright 1972 (b) Recommended for reference: Archer W H Oral Surgery, 5th ed Saunders 1975 Fry Sir William Kelsey & Ward T The Dental Treatment of Maxillo-Facial Injuries, 2nd ed Blackwell 1956 Rowe N L & Killey I C Fractures of the Facial Skeleton, 2nd ed Livingstone 1968 Thora K H & Robinson H B G Oral and Dental Diagnosis, 5th ed Saunders 1960 Hutchinson A C W Dentaland OralX-ray Diagnosis, Livingstone 1954 Killey H C Seward G R & Kay L W An Outline of Oral Surgery, part I & part Il Wright 1971 Killey H C & Kay L W The Impacted Wisdom Tooth, 2nd ed Churchill Livingstone 1975 Killey H C & Kay L W Benign Cystic Lesions of the Jaws, 3rd ed Churchill Livingstone 1977

Anaesthesia (a) Prescribed textbook: Bell J M Clinical Dental Anaesthesia, Blackwell Scientific Publications Oxford 1975 (b) Recommended for reference: Bennett C R Conscious-sedation in Dental Practice, Mosby 1974 Dripps R O Eckenhoff J E & Vandam L D Introduction to Anesthesia: The Principles of safe practice, 4th ed Saunders Philadelphia 1972 Feldman S & Ellis H Principles of Resuscitation, 2nd ed Blackwell Scientific Publications Oxford 1975 Jorgensen N B & Hayden J Sedation L ocal and General Anaesthesia in Dentistry, 2nd ed Lea & Febiger 1972

Radiology Recommended for reference: Langland 0 E & Sippy F H Textbook of Dental Radiography, Thomas 1973 Worth H M Principles and Practice of Oral Radiologic Interpretation, Year Book Medical Publishers Inc 1963

42 EXAMINATIONS Oral Medicine and Oral Surgery A. Oral Pathology: One 3- hour written paper, practical test, and viva voce examination Oral Medicine and Oral Surgery В. Oral Medicine: One 3-hour written paper; viva voce examination. Oral Surgery: One 3-hour written paper with practical and clinical work and viva voce examination. Anaesthesia: One 3-hour written paper and a viva voce examination. Radiology: Questions will be included at an appropriate level in any of the examinations in Oral Pathology and Oral Surgery or Oral Medicine. In each of the above subjects students are assessed during their clinical studies and those assessments will be taken into account at the annual examination.

DEGREE OF MASTER OF DENTAL SCIENCE The subjects offered by the three departments in the Dental School are set out below. Candidates are advised to consult the Regulations for the Master of Dental Science degree on page 49 and the rules on page 12.

DEPARTMENT OF DENTAL PROSTHETICS 241-601 DENTAL PROSTHETICS SYLLABUS A course of advanced study and research relating to the restoration of the masticatory apparatus with particular reference to the problems associated with mastication. speech and general function. The course will consist of lectures and tutorials, clinical and paraclinical assignments and training in research methods. An advanced knowledge of the following is required: The prosthetic needs of the community. The anatomy, histology and pathology of the denture bearing area and associated parts, including the temporomandibular joint: the treatment of children including those with cranio-facial anomalies; the treatment of adults with congenital or acquired clefts and malformations; spastic and paraplegic patients; splints and appliances used in the treatment of fractures of the facial bones; speech in relation to dental problems of both children and adults; manibular movement and mastication; partial dentures; full dentures; immediate dentures; fixed and removable precision appliances; the chemical and physical properties of denture base and other materials used in the clinic and dental laboratory; geriodontics; the psychology of the denture patient.

BOOKS For reading and reference: Wan D M & McGregor A R Designing Complete Dentures, Saunders 1976 Shore N A Temporoтandibular Joint Dysfunction and Occlusal Equilibration, 2nd ed Lippincott 1976 Schwanz L Disorders of the Temporomandibular Joint, Saunders 1959 Applegate 0 C Essentials of Removable Partial Denture Prosthesis, 3rd ed Saunders 1965 Osborne J & Lammie G A Partial Dentures, 4th ed Blackwell 1974 Posselt U Physiology of Occlusion and Rehabilitation, 2nd ed Blackwell 1968 Swenson M G Swenson's Complete Dentures, ed Carl 0 Boucher 6th ed Mosby 1970 Fish E W Principles of Full Denture Prosthesis, 6th ed Staples 1964 Scott J H & Symons N B B Introduction to Dental Anatomy, 7th ed Livingstone 1974 Sharry J J Complete Denture Prosthodontics, 3rd ed McGraw - Hill NY 1974 Scott J H & Dixon A D Anatomy for Students of Dentistry, 3rd ed Livingstone 1972 Skinner E W & Phillips R W The Science of Dental Materials, 7th ed Saunders 1973 Jenkins G N The Physiology of the Mouth, 3rd ed Blackwell 1966 Farrell J H Partial Denture Designing, 2nd ed Kimpton 1971 Grabb W L ed Cleft Palate, Little Brown & Co Boston 1971

EXAMINATION Either the submission of a thesis embodying the result of research work and a viva voce examination or the submission of laboratory reports and note books on research work undertaken during the course, which will comprise the thesis, together with a written examination consisting of not more than two 3-hour papers and a viva voce examination.

43 241-602 DENTAL MATERIALS SCIENCE SYLLABUS A series of not more than 15 lectures will be given at an early stage of the course dealing with fundamental concepts relating to the structure of materials as they affect properties and their application to the materials used in dentistry. A consideration of modern materials and possible future developments will be included. Attendance at laboratory classes and tutorials and completion of reports and assignments throughout the course as required by the chairman of the department. Laboratory work will explore how the useful properties of metals, ceramics, polymers and other organic mixtures arise from their fundamental structure. The control of these properties will be considered in detail as will the biological aspects of dental materials. Research opportunities exist in the evaluation of conventional and new materials, clinical testing of materials and for experimental biological testing of materials. Facilities for developmental work exist in the department.

BOOKS For reading and reference: Anderson J Applied Dental Materials, 4th ed Blackwell Oxford 1972 Chalmers B Principles of Solidiliсaйiоn, Wiley 1964 American Society for Metals Strengthening Mechanisms in Solids, A S M Metals Park Ohio 1962 American Dental Association Guide to Dental Materials and Devices, Am Dent Assoc 7th ed 1974-75 and 8th ed 1976-78 Guy A G Elements of Physical Metallurgy, 2nd ed Addison-Wesley 1960 Reed - Hill R Physical Metallurgy Principles, Van Nostrand 1964 Peyton F A et al Restorative Dental Materials, 5th ed Mosby 1975 Phillips R W et al Materials for the Practising Dentist, C V Mosby St Louis 1969 Phillips R W Skinner's Science of Dental Materials, 7th ed Saunders 1973 Van Vlack L H Elements o1 Materials Science, 2nd ed Addison-Wesley 1964 Wulff J ed The Structure and Properties of Materials, vols I. li & 111, Wiley 1965 Materials in Biomedical Engineering, Annals NY Acad of Sci 146(1), pp 1-359 NY 1968 Phillips R W & Ryge G eds Adhesive Restorative Dental Materials, Indiana U Sch Dent 1 962 Garrett A ed Adhesives: Penguin Scienсe Survey, 19644 Penguin London 1964 National Institute of Dental Research Adhesive Restorative Dental Materials Il. US Department of Health Education & Welfare 1965 Greener E H Harcourt J K & Lautenschlager E P Materials Scienсe in Dentistry, Williams & Wilkins 1972 Auslen R H Wilsdorf H G F & Phillips R W Adhesive restorative dental materials Il. National Institute of Dental Research Washington US Public Health Service, Publication No 1494,1966 Combe E C Notes on Dental Materials, 3rd ed Churchill Livingstone 1977 Craig R G O'Brien W J & Powers J M Dental Materials—properties and mamPulation, Mosby 19875 von Fraunhofer J A Scientific aspects of dental materials. Butterworth 1975 EXAMINATION Either the submission of a thesis embodying the result of research work and a viva voce examination or the submission of laboratory reports and note books on research work undertaken during the course, which will comprise the thesis, together with a written examination consisting of not more than two 3-hour papers and a viva voce examination.

DEPARTMENT OF CONSERVATIVE DENTISTRY

236-601 CHILDREN'S AND PREVENTIVE DENTISTRY

SYLLABUS A course of advanced study and research relating to the prevention and correction of dental disorders particularly in children. The course will consist of lectures, tutorials, assignments, clinical and laboratory demonstrations, practical work and research. BOOKS Skinner E W & Phillips R W The Science of Dental Materials, 7th ed Saunders 1973 Holloway P J & Swallow J N Child Dental Health, John Wright 1975 Ramfjord S P & Ash M Occlusion, 2nd ed Saunders 1971

44 Jenkins G N The Physiology of the Mouth, 3rd ed Blackwell 1966 Harris R S ed Art and Science of Dental Caries Research, Academic Press 1968 Graber T M Orthodontics, 3rd ed Saunders 1972 Murray J J Fluorides in Caries Prevention, John Wright 1976 Report of the Royal College of Physicians Fluoride, Teeth and Health. Pitman 1976 Slack G L Dental Public Health, John Wright 1974 Andreasen J 0 Traumatic Injuries of the Teeth. Munksgaard 1972 Anderson W D Pathology. 6th ed Mosby 1971 Sic her H Orban's Oral Histolоду апд Embryology, 7th ed Mosby 1972 Young W O & Strifileг D F The Dentist, his Practice and his Community, 2nd ed Saunders 1969 Shafer W G line M K & Levy B M A Textbook of Oral Pathology, 3rd ed Saunders 1 973 Burnett G W & Scherp H W Oral Microbiology and Infectious Disease, 3rd ed Williams & Wilkins 1968 Goodman L S & Gilman A The Pharmacological Basis of Therapeutics, 5th ed Macmillan NY 1975 Dental Clinics of North America Genetics, Saunders January 1975 Dental Clinics of North America Symposium on Dentistry for the Handicapped Child, Saunders July 1974 Godin R J & Pindborg J J Syndromes of the Head and Neck, 2nd ed McGraw Hí11 1975 Nizel A B Nutrition in Preventive Dentistry: Science and Practice. Saunders 1972 McDonald R E Dentistry for the Child апд Adolescent, 2nd ed Mosby 1974 Bell J M Clinical Dental Anaesthesia: a Manual of Principles and Practice. Blackwell 1975 Nelson W E Textbook of Pediatrics, 9th ed Saunders 1969 Sperber G H Craniofacial Embryology, Wright 1 973 Franks A S T ed Principles апд Practice of Dental Care for Patients with Chronic Disease and Disability. U of Birmingham 1968-1971 Bernier J C & Mahler J C Improving Dental Practice through Preventive Measures, 3rd ed Mosby 1975 Any other references recommended by the department. EXAMINATION Candidates will be assessed on their laboratory and clinical work, written assignments, research thesis and oral, practical and written examinations.

236-602 PERIODONTICS SYLLABUS A course of advanced study and research relating to the nature and treatment of disorders of the tooth-supporting structures and the relationship of these to other dental and systemic conditions. The course will consist of lectures, tutorials, assignments, clinical and laboratory demonstrations, practical work and research.

BOOKS For reading and reference: Anderson W A 0 Pathology. 6th ed Mosby 1971 Burnett G W & Scherp H W Oral Microbiology and Infectious Disease, 4th ed Williams & Wilkins 1976 Eastoe J E Picton D C A & Alexander A G eds The Prevention of PeriodontalDisease, Kimpton 1971 Glickman I Clinical Periodontology, 4th ed Saunders 1972 Goldman H M & Cohen D W Periodontal Therapy, 5th ed Mosby 1973 Harris R S ed Art and Science of Dental Caries Research, Academic Press 1968 Jenkins G N The Physiology of the Mouth, 3rd ed Blackwell Scientific Publications 1966 MacPhee T & Cowley G Essentials of Periodontology and Periodontics, 2nd ed Blackwell Scientific Publications 1975 MacPhee T ed Host Resistance to Commensal Bacteria; the Response to Dental Plaque, Churchill Livingstone 1972 McHugh W D ed Dental Plaque, Livingstone 1970 Melcher A H & Bowen W H Biology of the Periodontium, Academic Press 1969 Phillips R W Skinner's Science of Dental materials, 7th ed Saunders 1973 Report of the Royal Commissioner into the Fluoridation of Public Water Supplies, Govt Printer Tasmania 1968 Schroeder H E Formation and Inhibition of Dental Calculus, Huber 1969 Shafer W G line M K & Levy B M A Textbook of Oral Pathology. 3rd ed Saunders 1974 Sicher H Orban's Oral Histolоду апд Embryology, 8th ed Mosby 1976

45 Stahl S S ed Periodontal Surgery: Biological Basis and Technique. Thomas 1976 Thomson H Occlusion, Wright 1975 Young W 0 & Striffler D F The Dentist, his Practice and his Community, 2nd ed Saunders 1969 Any other references recommended by the department.

EXAMINATION Candidates will be assessed on their laboratory and clinical work, written assignments, research thesis and oral, practical and written examinations.

236-603 ORTHODONTICS SYLLABUS A course of advanced study and research relating to the development of normal and abnormal skull growth and occlusion, and the prevention, interception and correction of dento-facial abnormalities by orthodontic means. The course will consist of lectures, tutorials, assignments, clinical and laboratory demonstrations, practical work and research. BOOKS Skinner E W & Phillips R W Skinner's Science of Dental Materials, 7th ed Saunders 1973 Ramfjord S P & Ash M Occlusion, 2nd ed Saunders 1971 Jenkins G N The Physiology of the Mouth, 3rd ed Blackwell 1966 Harris R S ed Art and Science of Dental Caries Research, Academic Press 1968 Graber T M Orthodontics, 3rd ed Saunders 1972 Report of the Royal Commissioner into the Fluoridation of Public Water Supplies, Govt Printer Tasmania 1968 Lazzari E P Dental Biochemistry, Lea & Febiger 1968 Anderson W A D Pathology, 6th ed Mosby 1971 Shafer W G line M K & Levy B M A Textbook of Oral Pathol оду, 3rd ed Saunders 1973 Burnett G W & Scherp H W Oral Microbiology and Infectious Disease, 3rd ed Williams & Wilkins 1968 Strang R H Textbook of Orthodontia, 4th ed Lea & Febiger 1958 Salzmann J A Practice of Orthodontics, 2 vols illus, Lippincott 1966 Anderson G M Practical Orthodontics, 9th ed Mosby 1960 Enlow D H The Human Face, Harper & Row N Y 1968 Adams C P The Design and Construction of Removable Orthodontic Appliances, 4th ed John Wright & Sons 1 970 Graber T M ed Current Orthodontic Concepts and Techniques, vols I & II, Saunders 1969 Sicher H Orban's Oral Histology and Embryology, 7th ed Mosby 1972 Young W 0 & Striffler D F The Dentist, his Practice and his Community, 2nd ed Saunders 1969 Any other references recommended by the department.

EXAMINATION Candidates will be assessed on their laboratory and clinical work, written assignments, research thesis and oral, practical and written examinations.

236-604 CONSERVATIVE DENTISTRY SYLLABUS A course of advanced study and research relating to the conservation of teeth, with particular reference to restorative science. The course will consist of lectures, tutorials, assignments, clinical and laboratory demonstrations, practical work and research.

BOOKS For reading and reference: Skinner E W & Phillips R W The Science of Dental Materials, 7th ed Saunders 1973 Tylman, S D Theory and Practice Crown and Bridge Prosthodontics, 6th ed Mosby 1970 Ramfjord S D & Ash M Occlusion, 2nd ed Saunders 1971 Jenkins G N The Physiology of the Mouth, 3rd ed Blackwell 1966 Courtade G L & Timmermanns J J Pins in Restorative Dentistry, Mosley 1971 Ingle J I & Beveridge E E Endodontics, Lea & Febiger 1976 Johnston J F Phillips R W & Dykema R W Modern Practice in Crown and Bridge Prosthodontics, Saunders 1971 Murray J J Fluorides in Caries Prevention, John Wright 1976 Possett U Physiology of Occlusion and Rehabilitation, 1968

46 Slack G L Dental Public Health, John Wright 1974 Graber T M Orthodontics, 3rd ed Saunders 1972 Anderson W A D Pathology, 8th ed Mosby 1973 Shafer W G line M K & Levy B M A Textbook of Oral Pathology. 3rd ed Saunders 1974 Burnett G W & Scherp H W Oral Microbiology and Infectious Disease, 3rd ed Williams & Wilkins 1968 Sicher H Orban's Oral Histology and Embryology, 7th ed Mosby 1972 Any other references recommended by the department.

EXAMINATION Candidates will be assessed on their laboratory and clinical work, written assignments, research thesis and oral, practical and written examinations.

DEPARTMENT OF DENTAL MEDICINE AND SURGERY 233-601 ORAL PATHOLOGY AND ORAL MEDICINE SYLLABUS A course of advanced study in a clinical and/or research aspect of Oral Pathology and Oral Medicine will be planned for each candidate in consultation with his supervisor It is intended that the course of study will involve a major clinical or research project with supporting course work or consist primarily of course work associated with a small project. The course work may consist of lectures, tutorials, assignments and practical or clinical work. Reading lists will be produced in consultation with each candidate's supervisor.

EXAMINATION Either the submission of a thesis embodying the results of original work and a viva voce examination or an examination consisting of two 3- hour papers and viva voce examinations together with reports, reviews and laboratory notebooks prepared during the course. 233-602 ORAL SURGERY SYLLABUS A course of advanced study in a clinical and/or research aspect of Oral Surgery will be planned for each candidate in consultation with his supervisor. It is intended that the course of study will involve a major clinical or research project with supporting course work or consist primarily of course work associated with a small project. The course work may consist of lectures, tutorials, assignments and practical or clinical work. Reading lists will be produced in consultation with each candidate's supervisor.

EXAMINATION Either the submission of a thesis embodying the results of original work and a viva voce examination or an examination consisting of two 3-hour papers and viva voce examinations together with reports, reviews and laboratory notebooks prepared during the course. 233-603 ORAL ANATOMY, ORAL HISTOLOGY AND ORAL EMBRYOLOGY SYLLABUS A course of advanced study in a basic science aspect of Oral Anatomy, Oral Histology and Oral Embryology will be planned for each candidate in consultation with a supervisor. It is intended that the course of study will involve a major basic science research project, with supporting course work, or consist primarily of course work associated with a minor research project. Course work will include weekly tutorials and practical sessions in two of the following subjects — Anatomy, Histology, Embryology, Cellular Biology or other suitable subjects as determined from time to time in each of the two years of the course. Reading lists will be produced in consultation with each candidate's supervisor.

47 CHAPTER 10

REGULATIONS

REGULATION 3.41-DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF DENTAL SCIENCE 1. A candidate for the degree of bachelor of Dental Science shall subsequently to his matriculation pursue his studies for at least five years and pass the examinations in accordance with the conditions prescribed by the Professorial Board provided that a candidate may, on the recommendation of the faculty and with the approval of the Professorial Board and subject to such conditions (if any) as may be prescribed for him, be granted credit for the First Year of the course and be admitted directly to the Second Year. 2. No candidate shall be admitted to the course for the degree of bachelor of Dental Science unless, subject to dispensation by the faculty of Dental Science in special cases, he has passed or obtained honours at the matriculation examination in Chemistry and one of Physics, Biology or a branch of Mathematics. 3. The subjects of the several Years of the course for the degree and the conditions on which such subjects may be taken shall be as prescribed from time to time by the Professorial Board on the recommendation of the faculty and published with the details of subjects. 4. During each Year, and between Years of the course, a candidate shall perform such laboratory and such clinical work and shall attend such demonstrations and lectures and undergo such experience to the extent and in the manner as is prescribed from time to time by the Professorial Board on the recommendation of the faculty and published with the details of subjects. 5. A candidate shall pass in all subjects of a Year at one examination and no candidate shall be permitted to proceed with the work of a later Year than the first unless he has completed the work of the previous Year provided that— (a) In any Year the faculty may pass a candidate in the Year as a whole. In awarding such pass the faculty shall take into account his performance in all subjects in accordance with principles determined by the faculty from time to time and approved by the Professorial Board. A candidate passed by the faculty in the Year as a whole who has not passed at the annual examination in or obtained credit for any particular subject shall not be recorded as having passed in that subject but shall be allowed to proceed with subjects of a later Year of the course for which a pass in such subjects may be prerequisite. (b) A candidate in the First Year who has passed in any subject or subjects of the First Year shall be entitled to credit therefor. (c) A candidate who has passed in any subject or subjects of the Second, Third or Fourth Year may be allowed credit therefor at the discretion of the faculty if the faculty allows such candidate to repeat the Year. 6. A candidate who is repeating any subject or subjects in the course or part thereof shall repeat the attendances at lectures and the attendances at and performance of clinical and practical work as prescribed by the faculty of Dental Science, except when excused from attendance at lectures or clinical or practical work in whole or in part, or when excused from complying with the requirements regarding clinical or practical work in whole or in part by the faculty of Dental Science. 7. A candidate who fails to pass in all subjects of the Fifth Year at one examination shall be re- examined in all subjects of that Year at the next ensuing examination of the Fifth Year and before re-examination shall comply with the requirements regarding clinical and practical work prescribed by the faculty of Dental Science. 8. In addition to the separate class lists in the Fourth and Fifth Year there shall be published a class list of candidates completing the course for the degree based on a collation of the results of such candidates in all the examinations of the Fourth and Fifth Years. Such class list shall be called the Degree Class List. 9. Candidates may in addition to the written examination for any Year be examined orally in any subjects of examination for that Year and shall undergo a practical and clinical examination in such subjects as may be specified in the details of subjects. 10. Candidates who have fulfilled the prescribed conditions may be admitted to the degree of bachelor of Dental Science.

48 REGULATION 3.42—DEGREE OF MASTER OF DENTAL SCIENCE 1. A candidate for the degree of master of Dental Science shall either: (a) have completed the course for the degree of bachelor of Dental Science of the University; or (b) hold a degree or qualifications recognized by the Professorial Board pursuant to regulation 3.3.4; or (c) be any other graduate who satisfies the faculty of Dental Science (hereinafter called the faculty') that he has the ability to pursue advanced studies in Dental Science. 2. An applicant for candidature for the degree of master of Dental Science shall submit to the faculty a proposed course of advanced study and training in research to be undertaken by him. 3. If the faculty is satisfied that the proposed course of study and training is of a sufficient standard it may approve the proposed course of study and training and thereupon the applicant may be admitted to candidature for the degree. 4. After being accepted a candidate shall pursue for at least two years a course of advanced study and training in research in the University under supervision prescribed by the faculty, save that when the head of the appropriate department recommends that it is essential for the candidate to obtain material for his course away from the University the faculty may grant permission for the candidate to absent himself from the University for such periods as may be determined in each case, provided that supervision satisfactory to the faculty can be maintained. 5. A candidate for the degree of master of Dental Science may not, except by special permission of the faculty, enter at the annual examination for any subject other than such subjects as may be included in his approved course for the completion of his course for the degree. 6. A candidate shall be requirea during the course to devote his whole time to his advanced study and research save that— (a) the faculty may allow a candidate on application to undertake a limited amount of University teaching or outside work which in its judgement will not interfere with the pursuit of the proposed course of advanced study and research; (b) the faculty may accept a person as part-time candidate for the degree if the faculty is satisfied that the candidate is substantially free to pursue his course of studies. The faculty shall prescribe the duration of the course of a part-time candidate provided that the time which he shall devote to the course is equivalent to not less than two years. 7. (1) Each candidate shall— (a) submit for examination a thesis embodying the results of research carried out by him during his course for the degree, within the time prescribed by the faculty; (b) attend lectures, perform clinical or laboratory work or both as prescribed; (c) pass the examination in such subject or subjects as the faculty may approve. (2) The faculty may determine in each case whether a thesis shall constitute the major part of a candidate's course. (3) If the candidate's thesis does not constitute the major part of his course the provisions of regulation 4.6 shall not apply thereto. 8. Candidates who have fulfilled the prescribed conditions may be admitted to the degree of master of Dental Science. 9. If the faculty is of the opinion that a candidate is not making satisfactory progress it may terminate his course or make such changes in the conditions of his candidature as it thinks fit. 10. The examinations shall be held in each academic year commencing during the week immediately after the end of the third term.

[TEMPORARY REGULATION 1. A candidate who has obtained the approval of the faculty for the subject of an original thesis under paragraph (b) of section 4 of regulation 3.42 on or before the 1st day of September 1969 may submit his thesis for examination under the regulations in force on the 1st day of September 1969 as if those regulations had remained in force. 2. This temporary regulation shall expire on the 31st day of December 1979.]

49 REGULATION 3.43-DEGREE OF DOCTOR OF DENTAL SCIENCE 1. Candidates for the degree of doctor of Dental Science must be graduates in Dental Science or in Dental Surgery in the University or in some university recognized by it or hold a degree or qualifications recognized by the Professorial Board pursuant to regulation 3.3.4 and must be of at least four years standing since they became entitled to the degree of bachelor or gained the qualification recognized by the Professorial Board as aforesaid. 2. Except as hereinafter provided candidates must have qualified for admission to the degree of master of Dental Science or doctor of Philosophy and must submit a thesis' which may consist of published or unpublished work making an original and substantial contribution to some branch of Dental Science. The subject of the thesis must be proposed by the candidate and approved by the faculty of Dental Science. 3. In special cases the faculty may permit a candidate to present a thesis without previously qualifying for admission to the degree of master of Dental Science or doctor of Philosophy. On report from the examiners the faculty may in its discretion require the candidate to qualify for such admission, or, if in the opinion of the examiners the thesis is of exceptionally high merit, exempt him in whole or in part from the requirement that he should so qualify. 4. The examiners of any thesis' may require the candidate to pass an examination in the subject to which his thesis relates. 5. In every appointment of examiners at least one of the appointees shall be an external examiner. 6. Candidates who have given evidence of research and ability satisfactory to the examiners and who have fulfilled the other prescribed conditions may be admitted to the degree of doctor of Dental Science.

REGULATION 3.60-DEGREE OF DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY 1 . (1) A person who— (a) is a graduate of or qualified to graduate in— (i) the University; or (ii) some other university or institution recognized for the purpose of this regulation by the Professorial Board; and (b) is of such standing as the Professorial Board prescribes may apply to be a probationary candidate for the degree of doctor of Philosophy by submitting— (c) a proposed course of advanced study and research to be undertaken by the applicant under the direction of a department of the University; and (d) such other information as the Professorial Board prescribes. (2) A person who is not eligible to apply under sub-section (1) may apply to be a probationary candidate for the degree of doctor of Philosophy by— (a) submitting a proposed course of advanced study and research to be undertaken by the applicant under the direction of a department of the University; (b) submitting such other information as the Professorial Board prescribes; and (c) satisfying the Professorial Board that the applicant had such training and has such ability that the applicant's qualification to pursue the course proposed is substantially equivalent to that of a person who is eligible to apply under sub- section (1). 2. An applicant for probationary candidature may be admitted to probationary candidature if— (a) the applicant is accepted by the Professorial Board on the recommendation of the chairman of the appropriate department and the dean of the appropriate faculty; and (b) not being a graduate of the University, the applicant becomes a matriculated student of the University. 3. ( 1 ) Subject to section 6 the whole of a probationary candidate's time shall be devoted to a course of advanced study and research for twelve months from a commencing date fixed by the Professorial Board— (a) under the direction of such department of the University, and under such supervision as the Professorial Board designates; and (b) subject to the prescriptions of the Professorial Board made either generally or specially in the candidate's case. (2) On the expiration of nine months after the commencing date— (a) a probationary candidate who desires confirmation of candidature shall apply therefor in writing to the Professorial Board; and

1 Three copies must be submitted (see regulation 4 6).

50 (b) the supervisor and the chairman of the designated department or the deputy- chairman if the chairman is the supervisor shall jointly report in writing to the Professorial Board on the probationary candidate's progress. (3) When a probationary candidate applies for confirmation of candidature the Professorial Board— (а ) shall consider— (i) the written application made by the probationary candidate; (ii) the report of the supervisor and the Chairman of the designated department; and (iii) any other written submissions made by the candidate in support of the application; and (b) may confirm the candidature. (4) Notwithstanding Regulation 2.5А but subject to section 15 of this regulation, if no application for confirmation of candidature is made in due time, or, if application is made and the Professorial Board does not confirm the candidature, the probationary candidature shall lapse at the expiration of twelve months after the commencing date. (5) If the Professorial Board confirms the candidature the candidate shall, subject to sub- section 3(8), further pursue the course of advanced study and research in accordance with sub-section 3 ( 1 ) for a further period designated by the Professorial Board being not less than twenty-four months from the anniversary of the commencing date. (6) When applying for confirmation, or at a later date, a candidate—who, prior to the commencing date, has had experience in research relevant to the course of advanced study and research for a continuous period of not less than three months after successfully completing a course for a degree requiring full-time study for not less than four academic years—may apply to the Professorial Board to fix a period of confirmed candidature of less than twenty-four months. (7) If the supervisor and the chairman of the designated department or the deputy chairman if the chairman is the supervisor jointly— (a) report that the candidate's progress has been satisfactory; and (b) recommend as a period of confirmed candidature a number of months less than twenty-four and not less than twelve the Professorial Board shall consider the application. (8) If the candidate's previous experience in research is acceptable to the Professorial Board, the Professorial Board may fix a reduced period of confirmed candidature of less than twenty-four months but the reduction shall not exceed twelve months or the number of whole months in what the Professorial Board considers to be the longest continuous period of previous experience in research, whichever is the shorter. 4. (1 ) On the application of the candidate and after considering a joint report on the candidate's progress by the supervisor and the chairman of the designated department, the Professorial Board may from time to time extend the period of confirmed candidature but not so that the aggregate of probationary candidature and confirmed candidature shall exceed— (a) where the period of candidature has not been reduced, sixty months; and (b) where the period of candidature has been reduced under sub-section 3(8), the number of months derived by subtracting from sixty the number of months by which the candidature was reduced. (2) Notwithstanding sub-section (1), if the supervisor and the chairman of the designated department certify that exceptional circumstances have impeded the candidate in the course and that it would be unjust to the candidate, having regard to the efforts made by the candidate to pursue the course, to limit the confirmed candidature to the maximum period referred to in sub-section (1) the Professorial Board may, on the recommendation of not less than ten of its members, extend the period of confirmed candidature beyond any maximum period referred to in sub-section (1). (3) The Professorial Board may exercise the power conferred by this section before or after the expiration of any period of confirmed candidature. 5. (1) During the combined period of probationary and confirmed candidature a candidate shall devote at least twelve consecutive months of candidature to the course of advanced study and research in the University. (2) In exceptional circumstances the Professorial Board may approve for the purposes of sub-section (1) non-consecutive periods which in the aggregate amount to at least twelve months, and a candidate who devotes that aggregate period to the course of advanced study and research in the University shall be deemed to have complied with sub-section (1). 6. (1) A person including a full-time candidate may be accepted by the Professorial Board as a part-time candidate if the Professorial Board is satisfied that any occupation in which that person is engaged leaves that person substantially free to pursue the course under the direction of a department of the University.

51 (2) A part-time candidate shall pursue the course for such periods of probationary candidature and confirmed candidature as the Professorial Board shall determine. (3) In the application of section 3 in relation to a part-time candidate— (a) in sub-sections 3(1) and 3(4) the expression "twenty-four months" shall be substituted for the expression "twelve months"; (b) in sub-section 3(2) the expression "twenty-one months" shall be substituted for the expression "nine months"; (c) in sub-sections 3(5) and 3(6) the expression "forty-eight months" shall be substituted for the expression "twenty-four months"; and (d) in sub-sections 3(7) and 3(8) the expression "forty-eight months" shall be substituted for the expression "twenty-four months" and the expression "twenty-four months" shall be substituted for the expression "twelve months". (4) In the application of sub-section 4(1 ) in relation to a part-time candidate the expression "one-hundred and twenty" shall be substituted for the expression "sixty" wherever it occurs. (5) In the application of section 5 in relation to a part-time candidate the expression "twenty-four" shall be substituted for the expression "twelve". (6) A part-time candidate may apply to the Professorial Board to become a full-time candidate and the Professorial Board may permit the candidate so to do on such terms and conditions as it sees fit consistent with the purposes of the provisions of this regulation relating to full-time candidates. 7. (1) Regulation 4.6 shall apply in relation to a candidate subject to the following provisions. (2) A candidate may present a thesis for the degree of doctor of Philosophy— (a) not earlier than one month before the expiration of the period of the confirmed candidature; and (b) not later than the expiration of the period of the confirmed candidature including any period for which it was extended. (3) A candidate shall present in the form prescribed by the Professorial Board such summaries of the thesis as the Professorial Board prescribes. (4) A candidate shall state generally in a preface to the thesis and specifically in notes— (a) the sources from which the candidate's information is derived; and (b) the extent to which the candidate has used the work of others and in general terms the portions of the work which the candidate claims as original. (5) A candidate who presents a thesis based on work carried out in collaboration with another person shall indicate the candidate's own share of the work. (6) A candidate may not present as the candidate's thesis any work for which a degree, diploma or licence or similar distinction has been conferred on or granted to the candidate in this or another University or institution but the candidate will not be precluded from incorporating such work in whole or in part in the thesis if— (a) the candidate has been granted, on the recommendation of the chairman of the designated department, permission by the Professorial Board so to do; and (b) the candidate indicates in the thesis the part of the previous work which has been so incorporated. (7) There shall be a panel of two examiners who are or have been, within the five years previous to their appointment, actively associated with— (a) a university; (b) an institution of higher learning; or (c) a research institution approved for the purpose of this section by the Professorial Board, at least one of which examiners shall be external to the University. (8) The chairman of the designated department, not being an examiner, shall act as chairman of the panel. (9) The supervisor of the candidate shall not be appointed as an examiner. (10) If the chairman of the designated department is an examiner, the Council, after consultation with the Professorial Board, shall appoint a member of the full-time teaching or research staff of the University to act as chairman of the panel. (11) The chairman of the panel shall not have a vote. (12) A third examiner appointed pursuant to Regulation 4.6.3(3) shall be external to the University. (1 3) If a second and final examination of a candidate's thesis is required, the examiners appointed for this purpose shall be the persons who previously served as examiners for the first examination, unless the Professorial Board determines otherwise. 8. A candidate whose thesis has been judged to be satisfactory by the examiners and who has fulfilled the prescribed conditions may be admitted to the degree of doctor of Philosophy. 9. (1) Where a thesis has been judged unsatisfactory by the examiners but the examiners

52 have recommended that the candidate (whether full-time or part-time) be given an opportunity to re-submit the thesis for re-examination, the Professorial Board may, notwithstanding section 4 sub-section (1), upon application to the Professorial Board extend the candidate's confirmed candidature for a period immediately ensuing and not exceeding twelve months and thereupon the candidate shall be required to re-submit the thesis for a second examination within the period for which the confirmed candidature is so extended. (2) Notwithstanding sub-section (1), if the chairman of the designated department certifies that exceptional circumstances— (a) are likely to delay the candidate in preparing the thesis for re-submission; or (b) have prevented the candidate from so preparing the thesis and that it would be unjust to the candidate, having regard to the efforts made by the candidate to prepare the thesis, to limit the confirmed candidature to the period referred to in sub-section (1) the Professorial Board may, on the recommendation of not less than ten of its members, further extend the period of confirmed candidature beyond the period referred to in sub-section (1). (3) The Professorial Board may exercise the power conferred by sub-section (2) before or after the expiration of the period referred to in sub-section (1). 10. In the computation of periods of candidature under this regulation, the only period which shall not be counted shall be any period for which a candidate was granted leave of absence from his course 11. The Professorial Board may on the recommendation of the chairman of the designated department— (a) require a candidate as part of the course to attend such lectures and practical work as the Professorial Board determines; or

(b) subject to section 5 grant permission for the candidate to be absent from the University for such periods not exceeding twelve months in any one instance as the Professorial Board determines if the chairman of the designated department recommends that it is essential for the candidate's advanced study and research and the Professorial Board is satisfied that supervision of the candidate's work satisfactory to it can be maintained; or (c) in special circumstances grant to a candidate leave of absence from the course in periods of whole months. 12. In this regulation— (a) "department of the University" means any department within the meaning of Statute 2.25 and any other institution which the Council may determine to be a department for the purposes of this regulation; and (b) "chairman" in relation to a department which is not within Statute 2.25 means the person designated by the Council as the chairman of that department for the purposes of this regulation. 13. Regulation 2.5А shall not apply when the Professorial Board exercises any discretion conferred by sub-sections 3(3) and 3(8) and sections 4 and 6. 14. Nothing in this regulation precludes the appointment of a chairman of a department as supervisor. 15. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this regulation where a late application for probationary candidature, confirmed candidature or an extension of confirmed candidature is received by the Registrar, the Professorial Board may ante-date the commencing date of probationary candidature, of confirmed candidature or of an extension of a confirmed candidature (as the case may be) so that the applicant is not adversely affected by the delay but the ante-dating shall not exceed two months prior to the date of the receipt by the Registrar of the application unless the Professorial Board is satisfied that the delay was not caused by any omission of the candidate. 16. The Professorial Board shall prescribe the time within which— (a) application for confirmation of candidature may be made by— (i) full-time probationary candidates; and (ii) part-time probationary candidates; (b) such application shall be considered by the Professorial Board; and (c) application may be made under section 9 for an extension of confirmed candidature in order to re-submit a thesis. 17. A candidate for the degree of doctor of Philosophy who was enrolled as such before the coming into operation of this regulation and who qualifies in accordance with the regulations in force on the 31st day of December 1976 may be admitted to the degree of doctor of Philosophy.

53 REGULATION4.6-EXAMINATION OF ТН ESES FOR HIGHER DEGREES 1. Where it is provided that a candidate for any degree of doctor or master or for a postgraduate diploma may submit a thesis' or work, the Council may require that thesis or work to be in the English language. The candidate shall furnish to the Registrar three typewritten or printed copies of the thesis or work, the form of which shall be in accordance with recommendations made from time to time by the Professorial Board.2

2. No person shall be permitted to submit for examination a thesis or work for any degree of master or doctor or for a postgraduate diploma— (a) if it is substantially similar to a thesis or work previously examined and rejected in the University or in any other university or institution unless in special circumstances the Professorial Board in the case of the degree of doctor of Philosophy or other degrees for which the Professorial Board is directly responsible, or the appropriate faculty or board of studies, in the case of other higher degrees, gives permission; (b) if it is substantially similar to a thesis or work upon which that person has qualified for a degree in the University or any other university or institution; (c) while a thesis or work substantially similar thereto remains submitted for examination— (i) for any other degree of the University, or (ii) in any other university, or (iii) in any other institution.

з. (1) Each examiner shall assess the quality of the thesis or work and shall make a report in writing containing the examiner's recommendation as to the result of the examination. Before making their several reports the examiners may consult together. Any examiner may request the chairman of examiners to obtain from the candidate clarification of any part of the thesis or work and the chairman shall take steps to obtain such clarification from the candidate. (2) If one or more of the examiners request the chairman of examiners to do so, the chairman shall require the candidate to answer any questions concerning the subject of the thesis or work. The chairman, after consultation with such examiner or examiners shall determine whether the answers are to be in writing or viva voce. (3) Where there are two examiners and they do not agree, the chairman may require them to consult with one another in an effort to resolve the issue. If the chairman judges that the two examiners are unable to agree, a third examiner shall be appointed by the Council in accordance with the provisions of Statute 3.12.3. (4) Subject to the provisions of this section the result of the examination shall be in accordance with the decision of a majority of the examiners. 4. The Registrar shall deposit in the library of the University a copy of the thesis or work submitted by any candidate who has satisfied the examiners.

' The Professorial Воа rd is of opinion that no candidate for a higher degree should be allowed to submit for examination a work f оr wh,ch a degree has been awarded in this or any other university. except as preliminary or supplementary evidence of the candidate's ability

u Recommendations lor the format of theses— 4 (i) Generally should be on /nternational Standard Paper Size .4 (measuring 297mm к 210mm) but. where this is not suitable. on foolscap size paper measuring i 3n. x Bin (ii) Sheetsshouid be numbered consecutiveiy and ciеаtiу interpoiated sheets should be marked distinctiy—e g 69(x). or as the case may require. (w) Folding diagrams or charts should be arranged so as to open out to the top and right. (iv) There should be a margin on the left hand side of at least 1' m uniform on all sheets (v) At least one copy. for deposit in the library. must be bound in such a manner that it will stand on the shell as a book . All copies must have the payes firmly fastened within a cover. Spang back folders must not be used (vi) A tale page must show the nye of the thesis, the degree lor which it is submitted. and the ru// name of the author. (vu) The name of the author must be on the spine and it is desirable to show there also the title, abbreviated if necessary.

54 APPENDIX

CONTINUING EDUCATION COURSES

The Office for Continuing Education was established to develop the University's role in Continuing Education. Courses provided by the Office include ones of interest to specific professional, vocational or community groups and others closely related to the disciplines taught within the University. In making these courses available. it is the University's intention that persons who wish to pursue an educational interest or, who wish to enrich their earlier education, should be able to experience tertiary education in the area of their interest. Some Continuing Education courses have been specially developed to meet needs of particular professional, vocational or community groups and include short refresher courses, seminars and summer schools. Other courses have been developed as courses of general interest and are based on a wide range of disciplines covered within the normal teaching of the University. Details of all Continuing Education courses are available from the Continuing Education Office and potential students should enquire there concerning the range and availability of such courses. It should be noted that the taking of Continuing Education courses is unlikely to be of direct assistance in gaining selection for normal degree or diploma courses and studies taken within these courses will not be credited subsequently towards a degree or diploma. In all cases, departments offering courses reserve the right to exclude applicants on any of the following grounds: 1. Inadequate prior qualifications, including failure to satisfy any pre-requisites which may apply.

2. Lack of space in the course concerned. Intending students must complete an application form, obtainable in December and January from the Office for Continuing Education or faculty offices, by 31 January 1978. Successful applicants will be notified and will be required to complete enrolment details, including payment of fees, with the Office for Continuing Education.

The Office for Continuing Education which is situated on the ground floor of the Appointments Board Building, is responsible only for enrolments in Continuing Education courses. (University extension 6827). Information about other methods of enrolment for degree studies including additional subjects, complementary courses, admission adeundem statum, etc. are all dealt with in faculty offices and enrolments are made through the Students' Records Office.

55 Printed at The Dominion Press, North Blackburn, Victoria

Library Digitised Collections

Author/s: The University of Melbourne

Title: Handbook: Faculty of Arts 1978

Date: 1978

Persistent Link: http://hdl.handle.net/11343/128877